JP7838866B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some conventional gaming machines were capable of assigning game value to players based on the outcome of their gameplay.

Some of these gaming machines allowed for the game's progress to be stopped according to the value of the game's value assigned to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2023-256671

However, the gaming machines described in the above-mentioned patent document had a problem in that the enjoyment of the game decreased due to the cessation of game progression control.

This invention was made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of the game.

To solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired based on the fulfillment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the start opening) ; a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a pending memory; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of updating specific information (MY) according to the amount of value of the gaming value assigned to the player, and stopping the progress control of the game when the specific information becomes a specific value (MY = 95000); and a display means ( The system includes an image display device) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner, wherein the performance control means is controllable to a first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A) and a second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B), is capable of displaying a background image during the execution of the variable performance, is capable of executing a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (temporary stop sound, pseudo-symbol derivation sound) during a stop suggestion period that suggests the performance symbols will be stopped during the variable performance, and is capable of executing a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, and the first It is possible to display different types of background images during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode, and it is possible to perform the pre-notification in the same manner (design of the pre-notification image CZ, character arrangement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode , and the performance symbols include a first symbol (performance symbols such as 1 to 9 or the alphabet) and a second symbol different from the first symbol (pseudo-symbols, etc.), and in the first performance mode, a specific sound is output during the stop indication period that suggests the first symbol will be displayed in a stopped state, and in the second performance mode It is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state different from the specific sound output during the stop indication period in the first performance mode, it is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period different for the losing variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the losing variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, and it is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state in the first performance mode and the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state in the second performance mode common .

According to this invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of games.

This is a front view of the gaming machine. This is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of a gaming machine. This is a perspective view of the gaming machine, excluding the glass frame. This is a diagram of the back of the gaming machine. This is a block diagram of the gaming machine and its peripheral equipment. This is a block diagram of the gaming machine and its peripheral equipment. This diagram shows the memory maps of the main control unit and the frame control unit. This diagram shows the relationship between the gaming area and the information area. This is a system configuration diagram of a gaming machine and its peripheral equipment. This diagram specifically explains the flow of information transmission and reception. This diagram shows the jackpot determination table for special symbols. This is a diagram showing the special symbol determination table. This is a diagram showing the special pattern variation determination table. This figure shows the pre-determination table. This is a diagram showing a modified example of the specifications of a gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a modified example of the specifications of a gaming machine. This diagram shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board and the frame control board. This diagram shows the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. This diagram shows the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. This diagram shows the details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. This diagram shows the details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. This diagram shows the details of the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. This diagram shows a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. This diagram shows a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. This diagram shows the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables gameplay after the gaming machine has been started. This diagram shows the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board, which are necessary for gameplay to begin after the gaming machine has been started. This diagram shows the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine enters a settings change/settings confirmation state after startup. This diagram shows the communication procedure that the main control board uses to determine if a communication line has been lost. This diagram shows the communication procedure by which the frame control board determines that the communication line has been disconnected. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board. This flowchart shows the process for changing the settings of the main control board. This flowchart shows the process for changing the settings of the main control board. This flowchart shows the RWM clearing process for the main control board. This flowchart shows the process for verifying the settings of the main control board. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing for the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the input control processing of the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the input processing for the first start port detection switch on the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the special electrical control processing of the main control board. This flowchart shows the special pattern memory determination process on the main control board. This flowchart shows the acquisition limit management process of the main control board. This flowchart shows the process for updating the increment counter on the main control board. This flowchart shows the activation determination process for the acquisition limit device on the main control board. This flowchart shows the error control process of the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the HC/tampering monitoring information management process of the main control board. This diagram shows a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. This diagram shows the notification of gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. This diagram shows the gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. This diagram shows the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. This diagram shows hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit. This figure shows the fraud detection status 2 and 3 of the hall control fraud monitoring information. This diagram shows the gaming information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring system. This diagram shows the counting notification transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. This diagram shows the loan notification transmitted from the dedicated unit to the frame control board. This figure shows the loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. This diagram shows the basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. This figure shows the startup sequence 1 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the startup sequence 2 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the amusement machine information notification sequence 1 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the amusement machine information notification sequence 2 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the counting notification sequence 1 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the counting notification sequence 2 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the loan notification sequence 1 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This figure shows the loan notification sequence 2 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. This diagram shows the recovery sequence in the event of a disconnection of the dedicated PIF connecting the frame control board and the dedicated unit. This diagram shows the notification sequence for the frame control board and dedicated unit regarding hall control and fraud monitoring information. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the frame control board. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing for the frame control board. This flowchart shows the ball removal operation process of the frame control board. This flowchart shows the process of receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board. This flowchart shows the processing of receiving gaming machine information on the frame control board. This flowchart shows the process for updating the number of game balls on the frame control board. This flowchart shows the error control process for the frame control board. This flowchart shows the severe error notification control process for the frame control board. This flowchart shows the hardware error notification control process for the frame control board. This flowchart shows the minor error notification control process for the frame control board. This diagram shows the display content and display priority of the frame control display when various notification events occur. This flowchart shows the process for calculating display performance information for the frame control board. This flowchart shows the process for calculating gaming machine performance information on the frame control board. This flowchart shows the gaming machine information notification process on the frame control board. This flowchart shows the game ball counting process on the frame control board. This is a flowchart showing the game ball dispensing process of the frame control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when firing is permitted after a setting change or RWM clear has been performed on the main control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when firing is permitted or denied after power is restored on the main control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when launch is permitted or denied after the settings have been confirmed on the main control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when an irrecoverable error occurs on the main control board and game progress control is not performed. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the main control board controls the progress of the game or when the control of the game's progress is restricted. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the game ball count is not cleared or is cleared after receiving the game machine installation information on the frame control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the frame control board receives gaming machine information. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board. This diagram shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the frame control board, resulting in either a firing denial or firing permission. This diagram shows the processing sequence when display performance information is calculated and displayed on the frame control board. This diagram shows the processing order when the frame control board calculates the performance information of the gaming machine. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the frame control board performs amusement machine information notification processing. This diagram shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls owned by the player is counted on the frame control board or when the counting is completed. This diagram shows the processing sequence when a loan notification is received by the frame control board and a loan process is initiated, or when a loan process is not initiated. This is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control unit. This flowchart shows the timer interrupt processing for the performance control unit. This flowchart shows the input control process of the performance control unit. This diagram illustrates the overview of the custom settings for visual effects. This flowchart shows the pre-reading process for the performance control unit. This is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process of the performance control unit. This figure shows the table for determining the final display mode of icons. This diagram shows the process for determining the continuous preview effects in the performance control unit. This figure shows an example of a table for determining the type of consecutive notification for performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state). This figure shows an example of a table for determining the type of consecutive notification for performance modes D to F (specific game states). This figure shows an example of a table for determining the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) scenario for performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state). This figure shows an example of a table for determining the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) scenario for performance modes D to F (specific game states). This figure shows the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C. This diagram shows the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to F. This is a flowchart showing the process for determining the jackpot announcement effect in the performance control unit. This figure shows an example of a pre-reach notification determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state). This figure shows an example of a pre-reach notification determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game states). This figure shows an example of a table for determining dialogue preview patterns. This figure shows an example of a step-up notification pattern determination table. This figure shows an example of a table for determining pseudo-consecutive win patterns. This figure shows an example of a table for determining development sequences. This figure shows an example of a cut-in animation pattern determination table for animation modes A to C (normal gameplay state). This figure shows an example of a cut-in animation pattern determination table for animation modes D to F (specific game states). This figure shows an example of a table for determining the final performance pattern. This figure shows an example of a table for determining the re-draw animation pattern. This figure shows an example of a table for determining confirmed animation patterns. This diagram shows the process of updating the performance mode. This diagram shows examples of display effects for each performance mode. This figure shows examples of variations for each performance mode. This diagram shows the type of notification event, the priority order of the notification events, and the notification method for the notification events. This diagram shows the type of notification event, the priority order of the notification events, and the notification method for the notification events. This diagram shows the type of notification event, the priority order of the notification events, and the notification method for the notification events. This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for each event when the game ball count is cleared and when the power is turned on. This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for each event when the game ball count is cleared and when the power is turned on. This is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable display device when the number of game balls is reset and when the power is restored. This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). This diagram shows the relationship between the glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball removal operation. This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies, etc.). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies, etc.). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies, etc.). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies, etc.). This diagram shows the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies, etc.). This figure shows the information output and notification methods for various events. This figure shows the information output and notification methods for various events. This diagram shows the visual effects displayed when various events occur. This diagram shows the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the pre-announcement type effects. This diagram shows how the value of the increment counter is notified. This diagram shows the visual effects displayed when various events occur. This is a diagram explaining the customer waiting strategy. This is a diagram (1/3) showing the advance notification. This is a diagram (2/3) showing the advance notification. This is a diagram (3/3) showing the advance notification. This figure shows an example of when the winning limit device is activated during the customer waiting animation. This figure shows an example of the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device for each situation. This figure shows an example of the operation notification mode of the acquisition limit device for each situation. This figure shows an example of what happens when power is restored while information is being output. This figure shows an example of the timing of information output for each situation. This diagram shows what happens when an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device has been activated. This diagram shows what happens when an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device has been activated. This figure shows an example of a presentation where the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while the machine is in a waiting state. This figure shows an example of a game animation where the number of game balls owned by the player is counted during the animation. This figure shows an example of a presentation where the number of game balls owned by the player is counted after the acquisition limit device has been activated. This is a timing chart showing the start of variation effect pattern 5. This is a timing chart showing the end of variation animation pattern 5. This is a timing chart showing what happens when the acquisition limit device is activated while the variable performance pattern 5 is being executed. This is a timing chart showing what happens when the acquisition limit device is activated while the variable performance pattern 5 is being executed. This is a timing chart showing the end of variation animation pattern 8. This diagram shows an example of the sound effects (sound effects for generating pseudo-symbols) during the variation animation. This diagram shows an example of a sound effect (temporary stop sound) during a variation animation. This figure shows an example of an operation notification mode for the acquisition limit device. This is a timing chart showing the end of variation animation pattern 1. This diagram shows examples of effects during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop sounds for each effect mode). This is a timing chart showing what happens when the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of variation performance pattern 1. This is a timing chart showing the end of variation animation pattern 6. This figure shows an example of a variation animation (variation animation pattern 6). This is a timing chart showing what happens when the acquisition limit device is activated while the variable performance pattern 6 is being executed. This figure shows an example of an operation notification mode for the acquisition limit device. This diagram shows an example of a visual effect during a variation animation (reach line animation). This diagram shows an example of a visual effect during a variation animation (reach line animation). This is a timing chart showing everything from the customer waiting sequence to the demo sequence. This is a timing chart showing the start of a jackpot game from the stop display of the SPSP Reach Variation (jackpot). This is a timing chart showing the beginning and end of a jackpot game. This is a timing chart showing the time from power restoration to the execution of the customer waiting animation and customer waiting demo animation. This is a timing chart showing when the acquisition limit device is activated during rainbow illumination. This is a timing chart showing what happens when the acquisition limit device is activated during an abnormality notification. This figure shows an example of a performance mode that changes after the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device has been given. This figure shows an example of a performance mode that changes after the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device has been given. This figure shows an example of a performance mode that changes after the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device has been given. This figure shows an example of a sequence of events when the pre-activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence). This figure shows an example of a sequence of events where a pre-announcement image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence). This diagram shows an example of a presentation when the pre-activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins during the validity period of the dialogue予告演出 (pre-announcement presentation). This figure shows an example of a presentation where a pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during a dialogue announcement. This figure shows an example of a sequence where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the development sequence of the SP Reach variation sequence. This figure shows an example of a sequence where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the development sequence of the SP Reach variation sequence. This figure shows an example of a sequence where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the development sequence of the SP Reach variation sequence. This figure shows an example of a presentation where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the valid operation period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation. This figure shows an example of a presentation where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the valid operation period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation. This figure shows an example of a presentation where the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the valid operation period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation. This figure shows an example of a presentation when the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device ends during the valid operation period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation. This diagram shows an example of a sequence of events when the acquisition limit device is activated during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence). This diagram shows an example of how the acquisition limit device is activated during the dialogue announcement sequence. This figure shows an example of a cut-in animation when the acquisition limit device is activated during the validity period of the cut-in animation. This diagram shows the duration of various fluctuation effects for each performance mode. This is a diagram showing a device that performs rainbow emission. This is a timing chart showing a comparison of rainbow luminescence. This is a timing chart showing a comparison of rainbow luminescence. This diagram shows the details of the rainbow light emission during the fluctuation effect. This diagram shows the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game. This diagram shows the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game. This is an example of information related to gaming media that is displayed in a rainbow pattern and information that is not displayed in a rainbow pattern. This figure shows an example of a pre-announcement being displayed during a jackpot game. This is a simplified diagram showing the light-emitting regions of each light-emitting means. This diagram illustrates the emission colors of different regions in a rainbow emission. This figure shows an example of rainbow emission (moving emission 1). This figure shows an example of rainbow emission (moving emission 2). This figure shows an example of rainbow emission (radiant emission). This diagram shows the rainbow emission patterns under different conditions.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of the gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using Figures 1 to 4. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 excluding the glass frame 4, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 3, and a game board 5 in which a game area 5a is formed, through which game balls (game media) flow. The game board 5 is made of transparent resin.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-to-back direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached to the lower front surface. It is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement parlor via fastening members (e.g., nails or fasteners).

The inner frame 3 has a recessed, open-front gaming board mounting section 25 for mounting the gaming board 5 from the front. It is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end (left side in Figure 3) in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as the pivot point. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is rotated relative to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the inner frame 3 is exposed, allowing for maintenance of various devices located on the back side of the inner frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front of the inner frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction (left side in Figure 3), covering the front of the game board mounting portion 25 of the inner frame 3. It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as the pivot point. Therefore, by rotating the glass frame 4 relative to the inner frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the inner frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, opening in the front-to-back direction. A transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to close the opening 8 from the rear. This opening 8 and the transparent member 8a allow visibility of the game area 5a of the game board 5, which is attached to the game board mounting section 25 of the inner frame 3. Furthermore, multiple LEDs 5b, serving as a lighting device 76 for the game board, are provided on both the front and back surfaces of the game area 5a, allowing for decoration of the game area 5a during variation animations, jackpot games, and customer waiting animations (standby, demo).

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an operation unit 11 equipped with various operating devices (such as the performance button device 16 and selection button device 18 described later), a launching operation device 13 capable of launching game balls, and a third image display device 72 (left sub-display device) and a fourth image display device 73 (right sub-display device) consisting of liquid crystal displays.

The audio output devices 9 are installed at two locations on the top and two locations on the bottom of the glass frame 4, spaced apart from each other, and are designed to provide sound effects (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. Furthermore, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are installed around the opening 8, and provide lighting effects by changing the direction of light emission and the color of the light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 also include an alert LED 10a that is controlled to light up when the inner frame 3 or glass frame 4 is opened, a top lamp 10b that is controlled to light up when a predetermined effect is executed, and a frame effect lamp 10c that is controlled to light up during variable effects, jackpot games, and customer waiting effects (standby, demo).

The operation unit 11 has a shape that bulges forward. A player-operable performance button device 16 is provided in the central part of the upper surface, and a player-operable selection button device 18 is provided in the left part of the upper surface. Between the performance button device 16 and the selection button device 18, and further back than the selection button device 18, a player-operable counting button 20 is provided. Behind the counting button 20, a game ball count indicator 13a is provided to display the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player.

Furthermore, a storage area (placement section) for items (mobile phone, drinks, cigarettes, etc.) used by the player to secure (play) the game machine 1 may be provided in a position within the operation unit 11 that does not overlap with the game ball count display 135 (for example, a position slightly to the right on the upper surface of the operation unit).

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 that can be pressed by the player, a performance button detection switch 17a (see Figure 5) that detects the press operation on the performance button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see Figure 5) for driving the performance button 17, allowing the player to input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 17 is capable of performing a light effect by illuminating the effect button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5), in a predetermined light emission pattern (e.g., white, red, rainbow). Furthermore, it can move vertically between a standby position (origin position) located below and an effect position located above, driven by the driving force of the button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b. The origin position is detected by a button position detection sensor (not shown). In addition, the effect can be performed by vibrating in a predetermined vibration pattern, driven by the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is also part of the button drive device 17b.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a joystick 19 that the player can operate in the up, down, left, and right directions, and a joystick detection switch 19a (see Figure 5) for detecting operations on the joystick 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The counting button 20 is equipped with a counting button switch 20a for detecting pressure applied to the counting button 20. When operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count indicator 135, is counted (linked to identification information stored on a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170, described later, and stored and settled on the card itself or in the hall computer, described later).

The launching device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launching handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see Figure 5) that detects when the player's hand is touching the launching handle 15, and a launching volume 15b (see Figure 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance changes depending on the rotation angle of the launching handle 15. It is possible to perform a lighting effect by illuminating the launching handle light-emitting device (not shown), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5), in a predetermined lighting pattern.

Furthermore, when a launch permission signal is input from both the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (described later), when the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and when the launch volume 15b detects that the launch handle 15 is being rotated, the ball feeding unit 91 (described later) is driven, and game balls are sent one by one to the launching platform of the launching device 92 (described later), and then launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the launching device 92. In this embodiment, the sending of game balls to the launching platform and the subsequent launch of the game balls operate as a single set. Therefore, even if the player releases their hand from the launch handle 15 at the timing when the game balls are sent to the launching platform (before the game balls are launched), the game balls will still be launched from the launching platform.

The third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73 display various effects and game-related information according to the progress of the game. Specifically, they display volume adjustment images for adjusting the volume of game sounds output from the sound output device 9, light intensity adjustment images for adjusting the light intensity of various lighting devices and various image displays, and customization images for customizing game effects.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a recessed game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5 through a front opening, a ball circulation mechanism 90 for collecting game balls launched from the launcher 92 into the game area 5a for reuse within the game machine 1 and supplying them back to the launcher 92, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state, a glass frame opening detection switch 31a (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame opening detection switch 31b (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3, and a radio wave detection sensor 54a (see Figure 5) for detecting abnormal radio waves.

The ball circulation mechanism 90 includes a launching device 92 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a ball feeding unit 91 for sending game balls one by one to the launching platform of the launching device 92, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting and polishing the supplied game balls, a ball passage unit 94 for allowing game balls that have flowed down the game area 5a to flow down to the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95, and for allowing game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to flow down to the entrance of the ball feeding unit 91, and a foul ball passage unit 93 for allowing game balls launched by the launching device 92 but that did not fly into the game area 5a and returned (foul balls) to merge with the ball passage unit 94.

The ball feeding unit 91 is equipped with a subtraction inlet switch 91b (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls that have flowed down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a (see Figure 5) for sending the game balls detected by the subtraction inlet switch 91b to the launching device 92, and a subtraction outlet switch 91c (see Figure 5) for detecting the game balls sent to the launching device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a.

The launching device 92 includes a launching platform (not shown) where game balls sent from the ball feeding unit 91 are held, a launching platform switch 92a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls held on the launching platform, and a launching solenoid 92b (see Figure 5) for operating a launching hammer (not shown) to launch the game balls held on the launching platform.

The foul ball passage unit 93 is equipped with a foul ball passage (not shown) for diverting game balls that have returned without entering the game area 5a (foul balls) to the ball passage unit 94, and a foul ball switch 93a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage.

The rear portion of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a prize ball passage (not shown) for collecting and flowing down game balls that have entered various prize slots in the game area 5a, a prize ball passage count switch 94a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls (prize balls) flowing down the prize ball passage, a non-prize ball passage (not shown) for collecting and flowing down game balls that have flowed into the out slots without entering any prize slots, a non-prize ball passage count switch 94b (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-prize ball passage, a confluence passage (not shown) for confluence game balls that have flowed down the prize ball passage, game balls that have flowed down the non-prize ball passage, and game balls that have flowed down the foul ball passage and supply them to the lifting and polishing device 95, and a lift-down switch 94d (see Figure 5) at the downstream end of the confluence passage for detecting game balls being supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95.

Furthermore, the front portion of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a lifting ball passage (not shown) for supplying game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to the ball feeding unit 91, a lift-up switch 94c (see Figure 5) at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage for detecting game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95, an excess sensor 94e (see Figure 5) located in the middle section of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the lift-up switch 94c) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls waiting in the lifting ball passage (circulating game balls), an excess sensor 94f (see Figure 5) located in the downstream section of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting an insufficient (shortage) of game balls waiting in the lifting ball passage (circulating game balls), and a ball removal lever (not shown) for removing game balls from the game machine through a ball removal opening (not shown) located at the downstream end of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94f).

The lifting and polishing device 95 includes a lift section (not shown) for lifting game balls using the driving force of a motor, a lift origin switch 95b (not shown) for confirming the origin position of the lift section, polishing material (not shown) for polishing the game balls lifted by the lift section, and a polishing material confirmation switch 95a (not shown) for detecting that the polishing material is installed.

The locking mechanism 27 is located on the right side of the game board mounting section 25, with the front end of the cylinder, where the keyhole is formed, exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Inserting a special key into the cylinder's keyhole and rotating it in one direction releases the lock on the inner frame 3, allowing it to be opened and closed. Rotating it in the other direction releases the lock on the glass frame 4, allowing it to be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5. A game area 5a is formed in the area enclosed by these inner and outer rails, allowing game balls to flow down. A ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 to guide game balls launched by the launching device 92 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the downstream end of the game area 5a to guide the flowing game balls out of the game area (to the ball passage unit 94).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, known as a center case, is provided to restrict the entry of game balls into its interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the game area 5a into a left-side game area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right-side game area where game balls launched with a second launch force (stronger than the first) flow down. The left-side and right-side game areas are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the left-side game area into the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41, causing them to flow downwards.

On the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, three general prize slots 43 are provided at intervals, allowing game balls to be entered at all times. On the lower right side of the decorative frame 40, one general prize slot 43 is provided, also allowing game balls to be entered at all times. When a game ball enters one of these general prize slots 43, it is detected by the general prize slot detection switch 43a (see Figure 6). A predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5) are added to the player's game ball count (game value) as prize balls (awarded game bonuses), and the game ball count displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 and the frame control indicator 125 (described later) is updated.

One of the three general prize slots 43 located slightly to the left and below the decorative frame 40 (the leftmost one) also serves as the starting area for the regular symbols. When a game ball enters this general prize slot 43 and is detected by the general prize slot detection switch 43a, the right to determine whether or not to perform the auxiliary game (opening the second starting slot 47, described later) is granted (regular symbol judgment information, described later, is stored).

Below the stage section 42, a first start opening 45 (the starting entry area for the first special symbol) is provided, into which game balls can be entered at any time. When a game ball that has entered this first start opening 45 is detected by the first start opening detection switch 45a (see Figure 6), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are added to the number of game balls owned by the player (game value) as prize balls (granting of game benefits), and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 (described later) is updated. Furthermore, the right to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the right and below the first starting opening 45, there is a variable starting unit 46 that can be converted from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (enter the game) to an open state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (winning in the winning determination described later).

The variable starting unit 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for the game balls. It also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-rear direction, a second starting port 47 (the starting prize area for the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the second starting port opening/closing member 48, a second starting port detection switch 47a (see Figure 6) for detecting game balls that have entered the second starting port 47, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see Figure 6) for converting the second starting port 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 forward (prize entry restriction position) and converting the second starting port 47 to an open state by moving the second starting port opening/closing member 48 backward (prize entry allowance position).

Then, when a game ball enters the second start port 47, which has been opened during the auxiliary game described later, and is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a (see Figure 6), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 2 balls) are added to the number of game balls owned by the player as prize balls (granting of game benefits), and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 described later is updated. Furthermore, the right to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special symbol determination information described later is stored).

The right-hand game area, located to the right of the decorative frame 40, is equipped with a regular symbol gate 44 (a starting area for regular symbols) through which game balls can always pass. When a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44 and is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see Figure 6), no prize balls (game bonuses) are awarded. However, the right to determine whether or not to perform the auxiliary game (opening the second starting opening 47, described later) is granted (regular symbol judgment information, described later, is stored). The regular symbol gate 44 is designed to allow game balls to enter (pass through) more easily than the general prize opening 43, which also serves as the starting area for regular symbols.

Below the gate 44 in the diagram, there is a variable prize entry section 49 (variable prize entry device) that can be converted from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (enter the prize) to an open state where it is possible or easy for game balls to enter, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (that a prize has been determined in the prize-winning judgment).

The variable prize entry section 49 (variable prize entry device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for the game balls. It also includes a large prize entry opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction, a large prize entry opening 50 (entry area) that opens upward directly below the large prize entry opening opening/closing member 51, a large prize entry opening detection switch 50a (see Figure 6) for detecting game balls that have entered the large prize entry opening 50, and a large prize entry opening/closing solenoid 51b (see Figure 6) for converting the large prize entry opening 50 to a closed state by moving the large prize entry opening/closing member 51 forward (entry restriction position) and converting the large prize entry opening 50 to an open state by moving the large prize entry opening/closing member 51 backward (entry allowance position).

Then, during a jackpot game (described later), when the jackpot opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the jackpot opening 50 changes from a closed state to an open state, when the game balls that were flowing down the upper surface of the jackpot opening/closing member 51 or the game balls that reached the jackpot opening 50 enter the jackpot opening 50 and are detected by the jackpot opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are added to the number of game balls owned by the player as prize balls (granting of game benefits), and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 (described later) is updated.

Furthermore, game balls launched into the left-side game area either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then down through the stage section 42, either entering one of the three general prize entry points 43 or the first start entry point 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or flowing into the out entry point 39. Therefore, they will not enter (pass through) the general gate 44, general prize entry points 43, or variable prize entry point 49 (large prize entry point 50) located in the right-side game area.

Furthermore, game balls launched into the right-side game area flow down through the right-side channel of the decorative frame 40. Almost all of them pass through the general gate 44, and then either enter one of the general prize slots 43, the variable starter 46 (second starter 47), or the variable prize slot 49 (large prize slot 50) located in the right-side game area, or flow into the out slot 39. Therefore, they will not enter the general prize slots 43 or the first starter 45 located in the left-side game area.

On the back of the game board 5, there is a safe ball channel that receives and flows down safe balls (winning balls) that have entered the general prize entry opening 43, the first start opening 45, the second start opening 47, and the large prize entry opening 50, and then flows them into the prize ball channel of the ball channel unit 94. There is also an out ball channel that receives and flows down out balls (non-winning balls) that have entered the out opening 39, and then flows them into the non-winning ball channel of the ball channel unit 94. An out ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 6) for detecting out balls is provided at the downstream end of the out ball channel.

Outside the game area 5a, a main information display device 59 is provided, consisting of a first special symbol indicator 60, a second special symbol indicator 61, a regular symbol indicator 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, a second special symbol hold indicator 64, a regular symbol hold indicator 65, a round number indicator 66, a right-hand play indicator 67, a status confirmation indicator 68, and a game status indicator (not shown). This main information display device 59 is composed of multiple LEDs.

The first special symbol indicator 60 is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, which is performed based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting opening 45. The second special symbol indicator 61 is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, which is performed based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting opening 47. The normal symbol indicator 62 is a variable indicator for displaying (notifying) the result of the win determination for the normal symbol, which is performed based on the entry (passage, entry) of a game ball into the general winning opening 43 or normal symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for normal symbols.

The "jackpot determination" refers to the process of acquiring special symbol determination information (random values for jackpot determination, random values for special symbol determination, random values for reach determination, random values for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, and then determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special symbol determination information.

Then, when a jackpot is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate 45, the first special symbol indicator 60 displays a changing pattern of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed to indicate the determination result. Similarly, when a jackpot is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting gate 47, the second special symbol indicator 61 displays a changing pattern of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed to indicate the determination result.

The first special symbol indicator 60 and the second special symbol indicator 61 are each composed of eight LEDs, and the lighting pattern of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) during the display of each special symbol's variation. When the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the LEDs light up in a pattern indicating the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot pattern, losing pattern).

In this embodiment, "jackpot" refers to the state in which it is determined during the jackpot determination process that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed. "Jackpot game" refers to a game state advantageous to the player, where a round game is played for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 4 or 10 times) with intervals in between, in which the player is more likely to win prize balls.

Furthermore, while the maximum number of times the large prize slot 50 opens and the maximum opening time are predetermined for each round of gameplay, a round of gameplay ends if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize slot, even before reaching the maximum number of times or maximum opening time. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute any of several types of jackpot games (special games) that offer different degrees of advantage to the player.

The "win determination" process involves acquiring symbol determination information (random values for win determination, random values for symbol determination, random values for symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the entry (passage, entry) of game balls into the general prize entry area 43 or symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the symbols. Based on this information, a decision is made regarding whether or not to execute the auxiliary game. When a win determination is made, the symbol variation is displayed on the symbol indicator 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol stops to indicate the determination result.

The standard symbol display unit 62 is composed of three LEDs, which flash at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined sequence during the display of changing standard symbols. When the standard symbols are stopped, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of the auxiliary game judgment (winning or losing).

In this embodiment, "winning" refers to the state in which the auxiliary game determination process determines that an auxiliary game (winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to the game state in which the second start opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, while the maximum number of openings and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the auxiliary game (winning game) ends if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second starting port 47, even before reaching the maximum number of openings or maximum opening time. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variation display of the second special symbol are more likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with varying degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs and displays the number of first hold items (U1), which is the number of special symbol judgment information (first hold items) stored when a game ball enters the first start opening 45. It lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first hold items. While a maximum of four first hold items can be stored, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs and displays the number of special symbol judgment information (second hold) stored when a game ball enters the second start opening 47. It lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second holds. While a maximum of four second holds can be stored, it may be fewer or more than four, or the second hold may not be stored at all.

The regular symbol hold indicator 65 consists of two LEDs and displays the number of regular symbol hold information (regular symbol hold) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the regular symbol gate 44. It lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of regular symbol hold information. While a maximum of four regular symbol hold information is stored, it may be less than four, more than four, or even not stored at all.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display unit 60 and/or the second special symbol display unit 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, if a jackpot is determined, a number such as "3" or "7" can be stopped and displayed; if a loss is determined, "-" can be stopped and displayed; and during the variation display, the display can alternate between off and "-".

The round number indicator 66 consists of six LEDs and is used to display the number of rounds when a jackpot (special game) occurs. The LEDs begin to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game, remain lit throughout the jackpot game, and turn off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the jackpot game has 4 rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up; if the jackpot game has 10 rounds, all LEDs will light up.

The right-hand shooting indicator 67 consists of a single LED and is used to prompt the player to shoot the game ball towards the right-hand game area (so-called right-hand shooting). Basically, the LED does not light up during normal gameplay, but lights up during jackpot states (special gameplay), during the probability variation gameplay state described later, and during certain time-saving gameplay states.

The status indicator 68 consists of a single LED and is used to notify the player that the game is in a time-saving mode. The LED lights up when the time-saving mode begins and turns off when the time-saving mode ends.

The game status indicator (not shown) consists of a single LED and is used to notify the player that the game is in a probability variation state or a time-saving state. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the LED lights up if the game is in a probability variation state or a time-saving state. The LED then turns off when the probability variation state or time-saving state ends (the game status changes).

Inside the game area 5a, a sub-information display device 80 is provided, consisting of a sub-first variation indicator, a sub-second variation indicator, a sub-first hold indicator, a sub-second hold indicator, a sub-normal diagram variation indicator, a sub-normal diagram hold indicator, and a sub-right-hand shooting indicator. This sub-information display device 80 is basically composed of LEDs.

The first sub-variation indicator displays (notifies) whether the first special symbol is currently displaying a variation, and the second sub-variation indicator displays (notifies) whether the second special symbol is currently displaying a variation. Each indicator consists of a single LED. When the variation of the corresponding special symbol begins, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (0.5 seconds on → 0.5 seconds off), indicating that the first lamp symbol LZ1 or the second lamp symbol LZ2 is displaying a variation. The LED then turns off when the corresponding special symbol is displayed as stopped.

Furthermore, the results of the special symbol jackpot determination may be displayed on the sub-first and sub-second variation indicators. In this case, the LED should light up in the case of a jackpot and turn off in the case of a loss.

The sub-first hold indicator displays the number of first hold information items (first hold count), as described later. The sub-second hold indicator displays the number of second hold information items (second hold count), as described later. Each indicator consists of two LEDs. When the hold count is "0," both LEDs are off. When the hold count is "1," the left LED lights up and the right LED turns off. When the hold count is "2," both LEDs light up. When the hold count is "3," the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the hold count is "4," both LEDs blink.

The sub-symbol variation indicator is used to display (notify) the result of the winning lottery and consists of a single LED. When the variation of the regular symbols begins, the LED blinks (variation indicator) at predetermined intervals. When the regular symbols stop, the indicator that shows the result of the winning lottery (lit up for a win, off for a loss) stops.

Furthermore, in the sub-normal symbol variation indicator, it may be designed so that only whether or not a normal symbol variation is being displayed can be determined. This may involve the indicator flashing during normal symbol variation and lighting up or turning off when a stop indicator is displayed.

The sub-normal-image-hold indicator displays the number of normal-image-hold memories (normal-image-hold count) and consists of two LEDs. When the normal-image-hold count is "0," both LEDs are off. When the normal-image-hold count is "1," the left LED lights up while the right LED turns off. When the normal-image-hold count is "2," both LEDs light up. When the normal-image-hold count is "3," the left LED blinks while the right LED lights up. When the normal-image-hold count is "4," both LEDs blink.

The sub-right-hand shooting indicator is designed to encourage players to shoot the game ball towards the right-hand area of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand shooting), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during jackpot states (special gameplay) and time-saving states, and turns off during other game states.

A first image display device 70 (main display device), consisting of a liquid crystal display, is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. A second image display device 71 (central sub-display device), also consisting of a liquid crystal display, is provided below the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70. A movable performance device 77 for executing motion effects is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. These effects include a demo effect for waiting for the player, which is displayed when the special symbol variation display is not in progress; a variation effect involving the variation display of multiple effect symbols 70a, which is displayed when the special symbol variation display is in progress; a variation display (update variation) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol), which is displayed when the special symbol variation display is in progress; and a jackpot effect, which is displayed when a jackpot game is in progress.

Furthermore, the second image display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc., while the first image display device 70 is executing a variation effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is performed by moving vertically (up and down) between a standby position (lower position) located near the edge of the first image display device 70 and an effect position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. The movement direction of the second image display device 71 may also be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 includes a variable display area for displaying three performance symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol), and a display area for executing display effects (such as displaying a background image) according to the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance symbols 70a are composed of symbols representing the numbers "1" through "9," for example. They begin displaying the changing symbols in response to the start of the special symbol change display performed by the first special symbol display unit 60 and the second special symbol display unit 61, and display a stop indicator in response to the stop of the special symbol change display. Furthermore, the performance symbols 70a are, for example, decorated with the numbers "3" and "7" in red, the numbers "1," "5," and "9" in green, and the numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" in blue. Alternatively, symbols representing letters such as "A" through "F" may be used as the performance symbols 70a.

The display symbol 70a is designed to remain stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss pattern, jackpot pattern). The jackpot pattern is a combination of the same display symbol 70a, such as "777" or "555," while the miss pattern is any other pattern.

Furthermore, while the display of the changing symbols 70a is shown as vertical scrolling, it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch or rotate (rotate) in place.

Furthermore, during the display of the fluctuating symbols 70a (fluctuating animation), various animation images and movies, such as background images and characters, are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, depending on the result of the jackpot determination. This is intended to increase the player's anticipation of the jackpot game (special game) being played.

The first image display device 70 includes a first reserve icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first reserve icons (first reserve information) corresponding to the first reserve number (U1) in normal gameplay, a second reserve icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserve icons (second reserve information) corresponding to the second reserve number (U2) in time-saving gameplay, an icon display area 70C for displaying an icon (execution information) indicating that a variation effect is being executed, a first reserve number display area 70E for displaying the first reserve number (U1) numerically, and a second reserve number display area 70F for displaying the second reserve number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into the first display section (first area), the second display section (second area), the third display section (third area), and the fourth display section (fourth area), starting from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The first to fourth display sections display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold count (U1).

Specifically, within the first hold icon display area, the first display section of 70B displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed first; the second display section displays the first hold icon indicating the second hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed second; the third display section displays the first hold icon indicating the third hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed third; and the fourth display section displays the first hold icon indicating the fourth hold information for which the variation display of the first special symbol will be executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into the first display section (first area), the second display section (second area), the third display section (third area), and the fourth display section (fourth area) from left to right. The first to fourth display sections display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, within the second hold icon display area 70D, the first display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory where the variation display of the second special symbol will be executed first; the second display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory where the variation display of the second special symbol will be executed second; the third display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory where the variation display of the second special symbol will be executed third; and the fourth display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory where the variation display of the second special symbol will be executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a base image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed on or floating above this base image.

Specifically, as the first special symbol (performance symbol 70a) begins to change, the first reserve icons displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one towards the icon display area 70C. The first reserve icons displayed in the first display section of the first reserve icon display area 70B move (shift) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the corresponding icons. When the first special symbol (performance symbol 70a) finishes changing, these icons disappear (erase). In other words, an icon disappearance (erasure) animation is performed.

Furthermore, as the second special symbol (performance symbol 70a) begins to change, the second reserve icons displayed in the second reserve icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one towards the icon display area 70C. The second reserve icons displayed in the first display section of the second reserve icon display area 70D move (shift) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the corresponding icons. These icons disappear (erase) when the change in the second special symbol (performance symbol 70a) ends. Note that the icons may also be erased during the change in the special symbol (performance symbol 70a).

The movable performance device 77 has a first movable member 77a and a second movable member 77b that can be operated. During variable performances or jackpot game performances executed on the first image display device 70, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b can perform predetermined actions to execute performance effects. Furthermore, the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b are equipped with a panel lighting device 76 having multiple decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during the execution of performance effects.

Specifically, the first movable member 77a moves (up and down) between a standby position located near the edge (upper part) of the first image display device 70 and an animation position located near the center (lower part) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 77b moves between a standby position covering a portion of the front of the first movable member 77a and an animation position receding from the front of the first movable member 77a.

On the back of the game board 5, there is a main control device 110A containing a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game, an effect control device 130A containing an effect control board 130 that controls the effects of the game, and a transparent resin upper cover member 23 that covers the rear of the main control device 110A and the effect control device 130A. The main control device 110A and the effect control device 130A are arranged vertically side by side.

The rear of the performance control device 130A is equipped with a changeover switch 22 for switching between several adjustment modes, which set the reference values for the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various light sources (various lighting devices, various display devices). Under normal conditions, the rear of the device is covered by the upper cover member 23.

On the back of the inner frame 3, there is a frame control device 120A (value control device) which incorporates a frame control board 120 that controls the number of game balls (game value) owned by the game and controls information communication with the dedicated unit 170, a power supply device 160A which incorporates a power supply board 160, a loan device connection terminal board 100 which has a loan device connection terminal 101 for connecting dedicated wiring for communication with the dedicated unit 170 which is installed alongside the game machine 1, and a lower cover member 120B made of transparent resin that covers the upper rear of the frame control device 120A.

The power supply unit 160A is located near one end of the lower part of the inner frame 3 (the right side in Figure 4). A power cord outlet, with a power plug 161 at its tip, is provided on one side (the right side of the inner frame 3, near the pivot axis in Figure 4), along with a power switch 164 that can be turned on and off.

The frame control device 120A is positioned so that the power cord outlet and power switch of the power supply device 160A are exposed at the rear, and the frame control device 120A is positioned closer to the left or right side of the inner frame 3 (towards the left side of the inner frame 3, which is the free rotation end in Figure 4) and overlaps the rear of the power supply device 160A.

On the back side of the inner frame 3, above the power switch 164, is a loan device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with the dedicated unit 170. The loan device connection terminal board 100 is equipped with a loan device connection terminal 101 into which a connector, located at the end of a dedicated cable for communication with the dedicated unit 170, is inserted.

The frame control board 120, built into the frame control device 120A, is equipped with a frame control display 125 for displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, similar to the game ball count display 135 provided on the glass frame 4. However, the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 are offset from each other in the vertical and horizontal directions of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the game ball count display 135 is positioned closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, while the frame control display 125 is positioned lower than the game ball count display 135 and closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3.

In this way, by positioning the game ball count indicator 135, which is located on the front side of the gaming machine, closer to the pivot axis of the glass frame 4, even when a gaming parlor employee opens the inner frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the range of movement of the game ball count indicator 135 is reduced, preventing a drastic decrease in the visibility of the game ball count indicator 135. This improves the convenience for both gaming parlor employees and players when checking the display contents of the game ball count indicator 135.

Furthermore, because the frame control indicator 125, located on the back side of the gaming machine, is positioned closer to the free-rotating end of the inner frame 3, it becomes easier for a gaming staff member to see the frame control indicator 125 when opening the inner frame 3 to check it, compared to when the frame control indicator 125 is positioned closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3. This improves the convenience for the staff member when checking the display content of the frame control indicator 125.

Furthermore, the lower cover member 120B covers only the upper side of the frame control device 120A (various female connectors 127a to 127f, etc., exposed from the frame control board case 300, described later), and does not cover the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b related to the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error release button 123b related to the error release switch 123, described later). Therefore, the various buttons provided on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b related to the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal button 122b related to the ball removal switch 122, and the error release button 123b related to the error release switch 123, described later) become easier to operate, improving convenience for amusement store staff.

Furthermore, the lower cover member 120B is designed not to cover the various stickers attached to the frame control device 120A (the frame management number sticker 308 and operation guide sticker 309, described later) or the frame control indicator 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. Therefore, the lower cover member 120B does not obstruct the visibility of the various stickers or the frame control indicator 125, thereby improving convenience for amusement parlor staff.

Furthermore, a payout limit device operation indicator unit may be provided on the front side of the glass frame 4 to display the operating status of the payout limit device, as described later. The payout limit device operation indicator unit may be composed of LEDs or 7-segment displays, and may light up when the payout limit device is operating. Alternatively, the payout limit device operation indicator unit may be composed of a sliding panel that can be operated by a game store employee (it cannot be operated when the glass frame 4 is closed, but can be operated when the glass frame 4 is open). The panel may be slid to display the "not operating" state when the payout limit device is not operating, and to display the "operating" state when it is operating.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, using Figures 5 and 6, a block diagram of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices in this embodiment will be described.

First, in the game machine 1, game balls (game media) used in conventional pachinko game machines are used. However, the game balls are not discharged outside the game machine 1 (to the player's hands) but circulate within the machine, so the player cannot touch the game balls. Therefore, the total number of game balls displayed on the "game ball count display 135" and the "frame control display 125" is information recorded by electromagnetic means (for example, addition due to ball dispensing or prize balls, subtraction due to launch). In this embodiment, for convenience, the term "dispensing" of game balls is used, but this does not mean dispensing game balls outside the machine as in conventional pachinko game machines, but rather refers to the addition mentioned above.

This prevents the act of bringing game balls into a game parlor and using them for play. It also prevents the act of obtaining game balls illegally by tampering with them (for example, attaching strings to them, applying oil, or using game balls of a different size than the standard size).

Furthermore, the game balls used in game machine 1 may be the same game balls used in conventional pachinko game machines (game balls that react to magnets), or game balls that do not react to magnets (for example, made of stainless steel). Using the former reduces the cost of manufacturing new game balls, while using the latter allows for the creation of a game machine that is more resistant to fraud. Also, when using game balls that do not react to magnets, a magnet detection unit may be placed along the ball path to monitor for magnet-reactive game balls in order to prevent them from being mixed in.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operation). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m, a one-chip microcontroller equipped with a main CPU 110a for arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b storing game control programs, and a main RAM 110c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It also includes input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to control controlled devices (various solenoids and displays) and transmit predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the performance control board 130, etc. It also transmits predetermined information (described later) to the frame control board 120.

In this embodiment, the terms "RAM" and "RWM" may be used interchangeably, but they are synonymous.

Here, communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional information transmission, while communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow unidirectional information transmission only, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Various switches, sensors, and the frame control board 120 are connected to the input ports of the main control board 110. When detection signals from the switches and sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input ports, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The various switches include: a general prize entry detection switch 43a for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry 43; a gate detection switch 44a for detecting game balls that have passed through the general gate 44; a first start entry detection switch 45a for detecting game balls that have entered the first start entry 45; a second start entry detection switch 47a for detecting game balls that have entered the second start entry 47; a large prize entry detection switch 50a for detecting game balls that have entered the large prize entry 50; and a switch for detecting game balls flowing down the downstream end of the out ball flow path. The system includes an out-of-bounds ball detection switch 39a for detection, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update the setting value which represents the level of advantage in the game (differentiating the level of advantage in the game), and a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to transition to a state where the setting value can be changed or confirmed by operation using the setting key. The various sensors include a first magnetic detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b for detecting magnets.

In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the player is counted by the out-ball detection switch 39a. However, the number of launched balls may also be counted by providing a detection switch at the position where the game ball enters the game area 5a (a position where the launched ball will not be a foul ball after detection), or by providing a detection switch on the launch ball guide path 38 (a position where the launched ball may become a foul ball after detection). In the case where the detection switch is provided on the launch ball guide path 38, if a foul ball is detected after the launched ball is detected, the number of launched balls should be increased by 1 and then decreased by 1.

The output ports of the main control board 110 are connected to the main information display device 59, various solenoids, information display 115, frame control board 120, and performance control board 130, etc. Through these output ports, the board transmits drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and predetermined information to the frame control board 120.

The various solenoids are the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b and the big prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b. The main information display device 59 consists of the special symbol display 60, special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, special symbol hold display 63, special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-hand play display 67, and status confirmation display 68. The information display 115 is a display (4-digit 7-segment display) for displaying setting values, etc.

The frame control board 120 includes a frame control unit 120m, a one-chip microcontroller equipped with a frame control CPU 120a for calculation processing, a frame control ROM 120b storing the operation program for the frame control CPU 120a, and a frame control RAM 120c that serves as a work area during calculation processing. It also includes input and output ports for frame control. The frame control CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the frame control ROM 120b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while utilizing the frame control RAM 120c as a work area. This allows it to control controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays), communicate with the main control board 110 (described later), and transmit predetermined information (described later) to the dedicated unit 170.

The input ports of the frame control board 120 include a touch sensor 15a for detecting when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, a ball release switch 122 for detecting when the ball release button 122b is operated, an error release button 123b for detecting when the error release button 123b is operated, a terminal board 100 for communicating with a dedicated unit 170 installed alongside the gaming machine 1, a launch stand switch 92a for detecting game balls stationary on the launch stand, a subtraction inlet switch 91b for detecting game balls that have flowed down the ball passage unit 94, and a switch for detecting game balls sent to the launch device 95 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a. The following are connected to the control board 120: a counting button switch 91c for the counting input port, a counting button switch 20a for detecting when the counting button 20 is operated, a glass frame opening detection switch 31a for detecting when the glass frame 4 is opened (opened/closed), an inner frame opening detection switch 31b for detecting when the inner frame 3 is opened (opened/closed) (indicated as various opening detection switches 31a and 31b in the drawing), a radio wave detection sensor 54a for detecting abnormal radio waves, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting and polishing game balls, a game ball count clear switch 121 for detecting when the game ball count clear button 121b is operated, and various passage units 93 and 94. When detection signals from various detection switches and sensors are input to the frame control board 120 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signal.

Furthermore, the glass frame opening detection switch 31a, which detects the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, may be ON when the glass frame 4 is open (in this case, an ON input indicates that it is open), or it may be ON when the glass frame 4 is closed (in this case, no ON input indicates that it is open). The same applies to the inner frame opening detection switch 31b.

The various passage units 93 and 94 include: a foul ball switch 93a for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage, which allows game balls that have returned without entering the game area 5a (foul balls) to merge into the ball passage unit 94; a prize passage count switch 94a for detecting game balls (prizes) flowing down the prize ball passage (not shown) which collects and flows down game balls that have entered the various prize holes provided in the game area 5a; a non-prize passage count switch 94b for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-prize ball passage (not shown) which collects and flows down game balls that have flowed into the out hole 39 without entering the various prize holes; and a lifting polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage for detecting game balls that have been lifted up by the lifting polishing device 95. The lift is equipped with an upper switch 94c, a lower switch 94d at the downstream end of a confluence passage (not shown) that merges game balls flowing down the winning passage, game balls flowing down the non-winning passage, and game balls flowing down the foul ball passage for supplying them to the lifting and polishing device 95, an excess sensor 94e located in the middle section of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the upper switch 94c) for detecting an excess of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage, and an excess sensor 94f located in the downstream section of the lifting ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting an insufficient number of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifting ball passage.

The output port of the frame control board 120 is connected to the performance control board 130, the dispensing device connection terminal board 100, the launching solenoid 92b for operating the launching hammer (not shown) for launching game balls stationary on the launching platform, the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending game balls to the launching device 95, the lifting and polishing device 95, the game ball count indicator 135, the frame control indicator 125, etc. Drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids and display control signals for controlling the various indicators are output via the output port.

Communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is configured to transmit information in only one direction, from the frame control board 120 to the performance control board 130. This allows, for example, if the frame control board 120 detects an error, the performance control board 130 to provide notification regarding that error. Note that communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 may also be conducted via the main control board 110. In other words, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 do not necessarily need to be directly connected.

The "Game Ball Count Display 135" is a display for showing the total number of game balls that the player can shoot (hereinafter simply referred to as "Total Game Balls"), and is composed of, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment display. It may also be used as a display for showing the type of error code that occurred in the game machine 1. In this case, when no error occurs, only the total game balls should be displayed; when an error occurs, the total game balls and the error code should be displayed alternately. The display of error codes will be described in detail later.

The "frame control display 125" is a display for showing the total number of game balls, and is composed of, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment display. For example, if the "game ball count display 135" shows "100" as the total number of game balls, the "frame control display 125" will also display "100." If the "game ball count display 135" malfunctions and cannot display the total number of game balls, the player can still determine the total number of game balls they possess by checking the total number displayed on the "frame control display 125" (it serves as a backup display in case of malfunction).

Furthermore, this display may be used to show an error code indicating the type of error that occurred in the gaming machine 1, or it may be used to show the "Display Performance Information (Normal Base Value)" (see "Frame Control Board Display Performance Information Calculation Process" below). In this case, when no error occurs, the total number of game balls and the "Display Performance Information (Normal Base Value)" should be displayed alternately, and when an error occurs, the total number of game balls, the "Display Performance Information (Normal Base Value)," and the error code should be displayed alternately.

The "counting button 20" is a button used to transmit data on the total number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. The frame control CPU 120a determines whether the "counting button 20" is pressed for a "short time" or a "long time." Specifically, a press of less than 0.5 seconds is determined as a "short time," and a press of 0.5 seconds or more is determined as a "long time."

The frame control CPU 120a counts one game ball when it detects a "short press," and counts 250 game balls at 0.3-second intervals when it detects a "long press." If the total number of game balls is less than 250 (for example, 200), all 200 balls are counted upon detecting a "long press." A counting indicator lamp may be provided, which lights up when counting is possible and turns off when counting is not possible.

The "Game Ball Count Clear Button 121b" is a button used to clear the game ball count recorded by electromagnetic means. For example, it is conceivable that the game machine 1 may have game balls recorded when it is shipped from the manufacturing plant to the arcade, or that after installation in the arcade, a player might stop playing when only a small number of game balls (e.g., 1 ball) are recorded. In such cases, a problem arises where a new player trying to start playing may find it difficult to do so (it could give the misconception that the previous player is still playing). To resolve this problem, pressing the Game Ball Count Clear Button 121b while turning on the power switch 164 will clear the recorded game ball count.

Furthermore, the game ball count clearing process may be performed even when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), or the game ball count clearing process may not be performed if no game balls are recorded (0 balls), even if the game ball count clearing button 121b is pressed. Also, if the game ball count clearing process is performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), then "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine information center, or if the game ball count clearing process is not performed if no game balls are recorded (0 balls), even if the game ball count clearing button 121b is pressed, then "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared may not be transmitted from the gaming machine 1. If the game ball count clearing process is performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the control related to clearing the game ball count can be made uniform regardless of the game ball recording status, thereby reducing the control load. On the other hand, if the number of game balls is not recorded (0 balls), and the game ball count clearing process is not performed (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed), this prevents the game ball count clearing process from being performed (a meaningless process) even when there are no game balls to clear.

When the recorded game ball count is cleared, the system notifies the player that the game ball count has been cleared through audio output controlled by the audio control unit 148, display control controlled by the image control unit 145, and light emission control controlled by the lamp control unit 150. This notification will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information," indicating that the game balls have been cleared, is ultimately transmitted from game machine 1 to the game machine information center. This allows the game machine information center to also be aware that the game ball count has been cleared on game machine 1.

Furthermore, the game ball count is only cleared when the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed while the power switch 164 is turned ON. In other words, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the game ball count will not be cleared. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is given via sound, display, or light. For example, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while a variation display is running, the variation display continues, and the corresponding sound output, display control, and light control continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantage, for example, if a gaming store employee accidentally presses the "game ball count clear button 121b" while a variation display is running.

Furthermore, the "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button used to clear the game ball count and has no other functions. For example, it cannot clear errors, it cannot eject game balls from the game machine 1 (ball removal), and it cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c.

The "ball release button 122b" is a button for ejecting game balls from the gaming machine 1. Although the game balls are not touched by the player's hands, periodic inspection, cleaning, or replacement is recommended. In such cases, pressing the ball release button 122b while turning on the power switch 164 will eject the game balls from the gaming machine 1.

When game balls are being ejected from the game machine 1, the system is notified that it is in ball ejection mode via an audible notification controlled by the audio control unit 148 and a screen notification controlled by the image control unit 145. This notification will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, the ejection of game balls from the game machine 1 only occurs when the ball ejection button 122b is pressed while the power switch 164 is turned ON. In other words, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while the game machine 1 is powered, the game balls will not be ejected from the game machine 1. In this case, the state of the game machine 1 does not change, and no notification is given via sound or display. For example, even if the "ball ejection button 122b" is pressed while a variation display is running, the variation display continues, and the corresponding sound output, display control, and light control continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantage, for example, if a game store employee accidentally presses the "ball ejection button 122b" while a variation display is running.

Furthermore, the "ball release button 122b" is a button used to eject game balls from the game machine 1 and has no other functions. For example, it cannot clear errors, reset the number of game balls, or initialize the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c.

If the glass frame opening detection switch 31a detects that the glass frame 4 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. Similarly, if the inner frame opening detection switch 31b detects that the inner frame 3 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. This prevents game balls circulating inside the game machine from flying out of the machine, thus preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to not being able to secure the necessary (circulating) game balls for the game. For example, the game machine 1 is equipped with 45 game balls.

Furthermore, to prevent cheating by using game balls smaller than the specified size, which may make it easier to win prizes, a small ball detection switch (or sensor) may be provided.

The dedicated unit 170 comprises a U (unit) circuit board 171, a U (unit) control unit 172, a hall control output unit 173, and a display unit (touch panel) 174.

The U-board 171 and the dispensing device connection terminal board 100 of the frame control board 120 are electrically connected by dedicated PIF wiring, enabling communication of "predetermined information" (described later) between the U-board 171 and the frame control board 120. The dispensing device connection terminal board 100 can be used in common with both pachinko machines using game balls (game machine 1 in this embodiment) and coinless revolving machines. For example, when using it with a pachinko machine, the selector switch is operated to select a pachinko machine; when using it with a coinless revolving machine, the selector switch is operated to select a coinless revolving machine.

The U-board 171 has a function (security function) to encrypt and transmit predetermined information received from the frame control board 120 to the gaming machine information center (described later). Furthermore, it has a function (security function) to decrypt and transmit predetermined information received from the gaming machine information center to the frame control board 120.

The U-control unit 172 includes a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores programs and control data for the CPU's operation, and a RAM (not shown) that functions as a work area.

The U-control unit 172 has the function of reading and storing the card ID of the inserted membership card or visitor card, and has the function of transmitting the stored card ID to the management computer. Upon receiving the card ID, the management computer transmits the card ID to the card company data center (described later) and the gaming machine information center.

The U-control unit 172 has the function of storing the number of game balls (balls held) by the player while the player is playing, and displaying the number of balls on the display unit (touch panel) 174. If banknotes are inserted, it also has the function of displaying the remaining balance on the display unit (touch panel) 174.

The display unit (touch panel) 174 can display the number of balls held and the remaining balance, as well as images of a ball dispensing button for dispensing game balls and a return button for returning membership cards and visitor cards. The U-control unit 172 can receive operation signals when the ball dispensing button image is operated by the player, and can also receive operation signals when the return button image is operated by the player. Upon receiving these operation signals, the unit performs the corresponding processing (ball dispensing, ball return). Furthermore, the display unit (touch panel) 174 can display error codes, which will be described later.

Furthermore, while the display unit (touch panel) 174 is configured to display images of ball dispensing and return buttons, allowing players to operate them, this is not the only option. For example, the dedicated unit 170 may have ball dispensing and return buttons, or the gaming machine 1 may have ball dispensing and return buttons.

The U-control unit 172 can count and store the game time and number of games played (for example, the number of visits to the arcade) while the membership card is inserted. It can also store the number of game media stored on the membership card, the amount of money spent on games, and the number of game media used. This stored information is then transmitted to the arcade machine information center and stored in the addiction prevention server (used for measures to prevent gambling addiction in players).

The U-control unit 172 includes a hall computer output unit 173, which outputs hall computer information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high-probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is activated, information indicating the number of balls that have entered each prize slot, etc.) to the hall computer. The hall computer output unit 173 includes external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1, external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2, external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3, and external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4.

The hall computer is a dedicated computer installed in a gaming parlor. It is connected to the gaming machine (1) via relay equipment, etc., and is capable of collecting hall computer information.

The performance control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the game machine 1) based on the reception of performance commands from the main control board 110. The performance control board 130 includes a performance control unit 130m equipped with a sub-CPU 130a for calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b storing the performance control program, and a sub-RAM 130c serving as a work area during calculation processing; an image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and audio output device 9 (speaker); a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel drive device 75, and panel lighting device 76; and input and output ports for performance control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculations related to the game's effects while utilizing the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. In response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a, it controls various control units (image control unit 145, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (outputting data and commands).

The input ports of the performance control board 130 are connected to a performance button detection switch 17a, a joystick detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance control board 130 receives a performance button detection signal from the performance button detection switch 17a indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or a joystick detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the joystick detection switch 19a indicating that the joystick 19 has been operated, it performs processing to execute the performance corresponding to the detected signal.

The image control unit 145 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the display of predetermined images on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device).

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9 and, based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m, controls the output of audio data and music data (BGM, SE), etc., from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device).

Furthermore, a central control unit (not shown) is provided between the performance control unit 130m, the image control unit 145, and the audio control unit 148. This central control unit comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m. The image control unit 145, based on the reception of display control commands (display list) from the central control unit, reads the CGROM (not shown) containing image data, etc., and controls the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). The audio control unit 148, based on the reception of audio control commands from the central control unit, reads the audio ROM containing audio data, etc., and controls the audio output device 9.

The VRAM (not shown) provided in the image control unit 145 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit (overall CPU), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device).

This frame buffer area is a memory area for drawing or displaying images, and further comprises a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first and second frame buffer areas alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" at the start of each drawing operation.

Therefore, the image control unit 145, based on instructions (display list) from the overall control unit, draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM to the "drawing frame buffer" in the VRAM's frame buffer area, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator. By dividing this operating clock, it generates synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and outputs these signals to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the VDP is set to 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may also be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU (not shown) for calculation processing, a lamp ROM (not shown) storing the lamp control program, a lamp RAM (not shown) serving as the work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports, etc.

The lamp CPU receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM, and performs calculations related to the effects while utilizing the lamp RAM as a work area. In response to effect instruction commands received from the effect control unit 130m, it controls the controlled devices, such as various lighting devices and drive devices, to perform predetermined effects (outputting data and commands).

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button drive unit 17b, the panel drive unit 75, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80. Based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), the unit controls the illumination of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the panel drive unit 75, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and also controls the drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button drive unit 17b and the panel drive unit 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1 and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage, and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power outage.

Furthermore, the power supply board 160 is equipped with a power switch 164 that can be operated by a game parlor employee to switch between an ON state, which supplies main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components), and an OFF state, which stops the supply. When the power switch 164 is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the game machine 1 starts operating. Even when the power switch 164 is OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power outage detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 110a becomes operational, and when the power outage detection signal reaches a low level, the main CPU 110a becomes inoperable.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores energy when power is supplied to the gaming machine. When a power outage occurs, it supplies the backup power voltage stored in the capacitor to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the frame control RAM 120c of the frame control board 120. This ensures that the contents of the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c are retained even during a power outage, allowing the game's control state and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player to be restored to their pre-power outage state after power is restored. Alternatively, backup power may be supplied to the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game states during gameplay will be described. In this embodiment, there are two states related to special game determination (jackpot determination): "low probability game state" and "high probability game state," and there are two states related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47: "non-time-saving game state" and "time-saving game state." Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) A "low probability non-time-saving game state" is a state of low probability gameplay and a state of non-time-saving gameplay,
(2) The "low probability time-saving game state" is a state of low probability gameplay and a state of time-saving gameplay,
(3) A "high probability time-saving game state" is provided, which is a state of high probability gameplay and a state of time-saving gameplay.

Furthermore, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "low probability, non-time-saving game state," and in this embodiment, this game state will be referred to as the "normal game state." The game state during a jackpot is also set to "low probability, non-time-saving game state," but this is a different game state from the normal game state.

Here, "low-probability game state" refers to a game state where, for example, when the setting value for the degree of game advantage (the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery) is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot in the special game judgment (jackpot judgment), which is performed when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, is set to a low value of approximately 1/300.

In contrast, the "high-probability game state" refers to a game state that is more advantageous to the player compared to the low-probability game state, where, when the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/60. The transition from the low-probability game state to the high-probability game state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, "non-time-saving game state" refers to a game state in which, in the auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) performed when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the probability of winning is set low at 1/16, the average display time of the regular symbols is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start gate 47 when a win is achieved is set to 0.2 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" (the state in which the variation time reduction function is activated) is a game state that is advantageous to the player, as it reduces the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving game state. This is achieved by setting the probability of winning a prize to a high 15/16, setting the average display time of the regular symbols to approximately 3 seconds, and setting the opening time of the second start port 47 when a prize is won to 5 seconds. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, while the "time-saving game state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the average reel spin time of the regular symbols, the opening time of the second start gate 47, and the probability of winning the jackpot lottery, it is also acceptable to set it so that only one of these three factors is more favorable.

Furthermore, while the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment during non-time-saving gameplay remains the same regardless of the setting value, it may be made to vary depending on the setting value so that a higher setting value results in a more favorable winning probability. Similarly, while the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment during time-saving gameplay remains the same regardless of the setting value, it may be made to vary depending on the setting value so that a higher setting value results in a more favorable winning probability.

(Memory map of the main control unit and frame control unit)
Figure 7 shows the memory map of the memory area consisting of the main ROM 110b and main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m, and the memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m comprises a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b (8000H to FFFFH) and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c (0000H to 7FFFH).

The memory area of the main ROM 110b is arranged in the following order: a game ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored; an information ROM area (A000H to A52EH) where programs and data related to the game machine's acquisition limit device (described later) are stored; an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH to A6FFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored; a ROM comment area (A700H to A77FH) where data such as the program title and version are stored; a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) where the starting address of the timer interrupt processing (described later) is set; and a hardware parameter area (A7A8H to A7FFFH) where parameters such as the start and end addresses of the access-prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) where the program related to the progress of the game is stored; a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored; a game data area (9000H to 9976H) where data related to the progress of the game is stored; and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored.

The information ROM area consists of, in order: an information program area (A000H to A437H) where the program related to the gaming machine's winning limit device is stored; an unused area (A438H to A47FH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored; and an information data area (A480H to A52EH) where data related to the gaming machine's winning limit device is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area (0190H to 01FFH) used as a work area when executing information programs.

The RWM area for gameplay consists of, in order: a gameplay work area (0000H to 0128H) used by the gameplay program as work; a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored; a gameplay stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the gameplay program; and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored.

The game work area contains, in order, a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described later) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The RWM area for information is arranged in the following order: the information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used by the information program as work, the unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the information stack area (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the information program.

The information work area contains, in order, a game medium acquisition information area for storing information related to the acquisition limit of game mediums for the game machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error detections.

Furthermore, the memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m is configured similarly, so its explanation is omitted. The main control unit 110m, main ROM 110b, and main RAM 110c should be read as the frame control unit 120m, frame control ROM 120b, and frame control RAM 120c, respectively.

(Relationship between gaming area and information area)
Figure 8 shows the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) which processes based on the game program, and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) which processes based on the information program. Note that Figure 8 is common to both the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m.

As shown in Figure 8(a), when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a workpiece. Similarly, when performing processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as a workpiece.

However, while processing based on the game program cannot update the contents of the RWM area for information, it is possible to access them. Similarly, while processing based on the information program cannot update the contents of the RWM area for gameplay, it is possible to access them.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8(b), when processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program. Then, the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program. Immediately after processing based on the information program is completed and the game program returns, the flag register is restored from the game RWM area.

Furthermore, immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used by the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the end of the information program, all registers used by the game program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program, and problems will not occur when the system returns from the information program to the game program.

(system configuration diagram)
Figure 9 is a system configuration diagram (overall overview) of the gaming machine 1 and its peripheral devices.

The amusement parlor is equipped with a combination of a gaming machine 1 and a dedicated unit 170 installed alongside it. The game becomes playable when the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected. Additionally, the amusement parlor's office is equipped with a hall computer and a management computer.

If the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are not connected, or if the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected but the power to the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, then counting the game balls by operating the counting button 20 and launching the game balls by operating the launch handle 15 will be impossible.

The management computer is connected to the card company data center for communication, and the card company data center is connected to the gaming machine information center for communication.

The Gaming Machine Information Center houses a machine history server, a fraud monitoring server, a performance information server, and an addiction prevention server. It is also connected to the Japan Amusement Machine Manufacturers Association (JAMMA), an addiction prevention organization, and a credit card company association. Furthermore, the Gaming Machine Information Center is capable of collecting (centrally managing) the following information from all amusement parlors where Gaming Machine 1 is installed.

Next, we will explain the details and flow of information (the "specified information" mentioned above) and the flow of materials.
Of the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120), the information transmitted to the gaming machine information center is encrypted by the U board 171. The encrypted information transmitted can only be decrypted by the gaming machine information center. As a result, the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" included in the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 become information that cannot be known by a third party, making it difficult, for example, to obtain the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" information during the transmission process to the gaming machine information center. Consequently, it is possible to prevent the illegal acquisition of the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" information, and the subsequent installation of such acquired information on an unauthorized main control board 110 or frame control board 120 in a gaming parlor.

When the game cartridge dispensing button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated, a "ball dispensing signal" is transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the dispensing device connection terminal board 100 and then to the frame control board 120 (Figure (1)). Upon receiving the "ball dispensing signal," the frame control board 120 updates the number of game cartridges (game value) owned by the player, which are displayed on the game cartridge count indicator 135 and the frame control indicator 125.

When the counting button 20 is operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, as displayed on the game ball count display 135, is transmitted as "counting information" via the frame control board 120 → dispensing device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 (Figure (2)). This information is then stored in a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170. Upon receiving the "counting information," the dedicated unit 170 stores the number of game balls (game value) in the storage medium, such as a membership card or visitor card (prepaid card). Alternatively, the number of game balls (game value) may be stored in the hall computer in association with the identification information of the membership card or visitor card.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the "gaming machine installation information" is transmitted through the following flow: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → dispensing device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (Figures (2), (4), and (7)).

"Gaming machine installation information" refers to a total of six pieces of information: the "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," and "main control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the main control unit 110m, and the "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the frame control unit 120m. Further details about "gaming machine installation information" will be explained later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, and the machine becomes ready for gameplay (when all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing described later), the machine periodically transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" in the following sequence: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → dispensing device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (shown in (2), (4), and (7) in the diagram).

"HC/Fraud Monitoring Information (Hall Computer/Fraud Monitoring Information)" primarily refers to information indicating the status of the gaming machine 1. Examples include information indicating that a jackpot is in progress, information indicating that a high-probability game state is active, information indicating errors occurring in gaming machine 1, information indicating fraud occurring in gaming machine 1, and information indicating that game balls have entered various prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, general prize slot 43, large prize slot 50). Further details about "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" will be explained later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, and the machine becomes ready for gameplay (when all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing described later), the "gaming machine performance information" is periodically transmitted through the following flow: frame control board 120 → dispensing device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (shown in (2), (4), and (7) in the diagram).

"Gaming machine performance information" primarily refers to information related to the payout of gaming machine 1. Examples include information indicating the total number of game balls launched, the total number of game balls acquired, the ratio of bonus features, the ratio of consecutive bonus features, and the maximum payout. Further details on "gaming machine performance information" will be explained later.

When a player inserts their membership card, the system transmits "player information related to addiction countermeasures" through the following flow: dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) (Figures (4) and (7)).

"Player information related to addiction prevention" includes player information stored on membership cards, gaming media information stored on membership cards, information indicating gaming time, information indicating the number of times played (e.g., number of visits to the gaming parlor), information indicating the amount of money spent on gaming, and information regarding the gaming media used. When the gaming machine information center (addiction prevention server) receives this information, it updates the corresponding player information. By acquiring and managing this "player information related to addiction prevention," it becomes possible to prevent players from becoming excessively engrossed in gaming.

The dedicated unit 170 is equipped with an output terminal (not shown) for outputting to the hall computer, and outputs "hall computer information" based on "HC/fraud monitoring information" from this output terminal (indicated as (3) in the figure). "Hall computer information" includes information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high-probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is activated, and information indicating the number of balls that have entered each prize slot.

When a visitor card (prepaid card) is inserted into the dedicated unit 170, the "prepaid card information" is transmitted through the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center (Figures (4) and (6)). The card company data center collects the received "prepaid card information" to check, for example, whether any unregistered visitor cards (prepaid cards) are in circulation.

The Gaming Machine Information Center stores the received "Gaming Machine Installation Information," "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information," and "Gaming Machine Performance Information" on its server, determines whether there are any abnormalities, and transmits the "Verification/Security Results" in the following flow: Gaming Machine Information Center → Management Computer → Dedicated Unit 170 (Figure (8) (5)).

The Gaming Machine Information Center has a "Machine History Server," a "Fraud Monitoring Server," a "Performance Information Server," and an "Addiction Countermeasure Server." The "Main Control Chip" and "Frame Control Chip" are supplied to each gaming machine manufacturer by the gaming machine management control chip supplier (Figure (12)). Once each gaming machine manufacturer produces a gaming machine (making it ready for shipment), the "Machine History Server" registers the installation information, including the "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code," "Main Control Chip Product Code," "Main Control Chip ID Number" (serial number), "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code," "Frame Control Chip Product Code," and "Frame Control Chip ID Number" (serial number), as well as shipment information such as the shipment date and time (Figure (11)). Once this registration is complete, the gaming machines are shipped from each gaming machine manufacturer to the gaming parlors.

Similarly, when a U-board is manufactured by the U-board manufacturer (and becomes ready for shipment), the gaming machine information center registers the manufacturing information of the U-board (e.g., serial number) and installation information (indicated as (10) in the diagram) with the "fraud monitoring server." Once this registration is complete, the U-board manufacturer ships the U-board to the dedicated unit manufacturer (indicated as (9) in the diagram).

This allows the system to receive "gaming machine installation information" after a gaming machine has been installed in a gaming parlor. This information is then compared with the factory information registered in the "machine history server" to determine whether the "main control chip" and "frame control chip" of the gaming machine installed in the parlor are genuine (i.e., to determine if there are any abnormalities).

Furthermore, the U-board 171 can enable gameplay on the gaming machine 1 if the "verification/security result" is normal, but disable gameplay if the "verification/security result" is abnormal. This prevents attempts to illegally obtain winnings by replacing the main control board 110 or frame control board 120 with fraudulent components.

The "Machine History Server" stores not only the installation and shipping information mentioned above, but also information on the movement of used machines between amusement parlors and disposal information when a gaming machine is scrapped. This allows for detailed tracking of gaming machines from the time they are installed in a parlor until they are discarded. This helps deter illegal dumping of gaming machines.

The "fraud monitoring server" registers the manufacturing and installation information of the U-board mentioned above, generates "security result information" showing the "verification and security results" mentioned above, and generates "encryption keys and communication keys" to prevent the "security result information" from being tampered with. This prevents the "security result information" from being tampered with during the process shown in (8) in the diagram.

Furthermore, the "fraud monitoring server" stores fraud and error information that occurs in the gaming machine 1. For example, if a magnet detection error occurs in gaming machine 1, the server receives the error code corresponding to that error and the "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating the fraud detection signal, thereby recording that a magnet error was detected in gaming machine 1.

The "performance information server" stores "display performance information (normal base value)" calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and displayed on the frame control display 125, as well as gaming machine performance information calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 but not displayed on the frame control display 125.

Furthermore, the information stored in the "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," and "performance information server" is transmitted to the Japan Amusement Machine Manufacturers Association (JAMMA), which comprises multiple amusement machine manufacturers. As a result, amusement machine 1 is placed under the management of both the amusement machine information center and JAMMA, and for this reason, it is also called a "managed amusement machine."

The "addiction prevention server" stores and associates each registered player's membership number, playing time, amount spent, and number of plays. This stored information is then transmitted to the "addiction prevention organization." The system may also be configured to disable gameplay if any of the playing time, amount spent, or number of plays exceeds a predetermined value.

Furthermore, in the transmission and reception of the information described above, it is preferable that the transmitting side records the transmission date and time, and the receiving side is configured to record the reception date and time. With this configuration, for example, when the gaming machine information center receives a "setting change signal" or an "RWM clear signal" (HC/fraud monitoring information), it can check whether the reception time was during or outside the gaming parlor's business hours, and monitor whether "setting changes" or "RWM clears" were performed during business hours.

(Information transmission process)
Figure 10 is a diagram that specifically explains the information transmission and reception flow described in Figure 9.

First, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the "verification phase" begins. During the "verification phase," the "main control chip ID number" is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. The frame control board 120 then transmits the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number" to the U board 171. The U board 171 then encrypts the information related to the "main control chip ID number" and the "frame control chip ID number."

Then, the encrypted information relating to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center via the U-control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center.

When the gaming machine information center receives encrypted information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number," it decrypts it and compares it with the installation information stored in the machine history server to determine whether or not there is an abnormality as described above.

Then, "security result information" indicating the "matching and security results" is generated, encrypted, and transmitted to the U board 171 via the card company data center, management computer, and U control unit 172.

When the U-board 171 receives the "security result information," it decrypts it and checks for the presence or absence of the aforementioned abnormality. If no abnormality is found, it terminates the "verification phase" and proceeds to the "status communication phase." If an abnormality is found, it does not proceed to the "status communication phase" and renders the gaming machine 1 unplayable.

In the "Status Communication Phase," first, when a player sits down to play the game machine 1, inserts a valuable object (banknotes or a membership card containing game media), and operates the dispensing button, the U-control unit 172 transmits the number of balls dispensed (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one press of the dispensing button to the U-board 171. Then, the U-board 171 transmits the number of balls dispensed (e.g., 125 balls) to the frame control board 120.

The frame control board 120, upon receiving the number of balls dispensed (for example, 125 balls), displays this number on the game ball count display 135. This allows the game balls to be launched into the game area 5a when the launch handle 15 is rotated.

When the game is played and the number of game balls is displayed on the game ball count display unit 135, if the counting button 20 is operated, the frame control board 120 transmits the counted number of game balls to the U board 171. For example, if the game ball count display unit 135 shows 1000 game balls and the counting button 20 is operated, "1000" will be transmitted as the counted number of game balls.

Similarly, the number of balls counted is transmitted from the U-board 171 to the U-control unit 172. Upon receiving the ball count, the U-control unit 172 stores the count in the member card or visitor card.

The U-control unit 172 allows the return of the membership card or visitor card to the player once it has finished storing the ball count on the card. In other words, if the return button image on the display unit 174 is pressed after the ball count has finished storing, the membership card or visitor card can be returned to the player. Conversely, if the return button image on the display unit 174 is pressed before the ball count has finished storing (either during storage or before any data has been stored), the membership card or visitor card will not be returned to the player. This prevents players from leaving their seats (or leaving the premises) while game balls remain in the gaming machine 1.

If the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated before the counted balls have finished being stored, the U-control unit 172 displays a notification on the display unit 174 prompting the player to count, for example, a message saying "Please press the count button 20 to perform the count." This makes the operation method easier to understand for players unfamiliar with the game.

Furthermore, the notification prompting counting may be provided not only through displays, but also through sound, lights, or a combination of these. Alternatively, the notification may be provided by the gaming machine itself. This would make the operation method easier to understand.

The number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count display 135, is transmitted every 300ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 as "HC/fraud monitoring information," and then from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also know the number of game balls the player possesses.

The number of game balls launched by the game machine 1 (for example, game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a) is transmitted every 300ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 as "HC/fraud monitoring information," and then transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also know the number of game balls launched by the player.

In the gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls obtained by entering each prize slot (general prize slot 43, start slots 45 and 47, and large prize slot 50) is transmitted as "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. Furthermore, this "HC/fraud monitoring information" is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and then from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also grasp the number of prize balls generated by the gaming machine 1.

The dedicated unit 170 acquires the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls launched by the game machine 1, and the number of prize balls obtained by entering each prize slot in the game machine 1. Therefore, even if the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is tampered with, for example, the unit can determine that the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is not legitimate by using the separately acquired information on the number of game balls launched and the number of prize balls.

The frame control board 120 periodically transmits "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)," while the dedicated unit 170 transmits "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information." This allows the hall computer to understand the status of the gaming machine 1 (during a jackpot game, in high-probability game mode, with the variable time reduction function activated, and the number of balls entered at each winning slot).

The frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine performance information" to the U board 171. Upon receiving this information, the U board 171 encrypts it and transmits it to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, the management computer, and the card company data center. This allows the gaming machine information center to obtain information such as the total number of game balls launched, the total number of game balls acquired, the payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, and the maximum payout.

When the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120 (installation information notification). The frame control board 120 then transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the U board 171 every 300ms (installation information). The U board 171 then encrypts the "gaming machine installation information" and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the "gaming machine installation information" and constantly monitor whether the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 are properly installed.

The main control board 110 transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120 every 108ms. As will be described later, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" includes "main control state 1," "main control state 2," "game machine error state," and "fraud detection state 1," etc. For example, information related to errors detected by the main control board 110 and errors detected by the frame control board 120 is also transmitted periodically in the "game machine error state" (error notification). The U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (error notification) received from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and finally transmits it to the game machine information center. It also transmits error information to the management computer of the game parlor. As a result, the game machine information center can also periodically receive information related to errors that occur in the game machines and can constantly monitor errors that occur in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Furthermore, the management computer can also receive information regarding errors that occur in the gaming machines, allowing the gaming establishment to quickly grasp the error information and resolve the error promptly. The same process applies to the "fraudulent information" transmitted in "fraud detection state 1."

Furthermore, in "Main Control State 1" and "Main Control State 2," the status of the gaming machine (e.g., during a jackpot, during a high-probability game state) is transmitted periodically. Then, on the U-board 171, the HC/fraud monitoring information is encrypted and finally transmitted to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the status of the gaming machine, and can detect potential fraud if, for example, information indicating a jackpot is frequently received.

Next, referring to Figures 11 to 14, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 110b.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 11(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45 (jackpot determination), and Figure 11(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47 (jackpot determination).

As shown in Figures 11(a) and 11(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number used for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss). For reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 11(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in Figure 11(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, probability state, and random value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 11(a), when the setting value is "1" and the game is in a normal state, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination, ranging from "100" to "299," are determined to be "jackpots." All other random numbers for jackpot determination are determined to be "misses."

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table uses four setting levels, but it is not limited to this. Six setting levels, two setting levels, one setting level, or even the setting function itself may be omitted.

Furthermore, special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special symbol judgment information reserve storage area of the main RAM 110c, and special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47 is stored in the second special symbol judgment information reserve storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when determining a jackpot, the special symbol judgment information stored in the first or second special symbol judgment information reserve storage area is shifted to the corresponding special symbol judgment information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the jackpot determination is performed using the shifted special symbol judgment information.

Furthermore, the first special symbol judgment information retention storage area is divided into four storage units, and the retention icons corresponding to the special symbol judgment information stored in these four storage units are displayed in the first display units 70B1 to 70B4 of the first retention icon display area 70B. The second special symbol judgment information retention storage area is also divided into four storage units, and the retention icons corresponding to the special symbol judgment information stored in these four storage units are displayed in the first display units 70D1 to 70D4 of the second retention icon display area 70D.

(Special Symbol Judgment Table)
Figure 12(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpots, used to determine the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and Figure 12(b) is a special symbol determination table for misses, used to determine the type of special symbol when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 12(a) and 12(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be displayed, a random value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol specification command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are losing symbols that do not trigger a jackpot. The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot symbols that trigger the first jackpot, the special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that trigger the second jackpot, and the special symbols "03" and "06" are jackpot symbols that trigger the third jackpot.

In the "First Jackpot Game," the large prize slot 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for 2 seconds. This round game is performed up to six times. Note that in the round game, even before the opening time has elapsed, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the large prize slot 50, one round game ends. Furthermore, after the First Jackpot Game ends, the game is set to a low-probability, non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special symbol display has been shown 100 times.

In the "Second Jackpot Game," the large prize slot (50) is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, followed by a 2-second closure, and this round game is repeated up to 10 times. After the Second Jackpot Game ends, the game enters a high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state) until the special symbol display changes 10,000 times. Therefore, given the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "Third Jackpot Game," the second large prize slot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the large prize slot is closed for 2 seconds. This round game is performed up to four times. Furthermore, after the Third Jackpot Game ends, the game enters a high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state) until the special symbol display is completed 10,000 times. Therefore, given the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

While each of the first and second special symbols is associated with one losing special symbol, it is also possible to associate multiple losing special symbols with at least one of the first or second special symbols.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in either Figure 12(a) or (b), and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, as well as the random value for special symbol determination, to determine the type of special symbol, the special symbol data to be stopped, and the special symbol specification command. It then transmits the special symbol specification command to the performance control board 130.

The first characteristic of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 12 is that the types of winning and losing special symbols remain the same regardless of the setting value. This allows players to play with peace of mind without complicating the gameplay.

A second characteristic of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 12 is that the selection ratios for each type of jackpot special symbol and each type of losing symbol remain constant regardless of the setting value. This prevents the player's advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

(Special Pattern Variation Determination Table)
Figure 13(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states to determine the variation pattern of special symbols in non-time-saving states, and Figure 13(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for time-saving states to determine the variation pattern of special symbols in time-saving states.

As shown in Figure 13, the special symbol variation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting point) that displays the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stopped special symbol data), the random value for reach determination, the number of reserved special symbols (U1) or the number of reserved special symbols (U2), the random value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the special symbol variation pattern as the determination result, the variation time of the special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern specification command that indicates the special symbol variation pattern.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be defined as something that allows for the identification of the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result (stopped special symbol data), random value for reach determination, first special symbol reserve number (U1) or second special symbol reserve number (U2), and random value for special symbol variation pattern determination. It then transmits a special symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the pattern to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variation performance, which involves the variation display of the performance symbols 70a, according to the variation pattern specification command (jackpot judgment result, special symbol judgment result, etc.). Therefore, the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern judgment table shown in Figure 13 contains, for reference, the performance content that can be executed in the variation performance.

As shown in the variation pattern determination table in Figure 13, the following are the effects: "Normal variation," "Shortened variation," "Super shortened variation," and "Long variation." These refer to the three effect symbols 70a fluctuating rapidly and independently, stopping without resulting in a winning combination.

Furthermore, "Reach" refers to a variation in the game that makes the player anticipate a jackpot, where some of the combination of symbols 70a that signal a jackpot temporarily stop, while the other symbols 70a continue to change. For example, if the combination of symbols 70a that signal a jackpot is set to "777", then "Reach" refers to a variation where the same symbols 70a temporarily stop at "7" in the left and right regions, while the remaining symbols 70a in the central region continue to change.

Furthermore, "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the display symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly, giving the player the appearance that the display symbol 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

Furthermore, a "normal reach" refers to a reach animation where the same symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, while the remaining symbol 70a changes in the central area. This is the reach animation with the lowest probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, "SP Reach" and "Special SP Reach" are super reach sequences with a higher probability of winning than normal reaches. They are performed after a development sequence following a normal reach sequence. For example, two symbols 70a shrink and move to the corner of the first image display device 70, and a special reach sequence is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that "Special SP Reach" features a more special sequence than a "SP Reach."

Furthermore, "SPSP Reach" and "SPSP '7' Reach" are special reach sequences with a higher probability of winning than Super Reaches, and are executed after a Normal Reach or Super Reach sequence. For example, a development sequence is executed from a Normal Reach sequence, after which three symbols 70a shrink and move to the corner of the first image display device 70, and a special reach sequence, more elaborate than an "SP Reach," is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that in "SPSP Reach," the reach sequence is executed using symbols 70a other than "7," while in "SPSP '7' Reach," the reach sequence is executed using the "7" symbol.

Furthermore, a "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot and is performed after a normal reach animation. For example, a development animation is performed after a normal reach animation, and then all three animation symbols 70a align identically and rotate slowly, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 to perform a special reach animation (a reach animation that guarantees a jackpot) that is more special than the "SPSP reach" or "SPSP '7' reach."

The first characteristic of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that the type of special symbol variation pattern determined remains the same regardless of the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special symbol variation pattern, thus enabling fair gameplay.

A second characteristic of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that the selection ratio of each special symbol variation pattern remains the same regardless of the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special symbol variation pattern, thus enabling fair gameplay.

A third characteristic of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that when the number of reserved special symbols for the first special symbol increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time-saving state, a shortened variation is more likely to be determined as the variation pattern for the first special symbol. Conversely, even if the number of reserved special symbols for the second special symbol increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time-saving state, a shortened variation is not determined as the variation pattern for the second special symbol. This improves the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol variation display when playing left-handed compared to right-handed during a non-time-saving state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that, even if the number of reserved special symbols for the first special symbol increases to 1-3 during the time-saving state, the variation pattern for the first special symbol will not be determined as (super) shortened variation. Conversely, if the number of reserved special symbols for the second special symbol increases to 1-3 during the time-saving state, the variation pattern for the second special symbol will be more likely to be determined as (long) shortened variation. This allows for increased time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol variation display when playing with the right hand compared to when playing with the left hand during the time-saving state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Pre-determination table)
Figure 14(a) is a pre-determination table for the non-time-saving state, used to pre-determine (pre-read) special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 14(b) is a pre-determination table for the time-saving state, used to pre-determine (pre-read) special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in Figure 14, the pre-determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting point), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the random value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the planned special symbol variation pattern as a determination result, and the pre-read specification command indicating the planned special symbol variation pattern.

Therefore, a "special symbol planned variation pattern" can be defined as something that allows for the identification of the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol variation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in Figure 14 and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination, reach determination, and special symbol variation pattern determination. It then transmits a pre-reading command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

Next, we will explain a modified example of the specifications of the gaming machine 1 using Figures 15 and 16. In this embodiment, as described in Figures 11 and 12 and the explanation of the game state, it is a so-called "probability variation loop type." A "probability variation loop type" is, for example, when a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" and special symbol "02" or "03" is selected, after the jackpot game ends, the game enters a "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)." However, if special symbol "05" or special symbol "06" is selected in the "high probability game state" without special symbol "04" (or "01") being selected thereafter, the "high probability game state" continues.

Figure 15 shows a so-called "Type 1, Type 2" game. A "Type 1, Type 2" game has two game states: a "normal game state (low probability, non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state (low probability, time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, a jackpot probability of "1/199"), the game transitions to either "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (8 rounds)" at a predetermined rate, as shown in (1).

Then, upon completion of "Big Win Game 1 (4 rounds)," the game transitions to "Shortened Time Game State 1." The maximum number of times this "Shortened Time Game State 1" can be played is "1." However, during "Shortened Time Game State 1," it is possible to enter the second starting port 47 and store special symbol judgment information in the first to fourth memory units of the second special symbol judgment information retention memory area. With the special symbol judgment information acquired by entering the second starting port 47, a maximum of "5" "Big Win Judgments" and "Small Win Judgments" can be performed.

On the other hand, upon completion of "Big Win Game 2 (8 rounds)," the game transitions to "Shortened Time Game State 2." The maximum number of times this "Shortened Time Game State 2" can be played is "7." However, during "Shortened Time Game State 2," it is possible to enter the second starting port 47 and store special symbol judgment information in the first to fourth memory units of the second special symbol judgment information retention memory area. With the special symbol judgment information acquired by entering the second starting port 47, a maximum of "11" "Big Win Judgments" and "Small Win Judgments" can be performed.

While the detailed control flow is omitted here, the process is as follows: If the "Big Win Check" determines a "Big Win," the "Minor Win Check" is not executed. If the "Big Win Check" does not determine a "Big Win," the "Minor Win Check" is executed. If the "Minor Win Check" does not determine a "Minor Win," the result is a "Loss."

The special symbol judgment information obtained by entering the second starting gate 47 is configured such that, for example, there is a 1/199 probability of determining a "jackpot," and if it is not determined to be a "jackpot," there is a 1/8 probability of determining a "minor win." Furthermore, the special symbol judgment information obtained by entering the first starting gate 45 may be configured to either prevent or make it difficult to win a "minor win."

Between "Time-Saving Game State 1" and "Time-Saving Game State 2," "Time-Saving Game State 2" is more advantageous to the player because it offers a higher maximum number of plays in the Time-Saving Game State. Therefore, the image display device 70, etc., displays "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" when "Time-Saving Game State 1" is active, and "RUSH Mode" when "Time-Saving Game State 2" is active, allowing the player to distinguish between the two states based on the display format.

Furthermore, during "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," the game state is "Shortened Time Game State 1" until the end of the first spin display, and "Normal Game State" from the start of the second spin display. Similarly, during "RUSH Mode," the game state is "Shortened Time Game State 2" until the end of the seventh spin display, and "Normal Game State" from the start of the eighth spin display.

Then, if a "minor win" is determined during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," the game transitions to "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2). However, the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" is a minor win game. If the game ball can be entered into the "specific area" within the big prize winning slot during this minor win game, the big win game (rounds 2-4) will be executed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be entered into the "specific area" during the minor win game, the big win game (rounds 2-4) will not be executed.

Furthermore, if a "Big Win" is determined during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," the game transitions to "Big Win Game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). After completing "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" and "Big Win Game 4 (8 rounds)," the game transitions to "RUSH Mode."

On the other hand, if neither a "Big Win" nor a "Minor Win" is determined during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode."

During "RUSH Mode," if a "minor win" is detected, the game transitions to "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2). If a "Big Win" is detected, the game transitions to "Big Win Game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). After "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" and "Big Win Game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game returns to "RUSH Mode."

On the other hand, if neither a "Big Win" nor a "Minor Win" is detected during "RUSH Mode," "RUSH Mode" ends and the game returns to "Normal Mode."

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability variation loop type" described above, but may also be a "Type 1 and Type 2" type.

Figure 16 shows a so-called "minor win rush type." A "minor win rush type" has three game states: "normal game state (low probability, non-time-saving game state)," "time-saving game state (low probability, time-saving game state)," and "high probability game state (high probability, time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, a jackpot probability of "1/319"), the game transitions to either "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate, as shown in (1).

Then, after completing "Big Win Game 1 (4 rounds)," the game transitions to "Shortened Time Game Mode." The maximum number of times this "Shortened Time Game Mode" can last is, for example, 50 times. After completing "Big Win Game 2 (16 rounds)," the game transitions to "High Probability Game Mode."

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "Shortened Play Mode" (for example, if the jackpot probability is "1/319"), the game transitions to either "Jackpot Game 4 (2 rounds)" or "Jackpot Game 3 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate, as shown in (1). Upon completion of "Jackpot Game 4 (2 rounds)," the game transitions back to the "Shortened Play Mode," and upon completion of "Jackpot Game 3 (16 rounds)," the game transitions to the "High Probability Play Mode." Furthermore, if 50 spins are displayed without a "jackpot" being determined, the "Shortened Play Mode" ends and the game transitions back to the "Normal Play Mode."

When a "jackpot" is determined during the "high-probability game state" (for example, if the jackpot probability is "1/77"), the game transitions to either "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate, as shown in (2).

Furthermore, if a "minor win" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, if the minor win probability is "1/2.5"), the game transitions to "minor win game" as shown in (3). In this "minor win game," the large prize slot for minor wins is open for a predetermined time, allowing approximately three game balls to enter the large prize slot in, for example, one "minor win game." After the "minor win game" ends, the game transitions back to the "high probability game state."

For example, the probability of winning a small prize is "1/2.5," meaning it's a very easy state to win. Furthermore, after a "small prize game" ends, the game returns to a "high probability game state." In this "high probability game state," it's advantageous for the player to continue winning small prizes ("1/2.5") rather than winning a big prize ("1/77"), as this increases the number of game balls they possess through the small prize games.

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability variation loop type" described above, but may also be a "small win rush type" like this one.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probability variation loop type," "type 1 and type 2 type," or "small win rush type." It may also be a so-called "ST probability variation type," where the upper limit of the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" is set to, for example, "100" times. Alternatively, it may be a so-called "probability variation fall-off type," where the "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)" falls to a "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)" or a "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)" at a predetermined probability.

Next, we will explain the details of "Gaming Machine Installation Information" and "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" using Figures 17 to 22.

Figure 17 shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. No. 1 is a message named "Gaming Machine Installation Information Notification," with a transmission direction of "Main Control Board 110 → Frame Control Board 120," a command of "0x01," and a message summary of "Notification of Gaming Machine Installation Information." No. 2 is a message named "Gaming Machine Installation Information Response," with a transmission direction of "Frame Control Board 120 → Main Control Board 110," a command of "0x11," and a message summary of "Response of Gaming Machine Installation Information Receipt Result." No. 3 is a message named "Gaming Machine Information Notification," with a transmission direction of "Main Control Board 110 → Frame Control Board 120," a command of "0x02," and a message summary of "Notification of Gaming Machine Information." Note that "Gaming Machine Information" here refers to "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information." Item 4 has the message name "Gaming Machine Information Response," transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Main Control Board 110," command "0x12," and message summary "Responding with the result of receiving gaming machine information and frame control status."

The "Gaming Machine Installation Information" is structured as shown in Figure 18. No. 1 is data named "Message Length" with content "0x19". No. 2 is data named "Command" with content "0x01". No. 3 is data named "Communication Sequence Number" with content "Fixed to 0". No. 4 is data related to gaming machine installation information, named "Gaming Machine Type", with content to be described later. No. 5 is data related to gaming machine installation information, named "Main Control Chip ID Number", with content to be described later. No. 6 is data related to gaming machine installation information, named "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code", with content "Manufacturer code written in the main control chip's management area". No. 7 is data related to gaming machine installation information, named "Main Control Chip Product Code", with content "Product code written in the main control chip's management area". No. Entry 8 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

The data name "Game Machine Type" for No. 4, as shown in Figure 18, consists of one byte. Bits 3 to 0 indicate the game machine type. If Bits 3 to 0 are "0001", it indicates a "Pachinko game machine"; if Bits 3 to 0 are "0010", it indicates a "Slot machine"; if Bits 3 to 0 are "0011", it indicates an "Arrange Ball game machine"; if Bits 3 to 0 are "0100", it indicates a "Jankyu game machine"; and all other values are unused.

Bits 6 through 4 indicate the organizational classification of the association. If Bits 6 through 4 are "000", it indicates "Nikko-gumi" (an organization primarily related to pachinko gaming machines). If Bits 6 through 4 are "001", it indicates "Nidenkyo" (an organization primarily related to slot machines). Other values are unused.

Bit 7 indicates the management medium; if Bit 7 is "0", it indicates a game ball, and if Bit 7 is "1", it indicates a game token. For example, if game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine, the data would be 1 byte each, with Bit 7 being "0", Bits 6-4 being "000", and Bits 3-0 being "0001".

The "Main Control Chip ID Number" is omitted in the diagram, but the ID for each main control chip manufacturer is transmitted via message. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip's individual number "23456789" plus an identification code is transmitted via message. If the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip's individual number "45678912" plus an identification code is transmitted via message.

The "Gaming Machine Installation Information Response" is the response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the "Gaming Machine Installation Information" has been transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. No. 1 is data named "Message Length" with content "0x05". No. 2 is data named "Command" with content "0x11". No. 3 is data named "Communication Sequence Number" with content "Fixed to 0". No. 4 is data named "Gaming Machine Installation Information Receipt Result" with content "0x00" for "Received OK", and "0x01" for "Ball Removal State", indicating that the frame control board 120 is in a ball removal state. No. 5 is data named "Checksum" with content "Result of adding the message length to the data section". Furthermore, the main control board 110 will not enable gameplay until it receives a "game machine installation information reception result" of content "0x00" (reception OK) from the frame control board 120. This point will be explained in detail later using a flowchart.

The "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" is configured as shown in Figure 19. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and content "0x0B to 0x15". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and content "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and content "Sequence Number (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the data name "Main Control State 1" and content is Bit0 "Big Win 1", Bit1 "Big Win 2", Bit2 "Big Win 3", Bit3 "Game Machine Status Signal 1", Bit4 "Game Machine Status Signal 2", Bit5 "Game Machine Status Signal 3", Bit6 "Game Machine Status Signal 4", and Bit7 "Unused". For example, during the execution of a jackpot game corresponding to "Jackpot 1," Bit0 and Bit1 become ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit0 and Bit1 of Main Control State 1 are ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the game machine information center.

Furthermore, No. 5 has the data name "Main Control State 2," and its contents are: Bit0 "During Jackpot + Short Time Mode or Advantageous State," Bit1 "High Probability Mode," Bit2 "During Short Time Mode or Advantageous State," and Bits 3-7 "Unused." For example, during high probability gameplay, Bit1 becomes ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit1 of Main Control State 2 is ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the game machine information center.

Furthermore, No. 6 has the data name "Gaming Machine Error Status," and its contents are as follows: Bits 0 to 5 are "Error Codes," Bit 6 is "0 = Frame Control, 1 = Main Control" (0 indicates an error detected by the frame control board 120, 1 indicates an error detected by the main control board 110), and Bit 7 is "0 = Notification Only, 1 = Notification + Output to Hall Computer" (0 means only an error notification is issued, 1 means both an error notification is issued and output is sent to the hall computer). For example, if an error corresponding to Bit 0 occurs, Bit 0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of the gaming machine error status is ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

Furthermore, No. 7 has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 1," and its contents are: Bit0 "Setting Change Signal," Bit1 "Setting Confirmation Signal," Bit2 "RWM Clear Signal," Bit3 "Fraud Detection Signal 1," Bit4 "Fraud Detection Signal 2," Bit5 "Fraud Detection Signal 3," Bit6 "Acquisition Limit Device Activated Signal," and Bit7 "Unused." For example, if the settings are being changed as described later, Bit0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit0 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is ON ("1") will ultimately be transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

Furthermore, No. 8 has the data name "Number of Balls Awarded Due to Mechanism Activation" and the content "Number of balls awarded due to mechanism activation" (for example, the number of balls awarded for entering the second starting opening 47). Also, No. 9 has the data name "Number of Balls Awarded Due to Continuous Mechanism Activation" and the content "Number of balls awarded due to continuous mechanism activation" (for example, the number of balls awarded for entering the large prize opening 50).

Furthermore, No. 10 has the data name "Number of Game Information Items" and content "Number of Type Information/Count Information Items (n) (n) = 0 to 5 (variable length)" related to game information. Also, No. 11 has the data name "Type Information 1" and content "Type Information 1" related to game information. And No. 12 has the data name "Count Information 1" and content "Count Information 1" related to game information.

Count information, in the first example, refers to data indicating "the first starting opening 45," "the number of balls entered (1)," and "the number of prize balls (3)" when one game ball enters the first starting opening 45. In the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, it refers to data indicating "the large prize opening 50," "the number of balls entered (1)," and "the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, when one game ball passes the out-ball detection switch 39a, it refers to data indicating "the out-ball detection switch 39a" and "the number of balls passed (1)." This data is then transmitted to the game machine information center via telegram.

Furthermore, No. 13 is data related to game information, with the data name "Type Information n" and content "Type Information n". Also, No. 14 is data related to game information, with the data name "Count Information n" and content "Count Information n". Finally, No. 15 is data named "Checksum" and content "Result of summing from message length to data section".

Figure 20 is a diagram illustrating the details of the "Main Control State 1," "Main Control State 2," and "Intrusion Detection State 1" described above.

"Main Control State 1" is defined as follows: Bit0 is named "Big Win 1", details "Big Win 1 Information: Set to 1 during a Big Win to be announced", Bit1 is named "Big Win 2", details "Big Win 2 Information: Set to 1 during all Big Wins", Bit2 is named "Big Win 3", details "Big Win 3 Information: Set to 1 during a Small Win RUSH, Special Time Shortening, etc.", Bit3 is named "Game Machine Status Signal 1", details "Game Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 when Game Machine Status Signal 1 is ON", Bit4 is named "Game Machine Status Signal 2", details "Game Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 when Game Machine Status Signal 2 is ON", Bit5 is named "Game Machine Status Signal 3", details "Game Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 when Game Machine Status Signal 3 is ON", Bit6 is named "Game Machine Status Signal 4", details "Game Machine Status Signal The game machine status signal 4 is ON, and it is set to 1. Bit 7's name is "Unused," and its details are "Fixed at 0."

"Gaming machine status signal 1" corresponds to pulse output signal terminal 1 on the external terminal board of the hall control output unit 173, "Gaming machine status signal 2" corresponds to pulse output signal terminal 2 on the external terminal board of the hall control output unit 173, "Gaming machine status signal 3" corresponds to pulse output signal terminal 3 on the external terminal board of the hall control output unit 173, and "Gaming machine status signal 4" corresponds to pulse output signal terminal 4 on the external terminal board of the hall control output unit 173.

The "minor win rush" is as described in Figure 16. Special time-saving features include, for example, a time-saving game state that activates as a rescue measure when a low-probability game state is played for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 1000 spins) after the end of a big win game (the so-called "ceiling time-saving" feature), and a time-saving game state that activates at a predetermined probability when a big win is determined to be a miss (the so-called "symbol time-saving" feature).

"Main Control State 2" has the following characteristics: Bit 0 is named "Big Win + Time-Saving Mode or Advantageous State" with the detail "Game State Information: Set to 1 during Big Win and Time-Saving Mode or Advantageous State"; Bit 1 is named "High Probability Mode" with the detail "Game State Information: Set to 1 during High Probability Mode"; Bit 2 is named "Time-Saving Mode or Advantageous State" with the detail "Game State Information: Set to 1 during Time-Saving Mode or Advantageous State"; and Bits 3 to 7 are named "Unused" with the detail "Fixed at 0".

"Fraud Detection State 1" has the following characteristics: Bit0 is named "Setting Change Signal," details "0 = Normal, 1 = Setting Change," Bit1 is named "Setting Confirmation Signal," details "0 = Normal, 1 = Setting Confirmation," Bit2 is named "RWM Clear Signal," details "0 = Normal, 1 = RWM Clear (RWM Initialization) Occurred," Bit3 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 1," details "Emergency: Weak, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Occurrence," Bit4 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 2," details "Emergency: Medium, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Occurrence," Bit5 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 3," details "Emergency: Strong, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Occurrence," Bit6 is named "Acquisition Limit Device Activated Signal," details "0 = Not Activated, 1 = Activated," and Bit7 is named "Unused," details "Fixed at 0."

Figure 21 is a diagram illustrating the details of the "game information" mentioned above.

The "game information" consists of two bytes: "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is composed of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

The "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is, for example, Bit4-Bit7 "0000" is the type name "Unused" and content "-", Bit4-Bit7 "0001" is the type name "Starting Gate Entry" and content "Notification of Entry into Starting Gate", Bit4-Bit7 "0010" is the type name "Grand Prize Gate Entry via Special Electric Mechanism Activation" and content "Notification of Entry into Grand Prize Gate", and Bit4-Bit7 "0011" is the type name "Prize Gate Entry" and content "Prize "Notification of winning in the mouth," and Bit4 to Bit7 "0100" has the type name "Winning in all starting mouths," and the content is "Notification of passing through the starting mouth or normal gate related to the game," and Bit4 to Bit7 "0101," "0110," "0111," and "1000" have the type name "Unused," and the content is "-," and Bit4 to Bit7 "1001" has the type name "Number of times symbols are confirmed," and the content is "Notification of the number of times symbols related to the game are changed," and Bit4 to Bit7 "1010" has the type name " The "Number of Big Wins" entry has the content "Notifies that the continuous mechanism operation device has been activated," Bits 4 to 7 "1011" have the type name "Unused" and content "-", and Bits 4 to 7 "1100" have the type name "Number of Mechanism Activations (Number of Big Prize Openings)" and content "Notifies of the opening of the big prize opening when the continuous mechanism operation device is not activated, in cases where you want to use the number of times the big prize opening has been activated during a minor win as the starting number" (refer to the minor win game for the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" in Figure 15). Bits 4-7 "1101" are of the type name "Specific Area Passage" and have the content "Notification that a specific area has been passed" (see "Specific Area" in Figure 15). Bits 4-7 "1110" are of the type name "External Terminal Board Pulse Output" and have the content "Instruction to output a pulse from the dedicated unit (Hall Control Output Unit 173)". Bits 4-7 "1111" are of the type name "Performance Information Status Notification" and have the content "Notification of the status necessary to calculate performance information".

If the "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" is "Starting Gate Entry," then the "Data Number (Bits 0-3)" will transmit one of the following as the content (starting gate number): Bits 0-3 "0001" (entry into starting gate 1), "0010" (entry into starting gate 2), or "0011" (entry into starting gate 3) (any other values are unused). For example, if a game ball enters the first starting gate 45, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bits 0-3)" being "0001" will be transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Winning in the Grand Prize Lot due to Special Electric Mechanism Activation," then the content (Grand Prize Lot Number) will be either "0001" (winning in Grand Prize Lot 1) or "0010" (winning in Grand Prize Lot 2) (any other numbers will be unused). For example, if a game ball enters Grand Prize Lot 50, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "0010" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001" will be transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Winning at Prize Entrance," then the content (prize entrance number) will be one of the following: Bit 0-Bit 3 "0001" (winning at prize entrance 1), "0010" (winning at prize entrance 2), ... "1111" (winning at prize entrance 15). ("0000" is unused.) For example, if a game ball enters the general prize entrance 43 located at the lower right of the decorative frame 40, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "0011" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001" will be transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is "All Start Entrances Entered," then the content will be "0001" (entry or passage) in Bit0-Bit3 (other values will be unused). For example, if a game ball enters the first start entrance 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001" will be transmitted. If a game ball passes through the general gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "0100" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001" will be transmitted.

If "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Symbol Confirmation Count," then the content will be "0001" (the number of times the symbols related to the game (special symbols, regular symbols) have been confirmed), and this will be transmitted (other values will be unused). For example, if the first special symbol stops, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "1001" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001" will be transmitted. The same type information will be transmitted if the second special symbol stops, and the same type information will be transmitted if a regular symbol stops.

If the "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is "Number of Jackpots," then the content transmitted will be Bit0-Bit3 "0001" (indicating the continuous activation of the special feature device) (other values will be unused). For example, if the first jackpot (see Figure 12) occurs, the data type information (1 byte) will be transmitted, consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "1010" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001."

If "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is "Number of Bonus Feature Counts (Number of Times the Big Prize Opening)," then Bit0-Bit3 "0001" (Bonus Feature 1) is transmitted as content (others are unused). For example, if "Big Win Game 3" as explained in Figure 15 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "1100" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" is "Passing through a specific area," then Bits 0-3 "0001" (Specific Area 1) is transmitted as content (others are unused). For example, when "Big Win Game 3" as explained in Figure 15 is executed and the game ball passes through a specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" "1101" and "Data Number (Bits 0-3)" "0001" is transmitted.

Furthermore, regarding the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in Figure 22, if Bits 4 to 7 are "unused" and "fixed at 0," and Bits 0 to 3 are "0001," then it is transmitted that "the number of times the specific area has been passed is 1" (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1) in Figure 22, when a game ball passes through specific area 1 once, the game information "0xD101" is transmitted. This information consists of type information (1 byte) where "data type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "1101" and "data number (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001," and count information (1 byte) where "unused (Bits 4 to 7)" is "0000" and "number of passes (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001" (1 time).

If the "Data Type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "External Terminal Board Pulse Output," the content indicates that a pulse output will be generated from a dedicated unit (Hall Control Output Unit 173).
If "Data Type (Bit4 to Bit7)" is "Performance Information Status Notification," the content will send the status (fixed at 1) necessary for calculating performance information (others are unused).

Regarding the count information in the case of "Performance Information Status Notification," as shown in Figure 22, Bits 4 to 7 are fixed at "0." Bit 0 indicates the "base," where "0" indicates "low base" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state) and "1" indicates "high base" (e.g., low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). Bit 1 indicates "jackpot," where "0" indicates "normal" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state) and "1" indicates "jackpot." Bit 2 indicates "high probability," where "0" indicates "low probability" (e.g., low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state) and "1" indicates "high probability" (e.g., high probability time-saving game state). Bit 3 is unused.

As shown in Example 2) of Figure 22, when the state changes to high base, the game information "0xF101" is transmitted. This information consists of type information (1 byte) where "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "1111" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" is "0001," and count information (1 byte) where "Unused (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "0000" and Bit 0 of the "State Flag" is "1" (Bits 1-3 are "0").

The "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information Response" in Figure 22 is the response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" has been transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. No. 1 is data named "Message Length" with content "0x05". No. 2 is data named "Command" with content "0x12". No. 3 is data named "Communication Sequence Number" with content "Communication Sequence Number (0-255)". No. 4 is data named "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information Receipt Result" with content "0x00", indicating that "Receipt OK". No. 5 is data named "Checksum" with content "Result of adding the message length to the data section". Furthermore, the main control board 110 will not enable gameplay until it receives a "HC/fraud monitoring information reception result" with content "0x00" (reception OK) from the frame control board 120. This point will be explained in detail later using a flowchart.

Next, Figures 23 and 24 will be used to explain the list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine. "Usage area" refers to the "gaming area" described in Figures 7 and 8, while "outside the usage area" refers to the "information area" described in Figures 7 and 8.
In the diagram, "◎" indicates an implementation area, "○" indicates an implementation area, and "×" indicates an implementation area that is not possible.

Regarding No. 1, "Function to control game execution," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and the "function to control game execution" refers, for example, to the processing executed in the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later.

Regarding No. 2, "Controlling the Game State," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "controlling the game state" refers to the function that controls the "normal game state," "time-saving game state," and "high-probability game state" as described above.

Regarding No. 3, "Control related to launch," the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "usable area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the usable area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control related to launch" refers to the control for launching the game ball into the game area 5a.

Regarding No. 4, "Generation of Random Numbers for Internal Drawing," the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Outside the Usage Area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and "Generation of Random Numbers for Internal Drawing" refers to the generation of random numbers used in each process executed in the "Main Control Board Timer Interrupt Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 5, "Detection of game ball entry and payout of prize balls," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "detection of game ball entry and payout of prize balls" corresponds to steps S200 and S500 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later.

Regarding No. 6, "Control related to the special pattern display device," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control related to the special pattern display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later.

Regarding No. 7, "Control related to special electric features," the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "usable area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the usable area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control related to special electric features" corresponds to step S340 of the "special feature control processing" described later.

Regarding No. 8, "Control related to the ordinary pattern display device," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control related to the ordinary pattern display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" described later.

Regarding No. 9, "Control related to ordinary electric mechanism," the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "usable area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the usable area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "usable area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control related to ordinary electric mechanism" corresponds to step S250 of the "input control processing" described later.

Regarding No. 10, "Other control related to game execution," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are both marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m."

Regarding No. 11, "Function to control the game ball count display device," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "function to control the game ball count display device" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "frame control board timer interrupt processing" described later.

Regarding No. 12, "Electromagnetically recording the number of game balls," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "electromagnetically recording the number of game balls" corresponds to the "frame control board game ball count update process" described later.

Regarding No. 13, "Displaying the Number of Game Balls," the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Used Area," "Outside the Used Area," and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Displaying the Number of Game Balls" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame Control Board Timer Interrupt Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 14, "Adding the number of borrowed game balls," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "adding the number of borrowed game balls" corresponds to the "frame control board game ball lending process" described later.

Regarding No. 15, "Subtracting the number of counted game balls," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "Subtracting the number of counted game balls" corresponds to the "frame control board game ball counting process" described later.

Regarding No. 16, "Subtracting the number of launched game balls," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "Subtracting the number of launched game balls" corresponds to steps W301 and W302 of the "frame control board game ball count update processing" described later.

Regarding No. 17, "Adding the number of game balls that returned without being launched onto the board (foul balls)," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "adding the number of game balls that returned without being launched onto the board (foul balls)" corresponds to steps W303 and W304 of the "frame control board game ball count update processing" described later.

Regarding No. 18, "Adding the number of dispensed game balls," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "adding the number of dispensed game balls" corresponds to steps W305 to W311 of the "frame control board game ball count update processing" described later.

Regarding No. 19, "Initializing the number of game balls using the game ball count clear button," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "Initializing the number of game balls using the game ball count clear button" corresponds to the process where the frame control unit 120m clears the number of game balls when input is received from the game ball count clear switch 121 during power supply.

Regarding No. 20, "Function to control communication with the game ball dispensing device," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "function to control communication with the game ball dispensing device" corresponds to the control related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

Regarding No. 21 "VL Power Supply Monitoring," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "○," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "VL Power Supply Monitoring" refers to the connection confirmation power input from the dedicated unit 170.

Regarding No. 22, "Communication Control, Communication Timer Management," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Communication Control, Communication Timer Management" refers to time management related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Performance Information)" message, No. 23, the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Performance Information)" message corresponds to the processing in step W507 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described later.

Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Installation Information)" message, No. 24, the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Installation Information)" message corresponds to steps W505 and W509 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described later.

Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message, No. 25, the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎", while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×". In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message corresponds to the processing in step W513 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 26, "Counting Notification Message Generation and Transmission," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Counting Notification Message Generation and Transmission" corresponds to step W567 of the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Counting Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 27, "Loan Notification Reception," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Loan Notification Reception" corresponds to step W601 of the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Loan Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 28, "Generating and transmitting a response message for loan receipt result," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is "◎," while the "used area," "outside the used area," and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" are all "×." In this embodiment, this function is executed within the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "Generating and transmitting a response message for loan receipt result" corresponds to steps W609 and W610 of the "frame control board game ball loan processing" described later.

Regarding No. 29, "Communication Control Between Main Control Unit and Frame Control Unit," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "◎," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and this corresponds to the overall processing related to communication between the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m (for example, the "notification of game machine installation information" and "response to game machine installation information" in the "main processing of the main control board").

Regarding No. 30, "Aggregation of Gaming Machine Performance Information," the "Outside of Use Area" for the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Use Area," "Outside of Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Aggregation of Gaming Machine Performance Information" corresponds to the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described later.

Note that numbers 30 to 38 represent data for one day from when the gaming machine 1 is powered on to when it is powered off. Data collection begins when the power is turned on and is cleared when the power is turned off. In other words, these values are different from the values calculated in the "Frame Control Board Display Performance Information Calculation Process" described later.
Furthermore, this aggregated data is not displayed on a display unit (for example, a frame control display unit 125), but is transmitted to the Gaming Machine Information Center and shared and managed together with the Japan Amusement Machine Manufacturers Association.

Regarding No. 31, "Total Number of Game Balls Launched," the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Total Number of Game Balls Launched" corresponds to step W451 of the "Frame Control Board Game Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 32, "Total Number of Game Balls Acquired," the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Total Number of Game Balls Acquired" corresponds to step W452 of the "Frame Control Board Game Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 33, "Payout Rate," the "Outside the Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usable Area," "Outside the Usable Area," and "Usable Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Payout Rate" corresponds to step W453 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 34, "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)," the "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage area," "Outside the usage area," and "Usage area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usage area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usage area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)" corresponds to step W454 of the "Frame Control Board Game Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 35, "Bonus Item Ratio," the "Outside the Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usable Area," "Outside the Usable Area," and "Usable Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Bonus Item Ratio" corresponds to step W455 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 36, "Continuous Prize Ratio," the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Continuous Prize Ratio" corresponds to step W456 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 37, "Number of Activations of the Continuous Feature Activation Device," the "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usage Area," "Outside the Usage Area," and "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Number of Activations of the Continuous Feature Activation Device" corresponds to step W457 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 38, "Maximum Payout," the "Outside the Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with "◎," while the "Usable Area," "Outside the Usable Area," and "Usable Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," as well as the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "Usable Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Maximum Payout" corresponds to step W458 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Processing" described later.

Regarding No. 39, "Generation of Gaming Machine Installation Information," the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked with "○." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." Specifically, the following information No. 40 to No. 42 is generated in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and the following information No. 43 to No. 45 is generated in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Unit 120m" then transmits a total of six pieces of information—the information No. 40 to No. 42 received from the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the information No. 43 to No. 45 that it generated—to the U-board 171 (ultimately the Gaming Machine Information Center). In other words, "generation of gaming machine installation information" corresponds to step S5 of the "main control board processing" described later, and steps W505 and W509 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described later.

Regarding No. 40, "Main Control Chip ID Number," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip ID Number" will be described later in Figure 18.

Regarding No. 41, "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code" will be described later in Figure 18.

Regarding No. 42, "Main Control Chip Product Code," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip Product Code" will be described later in Figure 18.

Regarding No. 43, "Frame Control Chip ID Number," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip ID Number" will be described later in Figure 50.

Regarding No. 44, "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code" will be described later in Figure 50.

Regarding No. 45, "Frame Control Chip Product Code," the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip Product Code" will be described later in Figure 50.

Regarding No. 46, "Generation of HC/Fraud Monitoring Information," both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○." In this embodiment, the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are used. A detailed explanation follows below.

Regarding No. 47 "Number of Game Balls", the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "outside the usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×". "Number of game balls" refers to the "number of balls held" by the player, and in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, the "frame control board game ball count update process" described later corresponds to this.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the implementable "main control unit 110m". Of course, the function could be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this would be achieved by transmitting information related to the "number of game balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" considering the control load.

Regarding No. 48 "Number of Balls Launched," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×.""Number of Balls Launched" refers to the number of game balls launched by the player, and in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m." For example, the "frame control board game ball count update process" described later corresponds to this.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the implementable "main control unit 110m". Of course, the function could be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this would be achieved by transmitting information related to the "number of balls launched" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" considering the control load.

Regarding No. 49 "Total Prize Ball Count", the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○", while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "×". "Total Prize Ball Count" refers to the total number of prize balls dispensed to the player, and in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m". For example, the "frame control board game ball count update process" described later corresponds to this.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the implementable "main control unit 110m". Of course, the function could be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this would be achieved by transmitting information related to the "total number of prize balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" considering the control load.

Regarding No. 50 "Main Control State 1" (see Figure 19), the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is "○", while the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the "Outside the Used Area" are both "×". In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of Main Control State 1 ON/OFF, and the process related to message generation and transmission in Main Control State 1) is executed in the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m".

Regarding No. 51 "Main Control State 2," the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is "○," while the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Outside the Used Area" are all "×." In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit of Main Control State 2 ON/OFF, and the process related to message generation and transmission for Main Control State 2) is executed in the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m."

Regarding No. 52, "Gaming Machine Error State," both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○." "Gaming Machine Error State" refers to, for example, communication abnormalities between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, or between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. In this embodiment, the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are monitored for the aforementioned communication abnormalities. However, the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are not monitored for the aforementioned communication abnormalities. However, the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" may be used to monitor the aforementioned communication abnormalities.

Regarding No. 53 "Fraud Detection State 1," the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "○," while the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "×." In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 1" (Figure 19), the "Setting Change," "Setting Confirmation," and "RWM Clear" processes in Bits 0 to 2 are executed within the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," while the "Fraud Detection" processes in Bits 3 to 5 and the "Acquisition Limit Device" processes in Bit 6 (counting game balls, etc.) are executed within the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." Furthermore, the generation of the 8-bit message "Fraud Detection State 1" is executed within the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." This allows for efficient use of the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," preventing processing from becoming concentrated in only one area.

The use of "used area" and "outside used area" for "fraud detection state 1" is merely an example and may be modified as appropriate. For example, processes currently running in the "used area" may be moved to run outside the "used area," or processes currently running outside the "used area" may be moved to run within the "used area." Furthermore, all processes may be run within the "used area," or all processes may be run outside the "used area." Additionally, processes may be executed within the "used area" and "outside used area" of the "frame control unit 120m." For example, the processing of the "acquisition limit device" (such as counting game balls) may be executed within the "used area" and "outside used area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

Regarding No. 54 "Fraud Detection State 2 (Frame Control)", the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are "○", while the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" are "×". In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 2" (see Figure 51), the processing of "glass frame opening", "inner frame opening", and "fraudulent radio wave detection" for Bits 0 to 2, and the processing of "anomaly in the number of winning balls" and "anomaly in the number of balls launched" for Bits 4 to 5 are executed in the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m", while the processing of "game ball count clear detection" for Bit 3 is executed in the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Furthermore, the generation of the 8-bit message "Fraud Detection State 2" is executed in the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m". Furthermore, message generation outside the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is achieved, for example, by having a program outside the "used area" refer to the RWM in the "used area" and generate the message outside the "used area." This allows for efficient use of both the "used area" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," preventing processing from becoming concentrated in either area.

The use of "Used Area" and "Outside Used Area" for "Infraction Detection Status 2" is merely an example and may be modified as appropriate. For example, processes currently running in the "Used Area" may be moved to run outside the "Used Area," or processes currently running outside the "Used Area" may be moved to run in the "Used Area." Furthermore, all processes may be executed in the "Used Area," or all processes may be executed outside the "Used Area."

Regarding No. 55, "Fraud Detection State 3 (Frame Control)," the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "×." In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 3" (see Figure 51), the processing of "Small Ball Detection" and "Iron Ball Detection" (Bits 0-1) is performed in the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the generation of the 8-bit message "Fraud Detection State 3" is also performed in the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." This allows for efficient use of the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," preventing processing from becoming concentrated in one area.

The use of "Used Area" and "Outside Used Area" for "Infraction Detection State 3" is merely an example and may be modified as appropriate. For example, processes currently running in the "Used Area" may be moved to run outside the "Used Area," or processes currently running outside the "Used Area" may be moved to run in the "Used Area." Furthermore, all processes may be executed in the "Used Area," or all processes may be executed outside the "Used Area."

Regarding No. 56, "Function to control the setting change device," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked "○," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "outside the used area" are marked "×." In this embodiment, the function is executed within the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and the "function to control the setting change device" corresponds to the "setting change process" and "setting confirmation process" described later.

Regarding No. 57, "Function to transmit information related to performance to peripheral boards," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "×." In this embodiment, the function to transmit information to the performance control board 130 is performed in the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and the function to transmit information to the performance control board 130 is performed in the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m." For example, a "special symbol variation pattern specification command" is transmitted from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 determines the variation performance pattern (game performance) based on the received "special symbol variation pattern specification command." Furthermore, the "main control unit 110m" transmits information regarding the "error" detected by the "main control unit 110m" to the "performance control board 130," and the performance control board 130 executes a notification corresponding to the received "error" information. Similarly, the "frame control unit 120m" transmits information regarding the "error" detected by the "frame control unit 120m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 executes a notification corresponding to the received "error" information.

Regarding No. 58, "Function to transmit gaming machine information to peripheral boards," the "used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "×." Note that since No. 58 is the same as No. 57 mentioned above, the explanation is omitted.

Regarding No. 59, "Fraud Monitoring (excluding Nos. 60 and 61)," the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked "×." "Fraud Monitoring (excluding Nos. 60 and 61)" refers to monitoring fraudulent activities such as installing counterfeit wiring or components to illegally obtain winning random numbers, a practice known as "hanging" fraud. In this embodiment, this monitoring is performed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." Alternatively, this monitoring may be performed within the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m."

Regarding No. 60, "Irregularity Monitoring Related to Game Ball Dispensing," both the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and both the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○." In this embodiment, the monitoring is performed in the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." Note that, instead of the two-chip configuration of "Main Control Unit 110m" and "Frame Control Unit 120m" as in this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the game machine 1 with a single-chip configuration, for example, with only the "Main Control Unit 110m." In the case of a single-chip configuration, the monitoring should be performed in the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m."

Regarding No. 61, "Irregularity Monitoring Related to the Lending of Game Balls," both the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and both the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○." Note that since No. 61 is the same as No. 60 mentioned above, the explanation is omitted.

Regarding No. 62, "Error Handling (Game Stop)," the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is "○," while the "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," the "Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Outside the Used Area" are all "×." In this embodiment, the processing is executed within the "Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." For example, "Error Handling (Game Stop)" corresponds to the processing after step S9 in Figure 30, the processing after step S10 in Figure 30, the irreversible error processing in step S17 in Figure 31, the processing after step S27 in Figure 31, and the processing after step S600-6 in Figure 46.

Regarding No. 63, "Error Handling (Notification Only)," both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and both the "Used Area" and "Outside the Used Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○." Further details regarding "Error Handling (Notification Only)" will be described in "Error Code Display Priority" (Figure 78) below.

Regarding No. 64, "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor," the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked "×." The "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor" corresponds to the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" (Figure 79) described later. In this embodiment, both the process itself and the process of displaying it on the frame control display unit 125 are executed in the "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

Regarding No. 65, "Function to generate signals necessary for testing the gaming machine," both the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "main control unit 110m," and both the "used area" and "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with "○." In this embodiment, the "main control unit 110m" executes the function outside the "used area," while the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function using both the "used area" and "outside the used area."

Furthermore, regarding items No. 1 to No. 65 above, the areas marked with "×" are considered unimplementable, but these areas may be made implementable (various processes may be executed in the areas marked with "×"). Also, processes executed in the "used area" or "outside the used area" of the main control unit 110m may be executed in the "frame control unit 120m," and processes executed in the "used area" or "outside the used area" of the "frame control unit 120m" may be executed in the "used area" or "outside the used area" of the main control unit 110m.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables gameplay after the gaming machine is started up)
Using Figure 25, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 after the gaming machine is started up and ready for play (in the case where the frame control board 120 is not in the ball removal state). Note that "gaming machine information" in Figure 25 corresponds to the "HC/fraud monitoring information" described in Figures 19 to 22.

First, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 begin to start up, with the frame control board 120 completing its startup before the main control board 110. Then, after the main control board 110 has completed its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication sequence number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first message. Within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication sequence number = 0, reception result = received OK) to the main control board 110 as the second message, and the main control board 110 confirms the reception result of the gaming machine installation information. Since the reception result is received OK, the main control board 110 authorizes the launch of game balls, and the machine becomes ready for gameplay.

Then, 108 ms after the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the third message, a gaming machine information notification (communication sequence number = 1), is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms thereafter, the fourth message, a gaming machine information response (communication sequence number = 1, reception result = received OK), is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110, at which point the main control board 110 confirms the receipt of the gaming machine installation information. After that, the communication sequence of sending and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated every 108 ms.

Furthermore, if the frame control board 120 fails to receive the gaming machine installation information within three minutes of startup, it will notify the system of an error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or by sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130, indicating a communication line abnormality. If the gaming machine installation information notification is successfully received after the communication line abnormality, the error notification will terminate.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine is not playable after startup)
Using Figure 26, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, which are not playable after the gaming machine has been started (in the case where the frame control board 120 is in the ball removal state).

First, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 begin to start up. The frame control board 120 completes its startup before the main control board 110, and the ball removal operation begins, resulting in the machine entering the ball removal state. Then, within a maximum of 3 minutes, when the main control board 110 completes its startup, the first message sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 is a gaming machine installation information notification (communication sequence number = 0). Within 10ms from this point, the second message sent from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 is a gaming machine installation information response (communication sequence number = 0, reception result = ball removal state). The main control board 110 then confirms the reception result of the gaming machine installation information. Since the reception result is "ball removal state," the main control board 110 permits the launch of game balls, but instead of making the machine playable, it enters an infinite loop process.

Furthermore, after the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 have transmitted and received the game machine installation information response indicating the received result (ball removal status), they cease communication. The frame control board 120 continues the ball removal operation until the power to the game machine 1 is turned off.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine enters a settings change/settings confirmation state after startup)
Using Figure 27, the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, which enter a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started (in the case where the frame control board 120 is not in a ball removal state), will be explained.

First, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 begin to start up, with the frame control board 120 completing its startup before the main control board 110. Then, after the main control board 110 has completed its startup within a maximum of 3 minutes, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine installation information notification (communication sequence number = 0) to the frame control board 120 as the first message. Within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine installation information response (communication sequence number = 0, receipt result = received OK) to the main control board 110 as the second message, and the main control board 110 confirms the receipt of the gaming machine installation information.

At this point, if the main control board 110 detects that both the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are operated, or that only the setting key switch 112a is operated, it transitions to either the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and the setting value is displayed on the information display 115 mounted on the main control board 110.

Then, after the settings have been changed or confirmed, and 108 ms have elapsed since the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine information notification (communication sequence number = 1) as the third message to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information response (communication sequence number = 1) as the fourth message to the main control board 110, at which point the main control board 110 confirms receipt of the gaming machine installation information. After that, regardless of whether the settings are changed or confirmed, the communication sequence of sending and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated every 108 ms.

Then, when the setting key switch 112a is operated and the setting change or setting confirmation state is completed, the main control board 110 authorizes the launch of game balls, as the reception result of the previously received game machine installation information response was OK. After that, a communication sequence is repeated at 108ms cycles, sending and receiving messages in the order of game machine information notification and game machine information response.

(Communication procedure that the main control board uses to determine if the communication line is broken)
Using Figure 28, the communication procedure by which the main control board 110 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be explained.

First, when a notification message (game machine installation information notification, game machine information notification) is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, a response message (game machine installation information response, game machine information response) should be sent from the frame control board 120 within 10 ms. However, a condition occurs where the main control board 110 is unable to receive the response message.

This marks the first instance, and notification messages are sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108m intervals. However, if the frame control board 120 fails to receive a response message 10 times in a row, the main control board 110 will assume a communication line failure and send an error notification, such as an error designation command, to the performance control board 130. Afterward, the game machine 1 is restored from the communication line failure by turning its power off and on again.

(Communication procedure that the frame control board uses to determine if the communication line is broken)
Using Figure 29, the communication procedure by which the frame control board 120 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be explained.

First, when a notification message (game machine installation information notification, game machine information notification) is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, a response message (game machine installation information response, game machine information response) is transmitted from the frame control board 120 within 10 ms. Subsequently, when the timing for transmitting a notification message, which occurs every 108 ms, arrives, the main control board 110 transmits a notification message to the frame control board 120, but a state occurs where the frame control board 120 is unable to receive the notification message.

Subsequently, notification messages are sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108ms intervals. However, if the frame control board 120 fails to receive a notification message for 1000ms after receiving the last notification message, it will flag the frame control board 120 as having experienced a communication line failure by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130. Afterward, if the frame control board 120 successfully receives a notification message from the main control board 110, the error notification will terminate.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1 is in a ball-removal state, information indicating this state may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center.

(Main processing on the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 30. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts, in step S2, performs initial CPU settings such as configuring internal registers, and in step S3, waits for other boards to start up. Specifically, to ensure no commands from the main control board 110 are missed, it waits for one second for the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up. Furthermore, in step S4, it allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a notifies the machine installation information. Specifically, it transmits "machine installation information" (see Figure 18) to the frame control board 120. That is, when power voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, the main control board 110 transmits "machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S7, it determines whether it has responded with a notification of receipt of the gaming machine installation information notification. If it has responded with a notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S10; if it has not responded with a notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S8. In other words, it determines whether it has received a response (received) a notification of receipt from the frame control board 120 after transmitting "gaming machine installation information".

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", it proceeds to step S9. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10), it proceeds to step S5.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a performs processing to notify an error. Specifically, it determines that there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and sends a "game machine communication abnormality start designation command" to the performance control board 130. The performance control board 130 then notifies the "game machine communication abnormality error" (see Figure 131). It then waits until the power supply is completely cut off. That is, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "game machine installation information" 10 times but fails to receive a response regarding the receipt of the game machine installation information notification, it is determined that there may be a broken wire or other issue (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and an error notification is issued, preventing the game from being played. This prevents the game from being played even if there is a broken wire or other issue (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

Furthermore, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. However, the control program (main control program) that determines that it could not receive a response from the frame control board 120 can also be considered a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the machine is in a ball-removal state. Specifically, it refers to the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification. If the result is "0x00", it determines that "receipt OK", and if it is "0x01", it determines that "ball-removal state" (see Figure 18). If the machine is in a "ball-removal state", it waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

If the ball is removed, after completing the process in step S10, the system will wait until the power supply is completely cut off. Therefore, the processes from step S11 onwards will not be executed (the power restoration process will not be performed, and the system will not return to the control state before the power outage). In other words, the "power restoration specification command" will not be sent to the performance control board 130 in step S24, and the "power restoration" (described later) audio, screen, and lighting notifications will not be executed. In this case, the "ball removal in progress" (described later) audio and screen notifications will be executed. This prevents the system from becoming distracted from the ball removal process due to the execution of "power restoration" notifications or the initial operations described later during the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the system is not in a ball removal state), the system proceeds to step S24, and the "power restoration specification command" is sent to the performance control board 130, resulting in the execution of the "power restoration" (described later) audio, screen, and lighting notifications.

Similarly, if the ball is removed, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed and the power switch sw164 is turned ON, the process does not proceed to the "RWM clear process" in step S19. Therefore, the "RWM clear process" is not executed, and the "RWM clear specification command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, screen, and lighting notifications for "power on (RWM clear)" (described later) are not executed. In this case, the audio and screen notifications for "ball removal operation in progress" (described later) will be executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the "power on (RWM clear)" notifications from being executed while the ball is removed, which would otherwise make it difficult to concentrate on the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "RWM clear process" in step S19. The "RWM clear process" is executed, and the "RWM clear specification command" is sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, screen, and illumination notifications for "power on (RWM clear)" (described later) are executed.

Similarly, if the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned ON after performing the setting change operation described later, the process does not proceed to step S14, the "setting change process," and therefore the "setting change specification command" is not executed, nor is it sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, screen, and lighting notifications for "setting change" (described later) are not executed. In this case, the audio and screen notifications for "ball removal operation" (described later) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "setting change" notifications from being executed during the ball removal process, which could distract the user from the ball removal operation. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to step S14, the "setting change process," the "setting change process" is executed, and the "setting change specification command" is sent to the performance control board 130, resulting in the execution of the audio, screen, and lighting notifications for "setting change" (described later).

Similarly, if the ball is removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned ON after the setting confirmation operation described later, the process does not proceed to the "setting confirmation process" in step S22. Therefore, the "setting confirmation process" is not executed, and the "setting confirmation specification command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, screen, and lighting notifications for "setting confirmation" (described later) are not executed. In this case, the audio and screen notifications for "ball removal operation" (described later) will be executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the "setting confirmation" notifications from being executed during the ball removal process, which could distract the user from the ball removal work. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the ball is not removed), the process proceeds to the "setting confirmation process" in step S22, the "setting confirmation process" is executed, and the "setting confirmation specification command" is sent to the performance control board 130. Therefore, the audio, screen, and lighting notifications for "setting confirmation" (described later) are executed.

Similarly, if the machine is in a ball-removal state, it will not proceed to step S33, "Allow all interrupts," and will not become playable. This prevents delays in the ball-removal process, which can occur when the machine becomes playable despite being in a ball-removal state. For example, if the machine becomes playable while game balls are being ejected from the machine during the ball-removal state, game balls may be launched into the game area 5a, and the ball-removal process cannot be completed until the game balls return to a position where they can be ejected again (a position where ball removal is possible). This situation can be prevented. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the machine is not in a ball-removal state), "Allow all interrupts" is executed in step S33, and the machine becomes playable.

Similarly, if the ball is being removed, the process does not proceed to "Enable All Interrupts" in step S33, nor to the "Error Control Processing" of the main interrupt process. Therefore, "Error Control Processing" is not executed, and for example, "Magnet Detection" and "Abnormal Prize Detection" are not performed. This prevents the audio, screen, and illuminated notifications for "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" and "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Prize Error)" (both described later) from being executed. In this case, the audio and screen notifications for "Ball Removal Operation" (described later) will be executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the notification of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" and "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Prize Error)" from being executed during the ball removal process, which could distract the user from the ball removal operation. On the other hand, if the process in step S10 is rejected (i.e., the ball is not being removed), "Enable All Interrupts" is executed in step S33, enabling the execution of the "Error Control Processing" of the main interrupt process, thus enabling "Magnet Detection" and "Abnormal Prize Detection" to be executed as well.

Furthermore, even if the ball is removed, the process may proceed to steps S11 and beyond. In other words, "power restoration,""power on (RWM clear),""settingchange,""settingconfirmation," and "all interrupts enabled" are processes executed on the main control board 110, and the control related to the "ball removal state" is a process executed on the frame control board 120. Therefore, "power restoration,""power on (RWM clear),""settingchange,""settingconfirmation," and "all interrupts enabled" may be performed while the ball is removed.
Furthermore, if these events occur simultaneously, the performance control board 130 may notify the event with the higher priority according to the priority order shown in Figures 129 and 130, or it may notify both events regardless of priority, or it may always prioritize notifying the ball removal state.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating power restoration is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S12, assuming power restoration. If the backup flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step S13, assuming the initial power-on.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality detection data) of the game-use RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If a setting change operation has occurred, the process moves to step S14, transitioning to the setting change mode. If no setting change operation has occurred, the process moves to step S15.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a performs a setting change process. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, it performs a process to change (update) the setting value of the level of advantage in the game (the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery). Details of the setting change process will be described later using Figure 33. After this process is completed, the process moves to step S19.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is valid or not. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S12. If the checksum is valid (there are no abnormalities in the data in the game RWM area), the process moves to step S16. If the checksum is not valid (there are abnormalities in the data in the game RWM area), the process moves to step S17. Note that if the backup flag is not saved, i.e., during the initial power-on, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the "Set Value (During Game)" area is within the appropriate range (in this case, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the "Set Value (During Game)" area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S18. If it is determined that the set value in the "Set Value (During Game)" area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a performs an irrecoverable error processing for an RWM abnormality. Specifically, it sets Bit 5 of "Invalid Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/Invalid Monitoring Information" with Bit 5 of "Invalid Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120. It also displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, sets interrupt disable to disable timer interrupts, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to announce the irrecoverable error.

An "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is lost (the game control process is not initiated), and it will not be resolved unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then ON without performing a setting change operation, the error will not be resolved. The setting change operation must be performed before turning the power switch ON. During an unrecoverable error, the system does not monitor the presence or absence of signals from various input devices (various switches, various sensors).
Previously, the "unrecoverable error" was only resolved when a configuration change process was performed. However, it may be possible to also resolve it when an RWM clear is performed without any configuration change process.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has occurred, the process proceeds to step S19 to execute the RWM clear; if no RWM clear operation has occurred, the process proceeds to step S21.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S19. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the game control state (initializing everything except the set value area of the game RWM region). Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later using Figure 35. After this processing is completed, the process moves to step S20.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the performance control board 130 indicating that the RWM clear process has been executed (that the game control state is initialized upon power-on). This prompts the performance control board 130 to perform the necessary processing to announce the power-on.

"Power-on notification" is a notification to recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. This notification may include displaying the initial screen at the time of power-on (background image and initial performance symbols "123") on the first image display device 70, fully illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the sound output device 9 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the RWM area has been initialized.
In addition, when powering on, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70 may display a message indicating that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation was performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If a setting confirmation operation was performed, the process moves to step S22 to transition to the setting confirmation mode. If no setting confirmation operation was performed, the process moves to step S23 to restore the game control state to the state before the power was cut off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S22. Specifically, it performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during gameplay) area of the game RWM area on the information display 115. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using Figure 36.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a clears (sets to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area and sets the game RWM area for power restoration. This restores the game's progress (control state) to the state before the power outage, allowing the game to resume from that point.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a sends a power recovery command to the performance control board 130 indicating that the game control state has been restored and that the game state was the same as before the power outage (that the RWM clear process has not been executed). This causes the performance control board 130 to terminate the setting confirmation notification and other processes described later, and then execute the power recovery notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state it was in before the power outage. This notification may include displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance symbols "123") on the first image display device 70, fully illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 with a predetermined light color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the sound output device 9 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from the power outage).
In addition, when notifying the power restoration, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70 may display a message indicating that power has been restored.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as the special symbol memory specification command and the normal symbol memory specification command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to determine the number of special symbols held, and also initiates processing to display the first and second held symbols on the first image display device 70.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a setting value specification command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to understand the current setting value. Note that this setting value specification command may also be sent at times other than step S26, such as each time the special symbol variation display begins, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON. Specifically, it refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 0 = OFF, 1 = ON). If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF (e.g., 0), the process proceeds to step S28; if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 1), the process proceeds to step S29.

The "Acquisition Limit Device Activation Flag" is a flag that is turned ON when the "Acquisition Limit Activation Determination Process" described later determines that the maximum increase (also called "Maximum MY") has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). In other words, the "Acquisition Limit Device" is a device that activates when it is determined that the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) (it activates after the jackpot ends during a jackpot). When this device is activated, it becomes impossible to play on the machine (gameplay stops), and after the arcade closes, the main RAM 110c of the machine is initialized, making it virtually impossible to play on the machine until the next day's opening time. Note that "the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000)" means, for example, that it has reached 95,000 "or more". Depending on the situation, it may be determined that the predetermined value (for example, 95,000) has been reached at exactly "95,000", or at "95,005".

In step S28, the main CPU 110a outputs a launch permission signal that authorizes the launcher to launch game balls, based on the main control board 110's authorization. This allows the launcher to launch game balls when the launch permission signal from the frame control board 120 is also output. Alternatively, the frame control board 120 may not output a launch permission signal, and the main control board 110 may output the launch permission signal, enabling the launcher to launch game balls when the main control board 110 outputs this signal.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends a command indicating that the "acquisition limit device" has been activated to the performance control board 130. This prompts the performance control board 130 to perform processing to notify the system that the acquisition limit device has been activated. After sending the acquisition limit device activation command to the performance control board 130, the process proceeds to step S30.

The "notification that the winning limit device has been activated" is a notification intended to inform the player that it is no longer possible to continue playing. This notification is displayed on the first image display device 70, for example, in white text on a black background, stating "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today."

As an example of the operation of the "acquisition limit device," as described above, if the maximum increase in prize balls (also called "maximum MY") generated by game balls entering the large prize slot 50 or general prize slot 43 during a jackpot reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot ends. For example, in a jackpot that grants 10 rounds, if the maximum increase reaches the predetermined value (for example, 95,000) in the 5th round, the jackpot can be played until the 10th round, but the acquisition limit device will activate after the 10th round is completed and the jackpot ending is finished. This prevents the jackpot from ending prematurely and causing dissatisfaction to players, while still providing a healthy gaming experience.

Another example of the "acquisition limit device" operation is that, regardless of the game state, if the maximum increase in prize balls generated by entering the first start slot 45, the second start slot 47, or the general prize slot 43 reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) while the game is in a variable display state or during a customer waiting state (or during a customer waiting demo), the acquisition limit device will activate immediately.

Another example of the "winning limit device"'s operation is in the case of the "minor win rush type" described above. If the maximum increase in winnings from the winning balls generated by entering the large prize slot for minor wins during the "minor win game" (see Figure 16) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the winning limit device will activate after the "minor win game" ends. This prevents the minor win game from ending prematurely and causing dissatisfaction to the player, while still providing a healthy gaming experience.

Another example of the operation of the "acquisition limit device" is that, in the case of the "Type 1 and Type 2" described above, for example, in the minor win game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)," if the maximum increase in prize balls generated by entering a "specific area" within the large prize slot reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition limit device will activate after the end of the big win game (rounds 2 to 4) that was activated by entering the "specific area." On the other hand, in the minor win game of the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)," if the game ball is not able to enter the "specific area" within the large prize slot and enters a "non-specific area," and the maximum increase in prize balls generated by entering the "non-specific area" reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition limit device will activate after the end of the minor win game of the first round (the big win games of rounds 2 to 4 will not be activated). This ensures that if a player lands in a "specific area," the payout limit device activates after the jackpot game ends. If a player lands in a "non-specific area," the payout limit device activates after the minor win game ends. In either case, this prevents any ambiguity and avoids causing dissatisfaction to the player.

Furthermore, if a player unfamiliar with the gaming machine plays without knowing about the "winning limit device," and the device activates, it could cause confusion and dissatisfaction. Therefore, it is preferable to proactively inform players that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a "winning limit device." For example, during the customer waiting demo sequence, the message "Winning Limit Device Equipped" could be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or it could be continuously displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) or the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). Alternatively, it could be displayed at the end of a jackpot game.

Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated while judgment information is stored in the first special symbol judgment information storage area or the second special symbol judgment information storage area, it is preferable that the activation of the acquisition limit device does not erase the stored judgment information. Similarly, if the acquisition limit device is activated while judgment information for a normal symbol is stored, it is preferable that the activation of the acquisition limit device does not erase the stored judgment information. In such cases, it is preferable to erase the information by turning on the power switch sw164 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. This simplifies the control process by eliminating the need to erase the storage areas for special symbols and normal symbols when the acquisition limit device is activated.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the increment counter (also called the "MY counter"), which will be described later. After clearing the increment counter, the process proceeds to step S31. While the increment counter is cleared during power supply (restoration) to the gaming machine 1, this is not the only way. For example, it may be cleared when a setting change operation is performed, or when an RWM clear operation is performed, or a dedicated button for clearing the increment counter may be provided, and the counter may be cleared when power is supplied while this button is pressed. Alternatively, a dedicated button for not clearing the increment counter may be provided, and the counter may not be cleared when power is supplied while this button is pressed (in this case, the counter is cleared during power supply (restoration)).

In step S31, the main CPU 110a activates the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds). In step S32, it enables all interrupts and proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs a process to update the random values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols, as well as the random values for determining the special symbols. In step S35, it performs an initial random value update process to update the initial random values for determining the jackpot, the special symbols, the win, and the normal symbols.

In step S36, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether or not a power outage detection signal has been input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160. If no power outage detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S34. If a power outage detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S37.

In step S37, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt disable to prevent timer interrupts. In step S38, it clears the output ports. In step S39, it calculates the checksum (abnormality detection data) of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it to the game RWM area. In step S40, it saves a backup flag to the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. In step S41, it disables RAM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting change process)
The process for changing the settings of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 33. Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the process for changing the settings of the main control board 110.

First, in step S14-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit0 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit0 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S14-3, it determines whether it has responded to the notification of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification. If it has responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S14-6; if it has not responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S14-4. In other words, it determines whether it has received a response (received) the frame control board 120 after transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information".

In step S14-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", it proceeds to step S14-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10), it proceeds to step S14-1.

In steps S14-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Since the error notification process is the same as in step S9, the explanation is omitted here. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. That is, if the frame control board 120 receives "HC/fraud monitoring information" notifications "10 times" but fails to respond with a result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, it is assumed that there may be a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Therefore, an error notification is issued, and the game is not allowed to proceed. This prevents the game from being played even if there is a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S14-6, the main CPU 110a sends a setting change specification command to the performance control board 130. This triggers the performance control board 130 to perform a setting change notification to inform the system that a setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" refers to displaying a "setting change in progress" screen on the first image display device 70 to indicate that the setting value is being changed, or illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. Alternatively, the audio output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("Settings are being changed"). This allows arcade staff to understand that settings are being changed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S14-7, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the setting value (during gameplay) area and saves it to the setting value (changing) area. In step S14-8, the main RAM 110c initializes (clears to 0) the setting value (during gameplay) area of the game-use RWM area.

In step S14-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (being changed) area is within the appropriate range (in this case, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (being changed) area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S14-11. If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (being changed) area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S14-10.

In step S14-10, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value "0" to the setting value (currently being changed) area. Then, in step S14-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, it refers to the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area and adds 1 (here, 1 to 4) to it, which is then displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 115. This allows the arcade staff to understand the setting value before the change by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If a setting value update operation has occurred, the process moves to step S14-13; if no setting value update operation has occurred, the process moves to step S14-16.

In step S14-13, the main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area by +1, and in step S14-14, performs setting value correction processing. Specifically, if the updated setting value exceeds the appropriate range (in this case, 0 to 3) and is "4", it performs processing to correct the setting value to "0".

In steps S14-15, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it refers to the setting value in the "Setting Value (Changing)" area and adds 1 to it (in this case, 1 to 4), which is then displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 115. This allows the arcade staff to understand the setting value before it is finalized by checking the information display 115.

In steps S14-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has occurred, the process proceeds to step S14-17, assuming the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated). If no setting value confirmation operation has occurred, the process proceeds to step S14-12, assuming the setting value may be updated.

In steps S14-17, the main CPU 110a increments the setting value in the "Setting Value (Changing)" area by 1 and saves it to the "Setting Value (Playing)" area. In step S14-18, it initializes (clears to 0) the setting value in the "Setting Value (Changing)" area.

In step S14-18, the main CPU 110a finishes displaying the setting value on the information display 115 and terminates the current setting change process. The LED on the status indicator 68 is illuminated when the setting change process begins and deactivated when the process ends. This allows arcade staff to understand that a setting change is in progress by checking the status indicator 68.

(A modified example of the main control board setting change process)
Using Figure 34, a modified example of the setting change process for the main control board 110 will be explained. Figure 34 is a flowchart of the setting change process for the main control board 110. Note that only the differences from Figure 33 will be explained in Figure 34.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a sets an error notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. After setting the error notification flag, the process proceeds to step S14-6. In other words, Figure 33 differs in that, in step S14-5, an error notification process is performed and the game is stopped, while in Figure 34, only the error notification flag is set, the error notification process is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6 without stopping the game.

Then, in step S14-20, the main CPU 110a refers to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c to determine whether the error notification flag is set. For example, if the bit indicating the error notification flag is ON, it is determined that the error notification flag is set; if the bit indicating the error notification flag is OFF, it is determined that the error notification flag is not set. If it is determined that the error notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S14-21; if it is determined that the error notification flag is not set, the current setting change process is terminated. In other words, in Figure 33, the current setting change process is terminated in step S14-19, but in Figure 34, the process is not terminated in step S14-19. Instead, in step S14-20, it is determined whether the error notification flag is set, and if it is set, the "Game Machine Communication Anomaly Start Designation Command" is set and transmitted to the performance control board 130 to notify the "Game Machine Communication Anomaly Error."

In other words, in the modified example shown in Figure 34, if HC/fraud monitoring information (here, fraud detection status 1 Bit0 is "1") is transmitted to the frame control board 120 a predetermined number of times, but the frame control board 120 fails to receive a response (for example, if there is a high probability of a disconnection between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120), then a "gaming machine internal communication error" is notified in steps S14-20 and S14-21, after the main processing of the setting change process has been completed. This prevents confusion caused by simultaneous notifications, as the "gaming machine internal communication error" notification is executed after the "setting change" notification has finished. Furthermore, since the "gaming machine internal communication error" can be addressed after the setting change process has been completed, employee work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, since the setting change process is performed after the main control board processing shown in Figure 30 is completed, in step S7, the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification was successfully received. In other words, at this point, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could communicate normally (no disconnections or other issues occurred). On the other hand, in Figures 33 and 34, the failure to successfully receive the HC/fraud monitoring information result indicates that, after affirming the processing in step S7 but before the setting change process was performed, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were unable to communicate normally (a disconnection or other issue occurred). Thus, by periodically monitoring whether the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are in a state where they can communicate normally even after the completion of step S7, it is possible to prevent situations that could be disadvantageous to the player due to a lack of coordination between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(RWM clearing process on the main control board)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 35. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit2 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit2 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S19-3, it determines whether it has responded to the notification of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification. If it has responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S19-6. If it has not responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S19-4. In other words, it determines whether it has received a response (received) the frame control board 120 after transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information".

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", it proceeds to step S19-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10), it proceeds to step S19-1.

In step S19-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Since the error notification process is the same as in step S9, the explanation is omitted here. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. That is, if the frame control board 120 receives "HC/fraud monitoring information" notifications "10 times" but fails to respond with a result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, it is assumed that there may be a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Therefore, an error notification is issued, and the game is not allowed to proceed. This prevents the game from being played even if there is a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the game RWM area's setting value (during gameplay) area is within the appropriate range (in this case, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (meaning a setting change process has been performed in the past), the process moves to step S19-7. If the setting value is not within the appropriate range (meaning no setting change process has been performed in the past), the process moves to step S19-9.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) all areas of the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area of the game RWM area. This resets the game progress to its initial state (the state of the game machine 1 at the time of shipment), and the data (other than the setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM clear is not carried over.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition limit activation device flag is ON or OFF. Specifically, it refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit activation device flag is ON (for example, 1). If the acquisition limit activation device flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S19-9; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S19-10.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a turns OFF the acquisition limit activation device flag. Specifically, in the main RAM 110c, the acquisition limit activation device flag is turned OFF (for example, set to 0). In this way, when the acquisition limit device is activated, performing the RWM clear process on the main control board deactivates the acquisition limit device, making gameplay possible. Therefore, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the player cannot deactivate it; it must be deactivated by the arcade manager through the RWM clear process on the main control board. This prevents players from continuing to play even after the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), thus ensuring healthy gameplay.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and terminates the RWM clear process.

In this embodiment, when the RWM clear process (initialization of the main RAM 110c) is performed on the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1, an RWM clear specification command is sent to the frame control board 120, and the frame control RAM 120c is also initialized on the frame control board 120. Therefore, by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a while pressing the power switch 164 (performing the RWM clear operation), both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are initialized. This eliminates the need to perform RWM clear operations on both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 separately, improving work efficiency.

The area (information) initialized in the frame control RAM 120c by the RWM clear operation is the "data type" information (see Figure 21) in the HC/fraud monitoring information received from the main control board 110. If the received information is temporarily stored in a buffer before processing, the information stored in the buffer is cleared. The "data type" information (see Figure 21) includes: "Start gate entry," "Big prize gate entry during special electric mechanism operation," "Entry gate entry," "All start gate entries," "Number of symbol confirmations," "Number of jackpots," "Mechanism count (Number of big prize gate openings)," "Specific area passage," "External terminal board pulse output," and "Performance information status notification."

On the other hand, the areas (information) in the frame control RAM 120c that are not initialized by the RWM clear operation are the game ball count storage area, the storage area related to "display performance information (normal base value)," and the buffer where information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 is temporarily stored. This prevents necessary information from being initialized.

Furthermore, by sending the RWM clear command to the performance control board 130, the performance control board 130 controls and executes a notification that the RWM has been cleared (the "Power On (RWM Clear)" error notification described later). This notification repeatedly outputs the voice message "RWM has been cleared" and the background music "Input BGM". In other words, the RWM clear operation initializes both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c, but the performance control board 130 simply outputs the voice message "RWM has been cleared," without issuing notifications such as "Main RWM has been cleared" or "Frame control RWM has been cleared." This allows for the use of only one voice data entry, and eliminates the need to create new voice data for the frame control RAM 120c, thus efficiently notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

Furthermore, it may be possible to output audio messages such as "Main RWM cleared" and "Frame control RWM cleared." This configuration makes it easier to understand when all RWMs have been initialized, thus providing employees with a more user-friendly gaming machine.

In step S19-11, the main CPU 110a performs recovery error processing. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, sends a recovery error specification command to the performance control board 130 indicating that a recovery error has occurred, then sets interrupt disable to disable timer interrupts, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 36. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S22-1, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit1 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit1 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S22-3, it determines whether it has responded to the notification of receipt of the HC/fraud monitoring information notification. If it has responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S22-6; if it has not responded to the notification of receipt, it proceeds to step S22-4. In other words, it determines whether it has received a response (received) the frame control board 120 after transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information".

In step S22-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10". If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10", it proceeds to step S22-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (less than 10), it proceeds to step S22-1.

In step S22-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Since the error notification process is the same as in step S9, the explanation is omitted here. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. That is, if the frame control board 120 receives "HC/fraud monitoring information" notifications "10 times" but fails to respond with a result of receiving the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, it is assumed that there may be a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Therefore, an error notification is issued, and the game is not allowed to proceed. This prevents the game from being played even if there is a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S22-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the game RWM area's setting value (during gameplay) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (a setting change process has been performed in the past), the process moves to step S22-7. If the setting value is not within the appropriate range (a setting change process has not been performed in the past), the process moves to step S22-11.

In step S22-7, the main CPU 110a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130. This triggers a process to execute a setting confirmation notification, informing the performance control board 130 that the setting confirmation has been performed.

"Setting confirmation notification" refers to displaying a "Setting Confirmation in Progress" screen on the first image display device 70, or illuminating the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 with a predetermined light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting confirmation process. Alternatively, the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound ("Checking settings") to indicate that the settings are being confirmed. This allows arcade staff to understand that the settings are being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, and the audio output device 9.

In step S22-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it refers to the setting value in the setting value (during gameplay) area and displays a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 115. This allows the arcade staff to understand the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S22-9 whether a confirmation completion operation has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If a confirmation completion operation has occurred, the process proceeds to step S27-7; if no confirmation completion operation has occurred, the process in step S22-9 is repeated.

In step S22-10, the main CPU 110a finishes displaying the setting value on the information display 115 and terminates the current setting change process. The LED on the status indicator 68 lights up when the setting confirmation process begins and turns off when the setting confirmation process ends. This allows the arcade staff to understand that the setting confirmation is in progress by checking the status indicator 68.

In step S22-11, the main CPU 110a performs recovery error processing. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, sends a recovery error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that a recovery error has occurred, then disables timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

Thus, when a "setting change operation" is performed, step S14-1 sends "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit0 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1". When an "RWM clear operation" is performed, step S19-1 sends "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit2 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1". When a "setting confirmation operation" is performed, step S22-1 sends "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit1 of "fraud detection state 1" is "1". This allows the gaming machine information center to be aware of each operation that affects gameplay, enabling monitoring such as whether each operation is performed more than necessary, whether each operation is performed during the gaming parlor's business hours, or whether an RWM clear operation is performed outside of business hours after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Furthermore, even if the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed (i.e., the game ball count is cleared), information indicating that Bit 3 of the frame control board 120's fraud detection state 2 is "1" is transmitted to the gaming machine information center.
On the other hand, if the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball removal button 122b is pressed (i.e., the ball removal operation is performed), no information is transmitted to the gaming machine information center from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.
In other words, the ball removal operation, which involves ejecting game balls from the machine, is primarily for the purpose of maintaining the game balls and has a low probability of being considered fraudulent. Therefore, it can be said that it has a lower degree of impact on gameplay and a lower level of security compared to the aforementioned "setting change operation," etc. For this reason, there are no issues in excluding the ball removal operation from the management of the gaming machine information center. This allows for a clear distinction between the information necessary for the proper management of gaming machine 1 and the information that is not necessary, preventing the gaming machine information center from receiving all kinds of information (receiving everything) and consequently becoming overwhelmed with information and neglecting proper management.

In summary, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, if a first operation (for example, "setting change operation,""RWM clear operation,""setting confirmation operation," or "game ball count clear operation") is performed, information indicating that each operation has been performed is sent to the game machine information center. However, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, if a second operation (for example, "ball removal operation") is performed, information indicating that this operation has been performed is not sent to the game machine information center.
Furthermore, if a second operation (for example, "ball removal operation") is performed when the power switch sw164 is turned ON, it is acceptable to send information indicating that the operation has been performed to the gaming machine information center.

Although variations of the setting confirmation process are omitted here, the setting confirmation process may also be configured as shown in the variation of the setting change process (Figure 34). Specifically, in step S22-5, only the error notification flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. After completing the process in step S22-10, step S22-11 determines whether the error notification flag is set. If the error notification flag is set, step S22-12 sets the "game machine internal communication abnormality start specification command" and transmits it to the performance control board 130 to notify the "game machine internal communication abnormality error." This configuration allows for the same effect as described in the section explaining the variation of the setting change process (Figure 34).

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 37. Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt processing is executed after all interrupts are enabled in step S33 of Figure 31, when a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and then in step S105, it performs time control processing. Specifically, it updates various timer counters, such as the stop time for special symbols and the opening time for special electric mechanisms.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF. If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF, the process moves to step S120, assuming game progress control (specific control processing). If the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON, the process moves to step S500, assuming no game progress control (specific control processing). The acquisition limit device and the acquisition limit device activation flag will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random value update process in step S120. Specifically, it updates the random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination, special symbol variation pattern determination, win determination, normal symbol determination, and normal symbol variation pattern determination. Specifically, it updates each random value and random number counter by adding +1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (i.e., the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0. If the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding initial random value is set as the new initial value for the cycle, and the random values are updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process. Specifically, similar to step S35 in Figure 32, it updates the initial random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination, win determination, and normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether there is input to various switches such as the general prize entry detection switch 43a, the large prize entry detection switch 50a, the first start entry detection switch 45a, the second start entry detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and if there is input, it sets predetermined data. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol and special electrical control processing in step S300. Specifically, it performs processing such as determining the special symbol judgment information obtained based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, displaying the variation of the first or second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize port 50, and setting the game state. Details of the special symbol and special electrical control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as determining the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the variation of the normal symbols, and opening and closing the second start gate 47 (auxiliary game).

The main CPU 110a performs the acquisition limit management process in step S450. Specifically, when input is received from the general prize entry detection switch 43a, the large prize entry detection switch 50a, the first start entry detection switch 45a, the second start entry detection switch 47a, and the out detection switch 39a, the counters corresponding to each switch are updated. Details of the acquisition limit management process will be described later.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing. Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c and processes a command to send payout quantity specification commands corresponding to various prize winning slots (general prize winning slot 43, first starting slot 45, second starting slot 47, and large prize winning slot 50) to the frame control board 120. This causes the frame control board 120 to execute the process for paying out prize balls (the process for adding to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player).

The main CPU 110a performs error control processing in step S550. For example, if a magnet is detected, it performs processing to set Bit 3 of the "Invalid Detection State 1" (Figure 19) to "1," and also processes to send a command indicating magnet detection to the performance control board 130 to notify it of the magnet detection. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify of the magnet detection. Details of the error control processing will be described later.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information management processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 every 108ms. For example, in step S550, if Bit3 of fraud detection state 1 (Figure 19) is set to "1", HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that Bit3 of fraud detection state 1 (Figure 19) has been set to "1" is transmitted to the frame control board 120, and ultimately to the gaming machine information center. Details of the HC/fraud monitoring information management processing will be described later.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs data creation processing. Specifically, it creates data such as start-out/open-out data to be output to the second start-out/open-out solenoid 48b, big-prize-out-open-out data to be output to the big-prize-out-open-out solenoid 51b, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol indicator 60 and the second special symbol indicator 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol indicator 62, special symbol hold display data to be output to the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, it performs port output processing to output signals such as the start gate opening/closing data and the big prize gate opening/closing data created in step S600; display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, and normal symbol hold display data to various displays; payout command transmission processing to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120; and performance command transmission processing to send commands set in the performance transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to its registers, and terminates the current timer interrupt processing.

(Input control processing on the main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 38. Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general prize slot detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize slot detection switch 43a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the general prize slot 43, and then performs the processing necessary to dispense the prize ball.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs input processing for the large prize slot detection switch. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been received from the large prize slot detection switch 50a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the large prize slot 50, and then performs processing to dispense the prize ball.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the input processing for the first start-up port detection switch. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start-up port detection switch 45a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first start-up port 45, and then performs processing to dispense the prize ball, as well as processing to acquire and store special symbol judgment information. Details of the first start-up port detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs input processing for the second start port detection switch. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the second start port 47, and then performs processing to dispense the prize ball, as well as processing to acquire and store special symbol judgment information.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular gate 44, and then performs processing to acquire and store the regular gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs the out detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the out detection switch 39a, that is, whether a game ball has entered the out opening 39, and then terminates the current input control processing.

(Input processing of the first start port detection switch on the main control board)
The input processing for the first start port detection switch of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 39. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the input processing for the first start port detection switch in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it has received a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a. If it has received a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a, it proceeds to step S230-2. If it has not received a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a, it terminates the current first start port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a updates the three-prize ball counter used for three-prize ball payouts by adding data indicating three prize balls. In step S230-3, it acquires special symbol judgment information (random values for jackpot judgment, special symbol judgment, reach judgment, and special symbol variation pattern judgment).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is less than 4. If the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol hold count (U1) by adding "1" (U1 ← U1 + 1). In step S230-6, it sets the first special symbol storage specification command corresponding to the first special symbol hold count (U1) in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the first image display device 70 displays the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold count (U1).

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available memory units in the first special drawing determination information storage area, starting from the first memory unit, and stores the special drawing determination information acquired in step S230-3 in an available memory unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently in a non-time-saving game state. If it is in a non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If it is not in a non-time-saving game state, the first start gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first pre-determination process. This first pre-determination process refers to the pre-determination table shown in Figure 14, pre-determines the special symbol determination information acquired this time before the variation display of the first special symbol occurs, and generates a first start-up entry designation command to notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (planned special symbol variation pattern).

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start gate entry designation command, generated in step S230-9, into the main RAM 110c's transmission data storage area for special effects.

This allows the first start-up winning information to be transmitted to the performance control board 130 as a first-start-up winning designation command. Upon receiving the first-start-up winning designation command, the sub-CPU 130a of the performance control board 130 can execute a pre-announcement (for example, a continuous announcement effect or an icon change effect) that suggests a jackpot game will be played over one or more display cycles, even before the display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first-start-up winning designation command begins.

Furthermore, since the input processing for the second start gate detection switch is the same as that for the first start gate detection switch input, the parts for the first start gate detection switch 45a, the 3-ball prize counter, the first special symbol reserve count (U1), the first special symbol judgment information reserve storage area, the non-time-saving game state, the first pre-determination process, and the first start gate entry designation command should be replaced with the second start gate detection switch 47a, the 2-ball prize counter, the second special symbol reserve count (U2), the second special symbol judgment information reserve storage area, the time-saving game state, the second pre-determination process, and the second start gate entry designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second special symbol retention number (U2) is set to "4," but it may be higher or lower. Furthermore, the upper limit of the second special symbol retention number may be lower than the upper limit of the first special symbol retention number. Additionally, the second retention storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol judgment information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol judgment information storage area.

(Special electrical control processing of the main control board)
The special electrical control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 40. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the special electrical control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the values of the special drawing and special electrical processing data. In step S302, it references the branch destination address from the loaded special drawing and special electrical processing data, executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address, and then terminates the current special drawing and special electrical control processing.

Specifically, if the special symbol/electric processing data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed to start the display of the special symbol's variation based on the held memory. If the special symbol/electric processing data = 1, the special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to stop the special symbol's display after the variation time has elapsed. If the special symbol/electric processing data = 2, the special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to transition to the jackpot game according to the elapsed stop time and the type of special symbol that has stopped. If the special symbol/electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to execute the jackpot game. If the special symbol/electric processing data = 4, the jackpot game termination process (step S350) is executed to end the jackpot game. Details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

This "special symbol and special electrical processing data" is set as needed within each subroutine of the special symbol and special electrical control processing, as described later. Therefore, the necessary subroutines for that game will be processed accordingly.

(Special pattern memory determination process on the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 41. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is currently being displayed. If a special symbol is currently being displayed, the special symbol memory determination process ends. If a special symbol is not currently being displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved special symbols (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved special symbols (U2) is 1 or greater, the process moves to step S310-3. If the number of reserved special symbols (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol hold count (U2) by subtracting "1". In step S310-6, it sets a special symbol storage specification command corresponding to the subtracted second special symbol hold count (U2) in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. This transmits the special symbol storage specification command to the performance control board 130, triggering processing to update the hold icon and its display on the first image display device 70.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state specification command corresponding to the current game state in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. In step S310-8, it performs a data shift process in the second special symbol judgment information storage area, shifting the special symbol judgment information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol judgment information stored in the fourth memory unit of the second special symbol judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory unit of the second special symbol judgment information holding memory area. Also, the special symbol judgment information stored in the first memory unit of the second special symbol judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the zero memory unit, which is the special symbol judgment information execution memory area, and the special symbol judgment information used in the previous game, which was stored in the zero memory unit, is erased.

Meanwhile, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is 1 or greater, the process moves to step S310-5. If the number of reserved special symbols (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process moves to step S319-1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol hold count (U1) by subtracting "1". In step S310-6, it sets a special symbol storage specification command corresponding to the subtracted first special symbol hold count (U1) in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. This transmits the special symbol storage specification command to the performance control board 130, which then performs processing to update the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of that icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state specification command corresponding to the current game state in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. In step S310-8, it performs a data shift process in the first special symbol hold storage area, shifting the special symbol judgment information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol judgment information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol hold memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol hold memory area. Also, the special symbol judgment information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol hold memory area is shifted to the zero memory section, which is the special symbol judgment information execution memory area, and the special symbol judgment information used in the previous game, which was stored in the zero memory section, is erased.

Furthermore, in conjunction with the shift processing of the special symbol judgment information in step S310-8, special symbol hold display data indicating the first special symbol hold count (U1) and the second special symbol hold count (U2) after subtraction is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol judgment information retention storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol judgment information retention storage area (the second special symbol retention count is subtracted with priority over the first special symbol retention count). However, the first special symbol judgment information retention storage area or the second special symbol judgment information retention storage area may be shifted according to the order in which the game balls enter the starting gate (the first and second special symbol retention counts are subtracted in the order of entry), or the first special symbol judgment information retention storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol judgment information retention storage area (the first special symbol retention count is subtracted with priority over the second special symbol retention count).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process that determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the special symbol stop data, based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol specification command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process into the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. This sends the special symbol specification command to the performance control board 130, which then performs the process to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed as a result of the variation performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. Details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process into the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area. This transmits the special symbol variation pattern specification command to the performance control board 130, which then performs processing to determine the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance that takes place during the variation display of the special symbols.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process into a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S316, it starts displaying the special symbol variation. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the special symbol variation, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S750, causing the special symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to terminate the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, thereby ending the special symbol memory judgment process.

(Main control board's acquisition limit management process)
The acquisition limit management process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 42. Figure 42 is a flowchart of the acquisition limit management process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1, the main CPU 110a performs an increment counter update process. Specifically, it updates the increment counter according to the number of balls dispensed (number of acquired balls) resulting from balls entering various prize slots, and the number of balls ejected from the game area 5a (number of balls launched into the game area). Details of the increment counter update process will be described later using Figure 43.

In step S450-2, the main CPU 110a performs a maximum increment update process. Specifically, it refers to the increment counter (also called the "MY counter") located in the main RAM 110c, and updates the maximum increment (information about the maximum increment stored in the main RAM 110c) if the value of the increment counter is greater than the current maximum increment (also called "Max MY").

In step S450-3, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, in order to transmit information related to the maximum increment to the performance control board 130, it sets a maximum increment command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

The maximum increment command may be sent periodically to the performance control board 130, or it may not be sent before the maximum increment reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90000), and instead be sent periodically after the predetermined value is reached.

In step S450-4, the main CPU 110a performs a determination process for activating the acquisition limit device. Specifically, it determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). If the maximum increase has reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it performs the process to activate the acquisition limit device. Details of the acquisition limit device activation determination process will be described later using Figure 44. Then, the acquisition limit device activation determination process ends.

(Main control board increment counter update process)
The process of updating the increment counter in the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 43. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the process of updating the increment counter in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is general prize entry information indicating that a game ball has entered the general prize entry slot 43. Specifically, it determines whether the 5-ball prize counter, which is updated in the general prize entry slot detection switch input process in step S210 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no general prize entry information, the process moves to step S450-1-3. If there is general prize entry information, in step S450-1-2, "5," which is the number of prize balls in the general prize entry slot 43, is added to the increment counter (MY counter).

In step S450-1-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is information indicating that a game ball has entered the large prize slot 50. Specifically, it determines whether the 15-ball prize counter, which is updated in the large prize slot detection switch input process in step S220 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no information indicating a large prize slot entry, the process moves to step S450-1-5. If there is information indicating a large prize slot entry, in step S450-1-4, "15," which is the number of prize balls in the large prize slot 50, is added to the increment counter (MY counter).

In step S450-1-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start opening 45. Specifically, it determines whether the 3-ball prize counter, which is updated in the first start opening detection switch input process in step S230 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start opening, the process moves to step S450-1-7. If there is information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start opening, in step S450-1-6, the number of prize balls from the first start opening 45, "3", is added to the increment counter (MY counter).

In step S450-1-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is information indicating that a game ball has entered the second start opening 47. Specifically, it determines whether the 2-ball prize counter, which is updated in the second start opening detection switch input processing in step S240 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no information indicating a second start opening, the process moves to step S450-1-9. If there is information indicating a second start opening, in step S450-1-8, "2," which is the number of prize balls from the second start opening 47, is added to the increment counter (MY counter).

In step S450-1-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is out-ball detection information indicating that a game ball has entered the out-out opening 39. Specifically, it determines whether the out-ball detection counter, which is updated in the out-ball detection switch input processing of step S260 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no out-ball detection information, the current increment counter update process is terminated. If there is out-ball detection information, in step S450-1-10, it determines whether or not the increment counter (MY counter) is greater than "0". If the increment counter is not greater than "0", i.e., "0", the current increment counter update process is terminated. If the increment counter is greater than "0", in step S450-1-11, "1" is subtracted from the increment counter, and the current increment counter update process is terminated.

The "increase counter" is a counter used to calculate the maximum increase (also called "maximum MY"). When the amusement parlor opens (when the power of the amusement machine 1 is turned ON), the value of the increase counter is "0", and the value of the maximum increase is also "0". For example, when a game is started after the amusement parlor opens and a game ball launched into the game area 5a enters one of the various prize winning slots (general prize winning slot 43, first start slot 45, second start slot 47, and large prize winning slot 50), the increase counter is increased by the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when a game ball launched into the game area 5a flows into the out slot 39, if the increase counter is greater than "0", the increase counter is decreased by 1, and if the increase counter is "0", the increase counter remains at "0" without being decreased. Therefore, when a jackpot game is played in which a game ball can enter the large prize winning slot 50, the value of the increase counter changes significantly. For example, if a jackpot game starts with the increase counter at "0" and 100 game balls are launched, resulting in 1500 prize balls being awarded, then a net gain of 1400 game balls is achieved, and the increase counter value becomes "1400". In the maximum increase update process executed at this time (step S450-2), if the stored maximum increase is less than "1400", the maximum increase is updated to "1400". Subsequently, if multiple jackpot games are played before the increase counter value is reduced to "0", the increase counter value gradually increases to "95000" or more, at which point the maximum increase also becomes "95000" or more, and the acquisition limit device is activated. Note that the increase counter value becoming "0" when the game machine 1 is powered on, or as a result of the increase counter being reduced, corresponds to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0).

The increment counter is set in the RWM area for information, and the upper limit of the countable value is "95013". For example, when the increment counter value is "94999" and one game ball is launched, the increment counter value is updated to "94998". At this time, if one game ball enters the large prize slot 50 (10 prize balls), the increment counter value becomes "95008". Thus, according to the game machine of this embodiment, the condition for the acquisition limit device to activate is when the increment counter value reaches "95000". However, due to differences in the number of prize balls for each prize slot and the prize-winning situation, it is rare for the increment counter to actually stop counting at exactly "95000", and the increment counter may exceed "95000". Therefore, for example, it is possible to count and store up to "95013" (a range is provided), and counting and storage beyond "95013" is not performed. The reason for using "95013" is that when the increment counter value is "94999," one game ball is launched, updating the increment counter value to "94998." This design ensures compatibility with game machines equipped with a specification that allows for the awarding of the maximum prize ball count of "15" for a single win, as defined by the game machine's regulations. In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball count for the game machine is "10" (the prize balls for the large winning slot 50). Therefore, a maximum value of "95008" would suffice for the increment counter's countable memory. However, as mentioned above, if a game machine equipped with a specification that allows for the awarding of a maximum prize ball count of "15" is to be developed and designed in the future, setting the initial upper limit of the increment counter's countable memory to "95013" reduces the effort required for design changes. However, the upper limit of the increment counter's countable memory may also be set to a value that takes into account the maximum prize ball count of that specific game machine.

While it was stated that the system would not store counts exceeding "95013" (i.e., an upper limit was set on the number of countable values), this upper limit is not required. For example, if a jackpot game begins when the increment counter is "94990," the "1400" in the above example may be added, resulting in an increment counter of "96390." In other words, even after the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the system may continue updating the increment counter until the jackpot game ends (until the acquisition limit device is activated).

When the increment counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90,000), the value of the increment counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 (for example, as shown in Figure 151) (for example, 90,000/95,000 is displayed) (prior notification is provided). This display of the increment counter value is, for example, synchronized with the increment counter value in real time.

Furthermore, the display of the increment counter value (advance notification) is not limited to the third image display device 72; it may also be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). Additionally, when the display begins, an audio message (for example, "5000 remaining") may also be output.

Furthermore, the pre-notification, once displayed when the increase counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 90,000), may continue to display it regardless of how the value changes thereafter, until the power switch is turned off. For example, even if the player experiences unfavorable conditions after the increase counter value is displayed, and the increase counter drops to, say, 80,000, the display will continue. This allows the player to recognize that they have reached a point just before the acquisition limit device is activated.

On the other hand, if the player's situation becomes unfavorable after the increase counter value is displayed, the display of the increase counter value may be cleared. For example, if the player's situation becomes unfavorable after the increase counter value is displayed, and the increase counter value reaches 89,000, the display of the increase counter value may be cleared. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the acquisition limit device will activate soon (compared to a system where the display continues until the power is turned off).

Furthermore, the pre-notification may continue to be displayed even when it is notifying a type of notification event described later (e.g., an error). It may also continue to be displayed during fluctuation displays, jackpot games, and demo performances. This increases the opportunities for players to see the pre-notification, making it easier to predict when the payout limit device will activate. Therefore, it prevents the payout limit device from activating suddenly and surprising the player. Note that during fluctuation displays, jackpot games, and demo performances, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may emit a rainbow light (described later), but it is also possible to perform the rainbow light emission during the pre-notification display.

On the other hand, it is preferable to interrupt the display during SP Reach or SPSP Reach. This allows players to concentrate on the SP Reach or SPSP Reach. Furthermore, depending on the type of notification event (e.g., an error), the display may be continued or interrupted. For example, the display may be interrupted in the event of a magnet detection error, an illegal radio wave detection error, or an RWM abnormality error, while the display may be continued in the event of a glass frame opening error or an inner frame opening error. This allows for proper advance notification.

Furthermore, while the display of the increment counter value (advance notification) does not change depending on the presentation mode—the sound, design, and display position of the advance notification—it is possible to make them differ depending on the presentation mode.

To elaborate further on the display of the increment counter value, while the display is shown as "90000/95000," it is not limited to this format. For example, when the increment counter value is "85000/95000," it could be displayed as "10000 remaining." Alternatively, a range could be used, such as "5001 to 10000 remaining." Furthermore, instead of a numerical display, a meter image could be used to indicate the increment counter value. A combination of a meter image and a numerical display could also be used. Finally, the increment counter value could be indicated by the character type or color. For example, as the increment counter value approaches "95000," the character type could change from A to B to C, or as the increment counter value approaches "95000," the character color could change from blue to yellow to red.

Furthermore, the display of the increase counter value may be linked in real time (updated one unit at a time). This allows for more accurate notification to the player regarding the number of units remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated.

On the other hand, the display of the increment counter value does not need to be linked to the increment counter value in real time. For example, the display could be updated when the value increases or decreases by 100 from the currently displayed value. Furthermore, the increments could be in units of 500 or 1000, rather than 100. This reduces the rapid changes in the display compared to a real-time link (updating one unit at a time), making the display of the increment counter value easier to read.

Furthermore, when updating and displaying the count in increments of 100, 500, or 1000 units, rather than linking it to the increase counter value in real time (updating one unit at a time), it is preferable to include "approximately" in the display, for example, "approximately 10,000 units remaining" or "approximately 5,001 to 10,000 units remaining." This prevents discrepancies between the displayed content and the timing of the acquisition limit device's activation, which could cause players to feel distrustful.

Furthermore, when displaying the value of the increment counter, a sound effect may be output in a single shot, or the background music (BGM output during the fluctuation display) may be changed after the increment counter value is displayed (using a dedicated BGM). Also, the tempo of the BGM (BGM output during the fluctuation display) may be increased as the increment counter value approaches "95000". This makes it easier to recognize that the acquisition limit device is approaching activation through sound changes, thus preventing the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the acquisition limit device.

On the other hand, when displaying the value of the increment counter, the sound effect may be muted. Furthermore, the background music (BGM) changes and tempo may be maintained. In other words, no audible notification may be provided when displaying the value of the increment counter. This prevents players from mistaking the notification of the start of the increment counter display for a jackpot announcement, resulting in disappointment and failure to win a jackpot.

Furthermore, when displaying the value of the increment counter, the frame lighting device 10 and/or the panel lighting device 76 may be illuminated in a predetermined pattern (flashing in a predetermined color) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds). This makes it easier to recognize that the acquisition limit device is approaching activation, even through changes in illumination, thus preventing the sudden activation of the acquisition limit device and surprising the player.

On the other hand, when displaying the value of the increment counter, the illumination pattern of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the panel lighting device 76 may be maintained. In other words, the lamp illumination system may not provide notification when displaying the value of the increment counter. This prevents the player from mistaking the notification of the start of displaying the increment counter value for a jackpot announcement, resulting in disappointment for the player who fails to win a jackpot.

Furthermore, game machine information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) based on the start of displaying the increment counter value is not output. This prevents an increase in the control processing load of the frame control board 120.

Furthermore, the value of the increment counter may be displayed within the operating range of the movable display device 77 (a position where it becomes temporarily difficult to see due to the operation of the movable display device 77). This prevents constraints such as a narrowing of the operating range of the movable display device 77, as the display position of the increment counter value becomes a factor in the operating range of the movable display device 77.

Furthermore, the visuals may be temporarily obscured during transitions from a normal reach to an SP reach, from an SP reach to an SPSP reach, and when the background returns to the normal background after an SP or SPSP reach (eye-catching effect). Alternatively, the visuals may be displayed during normal spins and normal reach spins, but hidden during SP reaches and SPSP reaches. This allows players to focus on SP reaches and SPSP reaches without distraction.

On the other hand, it may be better to keep it constantly visible. This would allow users to always know the approximate time until the acquisition limit device activates, thus improving convenience.

Furthermore, the display position and size may be changed depending on the state of the variation animation. For example, the SP Reach and SPSP Reach scenes may be displayed smaller than the normal variation and normal reach variation scenes, or the display position of the normal variation and normal reach variation scenes may be different from (moved) the display position of the SP Reach and SPSP Reach scenes. This allows users to recognize the approximate time until the acquisition limit device is activated while also drawing their attention to the SP Reach and SPSP Reach.

(Main control board's acquisition limit device activation determination process)
The acquisition limit device operation determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 44. Figure 44 is a flowchart of the acquisition limit device operation determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-4-1, the main CPU 110a references the value of the maximum increment stored in the main RAM 110c. After referencing the value of the maximum increment, the process proceeds to step S450-4-2.

In step S450-4-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). If it determines that the maximum increase has reached the predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the process proceeds to step S450-4-3. If it determines that the maximum increase has not reached the predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the process proceeds to step S450-4-9.

Furthermore, the control program (main control program) that determines whether the main CPU 110a has reached a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) in this process can also be considered a detection means that detects specific information that is counted when the counting conditions are met.

In step S450-4-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the value of the special symbol and special electric processing data to determine whether the value of the special symbol and special electric processing data is "3" (during a jackpot game). If the value of the special symbol and special electric processing data is "3" (during a jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S450-4-4. If the value of the special symbol and special electric processing data is not "3" (during a jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S450-4-5. Note that in the case of the aforementioned Type 1 and Type 2, or the Small Win RUSH type, the process may also include a determination of whether a small win game or a jackpot game is in progress.

In step S450-4-4, the main CPU 110a turns on the operation recognition flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. While it is expected that this process will occur multiple times during a jackpot game, once the operation recognition flag is turned on, it is not necessary to turn it on again each time the process is initiated (no action is required in this process). Turning on the operation recognition flag then terminates the current acquisition limit device operation determination process.

In step S450-4-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the operation recognition flag is ON or OFF. If the operation recognition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S450-4-3. If the operation recognition flag is NOT ON, the current acquisition limit device operation determination process is terminated.

The "operation recognition flag" is a flag that is turned ON when the maximum increase count reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), but the acquisition limit device cannot be activated immediately (for example, during a jackpot game). By setting this flag, it is possible to prevent situations where, for example, the increase count counter value is adjusted to less than 95,000 at the end of a jackpot game, and the acquisition limit device does not activate because the increase count counter value at the end of the jackpot game is 94,900. In other words, once the maximum increase count reaches the predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the acquisition limit device will activate even if the increase count counter value at the end of subsequent jackpot games falls below 95,000. This contributes to healthy gameplay.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns ON the acquisition limit device activation flag in the main RAM 110c. As mentioned above, this flag will not turn OFF until the main RAM 110c is initialized (RWM cleared). Therefore, even if the control state before the power outage is restored (power restored), this flag will remain active.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a outputs a launch permission signal that the main control board 110 has given permission to launch game balls to the launching device. This makes it impossible for the launching device to launch game balls.

In step S450-4-7, the main CPU 110a sets a command to activate the winning limit device. Specifically, to transmit information that the winning limit device has been activated to the performance control board 130, the command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 displays, for example, a message on the first image display device 70 in white text on a black background, such as "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today." This allows the player to understand that they can no longer continue playing.

In step S450-4-8, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, it sets Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. As a result, the gaming machine information center can finally confirm that the acquisition limit device has been activated.

After the processing in step S450-4-6 is completed, game progress control (specific control processing) will not be performed until the power supply is completely cut off, making it impossible to launch game balls. However, error detection processing in the main control board 110, error detection processing in the frame control board 120, and error notification processing in the performance control board 130 can still be executed. For example, if the main control board 110 detects a magnet after the processing in step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" (described later) via voice notification, image notification, and illuminated notification. Similarly, if the frame control board 120 detects a fraudulent radio wave after the processing in step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraudulent Radio Wave Detection Error" (described later) via voice notification, image notification, and illuminated notification. This allows the security level to be maintained even after the "Acquisition Limit Device" is activated.

Furthermore, after completing step S450-4-6, error-related processing may also be stopped. That is, after completing step S450-4-6, for example, since no prize balls are awarded even if game balls are placed into each prize slot, attempting to cheat using magnets or the like would yield little (or no) results. Therefore, the error detection processing in the main control board 110 and frame control board 120, and the error-related command reception and notification processing in the performance control board 130, may be stopped. This reduces the control load on each control board.

Furthermore, after completing step S450-4-6, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, making it impossible to launch game balls. However, the functions for adjusting volume and light intensity on the performance control board 130 (volume and light intensity adjustment by the player) remain operational. This increases the degree of freedom in adjusting volume and light intensity.

If the power switch 164 is turned OFF after the acquisition limit device has been activated, and then only the power switch 164 is turned ON without pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, a notification "Acquisition limit device is operating. Please clear RWM" will be executed. However, if, for example, the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S15 of the main processing executed when the power switch 164 is turned ON, an irrecoverable error will occur in step S17, and the process in step S29, which sends the acquisition limit device activation command (the command to execute the above notification), will not be executed. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c, even if the power is turned ON after the acquisition limit device has been activated, the above notification (acquisition limit device activation notification) will not be executed, and an RWM abnormality error will be notified. In this case, since the process in step S29 is not executed, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be performed as an audio notification, screen notification, or illuminated notification. This allows for priority notification of RWM abnormality errors, even in situations where RWM clearing is required after the acquisition limit device has activated, enabling employees to respond promptly.

(Error control processing on the main control board)
The error control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 45. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the error control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S550-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the magnet detection flag is set and whether an abnormal magnetism has been detected by the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b over a predetermined period. If it determines that an abnormal magnetism has been detected over the predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S550-2. If it determines that no abnormal magnetism has been detected over the predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S550-4.

In step S550-2, the main CPU 110a sets a magnet detection flag in the main RAM 110c and sets a magnet detection specification command in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area in order to transmit information about the detection of a magnet to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 reports a magnet detection error. Details of this magnet detection error will be described later.

In step S550-3, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 during the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This allows the gaming machine information center to ultimately confirm that magnet detection has occurred.

In step S550-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is a discrepancy between the number of balls that enter the game and the number of balls that are ejected. Specifically, it determines whether there is a discrepancy between the number of game balls that enter the various entry points (general entry point 43, first start point 45, second start point 47, large entry point 50) and the number of game balls ejected from the entry point flow path (game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a). If a discrepancy is found, the process proceeds to step S550-5; otherwise, the error control process ends.

In step S550-5, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal prize detection flag in the main RAM 110c and sets an abnormal prize designation command in the main RAM 110c's performance transmission data storage area in order to transmit information about the detected abnormal prize to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 reports an abnormal prize error. Details of this abnormal prize error will be described later.

In step S550-6, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that an abnormal prize entry error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 4 of "Fraud Detection State 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" with Bit 4 of "Fraud Detection State 1" set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be transmitted to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. As a result, the gaming machine information center can finally confirm that magnet detection has been performed. Then, the error control process is terminated.

(Main control board's HC/fraud monitoring information management processing)
The HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110 will be explained using Figure 46. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S600-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether 108ms has elapsed. For example, in the time control processing of step S110 of the main control board timer interrupt processing (every 4 milliseconds), the counter is updated, and when it reaches 27 counts (4 mm x 27 = 108 mm), it is determined that 108ms has elapsed. Note that the counter update should start in the first time control processing after the interrupt is permitted, and thereafter, after 27 counts, it should be cleared (set to 0) and counted again. If it is determined that 108ms has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S650-2; if it is determined that 108ms has not elapsed, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated.

In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a notifies the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). That is, it transmits "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" to the frame control board 120 every 108ms. While the HC/fraud monitoring information management process is executed within the main control board timer interrupt processing, it may also be executed in the main control board's main processing.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S600-4, it determines whether it has responded with a response regarding the receipt of the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). If it has responded with a response regarding the receipt of the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information), it terminates the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process. If it has not responded with a response regarding the receipt of the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information), it proceeds to step S600-5. In other words, it determines whether it has received a response (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of transmitting the "game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)".

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a communication line disconnection error command in the main RAM 110c's data storage area for performance transmission, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication line with the frame control board 120, and terminates the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 reports the communication line disconnection error.

Furthermore, if there is a possibility of a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, the game progress control (specific control processing) may be prevented from being executed, or the launch permission signal may be turned OFF to prevent the launch of game balls. This prevents the game from continuing despite a disconnection or other communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Message related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
The messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 47. Figure 47 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As shown in Figure 47, No. 1 has the message name "Gaming Machine Information Notification", transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", command "0x01", and message summary "Notification of gaming machine information". No. 2 has the message name "Counting Notification", transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", command "0x02", and message summary "Notification of counting information". No. 3 has the message name "Loan Notification", transmission direction "Dedicated Unit 170 → Frame Control Board 120", command "0x13", and message summary "Notification of loan information". No. 4 has the message name "Loan Receipt Result Response", transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170", command "0x03", and message summary "Response of loan information receipt result". In this context, "gaming machine information" refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information" and "gaming machine performance information."

(Gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The game machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 48. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the game machine information notification.

The "Gaming Machine Information Notification" is structured as shown in Figure 48. No. 1 is the data name "Message Length" with content "0x12 to 0x39". No. 2 is the data name "Command" with content "0x01". No. 3 is the data name "Communication Serial Number" with content "Sequence Number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 is the data name "Gaming Machine Type" related to gaming machine information, with content "Type of Gaming Machine". Note that the gaming machine type is the same as explained in the gaming machine installation information above. No. 5 is the data name "Gaming Machine Information Type" with content "0x00: Gaming machine performance information, 0x01: Gaming machine installation information, 0x02: Hall computer/fraud monitoring information". No. 6. The data names related to the installation information of gaming machines are "Gaming Machine Performance Information," "Gaming Machine Installation Information," and "Hall Computer/Fraud Monitoring Information." The contents of Gaming Machine Performance Information, Gaming Machine Installation Information, and Hall Computer/Fraud Monitoring Information will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit)
The gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 49. Figure 49 is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information.

The gaming machine performance information consists of 10 data points. The first is named "Total Number of Balls Launched" and contains the content "0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 to 16,777,215 balls)". The second is named "Total Number of Balls Acquired (Total Prize Balls)" and contains the content "0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 to 16,777,215 balls)". The third is named "Payout Rate" and contains the content "0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0% to 65,535%)". The fourth is named "Number of Balls Acquired Per Minute (Low Base: Non-Short Time State)" and contains the content "0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65,535 balls)". The fifth is named "Ratio of Prizes" and contains the content "0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%)". The sixth entry is named "Continuous Bonus Ratio" and contains the content "0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%)". The seventh entry is "Number of Jackpots" and contains the content "0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 times)". The eighth entry is named "Maximum Payout" and contains the content "0x00000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 balls to 16,777,215 balls)". The ninth entry is named "Reserve" and contains the content "Reserve (fixed at 0x00)". The tenth entry is named "Reservation" and contains the content "Used on SC board (fixed at 0x00)".

Furthermore, "payout rate" is a value calculated as total number of game balls acquired ÷ total number of game balls launched × 100, "number of game balls acquired per minute" is the number of game balls acquired in any one minute in a low base (non-shortened time) state, "prize ratio" is a value calculated as number of game balls acquired not by entering the general prize slot (number of game balls acquired in auxiliary games, minor prize games, and big prize games) ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100, "consecutive prize ratio" is a value calculated as number of game balls acquired in big prize games ÷ total number of game balls acquired × 100, and "maximum payout" is the largest positive value (difference in balls) while the counter, which is a positive value ("1" or more) while it is positive (until it becomes "0"), is being used. Each time a prize ball is awarded based on entering a prize slot, the number of prize balls (number of game balls acquired) is added, and each time a game ball is launched into the game area, the counter is subtracted by 1 with a lower limit of "0". In other words, if we use a slump graph as an analogy, where the graph rises with the awarding of prize balls and falls with the release of game balls, the value of the number of game balls (difference in ball count) at the peak of the slump graph, from the point where the upward trend begins with the awarding of prize balls until the graph returns to its starting point, is the value of the number of game balls acquired at that time.

(Gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 50. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine installation information consists of six data items. The first is named "Main Control Chip ID Number" and contains "The gaming machine's main control chip ID number." The second is named "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code" and contains "The manufacturer code listed in the main control chip's management area." The third is named "Main Control Chip Product Code" and contains "The product code listed in the main control chip's management area." Note that the Main Control Chip ID Number, although omitted in the diagram, is the manufacturer-specific ID number for the main control chip. For example, a main control chip from manufacturer A would send a 9-byte data message consisting of the chip's individual number "23456789" plus an identification code. A main control chip from manufacturer B would send a 9-byte data message consisting of the chip's individual number "45678912" plus an identification code.

The fourth data entry is named "Frame Control Chip ID Number" and contains "The frame control chip ID number of the gaming machine." The fifth data entry is named "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code" and contains "The manufacturer code written in the frame control chip's management area." The sixth data entry is named "Frame Control Chip Product Code" and contains "The product code written in the frame control chip's management area." Note that the frame control chip ID number, although omitted in the diagram, is the manufacturer-specific ID number for each frame control chip. For example, a frame control chip from manufacturer A will send a 9-byte data message consisting of the individual chip number "34567891" plus an identification code. A frame control chip from manufacturer B will send a 9-byte data message consisting of the individual chip number "56789123" plus an identification code.

(Hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to a dedicated unit)
Using Figure 51, we will explain the hall control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the hall control and fraud monitoring information.

The hall control and fraud monitoring information consists of 10 data points. The first is named "Number of Balls Played," with the content "Current number of balls (owned by the player): 0x000000 to 0x301B0F (0 to 990000 balls)." The second is named "Number of Balls Launched," with the content "Number of balls launched: 0x80 to 0x7F (-128 to 127 balls)." The third is named "Total Prize Balls," with the content "Sum of prize balls (count information 1 to n) x number of winning balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255 balls)."

The fourth item is data named "Main Control State 1," with the following content: "Bit0: Jackpot 1, Bit1: Jackpot 2, Bit2: Jackpot 3, Bit3: Game Machine Status Signal 1, Bit4: Game Machine Status Signal 2, Bit5: Game Machine Status Signal 3, Bit6: Game Machine Status Signal 4, Bit7: Unused." Specifically, the ON/OFF states of Bits 0-2 indicate whether a jackpot game is not being played or which of the seven types of jackpot games is being played. The ON/OFF states of Bits 3-6 indicate which of the 16 game states is being played. Details of Main Control State 1 have been described above, so a further explanation is omitted here.

The fifth item is data named "Main Control State 2," with the following content: "Bit0: During jackpot gameplay + during time-saving mode or advantageous state, Bit1: During high probability mode, Bit2: During time-saving mode or advantageous state, Bits 3-7: Unused." For example, during jackpot gameplay, Bit0 is ON ("1"), and Bit1 and Bit2 are OFF ("0"). During time-saving gameplay, Bit0 and Bit2 are ON ("1"), and Bit1 is OFF ("0"). Details of Main Control State 2 have been explained above, so a further explanation is omitted here.

The sixth item is named "Gaming Machine Error Status," and its contents are "Bit0-Bit5: Error Code, Bit6: Frame Control/Main Control, Bit7: Alarm Only/Alarm + Hall Computer Output." For example, if an error is detected by the frame control board 120, Bit6 will be OFF ("0"), and if the error triggers an alarm and outputs to the hall computer, Bit7 will be ON ("1").

The seventh item is named "Fraud Detection Status 1 (Main Control)" and contains the following information: "Bit0: Setting Change Signal, Bit2: Setting Confirmation Signal, Bit2: RWM Clear Signal, Bit3: Fraud Detection Signal 1, Bit4: Fraud Detection Signal 2, Bit5: Fraud Detection Signal 3, Bit6: Acquisition Limit Device Activated Signal, Bit7: Unused." Specifically, it indicates whether or not an event controlled or detected by the main control board 110 has occurred. For example, if a setting change is in progress, Bit0 will be ON "1," and if an error corresponding to Fraud Detection Signal 1 occurs, Bit3 will be ON "1." Details of Fraud Detection Status 1 have been described above, so a further explanation is omitted here.

The eighth item is named "Fraud Detection Status 2 (Frame Control)" and has the following content: "Bit0: Glass frame open, Bit1: Inner frame open, Bit2: Fraudulent radio wave detection, Bit3: Game ball count clear detection, Bit4: Winning ball count abnormality detection, Bit5: Launch ball count abnormality detection, Bit6-Bit7: Unused". Specifically, it indicates whether or not an event detected by the frame control board 120 has occurred. For example, if the glass frame 4 is open, Bit0 will be ON "1", and if the game ball count has been cleared, Bit3 will be ON "1". Details of Fraud Detection Status 2 will be described later.

The ninth entry is a data entry with the name "Fraud Detection Status 3 (Frame Control)," and its content is "Bit0: Small Ball Detection, Bit1: Steel Ball Detection, Bit2-Bit7: Unused." For example, if a small ball, which is smaller than a standard-sized game ball, is detected, Bit0 will be set to ON "1." Details of Fraud Detection Status 2 will be described later.

The tenth entry is named "Game Information." Specifically, it includes the following entries: "Number of Game Information Items," "Number of Type Information/Count Information Items (n): n = 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 items)," "Type Information 1," "Type Information 1," "Count Information 1," "Type Information n," "Count Information n," and "Count Information n."

Specifically, "count information" refers to, in the first example, when one game ball enters the first starting opening 45, the "data indicating the first starting opening 45," the "data indicating the number of balls entered (1)," and the "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." Similarly, in the second example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 50, the "data indicating the large prize opening 50," the "data indicating the number of balls entered (1)," and the "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)" are included. Furthermore, in the third example, when one game ball passes the out-ball detection switch 39a, the "data indicating the out-ball detection switch 39a" and the "data indicating the number of balls passed (1)" are included. Details of the game information have been described above, so further explanation is omitted here.

(House control system/fraud detection status of fraud monitoring information)
The fraud detection status of the hall control fraud monitoring information will be explained using Figure 52. Figure 52(a) shows fraud detection status 2, and Figure 52(b) shows fraud detection status 3.

"Fraud Detection State 2" is defined as follows: Bit0: Name "Glass Frame Open," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Glass Frame Open Detected"; Bit1: Name "Inner Frame Open," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Inner Frame Open Detected"; Bit2: Name "Fraudulent Radio Wave Detected," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Fraudulent Radio Wave Detected"; Bit3: Name "Game Ball Count Clear Detected," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Game Ball Count Clear Detected"; Bit4: Name "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Detected," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Detected"; Bit5: Name "Abnormal Number of Launched Balls Detected," Details: "0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Number of Launched Balls Detected"; Bits 6 and 7: Name "Unused," Details: "Fixed at 0".

"Fraud Detection State 3" has the following characteristics: Bit0 is named "Small Ball Detected," details "0 = Normal, 1 = Small Ball Detected"; Bit1 is named "Steel Ball Detected," details "0 = Normal, 1 = Steel Ball Detected"; and Bits 2 through 7 are named "Unused," details "Fixed at 0."

(Gaming information from hall computer and fraud monitoring information)
Figure 53 will be used to explain the game information in the hall computer and fraud monitoring information. Figure 53 is a diagram showing game information.

The "game information" consists of two bytes: "type information (1 byte)" and "count information (1 byte)". Furthermore, the "type information (1 byte)" is composed of "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "data number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)".

The "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is, for example, Bit4-Bit7 "0000 (=0)" is the type name "Unused" and content "-", Bit4-Bit7 "0001 (=1)" is the type name "Starting Gate Win" and content "Notification that a prize has been won in the starting gate", Bit4-Bit7 "0010 (=2)" is the type name "Grand Prize Gate Win" and content "Notification that a prize has been won in the grand prize gate", and Bit4-Bit7 "0011 (=3)" is the type name "Prize Gate Win" and content "Prize Gate Win The notification is "You have won a prize," and Bit4 to Bit7 "0100 (=4)" is of the type name "All starting gates entered," and the content is "Notification of passing through a starting gate or regular gate related to the game," and Bit4 to Bit7 "0101 (=5)," "0110 (=6)," "0111 (=7)," and "1000 (=8)" are of the type name "Unused," and the content is "-," and Bit4 to Bit7 "1001 (=9)" is of the type name "Number of times symbols have been confirmed," and the content is "Notification of the number of times symbols related to the game have changed," and Bit4 to B it7 "1010 (=10)" is type name "Number of Big Wins" and content "Notifies that the continuous mechanism operation device has been activated", Bit4 to Bit7 "1011 (=11)" is type name "Unused" and content "-", Bit4 to Bit7 "1100 (=12)" is type name "Number of Mechanism Activations (Number of Big Prize Openings)" and content "Notifies of the opening of the big prize opening when the continuous mechanism operation device is not activated if you want to use the number of times the big prize opening is opened during a small win as the starting number" (Figure 15 "Big Win Game 3 (4 Rounds)" The first round of the "Round" (see the small win game) is as follows: Bits 4-7 "1101 (=13)" are of the type "Specific Area Passed" with the content "Notifies that a specific area has been passed" (see "Specific Area" in Figure 15); Bits 4-7 "1110 (=14)" are of the type "Reserve" with the content "Used when notifying data other than data types 1-4, 9, 10, 12, and 13"; and Bits 4-7 "1111 (=15)" are of the type "Unused" with the content "-".

The "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" will notify the content (starting gate number) if the "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is "Starting Gate Entry," and will be one of the following: Bit0-Bit3 "0001 (=1)" (entry into starting gate 1), "0010 (=2)" (entry into starting gate 2), or "0011 (=3)" (entry into starting gate 3) (any other values are unused). For example, if a game ball enters the first starting gate 45, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "0001" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Winning in Grand Prize Lot," then the content (Grand Prize Lot Number) will be either "0001 (=1)" (winning in Grand Prize Lot 1) or "0010 (=1)" (winning in Grand Prize Lot 2) (any other values are unused). For example, if a game ball enters Grand Prize Lot 50, the data type information (1 byte) will be notified, consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "0010 (=2)" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)."

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Winning at Prize Entrance," then the content (prize entrance number) will be one of the following: Bit 0-Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning at prize entrance 1), "0010 (=2)" (winning at prize entrance 2), ... "1111 (=15)" (winning at prize entrance 15). ("0000 (=0)" is unused.) For example, if a game ball enters the general prize entrance 43 located at the lower right of the decorative frame 40, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "0011 (=3)" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" is "All Start Entrances Entered," the content will be notified as "0001 (=1)" (entrance or passage) in Bit0-Bit3 (other values are unused). For example, if a game ball enters the first start entrance 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified. If a game ball passes through the general gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit4-Bit7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit0-Bit3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Symbol Confirmation Count," the content will be "0001 (=1)" in Bits 0-3 (the number of times the symbols related to the game (special symbols, regular symbols) have been confirmed) (other values are unused). For example, if the first special symbol stops, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" as "1001 (=9)" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" as "0001 (=1)" will be notified. The same type information will be notified if the second special symbol stops. Similarly, the same type information will be notified if a regular symbol stops.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Number of Jackpots," then the content will be "0001 (=1)" in Bits 0-3 (indicating the continuous activation of the special feature), and this will be notified (other values will be unused). For example, if the first jackpot (see Figure 12) occurs, the type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "1010 (=10)" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" is "Number of Bonus Feature Counts (Number of times the big prize slot opens)," then the content will be "0001 (=1)" (Bonus Feature 1) in Bits 0-3 (others are unused). For example, if "Big Win Game 3" as explained in Figure 15 is executed, then type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4-Bit 7)" being "1100 (=12)" and "Data Number (Bit 0-Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" is "Passing through a specific area," the content will be "0001 (=1)" (Specific Area 1) in Bits 0-3 (others are unused). For example, when "Big Win Game 3" as explained in Figure 15 is executed and the game ball passes through a specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" being "1101 (=13)" and "Data Number (Bits 0-3)" being "0001 (=1)" will be notified.

Furthermore, regarding the count information in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in Figure 22, if Bits 4 to 7 are "unused" and "fixed at 0," and Bits 0 to 3 are "0001 (=1)," it indicates that "the number of times the specific area has been passed is 1" (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1) in Figure 22, when a game ball passes through specific area 1 once, the game information "0xD101" is notified. This information consists of type information (1 byte) where "data type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "1101 (=13)" and "data number (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001 (=1)," and count information (1 byte) where "unused (Bits 4 to 7)" is "0000 (=0)" and "number of passes (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001 (=1)" (1 time).

If "Data Type (Bits 4-7)" is "Reserve," the content will be one of the following: Bits 0-3 "0001 (=1)," "0010 (=2)," "0011 (=3)," or "0100 (=4)" (reserve number) (others are unused).

(Counting notification transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The counting notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 54. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the counting notification.

The "Count Notification" is structured as shown in Figure 54. No. 1 is data named "Message Length" with content "0x07". No. 2 is data named "Command" with content "0x02". No. 3 is data named "Count Sequence Number" with content "Sequence Number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 is data named "Counted Balls" with content "Counted Balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 5 is data named "Cumulative Counted Balls" with content "Cumulative Counted Balls: 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 balls)". No. 6 is data named "Checksum" with content "-".

(Loan notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board)
The loan notification transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 55. Figure 55 is a diagram showing the loan notification.

The "Loan Notification" is structured as shown in Figure 55. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and content "0x13". No. 3 has the data name "Loan Serial Number" and content "Sequence Number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the data name "Number of Loaned Balls" and content "Number of Loaned Balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255 balls)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and content "-".

(Loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 56. Figure 56 is a diagram showing the loan receipt result response.

The "Loan Receipt Result Response" is structured as shown in Figure 56. No. 1 is data named "Message Length" with content "0x05". No. 2 is data named "Command" with content "0x03". No. 3 is "Loan Serial Number" with content "Sequence Number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 is "Loaned Ball Count Receipt Result" with content "Loaned Ball Count Receipt Result: 0x00 = Normal, 0x01 = Abnormal (During ball removal operation, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 100,000 or more)". No. 5 is data named "Checksum" with content "-".

(Basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
The basic communication sequence between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained using Figure 57.

First, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the first message sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is the game machine information notification (serial number = n). 90-100ms later, the second message sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is the counting notification (counting serial number = m). Then, within 170ms, the third message sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 is the loan notification (serial number = k). Within 10ms of that, the fourth message sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is the loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball count receipt result.

Subsequently, after more than 20 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response, and 300 ms has elapsed since the transmission of the first game machine information notification, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number = n+1), is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. After that, messages are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, repeating the first to fourth communication sequences in a 300 ms cycle.

(Startup sequence 1 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 58, the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case in which the gaming machine 1 starts up first) will be explained.

First, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is off, the VL (connection confirmation power) of the frame control board 120 is OFF, and the VL (connection confirmation power) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are OFF. Then, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is turned on simultaneously, the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 begin to start up.

Subsequently, once the gaming machine 1 has finished starting up before the dedicated unit 170, messages such as gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications are sequentially transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence described above. However, because the dedicated unit 170 is still starting up, it is unable to receive the transmitted messages.

Once the dedicated unit 170 has finished starting up, the VL (connection confirmation power) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are turned ON, enabling the game machine 1 to launch game balls and enabling the operation of the counting button 20. After that, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300ms cycle in Figure 57, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

(Startup sequence 2 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 59, the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case in which the dedicated unit 170 starts up first) will be explained.

First, when the dedicated unit 170 is powered on prior to the gaming machine 1, the dedicated unit 170 begins to start up. Once the dedicated unit 170 has finished starting up, its VL (connection confirmation power) and PSI (counting valid signal) are turned ON, and it enters a state of waiting to connect with the gaming machine 1.

Subsequently, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 begins to start up. Once the gaming machine 1 has finished starting up, it becomes possible to launch game balls, and the counting button 20 becomes operational. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300ms cycle in Figure 57.

(Gaming machine information notification sequence 1 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 60, the game machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (in the case where game information related to the game is not held at the timing of sending the game machine information notification) will be explained.

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a waiting state to connect with the gaming machine 1. Once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the gaming machine 1 becomes capable of launching game balls, and the counting button 20 becomes operational. Then, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300ms cycle in Figure 57, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, 60 seconds after the completion of the startup of the gaming machine 1, and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, when it is time to notify the gaming machine installation information, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information as the tenth message shown in the figure to the dedicated unit 170. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle in Figure 57.

Furthermore, if the timing of two notifications—game machine installation information and game machine performance information—overlaps 180 seconds after the completion of game machine 1's startup and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous game machine information notification, a game machine information notification consisting of the higher-priority game machine installation information is transmitted as the 11th message shown in the figure. Subsequently, messages are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response. 300 ms after the previous game machine information notification, a game machine information notification consisting of the lower-priority game machine performance information is transmitted. After this, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic 300 ms cycle basic communication sequence in Figure 57.

(Gaming machine information notification sequence 2 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 61, the game machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which game information related to the game is held at the timing of sending game machine information notification) will be explained.

First, the dedicated unit 170 is in a waiting state to connect with the gaming machine 1. Once the gaming machine has finished starting up, the gaming machine 1 becomes capable of launching game balls, and the counting button 20 becomes operational. Then, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300ms cycle in Figure 57, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

Then, 60 seconds after the completion of the startup of the gaming machine 1, and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, becomes the timing for the notification of gaming machine installation information. However, since the game information related to the game is still held at this point, the sixth message shown in the figure is not gaming machine installation information, but rather a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall computer and fraud monitoring information including game information is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. Subsequently, messages are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is transmitted 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle in Figure 57.

Furthermore, the timing for notifying the gaming machine performance information occurs 180 seconds after the gaming machine 1 has finished starting up and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification has been sent. However, since the game information related to the game is still held at this point, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of game information and hall computer/fraud monitoring information, rather than gaming machine performance information, as the 15th message shown in the figure. Subsequently, messages are sent and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, and a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information is sent 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, lending receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic 300 ms cycle basic communication sequence in Figure 57.

(Counting notification sequence 1 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 62, the counting notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (in the case where no communication error occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170) will be explained.

First, when the player has 1000 game balls and the dedicated unit 170 has stored the player's number of balls as 100, the counting button 20 on the game machine 1 is pressed. Then, when it is time to send the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, the frame control board 120 sends the game machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message. After 100ms, 250 game balls are deducted from the player's total, resulting in 750 balls. A second message is then sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 250). The dedicated unit 170 then adds 250 balls to the player's stored total, resulting in 350 balls.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120: a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0). Within 10 ms of that, a fourth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received result = normal). The dedicated unit 170 then confirms the number of loaned balls received.

Furthermore, 300ms after the previous game machine information notification is sent, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 750), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. 100ms after that, 250 game balls are subtracted from the number of game balls the player possesses, resulting in 500. Then, as the sixth message, a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 500) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that the game balls (game value) have been counted. At this point, 250 balls are added to the number of game balls the player holds, which is stored in the dedicated unit 170, resulting in 600 balls.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the seventh message. Within 10 ms of that, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+1, number of loaned balls received result = normal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth message, and the number of loaned balls received result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Subsequently, after the counting button 20 of the gaming machine 1 is released, and 300 ms have elapsed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 500) as the ninth message to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification (counting serial number = m+2, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 500) as the tenth message to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification (loan serial number = k+2, number of loaned balls = 0) as the 11th message to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms of that, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+2, number of loaned balls received result = normal) as the 12th message to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the number of loaned balls received. After that, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic 300 ms cycle basic communication sequence in Figure 57.

(Counting notification sequence 2 for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 63, we will explain the counting notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (in the case where a communication error occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player has 1000 game balls and the dedicated unit 170 has stored the player's number of balls as 100, the counting button 20 on the game machine 1 is pressed. Then, when it is time to send the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, the frame control board 120 sends the game machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first message. After 100ms, 250 game balls are deducted from the player's total, resulting in 750 balls. A second message is then sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 250). The dedicated unit 170 then adds 250 balls to the player's stored total, resulting in 350 balls.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120: a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0). Within 10 ms of that, a fourth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received result = normal). The dedicated unit 170 then confirms the number of loaned balls received.

Furthermore, 300ms after the previous game machine information notification is sent, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 750), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. 100ms after that, 250 game balls are subtracted from the number of game balls the player possesses, resulting in 500 balls. Then, as the sixth message, a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 250, cumulative number of balls counted = 500) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that the game balls (game value) have been counted. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 fails to receive the counting notification, and the number of game balls the player holds, as stored in the dedicated unit 170, is not updated.

Subsequently, 300ms after the previous game machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends a game machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 500) as the seventh message to the dedicated unit 170. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 fails to receive the counting notification, and the number of game balls held by the player, as stored in the dedicated unit 170, is not updated.

Then, 300ms after the dedicated unit 170 detects a communication anomaly in the game machine information notification, the VL (connection confirmation power) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (connection confirmation power) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF. As a result, the game machine 1 stops launching game balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

Subsequently, 100ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, it becomes time to transmit the count notification. However, at this point, the operation of the count button 20 is invalid (i.e., it is assumed that the count button 20 has been released). Therefore, a count notification with counted balls = 0 (count serial number m+2, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 500) is transmitted. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 cannot receive the count notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated. At this time, the dedicated unit 170 is waiting for the CU board error to be resolved. It waits until the error is resolved by the gaming staff, and once the error is resolved, it turns on the VL (connection confirmation power) and PSI (counting valid signal).

(Notification sequence 1 for loan of frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 64, we will explain the loan notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (in the case where no communication error occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, with the player possessing 50 game balls, the dispensing button on the dedicated unit 170 is pressed. Then, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the first message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: game machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 50). 100ms later, the second message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 instructing it to lend out game balls (game value). This message, a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), adds the 125 loaned balls to the number of game balls the player currently owns, resulting in 175 balls. Within 10 ms of this, a fourth message, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received result = normal), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, and the number of loaned balls received is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Subsequently, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous game machine information notification, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number n+1, game ball count 175), is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. After this, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic 300 ms periodic communication sequence in Figure 57.

(Notification sequence 2 for loan of frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 65, we will explain the loan notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which a communication error occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, with the player possessing 50 game balls, the dispensing button on the dedicated unit 170 is pressed. Then, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the first message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: game machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 50). 100ms later, the second message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0).

Then, within 170ms of receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 instructing it to lend out game balls (game value). This message, a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125), adds the 125 loaned balls to the number of game balls the player currently owns, resulting in 175 balls. Within 10ms from this point, a fourth message, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received = normal), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 fails to receive the loan receipt result response. Therefore, 10ms after the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete due to the lack of receipt of the loan receipt result response.

Furthermore, 300ms after the previous game machine information notification is sent, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 175), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. 100ms after that, the sixth message, a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0), is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170.

Then, within 170ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends (resends) a seventh message to the frame control board 120, instructing the lending of the same number of game balls (game value) as the previously sent lending notification (lending serial number = k, number of balls to lend = 125). However, since the frame control board 120 has already added the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player based on the lending notification with lending serial number = k, within 10ms, the frame control board 120 sends a lending receipt result response (lending serial number = k, number of balls received result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth message. As a result, the dedicated unit 170 confirms the number of balls received and, since the serial number matches the previous lending notification, determines that the previous lending notification has reached the frame control board 120 and completes the lending that was previously incomplete.

Subsequently, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous game machine information notification, the ninth message, a game machine information notification (serial number n+2, game ball count 175), is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. After this, messages (game machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic 300 ms periodic communication sequence in Figure 57.

(Recovery sequence in case of disconnection of the dedicated PIF connecting the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
Using Figure 66, the recovery sequence in the event of a disconnection of the dedicated PIF connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained.

First, when the player has 1000 game balls, and it is time for the game machine information notification to be sent, which occurs every 300ms, the first message sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is a game machine information notification (serial number = n, number of game balls = 1000). After 100ms has elapsed, the second message sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is a counting notification (counting serial number = m, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0). Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a third message is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120: a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0). Within 10 ms of that, a fourth message is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received result = normal). The dedicated unit 170 then confirms the number of loaned balls received.

Subsequently, more than 20 ms after the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms after the transmission of the first game machine information notification, the fifth message, a game machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 1000), is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. When a disconnection in the dedicated PIF is detected, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF. As a result, the game machine 1 stops launching game balls and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes invalid.

Subsequently, 100ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0) as the sixth message, but the PIF disconnection prevents the dedicated unit 170 from receiving the counting notification. Also, 300ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, game balls = 1000) as the seventh message, but the PIF disconnection prevents the dedicated unit 170 from receiving the gaming machine information notification. After 100ms, the frame control board 120 sends a count notification (count serial number = m+2, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0) as the eighth message to the dedicated unit 170. However, due to the PIF disconnection, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the count notification.

Then, once the disconnection in the dedicated PIF is restored (connection confirmed), the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns ON, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 also turn ON. This allows the game machine 1 to release game balls, and the operation of the counting button 20 becomes effective.

Subsequently, 300ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+3, number of game balls = 1000) as the ninth message to the dedicated unit 170. 100ms after that, the frame control board 120 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m+3, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0) as the tenth message to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a loan notification (loan serial number = 0, number of loaned balls = 0) is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 11th message. Within 10 ms of that, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls received result = abnormal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 11th message, and the number of loaned balls received result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, 300ms after the previous game machine information notification is sent, the frame control board 120 sends a game machine information notification (serial number = n+4, number of game balls = 1000) as the 12th message. 100ms after that, the frame control board 120 sends a counting notification (counting serial number = m+4, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0) as the 13th message. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 14th message. Within 10 ms thereafter, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls received result = normal) is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th message, and the number of loaned balls received result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

(Notification sequence for frame control board and dedicated unit's hall control and fraud monitoring information)
Using Figure 67, the notification sequence for the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 regarding hall control and fraud monitoring information (number of balls launched, returned balls) will be explained.

First, when the player has 1000 game balls and the dedicated unit 170 has a cumulative total of 100 balls launched, and the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification (which occurs every 300ms) arrives, the frame control board 120 sends the game machine information notification (serial number = n, game ball count = 1000) as the first message to the dedicated unit 170. 90 to 100ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the count notification as the second message to the dedicated unit 170.

Subsequently, one game ball is launched, bringing the player's game ball count to 999. Within 170ms of the count notification, a third message, a loan notification, is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120. Within 10ms of that, a fourth message, a loan receipt result response, is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball count receipt result.

Then, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the fifth message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, containing game machine installation information (serial number = n+1, number of game balls = 999, number of balls fired = 1), reflecting one ball fired. The cumulative number of balls fired stored in the dedicated unit 170 then becomes 101. 90-100ms later, the sixth message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, containing a count notification.

Subsequently, one ball is returned, bringing the player's ball count to 1000. Within 170ms of the count notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the seventh message. Within 10ms of that, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the eighth message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the number of loaned balls received.

Then, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the ninth message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, containing game machine installation information (serial number = n+2, number of game balls = 1000, number of balls launched = -1) reflecting one returned ball. The cumulative number of balls launched stored in the dedicated unit 170 then reaches 100. 90-100ms later, the tenth message is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, containing a count notification.

Furthermore, within 170 ms of the counting notification, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 11th message. Within 10 ms of that, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 12th message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball count receipt result.

Subsequently, when the timing for transmitting the game machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, arrives, the frame control board 120 transmits game machine installation information (serial number = n+3, number of game balls = 1000) as the 13th message to the dedicated unit 170. Then, one game ball is launched, bringing the player's number of game balls to 999. 90-100ms after the transmission of the game machine installation information, the frame control board 120 transmits a counting notification as the 14th message to the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, when one ball is returned and the player's number of game balls reaches 1000, a loan notification is sent from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 as the 15th message within 170ms of the counting notification. Within 10ms of that, a loan receipt result response is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as the 16th message, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball count receipt result.

Subsequently, when it is time to transmit the gaming machine information notification, which occurs every 300ms, the frame control board 120 transmits gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+4, number of game balls = 1000) as the 17th message to the dedicated unit 170. After that, messages are sent and received in the order of counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, repeating the first to fourth communication sequences every 300ms.

(Main processing of the frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 68. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W1, the frame control CPU 120a disables all interrupts, in step W2, performs initial CPU settings such as configuring internal registers, and in step W3, allows access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a backup flag indicating power restoration is saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the backup flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step W8, assuming it is the initial power-on. If the backup flag is saved, the process proceeds to step W5, assuming it is a power restoration, and calculates the checksum of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the checksum is valid. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c matches the calculated checksum. If the checksum is not valid (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step W9. If the checksum is valid (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), in step W7, the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area are cleared, and the RWM area is configured.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the game ball count storage area in the frame control RAM 120c, which stores the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and in step W9, initializes (clears to 0) the initialization target area (excluding the game ball count storage area, etc.) within the frame control RAM 120c's RWM area.

In step W10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step W15, assuming that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player will not be cleared. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, stored in the game ball count storage area of the RWM region, is cleared.

In step W12, the frame control CPU 120a sets a game ball count clear start command in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared. In step W13, it sets a game ball count clear flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, and generates hall control fraud monitoring information ("Fraud Detection Status 2" Bit 3 is "1") indicating that the game ball count has been cleared. As a result, the game ball count clear start command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for game ball count clear notification is initiated.

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If the game ball count clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step W16 without displaying the error code corresponding to the game ball count clear. If the game ball count clear flag is set, in step W15, the game ball count display 135 displays "0" and the frame control display 125 displays "H67," which is the error code corresponding to the game ball count clear.

Furthermore, the game ball count clear flag set in the frame control RAM 120c will not be cleared until game balls are launched or the game ball count is performed, and the error code "H64" will continue to be displayed on the frame control display 125. On the other hand, once game balls are launched or the game ball count is performed, the game ball count clear flag is cleared, and the display of error code "H64" on the frame control display 125 ends.

In step W16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. If the ball removal switch 122 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step W20, assuming that no ball removal operation will be performed. If the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, in step W17, a "ball removal operation in progress" command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the "ball removal operation in progress" command to the performance control board 130, triggering the execution of a ball removal operation notification.

Furthermore, after step W16, the system does not determine whether the bulb removal switch 122 has been operated. In other words, even if the bulb removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned ON, the "bulb removal operation in progress" command will not be set, nor will a notification of "bulb removal operation in progress" be issued. Nor will the "bulb removal operation in progress" flag be set, resulting in the operation of the bulb removal, nor will the specific information "-" be displayed.

In step W18, the frame control CPU 120a sets a "ball removal operation in progress" flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that the ball removal operation is in progress. This "ball removal operation in progress" flag is referenced in the ball removal operation process described later, and the ball removal operation is performed only if the "ball removal operation in progress" flag is set.

In step W19, the frame control CPU 120a displays the specific information "-" on the game ball count indicator 135 and the frame control indicator 125 to indicate that a ball removal operation is in progress. However, if the frame control indicator 125 displays the error code "H67," indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, that display takes precedence, and the specific information "-" is not displayed on the frame control indicator 125.

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a activates the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) and enables all interrupts.

In step W21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received an RWM clear command from the main control board 110. If it has not received an RWM clear command, it proceeds to step W25. If it has received an RWM clear command, in step W22, it disables interrupts. In step W23, it initializes (sets to 0) the initialization target area of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c (the storage area excluding the game ball count storage area and the storage area related to display performance information, etc., and mainly the storage area related to game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information)). In step W24, it enables interrupts.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W25 whether a power outage has occurred. If no power outage has occurred, the process moves to step W21. If a power outage has occurred, interrupts are disabled in step W26, and in step W27, the output ports are cleared to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) and various indicators (frame control indicator 125, game ball count indicator 135, etc.), and to stop the output of the launch permission signal.

In step W28, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves it to the frame control RAM 120c. In step W29, it saves a backup flag to the frame control RAM 120c indicating that the data in the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up (power has been restored). In step W30, it performs a process to prohibit RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

Thus, provided that the ball release switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to clear the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player. Therefore, if the game machine 1 has a stored number of game balls when it is shipped from the manufacturing plant to the arcade, or if a player stops playing while the game machine 1 has only a small number of game balls stored (for example, 1 ball), it becomes possible for a new player to start playing, thereby improving convenience for the arcade.

Furthermore, when the number of game balls is reset, a clear information message (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been reset is displayed on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the arcade staff. Therefore, arcade staff can easily understand when the number of game balls has been reset, improving their convenience.

Furthermore, if the power supply is restored and the game control state is restored after the game ball count has been cleared but no game balls are launched or the game ball count is not re-counted, the clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the game ball count has been cleared will be displayed again on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the game store staff. Therefore, the evidence that the game ball count has been cleared will not disappear upon power restoration, improving convenience for the game store staff.

Furthermore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated while the power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the game ball count will not be cleared, a notification of the game ball count clearing will not be issued, and clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the game ball count has been cleared will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated unintentionally during machine inspection, no problems will occur, and the convenience of the amusement parlor will not be improved.

Furthermore, under the condition that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, a ball removal operation is performed to remove (discharge) the game balls that are circulated within the game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to replace the game balls circulated within the game machine 1, preventing the use of dirty game balls and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the frame control display 125, visible to the arcade staff, and the game ball count display 135, visible to the player, display the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. Therefore, arcade staff can easily understand that the ball removal operation is in progress, improving their convenience.

Furthermore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while the power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the ball removal operation will not be notified, the ball removal operation will not be performed, and the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated unintentionally during inspection of the gaming machine, no inconvenience will occur, and the convenience of the gaming parlor will not be improved.

Furthermore, upon receiving an RWM clear command from the main control board 110, the system initializes (resets to zero) the memory areas, excluding the game ball count memory area and the memory area related to display performance information, and primarily the memory area related to game machine information (hall computer and fraud monitoring information). Therefore, when the RWM is cleared by the main control board 110, the game machine information stored in the frame control board 120 (information transmitted to the dedicated unit 170) is initialized. This eliminates discrepancies between the game machine information in the main control board 110 and the game machine information in the frame control board 120, making it possible to transmit game machine information corresponding to the RWM clear of the main control board 110 to the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, the RWM area to be initialized differs depending on whether the checksum is incorrect (i.e., there is an abnormality in the RWM area data) or whether an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the appropriate RWM area according to the type of initialization cause.

Furthermore, if the checksum is not valid (i.e., there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the initialization target areas of the frame control RAM 120c, excluding the game ball count storage area and the game ball count clear flag storage area, are initialized (cleared to zero). However, if the checksum is not valid, the game ball count storage area and the game ball count clear flag storage area may also be initialized (cleared to zero).

Furthermore, while the main process is configured to determine whether or not an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and then initialize the RWM area, it is also possible to configure the timer interrupt processing described later to determine whether or not an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and then initialize the RWM area.

(Timer interrupt processing on the frame control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 69. Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt processing is performed when a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m at predetermined intervals (4ms).

First, in step W100, the frame control CPU 120a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c, and then in step W150, performs the ball removal operation. Specifically, it drives the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) to lift the game balls recovered from the game area 5a into the lifting ball passage, and then performs a process to discharge the lifted game balls outside the game machine through a ball removal opening provided in the middle of the lifting ball passage. Details of the ball removal operation will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game machine installation information reception processing in step W200. Specifically, when it receives game machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110, it performs processing such as sending a game machine installation information response to the main control board 110. Details of the game machine installation information reception processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game machine information reception processing in step W250. Specifically, upon receiving game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110, it updates the game machine information stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sends a game machine information response to the main control board 110. Details of the game machine information reception processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball count update process in step W300. Specifically, it subtracts the game ball count in response to the launch of game balls and adds it in response to foul balls and game balls entering various prize pockets. Details of the game ball count update process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs error control processing in step W350. Specifically, it detects whether or not various errors that the frame control board 120 is monitoring have occurred, and performs processing to trigger error notification according to the type of error that has occurred (such as setting the error code to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and setting the error notification command to be sent to the performance control board 130). Details of the error control processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs display performance information calculation processing in step W400. Specifically, it counts the number of game balls launched into the game area 5a (number of out balls) and the number of game balls awarded to the player as a result of the game (number of prize balls), and then performs processing to calculate the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125 based on the counted number of game balls. Details of the display performance information calculation processing will be described later.

In step W450, the frame control CPU 120a performs a game machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 and the information regarding game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs processing to calculate game machine performance information that will be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. Details of the game machine performance information calculation process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a game machine information notification process in step W500. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit (transfer data) to the dedicated unit 170 the game machine installation information related to game machine 1, the game machine performance information calculated in the game machine performance information calculation process, and the hall computer/fraud monitoring information generated from the game machine information received from the main control board 110. Details of the game machine information notification process will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs game ball counting processing in step W550. Specifically, based on the player's operation of the counting button 20, it performs processing to transmit (transfer data) some or all of the number of game balls owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the game ball counting processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a performs the game ball lending process in step W600. Specifically, based on the lending notification sent when the player consumes the player's value (the balance of cash inserted into the dedicated unit) through a lending operation on the dedicated unit 170, the CPU adds the number of game balls notified in the lending notification to the number of game balls owned by the player (lending them out). Details of the game ball lending process will be described later.

In step W650, the frame control CPU 120a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to the performance control board 130, and to output drive data for the ball feeding unit 91, launcher 92, lifting and polishing device 95, etc., from the output port.

The frame control CPU 120a performs display control processing in step W700. Specifically, it displays the number of game balls owned by the player, the error code set in the error control processing described above, and the performance information (normal base value) calculated in the display performance information calculation processing described above on the frame control display 125, and also performs processing to display the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball count display 135. If no error code is set, the display switches between the number of game balls and the performance information every 5 seconds (game ball count → performance information for the current game section → game ball count → performance information for the previous game section → game ball count → performance information for the game section two sections ago → game ball count → performance information for the game section three sections ago, repeating). If an error code is set, the display switches between the number of game balls, the performance information, and the error code every 5 seconds.

In step W750, the frame control CPU 120a restores the information that was saved in the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W100 to the register, and terminates the current timer interrupt processing.

Furthermore, in the display control processing, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the frame control display 125 displays the error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device, the number of game balls, and performance information (normal base value). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the performance information (normal base value) may be hidden, and only the error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device and the number of game balls may be displayed. Alternatively, the number of game balls and performance information (normal base value) may be hidden, and only the error code corresponding to the acquisition limit device may be displayed.

(Ball removal operation processing of the frame control board)
The ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 70. Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W151, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a "ball removal operation in progress" flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress. If the "ball removal operation in progress" flag is not present, the current ball removal operation process is terminated. If the "ball removal operation in progress" flag is present, in step W152, the lifting and polishing device drive process is performed. Specifically, in order to discharge the game balls from the game machine through a ball removal opening located in the lifting ball passage, which is part of the game ball circulation path and slopes downward toward the ball feeding device, the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls to the lifting ball passage.

In step W153, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal lever operation error flag (described later) is present (indicating a ball removal lever operation error). If the ball removal lever operation error flag is not present, the process proceeds to step W154, assuming no ball removal lever operation error has occurred. If the ball removal lever operation error flag is present, the process proceeds to step W157, assuming a ball removal lever operation error has occurred.

In step W154, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ON state (state in which a game ball is detected) of the lift-up switch 94c, located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball extraction opening, has continued for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). If the ON state of the lift-up switch 94c has not continued for the predetermined period, the process moves to step W156. If the ON state of the lift-up switch 94c has continued for the predetermined period, the process moves to step W154, assuming that a ball extraction lever operation error has occurred, where the ball extraction lever was not operated despite the ball extraction operation being in progress, resulting in the ball extraction opening being closed (ball extraction impossible).

In step W155, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball-removal lever error flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a ball-removal lever operation error is occurring. In step W156, it sets a ball-removal lever operation error start command in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball-removal lever operation error has occurred, and terminates the current ball-removal operation process. As a result, the ball-removal lever operation error start command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to initiate ball-removal lever operation error notification is initiated.

In step W157, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift-up switch 94c, located upstream of the ball removal opening in the middle of the ball lifting passage, is in the OFF state (meaning no game balls are detected). If the lift-up switch 94c is not in the OFF state, the ball removal operation process is terminated. If the lift-up switch 94c is in the OFF state, in step W158, the ball removal lever operation error flag is cleared, and in step W159, a ball removal lever operation error termination command is set to indicate that the ball removal lever operation error has ended, and the ball removal operation process is terminated. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error termination command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the ball removal lever operation error notification is performed.

Thus, based on the fact that the ball removal operation flag is set when the power is turned ON (during the pre-loop processing of the main process), the ball removal operation, which discharges the circulating game balls to the outside of the game machine 1, is performed until the power is turned OFF. Therefore, it is possible to reliably discharge the game balls used in the circulating game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1. Furthermore, since no special operation is required to terminate the ball removal operation, it is possible to improve convenience for game store staff.

Furthermore, if the ON state of the lift-top switch 94c continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds), meaning that the ball removal operation is performed for the time necessary to discharge all the game balls that should be used in circulation to the outside of the game machine 1, but the lift-top switch 94c detects game balls and the discharge of game balls has not finished, the ball removal lever operation error notification is initiated. Therefore, it is possible to inform the game store staff if they have forgotten to operate the ball removal lever or if the ball removal operation has not finished, thereby improving the convenience of the game store staff.

Furthermore, the ball removal lever operation error notification is terminated when the lift-top switch 94c is turned OFF. Therefore, the termination of the ball removal error notification indicates that the game balls used for circulation in the game machine 1 have been discharged outside the machine, thereby improving convenience for the game store staff.

(Processing of receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board)
The process of receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 71. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the process of receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board 120.

First, in step W201, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received gaming machine installation information from the main control board 110. If it has not received gaming machine installation information, it proceeds to step W210. If it has received gaming machine installation information, in step W202, it determines whether the communication serial number included in the gaming machine installation information is "0 (fixed value)". If the communication serial number is "0", it proceeds to step W203. If the communication serial number is not "0", it considers that abnormal gaming machine installation information has been received, discards the gaming machine installation information, and terminates the current gaming machine installation information reception process.

In step W203, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game machine communication error flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that an internal communication error has occurred, specifically a communication error between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. If the internal communication error flag is not present, the process proceeds to step W206. If the internal communication error flag is present, in step W204, the internal communication error flag is cleared, and in step W205, a game machine communication error termination command, indicating that the internal communication error has ended (resolved), is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the internal communication error termination command to the performance control board 130, triggering the termination of the internal communication error notification.

In step W206, the frame control CPU 120a generates new game machine installation information from the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) identified by the received game machine installation information and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, and stores it in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W207, it determines whether there is a "ball removal operation in progress" flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress. If there is no "ball removal operation in progress" flag, the process moves to step W209. If there is a "ball removal operation in progress" flag, in step W208, it transmits a game machine installation information response (received result = ball removal state) indicating that the received result is in a ball removal state to the main control board 110, and terminates the game machine installation information reception process.

In step W209, the frame control CPU 120a transmits a game machine installation information response (received result = received OK) to the main control board 110, indicating that the reception result is OK (allowing the start of game progress control as the ball removal operation is not in progress). In step W210, the frame control board 120 outputs a launch permission signal (ON) to the launching device, authorizing the launch of game balls, and the game machine installation information reception process ends.

In step W211, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period of unreceived gaming machine installation information after the frame control board 120's startup has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 3 minutes). If the period of unreceived gaming machine installation information has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. If the period of unreceived gaming machine installation information has reached the predetermined period, in step W212, a gaming machine internal communication error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W213, a gaming machine internal communication error start designation command, indicating that a gaming machine internal communication error has started (occurred), is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. As a result, the gaming machine internal communication error start designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to start the gaming machine internal communication error notification is initiated.

Furthermore, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. However, a control program (frame control program) that determines that it could not receive information (e.g., gaming machine installation information) from the main control board 110 can also be considered a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

Thus, even when the main control board 110 receives game machine installation information, if the frame control board 120 is performing a ball removal operation, it transmits a game machine installation information response (received result = ball removal state) that prevents the main control board 110 from controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by game progress control being performed during the ball removal operation.

Furthermore, when the main control board 110 receives game machine installation information, and the frame control board 120 has not yet performed the ball removal operation, it sends a game machine installation information response (received result = received OK) that enables the main control board 110 to control the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to ensure communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 while allowing the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 to control the progress of the game.

Furthermore, if the game machine installation information cannot be received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started (3 minutes, which is the maximum startup time for the main control board 110), the system is configured to initiate a game machine communication error notification. This allows the game store staff to be notified that a game machine communication error has occurred, preventing communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, enabling them to take appropriate action.

Furthermore, even if the in-game machine communication error flag is set and communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not occurring, if the in-game machine communication error flag is subsequently cleared and the in-game machine communication error notification is terminated when the in-game machine installation information is received from the main control board 110. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of game progress control not being performed even though communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is guaranteed.

(Gaming machine information reception processing on the frame control board)
The process of receiving game machine information on the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 72. Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the process of receiving game machine information on the frame control board 120.

First, in step W251, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) that it is scheduled to receive from the main control board 110 in 108 ms. If the game machine information has not been received, the process moves to step W261. If the game machine information has been received, in step W252, it determines whether or not there is a game machine internal communication error flag in the frame control RAM 120c (i.e., whether or not a game machine internal communication error has occurred). If there is no game machine internal communication error flag, the process moves to step W255. If there is a game machine internal communication error flag, in step W253, the game machine internal communication error flag is cleared, and in step W254, a game machine internal communication error termination specification command, indicating that the game machine internal communication error has ended, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This triggers a command to terminate the in-game machine communication error, which is then sent to the performance control board 130, and the process to terminate the in-game machine communication error notification is initiated.

In step W255, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control state 1 and main control state 2 generated in the main control unit 110m (used area) in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W256, it stores the game machine error state generated in the main control unit 110m (used area) in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W257, it stores the fraud detection state 1 generated in the main control unit 110m (used area) in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W258, Next, the number of prize balls awarded for triggering special features and the number of prize balls awarded for consecutive special feature activations, generated in the main control unit 110m (used area), are stored in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W259, various game information generated in the main control unit 110m (used area) is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W260, a game machine information response (received result = received OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (successfully received) is transmitted to the main control board 110, and the game machine information reception process ends.

The various game information included in the received gaming machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) includes: the number of entries into the starting slot, the number of entries into the large prize slot due to the activation of special electric mechanisms, the number of entries into prize slots, the total number of entries into the starting slots, the number of times symbols are confirmed, the number of jackpots, the number of mechanism activations (number of times the large prize slot is opened), the number of times a specific area is passed, the pulse output from the external terminal board, and performance information status notifications.

The frame control CPU 120a determines in step W261 whether the system is currently changing settings or confirming settings. If it is changing settings or confirming settings, it does not determine whether a communication error has occurred within the gaming machine, and terminates the current gaming machine information reception process. If it is not changing settings or confirming settings, it proceeds to step W262.

In step W262, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period of no information received since the last reception of game machine information has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 1000 ms). If the period of no information received has not reached the predetermined period, the current game machine information reception process is terminated. If the period of no information received has reached the predetermined period, in step W263, a game machine communication error flag indicating that a game machine communication error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W264, a game machine communication error start specification command indicating that a game machine communication error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current game machine information reception process is terminated. As a result, the game machine communication error start specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to start the game machine communication error notification is initiated.

Thus, when a communication error flag is present within the gaming machine (indicating a communication error has occurred), the system terminates the communication error notification upon receiving gaming machine information (hall computer, fraud monitoring information, etc.) from the main control board 110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the undesirable situation where a communication error notification is issued even though communication with the main control board 110 is functioning normally, and to provide appropriate error notifications.

Furthermore, if the period since the last reception of gaming machine information reaches a predetermined time (the period during which the main control board 110 can transmit gaming machine information multiple times), the system is configured to initiate a communication error notification within the gaming machine. This allows the system to notify the staff that communication with the main control board 110 is not functioning correctly, enabling them to take appropriate action.

Furthermore, the frame control board 120 updates various game information it holds based on game machine information (hall computer and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110. Therefore, in the game machine performance information calculation process and game machine information notification process described later, it becomes possible to calculate and transmit detailed game machine performance information that aligns with actual gameplay.

Furthermore, if the system is currently changing or checking settings, the execution of the in-game machine communication error notification by sending an in-game machine communication error start command from the frame control board 120 without determining whether or not an in-game machine communication error has occurred is restricted (regulated). After the setting change or setting check is completed, the system can determine whether or not an in-game machine communication error has occurred and then send an in-game machine communication error start command from the frame control board 120 to execute the in-game machine communication error notification. Therefore, the execution of the in-game machine communication error notification during setting changes or checks will not interfere with these processes, improving convenience for arcade staff.

Furthermore, even during setting changes or setting checks, it may be possible to determine whether or not an internal communication abnormality has occurred and send an internal communication abnormality start designation command from the frame control board 120 to perform an internal communication abnormality error notification. Alternatively, when performing an internal communication abnormality error notification during setting changes or setting checks, a lower notification level may be used compared to when settings are being changed or checked (for example, displaying an error code on the frame control display 125, outputting an error notification sound from the audio output device 9, or flashing an error light on the frame lighting device 10).

Furthermore, even if the gaming machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that the payout limit device is activated, the frame control unit 120m was previously configured to continue outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device, allowing the launching of game balls. However, if the information includes information indicating that the payout limit device is activated, the frame control unit 120m may be configured to stop outputting the launch permission signal to the launching device, allowing the launching of game balls.

(Game ball count update process on the frame control board)
The game ball count update process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 73. Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the game ball count update process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W301, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not it has received a detection signal from the subtraction outlet switch 91c (i.e., whether or not a ball feed has occurred, sending game balls to the launching pad). If no detection signal is received from the subtraction outlet switch 91c, the process proceeds to step W303, assuming that no game balls will be launched. If a detection signal is received from the subtraction outlet switch 91c, the process proceeds to step W302, assuming that game balls will be launched, and the number of game balls owned by the player is reduced by 1.

In step W303, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether it has received a detection signal from the foul ball switch 93a (i.e., whether a foul ball was fired but returned without entering the game area 5a). If no detection signal is received from the foul ball switch 93a, the process proceeds to step W305, assuming no foul ball occurred. If a detection signal is received from the foul ball switch 93a, the process proceeds to step W304, assuming a foul ball occurred, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased by 1.

In step W305, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the general prize slot 43. Specifically, it determines whether the number of prize slot entries included in the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If no game ball has entered the general prize slot 43, the process moves to step W307. If a game ball has entered the general prize slot 43, in step W306, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize slot and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of entries are added to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In step W307, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the large prize slot 50. Specifically, it determines whether the number of game balls entering the large prize slot, as contained in the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110, is 1 or more. If no game ball has entered the large prize slot 50, the process moves to step W309. If a game ball has entered the large prize slot 50, in step W308, the number of prize balls corresponding to the large prize slot and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of game balls entered are added to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In step W309, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a game ball has entered the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. Specifically, it determines whether the total number of game balls entering the start openings included in the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is 1 or more. If no game ball has entered the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the game ball count update process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the process moves to step W310.

In step W310, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of winning entries for each type of starting gate. Specifically, it identifies the number of winning entries into the first starting gate 45 from the number of winning entries into the starting gates included in the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110, and calculates the number of winning entries into the second starting gate 47 from the number of winning entries into the starting gates and the total number of winning entries into the starting gates.

In step W311, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of starting gate and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of entries to the number of game balls owned by the player, and then terminates the game ball count update process. Specifically, it adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls for the first starting gate 45 and the number of prize balls entered into the first starting gate 45 calculated in step W310, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls for the second starting gate 47 and the number of prize balls entered into the second starting gate 47 calculated in step W310, to the number of game balls owned by the player.

Thus, the number of game balls a player possesses is reduced by one each time a game ball is launched, and increased by one each time a foul ball is hit. Therefore, the number of game balls a player possesses can be appropriately updated, taking foul balls into account, thus avoiding any disadvantages that could befall the player.

Furthermore, instead of the frame control board 120 monitoring ball entry into each prize slot, the main control board 110 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of balls entered into each prize slot detected by the main control board 110 to the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to connect detection switches provided at each prize slot to both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, thus preventing complicated wiring.

In this embodiment, since a game ball is always launched when a ball feed occurs (a game ball is sent to the launcher), the number of game balls owned by the player is deducted by 1 at the timing when a detection signal is received from the deducting input switch 91c. However, it is also possible to detect that a game ball has been launched when the launcher switch 92a changes from ON to OFF, and then deduct 1 from the number of game balls owned by the player based on this detection.

(Error control processing for frame control board)
The error control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 74. Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the error control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351, the frame control CPU 120a executes a severe error notification control process. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level, it performs processing to initiate error notification according to the type of severe error. Details of the severe error notification control process will be described later.

In step W352, the frame control CPU 120a executes hardware error notification control processing. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a hardware error caused by the hardware, it initiates error notification according to the type of hardware error, and based on the resolution of the hardware error, it terminates the error notification according to the type of hardware error. Details of the hardware error notification control processing will be described later.

In step W353, the frame control CPU 120a executes minor error notification control processing. Specifically, based on the occurrence of a minor error (whose security alert level is lower than that of a severe error), it initiates error notification according to the type of minor error, and then terminates the error notification according to the type of minor error once the minor error has been resolved. Details of the minor error notification control processing will be described later.

In step W354, the frame control CPU 120a executes the error code display setting process. Specifically, if any of the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 are occurring, it sets the frame control display unit 125 to display the error code (notification event code) corresponding to the highest-priority error among the currently occurring errors, according to the priority of the various errors. If no errors are detected by the frame control board 120, it performs a process to prevent the frame control display unit 125 from displaying an error code. Details regarding the priority of errors for displaying error codes will be described later.

In step W355, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device, and whether a launch permission error has occurred that restricts the launch of game balls. If the launch permission signal is being output but no launch permission error has occurred, the process moves to step W357. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch permission error has occurred, in step W356, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal to the launching device, which would otherwise allow the launch of game balls. As a result, the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding to send game balls to the launching platform and/or launching game balls from the launching platform) is stopped, and the launch of game balls is restricted.

Furthermore, the "launch permission error" in the frame control unit 120m, as detailed below, includes errors such as entrance switch disconnection, entrance switch malfunction, communication line malfunction, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation error, ball removal lever operation error, and counting processing notification when the number of game balls is less than 1000.

In step W357, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device, and whether a launch permission error has occurred that restricts the launch of game balls. If the launch permission signal is not stopped or a launch permission error has occurred, the error control process ends. If the launch permission signal is stopped but no launch permission error has occurred, in step W358, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device, and the error control process ends. This allows the launching device to operate (ball feeding to send game balls to the launching platform and/or launching game balls from the launching platform), enabling the launch of game balls.

Furthermore, if the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (feeding one game ball) has finished but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (launching one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 will be stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 is completed. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 will be stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (launching one game ball) are completed.

In this way, the frame control board 120 detects various errors (notification events), and the error codes (notification event codes) corresponding to these errors are displayed on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the amusement store staff. Therefore, the occurrence of various errors can be notified to the amusement store staff, enabling them to take appropriate action.

Furthermore, among the various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, the error codes of higher-priority errors are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the arcade staff, prioritizing those with lower priority. Therefore, arcade staff can address errors in order of priority, thus minimizing inconvenience to players.

Furthermore, while error codes (notification event codes) corresponding to various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the amusement store staff, error codes corresponding to errors detected by the main control board 110 are not displayed on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the amusement store staff. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing various errors (notification events) detected by the main control board 110 with various errors (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, which could lead to inappropriate action, thus improving convenience for the amusement store staff.

Furthermore, if a launch permission error (notification event) occurs, which would cause problems if the game balls were launched, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal, thereby stopping the launch of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems (disadvantages to the game parlor or players) from occurring due to the launch of game balls while a launch permission error (notification event) is present.

Furthermore, once a launch permission error (notification event) that would otherwise prevent the launch of the game ball is resolved, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal to allow the game ball to be launched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience (disadvantage to the game parlor or player) from occurring due to the inability to launch the game ball.

Furthermore, the frame control board 120 is designed to execute error control processing regardless of whether or not the ball removal operation is being performed. In other words, various error notifications (severe errors, hardware errors, minor errors) can be issued whether or not the ball removal operation is in progress. Therefore, the execution of the ball removal operation does not restrict the various error notifications, allowing the arcade staff to take appropriate action based on these notifications.

(Severe error notification control processing for frame control board)
The severe error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 75. Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the severe error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 54a has detected an illegal radio wave while the frame control RAM 120c does not have an illegal radio wave detection flag indicating an illegal radio wave detection error. If the illegal radio wave detection flag is present or no illegal radio waves have been detected, the process moves to step W351-3. If an illegal radio wave is detected while the illegal radio wave detection flag is absent, in step W351-2, the illegal radio wave detection flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an illegal radio wave detection specification command indicating an illegal radio wave detection error is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the illegal radio wave detection specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to start the illegal radio wave detection error notification is initiated.

In step W351-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the prize entry passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON (i.e., whether a game ball has passed through). If the prize entry passage count switch 94a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-5. If the prize entry passage count switch 94a has turned from OFF to ON, in step W351-4, the number of balls that have passed through the prize entry passage stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of notified winning balls notified from the main control board 110 and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 100). If it is not equal to or greater than the specified number, it is assumed that no winning ball count abnormality error has occurred, and the process moves to step W351-8. If it is equal to or greater than the specified number, in step W351-6, it determines whether there is a winning ball count abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred. If there is a winning ball count abnormality flag, the process moves to step W351-8. If there is no winning ball count abnormality flag, it is assumed that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred, and in step W351-7, the winning ball count abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a winning ball count abnormality specification command indicating that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This triggers a command to specify an abnormal number of winning balls, which is then sent to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error.

In step W351-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction outlet switch 91c has turned from OFF to ON (i.e., whether a game ball has passed through). If the subtraction outlet switch 91c has not turned from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-10. If the subtraction outlet switch 91c has turned from OFF to ON, in step W351-9, the number of launched balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON (i.e., whether a game ball has passed). If the foul ball switch 93a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W351-12. If the foul ball switch 93a has turned from OFF to ON, in step W351-11, the number of launched balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by -1.

In step W351-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b, located in the ball recovery path (part of the ball passage unit 94) through which the game balls recovered from the game area 5a flow, has been turned ON (i.e., whether the game balls have passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON, the process moves to step W351-14. If the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W351-13, the total number of returned balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of balls fired and the total number of balls returned is greater than or equal to a specified number (for example, 100). If it is not greater than or equal to the specified number, it is assumed that no ball-fire count anomaly error has occurred, and the severe error notification control process ends. If it is greater than or equal to the specified number, in step W351-15, it determines whether there is a ball-fire count anomaly flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that a ball-fire count anomaly error has occurred. If there is a ball-fire count anomaly flag, the severe error notification control process ends. If there is no ball-fire count anomaly flag, it is assumed that a ball-fire count anomaly error has occurred, and in step W351-16, the ball-fire count anomaly flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, a ball-fire count anomaly specification command indicating that a ball-fire count anomaly error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the severe error notification control process ends. As a result, the ball-fire count anomaly specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to start ball-fire count anomaly error notification is performed.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a severe security error, the system initiates error notification according to the type of severe error. Therefore, the security of the gaming machines can be ensured, and inconveniences such as losses to the gaming establishment or players can be suppressed.

(Hardware error notification control processing for frame control board)
The hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 76. Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the hardware error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W352-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the subtraction output switch 91c. If no disconnection has occurred in the subtraction output switch 91c, the process moves to step W352-3. If a disconnection has occurred in the subtraction output switch 91c, in step W352-2, the CPU sets an output switch disconnection flag indicating that an output switch disconnection error has occurred, and sets an output switch disconnection specification command, indicating that an output switch disconnection error has occurred, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the output switch disconnection specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the output switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines from the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a whether the subtraction output switch 91c was turned ON within a specified time. If the subtraction output switch 91c is turned ON within the specified time, the process proceeds to step W352-5, assuming that no output switch malfunction error has occurred. If the subtraction output switch 91c is not turned ON within the specified time, in step W352-4, an output switch malfunction flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an output switch malfunction error has occurred, and an output switch malfunction specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an output switch malfunction error has occurred. As a result, the output switch malfunction specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to start output switch malfunction error notification is initiated.

In step W352-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the subtraction input switch 91b. If no disconnection has occurred in the subtraction input switch 91b, the process moves to step W352-7. If a disconnection has occurred in the subtraction input switch 91b, in step W352-6, an input switch disconnection flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an input switch disconnection error has occurred, and an input switch disconnection specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an input switch disconnection error has occurred. This sends the input switch disconnection specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the input switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the OFF time (the time during which no game balls are detected) of the subtraction input switch 91b has continued for a specified time (e.g., 10 seconds). If the OFF time of the subtraction input switch 91b has not continued for the specified time, the process proceeds to step W352-9, assuming that no input switch malfunction error has occurred. If the OFF time of the subtraction input switch 91b has continued for the specified time, in step W352-8, an input switch malfunction flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an input switch malfunction error has occurred, and an input switch malfunction specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an input switch malfunction error has occurred. This sends the input switch malfunction specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the input switch malfunction error notification.

In step W352-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a. If no disconnection has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, the process moves to step W352-11. If a disconnection has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, in step W352-10, a foul ball switch disconnection flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a foul ball switch disconnection error has occurred, and a foul ball switch disconnection specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a foul ball switch disconnection error has occurred. This sends the foul ball switch disconnection specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the foul ball switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive material confirmation switch, which detects whether abrasive material for polishing the game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 is installed, is OFF (meaning no abrasive material is installed). If the abrasive material confirmation switch is not OFF, the process proceeds to step W352-14, assuming that no abrasive material installation error has occurred (meaning abrasive material is installed). If the abrasive material confirmation switch is OFF, in step W352-12, the CPU determines whether there is an abrasive material installation flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an abrasive material installation error has occurred. If the abrasive material not installed flag is present, the process proceeds to step W352-14. If the abrasive material not installed flag is not present, in step W352-13, the abrasive material not installed flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an abrasive material not installed error has occurred, and an abrasive material not installed specification command, indicating that an abrasive material not installed error has occurred, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the abrasive material not installed specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the abrasive material not installed error notification.

In step W352-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, and radio wave detection sensor 54a) are disconnected. If the processing path switches are not disconnected, the process proceeds to step W352-16, assuming that no path switch disconnection error has occurred. If the processing path switches are disconnected, in step W352-15, a path switch disconnection specification command, indicating that a path switch disconnection error has occurred, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the path switch disconnection specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the path switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive material confirmation switch has changed from OFF to ON (i.e., the abrasive material has been installed). If the abrasive material confirmation switch has not changed from OFF to ON (i.e., the abrasive material has not been installed), the process moves to step W352-18. If the abrasive material confirmation switch has changed from OFF to ON (i.e., the abrasive material has been installed), in step W352-17, the abrasive material not installed flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an abrasive material not installed termination command, indicating that the abrasive material not installed error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the abrasive material not installed termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the abrasive material not installed error notification is performed.

In step W352-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, and radio wave detection sensor 54a) have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state. If the processing path switches have not changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, the process moves to step W352-20. If the processing path switches have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, in step W352-19, a processing path switch disconnection termination command, indicating that the processing path switch disconnection error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the processing path switch disconnection termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the processing path switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-20, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error release switch 123 has been switched from OFF to ON (operated). If the error release switch 123 has not been switched from OFF to ON, the hardware error notification control process is terminated, and the error state is not to be cleared. If the error release switch 123 has been switched from OFF to ON, in step W352-21, the CPU determines whether there is an exit switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch disconnection flag, the process moves to step W352-23. If there is an exit switch disconnection flag, in step W352-22, the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch disconnection termination specification command, indicating that the exit switch disconnection error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the exit switch disconnection termination specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the exit switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an exit switch error flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch error flag, the process moves to step W352-25. If there is an exit switch error flag, in step W352-26, the exit switch error flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch error termination specification command, indicating that the exit switch error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the exit switch error termination specification command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the exit switch error notification is performed.

In step W352-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an input switch disconnection flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no input switch disconnection flag, the process moves to step W352-27. If there is an input switch disconnection flag, in step W352-26, the input switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an input switch disconnection termination command, indicating that the input switch disconnection error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the input switch disconnection termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the input switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In step W352-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch error flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch error flag, the process moves to step W352-29. If there is an entrance switch error flag, in step W352-28, the entrance switch error flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch error termination command, indicating that the entrance switch error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the entrance switch error termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the entrance switch error notification is performed.

In step W352-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a foul ball switch disconnection flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c. If the foul ball switch disconnection flag is not present, the hardware error notification control process is terminated. If the foul ball switch disconnection flag exists, in step W352-30, the foul ball switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, a foul ball switch disconnection termination command indicating that the foul ball switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the hardware error notification control process is terminated. This sends the foul ball switch disconnection termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the foul ball switch disconnection error notification is performed.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1, an error notification is initiated according to the type of hardware error. Therefore, it is possible to enable the staff of the gaming establishment to take appropriate action, thereby preventing inconveniences such as players suffering disadvantages due to being unable to play the game properly.

Furthermore, based on the resolution of a hardware error caused by the hardware of the gaming machine 1, the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error resolved is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continued display of resolved hardware error notifications from interfering with gameplay, thereby minimizing inconvenience to the gaming establishment or the player.

Furthermore, for specified hardware errors (exit switch disconnection error, exit switch malfunction error, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch malfunction error, foul ball switch disconnection error, etc.), the error notification can be terminated by operating the error release switch 123 after the cause of the hardware error has been removed. Therefore, the error notification can be terminated and gameplay can be resumed without turning off the power to the gaming machine 1, improving convenience for both the gaming parlor and the players.

(Minor error notification control processing for frame control board)
The minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 77. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the minor error notification control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W353-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a communication line error flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating a communication line error with the dedicated unit 170, and whether the VL (connection confirmation power) input from the dedicated unit 170 is OFF. If the communication line error flag is present, or if VL is ON, the process proceeds to step W353-3, assuming that no communication line error has occurred. If there is no communication line error flag and VL (connection confirmation power) is OFF, in step W353-2, the communication line error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and a communication line error specification command indicating that a communication line error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the communication line error specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to start the communication line error notification is initiated.

Furthermore, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. Such a control program (frame control program) can also be considered a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

In step W353-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a response was received within a specified time frame from the transmission of a specific message to the dedicated unit 170. If a response is received within the specified time frame, it is assumed that no communication failure error (no message response from the dedicated unit 170, indicating a communication error with the dedicated unit 170) has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-5. If no response is received within the specified time frame, in step W353-4, a communication line error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a communication failure error has occurred, and a communication failure specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a communication failure error has occurred. This sends the communication failure specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating processing to start the communication failure error notification.

In step W353-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the excess sensor 94e was turned ON during a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or jackpot game was being executed, and during a ball-launching stop when no game balls were being launched. If the excess sensor 94e is not ON, it is assumed that no ball excess error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-7. If the excess sensor 94e is ON, in step W353-6, a ball excess error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a ball excess error has occurred, and a ball excess error specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the ball excess error specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to start ball excess error notification is initiated.

In step W353-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the under-saturation sensor 94f has turned OFF during a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or jackpot game is being executed, and during a ball-launching stop when no game balls are being launched. If the under-saturation sensor 94f is not OFF, it is assumed that a ball under-saturation error, where the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is insufficient, has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-9. If the under-saturation sensor 94f has turned OFF, in step W353-8, a ball under-saturation error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a ball under-saturation error has occurred, and a ball under-saturation error specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a ball under-saturation error has occurred. As a result, the ball under-saturation error specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing to start ball under-saturation error notification is initiated.

In step W353-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the retry operation of the lifting and polishing device 95 (an operation in which the lifting mechanism is driven to lift the game balls to the lifting ball passage when the lift-down switch 94d, which is located at the downstream end of the ball recovery path and around the inlet of the lifting and polishing device 95, is ON) has failed three times in a row (i.e., the retry operation was performed, but the lift-up switch 94c, which is located at the upstream end of the ball passage and around the outlet of the lifting and polishing device 95, did not turn ON for a specified period of time). If the retry operation does not fail three times in a row, it is assumed that no lifting mechanism error has occurred in the lifting and polishing device 95, and the process proceeds to step W353-11. If the retry operation fails three times in a row, in step W353-10, a lifting mechanism error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a lifting mechanism error has occurred, and a lifting mechanism error specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a lifting mechanism error has occurred. This sends the lifting mechanism error specification command to the performance control board 130, and processing to initiate lifting mechanism error notification is initiated.

In step W353-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame release detection switch 31a has turned from ON to OFF (i.e., the glass frame 4 has been released). If the glass frame release detection switch 31a has not turned from ON to OFF (i.e., the glass frame 4 has not been released), it is assumed that a glass frame release error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to step W353-13. If the glass frame release detection switch 31a has turned from ON to OFF (i.e., the glass frame 4 has been released), in step W353-12, a glass frame release specification command indicating that a glass frame release error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the glass frame release specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the process to start the glass frame release error notification.

In step W353-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame release detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (i.e., the inner frame 3 has been released). If the inner frame release detection switch 31b has not changed from ON to OFF (i.e., the inner frame 3 has not been released), it is assumed that an inner frame release error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-15. If the inner frame release detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (i.e., the inner frame 3 has been released), in step W353-14, an inner frame release specification command indicating that an inner frame release error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the inner frame release specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating processing to start the inner frame release error notification.

In step W353-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player, as stored in the frame control RAM 120c, is "0", and whether the launcher switch 92a is ON (i.e., there are game balls on the launcher). If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0", or if the launcher switch 92a is not ON (there are no game balls on the launcher), the process proceeds to step W353-17, assuming that a launcher ball remaining error has not occurred despite the player owning "0" game balls. If the player owns "0" game balls and the launcher switch 92a is ON, in step W353-16, a launcher ball remaining error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a launcher ball remaining error has occurred, and a launcher ball remaining error specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the launcher ball remaining error specification command to the performance control board 130, initiating the launcher ball remaining error notification process.

In step W353-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player, as stored in the frame control RAM 120c, exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 40,000 balls). If the number of game balls does not exceed the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step W353-19, assuming that a game ball count overrun has not occurred. If the number of game balls exceeds the predetermined number, in step W353-18, a game ball count overrun flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a game ball count overrun has occurred, and a game ball count overrun specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the game ball count overrun specification command to the performance control board 130.

In step W353-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a communication line error flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c, and whether the VL (connection confirmation power) input from the dedicated unit 170 is ON. If the communication line error flag is not present, or if VL is OFF, the process proceeds to step W353-21, assuming the communication line error has not been resolved. If the communication line error flag is present and VL (connection confirmation power) is ON, in step W353-20, the communication line error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication line error termination command, indicating that the communication line error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the communication line error termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the communication line error notification is performed.

In step W353-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a communication line abnormality flag indicating a communication unresponsive error has occurred in the frame control RAM 120c, and whether a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170 (i.e., communication with the dedicated unit 170 is normal). If the communication unresponsive flag is not present, or if no message has been received, the process proceeds to step W353-23, assuming the communication unresponsive error has not been resolved. If the communication line abnormality flag is present and a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, in step W353-22, the communication unresponsive flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a communication unresponsive termination command indicating that the communication unresponsive error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the communication unresponsive termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the communication unresponsive error notification is performed.

In step W353-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a ball overload error flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the overload sensor 94e has switched from ON to OFF (meaning the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has decreased to an appropriate number). If the ball overload error flag is not present, or if the overload sensor 94e has not switched from ON to OFF, the process proceeds to step W353-25, assuming the ball overload error has not been resolved. If the ball overload error flag exists and the overload sensor 94e has switched from ON to OFF, in step W353-24, the ball overload error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a ball overload error termination command, indicating that the ball overload error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the ball overload error termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the ball overload error notification is performed.

In step W353-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a ball shortage error flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the shortage sensor 94f has switched from OFF to ON (meaning the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has increased to the appropriate number). If the ball shortage error flag is not present, or if the shortage sensor 94f has not switched from OFF to ON, the process proceeds to step W353-27, assuming the ball shortage error has not been resolved. If an excess error flag exists and the shortage sensor 94f has switched from OFF to ON, in step W353-26, the ball shortage error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a ball shortage error termination command, indicating that the ball shortage error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the ball shortage error termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the ball shortage error notification is performed.

In step W353-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has turned from OFF to ON (i.e., the glass frame 4 is in the closed state). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not turned from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W353-29. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has turned from OFF to ON, the glass frame 4 is considered to be in the closed state, and in step W353-28, a glass frame open termination command, indicating the termination of the glass frame open error, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the glass frame open termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the glass frame open error notification is performed.

In step W353-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame opening detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON (i.e., the inner frame 3 is in a closed state). If the inner frame opening detection switch 31b has not changed from OFF to ON, the process moves to step W353-31. If the inner frame opening detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON, the inner frame 3 is considered to be in a closed state, and in step W353-30, an inner frame opening termination command, indicating the termination of the inner frame opening error, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the inner frame opening termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the inner frame opening error notification is performed.

In step W353-31, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the launcher ball remaining error flag is present in the frame control RAM 120c and whether the launcher switch 92a is OFF (no game balls in the launcher). If the launcher ball remaining error flag is not present or the launcher switch 92a is not OFF, the process moves to step W353-33. If the launcher ball remaining error flag is present and the launcher switch 92a is OFF, in step W353-32, the launcher ball remaining error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and a launcher ball remaining error termination command, indicating that the launcher ball remaining error has been resolved, is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the launcher ball remaining error termination command to the performance control board 130, and processing to terminate the launcher ball remaining error notification is performed.

In step W353-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a game ball count overload flag and whether the number of game balls owned by the player, as stored in the frame control RAM 120c, has fallen below the specified number (40,000). If the game ball count overload flag is not present, or if the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, the minor error notification control process terminates. If the game ball count overload flag is present and the number of game balls has fallen below the specified number, the game ball count overload flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, a game ball count overload termination command indicating that the game ball count overload has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the minor error notification control process terminates. As a result, the game ball count overload termination command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

In this way, based on the occurrence of a minor error with a low security alert level, the system initiates error notification according to the type of minor error. Therefore, it is possible to enable amusement parlor staff to take appropriate action, thereby preventing inconvenience to the parlor or players.

Furthermore, based on the resolution of minor security errors, the system terminates error notifications according to the type of minor error that has been resolved. This prevents continued error notifications from disrupting gameplay and minimizes inconvenience for both the arcade and the players.

(Display content and display priority of the frame control display when various notification events occur)
Using Figure 78, the display content and display priority of the frame control display unit 125 when various notification events (such as errors) occur will be explained.

The table in Figure 78 shows the priority order for each type of notification event, the type of notification event, the detection boards that detect the occurrence of the notification event (main control board 110, frame control board 120), the main control areas used for notification (usage area of main control unit 110m, area outside the usage area of main control unit 110m, usage area of frame control unit 120m, area outside the usage area of frame control unit 120m), error code display on game ball count display 135, error code display on frame control display 125, operation restrictions (ball feeding operation to launcher, game ball launch operation, game progress control), and the state of the dedicated unit 170 during the occurrence of a notification event (based on the operation of the dispensing button on the dedicated unit 170). The system is designed to allow the player to borrow game balls within the limits of their deposit balance; to replay game balls within the limits of the number of game balls owned by the player, based on the identification information of the member card inserted by the player and the operation of the replay button on the dedicated unit 170; to count game balls from the number of game balls stored on the frame control board 120 based on the operation of the counting button 20 on the game machine 1 (storing the number of game balls, linked to the identification information of the member card or visitor card); to control card operations (inserting a member card or visitor card into the dedicated unit 170, and returning a member card or visitor card based on the operation of the return button on the dedicated unit 170); and to control whether or not to deposit funds into the dedicated unit 170.

For example, "clearing the game ball count" has the highest priority (number 1). The frame control board 120 detects the occurrence of a game ball count clear. When detecting and notifying of a game ball count clear, the frame control unit 120m's operating area is primarily used, with the area outside of it used as a secondary area. The game ball count display 135 does not display the game ball count clear error code, while the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67." When a game ball count clear occurs, the following operational restrictions remain: ball feeding, launching, and game progress control are possible. The dedicated unit 170 allows control of lending/replay, counting, card operation (insertion/return), and deposits.

Furthermore, even if a notification event occurs that allows ball feeding, launching, or game progress control, such as "ball count cleared," or if the corresponding notification is being executed, if a notification event that restricts (regulates) one or more of the ball feeding, launching, or game progress control occurs simultaneously or in parallel, the corresponding action among the ball feeding, launching, or game progress control will be restricted (regulated).

Furthermore, if a notification event occurs that allows lending/replaying, counting, card operation, or depositing, such as "clearing the number of game balls," or if the corresponding notification is being executed, and if a notification event that restricts (regulates) one or more of the controls related to lending/replaying, counting, card operation, or depositing occurs simultaneously or in parallel, then the corresponding control among those related to lending/replaying, counting, card operation, or depositing will be restricted (regulated).

Thus, the "game ball count clearing" event, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, takes higher priority than the various notification events detected by the main control board 110. Therefore, the frame control display 125 can appropriately notify (display an error code) that the number of game balls owned by the player (game value), which is of utmost importance to the player, has been cleared.

Furthermore, among the various notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the "game ball count clear" event, which clears the number of game balls owned by the player, has the highest priority. Therefore, the frame control display 125 can appropriately notify (display an error code) that the number of game balls owned by the player (game value), which is of utmost importance to the player, has been cleared.

Furthermore, when a "game ball count reset" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the arcade staff. However, once game balls are launched or the number of game balls owned by the player is counted, the display of the error code corresponding to "game ball count reset" on the frame control display 125 ends. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the display of the game ball count reset error code after confirming that the player has performed a lending operation or played a game, thereby preventing unnecessary game ball count resets.

Furthermore, when a "game ball count reset" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display unit 125, which is visible to the arcade staff. However, if the power is restored after a "game ball count reset" without any ball release or counting taking place, the error code is displayed again on the frame control display unit 125. Therefore, the evidence that a game ball count reset was performed is not erased by the restoration of power, improving convenience for arcade staff.

Furthermore, when various notification events (notification incidents) detected by the main control board 110 occur, the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120 does not display an error code. Conversely, when various notification events (notification incidents) detected by the frame control board 120 occur, the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120 displays an error code. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate and address the various notification events (notification incidents) detected by the main control board 110 and those detected by the frame control board 120, thereby improving convenience for amusement parlor staff.

Furthermore, when the ball removal operation is in progress, an error code ("-") is displayed not only on the frame control indicator 125, which is located on the back of the gaming machine 1 and visible to the staff, but also on the game ball count indicator 135, which is located on the front of the gaming machine 1 and visible to the player. Therefore, even if the inner frame is closed during the ball removal operation, it is possible to recognize that the ball removal operation is in progress, improving convenience for the staff.

Furthermore, even for various notification events detected by the frame control board 120, certain notification events that do not directly disadvantage the player (e.g., ball removal lever operation error, launcher ball remaining error, counting processing notification, counting processing completion) will trigger event notification by the performance control board 130, but the display of error codes on the frame control display 125 will not be shown (they are restricted/limited). Therefore, excessive event notifications are avoided, preventing inconveniences such as causing panic among arcade staff.

Furthermore, if certain notification events occur that would cause problems if game balls were launched (such as setting changes, setting confirmations, RWM malfunction errors, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection errors, entrance switch malfunction errors, communication line malfunction errors, glass frame opening errors, inner frame opening errors, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation errors, etc.), the ball feeding and/or launching operations will not be performed (they will be restricted or limited). Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to game ball launches happening when certain notification events occur.

Furthermore, if certain notification events occur that would cause problems if game progress control were performed (such as setting changes, setting confirmations, RWM abnormality errors, activation of the acquisition limit device, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation errors, etc.), game progress control will not be performed (it will be restricted or limited). Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems that would arise if game progress control were performed when certain notification events occur.

Furthermore, when a counting notification is issued, if the player possesses 1000 or more game balls, the ball feeding and launching operations will be performed. However, if the player possesses fewer than 1000 game balls, the ball feeding and launching operations will not be performed (they will be restricted). Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as the counting process and the ball feeding/launching operations conflicting, preventing the counting process from completing properly.

Furthermore, if a notification event that restricts ball feeding or firing occurs during or while a notification event that allows ball feeding or firing (e.g., a notification event such as clearing the number of game balls) is occurring, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, then the ball feeding or firing action will not be performed (it will be restricted or limited). Therefore, it is possible to restrict ball feeding and firing at the appropriate timing, suppressing any inconvenience caused by the execution of these actions. Additionally, the occurrence of a higher-priority notification event will not override the restriction of ball feeding or firing by a lower-priority notification event.

Furthermore, if a notification event that restricts lending/replay occurs during or while a notification event that allows lending/replay is occurring, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, lending/replay will be restricted (regulated/restricted). Therefore, it is possible to suppress inconveniences caused by the execution of lending/replay. Also, the occurrence of a higher-priority notification event will not invalidate the lending/replay restriction caused by a lower-priority notification event, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate properly.

Furthermore, if a notification event (notification event) that restricts card operation (insertion/return) occurs during or while a notification event (notification event) that allows card operation (insertion/return) is occurring, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, card operation (insertion/return) will be restricted. This makes it possible to suppress inconveniences caused by the execution of maker-card operations. Also, the occurrence of a higher-priority notification event (notification event) will not override the restriction on card operation (insertion/return) caused by a lower-priority notification event (notification event), allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate properly.

Furthermore, if a notification event that restricts a deposit occurs while a notification event that allows a deposit is occurring, regardless of whether it has a lower or higher priority, the deposit will be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress any inconvenience caused by the execution of a deposit. Also, the occurrence of a higher-priority notification event will not override the deposit restriction caused by a lower-priority notification event, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate properly.

Furthermore, the priority of "Clear Game Ball Count" can be set below "Change Settings," below "Confirm Settings," below "Power On (RWM Clear)," below "Power Restore," below "Illegal Detection 3 (RWM Anomaly Error)," below "Illegal Detection 2 (Abnormal Prize Entry Error)," below "Illegal Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," below "Acquisition Limit Device Activation," below "Illegal Radio Wave Detection Error," below "Abnormal Prize Ball Entry Error," below "Abnormal Ball Entry Count Error," below "Internal Game Machine Communication Anomaly Error," below "Exit Switch Disconnection Error," or below "Exit Switch Anomaly Error." It's fine, or it can be placed below "Inlet switch disconnection error," or below "Inlet switch malfunction error," or below "Foul ball switch disconnection error," or below "Communication line malfunction error," or below "No communication response error," or below "Too many balls error," or below "Too few balls error," or below "Lifting mechanism error," or below "Abrasive material not installed error," or below "Passage switch not connected error," or below "Glass frame open error," or below "Inner frame open error," or below "Ball removal operation in progress," or below "Ball removal lever operation error," or below "Launching pad remaining ball error."

Furthermore, the error codes of various notification events detected by the main control board 110 may be displayed on the frame control display 125. In this case, it is preferable to use "P〇〇" for the error codes of various notification events detected by the main control board 110 so that they can be distinguished from the error codes ("H〇〇") of various notification events detected by the frame control board 120. Specifically, it is preferable to display "P64" for "setting change," "P65" for "setting confirmation," "P66" for "power on (RWM clear)," "P67" for "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "P68" for "fraud detection 2 (abnormal prize entry error)," "P69" for "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)," and "P70" for "acquisition limit device activation."

Furthermore, when the acquisition limit device is activated, an error code ("P70") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated may be displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to the arcade staff, and/or on the game ball count display 135, which is visible to the player. When displaying the error code on the frame control display 125, it is preferable to repeatedly display the game ball count → performance information → error code. When displaying it on the game ball count display 135, it may be repeatedly displayed as game ball count → error code, or the error code may be displayed only when the player's game ball count is "0" (when game balls are launched and the game ball count becomes "0", or when game balls are counted and the game ball count becomes "0"). (This may involve repeating the game ball count → error code or displaying only the error code.)

Furthermore, during the ball removal operation, instead of displaying the same error code ("-") on both the frame control indicator 125 and the game ball count indicator 135, different error codes may be displayed on the frame control indicator 125 and the game ball count indicator 135, or an error code may be displayed on only one of the frame control indicator 125 or the game ball count indicator 135.

Furthermore, the ball launching operation may be prevented when an "entrance switch disconnection error" or "entrance switch malfunction error" occurs, or the ball feeding and launching operation may be performed when an "inner frame opening error" occurs.

Furthermore, when a "counting processing notification" is issued, if the player possesses 1000 or more game balls, instead of enabling ball feeding or launching operations, the system may choose to count more than 1000 balls or less than 1000 balls. However, if the count is less than 1000 balls, it is recommended to set the count to 250 or more balls, which is the number counted in a single counting operation (single press).

Furthermore, when a "counting processing notification" is issued, the ball feeding and launching actions may be prevented from being executed regardless of the number of game balls the player possesses.

(Calculation process for display performance information of the frame control board)
The process for calculating display performance information of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 79. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the process for calculating display performance information of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W401, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the machine is currently in a normal game state. If it is not in a normal game state, it proceeds to step W405. If it is in a normal game state, it determines in step W402 whether the game information has been updated. Specifically, in step W259 of the game machine information reception process described above, it determines whether various game information has been updated based on the game machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. If there is no update to the game information, it proceeds to step W405. If there is an update to the game information, it proceeds to step W403.

In step W403, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of prize balls awarded for the current game based on the game information (the number of balls awarded to each prize slot and the number of prize balls awarded to each prize slot). In step W404, it adds this number of prize balls to the normal game ball counter, which is used to count the number of prize balls awarded during normal gameplay. For example, if the number of balls awarded to the first start slot 45 is 1 and the number of prize balls awarded to the first start slot 45 is 3, then it calculates that there were 1 x 3 = 3 prize balls awarded, and these 3 are added to the normal game ball counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether it has received a detection signal from the winning passage count switch 94a or the non-winning passage count switch 94b (i.e., whether an out ball that has passed through the game area 5a has been detected). If no detection signal has been received, the process moves to step W409. If a detection signal has been received, in step W406, the total out ball counter, which counts the total number of out balls in the current game section, is incremented by 1.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether the machine is currently in a normal game state. If it is not in a normal game state, the process moves to step W409. If it is in a normal game state, in step W408, the normal game out counter, which counts the number of out balls during normal game play, is incremented by 1.

In step W409, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the section counter, which counts which game section is currently in use, is the first game section value (0), indicating that it is the first game section. If it is not the first game section, the process moves to step W411, assuming that the current state is a game section from the second section onwards, which is subject to the calculation of display performance information (normal base value). If it is the first game section, the process moves to step W410, assuming that the current state is a first game section, which is not subject to the calculation of display performance information.

In step W410, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current game section, as indicated by the total out counter, is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the first section update value, the display performance information calculation process ends. If the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the first section update value, the process moves to step W416.

In step W411, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the normal base value, which is display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display unit 125, and rounds it to the first decimal place. The "normal base value" is the ratio of the amount of game value awarded during normal gameplay (the number of prize balls awarded) to the amount of game value used during normal gameplay (the number of balls that went through the game area 5a). It is calculated using the formula: "(Number of prize balls awarded during normal gameplay ÷ Number of balls that went out during normal gameplay) × 100".

In step W412, the frame control CPU 120a saves the calculated normal base value to the first area of the base memory area (first to fourth areas) set in the frame control RAM 120c. The "base memory area" is a memory area for storing the normal base values for four game sections, and consists of a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game section, a first area for storing the normal base value for the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value for the game section two sections ago, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the game section three sections ago.

In step W413, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of balls dispensed in the current game section, as indicated by the total number of balls dispensed counter, is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000 balls). If the total number of balls dispensed is not equal to or greater than the second section update value, the game section is not updated, and the display performance information calculation process ends. If the total number of balls dispensed is equal to or greater than the second section update value, the game section is updated, and the process moves to step W414.

Furthermore, the game is divided into two sections after the second game section when the total number of balls dispensed reaches 60,000. This number of 60,000 balls is sufficient to guarantee approximately one day's worth of operation for game machine 1, which dispenses 100 game balls per minute. Therefore, the game section is updated when game machine 1 has been running for approximately one day.

In step W414, the frame control CPU 120a shifts the contents of the first to third base memory areas one position down, and in step W415, it clears the first base memory area to zero. As a result, the normal base values stored in each area are stored as the normal base values for the previous game section, and the normal base values for the current game section are reset, preparing the system for transitioning to the next game section.

In step W416, the frame control CPU 120a updates the game section by adding "1" to the section counter. In step W417, it resets the total number of outs indicated by the total outs counter, the number of normal payouts indicated by the normal payout counter, and the number of normal outs indicated by the normal outs counter to 0, and then proceeds to the next game section, thus ending the display performance information calculation process.

In this way, for each game session, the system calculates and stores a normal base value (a type of historical information) from the normal number of outs and normal payouts for each game session as performance information. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide information for appropriately understanding (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, the calculation of the base value is not performed in the first game section. Therefore, it is no longer possible to provide unreliable information (displayed on the frame control display 125) that is affected by operational checks during the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine (operational checks of various prize-winning slot detection switches, prize-winning passage count switch 94a, and non-prize-winning passage count switch 94b due to ball launching and maintenance), thus avoiding the inconvenience of misleading users about the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, the system calculates the normal base value from the second game section onward. Therefore, a highly reliable normal base value, free from the influence of pre-shipment inspections of the gaming machine, can be displayed on the frame control display 125, providing reliable information for accurately understanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, while the system is designed to calculate performance information regardless of whether the acquisition limit device is operating, it is also possible to either not calculate performance information while the acquisition limit device is operating, or to calculate performance information but prevent the calculated performance information from being displayed on the frame control display unit 125.

(Gaming machine performance information calculation process on the frame control board)
The process for calculating gaming machine performance information on the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 80. Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the process for calculating gaming machine performance information on the frame control board 120.

First, in step W451, the frame control CPU 120a performs a calculation of the total number of balls launched. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the information on game balls that the frame control board 120 counts and manages, it performs a process to calculate the total number of game balls launched into the game area 5a from the time the counting start condition was met until the present.

In step W452, the frame control CPU 120a performs a calculation of the total number of game balls won. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the game ball information counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a process to calculate the total number of game balls won, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player from the time the counting start condition was met until the present.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a ball payout rate calculation process in step W453. Specifically, it performs a process to calculate the ball payout rate, which is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of game balls acquired (calculated in step W452) to the total number of balls launched (calculated in step W451), using the formula (total number of game balls acquired ÷ total number of balls launched) × 100.

In step W454, the frame control CPU 120a performs a calculation of the number of game balls acquired per minute. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the game ball information counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a process to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute.

In step W455, the frame control CPU 120a performs a calculation of the bonus payout ratio. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the information on game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a calculation of the bonus payout ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various bonus payouts (winning balls into the second starting opening 47 opened in auxiliary games, and winning balls into the large winning opening 50 opened in jackpot games) to the total number of game balls acquired.

In step W456, the frame control CPU 120a performs a calculation of the continuous bonus ratio. Specifically, based on the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the information on game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a calculation of the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of continuous bonuses (winning into the large prize slot 50 opened during a jackpot game) to the total number of game balls acquired.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a jackpot count calculation process in step W457. Specifically, based on the game machine information (game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110, it performs a process to calculate the total number of jackpot games executed from the time the counting start condition was met until the present.

In step W458, the frame control CPU 120a performs the maximum payout calculation process, thus concluding the current gaming machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (gaming information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information) and the gaming ball information counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a process to calculate the maximum payout, which is the largest value among the differences in the number of balls won from a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game) where the total number of balls won exceeds the total number of balls launched.

Thus, the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information that is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide highly reliable information for accurately understanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

(Gaming machine information notification processing on the frame control board)
The gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 81. Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W501, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there has been an update to the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c since the last notification of game machine information to the dedicated unit 170. If there has been no update to the main control state or game information, the process moves to step W508. If there has been an update to the main control state or game information, the process moves to step W502.

In step W502, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300ms has elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or since the previous transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300ms has not elapsed, it is considered not the time to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and processing proceeds to step W504. If 300ms has elapsed, it is considered the time to transmit the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and in step W503, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W504, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous game machine installation information notification was sent. If 60 seconds have not elapsed, it is considered not the time to send the game machine installation information notification, and processing proceeds to step W506. If 60 seconds have elapsed, it is considered the time to send the game machine installation information notification, and in step W505, the game machine installation information notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W506, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous game machine performance information notification was sent. If 180 seconds have not elapsed, it is determined that it is not the time to send the game machine performance information notification, and the current game machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is the time to send the game machine performance information notification, and in step W507, the game machine performance information notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170, and the current game machine information notification process is terminated.

In step W508, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous game machine installation information notification was sent. If 60 seconds have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step W510, as it is not the time to send the game machine installation information notification. If 60 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step W509, as it is the time to send the game machine installation information notification.

In step W510, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous game machine performance information notification was sent. If 180 seconds have not elapsed, it is determined that it is not the time to send the game machine performance information notification, and the game machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is the time to send the game machine performance information notification, and in step W511, the game machine performance information is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W512, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300ms has elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or since the previous hall control/fraud monitoring information notification was sent. If 300ms has not elapsed, it is considered not the time to send the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and processing proceeds to step W512. If 300ms has elapsed, it is considered the time to send the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and in step W513, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent to the dedicated unit 170, ending the current gaming machine information notification process.

Thus, the transmission order of the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, the gaming machine installation information notification, and the gaming machine performance information notification is reversed depending on whether there has been an update to the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c since the last notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170, or whether there has been no update to the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c since the last notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it is possible to transmit various information notifications to the dedicated unit 170 in an appropriate order depending on whether or not there has been an update to the main control state or game information.

Furthermore, the system transmits the gaming machine installation information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) received from the main control board 110, along with the installation information of the frame control board 120 (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code), to the dedicated unit 170 at predetermined intervals (60 seconds) (periodically). Therefore, the dedicated unit 170 can determine whether the frame control board 120 is appropriate, thereby preventing fraudulent activities such as the replacement or modification of the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.

(Game ball counting process on the frame control board)
The game ball counting process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 82. Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W551, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 100ms has elapsed since the previous game machine information notification transmission timing. If 100ms has not elapsed, it is considered not the timing to transmit the counting notification, and the game ball counting process ends. If 100ms has elapsed, it is considered the timing to transmit the counting notification, and the process moves to step W552.

In step W552, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting button switch 20a is turned ON due to the operation of the counting button 20. If the counting button switch 20a is not ON (OFF), the process moves to step W561. If the counting button switch 20a is ON, in step W553, the CPU determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0". If the number of game balls owned by the player is not greater than "0" (meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process moves to step W561. If the number is greater than "0" (meaning there are game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), the process moves to step W554.

In step W554, the frame control CPU 120a sets a counting process flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that counting is in progress. In step W555, it sets a counting process notification command in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that counting is in progress. This sends the counting process notification command to the performance control board 130, triggering the process for providing a counting process notification.

In step W556, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not less than 1000 (i.e., more), the process moves to step W559. If the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1000, in step W557, the frame control board 120 determines whether it is currently outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device 92 to allow the launching of game balls, and whether a launch permission error (setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection 3, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) is occurring. If it is currently outputting a launch permission signal and no launch permission error is occurring, the process moves to step W559. If it is currently outputting a launch permission signal and a launch permission error is occurring, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped in step W558. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (the ball feeding that sends game balls to the launching platform and/or the launching of game balls from the launching platform), thereby restricting the launch of game balls.

In step W559, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts 250 balls from the count if the player possesses 250 or more balls, or subtracts all balls if the player has fewer than 250 balls. In step W560, the subtracted number of balls is added to the cumulative count stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and the process moves to step W567.

In step W561, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a counting flag exists in the frame control RAM 120c. If the counting flag does not exist, the process proceeds to step W567. If the counting flag exists, in step W562, the counting flag is cleared, and in step W653, a counting completion command indicating that the counting process is complete is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This sends the counting completion command to the performance control board, and processing to terminate the counting notification is performed.

In step W564, the frame control CPU 120a clears the cumulative ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W565, it determines whether the launch permission signal is stopped and whether a launch permission error has occurred. If the launch permission signal is being output or a launch permission error has occurred, the process moves to step W567. If the launch permission signal is stopped and no launch permission error has occurred, the output of the launch permission signal is resumed in step W566. This allows the launching device to operate (ball feeding to send game balls to the launching platform and/or launching game balls from the launching platform), enabling the launch of game balls.

In step W567, the frame control CPU 120a sends a counting notification (counting serial number, the number of balls counted corresponding to the number of balls subtracted, and the cumulative number of balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c) to the dedicated unit 170, and terminates the current game ball counting process. As a result, the number of game balls owned by the player is stored in the dedicated unit 170, associated with the identification information (card number, card ID, etc.) of the inserted storage medium (card, coin, etc.).

Furthermore, if the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (feeding one game ball) has finished but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (launching one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 will be stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 is completed. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (feeding one game ball) is in progress, the drive of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 will be stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (launching one game ball) are completed.

In this way, when counting is performed, the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding to send game balls to the launching platform and/or launching game balls from the launching platform) is stopped, thereby restricting the launch of game balls. Specifically, when the counting button 20 is operated and counting is performed, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the specified number (1000 balls), the output of the launch permission signal is stopped, and the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped. Therefore, the inconvenience of counting game balls used in the launching operation does not occur, the number of game balls to be counted can be stably guaranteed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the counting button 20 is operated and counting is performed, if the player possesses 1000 or more game balls, the output of the launch permission signal is not stopped, and the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 is permitted. Therefore, even if counting is performed, the number of game balls to be launched can be guaranteed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, once the counting process is complete, the launching device (the ball feed that sends the game balls to the launching platform and/or the launching of the game balls from the launching platform) is permitted, allowing the game balls to be launched. Therefore, the launching of the game balls is not restricted indefinitely due to the counting process, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the number of game balls required for the launching device to function (sending game balls to the launching platform and/or launching game balls from the launching platform) is set at 1000 or more, it may be less than 1000. In this case, the number may be 251 or more, ensuring that counting and launching of game balls can be guaranteed even if the counting button 20, which counts 250 game balls, is held down for a long press, or it may be 1 or more, ensuring that counting and launching of game balls can be guaranteed even if the counting button 20, which counts 1 game ball, is held down for a short press.

(Game ball dispensing process on the frame control board)
The game ball dispensing process of the frame control board 120 will be explained using Figure 83. Figure 83 is a flowchart showing the game ball dispensing process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W601, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether it has received a loan notification transmitted within 170ms of the previous count notification or based on the operation of the loan button provided on the dedicated unit 170. If no loan notification has been received, the current game ball loan process is terminated. If a loan notification has been received, in step W602, it determines whether the loan serial number of the received loan notification is the value of the previous loan serial number + 1 stored in the frame control RAM 120c. If it is not the value of the previous loan serial number + 1, the process moves to step W610. If it is the value of the previous loan serial number + 1, in step W603, the loan serial number of the received loan notification is stored in the frame control RAM 120c as the previous loan serial number.

In step W604, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a "ball removal operation in progress" flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress. If the "ball removal operation in progress" flag is present (meaning a ball removal operation is in progress), the process proceeds to step W610. If the "ball removal operation in progress" flag is not present (meaning a ball removal operation is not in progress), in step W605, the CPU determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player (the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count indicator 135) is less than 100,000. If the number is not less than 100,000, the process proceeds to step W610, assuming that no game balls will be lent out. If the number is less than 100,000, the process proceeds to step W606.

In step W606, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of balls to be lent in the received lending notification is a normal value (0 to 255). If it is not a normal value, the process moves to step W610, assuming that no game balls will be lent. If it is a normal value, in step W607, the CPU determines whether the number of balls to be lent in the received lending notification is greater than "0". If it is greater than "0", the process moves to step W608. If it is not greater than "0" (i.e., "0"), the game ball lending process for this time is terminated.

In step W608, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of balls to be lent, as included in the lending notification, to the player's remaining ball count. This updates the ball counts displayed on the ball count indicator 135 and the frame control indicator 125 to reflect the added ball count. Then, in step W609, a lending receipt result response (receipt result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that the balls have been lent (that the lending notification was successfully received), thus ending the ball lending process. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to recognize that the balls have been lent.

In step W610, the frame control CPU 120a sends a loan receipt result response (received result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170, indicating that it was unable to receive a normal loan notification and therefore could not loan out the game balls (that the loan notification was not received normally), thus terminating the game ball loan process. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to understand that no game balls were loaned out.

Thus, even when a lending notification is received from the dedicated unit 170 based on the operation of the lending button, the lending process for game value (game balls) is not performed if the ball removal operation is in progress. Therefore, the inconvenience of lending game value (game balls) even when the ball removal operation is in progress and no game control is being performed can be avoided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, each time a game value (game ball) is issued, a loan receipt result response (received result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the loan process has been completed. Conversely, if a game value (game ball) is not issued, a loan receipt result response (loan receipt result = abnormal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the loan process was not completed. Therefore, the dedicated unit 170 can determine whether or not a loan process has been completed, enabling the amusement store to collect necessary information, such as sales data.

(Relationship between the processing order of various control functions and the implementation area)
Next, referring to the tables shown in Figures 84 to 99, we will explain the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and the implementation area (the control area that performs the processing).
The tables shown in Figures 84 to 99 associate the processing order with the control content corresponding to the processing order, the implementation area where the control content is implemented (within the usage area, outside the usage area), the related areas used in relation to the control content (transmit buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port), and the step numbers of the flowchart described above.

In the "Implementation Area" column, "Within Usage Area (ROM, RWM)" refers to the aforementioned ROM area for gameplay (ROM area within area) and RWM area for gameplay (RWM area within area). The program stored in the ROM area for gameplay (program within area) uses the RWM area for gameplay as a workspace to execute various control functions.
Furthermore, "Out-of-Use Area (ROM, RWM)" refers to the aforementioned information ROM area (out-of-use ROM area) and information RWM area (out-of-use RWM area). Programs stored in the information ROM area (out-of-use programs) will use the information RWM area as a workpiece to execute various control operations.

Furthermore, the terms "within the usable area" and "outside the usable area" that appear in the section explaining the control content and processing order of the main control board 110 correspond to the "within the usable area" and "outside the usable area" set in the memory area of the main control unit 110m, and the terms "within the usable area" and "outside the usable area" that appear in the section explaining the control content and processing order of the frame control board 120 correspond to the "within the usable area" and "outside the usable area" set in the memory area of the frame control unit 120m.

(Processing sequence when firing permission is granted after a setting change has been made on the main control board)
Figure 84(a) shows the processing sequence when a setting change is made on the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and then firing permission is granted.

As the first step, the main processing program startup process is executed to perform the main processing described above, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step, a process is executed to generate game machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area within the usage area (area program, area RWM area).
As the third step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a telegram containing game machine installation information to the frame control board 120, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to update the notification counter for the gaming machine installation information by +1 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the game machine installation information response transmitted from the frame control board 120 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine the content of the received gaming machine installation information response by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK" is assumed).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area that indicates power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "backup flag exists").
As the eighth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a configuration change operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "operation occurred").
As the ninth step, a setting change process is executed that allows the setting value to be changed by controlling the area used (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).

As the tenth process, an RWM clear process is executed, which involves clearing data (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) stored in the clear target area of the RWM area within the area, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to send a power-on specification command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the RWM clear process has been performed (the power-on process initializes the game control state) by using the area of use (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).
As the twelfth step, a process is executed to send a setting value specification command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 13th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "no flag (= OFF)").
As the 14th step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is authorized to launch (including ball feeding) game balls (starts outputting a launch authorization signal) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). After that, processes to control the progress of the game are executed without being restricted by the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, if the response regarding the gaming machine's installation information indicates a ball-removal state during the sixth step, the seventh and subsequent steps will not be executed, and the game's progress control will not be performed, resulting in a state of waiting for power to be cut off.

Furthermore, the launch permission signal, which authorizes the launching device 92 to launch (including ball feeding) game balls, can be output from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. The launching device 92 becomes capable of launching (including ball feeding) game balls when it receives launch permission signals from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Processing sequence when launch permission is granted after RWM clearing is performed on the main control board)
Figure 84(b) shows the processing sequence when RWM clearing is performed on the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, followed by permission to fire.
Note that the processes from the 1st to the 7th and the 13th to the 17th in Figure 84(b) are the same as the processes from the 1st to the 7th and the 11th to the 15th in Figure 84(a), respectively, so their explanation is omitted here.

As the eighth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a configuration change operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the ninth step, a process is executed to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area during a power outage (power cut-off) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (this is considered "normal").
As the tenth step, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is considered "normal").

As the eleventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "operation occurred").
As the twelfth step, an RWM clearing process is executed, in which data stored in the clear target area of the RWM within the area (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) is cleared by control using the area within the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).

As shown in Figures 84(a) and 84(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting change processing, RWM clear processing, launch permission, etc.) are executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (special feature special electric control processing described later, etc.). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when a setting change or RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup of the main processing program to the permission to fire are executed by control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). Therefore, compared to a case where control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m and control using the area outside the usable area are mixed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the main control unit 110m was designed to generate gaming machine installation information through control within its operating area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), it may also be configured to generate gaming machine installation information through control outside the main control unit 110m's operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), it may be changed to clear it before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal).

(Processing sequence when launch permission is granted after power is restored on the main control board)
Figure 85(a) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not present) when the main control board 110 restores power immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1 and then grants permission to launch.

As the first step, the main processing program startup process is executed to perform the main processing described above, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step, a process is executed to generate game machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area within the usage area (area program, area RWM area).
As the third step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a telegram containing game machine installation information to the frame control board 120, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to update the notification counter for the gaming machine installation information by +1 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the game machine installation information response transmitted from the frame control board 120 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine the content of the received gaming machine installation information response by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK" is assumed).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area that indicates power has been restored, using control within the area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "backup flag exists").
As the eighth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a configuration change operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the ninth step, a process is executed to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area during a power outage (power cut-off) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (this is considered "normal").

As the tenth step, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is considered "normal").
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the twelfth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (in this case, "no operation").

As the 13th step, an initial setup process is executed to restore the game control state (game progress) to what it was before the power outage, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th step, a process is executed to send a power restoration command to the performance control board 130, indicating that power has been restored, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed to send other commands (special symbol reserve number specification command, game state specification command, etc.) related to the restoration of the game's progress to the performance control board 130, using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the 16th step, a process is executed to send a setting value specification command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 17th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "no flag (= OFF)").
As the 18th step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is authorized to launch (including ball feeding) game balls (starts outputting a launch authorization signal) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the 19th step, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). After that, processes to control the progress of the game are executed without being restricted by the acquisition limit device.

(Processing sequence when firing permission is not granted after power is restored on the main control board)
Figure 85(b) shows the processing sequence when the main control board 110 restores power immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, but firing is not permitted (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present).
Note that the processes from the first to the sixteenth in Figure 85(b) are the same as the processes from the first to the sixteenth in Figure 85(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the 17th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the acquisition limit device activation flag is present in the RWM area, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag present (= ON)").
As the 18th step, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device activation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 19th step, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). After that, the processes for controlling the progress of the game are restricted by the acquisition limit device.

As shown in Figures 85(a) and 85(b), processes closely related to game progress control (initial setup processing, launch permission, etc.) are executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (special feature and special electrical control processing described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when power is restored by the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup of the main processing program to the permission to launch are executed by control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). Therefore, compared to a case where control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m and control using the area outside the usable area are mixed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the main control unit 110m was designed to generate gaming machine installation information through control within its operating area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), it may also be configured to generate gaming machine installation information through control outside the main control unit 110m's operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), it may now be cleared before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal). Alternatively, if launch permission is not granted due to the activation of the acquisition limit device, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) may not be cleared.

(Processing sequence when firing permission is granted after the settings have been confirmed on the main control board)
Figure 86(a) shows the processing sequence (when there is no flag indicating activation of the acquisition limit device) when the main control board 110 performs a setting check immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1 and then grants permission to launch.

As the first step, the main processing program startup process is executed to perform the main processing described above, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step, a process is executed to generate game machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area within the usage area (area program, area RWM area).
As the third step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a telegram containing game machine installation information to the frame control board 120, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to update the notification counter for the gaming machine installation information by +1 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the game machine installation information response transmitted from the frame control board 120 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine the content of the received gaming machine installation information response by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK" is assumed).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area that indicates power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "backup flag exists").
As the eighth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the ninth step, a process is executed to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area during a power outage (power cut-off) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (this is considered "normal").

As the tenth step, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is considered "normal").
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the twelfth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (in this case, "operation occurred").

As the thirteenth step, a setting confirmation process is executed, which allows the current setting values to be checked through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th step, an initial setup process is executed to restore the game's control state (the game's progress) to what it was before the power outage, using control within the area of use (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed to send a power restoration command to the performance control board 130, indicating that power has been restored, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 16th step, a process is executed to send other commands (special symbol reserve number specification command, game state specification command, etc.) related to the restoration of the game's progress to the performance control board 130, using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 17th step, a process is executed to send a setting value specification command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 18th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "no flag (= OFF)").

As the 19th step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is authorized to launch (including ball feeding) game balls (starts outputting a launch authorization signal) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the 20th step, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). After that, processes to control the progress of the game are executed without being restricted by the acquisition limit device.

(Processing sequence when firing permission is not granted after the settings have been confirmed on the main control board)
Figure 86(b) shows the processing sequence when, immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, the main control board 110 performs a setting check but does not permit firing (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present).
Note that the processes from the first to the seventeenth in Figure 86(b) are the same as the processes from the first to the seventeenth in Figure 86(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the 18th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the acquisition limit device activation flag is present in the RWM area within the area, using control within the area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag is present (=ON)").
As the 19th step, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device operation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 20th step, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). After that, the processes for controlling the progress of the game are restricted by the acquisition limit device.

As shown in Figures 86(a) and 86(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting confirmation process, initial setup process, launch permission, etc.) are executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (special feature and special electric control processes described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 performs a setting check immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup of the main processing program to the permission to launch are executed by control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). Therefore, compared to a case where control using the usable area of the main control unit 110m and control using the area outside the usable area are mixed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the main control unit 110m was designed to generate gaming machine installation information through control within its operating area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), it may also be configured to generate gaming machine installation information through control outside the main control unit 110m's operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal), it may be changed to clear it before the launch permission (output of the launch permission signal).

(Processing sequence when the main control board experiences an irrecoverable error and game progress control is disabled)
Figure 87 shows the processing sequence when an irrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and game progress control is not performed.

As the first step, the main processing program startup process is executed to perform the main processing described above, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step, a process is executed to generate game machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area within the usage area (area program, area RWM area).
As the third step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a telegram containing game machine installation information to the frame control board 120, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to update the notification counter for the gaming machine installation information by +1 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the game machine installation information response transmitted from the frame control board 120 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine the content of the received gaming machine installation information response by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "received = OK" is assumed).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area that indicates power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "backup flag exists").
As the eighth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be considered "no operation").
As the ninth step, a process is executed to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area during a power outage (power cut-off) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (this is considered "normal").

As the tenth step, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (in this case, it will be considered "abnormal").
As the eleventh step, an irreversible error handling process is executed, which prevents game progress control from being performed by using the area of use (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal during the ninth process, the tenth process will execute an irrecoverable error handling process that continues until the power is cut off, using control within the used area (program area, RWM area), and game progress control will cease.

As shown in Figure 87, processes closely related to game progress control (such as handling of irreversible errors) are executed by using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special feature and special electric control processes described later). Therefore, it is possible to functionally separate the usage area and the area outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, thereby improving the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 87, if an irrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, preventing game progress control, multiple processes from the startup of the main processing program to the irrecoverable error processing are executed using control within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). Therefore, compared to cases where control using the usage area and control using the area outside the usage area are mixed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 87, when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature and special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the main control unit 110m was designed to generate gaming machine installation information through control within its operating area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), it may also be configured to generate gaming machine installation information through control outside the main control unit 110m's operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when game progress is controlled by the main control board)
Figure 88(a) shows the processing sequence when the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not present).

As the first process (main loop process), a process is executed to update various random values (random values for reach determination, random values for special symbol determination, initial random values, etc.) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt processing), a process is executed to save the registers to the stack area using control within the usage area (program area, RWM area).
As the third process, a time control process is executed that updates various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric mechanisms, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area). (Here, if it is determined that there is "no flag (= OFF)", the acquisition limit device will not be activated.)
As the fifth step, a process is executed to update various random values (random values for jackpot determination, random values for special symbol determination, random values for special symbol variation pattern determination, random values for win determination, random values for normal symbol determination, random values for normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, an input control process is executed in which predetermined data is set when input is received by various switches (general prize entry detection switch 43a, large prize entry detection switch 50a, first start entry detection switch 45a, second start entry detection switch 47a, gate detection switch 44a, etc.) using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the seventh process, a special symbol and special electronic control process is executed, which controls the display of special symbols and jackpot games, etc., using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a regular symbol and electric control process is executed, which controls the display of regular symbols and auxiliary games using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth step, an acquisition limit management process is executed, which controls the operation of the acquisition limit device by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) and outside the usage area (program outside the area, RWM area outside the area).

As the tenth process, a payout control process is executed, which controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh step, error control processing is executed, which uses control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) and outside the usage area (program outside the area, RWM area outside the area) to provide error notification based on the occurrence of various errors.
As the twelfth step, a hall control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed, which involves sending hall control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 through control using the area of use (area program, area RWM area).

As the 13th step, a data creation process is executed that generates display data to be output to various indicators and drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by controlling the area within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) and outside the usage area (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the 14th step, output control processing is executed, which involves outputting display data to various indicators and sending commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage areas) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed to restore the registers that were saved in the stack area, using control within the usage area (program area, RWM area).

(Processing sequence when game progress control is restricted by the main control board)
Figure 88(b) shows the processing sequence when the main control board 110 restricts the progress control of the game while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present).
Note that the first to third processes in Figure 88(b) are the same as the first to third processes in Figure 88(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the fourth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the acquisition limit device activation flag exists in the RWM area within the area, using control within the usage area (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). (Here, the acquisition limit device is activated when it is determined that the flag is present (= ON)).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to activate the acquisition limit device through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area). Specifically, control is executed to skip the fifth to ninth steps shown in Figure 88(a) so that the fifth to ninth steps related to game progress control shown in Figure 88(a) are not executed.
As the sixth step, a payout control process is executed, which controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, error control processing is executed, which uses control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) and outside the usage area (program outside the area, RWM area outside the area) to provide error notification based on the occurrence of various errors.
As the eighth process, a hall control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed, which involves sending hall control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 through control using the area of use (area program, area RWM area).
As the ninth step, a data creation process is executed that generates display data to be output to various indicators and drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by controlling the area within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) and the area outside the usage area (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the tenth process, output control processing is executed, which involves outputting display data to various indicators and sending commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage areas) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to restore the registers that had been saved in the stack area, using control within the usage area (program area, RWM area).

As shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple processes related to game progress control (input control processing, special feature/special power control processing, regular feature/regular power control processing, payout control processing, etc.) are executed by control using the operating area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area). Therefore, the functions within and outside the operating area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the update processes for various random numbers closely related to game progress control are executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special symbol and special electric control processes described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple complementary controls (such as acquisition limit management processing, error control processing, and data creation processing) distinct from game progress control are executed by using control outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). Therefore, both the usage area and the out-of-area area can be used efficiently, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the process of activating the acquisition limit device, which restricts the execution of multiple processes related to game progress control (input control process, special symbol/special electric control process, regular symbol/regular electric control process, payout control process, etc.), is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes the processes related to game progress control (special symbol/special electric control process, etc., described later). Therefore, the usage area and the area outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

In Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the process of determining whether or not the acquisition limit device activation flag exists in the RWM area within the area is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (area-based program, area-based RWM area) (processing order "4"). However, the process of determining whether or not the acquisition limit device activation flag exists may also be performed by control using the area outside the area used by the main control unit 110m (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, in Figure 88(b), if the acquisition limit device activation flag is present in the RWM area within the region, the acquisition limit device is activated, preventing the processing of processing sequence "5" to "9" shown in Figure 88(a) (various random number update processing, input control processing, special drawing special power control processing, general drawing general power control processing, acquisition limit management processing). However, it is also possible to perform the processing of processing sequence "5" to "9" shown in Figure 88(a). In this case, for example, even if the input control process in processing sequence "6" detects the entry of a ball into the out gate 39, the general gate 44, or various prize entry points (general prize entry point 43, first start gate 45, second start gate 47, large prize entry point 50), the detection information from the input control process (information that a ball has been detected, data generated as a result of detecting a ball entry, etc.) is not referenced in processing sequences "7" to "9" (control is not performed that references the detection information), thereby stopping the game due to the activation of the acquisition limit device (stopping the control of the game's progress).

Furthermore, in Figure 88(b), if the processes in processing order "5" to "9" shown in Figure 88(a) (various random number update processes, input control processes, special feature special power control processes, general feature general power control processes, and acquisition limit management processes) are performed, for example, the input control process in processing order "6" detects ball entry into the out gate 39, general feature gate 44, and various prize entry points (general prize entry point 43, first start gate 45, second start gate 47, large prize entry point 50), but by not generating the detection information referenced in processing order "7" to "9" (information that a ball has been detected, data generated as a result of detecting a ball entry, etc.), the game may be stopped (game progress control is stopped) due to the activation of the acquisition limit device.

(Processing sequence 1 when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89(a) shows the processing sequence 1 (when not in a jackpot) when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board 110.

As the first process, a general prize slot detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting a prize being awarded to the general prize slot 43 through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a large prize slot detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting when a ball enters the large prize slot 50 through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the third process, a first start-out detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting entry into the first start-out 45 through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

As the fourth process, a second start port detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting entry into the second start port 47 through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a gate detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting entry into the regular gate 44 through control using the area of use (area program, area RWM area).
As the sixth process, an out detection switch input process is executed, which involves detecting when a ball enters the out port 39 through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, an increase counter update process is executed, which updates the increase counter related to the operation of the acquisition limit device according to the prize balls (game value) awarded based on winning in various prize slots, using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the eighth step, a maximum increment update process is executed, which updates the maximum increment according to the value of the increment counter by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which a maximum increment command, indicating the maximum increment, is set in the send buffer using control from outside the used area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the tenth step, a process is executed to reference the current maximum increment using control from outside the used area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to determine whether the maximum increment is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (95,000) by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) (here, this is referred to as "greater than or equal to a predetermined number").
As the twelfth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently in progress, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be "negative (not in a jackpot game)").

As the 13th step, a process is executed to set (ON) the acquisition limit device activation flag in order to activate the acquisition limit device, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the 14th step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is prohibited from launching (including feeding) game balls (the output of the launch permission signal is stopped) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed in which a command indicating that the acquisition limit device is operating is set in the transmission buffer, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 16th step, a process is executed to generate hall control fraud monitoring information (fraud detection state 1 Bit6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 17th step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a message to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to generate a message of hall control and fraud monitoring information.
As the 18th step, output control processing is executed, which transmits commands set in the transmission buffer (maximum increment command, acquisition limit device activation command) to the performance control board 130 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if, in the 11th process, it is determined that the maximum increase is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the acquisition limit device will not be activated, and processes 12 through 17 will be skipped, with process 18 being executed instead.

(Processing sequence 2 when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89(b) shows the processing sequence 2 (when a jackpot is in progress) when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board 110.
Note that the processes from the first to the eleventh in Figure 89(b) are the same as the processes from the first to the eleventh in Figure 89(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the twelfth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently in progress, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "affirmative (jackpot game in progress)").
As the 13th step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) the operation recognition flag, which is reservation information for when it is not possible to immediately activate the acquisition limit device due to control using areas outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the 14th step, an output control process is executed in which a command (maximum increment command) set in the transmission buffer is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
From here on, the 15th to 32nd processes will be executed as shown in Figure 89(a), specifically processes 1 through 18, so we will omit further explanation here.

As shown in Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the processes related to the operation of the acquisition limit device—including updating the increment counter, updating the maximum increment, setting the maximum increment command in the transmission buffer, referencing the current maximum increment, and determining whether the maximum increment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95000)—are executed by using control outside the operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which performs complementary control different from the game progress control. Therefore, the functions within and outside the operating area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation flag, which activates the acquisition limit device that restricts the progress control of the game, is executed by control using an area outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which performs complementary control different from the game progress control. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the process of denying permission to fire, which restricts gameplay due to the activation of the acquisition limit device, is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes gameplay progress control processes (such as the special feature special electrical control process described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 89(a) and 89(b), when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special feature special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the processing steps "7" to "11" in Figure 89(a) (increment counter update processing, maximum increment update processing, processing to set the maximum increment command in the transmission buffer, processing to refer to the current maximum increment, and processing to determine whether the maximum increment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95000)) were executed by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), some or all of the processing steps "7" to "11" in Figure 89(a) may be executed by control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the process in processing sequence "12" in Figure 89(a) (the process of determining whether or not a jackpot game is currently in progress) was executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area), the process in processing sequence "12" in Figure 89(a) may also be executed by control using the area outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (the program outside the area, the RWM area outside the area).

Furthermore, while the process in processing sequence "13" in Figure 89(a) (the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation flag (ON) and activating the acquisition limit device) was executed by control using the area outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area), the process in processing sequence "13" in Figure 89(a) may also be executed by control using the area within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the processing steps "15" to "16" in Figure 89(a) were executed by control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), the processing steps "15" to "16" (the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation command in the transmission buffer, and the process of generating hall control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection state 1 Bit6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated) may also be executed by control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the process of step "13" in the processing sequence "13" shown in Figure 89(b) (the process of setting the operation recognition flag to ON) was executed by control using the area outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area), the process of step "13" in the processing sequence "13" shown in Figure 89(b) may also be executed by control using the area within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board)
Figure 90 shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board 110.

As the first step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a magnet detection error has occurred by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "magnet detection occurred").
As the second step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) a magnet detection flag in the out-of-bounds RWM area, indicating that a magnet has been detected, by using control outside the usage area (out-of-bounds program, out-of-bounds RWM area).
As the third step, a process is executed in which a magnet detection command indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred is set in the transmission buffer using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to generate hall control fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit3 = "1") indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not an abnormal prize entry error has occurred, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "abnormal prize entry detected").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) an abnormal prize detection flag in the out-of-bounds RWM area, indicating that an abnormal prize has been detected, by using control outside the usage area (out-of-bounds program, out-of-bounds RWM area).

As the seventh step, a process is executed in which an abnormal prize entry designation command, indicating that an abnormal prize entry error has occurred, is set in the transmission buffer using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the eighth step, a process is executed to generate hall control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection state 1 Bit4 = "1") indicating that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the ninth step, a process is executed to generate and transmit a message to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that a magnet detection error or an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to generate a message for hall control and fraud monitoring information.
As the tenth step, an output control process is executed in which commands set in the transmission buffer (magnet detection specification command, abnormal prize specification command) are sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the first process determines that no magnet was detected, processes 2 through 4 will be skipped, and processes 5 onwards will be executed. If the fifth process determines that no abnormal prizes were awarded, processes 6 through 9 will be skipped, and process 10 will be executed.

As shown in Figure 90, the processing related to the detection of predetermined errors (magnet detection errors, abnormal prize entry errors) is executed by control using an area outside the operating area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which performs complementary control different from the game progress control. Therefore, the functions within and outside the operating area of the main control unit 110m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 90, when the main control board 110 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (frame control board 120, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to the progress control of the game (such as the special feature and special electronic control processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the first to eighth processes were executed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) of the main control unit 110m, it is also possible to execute one or more of the first to eighth processes by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) of the main control unit 110m.

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared after receiving the game machine installation information on the frame control board)
Figure 91(a) shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared after the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information immediately after the start of power supply to the game machine 1 (in the case where there is no game ball count clearing operation or ball removal operation).

As the first step, the main processing program startup process is executed to perform the main processing described above, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area that indicates power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, we will assume "backup flag present").
As the third step, a process is executed to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area during a power outage (power cut-off) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area, using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (this is considered "normal").

As the fourth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a game ball count clear operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be assumed that "no operation" occurred).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a game ball count clear flag in the RWM area within the area, which indicates that the game ball count has been cleared, by using control within the area (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "no flag" is present).
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation occurred").

As the seventh step, a process is executed to activate the timer interrupt process using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt processing), a process is executed to save the registers to the stack area by control using the area used (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the ninth step, a ball removal operation is performed to remove the game balls that are used in rotation in the game machine 1 from the game machine, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, only the determination of whether or not the ball removal operation flag is present is made, and the determination is "no flag").

As the tenth step, a determination is made whether or not the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the eleventh step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the default value "0" (here, the serial number is assumed to be "0").
As the twelfth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a gaming machine communication error flag in the RWM area within the area, which indicates that a gaming machine communication error has occurred, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be assumed that "no flag" is present).

As the 13th step, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th step, a determination is made using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there is a flag indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress (here, it is assumed that "no flag" is present).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to generate and send a message to the main control board 110 indicating the installation of the gaming machine (received OK) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 16th step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is authorized to launch (including ball feeding) game balls (starts outputting a launch authorization signal) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is cleared after receiving the game machine installation information on the frame control board)
Figure 91(b) shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls is cleared immediately after the start of power supply to the game machine 1 and after the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information (when game ball count clearing operation and ball removal operation are performed).
Note that the first to third processes in Figure 91(b) are the same as the first to third processes in Figure 91(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the fourth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a game ball count clear operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "operation occurred").
As the fifth step, a process is executed to clear the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the RWM area within the area, using control within the area (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, a process is executed in which a command to start clearing the game ball count is set in the transmission buffer, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) a game ball count clear flag, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth step, a process is executed to generate hall computer fraud monitoring information (fraud detection state 2 Bit3 = "1") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not the game ball count clear flag exists, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "flag exists").

As the tenth step, a process is executed to display an error code ("H67") corresponding to clearing the number of game balls on the frame control display 125, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "operation occurred").
As the twelfth step, a process is executed in which a ball removal operation specification command, indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress, is set in the transmit buffer using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 13th step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) a ball removal operation flag, indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th step, a process is executed to display specific information ("-") corresponding to the ball removal operation on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 by control using the area of use (area program, area RWM area).
As the 15th step, a process is executed to activate the timer interrupt process using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 16th process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt processing), a process is executed to save the registers to the stack area by control using the area used (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the 17th process, a ball removal operation is performed to remove the game balls that are used in rotation in the game machine 1 from the game machine, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 18th step, a determination is made whether or not the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (received)").

As the 19th step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the default value "0" (here, the serial number is assumed to be "0").
As the 20th step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a gaming machine communication error flag in the RWM area within the area, which indicates that a gaming machine communication error has occurred, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be assumed that "no flag" is present).
As the 21st process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 22nd step, a determination is made using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there is a flag indicating that a ball removal operation is in progress (here, we will assume "flag present").
As the 23rd process, a process is executed to generate and transmit a message containing game machine installation information (ball removal status) to the main control board 110, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 24th step, an output control process is executed in which a command set in the transmission buffer (a command to specify the start of clearing the number of game balls) is sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the area within the usage area (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

As shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described later). Therefore, the usage area and the area outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process for displaying an error code related to clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (game ball count update process described later, etc.). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process related to the removal of game balls (game media) used in the game is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (game ball count update process described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of displaying specific information related to the ball removal operation of the game balls (game media) used in the game is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), multiple processes from the startup of the main processing program to the granting of firing permission are executed by control using the usable area of the frame control unit 120m (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area). Therefore, compared to a case where control using the usable area of the frame control unit 120m and control using the area outside the usable area are mixed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), when the frame control board 120 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (main control board 110, performance control board 130), the processing is performed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes processing related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update processing described later). Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the frame control unit 120m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) was used to perform actions such as ball removal, generation of game machine installation information (main control chip information + frame control chip information), setting of the game ball count clear start command and ball removal operation in-progress command into the transmission buffer, setting of the game ball count clear flag, and generation of hall computer/fraud monitoring information, one or more of these processes may be performed using control outside the frame control unit 120m's usage area (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the frame control board receives game machine information and then sends a game machine information response)
Figure 92 shows the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 receives gaming machine information (hall computer/fraud monitoring information) and then transmits a gaming machine information response.

As the first step, a determination is made whether or not the game machine information message transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is referred to as "affirmative (received)").
As the second step, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a gaming machine communication error flag in the RWM area within the area, which indicates that a communication error has occurred within the gaming machine, by using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it will be assumed that "no flag" is present).
As the third step, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the main control unit 110m stores the main control state 1 and main control state 2 of the hall control fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area.

As the fourth step, a process is executed in which the game machine error status is stored among the hall computer fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed in which the fraud detection state 1 of the hall control fraud monitoring information generated using the hall control/fraud monitoring information within the usage area of the main control unit 110m is stored by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, a process is executed in which the number of prize balls awarded for triggering special features and the number of consecutive prize balls awarded for triggering special features are stored from the hall control and fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m, through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which various game information from the hall computer and fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is stored by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed to generate and send a game machine information response (received OK) message to the main control board 110 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the first process determines that no gaming machine information message has been received, the second through eighth processes will not be executed.

As shown in Figure 92, the frame control board 120 performs the process of sending and receiving information (telegrams) with the main control board 110 through control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described later). Therefore, it becomes easier to coordinate between multiple control boards, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 92, the process of storing game machine information, including information related to game progress control received from the main control board, is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also performs the process of updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described later). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 92, when the frame control board 120 transmits and receives information (telegrams, commands) with other control boards (main control board 110), the processing is executed using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, coordination between multiple control boards becomes easier, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, while the frame control unit 120m was used to control the storage of main control state 1 and main control state 2, the storage of the game machine error state, the storage of fraud detection state 1, the storage of the number of balls awarded for triggering special features and the number of balls awarded for consecutive special features, and the storage of various game information, one or more of these processes may be executed by control outside the frame control unit 120m's usage area (outside the area program and outside the area RWM region).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board)
Figure 93 shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board 120.

As the first step, a game machine information reception process is executed, which receives game machine information (hall computer and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the area of use (area program, area of RWM).
As the second step, a determination is made using the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not a ball feed has occurred, sending a game ball to the launcher (here, this is determined to be "affirmative (ball feed occurred)").
As the third step, a process is executed in which "1" is subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the RWM area within the area, using control within the area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, control is performed using the usage area (program area, RWM area) to determine whether or not a foul ball has occurred that was launched by the launcher 92 but returned without flying into the game area 5a (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (foul ball present)").
As the fifth step, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the RWM area within the area, through control using the area within the area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, control using the area of use (area program, area RWM area) determines whether the game machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that a game ball has entered the general prize slot 43 (prize ball information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player) (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (prize ball entered)").

As the seventh step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the RWM area within the area is increased by "5", which is the number of prize balls awarded by the general prize winning slot 43.
As the eighth step, control is performed using the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) to determine whether the game machine information received from the main control board 110 contains information indicating that a game ball has entered the large prize slot 50 (prize ball information that can identify the number of prize balls that are to be awarded to the player) (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (a prize has been won)").
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the number of game balls owned by the player, stored in the RWM area within the area, is increased by "15", which is the number of prize balls awarded for the 50-prize winning slot.

As the tenth step, control is performed using the usage area (program area, RWM area) to determine whether the game machine information received from the main control board 110 contains information indicating that game balls have entered various starting slots (prize ball information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player) (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (prize balls entered)").
As the eleventh step, a determination is made using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the game ball entered the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47.
As the twelfth step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the RWM area within the area is added to the number of prize balls from the first start port 45, which is "3", and/or the number of prize balls from the second start port 47, which is "2".
As the thirteenth step, a display control process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to display the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the RWM area within the area, on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Furthermore, if the second process determines that no ball was fed, the third process will be skipped and the fourth and subsequent processes will be executed. If the fourth process determines that no foul balls were thrown, the fifth process will be skipped and the sixth and subsequent processes will be executed. If the sixth process determines that no balls entered the general prize slot 43, the seventh process will be skipped and the eighth and subsequent processes will be executed. If the eighth process determines that no balls entered the large prize slot 50, the ninth process will be skipped and the tenth and subsequent processes will be executed. If the tenth process determines that no balls entered the starting slot, the eleventh and twelfth processes will be skipped and the thirteenth process will be executed.

As shown in Figure 93, multiple processes related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (addition and subtraction of game balls) are executed by control using the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area). Therefore, the functions of the usage area and the area outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 93, the processing related to displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (addition and subtraction of the number of game balls) is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also performs the processing related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, the number of game balls displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 may be updated according to information indicating that a game ball has entered one of the prize-winning slots among the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls to be awarded to the player), and then the number of game balls owned by the player, stored in the RWM area within the frame control unit 120m, may be updated.

(Processing sequence when the frame control board performs error control processing and fails to permit firing)
Figure 94(a) shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the frame control board 120 and firing is not permitted.

As the first step, a severe error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to trigger error notification in response to the occurrence of a severe error requiring a high level of security vigilance.
As the second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to provide error notification in response to hardware errors caused by hardware.
As the third step, a minor error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to trigger error notification in response to minor errors, which have a lower security alert level than severe errors.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (in this case, a setting to display an error code) is executed to set the frame control display unit 125 to display an error code corresponding to the error currently occurring, according to the priority of various errors, by controlling the area within the usage area (the program area within the area and the RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal, based on whether or not an error has occurred that would warrant stopping the launch permission signal (here, this is assumed to be "positive (occurred)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is prohibited from launching (including feeding) game balls (the output of the launch permission signal is stopped) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to determine whether or not to resume outputting the launch permission signal, based on whether or not the error that would cause the launch permission signal to be stopped has been resolved, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area). (Here, this is referred to as "negative (not resolved)").
As the eighth process, a display control process is executed in which the error code set in the error code display setting process is displayed on the frame control display 125 by control using the area used (the program area and the RWM area within the area).

(Processing sequence when the frame control board performs error control processing and fails to permit firing)
Figure 94(b) shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the frame control board 120 and firing permission is granted.

As the first step, a severe error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to trigger error notification in response to the occurrence of severe errors that require a high level of security vigilance.
As the second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to provide error notification in response to hardware errors caused by hardware.
As the third step, a minor error notification control process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to trigger error notification in response to minor errors, which have a lower security alert level than severe errors.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (in this case, a display setting to hide the error code) is executed to set the display of the error code corresponding to the currently occurring error on the frame control display 125 according to the priority of various errors, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal, based on whether or not an error that would cause the launch permission signal to be stopped has occurred, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed to be "negative (not occurred)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed to determine whether or not to resume outputting the launch permission signal, based on whether or not the error that would cause the launch permission signal to be stopped has been resolved, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area). (Here, this is referred to as "affirmative (termination)").

As the seventh step, a process is executed to allow the launcher 92 to launch game balls (including ball feeding) through control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area) (the output of the launch permission signal is resumed).
As the eighth step, a display control process is executed that uses the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to hide the error codes whose display settings were canceled in the error code display setting process from the frame control display 125.

As shown in Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the processing related to the detection and notification of predetermined errors (magnet detection errors, abnormal prize entry errors) is executed by control using an area outside the operating area (outside the operating area program, outside the operating area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the operating area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process of restricting gameplay due to predetermined errors (magnet detection errors, abnormal prize entry errors) is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also performs the process of updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process for displaying an error code (error code display setting process, display control process) in the event of a predetermined error (magnet detection error, abnormal prize entry error) is executed by control within the usable area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (game ball count update process described later, etc.). Therefore, the functions within and outside the usable area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, while the frame control unit 120m was used to perform error code display setting processing, launch permission signal output stop determination, launch permission signal output restart determination, and error code display, one or more of these processes may be performed using control outside the frame control unit 120m's usage area (outside the area program, outside the area RWM region).

(Processing sequence when display performance information is calculated and displayed on the frame control board)
Figure 95 shows the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates and displays display performance information (normal base value).

As the first step, a game machine information reception process is executed, which receives game machine information (hall computer and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the area of use (area program, area of RWM).
As the second process, control using the area outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) is performed to refer to the game machine information received from the main control board 110 and determine whether or not the current state is normal gameplay (here, it is assumed to be "affirmative (normal gameplay state)").
As the third step, a determination is made using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to determine whether or not there has been an update since the last game information (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (update present)").

As the fourth step, a process is executed to calculate the number of prize balls for the current game by referencing the game machine information received from the main control board 110, using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to update the normal payout counter, which counts the number of payouts during normal gameplay, according to the number of payouts in the current game, using control from outside the used area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the sixth step, control is performed using areas outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to refer to the game machine information received from the main control board 110 and determine whether or not there was an out ball (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (out ball present)").

As the seventh step, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the total number of out balls counter, which counts the total number of out balls in all game states in the current game section, by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the eighth step, control is performed using the area outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to refer to the game machine information received from the main control board 110 and determine whether or not the current state is normal gameplay (here, it is assumed to be "affirmative (normal gameplay state)").
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the normal out counter, which is used to count the number of out balls during normal gameplay, by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the tenth step, a determination is made whether the current state is the first game section or not, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) (here, the negative is "second game section or later").
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to calculate the normal base value, which is display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the twelfth step, a process is executed in which the calculated normal base value is stored in the outside-of-area RWM area as the normal base value for the current game section, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the 13th step, control is performed using areas outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to determine whether or not to update the game section according to the value of the total number of outs counter (here, it is set to "affirmative (update)").
As the 14th step, a process is executed to update the game interval by clearing the normal payout counter, total outs counter, and normal outs counter to 0 through control using the area outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the 15th step, a display control process is executed in which the current normal base value, calculated by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), is displayed on the frame control display 125.

Furthermore, if the second process determines that the game is not in a normal playing state, the third through fifth processes will be skipped and the sixth process onward will be executed. If the third process determines that there is no update to the game information, the fourth and fifth processes will be skipped and the sixth process onward will be executed. If the sixth process determines that there are no out balls, the seventh through ninth processes will be skipped and the tenth process onward will be executed. If the thirteenth process determines that the game interval will not be updated, the fourteenth process will be skipped and the fifteenth process will be executed.

As shown in Figure 95, the process of calculating display performance information (normal base value) that does not affect the game's progress control is performed by control using an area outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 95, the process of displaying the number of game balls owned by the player on the frame control display 125 is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, while the process for displaying display performance information (normal base value) was executed by control using the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area), this process may also be executed by control using the area outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

Furthermore, instead of having the frame control unit 120m execute the calculation of display performance information (normal base value) (display performance information calculation process) and the display of display performance information (normal base value) (display control process), the main control unit 110m may execute these processes and display them on the information display unit 115. In this case, the processes may be executed within the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), or outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (out-area program, out-area RWM area), or one of the calculation and display of display performance information may be executed within the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), while the other is executed outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates the performance information of the gaming machine)
Figure 96 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates the gaming machine performance information that is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170).

As the first step, a game machine information reception process is executed, which receives game machine information (hall computer and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the area of use (area program, area of RWM).
As the second step, a total number of balls launched is calculated by referencing the game machine information received from the main control board 110 and using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area). This calculation is performed to determine the total number of balls launched into the game area 5a from the time the counting start condition is met until the present.
As the third step, a total number of acquired game balls calculation process is executed, which calculates the total number of game balls acquired, which is the number of prize balls from the fulfillment of the counting start condition to the present, by referencing game machine information received from the main control board 110 through control using areas outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As the fourth step, a payout rate calculation process is executed to calculate the payout rate, which is the ratio of the total number of game balls acquired to the total number of balls fired, using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed to calculate the number of game balls won per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the sixth step, a special feature ratio calculation process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to calculate the special feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired to the total number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various special features (execution of auxiliary games and jackpot games).

As the seventh step, a continuous bonus ratio calculation process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) to calculate the continuous bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of continuous bonuses (execution of jackpot games) to the total number of game balls acquired.
As the eighth process, a jackpot count calculation process is executed to calculate the number of jackpot games that have been played from the time the counting start condition is met until the present, using control from outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).
As the ninth step, a maximum payout calculation process is executed to determine the maximum payout, which is the largest difference in the number of balls won from a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game) where the total number of balls won exceeds the total number of balls launched. This process is controlled using areas outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

As shown in Figure 96, the process of calculating (aggregating) gaming machine performance information that does not affect the progress control of the game is executed by using control outside the usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

(Processing sequence 1 when the frame control board performs amusement machine information notification processing)
Figure 97(a) shows the processing sequence 1 (when transmission of hall computer/fraud monitoring information takes priority) when the frame control board 120 performs a game machine information notification processing.

As the first step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification (here, it is assumed that "update occurred").
As the second step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the third step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the RWM area is referenced to generate a message for hall control and fraud monitoring information.

As the fourth step, a process is executed to send the generated hall control and fraud monitoring information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to transmit the gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed in which a message containing gaming machine installation information is generated by referencing the RWM area through control using the area used (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine installation information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth step, a determination is made using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to transmit game machine performance information to the outside of the game machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which a message containing gaming machine performance information is generated by referencing the RWM area through control using the area used (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).
As the tenth step, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine performance information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the second process determines that it is not the timing for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed. If the fifth process determines that it is not the timing for transmitting gaming machine installation information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed. If the eighth process determines that it is not the timing for transmitting gaming machine performance information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

(Processing sequence 2 when the frame control board performs the notification of gaming machine information)
Figure 97(b) shows the processing order 2 (when transmission of hall computer/fraud monitoring information is not prioritized) when the frame control board 120 performs gaming machine information notification processing.

As the first step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification (here, it will be assumed that there is "no update").
As the second step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to transmit the gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the third step, a process is executed in which a message containing gaming machine installation information is generated by referencing the RWM area through control using the area used (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine installation information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a determination is made using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to transmit game machine performance information to the outside of the game machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the sixth step, a process is executed in which a message containing gaming machine performance information is generated by referencing the RWM area through control using the area used (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine performance information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) (in this case, "affirmative (transmission timing)").
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), the RWM area is referenced to generate a message for hall control and fraud monitoring information.
As the tenth step, a process is executed to send the generated hall control and fraud monitoring information as a message, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the second process determines that it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine installation information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed. If the fifth process determines that it is not the timing to transmit the gaming machine performance information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed. If the eighth process determines that it is not the timing to transmit the hall computer/fraud monitoring information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

As shown in Figures 97(a) and 97(b), the process of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of game machine information, including information related to the number of game balls owned (game value), is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, while the frame control unit 120m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) was used to determine whether the game state or game information had been updated, and to determine whether it was time to transmit various types of information, one or more of these processes may be executed using control outside the frame control unit 120m's usage area (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls owned by the player is counted on the frame control board)
Figure 98(a) shows the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 counts the number of game balls owned by the player (transfers data to an external source).

As the first step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is the counting timing (occurring every 300ms) which is 100ms after the previous notification of game machine information (transmission of message) (here, it is considered a "positive counting timing").
As the second step, a determination is made whether or not the counting button 20 has been operated by control using the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) (here, it is determined that "operation occurred").
As the third step, a determination is made regarding the number of game balls, whether or not there are countable game balls, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that "countable (number of game balls >0)").

As the fourth step, a process is executed to set (turn ON) a counting flag indicating that counting is in progress, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed in which a counting processing notification command, indicating that counting processing is in progress, is set in the transmission buffer using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, control is performed using the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) to determine whether the number of countable game balls is the number of game balls that restricts the launch of game balls (referred to here as the "number of game balls that restrict launch").

As the seventh step, a determination is made using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the condition for stopping the output of the launch permission signal has been met (here, it is assumed to be "affirmative (condition met)").
As the eighth step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is prohibited from launching (including feeding) game balls (the output of the launch permission signal is stopped) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area).
As the ninth step, a process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to subtract 250 game balls if the number of game balls is 250 or more, or subtract all game balls if the number of game balls is less than 250 from the number of game balls owned by the player.

As the tenth step, a process is executed in which the cumulative number of balls counted since the start of the counting process is added to the number of game balls subtracted in the ninth step, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh step, a process is executed to generate and send a counting notification message to the dedicated unit 170, which includes information about the number of game balls subtracted in this counting process, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the twelfth step, output control processing is executed, which transmits a command (counting processing notification specification command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the sixth process determines that the number of balls is not subject to launch restrictions (number of game balls > 1000), the seventh and eighth processes will be skipped, and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed. Also, if the seventh process determines that the condition for stopping the launch permission signal output is not met, the eighth process will be skipped, and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed.

(Processing sequence when the frame control board finishes counting the number of game balls owned by the player)
Figure 98(b) shows the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 finishes counting the number of game balls owned by the player (transferring data to an external source).

As the first step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not it is the counting timing (occurring every 300ms) which is 100ms after the previous notification of game machine information (transmission of message) (here, it is considered a "positive counting timing").
As the second step, a determination is made whether or not the counting button 20 has been operated by using control within the usage area (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area) (here, it is determined to be "no operation").
As the third step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not the counting process is in progress based on whether or not the counting process flag is set (here, we will assume "counting process flag is set").

As the fourth step, a process is executed to clear the counting process flag set in the RWM area by controlling the area within the usage area (the program within the area and the RWM area within the area).
As the fifth step, a process is executed in which a counting completion command, indicating that the counting process has been completed, is set in the transmission buffer using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth step, a process is executed to clear the cumulative number of balls counted since the start of the counting process (after the counting process flag is set), using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh step, a determination is made using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the conditions for resuming the output of the launch permission signal have been met (here, this is considered "affirmative (condition met)").
As the eighth step, a process is executed in which the launching device 92 is authorized to launch game balls (including ball feeding) by control using the area of use (the program area and the RWM area within the area) (the output of the launch authorization signal is resumed).
As the ninth step, a process is executed in which, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a count notification message containing the information that the counted number of game balls is "0" is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170.
As the tenth step, output control processing is executed, which transmits a command (counting process completion specification command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the seventh process determines that the conditions for resuming the output of the launch permission signal are not met, the eighth process will not be executed, and the processes from the ninth onward will be executed instead.

As shown in Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the processing related to counting the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process of restricting gameplay based on the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process of sending a count notification containing information about the number of game balls owned (game value) to the dedicated unit 170 (e.g., message generation, message transmission) is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, while the control within the operating area of the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area) was used to perform actions such as determining whether it was the counting timing, determining whether the counting button 20 had been operated, setting the counting flag, setting various commands to the transmission buffer, determining the number of game balls, determining whether to stop or restart the output of the launch permission signal, and adding the cumulative count of balls, one or more of these processes may be performed by control outside the operating area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when a loan is processed after a loan notification is received by the frame control board)
Figure 99(a) shows the processing sequence when a loan process is performed after a loan notification is received by the frame control board 120.

As the first step, a determination is made using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not the loan notification message transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 has been received (here, it is determined to be "affirmative (received)").
As the second step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether there is anything abnormal with the loan serial number included in the received loan notification (determining whether it is the previous loan serial number + 1) (here, this is considered "normal").
As the third step, a process is executed in which the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is stored as the previous loan serial number through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth step, a determination is made using the usage area (the program within the area, the RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not a ball removal operation is currently in progress (here, it is determined to be "negative (not in ball removal operation)").
As the fifth step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the number of game balls owned by the player is below a specified value (100,000) and whether it is possible to lend out game balls (game value) (here, it will be considered "available for lending").
As the sixth step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the number of balls to be lent included in the received loan notification message is within the normal range (0 to 250) (here, it is assumed that it is "normal" and that the game balls (game value) will be lent out).

As the seventh step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the number of borrowed balls included in the received borrowing notification message is greater than "0" (meaning borrowed) (here, it is determined to be "yes").
As the eighth step, a process is executed in which the number of loaned balls included in the received loan notification message is added to the number of game balls owned by the player, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth step, a process is executed to generate and send a loan acceptance result response (normal) message to the dedicated unit 170 using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

(Processing sequence when a loan notification is received by the frame control board but the loan process is not performed)
Figure 99(b) shows the processing sequence when a loan notification is received by the frame control board 120 but the loan process is not performed.
Note that the first to fifth processes in Figure 99(b) are the same as the first to fifth processes in Figure 99(a), so their explanation is omitted here.

As the sixth step, control is performed using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the number of balls to be lent included in the received loan notification message is within the normal range (0 to 250) (here, it is assumed that it is "abnormal" and no game balls (game value) will be lent out).
As the seventh step, a process is executed to generate and send a message indicating a loan acceptance result (abnormality) to the dedicated unit 170 through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

Furthermore, if the fourth process determines that the ball removal operation is in progress, the game balls (game value) will not be lent out, and the seventh process will be executed without performing the fifth and sixth processes.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process related to the lending of game balls (game value) is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of the loan receipt result response, which includes information related to the loan of the number of game balls (game value), (e.g., message generation, message transmission) is executed by control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, the functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m can be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, while the frame control unit 120m performed operations such as abnormality detection of the loan serial number, storage of the loan serial number, detection of ball removal operation, determination of loan eligibility, and determination of the number of loaned balls by controlling within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may be performed by controlling outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area).

(Summary of the relationship between the processing order of various control functions and the implementation area)
As shown in Figures 84 to 99, the control boards related to the progress of the game (main control board 110, frame control board 120) include an in-area ROM area for storing in-area programs for controlling the progress of the game (first control), an out-of-area ROM area for storing out-of-area programs for supplementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the game machine 1 can be functionally divided, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the control boards related to the progress of the game (main control board 110, frame control board 120) include a granting process (payout control process, game ball count update process) that grants prize balls (game value) based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots (fulfillment of granting conditions), a first update process (increase counter update process, maximum increase update process) that updates the first game information (increase counter, maximum increase) using the information of the granted prize balls (game value), and a stop process that stops the progress control of the game (first control) based on the first game information. The system can execute a stop process (acquisition limit device activation determination process), a second update process (display performance information calculation process, game machine performance information calculation process) that updates the second game information (display performance information, game machine performance information) using the information of the awarded prize balls (game value), and an output process (display control process, game machine information notification process) that outputs the second game information to the output target (frame control display 125, dedicated unit 170). The first and second update processes are executed using an out-of-bounds program (outside the usage area). Therefore, multiple information update functions can be consolidated into an out-of-bounds program, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the game machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 includes an in-area ROM area for storing in-area programs for controlling the progress of the game (first control), an out-of-area ROM area for storing out-of-area programs for supplementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the game machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 includes an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for controlling the launch of game balls (game media) (first control), an out-of-area ROM area for storing an out-of-area program for performing supplementary game control (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control but not in the second control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control but not in the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the game machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 includes an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for performing control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (third control), an out-of-area ROM area for storing an out-of-area program for performing supplementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the game machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 includes an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for performing control (third control) to output predetermined information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine, an out-of-area ROM area for storing an out-of-area program for performing game supplementary control (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 includes an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for performing control (third control) to notify the player of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135), an out-of-area ROM area for storing an out-of-area program for performing supplementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, the control for operating the game machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 (transmission of information messages, transmission of response messages, etc.) is executed using a program stored in the ROM area of the main control board 110 or a program stored in the ROM area of the frame control board 120. Therefore, coordination between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is facilitated, and the efficiency of control processing can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 includes an in-area ROM area for storing an in-area program for performing control (third control) to output specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1, an out-of-area ROM area for storing an out-of-area program for performing control (fourth control) to generate specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-of-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. The specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) is a predetermined calculation result related to game balls (game value). Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing. Furthermore, it becomes possible to utilize the specific information outside of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, executes a first control to generate first information (game machine installation information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and a second control to transmit the first information to the frame control board 120. The frame control board 120, which controls the distribution of game balls (game value), executes a third control to generate second information (game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control to receive first information (game machine installation information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.), a fifth control to transmit the first information and second information (game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the game machine 1, and a sixth control to transmit the third information (counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) to the outside of the game machine 1. Therefore, the information output functions of the gaming machine 1 to the outside can be consolidated into the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, and the frame control board 120, which controls the distribution of game balls (game value), are capable of authorizing the launch of game balls (game medium) (outputting a launch authorization signal). The launching device 92 is configured to launch game balls (game medium) when launching is authorized by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 (two launch authorization signals are input). Therefore, the launch of game balls can be stopped from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, thereby improving the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, while the related areas (transmit buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) used in relation to the control content are generally used both within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) and outside the usage area (out-area program, out-of-area RWM area), it is also possible to provide separate related areas (transmit buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) for the usage area and outside the usage area, or to provide some common areas for both and separate areas for the rest.

Furthermore, while the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred in the main control board 110 to waiting for a power outage may be executed by control using areas outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area), it is preferable to execute them by control using areas within the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

Furthermore, while the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred in the frame control board 120 to waiting for a power outage may be executed by control using areas outside the operating area of the frame control unit 120m (out-of-area program, out-of-area RWM area), it is preferable to execute them by control using areas within the operating area of the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 100. Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt disable to prevent timer interrupts, and in step E20, it performs initialization processing. Specifically, upon power-on, it reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and other data stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs initial setup processing.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt enable to allow timer interrupts, and in step E40, it performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it updates the various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c. From this point onward, the process in step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt is processed.

(Timer interrupt processing in the production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 101. Figure 101 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing that is executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in its registers to the stack area, and then in step E120, it performs a timer update process. In this timer update process, the sub-CPU 130a updates various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs the input control processing shown in Figure 102. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the joystick detection switch 19a, and if there is input, it sets predetermined data. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and if various commands have been transmitted, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E170, the sub-CPU 130a performs the setting change/confirmation process. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change command or a setting confirmation command has been received. If a setting change command has been received, it performs the process to execute the setting change notification described above. If a setting confirmation command has been received, it performs the process to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

In step E200, the sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not it has received a power-on specification command, and if it has, it performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the power-on screen to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73, and causing the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power recovery processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not it has received a power recovery command, and if it has, it performs processing to execute a power recovery notification. More specifically, it sends a power recovery notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73 to display a power recovery screen, and the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery sound.

The sub-CPU 130a sends a "power-on command" to the lamp control unit 150 during power-on processing and power-out restoration processing. Upon receiving the "power-on command," the lamp control unit 150 drives the panel drive unit 75 to execute the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b. Initial operation refers to the operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b in the same or substantially the same manner as the operation during the fluctuation effect, when power-on notification or power-out restoration notification is being issued. This initial operation allows for an operation check of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b, confirming that they are functioning correctly.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting animation processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state specification command has been received. If it has been received, it performs processing to execute a customer waiting demo animation after a predetermined time has elapsed. More specifically, it sends a customer waiting animation command to the image control unit 145, causing the customer waiting demo screen to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72, and the fourth image display device 73, and causing the customer waiting demo sound to be output from the sound output device 9. Details of the customer waiting demo animation will be described later.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state update process. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game state specification command has been received, and if it has been received, it updates the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a hold information update process. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special figure hold count specification command or a general figure hold count specification command has been received. If a command has been received, it updates the first special figure hold count, second special figure hold count, general figure hold count, etc., stored (kept) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs pre-read animation processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether it has received a pre-read specification command or a special symbol variation pattern specification command. If it has received such a command, it performs processing related to pre-read animations such as icon change animations, continuous予告 animations, lamp change animations, and hold-continue animations. Details of the pre-read animation processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-announcement effect that makes the player anticipate a jackpot by changing the held icon and the way the icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the icon change effect for the held icon may be referred to as the "held icon change effect," and the icon change effect for the said icon may be referred to as the "said icon change effect."

A "continuous pre-announcement effect" is a type of pre-announcement effect that performs predetermined effects over one or more variations, leading the player to expect that a jackpot will be played.
A "lamp change effect" is a type of pre-announcement effect that makes the player anticipate a jackpot by changing the lighting pattern of the winning slot lamp over one or more variation effects.

The "Reserve Consecutive Win Performance" is a type of pre-announcement performance executed during a jackpot game. For example, in a high-probability time-saving game state, if a random value for jackpot determination that will result in a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c, the movable performance device 77 is activated at a predetermined timing to announce that the variable display corresponding to the above reserve memory, which will be executed after the jackpot game ends, is a jackpot, prior to the execution of the variable display.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol and special electric effect processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether it has received special symbol specification commands, special symbol variation pattern specification commands, special symbol stop specification commands, jackpot opening specification commands, round number specification commands, and jackpot ending specification commands, etc. If it has received them, it performs processing to execute the effects corresponding to the received commands.

Furthermore, if the special symbol specification command (first information signal) and the special symbol variation pattern specification command (second information signal), which serve as the start command (start signal) that initiates the variation display, are received correctly, the variation performance (first variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and second variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol) accompanied by the variation display of the performance symbol 70a will be executed. However, if there is an abnormality in the special symbol specification command or the special symbol variation pattern specification command (e.g., the relationship between miss and jackpot does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by MODE in the command does not match, or the DATA side of the command is corrupted and has changed to content that should not be possible), the command will be considered invalid and the variation performance will not be executed. Also, if the special symbol specification command and the special symbol variation pattern specification command are not received correctly (e.g., the special symbol specification command is not received within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol specification command, or the special symbol variation pattern specification command is received without receiving the special symbol specification command), the command will be considered invalid and the variation performance will not be executed. In the following explanation, "command error" will refer to both cases where a command is abnormal or where a command is not received correctly.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs the normal pattern and normal animation processing. Specifically, it checks the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether it has received the normal pattern specification command, normal pattern variation pattern specification command, normal pattern stop specification command, winning opening specification command, and winning ending specification command, etc. If it has received them, it performs processing to execute the animation corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a performance mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether the update conditions for the performance mode, which define the performance elements (such as the performance pattern type, background image type, icon type, icon operation type, variation path type of the performance pattern 70a, pre-variation operation type of the performance pattern 70a, pre-stop operation type of the performance pattern 70a, variation BGM type, etc.) in the audio output device 9, first image display device 70, second image display device 71, third image display device 72, fourth image display device 73, etc., have been met. If the update conditions are met, it performs a process to update the performance mode to one of the multiple performance modes. Details of the performance mode update process will be described later.

The "Performance Mode" consists of three modes: Modes A to C, set during normal gameplay (low probability, non-time-saving gameplay); Modes D to E, set during probability-changing gameplay (high probability, time-saving gameplay); and Mode F, set during time-saving gameplay (low probability, time-saving gameplay). Note that when the machine is controlled to normal gameplay upon power-on (for example, after a setting change, RWM clear, setting confirmation, etc.), the first performance mode set is always Mode A. When the machine is controlled to probability-changing gameplay upon power-on, the first performance mode set is always Mode D. When the machine is controlled to time-saving gameplay upon power-on, the first performance mode set is always Mode F.

Furthermore, in performance modes A through C, the performance symbol 70a consists of a number (identification character), a character corresponding to the number (decorative element), and a symbol effect image (decorative element) that decorates the background of the number and character. The design of the number and character differs between performance modes. In performance modes D through F, the performance symbol 70a consists only of a number (identification character), and the design of the number is consistent across all performance modes. Additionally, in performance modes A through F, the background image corresponding to each performance mode scrolls horizontally (back and forth).

In step E850, the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not it has received an error specification command or an error clear specification command from the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120. If a command has been received, it performs processing to execute an error notification animation corresponding to the received error specification command, or processing to terminate the error notification animation corresponding to the received error clear specification command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to its registers, and terminates the current timer interrupt processing.

(Input control processing)
The input control process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 102. Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the input control process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E130-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a custom performance input was received. Specifically, it determines whether or not an input (custom performance input) was received from the joystick detection switch 19a. If a custom performance input was received, the process proceeds to step E130-2; if no custom performance input was received, the process proceeds to step E130-5.

In step E130-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a custom ON setting is specified. Specifically, when a custom performance input is made, it determines whether the custom performance input specifies ON or OFF. If it is a custom ON setting, the process proceeds to step E130-3; if it is not a custom ON setting (i.e., a custom OFF setting), the process proceeds to step E130-4.

In step E130-3, the sub-CPU 130a turns on the custom effect for the corresponding animation and terminates the current input control process. In step E130-4, it turns off the custom effect for the corresponding animation and terminates the current input control process.

Here, we will explain the custom performance settings using Figure 103. During the customer waiting performance (customer waiting performances A and B, and customer waiting demo performances A and B), the setting screen will be displayed on the third image display device 72 (left sub-display device), and settings can be configured by operating the joystick 19 (up, down, left, right, and select button). While custom performance settings may also be possible during the variation performance, the changes will only be reflected from the point when the currently running variation performance ends (or from the next variation performance if one is to begin).

Examples of customizable settings include "Gold Heat Mode," "Handle Fan," and "Icon Change Super Hot." Figure 103 shows that all of these are set to "OFF." For example, to turn "Gold Heat Mode" to "ON," in the state shown in Figure 103, move the joystick 19 to the left and press the confirmation button on the joystick 19.

"Gold Heat Mode" means that, when set to ON, compared to when set to OFF, the jackpot prediction process makes it more likely that certain types of predictions will be selected (displayed) during the jackpot prediction sequence, such as dialogue predictions (gold), SU predictions (gold), and cut-in predictions (gold). In other words, it's a setting that makes gold-colored predictions more likely to appear. On the other hand, when set to OFF, these predictions are less likely to be selected (displayed) or not selected at all compared to when set to ON. While each prediction will be explained in detail in the jackpot prediction sequence determination process, for example, with dialogue predictions, the order of jackpot expectation from highest to lowest is dialogue prediction (gold), dialogue prediction (red), and dialogue prediction (normal), with dialogue prediction (gold) having the highest jackpot expectation. Furthermore, these predictions are determined during the jackpot prediction sequence determination process and are available during the spin sequence once it begins; they are not pre-announcement type predictions.

"Handle Fan" refers to a setting where, when ON, a fan effect occurs from the launch handle 15 with a predetermined probability when a jackpot is hit, compared to when OFF. Conversely, when OFF, it is less likely to be selected, or may not be selected at all, compared to when ON. The fan effect is a performance that blows air onto the player's (hand) gripping the launch handle 15, and only the player gripping the launch handle 15 can perceive the occurrence of this effect. Furthermore, the fan effect can only be selected (executed) when a jackpot is hit, and its occurrence is considered a confirmation of a jackpot. Additionally, the fan effect can only occur during ongoing spinning animations (it is not a pre-announcement type effect), and it occurs at the start of a spinning animation, during its execution, and at the end of a spinning animation (during a temporary stop after a miss notification), etc.

"Icon Change Highly Exciting" means that when set to ON, the icon change animation is more likely to be selected (executed) when a jackpot is hit, compared to when it is set to OFF. In other words, if the icon change animation occurs, it is more likely to result in a jackpot. Conversely, when set to OFF, it is less likely to be selected, or may not be selected at all, compared to when it is ON. The selection rate of the icon change animation when the animation customization is set to ON and when it is set to OFF will be described later in the section on the icon change animation determination process.

Furthermore, the custom performance settings are not limited to these three examples; other settings may also be available. Regarding the ON and OFF settings, for example, in the area of sub-RAM 130c that manages the custom performance settings, if "Gold Heat Mode" is ON, set it to "1"; if "Gold Heat Mode" is OFF, set it to "0"; if "Handle Fan" is ON, set it to "1"; if "Handle Fan" is OFF, set it to "0"; if "Icon Change Super Hot" is ON, set it to "1"; and if "Icon Change Super Hot" is OFF, set it to "0". This management can be done in a management area corresponding to each performance setting. In other words, the sub-CPU 130a will refer to the area of sub-RAM 130c that manages the custom performance settings, check whether "1" or "0" is set for each performance setting, and then determine the performance.

Furthermore, regarding the OFF setting, while it is certainly possible to turn off each setting individually, it would also be good to allow for a "simultaneous OFF" of all performance settings. This would eliminate the need for new players to individually turn off settings, allowing them to start playing more quickly.
Furthermore, the performance settings may be reset when the power supply is cut off, or they may be reset when the RWM is cleared.

Returning to the flowchart in Figure 102, the sub-CPU 130a determines in step E130-5 whether there is any other input (or if it has been performed). For example, it determines whether or not an input was performed from the performance button detection switch 17a. If another input was performed, the process moves to step E130-6; if no other input was performed, the current input control process ends.

In step E130-6, the system executes an animation corresponding to the operation of the animation button detection switch sw17a. For example, during a variation animation, a dialogue予告 animation or a decisive animation may be executed. During a customer waiting animation or a customer waiting demo animation, a menu screen may be displayed. The menu screen is displayed, for example, on the first image display device 70. Within this menu, the player can view a history of past jackpots and an introduction to the main animations that indicate a potential jackpot.

(Pre-reading-based production processing by the production control unit)
The pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 104. Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E505, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the value of the increment counter (MY counter). Based on this reference, in step E506, it determines whether or not the pre-reading animation is within the execution period. For example, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) referenced in step E505 is "93000", it determines that the pre-reading animation is not within the execution period and terminates the current pre-reading animation process. If the value of the increment counter (MY counter) is not "93000", the process proceeds to step E510. In other words, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) reaches a predetermined number, the execution of the pre-reading animation is restricted.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change animation determination process to determine whether or not to execute the icon change animation and the animation style of the animation. Details of the icon change animation determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change animation execution process to execute the icon change animation that was determined to be executed in the icon change animation determination process (changing the display of the already displayed pending icon or the display pattern of the icon).

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous予告演出 (continuous予告演出) determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous予告演出 and the presentation style of the continuous予告演出. In step E540, it performs a continuous予告演出 execution process to execute the continuous予告演出 that was determined to be executed in the continuous予告演出 determination process. Details of the continuous予告演出 determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change animation execution process (lighting up the prize entry lamp NR so that it illuminates in a manner corresponding to the changed display of the icon).

In step E560, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pending consecutive win animation determination process to determine whether or not to execute the pending consecutive win animation and the animation style of the pending consecutive win animation. In step E570, it performs a pending consecutive win animation execution process to execute the pending consecutive win animation that was determined to be executed in the pending consecutive win animation determination process, and then terminates the current pre-read animation process.

Furthermore, while pre-announcement-type effects are permitted to be decided and executed in the situation immediately before the "game ball count exceeds" (described later), their decision and execution are restricted in the situation immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated, as mentioned above. The situation immediately before the "game ball count exceeds" is assumed to be, for example, when the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "38,000". On the other hand, the situation immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is assumed to be, as mentioned above, when the maximum increase value reaches "93,000". That is, the decision and execution of pre-announcement-type effects are restricted during the period when the maximum increase value is between "93,000" and "95,000". Note that "38,000" and "93,000" are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the game machine. The restrictions on the decision and execution of pre-announcement-type effects will be described in detail later.

(Icon change effect determination process in the performance control unit)
The icon change animation determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 105. Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the icon change animation determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a pre-read specification command from the main control board 110. If a pre-read specification command is received, the process moves to step E510-2. If no pre-read specification command is received, the current icon change animation determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading command to determine whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the performance (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current time is within the period during which the icon change animation can be executed. If it is within the period during which the icon change animation can be executed, the process moves to step E510-4. If it is not within the period during which the icon change animation can be executed, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "Period during which the icon change animation can be executed" refers to the period when a jackpot game is not in progress, when the icon change animation is not in progress, or when the icon change animation is not scheduled to be executed. Note that only one or two of the above three conditions may be set. Furthermore, if the received pre-reading command is based on a ball entering the first starting gate 45, the game is in a normal game state; if the received pre-reading command is based on a ball entering the second starting gate 47, the game is in a specific game state (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state), etc.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the "Icon Change Super Hot" setting is ON. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the area in the sub-RAM 130c that manages the custom settings for the animations to determine whether the "Icon Change Super Hot" setting is "1" (ON) or "0" (OFF). If the "Icon Change Super Hot" setting is "1" (ON), the process proceeds to step E510-5; if it is "0" (OFF), the process proceeds to step E510-6.

In step E510-5, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining whether to execute when a "Super Hot" option is selected, and then determines whether to execute. While the table used to determine execution is not shown in the diagram, it might be a table with ratios such as: for a jackpot, execution is 95/100 and non-execution is 5/100; for a loss, execution is 1/100 and non-execution is 99/100. The execution is determined using the obtained random value and this table. Note that these ratios are just examples and can be changed as appropriate. For example, for a jackpot, execution could be 100/100 and non-execution could be 0/100; for a loss, execution could be 0/100 and non-execution could be 100/100. After completing step E510-5, the process moves to step E510-7.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining whether to execute when the "Super Hot" option is not selected, and then determines whether to execute. While the table used to determine execution is not shown in the diagram, it is a table with ratios such as: for a "Big Win," execution is 70/100 and non-execution is 30/100; for a "Loss," execution is 40/100 and non-execution is 60/100. The execution is determined using the obtained random value and this table. Note that these ratios are just examples; other ratios such as those described in step E510-5 (0:100) may also be used. After completing the processing in step E510-6, the process moves to step E510-7.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the icon change animation. That is, it determines whether or not to execute the icon change animation based on the processing in step E510-5 or step E510-6. If the icon change animation is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E510-8; if the icon change animation is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E510-11.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining the final display mode of the icons to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). In step E510-9, it selects an icon final display mode determination table (see Figure 106) to determine the final display mode of the icons. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in Figure 106 and, based on the planned variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, determines one icon final display mode from among multiple icon final display modes.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode to be the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the final icon display mode determined is a display mode that executes an icon change animation (special icon). If it is a display mode that executes an icon change animation, the process moves to step E510-13. If it is not a display mode that executes an icon change animation, the process moves to step E510-16.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (not shown) for determining the change scenario for the icon change animation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario represents the transition in the display pattern from the appearance to the disappearance of the pending icon.

In step E510-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the hold count counter in the sub-RAM 130c. Specifically, it refers to the change scenario determination table and determines one change scenario from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display pattern, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the pre-read specification command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-15, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario. It then sets the icon display command for this winning icon in the transmission buffer, ending the icon change animation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, causing the reserved icon corresponding to the winning icon's display command to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or a predetermined sound effect to be output.

In step E510-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change animation is not executed and sets it in the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the hold count counter in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E510-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and terminates the icon change animation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, causing the reserved icon corresponding to the normal icon display command to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) to be output.

(Table for determining the final display mode of icons)
Figure 106 shows the icon final display mode determination table, which is referenced when determining the final display mode of an icon.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the planned fluctuation pattern indicated by the pre-read specification command, the selection rate (%) for each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. For reference, the type of notification sound heard when each icon type is generated is also listed.

The final icon display options include a white icon as the standard icon, and special icons—blue, red, and rainbow—that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The probability of winning the jackpot associated with special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon. The rainbow icon guarantees a jackpot.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence notification sound is output; when a blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence notification sound is output; when a red icon is displayed, the third occurrence notification sound is output; and when a rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is output.

Here, a key feature of the final display mode determination table is that the selection rate of the final icon display mode varies depending on the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP Reach or SPSP Reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is a normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in a reach.

Note that in the icon final display pattern determination table, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display pattern when a jackpot is achieved, but this can be changed to allow selection.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types). However, it is also possible to use only two types of notification sounds: one for when a white icon appears, and two for when the icon changes to a blue, red, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no notification sound may be output when a white icon appears, and a notification sound may only be output when the icon changes to one of the other modes. Furthermore, a dedicated notification sound may be provided for the rainbow icon, which guarantees a jackpot, resulting in three types of notification sounds.

(Processing of determining the sequence of preview sequences in the production control unit)
The process for determining the continuous preview effect in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 107. Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the continuous preview effect in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a pre-reading command from the main control board 110. If a pre-reading command is received, the process moves to step E530-2. If no pre-reading command is received, the process for determining the current sequence of pre-announcement effects ends.

In step E530-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading command to determine whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance content (planned variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether the current time is within the period for executing a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect). If it is within the period for executing a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect), the process moves to step E530-4. If it is not within the period for executing a continuous予告演出, the process moves to step E530-18, assuming that the continuous予告演出 based on the pre-announcement command received this time will not be executed.

The "pre-announcement action" is an action (pre-announcement action) that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by operating the first movable member 77a in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately following the start of one or more variation actions.

The "Pre-announcement Effect" is an effect (pre-announcement effect) that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by displaying an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect symbol 70a at the timing immediately following the start of one or more variation effects (during preparation, before scrolling).

The "Pre-announcement Vibration Effect" is a vibration effect (pre-announcement effect) that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by vibrating the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variation effects.

A "pre-announcement zone effect" is a feature that continuously suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by displaying a zone image (zone background image) during a zone-based effect (pre-announcement effect) at a predetermined timing within one or more variation effects.

The "Pre-read Chance Symbol演出" is a feature that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being executed by stopping and displaying the symbols 70a in a predetermined, regular arrangement during one or more reel spinning sequences. The predetermined regularity includes, for example, combinations of numbers consisting only of red (773, 337, etc.), combinations of numbers consisting only of green (159, 591, etc.), and combinations of numbers consisting only of blue (246, 862, etc.). The likelihood of a jackpot differs in the order of red only > green only > blue only. Furthermore, when a combination of numbers consisting only of red (773, 337, etc.) is displayed, the entire symbol 70a, or the outer edge of the display area of the first image display device 70, is decorated with a red effect. The same decoration applies to green and blue symbols, emphasizing the execution of the "Pre-read Chance Symbol演出" (same-color chance symbol演出).

The "Period during which a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) can be executed" refers to situations such as: there being no pre-held balls that require a continuous予告演出; the game not being in the middle of a jackpot game; the game being in a normal game state if a pre-read command based on a ball entering the first start slot 45 is received; or the game being in a specific game state (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) if a pre-read command based on a ball entering the second start slot 47 is received.

In step E530-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a continuous予告 (continuous予告) type determination table corresponding to the current performance mode. In step E530-5, it refers to the continuous予告 (continuous予告) type determination table to determine the continuous予告 (continuous予告) type (whether or not to execute the continuous予告 performance, and the type of continuous予告 performance to execute). Details of the continuous予告 (continuous予告) type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the sequence is of a type that executes a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence). If the sequence is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-18. If the sequence is to be executed, in step E530-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a continuous予告 scenario determination table corresponding to the current presentation mode. Details of the continuous予告 scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous予告 (pre-announcement) type for executing a pre-read operation sequence has been determined. If the pre-read operation sequence is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10. If the pre-read operation sequence is to be executed, in step E530-9, the pre-announcement scenario for the pre-read operation sequence is determined by referring to the continuous announcement scenario determination table and set in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous予告 (pre-announcement) type for executing a pre-read effect animation has been determined. If the pre-read effect animation is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12. If the pre-read effect animation is to be executed, in step E530-11, the pre-announcement scenario for the pre-read effect animation is determined by referring to the continuous予告 (pre-announcement) scenario determination table and set in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous予告 (pre-announcement) type for executing a pre-read vibration effect has been determined. If the pre-read vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14. If the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the pre-announcement scenario for the pre-read vibration effect is determined by referring to the continuous announcement scenario determination table and set in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous予告 (pre-announcement) type for executing the pre-read zone effect has been determined. If the pre-read zone effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-16. If the pre-read zone effect is to be executed, in step E530-15, the system refers to the continuous予告 (pre-announcement) scenario determination table to determine the pre-read zone effect's announcement scenario and sets it in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a consecutive予告 (pre-announcement) type for executing a pre-announcement chance event has been determined. If the pre-announcement chance event is not to be executed, the current consecutive announcement event determination process ends. If the pre-announcement chance event is to be executed, in step E530-17, the system refers to the consecutive announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario for the pre-announcement chance event, sets it in the pre-announcement information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends the current consecutive announcement event determination process.

In step E530-18, the sub-CPU 130a determines the non-preview scenario for the continuous preview sequence (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview sequence will not be executed), sets it in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and terminates the continuous preview sequence determination process.

Furthermore, the preview scenario or non-preview scenario set in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced in the continuous preview performance execution process of step E540 described above, and processing is performed to either execute the continuous preview performance or to prevent the continuous preview performance from being executed.

As shown in Figure 107, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process, in normal gameplay, the pre-reading action is not executed during the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol. Therefore, in normal gameplay, the first movable member 77b is more likely to operate when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. This allows for an enhanced effect related to the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in normal gameplay, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in normal gameplay, a pre-read effect effect (an effect where an effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a) can be executed during the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect). However, in specific gameplay states, the pre-read effect effect is not executed during the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect). Therefore, the rate at which the pre-read effect effect is executed differs depending on whether the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during normal gameplay or during specific gameplay states. This allows for a difference in the effect at the start of the first variation effect between normal gameplay and specific gameplay states, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in a specific game state, the pre-read effect effect (an effect where an effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a) is not executed during the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect), while the pre-read effect effect can be executed during the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect). Therefore, the rate at which the pre-read effect effect is executed differs depending on whether the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed during the specific game state or the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed during the specific game state. As a result, during the specific game state where the variation display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, the effect of the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed in a specific game state, a pre-read effect effect may be executed. In this case, the probability should be lower than when the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) is executed.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in normal gameplay, the pre-read vibration effect is not executed during the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol. Therefore, in normal gameplay, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. This allows for an enhancement of the effect related to the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol in normal gameplay, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, if a specific game state is reached, the pre-read operation effect is not executed during the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the specific game state, the first movable member 77b is more likely to operate when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. As a result, the effect of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol can be enhanced in the specific game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, if a specific game state is reached, the pre-read vibration effect is not executed during the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol. Therefore, in a specific game state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. This allows for an enhanced effect related to the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in a specific game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, while the pre-announcement zone effect (background change) can be executed during the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) in normal gameplay, it is not executed during the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) in specific gameplay states. Therefore, the pre-announcement zone effect (background change) is less likely to be executed when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed in a specific gameplay state than when it is executed in normal gameplay. As a result, the effect of the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) can be enhanced during normal gameplay, where the variation display of the first special symbol is more likely to occur, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in a specific game state, the pre-read zone effect (background change) is not executed during the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect), while the pre-read zone effect can be executed during the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect). Therefore, the pre-read zone effect (background change) is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) is executed during a specific game state than when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed during that state. Thus, in a specific game state where the second special symbol's variation display is more likely to be executed, the effect of the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed in a specific game state, the pre-read zone effect may be executed. In this case, the probability should be lower than when the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) is executed.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in a normal game state, the pre-announcement chance effect can be executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation effect). However, in a specific game state, the pre-announcement chance effect cannot be executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation effect). Therefore, the pre-announcement chance effect is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation effect) is executed in a normal game state than when it is executed in a specific game state. Thus, in a normal game state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed, the effect of the effect related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation effect) can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) determination process shown in Figure 107, in a specific game state, the pre-announcement chance effect is not executed during the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect), while the pre-announcement chance effect can be executed during the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect). Therefore, the pre-announcement chance effect is more likely to be executed when the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) is executed during a specific game state than when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed during that state. Thus, in a specific game state where the second special symbol's variation display is more likely to be executed, the effect of the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol's variation display (first variation effect) is executed in a specific game state, the pre-read chance symbol effect may be executed. In this case, the probability should be lower than when the second special symbol's variation display (second variation effect) is executed.

(Continuous予告 type determination table)
Figure 108 shows a table for determining the type of consecutive notification that is referenced to determine the type of consecutive notification in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 109 shows a table for determining the type of consecutive notification that is referenced to determine the type of consecutive notification in performance modes D to F (specific game state).

As shown in Figures 108 and 109, the consecutive notification type determination table associates the pre-reading specification command (scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) for each consecutive notification type, and the selected consecutive notification type. The consecutive notification types include "Not Executed" (no consecutive notification effect performed), "Pre-reading Action Effect," "Pre-reading Vibration Effect," "Pre-reading Zone Effect," and "Pre-reading Chance Eye Effect" (one of several consecutive notification effects performed), and "Pre-reading Effect Effect & Pre-reading Vibration Effect" and "Pre-reading Action Effect & Pre-reading Zone Effect" (two of several consecutive notification effects performed).

For example, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), if the pre-read command (planned variation pattern) is a miss and an SP reach performance is executed, there is a 79% chance of "not executing," a 6% chance of "pre-read effect performance," a 5% chance of "pre-read chance eye performance," a 4% chance of "pre-read action performance," a 3% chance of "pre-read vibration performance," a 2% chance of "pre-read zone performance," and a 1% chance of "pre-read effect performance & pre-read vibration performance."

(Continuous予告演出 Scenario Determination Table)
Figure 110 shows the continuous予告 (preview) scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 111 shows the continuous preview scenario determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game state).

The consecutive予告 (pre-announcement) scenario determination table associates the number of special symbols held, the pre-announcement specification command (planned variation pattern), the selection rate (%) for each prediction scenario, and the selected prediction scenario. For reference, the preceding variations (4 variations before, 3 variations before, 2 variations before, 1 variation before) and the presentation style of the consecutive prediction effect during that variation are also listed.

"Pre-emptive variation" refers to a variation display (variation effect) executed based on special symbol judgment information stored prior to the special symbol judgment information corresponding to the newly received pre-read specification command. "The variation in question" refers to a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special symbol judgment information corresponding to the newly received pre-read specification command.

"Weak notification" refers to a notification that differs in its presentation depending on the type of consecutive notification. In the case of a pre-read action, the first movable member 77b performs a weak action, emitting blue light, and a weak action sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-read effect, a blue effect image is displayed around the performance symbol 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-read vibration, the vibrator for vibrating the performance button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the performance button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-read zone, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed, and a zone sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-read chance symbol, the performance symbol 70a stops and displays in a predetermined even-numbered sequence (for example, "224" or "668") accompanied by an emphasis on the performance symbol 70a using a blue effect image.

"Strong予告" refers to a type of continuous予告 (pre-announcement) in which the presentation varies depending on the type of pre-announcement. In the case of a pre-read action presentation, the first movable member 77b performs a strong action, emitting red light and a strong sound effect. In the case of a pre-read effect presentation, a red effect image is displayed around the presentation symbol 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-read vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the presentation button 17 flashes red. In the case of a pre-read zone presentation, a red hot zone image (zone background image) is displayed, and a hot zone sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-read chance symbol presentation, the presentation symbol 70a stops and displays in a predetermined sequence of odd-numbered symbols (for example, "335" or "779") accompanied by an emphasis on the presentation symbol 70a using a red effect image.

The continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) scenarios include scenarios where weak and strong announcements are not executed during the preceding spin but are executed during the spin itself (for example, Scenario 11), and scenarios where weak or strong announcements are executed both during the preceding spin and during the spin itself (for example, Scenario 22).

The first characteristic of the various tables related to the consecutive notification effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the probability of a big win is higher when multiple types of consecutive notification effects are executed compared to when only one type is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous予告演出 is more likely to occur (the execution rate is higher) in performance modes D to F (specific game states) than in performance modes A to C (normal game states). In other words, the probability of a big win when a continuous予告演出 is performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, instead of differentiating the execution rate of consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement effects) between performance modes A-C and performance modes D-F, it is also possible to differ the execution rate of consecutive予告演出 between performance modes A-C, for example, making it easier for consecutive予告演出 to occur in performance mode B than in performance mode A, or between performance modes D-F, for example, making it easier for consecutive予告演出 to occur in performance mode E than in performance mode D. Doing so would change the expected probability of a jackpot from consecutive予告演出 between performance modes, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is more likely to be executed in performance modes D to F (specific game states) when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result), compared to performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result). Therefore, in specific game states where (super) shortened variations are more likely than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the variation effects from becoming monotonous and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is more likely to be executed in performance modes D to F (specific game states) when the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result). Therefore, in specific game states where (super) shortened variations are more likely than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the variation effects from becoming monotonous and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is more likely to be executed in performance modes D to F (specific game states) when the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result). Therefore, in specific game states where ultra-short fluctuations are more likely than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is more likely to be executed in performance modes D to F (specific game states) when the full-rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the full-rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result). Therefore, in specific game states where ultra-short fluctuations are more likely than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the pre-announcement vibration effect (a vibration effect that does not involve the display of the validity period of the effect button 17 or an operation prompt image) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate = different probability of winning a jackpot) in effect modes A to C (normal game state) than in effect modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, in effect modes A to C (normal game state), where the duration of stay tends to be longer than in effect modes D to F (specific game state), it is possible to make the pre-announcement vibration effect more easily experienced by the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in effect modes D to F (specific game state), where the variation time tends to be shorter than in effect modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to make the pre-announcement vibration effect rarer, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the pre-announcement vibration effect may be more likely to occur (higher execution rate) in performance modes D to F than in performance modes A to C. Also, in normal gameplay, the pre-announcement vibration effect may be more likely to occur in performance mode A than in performance mode B or C, thus differentiating the execution rate of the pre-announcement vibration effect between performance modes A to C. Similarly, in specific gameplay states, the pre-announcement vibration effect may be more likely to occur in performance mode D than in performance modes E to G, thus differentiating the execution rate of the pre-announcement vibration effect between performance modes D to F. This allows for differentiating the expected probability of a jackpot when the pre-announcement vibration effect is executed across different performance modes, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that the pre-announcement vibration effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in performance modes D to F (specific game states) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-announcement result) compared to performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, in performance modes D to F (specific game states), where the variation time tends to be shorter than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), the pre-announcement vibration effect can be made rarer, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that pre-announcement action effects are more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) in performance modes D to F (specific game states) than in performance modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in performance modes D to F (specific game states), where the variation time tends to be shorter than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to make the pre-announcement vibration effect more rare, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, compared to when a continuous予告演出 that ends after one spin is executed in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), when a continuous予告演出 that ends after one spin is executed in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state), the chances of a reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being executed in the spin effect targeted by the continuous予告演出 are lower (the rate of execution is lower). Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The eleventh characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, compared to when the continuous予告演出 is executed in two variations in performance modes D to F (specific game states), the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is more likely to occur in the variation effect targeted by the continuous予告演出. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The twelfth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, when the continuous予告演出 is possible across multiple spinning effects (2 to 4 reserved spins), it is less likely for a reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) to be executed during the spinning effect targeted by the continuous予告演出 compared to when only one spinning effect is executed during the continuous予告演出 in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state). Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The thirteenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, compared to the case where the continuous pre-announcement effect is performed over three fluctuations in the performance modes D to F (specific game states), the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be performed during the fluctuations targeted by the continuous pre-announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The fourteenth characteristic of the various tables related to the consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement) effects shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, compared to the case where the consecutive pre-announcement effect is performed over three reel spins in performance modes A to C (normal game state), the case where the consecutive pre-announcement effect is performed over three reel spins in performance modes D to F (specific game state) is more likely to result in the execution of a reach effect (e.g., SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) that is the target of the consecutive pre-announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The fifteenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that while it is possible to perform the pre-announcement effect using the same movable member (first movable member 77b) in both effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to F (specific game state), the expected probability of a jackpot when the pre-announcement effect is performed differs between effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of effect mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The sixteenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, when the pre-announcement effect is executed in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to F (specific game state), the proportion of operation of the first movable member 77b (100%), which is not used in the decisive effect described later, is higher than the proportion of operation of the first movable member 77a (0%), which is used in the decisive effect described later. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistakenly believing that a jackpot has been hit just because the pre-announcement effect has been executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the strong pre-announcement of the pre-announcement action, instead of operating the first movable member 77b, the first movable member 77a may be operated. Even in this case, when the pre-announcement action is performed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to F (specific game state), it is preferable that the proportion of operation of the first movable member 77b be higher than the proportion of operation of the first movable member 77a.

The seventeenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, when the pre-announcement vibration effect is executed in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to F (specific game state), the proportion of the effect button 17 being in the normal state (0%) is higher than the proportion of the effect button 17 being in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 being in the protruding state (it only becomes protruding in the decisive effect described later), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the strong pre-announcement vibration effect, instead of vibrating the effect button 17 while it remains in its normal state, it may be made to vibrate it in a protruding state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-announcement vibration effect in effect modes A-C (normal gameplay state) and effect modes D-F (specific gameplay state), it is preferable that the proportion of times the effect button 17 is in its normal state be higher than the proportion of times it is in the protruding state.

The eighteenth characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, during a predetermined period after the start of the variable animation targeted by the continuous announcement effect (from the start of the variation to the first high-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a), the expectation of a big win is higher when a weak pre-announcement of the pre-announcement vibration effect (weak vibration of the animation button 17 for 1 second), which is performed without displaying an operation prompt image, is performed, compared to when a weak pre-announcement of the pre-announcement action effect (weak operation of the first movable member 77a + blue light emission) or a weak pre-announcement of the pre-announcement effect effect (display of a blue effect image around the animation symbol 70a) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of anticipation using an operating means that the player can operate, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The 19th characteristic of the various tables related to the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) shown in Figures 108 to 111 is that, during a predetermined period after the start of the variable animation targeted by the continuous announcement effect (from the start of the variation to the first high-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a), the expectation of a big win is higher when a strong pre-announcement vibration effect (strong vibration of the animation button 17 for 3 seconds) is performed than when a strong pre-announcement action effect (strong movement of the first movable member 77a + red light emission) or a strong pre-announcement effect effect (display of a red effect image around the animation symbol 70a) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of anticipation using an operating means that the player can control, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Variable animation pattern determination table)
Figure 112 shows the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state), which is referenced to determine the variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C, and Figure 113 shows the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game state), which is referenced to determine the variable performance pattern in performance modes D to F.

As shown in Figures 112 and 113, the variation pattern determination table associates the special variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) for each variation pattern, and the selected variation pattern. For reference, the performance configuration for each variation pattern is also described.

In the section on the performance configuration, "Variation" indicates that a normal variation display is performed in which a reach state is not formed by the performance symbol 70a.
"Shortened variation" refers to a shortened variation display that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.
"L-variation" indicates that a long variation display is executed, where a reach state is not formed for a longer period than a normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a situation where, after an event is held to build anticipation for whether or not a pseudo-consecutive spin event will be performed (for example, by displaying a pseudo-symbol as the middle symbol in a visible, slow manner and building anticipation for whether or not it will temporarily stop), the pseudo-consecutive spin event is not performed (for example, the pseudo-symbol does not temporarily stop).
"Pseudo-success" refers to a situation where, after an animation is performed to build anticipation for whether or not a pseudo-consecutive win animation will occur (for example, an animation that displays a pseudo-symbol as the middle symbol in a visible, slow motion, and then builds anticipation for whether or not it will temporarily stop), a pseudo-consecutive win animation is performed that results in the pseudo-consecutive win animation occurring (for example, the pseudo-symbol temporarily stopping).
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo-success) x 2" means that the sequence consists of two sets of sequences: one set is a sequence that builds anticipation about whether or not a pseudo-consecutive sequence will occur, followed by a sequence that results in a pseudo-consecutive sequence success.
"(Variation → Pseudo-Success) x 3" means that three sets of the sequence are performed, where a sequence is played to build anticipation about whether or not a pseudo-consecutive win sequence will occur, followed by a sequence that results in a pseudo-consecutive win sequence being played.

"N-Reach" indicates that the normal reach animation described above will be performed.
"N"7"Reach" indicates that the normal reach animation described above is performed when a reach state is formed by the "7" symbol 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the SP Reach animation described above will be performed.
"Special SP Reach" indicates that the special SP reach animation described above will be performed.
"SPSP Reach" indicates that the SPSP Reach animation described above will be performed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach animation described above will be performed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development sequence is performed that suggests the SP Reach sequence will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development sequence is performed that suggests the SPSP reach sequence will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development sequence is performed that suggests a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that, depending on the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period, one of several cut-in performances with different jackpot expectations will be executed.
"Decision" refers to the execution of a decision animation that indicates whether or not a jackpot game will be played, depending on the operation of the animation button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" refers to the execution of a failed animation sequence, which suggests that a jackpot will not be achieved as a result of the predetermined animation sequence.
"Success" refers to the execution of a successful outcome sequence that suggests a jackpot will be achieved as a result of the chosen outcome sequence.

"Miss" refers to a temporary stop caused by a losing outcome (a different losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" than the initial outcome described later) formed by a visual effect symbol 70a consisting only of numbers and no characters.
"C symbol miss" indicates that the display pattern of the performance symbol 70a, which includes a character, forms a losing outcome (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial outcome described later) and the reels temporarily stop.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching animation is being performed, in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the animation symbol 70a will stop is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" refers to the temporary stopping of the reels when the display symbols 70a, which consist only of numbers and do not contain any characters, form a winning combination (such as "222" or "777").
"C symbol alignment" refers to the temporary stopping of the reels when the display patterns 70a, which include characters, form a winning combination (such as "222" or "777").

"Re-draw" refers to a re-draw sequence where, after the player is prompted to consider whether the temporarily stopped symbol 70a (the winning combination) will result in a favorable winning combination for the player (whether it will change from an even-numbered symbol 70a (which results in a normal winning combination) to an odd-numbered symbol 70a (which results in a probability-increasing winning combination), or whether it will result in the "7" symbol 70a (which results in the most favorable winning game)). This sequence then executes a re-draw sequence where either a successful upgrade animation resulting in a favorable winning combination or a failed upgrade animation resulting in a less favorable winning combination occurs.

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that confirms a jackpot) will be executed, in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is performed, in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for one second.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), if the special symbol 00 (miss) is selected and the variable performance pattern is 4 to 5 (normal reach performance) or 6 to 7 (SP reach performance), as an example, there is a 70% chance that a reach performance will occur with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a, and a 30% chance that a reach performance will occur with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7".
In the case of special symbol 00 (miss) and variable performance patterns 8-10 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), as an example, there is a 70% chance that a reach performance will occur with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a, and a 30% chance that a reach performance will occur with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7".
If the special symbol 00 (miss) is selected and the variation animation pattern is 11-12 (SPSP reach animation), there is a 100% chance that the reach animation will be performed with the "7" animation symbol 70a.

In the case of special symbol 01 (regular jackpot) and variable animation patterns 13-18 (normal reach animation, SP reach animation, SPSP reach animation), as an example, the probability of a reach animation occurring with even-numbered animation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (guaranteed big win) and variation performance patterns 22-23 (SPSP reach performance), the probability of the reach performance occurring with the "7" performance symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbol 02 (probability-changing jackpot) and variation performance pattern 24 (full rotation reach performance), as an example, the reach performance occurs with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" 40% of the time, and with the performance symbol 70a of "7" 60% of the time. After the full rotation reach is performed, the performance symbols 70a of "7" will line up and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then will stop definitively with "777".
In the case of special symbol 02 (guaranteed big win) and variation performance pattern 25 (full rotation reach performance), normal reach performances etc. are not executed, and after the full rotation reach is executed, the "7" performance symbols 70a line up and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then it stops definitively with "777".

For example, in the case of special symbol 03 (guaranteed big win) and variation performance patterns 19-20 (SP reach performance), the reach performance occurs with even-numbered performance symbols 70a 60% of the time, and with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" 40% of the time.
In the case of special symbol 02 (guaranteed big win) and variation performance pattern 21 (SPSP reach performance), as an example, the reach performance occurs with even-numbered performance symbols 70a 60% of the time, and with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" 40% of the time.

In the case of special symbol 10 (miss) and variation animation pattern 27 (special SP reach animation), as an example, the probability of the reach animation occurring with even-numbered animation symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (regular jackpot) and 05 (probability-changing jackpot) and variation performance pattern 28 (special SP reach performance), as an example, the probability of a reach performance occurring with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game states), if the special symbol 00 (miss) is selected and the variable performance pattern is 32 (special SP reach performance), for example, the probability of a reach performance occurring with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 01 (regular jackpot), 02 (probability-increasing jackpot), and 03 (probability-increasing jackpot) and variation performance pattern 33 (special SP reach performance), as an example, the probability of a reach performance occurring with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

For example, in the case of special symbol 10 (miss) and the variation performance patterns 37-38 (normal reach performance) or 39-43 (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the proportion of reach performances that occur with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and the proportion of reach performances that occur with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
For example, in the case of special symbol 04 (regular jackpot) and variable performance patterns 44-49 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the probability of a reach performance occurring with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

For example, in the case of special symbols 05 and 06 (probability-changing jackpot) and variation performance patterns 50-51 (SP reach performance), the reach performance occurs with even-numbered performance symbols 70a 60% of the time, and with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" 40% of the time.
For example, in the case of special symbols 05 and 06 (probability-changing jackpot) and variation performance patterns 51-52 (SPSP reach performance), the percentage of reach performances that occur with even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 3%, the percentage of reach performances that occur with odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 2%, and the percentage of reach performances that occur with the "7" performance symbol 70a is 95%.
In the case of special symbols 05 and 06 (probability-changing jackpot) and variation performance patterns 53-54 (SPSP reach performance), the probability of the reach performance being performed with the "7" performance symbol 70a is 100%.
For special symbols 05 and 06 (guaranteed big win) and variation animation pattern 55 (full rotation reach animation), as an example, the reach animation occurs with even-numbered animation symbols 70a 20% of the time, with odd-numbered animation symbols 70a other than "7" 30% of the time, and with "7" animation symbols 70a 50% of the time. After the full rotation reach is performed, the "7" animation symbols 70a will line up and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then will stop definitively with "777".
In the case of special symbols 05 and 06 (probability-changing jackpot) and the variation performance pattern 56 (full rotation reach performance), normal reach performances etc. are not executed, and after the full rotation reach is executed, the "7" performance symbols 70a line up and temporarily stop (for example, "777"), and then it stops definitively with "777".

The selection ratio of the symbols 70a during the aforementioned reach animation is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate.

The first characteristic of the variable performance pattern determination table is that when an SP Reach performance or SPSP Reach performance is executed, an eye-catching performance is executed that suggests the performance symbol 70a will stop, and the performance symbol 70a returns to a display mode including the character (for example, variable performance pattern 10, variable performance pattern 17, etc.). Therefore, it is less likely to cause players to feel uneasy about the change in the display mode of the performance symbol 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbol 70a will stop, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that, in the event of a jackpot, there are two types of variable animation patterns: one where the winning animation is executed and the symbols align (for example, variable animation pattern 16), and another where the winning animation is executed after the symbols align (for example, variable animation pattern 17). Therefore, the effect of the animation when a jackpot occurs can be enhanced, improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the variable animation pattern determination table is that, in variable animation patterns that result in a jackpot, when the animation symbols 70a, which do not contain characters, are aligned, a strong vibration animation (jackpot confirmation vibration animation) is executed, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate strongly for 4 seconds (for example, variable animation pattern 16). Therefore, it is possible to effectively show that a jackpot is coming, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable animation pattern determination table is that when the animation symbols 70a, including characters, result in a matching symbol combination (c symbol combination), a strong vibration animation (jackpot confirmation vibration animation) is executed, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate strongly for one second (for example, variable animation pattern 16). Therefore, it is possible to effectively show that a jackpot has occurred, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that the proportion of reach animations (normal reach animations, SP reach animations, SPSP reach animations) occurring with even-numbered animation symbols 70a (animation symbols that result in a regular jackpot when they result in a jackpot) is higher than the proportion of reach animations occurring with odd-numbered animation symbols 70a other than "7" (animation symbols that result in a probability-increasing jackpot when they result in a jackpot) (for example, the selection ratio of the animation symbols 70a mentioned above). Therefore, it is possible to effectively heighten the excitement of the player when a jackpot occurs with an odd-numbered animation symbol 70a other than "7", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that the proportion of reach animations (normal reach animation, SP reach animation, SPSP reach animation) occurring with the "7" animation symbol 70a (the animation symbol that results in the most advantageous probability-increasing jackpot when it appears) is lower than the proportion of reach animations occurring with even-numbered animation symbols 70a (animation symbols that result in a regular jackpot when they appear) (for example, the selection ratio of the aforementioned animation symbols 70a). Therefore, it is possible to effectively heighten the excitement of the player when a jackpot occurs with the "7" animation symbol 70a, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that the proportion of reach animations (normal reach animation, SP reach animation, SPSP reach animation) occurring with odd-numbered animation symbols 70a other than "7" (animation symbols that result in a probability-increasing jackpot when they appear as a winning combination) is lower than the proportion of reach animations (normal reach animation, SP reach animation, SPSP reach animation) occurring with the "7" animation symbol 70a (animation symbols that result in the most advantageous probability-increasing jackpot when they appear as a winning combination) (for example, the selection ratio of the animation symbols 70a mentioned above). Therefore, it is possible to effectively heighten the excitement of the player when a jackpot is hit with the "7" animation symbol 70a, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that the probability of a big win is higher when the reach animation is performed with the "7" animation symbol 70a than when it is performed with an even-numbered animation symbol 70a or an odd-numbered animation symbol 70a other than "7" (for example, the selection ratio of the animation symbols 70a mentioned above). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation regarding which type of animation symbol 70a will be used for the reach animation, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the variable performance pattern determination table is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal gameplay states), performance modes D to F (specific gameplay states) are more likely to execute a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) with the "7" performance symbol 70a (the performance symbol that, when it appears as a winning combination, results in the most advantageous probability-increasing jackpot) when a jackpot is likely to occur. (For example, in performance modes A to C, as shown in variable performance pattern 11, a reach performance may occur with the "7" performance symbol 70a, but performance modes D to F do not have such variable performance patterns.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay states) and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth characteristic of the variable animation pattern determination table is that, in animation modes A to C (normal gameplay), even if a reach animation is performed with the "7" animation symbol 70a, it does not guarantee a jackpot (for example, variable animation pattern 11). However, in animation modes D to F (specific gameplay states), if a reach animation is performed with the "7" animation symbol 70a, it guarantees a jackpot (animation modes D to F do not have variable animation patterns that result in a loss after a reach animation with the "7" animation symbol 70a). Therefore, it is possible to improve the animation effect in animation modes D to F (specific gameplay states) and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the reel spin pattern that executes the pseudo-consecutive spins always includes a reach animation, it is also possible to include a reel spin pattern where the pseudo-consecutive spins are executed but the reach animation is not.

Furthermore, while a temporary stop on a losing combination after a cut-in or failed-decision animation confirms a loss, it would also be possible to implement a revival animation that confirms a jackpot after a cut-in or failed-decision animation.

For example, the revival animation pattern follows this sequence: Variation → Pseudo-success → Variation → N-reach → Pseudo-success → Variation → N-"7" reach → SPSP development → SPSP reach → Decisive win → Failure → Miss → Eye-catching → Miss ("767" temporary stop) → Revival animation (screen darkens) → C symbol alignment ("777" temporary stop) → C symbol alignment ("777" confirmed stop). In this sequence, the temporary stop sound is not output from the audio output device 9 when the symbols are aligned ("767" temporary stop), while the "clink x 3" sound effect (temporary stop sound) is output from the audio output device 9 when the symbols are aligned ("777" temporary stop). This makes it easier to recognize that a winning combination of symbols has temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, there may be variation animation patterns in which the animation symbols 70a that form a reach are changed during the execution of the variation animation (a symbol replacement animation is performed). For example, variation animation pattern 7 may be configured as follows: N reach (reach with 4 symbols) → SP development → SP reach (replaced with 5 symbols) → miss (symbol combination of "565"). Also, while the animation symbols 70a that form a reach do not change during the execution of the variation animation, the color of the animation symbols 70a that form the reach may change. For example, variation animation pattern 7 may be configured as follows: N reach (reach with 4 symbols (blue)) → SP development → SP reach (replaced with 4 symbols (gold)) → miss (symbol combination of "565"). Of course, this may also be performed in variation animation patterns corresponding to a jackpot, and the more a variation animation pattern corresponds to a jackpot, the more frequently such symbol replacement animations may be performed.

Furthermore, in variable animation patterns that allow for the execution of a reach (N reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.), a reach-teasing animation may be performed to hype whether or not a reach will be formed. The reach-teasing animation is an animation in which the left animation symbol 70a temporarily stops (for example, the 5 symbol), and the right animation symbol 70a is hyped to hype whether or not the same animation symbol as the left animation symbol 70a will temporarily stop (in this case, the animation hypes whether or not the 5 symbol will temporarily stop as the right animation symbol 70a). If the same animation symbol as the left animation symbol 70a temporarily stops, the reach-teasing is successful and a reach is achieved (for example, "5↓5"). If the same animation symbol as the left animation symbol 70a temporarily stops, the reach-teasing is unsuccessful and a miss is achieved (for example, the "566" symbol combination). In other words, if a variation animation pattern that allows for a reach has been determined, the option to select "Successful Reach-Boosting Animation" becomes available. If a variation animation pattern that does not result in a reach (such as Variation Animation Pattern 1 or Variation Animation Pattern 3) has been determined, the option to select "Failed Reach-Boosting Animation" becomes available.

Furthermore, the reach-teasing animation may be executed in any of the animation modes A-C and D-F, or it may be executed in animation modes A-C but not in animation modes D-E, or it may be executed in animation modes D-F but not in animation modes A-C, or it can be arbitrarily determined. If it is executed in any of the animation modes A-C and D-F, it is preferable that the probability of a jackpot occurring when the reach-teasing animation is successful be higher in animation modes D-F compared to animation modes A-C. For example, in animation modes D-F, when the animation pattern corresponding to a jackpot is determined, it should be made easier to execute a successful reach-teasing animation, and when the animation pattern corresponding to a failed reach is determined, it should be made harder to execute a failed reach-teasing animation, thereby increasing the success rate of the reach-teasing animation while animation modes D-F are being executed. This increases the expectation of a jackpot when the reach-teasing animation is executed while animation modes D-F are being executed, leading to an improvement in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the reach-prompt animation may be the same in all animation modes A-C and D-F, or it may be a reach-prompt animation corresponding to animation modes A-C and a reach-prompt animation corresponding to animation modes D-F (a reach-prompt animation different from those in animation modes A-C).

(Decision process for determining the jackpot announcement effect in the performance control unit)
The process for determining the jackpot announcement effect in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 114. Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the jackpot announcement effect in the performance control unit 130m. This process is executed after the variable effect pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable effect pattern based on the special effect variable pattern specification command) in the special effect processing described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variation animation pattern to be executed in the current variation animation. In step E650-2, it selects a pre-reach announcement determination table to determine the announcement pattern for the pre-reach announcement animation that will make the player expect a jackpot game to be played during the pre-reach animation period (high-speed variation period), and then determines the announcement pattern. Details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach notification pattern is one that executes a dialogue notification. If it is one that executes a dialogue notification, the process moves to step E650-4; otherwise, the process moves to step E650-6.

The "Dialogue Prediction Effect" is a type of jackpot prediction effect that generates an effective period during the variation effect (high-speed variation period). Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapsed time, a dialogue image suggesting the probability of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and a corresponding sound is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue予告 pattern determination table to determine the dialogue予告 pattern for the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出). In step E650-5, it sets the dialogue予告演出 command corresponding to the dialogue予告 pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the dialogue予告演出 command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue予告演出 corresponding to the dialogue予告 pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue予告 pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach notification pattern executes a step-up notification (SU notification) sequence. If it executes a step-up notification sequence, the process moves to step E650-7; otherwise, the process moves to step E650-9.

The "Step-Up Prediction Effect" is a type of jackpot prediction effect that, during the variation effect (high-speed variation period), executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps (stages), from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage), is reached, without activating the effect button 17.

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up予告 pattern determination table to determine the step-up予告 pattern for the step-up予告演出 (step-up予告演出). In step E650-8, it sets the step-up予告演出 command corresponding to the step-up予告 pattern in the transmission buffer. This transmits the step-up予告演出 command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up予告演出 corresponding to the step-up予告 pattern is executed during the variation performance (high-speed variation period). Details of the dialogue予告 pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo-consecutive variation. If it is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo-consecutive variation, the process moves to step E650-10. If it is not a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-consecutive variation, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-consecutive-effect pattern determination table to determine the pseudo-consecutive-effect pattern for the pseudo-consecutive-effect sequence. In step E650-11, it sets a pseudo-consecutive-effect command corresponding to the pseudo-consecutive-effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the pseudo-consecutive-effect command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-consecutive-effect sequence corresponding to the pseudo-consecutive-effect pattern is executed during the variation sequence. Details of the pseudo-consecutive-effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation animation pattern is a variation animation pattern that executes a development animation (SP development animation, SPSP development animation, full rotation development animation). If it is a variation animation pattern that executes a development animation, the process moves to step E650-13. If it is not a variation animation pattern that executes a development animation, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development animation pattern determination table to determine the development animation pattern, and in step E650-14, sets the development animation command corresponding to the development animation pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the development animation command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development animation corresponding to the development animation pattern is executed during the variation animation. Details of the development animation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation animation pattern is one that executes a reach animation (post-reach animation). If it is a variation animation pattern that executes a reach animation, the process moves to step E650-16. If it is not a variation animation pattern that executes a reach animation, the process for determining the current jackpot announcement animation ends.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation animation pattern is one that executes a cut-in animation. If it is a variation animation pattern that executes a cut-in animation, the process moves to step E650-17. If it is not a variation animation pattern that executes a cut-in animation, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in animation pattern determination table to determine the cut-in animation pattern. In step E650-18, it sets a cut-in animation command corresponding to the selected pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the cut-in animation command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, resulting in the execution of the cut-in animation corresponding to the selected pattern during the variation animation. Details of the cut-in animation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a decisive effect. If it is a variation pattern that executes a decisive effect, the process moves to step E650-20. If it is not a variation pattern that executes a decisive effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a determination pattern determination table to determine the determination pattern for the final animation, and in step E650-21, sets the determination command corresponding to the determination pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the determination command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determination animation corresponding to the determination pattern is executed during the variation animation. Details of the determination pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation animation pattern is one that executes a re-draw animation. If it is a variation animation pattern that executes a re-draw animation, the process moves to step E650-23. If it is not a variation animation pattern that executes a re-draw animation, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-draw animation pattern determination table to determine the re-draw animation pattern for the re-draw animation, and in step E650-24, sets a re-draw animation command corresponding to the re-draw animation pattern in the transmission buffer. This sends the re-draw animation command to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-draw animation corresponding to the re-draw animation pattern is executed during the variation animation. Details of the re-draw animation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that can execute a definitive announcement (an announcement that definitively indicates a jackpot). If it is a variation pattern that can execute a definitive announcement, the process moves to step E650-26. If it is not a variation pattern that can execute a definitive announcement, the process for determining the jackpot announcement ends.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a confirmed animation pattern determination table to determine the confirmed animation pattern. In step E650-27, it sets the confirmed animation command corresponding to the confirmed animation pattern in the transmission buffer, thus ending the jackpot announcement animation determination process. As a result, the confirmed animation command is transmitted to the image control unit 145 and the lamp control unit 150, and the confirmed animation corresponding to the confirmed animation pattern is executed during the variation animation. Details of the confirmed animation pattern determination table will be described later.

(Pre-reach announcement determination table)
Figure 115 shows the pre-reach notification determination table that is referenced when determining the notification pattern for the pre-reach notification effect for performance modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 116 shows the pre-reach notification determination table that is referenced when determining the notification pattern for the pre-reach notification effect for performance modes D to F (specific game state).

As shown in Figures 115 and 116, the pre-reach notification determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot judgment result, the type of variation performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notification pattern, and the selected notification pattern.

There are three types of pre-reach notification patterns: "No notification" (no notification animation), "Dialogue notification animation" (dialogue notification animation), and "Step-up notification animation" (step-up notification animation). The probability of a jackpot occurring (the rate at which the vibration animation associated with matching symbols occurs) is as follows: No notification < Dialogue notification animation < Step-up notification animation.

The first characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that the pre-reach notification is more likely to be executed when the jackpot result is a win than when it is a miss, and more likely to be executed when a variation pattern with a high probability of winning is determined than when a variation pattern with a low probability of winning is determined. This increases the player's anticipation of a jackpot and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal game state), the pre-reach notification effects (both dialogue notification effects that can perform vibration effects with the validity period of the performance button 17, and step-up notification effects that can perform vibration effects without the validity period of the performance button 17) are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the result is a miss in performance modes D to F (specific game state). Therefore, in performance modes D to F (specific game state), where the variation time tends to be shorter, unnecessary pre-reach notification effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state) are less likely to execute pre-reach notification animations (the execution rate is lower) when the variation performance pattern is either a normal reach animation or an SP reach animation, even in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state), where variation time tends to be shorter, unnecessary pre-reach notification animations are less likely to be executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, when the jackpot result is a jackpot, the probability of determining a step-up notification is higher than the probability of determining a dialogue notification. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot (such as the probability of the vibration notification associated with matching symbols being executed, or the probability of the vibration notification being executed in the decisive notification described later) is higher when a step-up notification is executed, which does not involve a validity period for the notification button 17, is executed, compared to when a dialogue notification is executed, which involves a validity period for the notification button 17. This increases the player's anticipation regarding the type of pre-reach notification, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fifth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, during normal gameplay, when the first losing variation (display of the first special symbol) is executed (except for the long variation variation pattern and the special SP reach variation pattern), the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the effect button 17 is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the second losing variation (display of the second special symbol) is executed (long variation variation pattern and special SP reach variation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effects during normal gameplay, when the first variation variation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A sixth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, during normal gameplay, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the dialogue notification animation (operation animation) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the animation button 17 is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) than when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach animation patterns other than the long variation animation pattern and the special SP reach animation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in the normal gameplay state where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A seventh characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (except in the long variation animation pattern and the special SP reach animation pattern), the dialogue notification animation (operation animation) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the animation button 17 is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in specific gameplay states (long variation animation pattern and special SP reach animation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay states where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach animation pattern other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the dialogue notification animation (operation animation) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the animation button 17 is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a specific game state (special SP reach animation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is easily executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, during specific game states, the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) when the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (other than the long variation effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern), compared with the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss (long variation effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in specific game states where the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, during a specific game state, the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) accompanied by the validity period (operation) of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) when the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach effect patterns other than the long variation effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern) than when the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach effect pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in specific game states where the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The eleventh characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, in normal gameplay, when the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol variation) is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), the dialogue notification effect can be executed, but the step-up notification effect is not. Therefore, the rate at which pre-reach effects are executed and the number of types of pre-reach effects that can be executed can be made different depending on whether the first variation effect or the second variation effect is executed in normal gameplay, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The twelfth characteristic of the pre-reach notification determination table shown in Figures 115 and 116 is that, in a specific game state, when the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol variation) is executed (long variation effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern), the dialogue notification effect can be executed, but the step-up notification effect is not. Therefore, the rate at which pre-reach effects are executed and the number of types of pre-reach effects that can be executed can be made different depending on whether the first variation effect or the second variation effect is executed in a specific game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the probability of a big win (such as the rate at which the vibration effect associated with matching symbols, as mentioned above, is triggered, and the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the successful outcome, as described later, is triggered) may be higher when a dialogue-based pre-win animation is triggered than when a step-up pre-win animation is triggered. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the type of pre-win animation, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the dialogue notification animation (operational animation) and step-up notification animation (non-operational animation) may be disabled when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, or when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during a specific gameplay state. Similarly, the dialogue notification animation (operational animation) and step-up notification animation (non-operational animation) may be disabled when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, or when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during a specific gameplay state.

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
Figure 117 shows a table for determining the dialogue preview pattern, which is referenced when determining the preview pattern for the dialogue preview effect.

As shown in Figure 117, the dialogue notification pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot judgment result, variation performance pattern type, selection rate (%) for each dialogue notification pattern, and the selected dialogue notification pattern. For reference, the performance configuration (effective suggestion performance, effective period, and performance content) for each dialogue notification pattern is also listed.

The "effective indication effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Validity period (3 seconds per press)" indicates that the validity period for the dialogue予告演出 (preview/announcement) ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or after 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "Promotional Effect" in the "Validity Period" section refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, this effect displays an opaque effect button image resembling the effect button 17 at a designated location, along with a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period through the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Button status" refers to the state of the performance button 17 during the valid period. "Normal" in the button status column indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding.

In the "Dialogue Presentation Style" column, "Normal Dialogue (Black)" indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot is displayed in black text, and that this normal dialogue is also output as audio.
"Chance dialogue (black)" indicates that a chance dialogue suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot is displayed in black text, and that chance dialogue is also output as audio.
"Reach Dialogue (Black)" indicates that the reach dialogue, which confirms the execution of the reach animation, is displayed in black text, and that reach dialogue is also output as audio.
"Reach Dialogue (Red)" indicates that the reach dialogue, which confirms the execution of the reach animation, is displayed in red text, and that reach dialogue is also output as audio.

"Hot Dialogue (Red)" indicates that a hot dialogue with a high probability of triggering a jackpot is displayed in red text, and that hot dialogue is also played as audio.
"Super Hot Line (Gold)" indicates that a super hot line with a very high probability of triggering a jackpot is displayed in gold letters, and that super hot line is also played as audio.
"Confirmation Dialogue (Rainbow)" indicates that a confirmation dialogue confirming the execution of a jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored text, and that confirmation dialogue is also output as audio.

In the button vibration section, "weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is performed, in which the button vibration motor used to vibrate the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the dialogue display (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is performed in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the start of the dialogue display (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning a jackpot with each dialogue presentation is as follows: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Hot dialogue (red)" < "Super hot dialogue (gold)" < "Confirmed dialogue (rainbow)". Also, the probability of winning a jackpot with each vibration presentation is as follows: "Weak vibration presentation" < "Strong vibration presentation".

One of the key features of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that when a dialogue indicating a high probability of winning (a "hot" dialogue or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be activated by vibrating the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively communicate the high probability of winning, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) when the dialogue notification effect of a "super hot" dialogue, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a "hot" dialogue, is executed, compared to when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue notification effect of a "hot" dialogue is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation regarding whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue notification effect is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that the vibration effect, which is executed when dialogue indicating a high probability of a jackpot (hot dialogue or higher) is displayed, is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute highly effective effects while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that a jackpot has been confirmed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth feature of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, which is executed when a dialogue indicating a high probability of winning a jackpot (a "hot" dialogue or higher) is displayed, has two levels depending on the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning a jackpot, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (except for the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed during the dialogue notification animation. On the other hand, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed during the dialogue notification animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay, where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth feature of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach animation pattern other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the dialogue notification animation. However, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the dialogue notification animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay, where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in normal gameplay, when a losing first variation (display of the first special symbol) is executed (except for the special SP reach variation pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed during the dialogue notification. However, in specific gameplay states, when a losing first variation (display of the first special symbol) is executed (long variation variation pattern, special SP reach variation pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed during the dialogue notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the gameplay in normal gameplay states where the first variation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach animation pattern other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the dialogue notification animation. On the other hand, in specific gameplay states, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the dialogue notification animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay states where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in specific game states, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (long variation animation pattern, special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed during the dialogue notification animation. On the other hand, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (other than the long variation animation pattern and special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed during the dialogue notification animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth characteristic of the dialogue notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 117 is that, in a specific game state, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the dialogue notification animation. On the other hand, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach animation patterns other than the long variation animation pattern and the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the dialogue notification animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) is likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while there are two types of vibration effects used in the dialogue preview sequence—a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect—it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect, or to make the vibration duration of the strong vibration effect longer than that of the weak vibration effect.

Furthermore, while the probability of hitting a jackpot is the same in both performance modes A-C (normal gameplay) and performance modes D-F (specific gameplay), it is also possible to make the probability of hitting a jackpot higher in performance modes A-C (normal gameplay) or higher in performance modes D-F (specific gameplay). This allows for different gameplay depending on the performance mode, and makes it easier to increase the player's anticipation in the more advantageous performance modes D-F, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is executed when the validity period ends due to the operation of the effect button 17 or the expiration of the validity period, it is also possible to prevent the dialogue予告演出 from being executed when the validity period ends due to the expiration of the validity period.

Furthermore, while the system is designed to execute the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) after a validity period has been established, it is also possible to execute the dialogue予告演出 without establishing a validity period. In that case, the vibration effect executed may be limited to either a one-second weak vibration effect or a one-second strong vibration effect.

Furthermore, if the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the dialogue notification animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the dialogue notification animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, and higher than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, if the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) results in a loss during a specific game state, the animation button may vibrate (vibration animation) during the dialogue notification animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) results in a loss during a specific game state.

Furthermore, when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state, the animation button may vibrate (vibration animation) during the dialogue notification animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during the specific game state, and higher than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during the specific game state.

(Step-up予告 pattern determination table)
Figure 118 shows a step-up予告 pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the preview pattern for the step-up preview effect.

As shown in Figure 118, the step-up notification pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot judgment result, variation performance pattern type, selection rate (%) for each step-up notification pattern, and the selected step-up notification pattern. For reference, the performance configuration (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) for each step-up notification pattern is also included.

In the "Step-Up Performance Pattern" column, "1→2" indicates that the first and second step performances are executed in sequence.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third steps of the performance will be executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth steps of the performance will be executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth steps of the performance will be executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that the first to third steps of the performance are executed in order, and then the fifth step is executed, skipping the fourth step.
In each step-up animation sequence, the animation time for the step sequence preceding the final step sequence is 1 second, and the animation time for the final step sequence is 3 seconds.

In the button vibration section, "Weak vibration at step 5 (1 second)" indicates that the button vibration motor, which vibrates the performance button 17, will perform a weak vibration effect for 1 second from the start of the 5th step performance.

The probability of winning a jackpot for each step-up animation sequence is as follows: 1→2 < 1→2→3 < 1→2→3→4 < 1→2→3→4→5 < 1→2→3→5.

One of the key features of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that, when a step-up animation with a high probability of winning (the fifth step animation) is performed, it is possible to execute a vibration animation by vibrating the animation button 17 without activating the animation button 17's validity period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively communicate the high probability of winning, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that the vibration effect, which is executed when a step effect with a high probability of winning (the fifth step effect) is displayed, is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute highly effective effects while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that a winning game has been confirmed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that the vibration effect, which is executed when a step effect with a high probability of winning (the fifth step effect) is displayed, has only one predetermined vibration type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in step-up notification effects where the player does not operate the effect button 17 and thus it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration effect, the complexity of the effect patterns can be suppressed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth characteristic of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state) are less likely to execute (have a lower execution rate) when a jackpot is achieved, given the low probability of a step-up notification being performed. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fifth characteristic of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state) are more likely to execute a weak vibration effect when a jackpot is achieved (the execution rate is higher). Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth characteristic of the step-up notification pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that, compared to performance modes A to C (normal game state), the probability of a jackpot is higher in performance modes D to F (specific game state) when the vibration effect of the performance button 17 is executed without an effective period (display of an operation prompt image) during the step-up notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the step-up予告 pattern determination table shown in Figure 118 is that, during normal gameplay, the vibration of the performance button 17 in the dialogue announcement is less likely to occur (the rate of occurrence is lower) when the second variation performance (display of the second special symbol), which results in a loss, is performed (long variation performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), compared with when the first variation performance (display of the first special symbol), which results in a loss, is performed (excluding long variation performance pattern and special SP reach performance pattern). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the performance during normal gameplay, where the first variation performance (display of the first special symbol), is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the vibration effect of the performance button 17 is executed without an effective period (display of an operation prompt image) during the step-up予告演出 (pre-announcement effect), compared to performance modes D to F (specific game states). Even in this case, the gameplay can be differentiated depending on the type of performance mode, and it becomes easier to increase the player's sense of anticipation in performance modes D to F, which are advantageous to the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table)
Figure 119 shows a pseudo-consecutive-win animation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the animation pattern for pseudo-consecutive-win animations.

As shown in Figure 119, the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot judgment result, variation performance pattern type, selection rate (%) for each pseudo-consecutive win pattern, and the selected pseudo-consecutive win pattern. For reference, the performance composition (effective suggestion performance, effective period, and performance content) of each pseudo-consecutive win pattern is also listed.

The "effective indication effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Validity period (3 seconds per press)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo-consecutive win animation ends with one operation of the animation button 17 or after 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "Promotional Effect" in the "Validity Period" section refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, this effect displays an opaque effect button image resembling the effect button 17 at a designated location, along with a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period through the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Protruding button white" means that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the protruding effect button 17, which is in a protruding state and glowing white, and that the effect button 17 glows white.

In the "Validity Period" column, "Button Status" indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the validity period. "Normal" in the "Button Status" column indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding, while "Protruding" indicates the protruding state where the performance button 17 is protruding.

In the section on pseudo-consecutive win patterns, "pseudo-failure" indicates that a pseudo-consecutive win failure is performed in which the pseudo-symbols that suggest the execution of pseudo-consecutive wins as the central symbol 70a do not temporarily stop, but instead the normal symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a failure sound effect is output.
"Pseudo-success" means that the pseudo-symbol 70a in the center, which suggests the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the first movable member 77b moves slightly, and a pseudo-consecutive win success animation is performed.

In the button vibration section, "weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is performed in which the button vibration motor, which vibrates the effect button 17, vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time the pseudo-symbols are temporarily stopped (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is performed in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the moment the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning a jackpot with each promotional effect is as follows: "Normal button (white)" < "Protruding button (white)". Also, the probability of winning a jackpot with each button state is as follows: "Normal" < "Protruding". Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot with each vibration effect is as follows: "Weak vibration effect" < "Strong vibration effect".

One of the features of the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table shown in Figure 119 is that when a variation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot is selected and a successful pseudo-consecutive win is performed, a vibration effect may be executed, causing the effect button 17 to vibrate and its validity period to be extended. Therefore, it is possible to effectively communicate the high probability of winning a jackpot and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table shown in Figure 119 is that the vibration effect, which is executed when a successful pseudo-consecutive win occurs in a variation effect pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot, is relatively short in duration. Therefore, it is possible to execute highly effective effects while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that a jackpot has been confirmed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table shown in Figure 119 is that when a successful pseudo-consecutive win occurs in a variation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, which is executed during this process, has two levels depending on the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of winning a jackpot, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table shown in Figure 119 is that while the same pseudo-consecutive win animation (pseudo-consecutive win success animation) can be executed in animation modes A to C (normal game state) and animation modes D to F (specific game state) using the same animation device (animation button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.), the probability of a big win is higher in animation modes D to F (specific game state) when the same animation device (animation button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed compared to animation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of animation mode, and it becomes easier to increase the player's sense of anticipation in the advantageous animation modes D to F, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-consecutive win pattern determination table shown in Figure 119 is that there are two cases: one in which the pseudo-consecutive win (pseudo-consecutive win success) is executed using the first movable member 77b, and another in which the pseudo-consecutive win (pseudo-consecutive win success) is executed using the first movable member 77b and a button vibration motor that vibrates the performance button 17. Therefore, the effect of the pseudo-consecutive wins can be enhanced, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the case of a variation animation pattern with a high probability of a big win, the animation button 17 may protrude during the valid period when a pseudo-consecutive win animation is performed. However, it is also possible to prevent it from protruding.

Furthermore, while there are two types of vibration effects performed during the pseudo-consecutive win animation—a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect—it is also acceptable to use only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect.

Furthermore, while the system is designed to execute pseudo-consecutive win and pseudo-consecutive win failure sequences after a validity period has been established, it is also possible to execute these sequences without establishing a validity period. Regarding the vibration sequence executed in the pseudo-consecutive win sequence, it may consist of only a 3-second weak vibration sequence, only a 3-second strong vibration sequence, only a 1-second weak vibration sequence, or only a 1-second strong vibration sequence.

Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when a pseudo-consecutive win animation (successful pseudo-consecutive win animation) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed, compared to performance modes D to F (specific game states). Similarly, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance mode B or C when a pseudo-consecutive win animation (successful pseudo-consecutive win animation) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed, compared to performance mode A. And similarly, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance mode E or F when a pseudo-consecutive win animation (successful pseudo-consecutive win animation) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed, compared to performance mode D.

Furthermore, while the pseudo-consecutive win animation (pseudo-consecutive win success animation) is designed to execute an action animation using the first movable member 77b, it is also possible to execute an action animation using the first movable member 77a. In this case, it is preferable to ensure that the execution rate of the action animation using the first movable member 77b is higher than that of the action animation using the first movable member 77a.

(Developmental Production Pattern Determination Table)
Figure 120 shows the development animation pattern determination table, which is referenced when determining the animation pattern for the development animation.

As shown in Figure 120, the development animation pattern determination table associates the animation mode, jackpot judgment result, variation animation pattern type, development animation type that determines the development animation pattern, the selection rate (%) for each development animation pattern, and the selected development animation pattern. For reference, the animation composition (effective suggestion animation, effective period, and animation content) of each development animation pattern is also included.

The "effective indication effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
In the "Effective Indication Performance" column, "None" indicates that no effective indication performance will be performed; "Present (False)" indicates that an effective indication performance will be performed, but it is a false effective indication performance that does not result in an effective period afterward; and "Present" indicates that an effective indication performance will be performed and then an effective period will result in an effective period afterward.

"Validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the development sequence progresses in stages by long-pressing the performance button 17, and that the development sequence ends when the validity period of 4 seconds has elapsed.
The "promotional effect" in the validity period column refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific location, resulting in the display of an opaque effect button image at that location, and a gauge image showing the remaining validity period by the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" means that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and glows red, as an opaque performance button image, and that the performance button 17 glows red.

In the "Validity Period" column, "Button Status" indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the validity period. "Normal" in the "Button Status" column indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding, while "Protruding" indicates the protruding state where the performance button 17 is protruding.

In the section on development presentation patterns, "SP notification" indicates that an SP development presentation is executed, in which an SP development symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the development presentation, and a first development sound effect is output.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development sequence will be executed, which will display SPSP development symbols that suggest development to an SPSP reach sequence as a result of the development sequence, and will also output a second development sound effect.
"Full rotation notification" indicates that a full rotation development sequence will be executed, which will display a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach sequence as a result of the development sequence, and will also output a third development sound effect.

In the section on mechanism operation, "weak operation" indicates that when the various symbols are displayed (i.e., at the end of the validity period), the first movable member 77b lights up in blue and performs a weak operation with a small range of motion, which is a weak operation effect.
"Strong action" indicates that when various patterns are displayed (i.e., at the end of the validity period), a strong action effect is performed in which the first movable member 77b lights up red and performs a strong action with a large amplitude of oscillation.

In the button vibration section, "weak vibration (1 second)" indicates that the button vibration motor used to vibrate the performance button 17 will perform a weak vibration effect, vibrating weakly for 1 second from the time the various development symbols are displayed (i.e., at the end of the validity period).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is performed in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time the various symbols are displayed (i.e., the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning a jackpot with each action is "weak action" < "strong action". Similarly, the probability of winning a jackpot with each vibration action is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

One of the features of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that when a variation animation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot is performed, and a development animation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibration animation may be executed, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate and its validity period to be extended. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning a jackpot is high, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that the vibration animation of the animation button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be performed (the execution rate is higher) when the full rotation development animation, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than when the SPSP development animation is performed, is performed. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the vibration animation of the animation button 17 is performed than when it is not performed when the SPSP development animation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation regarding whether or not the vibration animation of the animation button 17 will be performed when the SPSP development animation is performed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that the vibration animation, which is executed when a high-probability development animation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) occurs, is relatively short in duration. Therefore, it is possible to execute highly effective animations while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that a jackpot has been confirmed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth feature of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that when a development animation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) occurs in a variation animation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot, the vibration intensity of the vibration animation, which is executed during this animation, has two levels depending on the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration animation, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that while development animations (such as SPSP development animations) using the same animation device (vibration motor for animation buttons, first movable member 77b, etc.) can be executed in animation modes A to C (normal game state) and animation modes D to F (specific game state), the probability of a jackpot is higher in animation modes D to F (specific game state) when a development animation using the animation device (vibration motor for animation buttons, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed compared to animation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay depending on the type of animation mode, and it becomes easier to increase the player's sense of anticipation in the advantageous animation modes D to F, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth feature of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, during normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (excluding special SP reach animations), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed during the development animation. However, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) will not be executed during the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animations during normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (except for the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed during the development animation. However, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed during the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay, where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, during normal gameplay, when a losing first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is performed (excluding special SP reach animations), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be performed during the development animation. However, in specific gameplay states, when a losing first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is performed (special SP reach animation), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) will not be performed during the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animations during normal gameplay, where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be performed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a reach animation pattern other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the development animation. On the other hand, in specific gameplay states, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (a special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in normal gameplay states where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, in a specific game state, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the development animation. On the other hand, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth characteristic of the development animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 120 is that, in a specific game state, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is not executed in the development animation. On the other hand, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach animation pattern other than the special SP reach animation pattern), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) can be executed in the development animation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in a specific game state where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) is likely to be executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while there are two types of vibration effects performed during the development sequence: weak vibration and strong vibration, it is also acceptable to use only the weak vibration or only the strong vibration.

Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance modes A to C (normal game state) when an advanced performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed, compared to performance modes D to F (specific game states). Similarly, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance mode B or C than in performance mode A when an advanced performance using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed, compared to performance mode A. And similarly, the probability of a jackpot may be higher in performance mode E or F than in performance mode D when an advanced performance using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, first movable member 77b, etc.) is executed.

Furthermore, if the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the development animation. However, even in this case, the probability should be lower than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the development animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, and higher than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during normal gameplay.

Furthermore, if the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) results in a loss during a specific game state, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the subsequent animation. However, even in this case, the probability should be lower than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) results in a loss during the specific game state.

Furthermore, when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state, the animation button may be made to vibrate (vibration animation) during the development animation. However, even in this case, the frequency should be lower than when the second spin animation (display of the second special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed during the specific game state, and higher than when the first spin animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a loss is executed during the specific game state.

(Cut-in animation pattern determination table)
Figure 121 shows a cut-in animation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the animation patterns for cut-in animations in animation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 122 shows a cut-in animation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the animation patterns for cut-in animations in animation modes D to F (specific game state).

As shown in Figures 121 and 122, the cut-in animation pattern determination table associates the animation mode, jackpot judgment result, variation animation pattern type, selection rate (%) for each cut-in animation pattern, and the selected cut-in animation pattern. For reference, the animation configuration (effective suggestion animation, effective period, and animation content) for each cut-in animation pattern is also included.

The "effective indication effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Validity period (4 seconds per press)" indicates that the validity period for the cut-in animation ends with one operation of the animation button 17 or after 4 seconds have elapsed.

The "Promotional Effect" in the "Validity Period" section refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it involves displaying an opaque effect button image at a specific location, either without executing the validity indication effect or as a result of executing the validity indication effect, along with a gauge image showing the remaining validity period by the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Protruding button red" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the protruding effect button 17, which is in a protruding state and glowing red, and that the effect button 17 glows red.
"Rainbow-Emitting Button" refers to a button image that mimics the rainbow-emitting effect button 17, which is in a protruding state as the opaque effect button image described above, and indicates that the effect button 17 emits a rainbow-emitting light.

In the "Validity Period" column, "Button Status" refers to the state of the performance button 17 during the validity period. "Normal" indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding. "Protruding" indicates the protruding state where the performance button 17 is protruding.

In the "Cut-in Performance Mode" column, "Blue Cut-in" indicates that a blue cut-in performance is executed in which a cut-in image with a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a first cut-in sound effect is output.
"Green cut-in" indicates that a green cut-in effect is performed, in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a second cut-in sound effect is output.
"Red cut-in" indicates that a red cut-in effect is performed in which a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output.

In the button vibration section, "weak vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is performed, in which the button vibration motor used to vibrate the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 3 seconds from the start of the cut-in image display (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is performed in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the start of the display of the cut-in image (i.e., when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning a jackpot with each cut-in is as follows: "Blue cut-in" < "Green cut-in" < "Red cut-in". Also, the probability of winning a jackpot with each vibration effect is as follows: "Weak vibration effect" < "Strong vibration effect".

One of the features of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (the cut-in animation is executed), a vibration animation may be executed, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate and its validity period to be extended. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the high probability of winning and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that the vibration animation, which is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (the cut-in animation is executed), lasts for a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively convey the high probability of winning and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (the cut-in animation is executed), there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration animation, depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration animation can indicate the probability of winning, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first losing animation (display of the first special symbol) is performed (excluding special SP reach), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is more likely to occur (the rate of execution is higher) than when the second losing animation (display of the second special symbol) is performed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the animation effect in normal gameplay where the first losing animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A fifth characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in normal gameplay, the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is more likely to occur (the vibration rate is higher) when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (excluding special SP reach) than when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the animation effect in normal gameplay where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A sixth characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (excluding special SP reach), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) in the cut-in animation is more likely to occur (the execution rate is higher) than when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in a specific gameplay state (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the animation effect in normal gameplay where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed (excluding special SP reach), the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) in the cut-in animation is more likely to occur (the execution rate is higher) than when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) resulting in a jackpot is executed in a specific gameplay state (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the animation effect in normal gameplay where the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in a specific game state, the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is more likely to occur (the rate of occurrence is higher) when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (other than a special SP reach), compared with when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) which results in a loss is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The ninth characteristic of the cut-in animation pattern determination table shown in Figures 121 and 122 is that, in a specific game state, the vibration of the animation button 17 (vibration animation) is more likely to occur (the rate of occurrence is higher) when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than a special SP reach) than when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is more likely to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while there are two types of vibration effects performed during cut-in sequences—weak vibration and strong vibration—it is also acceptable to use only the weak vibration or only the strong vibration.

Furthermore, while the system is designed to execute a cut-in animation after a validity period has been established, it is also possible to execute the cut-in animation without establishing a validity period. In that case, the vibration animation executed may consist of only a 3-second weak vibration animation, only a 3-second strong vibration animation, only a 1-second weak vibration animation, or only a 1-second strong vibration animation.

Furthermore, the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration effect) may be disabled during the cut-in animation if the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) that results in a loss is executed during normal gameplay, or if the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) that results in a loss is executed during a specific gameplay state. Similarly, the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration effect) may be disabled during the cut-in animation if the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed during normal gameplay, or if the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gameplay state.

Furthermore, when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) is performed during normal gameplay, the cut-in animation including the effective indication animation may be disabled, or a cut-in animation without the effective indication animation may be performed. Similarly, when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) is performed during a specific gameplay state, the cut-in animation including the effective indication animation may be disabled, or a cut-in animation without the effective indication animation may be performed.

(Decision table for determining the final performance pattern)
Figure 123 shows the table for determining the winning performance pattern, which is referenced when deciding on the performance pattern for the winning performance.

As shown in Figure 123, the determination table for the winning animation pattern associates the animation mode, the jackpot judgment result, the type of variation animation pattern, the selection rate (%) for each winning animation pattern, and the selected winning animation pattern. For reference, the animation composition (effective suggestion animation, effective period, and animation content) for each winning animation pattern is also included.

The "effective indication effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the button images toward a specific position.
"Validity period (5 seconds per press)" indicates that the validity period for the finishing move ends with one operation of the performance button 17 or after 5 seconds have elapsed.

The "Promotional Effect" in the "Validity Period" section refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it involves displaying an opaque effect button image at a specific location, either without executing the validity indication effect or as a result of executing the validity indication effect, along with a gauge image showing the remaining validity period by the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Protruding button red" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the protruding and red-emitting effect button 17 as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 17 emits red light.
"Rainbow-Emitting Button" refers to a button image that mimics the rainbow-emitting effect button 17, which is in a protruding state as the opaque effect button image described above, and indicates that the effect button 17 emits a rainbow-emitting light.

In the "Validity Period" column, "Button Status" refers to the state of the performance button 17 during the validity period. "Normal" indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding. "Protruding" indicates the protruding state where the performance button 17 is protruding.

In the section on the winning animation sequence, "failure" indicates that the first movable member 77a does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, resulting in the execution of a winning animation sequence that suggests the jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" means that the first movable member 77a moves to its maximum operating position and emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, indicating that a winning game has been played and a decisive success animation has been performed.

The "Strong Vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" section in the button vibration column indicates that the button vibration motor, which vibrates the performance button 17, will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful performance (i.e., when the performance button 17 is operated or at the end of its validity period), followed by a 1-second interval, and then vibrate strongly again for 5 seconds. This is the strong vibration performance (successful vibration performance).

In the button illumination section, "Rainbow Illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the LED for the performance button 17, which illuminates the performance button, will emit a rainbow light for 11 seconds (a longer period than the duration of strong vibration of the performance button 17) from the start of the successful performance (i.e., when the performance button 17 is operated or when its validity period ends).

The probability of winning a jackpot with each promotional effect is as follows: "Normal button (white)" < "Protruding button (red)" < "Protruding button (rainbow)". Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot with each button state is "Normal" < "Protruding".

One of the key features of the winning animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 123 is that when a winning animation is successfully executed, a vibration animation is triggered, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate during the validity period. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify the player that a jackpot game is about to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the performance pattern determination table shown in Figure 123 is that the performance button 17, which is activated during the variation performance, has the longest effective period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of players missing the opportunity to operate the performance button 17, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the determination pattern table shown in Figure 123 is that the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variation effect causes the effect button 17 to vibrate for the longest period of time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively heighten the player's excitement during the successful determination effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the performance pattern determination table shown in Figure 123 is that the rainbow illumination of the performance button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the performance button 17. Therefore, the player's sense of excitement can be maintained even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the climactic scene (successful climactic scene) is designed to execute an action using the first movable member 77a, it may also be designed to execute an action using the first movable member 77b. In this case, it is preferable to ensure that the execution rate of the action using the first movable member 77a is higher than that of the action using the first movable member 77b.

(Re-draw animation pattern determination table)
Figure 124 shows a table for determining the re-draw animation pattern, which is referenced when determining the animation pattern for the re-draw animation.

As shown in Figure 124, the re-draw animation pattern determination table associates the animation mode, whether or not an upgrade is planned, the selection rate (%) for each re-draw animation pattern, and the selected re-draw animation pattern. For reference, the animation configuration (effective suggestion animation, effective period, and animation content) for each re-draw animation pattern is also included.

The "effectiveness suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of an effective period occurring. Specifically, it involves moving and displaying multiple semi-transparent effect button images, which resemble the effect button 17, on the first image display device 70, and also gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Validity period (3 seconds per press)" indicates that the validity period in the re-draw sequence ends with one operation of the sequence button 17 or after 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "Promotional Effect" in the "Validity Period" section refers to an effect that encourages the user to operate the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it involves displaying an opaque effect button image at a specific location without executing a validity indication effect, and simultaneously displaying a gauge image that shows the remaining validity period through the length of the gauge.

In the section for promotional effects, "Normal button white" indicates that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and emits white light, and that the performance button 17 emits white light.
"Normal button red" means that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state and glows red, as an opaque performance button image, and that the performance button 17 glows red.
"Normal button rainbow" means that, as described above, a button image is displayed that mimics the performance button 17, which is in its normal, non-protruding state but emits a rainbow glow, as an opaque performance button image, and that the performance button 17 emits a rainbow glow.

The "Button Status" column in the "Validity Period" section indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the validity period. "Normal" in the "Button Status" column indicates the normal state where the performance button 17 is not protruding.

In the section on re-draw animation patterns, "failed upgrade animation" indicates that, as a result of the re-draw animation, non-upgraded symbols that do not result in a favorable animation for the player (for example, even number symbols → even number symbols, odd number symbols other than "7" → odd number symbols other than "7") are displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-upgrade sound effect is output.
"Successful Upgrade Animation" refers to the fact that, as a result of the re-draw animation, an upgraded symbol that is advantageous to the player (for example, even number symbol → odd number symbol, or odd number symbol other than "7" → "7" symbol) is displayed (temporarily stopped), and an upgrade sound effect is played.

The "Strong Vibration (3 seconds)" section in the button vibration column indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds starting from the time the upgrade symbol is displayed (i.e., the end of the validity period).

In the button illumination section, "Rainbow Illumination (4 seconds)" indicates that the LED for the effect button 17, which illuminates the effect button, will emit a rainbow light for 4 seconds (a longer period than the effect button 17 vibrates strongly) starting from the time the upgrade symbol is displayed (i.e., the end of the validity period).

The expected upgrade probability for each promotional effect is as follows: "Normal button (white)" < "Normal button (red)" < "Normal button (rainbow)".

One of the key features of the re-draw pattern determination table shown in Figure 124 is that, when a successful upgrade animation is performed, a vibration animation is activated, causing the animation button 17 to vibrate and creating an effective period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player that they have been upgraded to a more favorable animation symbol, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the re-draw animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 124 is that the rainbow illumination of the animation button 17 lasts for a longer period than the strong vibration animation. Therefore, the player's excitement can be maintained even after the strong vibration animation ends, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that while the system currently generates an expiration period and then executes a re-draw animation (promotion failure animation, promotion success animation), it is also possible to execute the re-draw animation without generating an expiration period.

(Determining the confirmed animation pattern)
Figure 125 shows a table for determining the winning animation pattern, which is referenced when determining the animation pattern for the winning animation.

As shown in Figure 125, the confirmed animation pattern determination table associates the jackpot judgment result, the type of variation animation pattern, the selection rate (%) for each confirmed animation pattern, and the selected confirmed animation pattern. For reference, the animation configuration (execution timing, animation content) of each confirmed animation pattern is also included.

In the "Execution Timing" column, "-" indicates a timing when the confirmation animation will not be performed, while "○" indicates a timing when the confirmation animation will be performed.
In the audio section, "Confirmation Sound" indicates that a confirmation sound is played to signal that a jackpot has been won.
In the "Illumination" section, "Handle Rainbow Illumination" indicates that the handle LED used to illuminate the launch handle 15 will illuminate in rainbow colors from the moment the confirmation sound is output until the reel stops moving (for more than 4 seconds until the display of the animation symbols stops).

The "Strong Vibration (3 seconds)" section in the button vibration column indicates that the button vibration motor, which vibrates the performance button 17, will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the moment the confirmation sound is output, triggering a strong vibration effect.

One of the key features of the confirmed win pattern determination table shown in Figure 125 is that, when a confirmed win pattern is executed, a vibration effect is triggered, causing the effect button 17 to vibrate without any expiration period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that a jackpot is about to occur, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A second characteristic of the confirmed animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 125 is that the rainbow illumination of the launch handle 15 lasts for a longer period than the strong vibration animation. Therefore, the player's sense of excitement can be maintained even after the strong vibration animation ends, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

A third characteristic of the confirmed winning pattern determination table shown in Figure 125 is that, in normal gameplay, when the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol) is executed (excluding special SP reach), the confirmed winning effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the probability of execution is higher) than when the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effects in normal gameplay where the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol) is more likely to be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth characteristic of the confirmed winning animation pattern determination table shown in Figure 125 is that, in a specific game state, the confirmed winning animation (vibration animation of the animation button 17) is more likely to be performed (the probability of it being performed is higher) when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is performed (other than a special SP reach) than when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol) is performed (special SP reach). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the animation in specific game states where the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol) is more likely to be performed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent the confirmation animation (vibration animation of animation button 17) from being executed when the second variation animation (display of the second special symbol variation) is performed during normal gameplay, or when the first variation animation (display of the first special symbol variation) is performed during a specific gameplay state.

(Performance mode update process in the performance control unit)
The process of updating the performance mode in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 126. Figure 126 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the jackpot announcement performance in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E800-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there has been a change in the game state. If there is no change in the game state, the process moves to step E800-3. If there is a change in the game state, in step E800-2, the initial performance mode corresponding to the game state is set, and the performance mode update process ends. Specifically, if the game is in a normal state, performance mode A is set; if it is in a probability variation state, performance mode D is set; and if it is in a time-saving game state, performance mode F is set.

In step E800-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current state is a pre-announcement sequence. If the current state is a pre-announcement sequence, the sequence mode update process is terminated without updating the sequence mode. If the current state is not a sequence mode, in step E800-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current state is a normal game state or a probability variation game state. If the current state is neither a normal game state nor a probability variation game state, the sequence mode update process is terminated without updating the sequence mode. If the current state is a normal game state or a probability variation game state, the process moves to step E800-5.

In step E800-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the conditions for updating the performance mode have been met. Specifically, the conditions for updating the performance mode are met if either a predetermined number of variation performances have been executed, or if a losing variation performance (a reach performance with a higher expectation than a normal reach performance) has been executed. If the conditions for updating the performance mode have not been met, the current performance mode update process is terminated. If the conditions for updating the performance mode have been met, in step E800-6, the updated performance mode is determined, and in step E800-7, the determined performance mode is set, and the current performance mode update process is terminated.

Thus, when a pre-announcement is in progress, the update of the presentation mode is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the presentation mode changing during the pre-announcement, which could reduce the effectiveness of the pre-announcement, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) sequence, where the sequence is performed intermittently across multiple variation sequences, the sequence mode is not updated (does not change). However, during an icon change sequence, where the sequence is performed continuously across multiple variation sequences and a special icon common to all sequence modes is displayed, the sequence mode can be updated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effectiveness of pre-announcement sequences without severely restricting sequence mode updates, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the animation mode can be updated during the icon change animation, it may be possible to prevent the animation mode from updating (changing) even during the animation. This would suppress the reduction in the effectiveness of the pre-announcement animation and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Examples of display patterns for each performance mode)
Figure 127 will be used to explain examples of display patterns for each performance mode.

In performance mode A (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 127(a), the mode A background image is always displayed horizontally (dynamically) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The performance symbols 70a are displayed in a first form (rectangular base image BG, character image CG, and number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, in the icon display area (first held icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the first form (hexagon). The normal icon in the first form constantly performs a swaying motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70, moving from a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, to a second posture tilted to the right, and then back to the first posture.

In performance mode B (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 127(b), the mode B background image is always displayed horizontally (dynamically) while being displayed on the main display device 70. The performance symbols 70a are displayed in a second form (lantern-shaped base image BG, character image CG, and number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (number image).

Furthermore, in the icon display area (first held icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second mode repeatedly performs a swaying motion (performance motion) at a cycle of 2 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70, moving from a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, to a second posture tilted to the right, and then back to the first posture.

In performance mode C (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 127(c), the mode C background image is always displayed horizontally (dynamically displayed) while being shown on the main display device 70. The performance symbols 70a are displayed in a third form (a rectangular base image BG with rounded edges, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image with rounded edges), while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form (number image) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C), normal icons are displayed in the third form (star shape). The normal icon in the third form rotates from a first position (initial position) where a specific vertex is positioned at the top, through a second position where the specific vertex moves, and then returns to the first position. This rotational movement (performance movement) is constantly repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In performance mode D (probability variation game state), as shown in Figure 127(d), the background image of mode D is always displayed horizontally (dynamically displayed) while being shown on the main display device 70, the performance symbols 70a are displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (numerical image).

Furthermore, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (circular). The normal icon in the fourth form rotates from a first position (initial position) where the internal black dot is located at the top, through a second position where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first position. This rotational movement (performance movement) is constantly repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In performance mode E (probability variation game state), as shown in Figure 127(e), the mode E background image is always displayed horizontally (dynamically displayed) while being shown on the main display device 70, the performance symbols 70a are displayed in the fourth form (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (numerical image).

Furthermore, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth form (circular). The normal icon in the fourth form rotates from a first position (initial position) where the internal black dot is located at the top, through a second position where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first position. This rotational movement (performance movement) is constantly repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

In performance mode F (time-saving game state), as shown in Figure 127(f), the background image of mode F is always displayed horizontally (dynamically displayed) while it is being displayed on the main display device 70. The performance symbols 70a are displayed in a fourth form (rectangular base image, numerical image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common form common to all performance modes (numerical image).

Furthermore, in the icon display area (second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C), the normal icon is displayed in a fifth form (pentagon). The normal icon in the fifth form rotates from a first position (initial position) where a specific vertex is located at the top, through a second position where the specific vertex moves, and then returns to the first position. This rotational movement (performance movement) is constantly repeated at a cycle of 3 seconds while displayed on the main display device 70.

Furthermore, in performance modes A through F, when a special icon is displayed in the icon display area (second hold icon display area 70D, and the said icon display area 70C), the special icon is displayed in a common shape (circular) that is common to all performance modes. The special icon in this common shape is designed to rotate from a first posture (initial posture) where a specific part is positioned at the top, to a second posture where the specific part moves, and then back to the first posture. This rotational movement (performance movement) is constantly repeated at a cycle of 2.5 seconds while it is displayed on the main display device 70.

In this way, the display manner of the performance symbols 70a (type of performance symbol), the type of background image, and the display manner of the icons (hold icon, the icon in question) are varied according to the type of performance mode A to F. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the corresponding display patterns of the hold icons for each of the multiple performance modes A to F are designed to perform periodic performance actions (shaking, rotating, etc.). As a result, the presence of the hold icons makes it easier to appeal to the player that there is a hold memory of special symbol judgment information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
(Examples of variations for each performance mode)
Figure 128 will be used to explain examples of variations for each performance mode.

In performance mode A (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 128(a), the variation BGM 1 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory), and the special symbol TZ displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, as a pre-variation action (performance action) before the start of the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbol 70a performs a floating display for 0.75 seconds, rising upward from its stopping position, and then the performance symbol 70a begins the variation display in the order of left → center → right. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display in the first variation path, the character image CG of the performance symbol 70a performs a shaking display for 0.9 seconds, shaking its head at the stopping position.

In performance mode B (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 128(b), the variation BGM 2 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays (updates) using a second variation path (a trajectory where the middle symbol scrolls downwards and the left and right symbols scroll diagonally downwards, separating from the middle symbol), while the special symbol TZ displays (updates) using a first variation path common to all performance modes (a trajectory where it scrolls downwards).

Furthermore, as a pre-change operation (performance operation) before starting the change display (update operation) on the second change path, the performance symbols 70a perform a reduced display for 0.5 seconds, becoming smaller than their normal size at the symbol stop position before returning to their normal size, so that the three performance symbols 70a start the change display simultaneously. Also, as a pre-stop operation (performance operation) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the change display on the second change path, the performance symbols 70a perform a reduced display for 0.5 seconds, becoming smaller than their normal size at the symbol stop position before returning to their normal size.

In performance mode C (normal gameplay state), as shown in Figure 128(c), the variation BGM 3 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays (updates) in a third variation path (a trajectory in which the three performance symbols scroll diagonally downwards to the right), while the special symbol TZ displays (updates) in a first variation path common to all performance modes (a trajectory that scrolls downwards).

Furthermore, as a pre-change action (performance action) before the start of the variation display in the third variation path, the performance symbol 70a enlarges to a larger size than normal at the symbol stop position and then returns to normal size for 0.5 seconds, and the performance symbol 70a then begins the variation display in the order of right → center → left. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display in the third variation path, the character image CG of the performance symbol 70a raises its hand for 0.7 seconds at the symbol stop position.

In performance mode D (probability variation game state), as shown in Figure 128(d), the variation BGM 4 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays a variation (update variation) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory), and the special symbol TZ displays a variation (update display) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, as a pre-variation action (performance action) before the start of the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a floating display for 0.4 seconds, rising upward from their stopping position, and the three performance symbols 70a simultaneously begin their variation display. Additionally, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a bouncing display for 0.4 seconds.

In performance mode E (probability variation game state), as shown in Figure 128(e), the variation BGM 4 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory), and the special symbol TZ displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, as a pre-variation action (performance action) before the start of the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a floating display for 0.4 seconds, rising upward from their stopping position, and the three performance symbols 70a simultaneously begin their variation display. Additionally, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a bouncing display for 0.4 seconds.

In performance mode F (time-saving game state), as shown in Figure 128(f), the variation BGM 5 is audibly output as the variation BGM when the variation performance is executed. During the variation performance, the performance symbol 70a displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory), and the special symbol TZ displays (updates) along the first variation path (a downward scrolling trajectory) common to all performance modes.

Furthermore, as a pre-variation action (performance action) before the start of the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a shrinking display for 0.4 seconds, becoming smaller than their normal size at the symbol stop position before returning to their normal size, so that the three performance symbols 70a start the variation display simultaneously. Also, as a pre-stop action (performance action) when stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display in the first variation path, the performance symbols 70a perform a bouncing display for 0.4 seconds.

Furthermore, in performance modes A through F, the special symbol TZ begins to rotate and display simultaneously without any pre-revolution action, and stops and displays simultaneously with the performance symbol 70a without any pre-stop action.

In this way, depending on the type of performance mode A to F, the performance symbols 70a in the variation performance are displayed (updated) along different variation paths (trajectories). Therefore, the appearance of the variation performance changes depending on the performance mode, improving the performance effect and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the variation animation, before the animation symbol 70a begins its variation display (update display), it performs pre-variation actions (floating display, enlargement display, shrinking display), and different types of pre-variation actions are performed depending on the type of animation mode A to F. Therefore, the appearance of the variation animation changes depending on the type of animation mode, improving the animation effect and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the variation animation, the time it takes for the animation symbol 70a to perform a variation (update variation) may differ depending on which of the multiple pre-variation actions (floating display, enlargement display, shrinking display) the animation symbol 70a has performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visual effect of the variation animation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the pre-reset animation time for the reel symbol 70a in reel spinning animations during reel spinning animations

Furthermore, when the reel symbol 70a temporarily stops during the reel spinning animation, pre-stop actions (such as swaying, shrinking, raising hands, and bouncing) are performed. These pre-stop actions vary depending on the type of animation mode (A to F). Therefore, the appearance of the reel spinning animation changes depending on the animation mode, enhancing its visual effect and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the animation time for the pre-stop animation of the animation symbol 70a in the reel spinning animation during performance modes A to C (normal gameplay) is shorter than the animation time for the pre-stop animation of the animation symbol 70a in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay states). Therefore, in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay states), where the reel spinning animation time tends to be shorter than in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay), it becomes easier to secure sufficient reel spinning time for the animation symbol 70a, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during the variation animation, the variation BGM (the BGM played before the development animation) is audibly output, and different types of variation BGM are audibly output depending on the type of animation mode A to F. Therefore, it is possible to change the player's mood depending on the animation mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the variation path of the symbol 70a, the pre-variation action of the symbol 70a, the start order of the variation of the symbol 70a, the pre-stop action of the symbol 70a, and the variation BGM differed depending on the type of performance mode A to F, at least one of the variation path of the symbol 70a, the pre-variation action of the symbol 70a, the start order of the variation of the symbol 70a, the pre-stop action of the symbol 70a, and the variation BGM may be the same regardless of the type of performance mode.

Furthermore, while the variation path of the symbol 70a was the same in performance modes D to F, the variation path of the symbol 70a may be different between performance modes D to E (probability variation game state) and performance mode F (time reduction game state), or the variation path of the symbol 70a may be different in each of performance modes D to F.

Furthermore, in each performance mode (Performance Modes A to F), the time of the pre-variation action was the same regardless of the type of variation performance pattern (variation pattern). However, in the case of shortened variation or ultra-short variation, the pre-variation action may be performed in a shorter time than the normal pre-variation action. In this way, the pre-variation action time for the first variation performance, executed when the number of first reserved balls (U1) is large in the normal game state, will tend to be shorter than that for the first variation performance, executed when the number of first reserved balls (U1) is small in the normal game state. Similarly, the pre-variation action time for the second variation performance, executed when the number of second reserved balls (U2) is large in the specific game state, will tend to be shorter than that for the second variation performance, executed when the number of second reserved balls (U2) is small in the specific game state.

Furthermore, in each performance mode (Performance Modes A to F), the time of the pre-stop action was the same regardless of the type of variation performance pattern. However, in the case of shortened or ultra-shortened variation performance patterns, the pre-stop action may be performed in a shorter time than the normal pre-stop action. This would make it easier for the pre-stop action to be shorter for the first variation performance executed when the first number of reserved balls (U1) is large in the normal game state compared to the first variation performance executed when the first number of reserved balls (U1) is small in the normal game state. Similarly, it would be easier for the pre-stop action to be shorter for the second variation performance executed when the second number of reserved balls (U2) is large in the specific game state compared to the second variation performance executed when the second number of reserved balls (U2) is small in the specific game state.

Furthermore, in the variation effects of each performance mode (Performance Modes A to F), while the effect image related to the pre-variation action of the performance symbol 70a was not displayed when the pre-variation action occurred, it may be changed to display the effect image related to the pre-variation action. In this case, it is preferable to display an effect image of a different nature (without expectation of displaying an effect image) than the pre-read effect image (with expectation of displaying an effect image).

Furthermore, in the variable animations of each animation mode (animation modes A to F), while the effect image related to the pre-stop action of the animation symbol 70a was not displayed when such an action occurred, it may be changed to display the effect image related to the pre-stop action. In this case, it is preferable to display an effect image of a different nature (without expectation of displaying an effect image) than the pre-read effect image (with expectation of displaying an effect image).

(Regarding the type of notification event, the priority of notification events, and the notification method for notification events)
Figures 129 to 130 will be used to explain the types of notification events, the priority order of notification events, and the notification methods for notification events.

The notification methods consist of audio notifications, screen notifications, and illuminated notifications, and a combination of these is defined for each type of notification event.
The notification event types include events detected by the main control board 110 and events detected by the frame control board 120, and a priority order is set for each notification event type.

Regarding audio notifications, if multiple events occur simultaneously, the system will refer to the priority order and announce the event with the highest priority.
Furthermore, once the audio notification for a high-priority event has finished, if it is within the notification time for a lower-priority event, the audio notification for that lower-priority event will begin.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs multiple times (for example, if another specific event occurs while a notification for a specific event is being issued), a new audio notification will be initiated.
Furthermore, depending on the event, audio announcements may be made simultaneously, and even if it is outside the scheduled announcement time for a lower-priority event, audio announcements for lower-priority events may be made once the audio announcements for higher-priority events have finished.

Furthermore, regarding on-screen notifications, if multiple events occur simultaneously, they will be displayed (on-screen) in a way that prevents them from overlapping. In other words, if multiple events occur simultaneously, the on-screen notification system can simultaneously notify all of those events.
Furthermore, depending on the event, it may be acceptable to display a separate on-screen notification instead of simultaneously notifying all events.

Furthermore, regarding the illuminated notification system, if multiple events occur simultaneously, the system will refer to the priority order and illuminate the event with the highest priority.
Furthermore, once the illumination notification for a high-priority event has finished, if it is within the notification time for a lower-priority event, the illumination notification for that lower-priority event will begin.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs multiple times (for example, if another specific event occurs while a notification for a specific event is being issued), a new illuminated notification will be initiated.
Furthermore, depending on the event, it is permissible to have illuminated announcements for multiple events simultaneously, and even if it is outside the scheduled announcement time for lower-priority events, the illuminated announcements for lower-priority events may be made once the illumination announcements for higher-priority events have finished.

Furthermore, it is not possible for the player to adjust the volume of the audio notification by operating the joystick 19 while the audio notification is in progress, nor is it possible for the player to adjust the brightness of the illuminated notification by operating the joystick 19 while the audio notification is in progress. On the other hand, it is possible for an employee to adjust the volume of the audio notification by operating a specific switch located in a position accessible only to employees (players cannot operate it), and for an employee to adjust the brightness of the illuminated notification by operating the same specific switch while the illuminated notification is in progress.

The highest priority notification event type for priority 1 is "Game ball count cleared".
The notification of "game ball count cleared" is initiated when the "game ball count clear start command" is received, and the notification method is as follows:
The audio output device 9 will output a 5-second audio message at "Audio Announcement (Volume MAX)" saying "The number of game balls has been cleared."
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image labeled "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The audio message "The number of game balls has been cleared" is output only once and will not loop or end upon receiving a notification termination command.
Furthermore, the display of the icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 cease 30 seconds after either the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched, or the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20.

Since resetting the game ball count is primarily a pre-opening procedure for arcades, ending the audio notification after a single sound prevents the notification from continuing after opening, thus preventing customers from hesitating to play. On the other hand, screen and illuminated notifications continue until a ball is launched or counted, making it easier for employees to recognize that the highest priority action—resetting the game ball count—has been completed.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for the clearing of the game ball count displays a rectangular icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared" in the upper left display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a). This prevents situations where, even if a player starts playing on a game machine displaying the icon image indicating the clearing of the game ball count, the display of the performance symbols 70a may become difficult to see (until 30 seconds have passed since the launch).

As shown in the "Frame Control Board Main Processing" section, the game ball count reset is performed after the game ball count stored in the RWM area is cleared, and then the "Game Ball Count Reset Start Command" is set and transmitted. Therefore, the notification of the game ball count reset is considered a post-event notification.

Furthermore, while some players have always stopped playing after completely using up all their game balls, others have stopped playing without realizing that a small number of game balls remained. Game ball count clearing is the act of clearing the small number of game balls (for example, one game ball) left behind by such players in game machine 1. Since this is a significant act where the arcade clears something belonging to the player without the player's consent, it has the highest notification priority. This ensures that arcades recognize the importance of game ball count clearing.

Furthermore, for example, if a gaming parlor opens with a small number of game balls remaining, new players may end up playing with balls belonging to other players, potentially leading to trouble. Therefore, by prioritizing the notification of clearing the game ball count, it is possible to ensure that employees are aware that the game ball count has been cleared (preventing situations where a player thinks they have cleared the game ball count but they haven't), thus preventing such problems from occurring.

The notification event type for priority 2 is "setting change" (see Figure 33).
Notification of "setting change" (notification corresponding to control related to setting values) is initiated when a "setting change specification command" is received, and the notification method is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the voice message "Settings are being changed" and the siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) is used to display "Settings being changed" in red letters on a black background.
The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are to be illuminated in red (40% brightness).

In the "settings change" process, all notification methods—audio, screen, and illuminated—are designed to terminate upon receiving the power-on command (see Figure 31). This ensures that all notification methods quickly cease once the settings change process is complete, making it easier to recognize that the settings change process has finished.

The notification event type with priority level 3 is "Setting Confirmation" (see Figure 36).
The "setting confirmation" notification (notification corresponding to control related to the setting value) is initiated upon receipt of the "setting confirmation specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the voice message "Checking settings" and the siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) is used to display "Checking settings" in red letters on a black background.
The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are to be illuminated in red (40% brightness).

In the "Settings Confirmation" process, all audio, screen, and illuminated notification signals terminate upon receiving the power restoration command (see Figure 31). This ensures that all notification methods promptly cease broadcasting once the settings confirmation process is complete, making it easier to recognize that the process has finished.

The notification event type with priority level 4 is "Power-on (RWM clear)" (see Figure 35).
The "Power On (RWM Clear)" notification (notification corresponding to the clearing of predetermined information) is initiated upon receipt of the "RWM Clear Specification Command," and the notification pattern is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the voice message "RWM has been cleared" and the background music "Input BGM" are repeatedly output at "Audio Announcement (Volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) does not directly notify that the RWM has been cleared, but instead displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbols 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are to be illuminated in white (40% brightness).

The voice message "RWM cleared" and the "Input BGM" BGM output will end 30 seconds after the start of output. The white illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 will end 60 seconds after the start of illumination.

As shown in the "RWM Clear Processing" section, RWM clearing involves initializing all areas except the setting value area of the game's RWM area, after which the "RWM Clear Specification Command" is set and sent. Therefore, the RWM clear error notification is positioned as a notification after the RWM clear is completed (a post-notification). In other words, it is positioned similarly to the "Game Ball Count Clear" mentioned above, but the notification time differs between "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Power On (RWM Clear)".

For example, the "Game Ball Count Clear" audio output mentioned above is a single 5-second audio output that then ends, whereas the "RWM Clear" audio output and input BGM output are repeated and end after 30 seconds. This means that, for example, if the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed while the power switch sw164 is turned ON, the "RWM Clear" audio output and input BGM output will start after the "Game Ball Count Clear" audio output has finished, thus preventing employees from missing the "RWM Clear" notification. In other words, since "Game Ball Count Clear" and "RWM Clear" can occur simultaneously, if the execution times of these audio notifications were the same, the "RWM Clear" audio notification might not be executed according to priority, and employees might miss it. Therefore, by setting the audio output for "Game Ball Count Cleared" to 5 seconds and the audio output for "RWM Cleared" and the input BGM output to 30 seconds on a repeating basis, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned missed announcements. Therefore, it is preferable to have different audio notification times for events that may occur simultaneously (for example, Game Ball Count Cleared and RWM Cleared).

Furthermore, when both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed while the power switch sw164 is turned ON, the first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays the initial outcome of the performance symbols 70a (screen notification of RWM clear), and displays an icon image indicating "game ball count cleared" (screen notification of game ball count clear) so as not to overlap with the initial outcome display of the performance symbols 70a (see Figure 131). This allows for simultaneous screen notifications of both RWM clear and game ball count clear, enabling immediate visual recognition of both events.

Furthermore, the "Game Ball Count Cleared" on-screen notification can continue to be displayed even after the "Game Ball Count Cleared" audio notification has finished. Therefore, even if you miss the "Game Ball Count Cleared" audio output, you can still recognize that the game ball count has been cleared by checking the displayed icon image.
On the other hand, while the "RWM Clear" screen notification does not display an icon image, the initial display of the 70a symbols, the audio output that is played for 30 seconds, and the background music output allow the player to recognize that the "RWM Clear" has been performed without displaying an icon image. This eliminates the need for an icon image to notify the player of the "RWM Clear," which is expected to improve development efficiency and reduce memory usage.

Furthermore, if both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed while the power switch sw164 is turned ON, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red (the illuminated notification for game ball count clearing is executed). On the other hand, when the illuminated notification for game ball count clearing is executed, the illuminated notification for RWM clearing is not executed. This prevents confusion in the illuminated notification system regarding which error notification is being executed. Also, even without executing the illuminated notification for RWM clearing, the "RWM cleared" screen notification is executed as described above, so it is possible to recognize that "RWM clearing" has been performed.
The relationship between the notification methods when the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed while the power switch sw164 is turned ON will be explained later in the time chart.

In this embodiment, the audio notification time for "clear game ball count," which has a higher priority, is shorter than that for "power on (RWM clear)." However, the audio notification time for "clear game ball count" may be longer than that for "power on (RWM clear)," or the notification times for both may be the same.

The notification event type with priority level 5 is "Power restoration".
The notification of "power restoration" is initiated upon receipt of the "power restoration command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the background music for "Input BGM" is output with "Audio notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbols 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are to be illuminated in white (40% brightness).

During "power restoration," the background music (BGM) output for "power on" ends 30 seconds after the start of output, and the white illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 ends 60 seconds after the start of illumination. This simplifies the process by eliminating the need for further operation after the power switch 164 is initially turned ON.

The notification event type with priority 6 is "Invalidation 3 (RWM abnormal error)".
The notification of "Invalid Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is initiated upon receipt of the "Unrecoverable Error Specification Command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please change the settings" and the siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the word "Error" is displayed in red letters on a black background, and the message "Please change the settings" is displayed in white letters.
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

If the power supply to gaming machine 1 is interrupted and the power switch 164 is turned ON without performing a setting change operation, the "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" error notification will start again. In other words, if "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" occurs, it is necessary to turn the power switch 164 OFF, perform a setting change operation, turn the power switch 164 ON, and complete the setting change process.

In "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Anomaly Error)," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off). This allows the system to prompt the user to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1 and perform a setting change. Furthermore, since the RWM anomaly is resolved by changing the settings, employee intervention is required, preventing the game from continuing while the RWM anomaly persists.

The notification event type with priority 7 is "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal prize winning error)".
The notification of "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Prize Entry Error)" is initiated upon receipt of the "Abnormal Prize Entry Designation Command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the voice message "An abnormal prize has been awarded" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says "Abnormal prize entry error. Please restart the power."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The voice message "An abnormal prize has been awarded" and the siren warning sound will cease 180 seconds after the start of output. The icon image displaying "Abnormal prize award error. Please restart the power," and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an abnormal prize entry error displays a rectangular icon image, "Abnormal Prize Entry Error. Please restart the power," in the upper right display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (a position that does not overlap with the three performance symbols 70a). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by overlapping performance symbols 70a, making it easier for employees to understand that an abnormal prize entry error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 8 is "Fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)".
The notification of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" is initiated upon receipt of the "Magnet Detection Specification Command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Magnet detected" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "Magnet detection".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will terminate 180 seconds after the notification begins.

After an audio, screen, or illuminated notification is initiated, the notification will continue for 180 seconds even if the magnet is removed. Furthermore, if the "magnet detection command" is received again within those 180 seconds, the notification will be triggered for another 180 seconds from that point. This further enhances security.

As shown in Figure 131, a rectangular icon image labeled "Magnet Detected" is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) to indicate a magnet detection error. This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand when a magnet detection error occurs.

Furthermore, the on-screen notification of a magnet detection error may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), showing "Magnet Detection Error" in red or white letters on a black background.

The notification event type with priority 9 is "Acquisition limit device activated".
The notification of "Acquisition limit device activated" is initiated upon receipt of the "Acquisition limit device activated command," and the notification method is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "Acquisition limit device is operating" at "Audio notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says, "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash white (brightness 40%).

The audio message "Winning limit device activated" will end after 10 seconds from the start of output. The icon image displaying "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," and the white flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

The winning limit device stops operating when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, and the power switch 164 is turned ON while the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed (RWM clear is performed). If, however, only the power switch 164 is turned ON after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off,
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "Acquisition limit device is operating" at "Audio notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says, "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (40% brightness). This prevents the game from becoming playable simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

The screen notification for the activation of the payout limit device is shown in Figure 131. A rectangular icon image, "Payout Limit Device Activated. Game Ends for Today," is displayed in the upper left display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (below the display position of the "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared" icon image mentioned above). The icon image is displayed so as to overlap a portion of the left-hand animation symbol 70a (so that the icon image is on the front layer). In other words, since gameplay becomes impossible when the payout limit device is activated, there is no need to consider the visibility of the animation symbol 70a, and the freedom of displaying the icon image (no need to worry about its display position) can be increased.

Furthermore, the audio notification ends after 10 seconds, the screen notification uses an icon image, and the illuminated notification is a white flashing light, thus avoiding excessive notification. This prevents excessive stimulation of gambling tendencies and helps prevent excessive gaming.

Furthermore, the screen notification indicating the activation of the winning limit device may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) with the message "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today" in white text on a black background. This configuration makes it difficult to see other visual effects, thus making it easier for players to understand that they cannot continue playing.

Furthermore, it is also assumed that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the power switch 164 will be turned OFF, and then when the power switch 164 is turned ON again, the number of game balls will be reset at the same time (the game ball count reset switch 121 will be pressed while the power switch 164 is turned ON). In this case, the game ball count reset will be announced by voice and light, and the icon image for the game ball count reset and the icon image for "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM" will be displayed on the screen so that they do not overlap. As a result, although the game ball count reset will be announced by voice and light, the icon image for "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM" will be recognizable on the screen, so that the player will be aware that the game ball count has been reset, while also being aware that an RWM clear operation is required.
The relationship between the notification methods used in this situation will be explained later in the time chart.

The notification event type with priority 10 is "Illegal Radio Wave Detection Error".
The notification of an "illegal radio wave detection error" is initiated upon receipt of an "illegal radio wave detection designation command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Radio waves detected" and the siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detection".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The voice message "Radio waves detected" and the siren warning sound will cease 30 seconds after the start of output. The icon image "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detected" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

Even if the radio waves are removed after the voice notification begins, the notification will continue for 30 seconds. Furthermore, if the "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Command" is received again within those 30 seconds, the voice notification will be executed for another 30 seconds from that point. This further enhances security.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an unauthorized radio wave detection error displays a rectangular icon image, "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "Magnet Detection" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier to communicate the occurrence of an unauthorized radio wave detection error to employees.

The notification event type with priority 11 is "Abnormal number of winning balls error".
The notification of an "insufficient number of winning balls error" (notification in response to the detection of a game medium corresponding to the game value) is initiated upon receiving an "insufficient number of winning balls specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "Ball Count Anomaly Error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an abnormal number of winning balls error displays a rectangular icon image, "H68 Abnormal Number of Winning Balls," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detection" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an abnormal number of winning balls error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 12 is "Abnormal number of launched balls error".
The notification of "Abnormal Ball Count Error" (notification in response to the detection of game media being launched within the game area) is initiated upon receiving the "Abnormal Ball Count Specification Command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "H69 Abnormal number of fired balls".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "false ball count error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted, the notification will end. However, if the abnormality in the number of balls launched is not resolved (for example, if a large number of game balls remain stationary on the game board), after turning on the power switch 164, the machine will receive the "Ball Count Abnormality Specification Command" and the "Ball Count Abnormality Error" notification will start again.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an abnormal number of balls fired error displays a rectangular icon image, "H69 Abnormal Number of Balls Fired," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H68 Abnormal Number of Awarded Balls" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 13 is "Gaming machine communication abnormality error".
The notification of a "gaming machine communication error" is initiated upon receiving a "gaming machine communication error start command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that says "H06 Board connection error. Check connection."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "Gaming Machine Communication Anomaly Error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for a gaming machine communication error displays a rectangular icon image, "H06 Board Connection Error - Check Connection," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H69 Ball Count Anomaly" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other animation images or icon images, making it easier for employees to understand that a gaming machine communication error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 14 is "Output switch disconnection error".
The "Output Switch Open Wire Error" is an abnormality that occurs when an open wire is detected in the subtraction output switch 91c.
The notification of an "exit switch disconnection error" is initiated upon receiving an "exit switch disconnection specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H14 Subtraction port switch malfunction, malfunction in firing device".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch disconnection error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an exit switch disconnection error displays a rectangular icon image, "H14 Subtraction Output Switch Malfunction - Malfunction in Launching Device," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H06 Board Connection Error - Check Connection" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 15 is "Exit switch malfunction error".
The "exit switch malfunction error" occurs when the subtraction exit switch 91c does not turn ON within a specified time after the subtraction solenoid 91a has been activated (i.e., even if the subtraction solenoid 91a is activated, the subtraction exit switch 91c cannot detect the passage of the ball).
The notification of "exit switch malfunction error" is initiated upon receiving the "exit switch malfunction specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H14 Subtraction port switch malfunction, malfunction in firing device".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "exit switch malfunction error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an exit switch malfunction error displays a rectangular icon image, "H14 Subtraction Output Switch Malfunction - Malfunction in Launching Device," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H06 Board Connection Error - Check Connection" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an exit switch malfunction error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 16 is "Inlet switch disconnection error".
The "inlet switch disconnection error" is an abnormality that occurs when a disconnection of the subtraction inlet switch 91b is detected. Specifically, it is an abnormality that occurs when the OFF state of the subtraction inlet switch 91b cannot be detected even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when the game ball is stationary).
The notification of "Inlet switch disconnection error" is initiated upon receiving the "Inlet switch disconnection specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H15 Subtraction input switch malfunction, ball feeding section malfunction".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "inlet switch disconnection error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an entrance switch disconnection error displays a rectangular icon image, "H15 Subtraction Inlet Switch Malfunction, Ball Feeding Unit Malfunction," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H14 Subtraction Inlet Switch Malfunction, Launching Device Malfunction" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an entrance switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 17 is "Inlet switch malfunction error".
The "entrance switch malfunction error" is an abnormality that occurs when the OFF time (the time during which no game balls are detected) of the subtraction entrance switch 91b continues for a specified time (for example, 10 seconds) (the OFF state continues).
The notification of "Inlet switch malfunction error" is initiated upon receiving the "Inlet switch malfunction specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H15 Subtraction input switch malfunction, ball feeding section malfunction".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of an "entrance switch malfunction error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for an entrance switch malfunction displays a rectangular icon image, "H15 Subtraction Inlet Switch Malfunction - Ball Feeding Unit Malfunction," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H14 Subtraction Inlet Switch Malfunction - Launching Device Malfunction" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an entrance switch malfunction has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 18 is "Foul ball switch disconnection error".
The notification of "Inlet switch malfunction error" is initiated upon receiving the "Foul ball switch disconnection specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H24 Foul ball switch malfunction. Check the wiring of the foul ball switch."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "foul ball switch disconnection error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for a foul ball switch disconnection error displays a rectangular icon image, "H24 Foul Ball Switch Malfunction - Check Foul Ball Switch Wiring," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H15 Subtraction Inlet Switch Malfunction - Ball Feeding Section Malfunction" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a foul ball switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 19 is "Communication line abnormality error".
The notification of a "communication line abnormality error" is initiated upon receipt of a "communication line abnormality specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that says "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "communication line abnormality error," the voice notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated (the notification will end once the error is resolved and the error clear switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for a communication line abnormality error displays a rectangular icon image, "H04 Dedicated Unit Connection Error - Check Connection," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H24 Foul Ball Switch Abnormality - Check Foul Ball Switch Wiring" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a communication line abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 20 is "Communication unresponsiveness error".
The notification of a "communication unresponsive error" is initiated upon receiving a "communication unresponsive specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that says "H05 Dedicated unit communication error. Restart the unit."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "communication unresponsiveness error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for a communication failure error displays a rectangular icon image, "H05 Dedicated Unit Communication Error - Restart Unit," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the display position of the "H04 Dedicated Unit Connection Error - Check Connection" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a communication failure has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 21 is "Excess Ball Error".
The notification of a "ball overload error" is initiated upon receiving a "ball overload error specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
No notification will be given by the audio output device 9.
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that reads, "H25 Excessive game balls error. Please adjust to the correct number of balls."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "too many balls error," both the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the ball overload error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), with a rectangular icon image, "H25 Ball Overload Error. Please adjust to the correct number of balls," overlapping a portion of the right-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a ball overload error has occurred.

Furthermore, the on-screen notification for the ball overload error continues until the error is resolved (until the correct number of balls is reached). Therefore, the right-hand display symbol 70a remains difficult to see until the error is resolved. This allows for promptly inviting an employee to resolve the error.

The notification event type with priority 22 is "insufficient ball count error".
The notification of a "ball shortage error" is initiated upon receiving a "ball shortage error specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please replenish the balls in the outlet" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice notification (maximum volume)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that reads "H24 Insufficient number of game balls error. Replenish balls from the out slot."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "ball shortage error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

The ball shortage error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) as shown in Figure 131 (displayed below the "H25 Too Many Game Balls Error - Please Set to the Appropriate Number of Balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "H24 Ball Shortage Error - Replenish Balls from Outlet" is displayed overlapping a portion of the right-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand when a ball shortage error occurs.

Furthermore, the on-screen notification for a ball shortage error continues until the error is resolved (until balls are replenished). Therefore, the right-hand display symbol 70a remains difficult to see until the error is resolved. This allows for promptly inviting an employee to resolve the error.

Comparing "too many balls error" and "too few balls error," the key difference is that "too many balls error" does not trigger an audible alert, while "too few balls error" does. If a "too few balls error" persists, problems may arise, such as insufficient balls to enter the jackpot slot if a jackpot is triggered. Therefore, by also triggering an audible alert for "too few balls error," employees can be prompted to replenish the balls promptly, thus preventing the aforementioned problems from occurring.

The notification event type with priority 23 is "Lifting mechanism error".
The notification of a "lifting mechanism error" is initiated upon receiving a "lifting mechanism error designation command," and the notification method is as follows:
No notification will be given by the audio output device 9.
The fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) displays an icon image that reads, "H29 Lift mechanism error. Please check the lift."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "lifting mechanism error," both the screen notification and the illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, a rectangular icon image, "H29 Lift Mechanism Error. Please check the lift," is displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) to indicate a lift mechanism error. This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a lift mechanism error has occurred.

The notification event type for priority 24 is "Abrasive material not installed error".
The notification of "Abrasive material not installed error" is initiated upon receiving the "Abrasive material not installed command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H22 Abrasive material installation error. Abrasive material is not set."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The voice message "Please call an attendant" and the siren warning sound will end 30 seconds after the start of output. The icon image displaying "H22 Abrasive material installation error. Abrasive material is not set" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for the abrasive material not being installed displays a rectangular icon image, "H22 Abrasive Material Installation Error: Abrasive material is not set," in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) (below the "H29 Lift Mechanism Error: Please check the lift" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an abrasive material not being installed error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 25 is "Aisle switch not connected error".
The notification of "Aisle switch not connected error" is initiated upon receiving the "Aisle switch not connected specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the voice output device 9, the voice message "Please call an attendant" and a siren warning sound are repeatedly output at "Voice announcement (volume MAX)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image that reads "H26 Frame out switch error. Check the wiring of the frame out switch."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "Passage Switch Not Connected Error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for the aisle switch disconnection error displays a rectangular icon image, "H26 Frame Out Switch Error - Check Frame Out Switch Wiring," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the "H05 Dedicated Unit Communication Error - Restart Unit" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that an aisle switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 26 is "Glass frame release error".
The notification of a "glass frame release error" is initiated upon receiving a "glass frame release command," and the notification method is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "The door is open" at "Audio notification (maximum volume)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "H64 Glass frame release error".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The audio message "Door is open" will cease when the glass frame 4 is closed or after a maximum of 37 seconds from the start of the audio output. The icon image displaying "H64 Glass frame open error" will cease when the glass frame 4 is closed. The red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will cease 30 seconds after the glass frame 4 is closed.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for a glass frame release error displays a rectangular icon image, "H64 Glass Frame Release Error," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the "H26 Frame Out Switch Error - Check Frame Out Switch Wiring" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand that a glass frame release error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 27 is "Inner frame release error".
The notification of an "inner frame release error" is initiated upon receiving an "inner frame release specification command," and the notification method is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "The door is open" at "Audio notification (maximum volume)".
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image labeled "H65 Inner frame release error".
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

The audio message "Door is open" will cease when inner frame 3 is closed or after a maximum of 37 seconds from the start of the audio output. The icon image displaying "H65 Inner frame open error" will cease when inner frame 3 is closed. The red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will cease 30 seconds after inner frame 4 is closed.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification for the inner frame release error displays a rectangular icon image, "H65 Inner Frame Release Error," in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) (below the "H64 Glass Frame Release Error" icon image mentioned above). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other visual effects or icons, making it easier for employees to understand when an inner frame release error occurs.

Furthermore, the voice notification format ("The door is open") and the termination conditions for the voice notification were standardized for both glass frame opening errors and inner frame opening errors. This allows for the standardization of voice data and control processing related to error notifications, thereby improving the efficiency of error notifications.

Furthermore, while a glass frame opening error or an inner frame opening error is being reported, the launch of game balls is not permitted (launching into the game area is restricted) to prevent game balls from flying out of the game machine. However, launching game balls may be permitted (launching into the game area may be allowed).

The notification event type with priority 28 is "Ball removal operation in progress".
The "Ball Removal Operation in Progress" notification (notification corresponding to the ejection control) is initiated upon receiving the "Ball Removal Operation Designation Command," and the notification pattern is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, at the start of the ball removal operation, an audio message saying "Ball removal mode has begun" is output once for 3 seconds at "Audio notification (maximum volume)," and then, 60 seconds later, an audio message saying "Ball removal mode has ended" is output once for 5 seconds.
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says "Ball removal mode in progress".
The specifications state that no illuminated notifications will be made using the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 76.

As described above, during the "Ball Removal Operation," the audio notification is as follows: at the start of the ball removal operation, an audio notification (maximum volume) stating "Ball removal mode is active" is output once for 3 seconds. Then, 60 seconds later, an audio notification stating "Ball removal mode is complete" is output once for 5 seconds, ending the operation. The "Ball Removal Mode" icon image disappears 60 seconds after it is displayed.

As shown in Figure 131, the on-screen notification during the ball removal operation is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the "Acquisition Limit Device Activated - Game Ends for Today" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Ball Removal Mode" is displayed overlapping a portion of the left-hand animation symbol 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand when ball removal mode is in progress.

The notification event type with priority 29 is "Ball removal lever operation error".
The notification of "ball removal lever operation error" is initiated upon receipt of the "ball removal lever operation error start command," and the notification method is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "Please remove the ball" at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says, "Please remove the ball by operating the ball removal lever."
The frame lighting device 10 is set to flash red (brightness 40%).

In the case of a "ball removal lever operation error," the audio, screen, and illuminated notification will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 131, a screen notification for a ball-removal lever operation error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the "Ball Removal Mode" icon image mentioned above). A rectangular icon image, "Please operate the ball-removal lever to remove the ball," is displayed overlapping a portion of the left-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icon images, and clearly communicates the occurrence of a ball-removal lever operation error to employees.

The notification event type with priority 30 is "Launching pad ball error".
The notification of "Launchpad remaining ball error" is initiated upon receipt of the "Launchpad remaining ball error designation command," and the notification method is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "There are still balls that can be fired" at "Audio notification (volume MAX)" until the error is resolved.
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says, "There are still balls that can be fired."
The specifications state that no illuminated notifications will be made using the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 76.

In the case of a "Launchpad Remaining Ball Error," both the audio and on-screen notifications will continue until the error is resolved (the notification will end once the error is resolved).

The on-screen notification for the launch pad remaining ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), as shown in Figure 131 (displayed below the "Please remove the balls by operating the ball removal lever" icon image). A rectangular icon image, "There are still launchable balls remaining," is displayed overlapping a portion of the left-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icon images, and clearly communicates the launch pad remaining ball error to employees.

The notification event type with priority 31 is "Counting Processing Notification".
The notification of "Counting Processing Notification" is initiated upon receipt of the "Counting Processing Notification Specification Command," and the notification method is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the message "Counting in progress" at "Voice announcement (maximum volume)" for 3 seconds.
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says "Counting in progress" for 3 seconds.
The specifications state that no illuminated notifications will be made using the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 76.

In the "Counting Processing Notification," both the audio and screen notifications end after 3 seconds have elapsed or when counting is complete. If the counting button switch 20a detects operation of the counting button 20 after 3 seconds have elapsed, the audio and screen notifications will continue for another 3 seconds, and the same process will be repeated thereafter.

The counting processing notification screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) as shown in Figure 131 (displayed below the "Remaining playable balls" icon image mentioned above), and a rectangular icon image "Counting in progress" is displayed overlapping a portion of the left-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icon images, and makes it easy for players and employees to understand that a counting processing notification has occurred.

The notification event type for priority 32 is "Counting Processing Complete".
The notification of "Counting Processing Complete" is initiated upon receipt of the "Counting Processing Complete Command," and the notification method is as follows:
From the audio output device 9, the voice message "Counting process completed" is output once for 5 seconds at "Voice notification (volume MAX)".
The first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays an icon image that says "Counting process completed".
The specifications state that no illuminated notifications will be made using the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 76.

The voice output "Counting process complete" will be a single output lasting 5 seconds, as described above, and the display of the "Counting process complete" icon image will end 30 seconds after it begins.

As shown in Figure 131, the screen notification indicating the completion of the counting process is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the "Counting in Progress" icon image mentioned above). A rectangular icon image, "Counting Process Completed," is displayed overlapping a portion of the left-hand animation pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping with other animation images or icons, making it easy for players and employees to understand that the counting process is complete.

The notification event type with priority 33 is "Game ball count exceeded."
When the number of game balls is exceeded, the game receives commands such as "game ball count exceeded" and "game ball count exceeded, end specified," but the voice notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification all remain "as is" (no special notification is given).
The primary purpose of the "Game Ball Count Over" notification is to send a message to the gaming machine information center when the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000). Therefore, the gaming machine 1 does not provide any voice, screen, or illuminated notification. This prevents disrupting the mood of players who are enjoying the game after reaching the specified number (40,000) of game balls. On the other hand, the gaming machine information center can obtain information that the number of game balls has reached the specified number (40,000), allowing it to recognize, for example, that a certain number has been reached before the aforementioned acquisition limit device is activated, and to grasp the progression of the number of game balls in detail. Note that since the "Game Ball Count Over" notification is sent when the number of game balls reaches the specified number (40,000), depending on the number of game balls held, it may be sent at exactly "40,000" or at "40,005".

The notification methods described above are merely examples, and the start conditions, end conditions, notification time, and notification methods can be changed as appropriate. For example, an event whose end condition is a power outage may be terminated by the passage of time, or an event whose end condition is the passage of time may be terminated by a power outage.

Furthermore, regarding screen notifications, while some events are displayed as icon images, the system is not limited to this. Screen notifications may also be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) with red or white text on a black background.

Furthermore, regarding screen notifications, while it is possible to display icon images indicating the occurrence of multiple events, it is also possible to display only the event with the highest priority among the events that occurred. And, when the termination conditions for the screen notification of the high-priority event are met, if the notification period for the lower-priority event is still ongoing, the screen notification for that event may be displayed.

Furthermore, the priority order is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, "Setting Change" (notification according to control related to setting values), "Setting Confirmation" (notification according to control related to setting values), "Power On (RWM Clear)" (notification according to the clearing of specified information), and "Power Restore" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear." For example, "Magnet Detection Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear," and "Illegal Radio Wave Detection Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear." Also, for example, "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear," and "Abnormal Number of Launched Balls Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear." Also, for example, "Glass Frame Open Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear," and "Inner Frame Open Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear." Also, for example, "Internal Gaming Machine Communication Abnormal Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear," and "Communication Line Abnormal Error" may have a higher priority than "Game Ball Clear." Furthermore, for example, "Ball Removal in Progress" may have a higher priority than "Ball Clearing," and "Acquisition Limit Device Activation" may have a higher priority than "Ball Clearing." Also, "Ball Removal in Progress" may have a higher priority than "Glass Frame Opening Error" or "Inner Frame Opening Error," and "Acquisition Limit Device Activation" or "Ball Removal in Progress" may have a higher priority than "Setting Change" or "Setting Confirmation."

Here, we will explain, with reference to Figure 78, whether game progress control is possible or impossible when each type of notification event occurs. In Figure 78, if the "Game" column under "Game Operation" shows "○", game progress control is possible; if it shows "×", game progress control is impossible.

The types of notification events that indicate "a state where game progress control is impossible" include "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "acquisition limit device activation (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." On the other hand, for all other notification event types, "a state where game progress control is possible." For example, during "setting change," the execution of the main control board timer interrupt process is not permitted, and game progress control is not possible. Conversely, during "game ball count clear," if "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," and "acquisition limit device activation" have not occurred on the main control board 110, it can be said that game progress control is possible.

Furthermore, a key feature is that "clearing the game ball count," which indicates a state where game progress control is possible, takes higher priority than "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "acquisition limit device activation (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation," and "ball removal lever operation error," which indicate a state where game progress control is impossible. This ensures that the notification of "clearing the game ball count" is prioritized in all cases, guaranteeing that the game ball count has been reliably cleared.

Furthermore, a notable feature is the differing priority order for states where game progress control is impossible, such as "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "acquisition limit device activation (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." For example, while "setting change" is necessary to resolve "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," if the "setting change" is performed after "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)" occurs, prioritizing notification for the "setting change" (and not notifying "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)") allows employees to recognize that the correct operation is being performed.

Furthermore, a notable feature is that even for states where game progress can be controlled, such as "clearing the game ball count," "powering on (RWM clear)," and "restoring power," the priority order differs. For example, "clearing the game ball count" takes priority over "powering on (RWM clear)," and "clearing the game ball count" takes priority over "restoring power." This ensures that the notification for "clearing the game ball count" is always prioritized, guaranteeing that the game ball count has been cleared.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 129 and 130, the termination conditions for notification differ depending on the type of notification event. For example, notifications can be divided into "events where notification terminates upon power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)" and "events where notification does not terminate upon power outage (notification resumes after power is restored)." Examples of "events where notification terminates upon power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)" include "insufficient number of winning balls error," "insufficient number of launched balls error," and "RWM error." Examples of "events where notification does not terminate upon power outage (notification resumes after power is restored)" include "game ball count clear," "setting change," and "setting confirmation." For example, with "game ball count clear," the notification will not terminate simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF or ON unless a launch or counting occurs. Furthermore, comparing the scenario where "the notification ends due to a power outage (and does not resume after power is restored)" with the scenario where "the notification does not end due to a power outage (and resumes after power is restored)," the latter tends to have a higher priority. This allows the notification to continue until a ball is launched or counted if the game ball count is cleared, thus informing the player that the game ball count has been cleared and the game is ready to play. Similarly, if a setting change occurs, the notification can continue until the setting key sw112a is returned to its initial position (the operation to complete the setting change), allowing the notification to end upon this operation, thus informing the employee that the setting change is complete.

Furthermore, a notable feature is the differing priority order for "game ball count clear," "settings change," and "settings confirmation," which are all instances where the notification does not terminate upon power loss (and resumes after power is restored). For example, "game ball count clear" takes priority over "settings change," and "game ball count clear" takes priority over "settings confirmation." This ensures that the "game ball count clear" notification is always prioritized, guaranteeing that the game ball count has been cleared.

Furthermore, a notable feature is that the priority differs even for "incidents where notification ends due to power outage (notification does not resume after power is restored)," such as "insufficient number of winning balls error," "insufficient number of balls launched error," and "RWM error." For example, "insufficient number of winning balls error" takes precedence over "insufficient number of balls launched error." For instance, "insufficient number of winning balls error" is assumed to be caused by fraud, such as using illegal devices or game balls with strings attached to them to detect only the winning switch and prevent detection by the out ball detection switch 39a located downstream of the winning switch. In contrast, "insufficient number of balls launched error" is assumed to be caused by a situation where many game balls are stuck on the game board (a so-called "grape" situation). In other words, "insufficient number of winning balls error" has a higher probability of being a fraud, so prioritizing notification for "insufficient number of winning balls error" can enhance security. Also, "RWM error" takes precedence over "insufficient number of winning balls error." This prevents gameplay from occurring when the main RAM 110c is malfunctioning (a more serious issue than an incorrect ball count error), thus preventing improper gameplay.

The "RWM abnormal error" notification will terminate only if, after the power supply has been interrupted, a configuration change operation is performed when power is restored, and the configuration change is assumed to have been successfully completed. In other words, if no configuration change operation is performed when power is restored after the power supply has been interrupted, the "RWM abnormal error" notification will continue.
Therefore, if a setting change operation is performed when power is restored after a power supply has been interrupted, and the setting change is made, this can be categorized as an event where "the notification ends due to a power outage (the notification does not resume after power is restored)."

Furthermore, "an event in which notification terminates due to power outage (not resuming notification after power is restored)" means that notification may terminate due to power outage in all cases of audio notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification, or it may terminate due to power outage in some cases of audio notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification. In other words, it is possible that some of the audio notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification may resume. That is, it is possible that notification may not resume after power is restored (some may resume, while others may not).
Furthermore, the phrase "announcement does not terminate upon power outage (announcement resumes after power is restored)" means that the announcement may not terminate upon power outage in all cases of audio announcements, screen announcements, and illuminated announcements, or it may not terminate upon power outage in some cases of audio announcements, screen announcements, and illuminated announcements. In other words, it may be possible to resume the announcement after power is restored (some announcements may be resumed, while others may not).

Furthermore, the error codes displayed on the frame control display unit 125 shown in Figure 78 have different display termination conditions (conditions for hiding the display) depending on the type of notification event. For example, they can be divided into "events where the display terminates when the power is lost (the display does not resume after power is restored)" and "events where the display does not terminate when the power is lost (the display resumes after power is restored)." Examples of "events where the display terminates when the power is lost (the display does not resume after power is restored)" include "illegal radio wave detection error," "insufficient number of winning balls error," and "insufficient number of launched balls error." An example of "events where the display does not terminate when the power is lost (the display resumes after power is restored)" is "game ball count clear." Specifically, for the error code "H67" corresponding to "game ball count clear," the display termination condition (conditions for hiding the display) is met 30 seconds after launch or counting has occurred. On the other hand, the error codes "H66" (corresponding to an "unauthorized radio wave detection error"), "H68" (corresponding to an "abnormal number of winning balls error"), and "H69" (corresponding to an "abnormal number of balls launched error") will have their display terminated (disappear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted. This allows for confirmation that the high-priority "game ball count clear" has been performed, even after the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted (and then restored), ensuring that the game ball count is reliably cleared even in the event of an unexpected power outage.

Furthermore, regarding the "event where the display does not terminate when the power is cut off (the display resumes after power is restored)," in addition to the "game ball count clearing" mentioned above, other cases such as "glass frame open error" and "inner frame open error" can also be included in this category. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with the error code displayed), and the power is turned on without closing glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the conditions for terminating the error code display will not be met. In the case of a "glass frame open error," "H64" will be displayed again, and in the case of an "inner frame open error," "H65" will be displayed again. On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with the error code displayed), and the power is turned on after closing glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the conditions for terminating the error code display will be met. In other words, whether or not the conditions for ending the display of the error code are met depends on whether or not the glass frame 4 and inner frame 3 are closed (it can be said that it belongs to either event). This ensures that, in the case of a game ball count reset, the game ball count is reliably cleared even in the event of an unexpected power outage. Furthermore, in the case of a "glass frame open error" or "inner frame open error," if the error code is displayed after the power is restored, it prompts the user to close the glass frame 4 and inner frame 3. On the other hand, if the power is restored after the glass frame 4 and inner frame 3 have been closed, the display of the error code will end, allowing the user to recognize that the appropriate action has been taken.

Furthermore, the phrase "the event in which the display terminates due to a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" may mean that no display is shown at all after power is restored, or that the display is shown for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after power is restored and then disappears after that time has elapsed. In other words, it may be possible for the display not to resume after power is restored (it may not be shown at all, or it may be shown only for a predetermined time).
Furthermore, the "event where the display does not terminate upon power loss (display resumes after power is restored)" may refer to a mode in which the display continues to be shown until the relevant error is resolved after power is restored, or a mode in which the display is shown for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after power is restored and then disappears after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, it may be possible to resume the display after power is restored (it may continue to be shown until the error is resolved, or it may only be shown for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the case of "setting change," "setting confirmation," "power on (RWM clear)," and "acquisition limit device activation," the corresponding bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. Also, in the case of "clearing the number of game balls," Bit 3 of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is turned ON, and the information that has been turned ON is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. On the other hand, in the case of "ball removal operation," "ball removal lever operation error," "communication line abnormality error," "communication no response error," etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON, and no information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. This allows for a clear distinction between information necessary for the proper management of the gaming machine 1 and unnecessary information. It prevents the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center from receiving all information (everything and anything), which could lead to an overload of information and neglect of proper management.

Furthermore, while it was stated that "setting change,""settingconfirmation," and "power on (RWM clear)" would cause the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" to be turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, for example, if these events occur outside of the gaming parlor's business hours, the information may not be transmitted, and if these events occur during the gaming parlor's business hours, the information may be transmitted. In other words, if these events occur during the gaming parlor's business hours, there is a high probability that fraud has occurred, so by only receiving information during the gaming parlor's business hours, a minimum level of security can be maintained. That is, depending on the gaming parlor's business hours, information related to the event may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (during the gaming parlor's business hours), or information related to the event may not be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (outside of the gaming parlor's business hours).
On the other hand, in cases such as "ball removal in progress,""ball removal lever operation error,""communication line abnormality error," and "communication no response error," the corresponding Bit for "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON, and no information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. However, information related to these events may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, or the system may be configured so that information is transmitted during or outside of the operating hours of the gaming parlor, or not transmitted at all.
In other words, it is possible to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally transmitted, but may not be transmitted depending on business hours), or it is possible not to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally not transmitted, but may be transmitted depending on business hours).

Here, we will explain the order in which error codes are displayed. As shown in Figure 78, there are notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120. For notification events detected by the main control board 110, the frame control display 125 does not display an error code, while for notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the frame control display 125 does display an error code. Furthermore, notification events detected by the main control board 110 and notification events detected by the frame control board 120 are controlled by the performance control board 130 to provide audio notification, screen notification (display of the error code as an icon image), and illuminated notification (excluding game ball count overruns). In addition, for notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the error code is displayed on the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

For example, when the frame control board 120 detects a reset of the game ball count, first, the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67," then the first image display device 70 displays "H67 Game Ball Count Cleared," and finally, the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "H67." For example, if the process were reversed, an employee performing the game ball count reset operation on the back of the game machine would have to first check the first image display device 70 and the display unit 174, which are visible from the front of the game machine. However, displaying the error code in the order described above makes it easier to confirm the game ball count reset notification.

Figures 132 and 133 illustrate the relationship between the notification methods for each event during game ball count reset and power-on. "Audio notification," "Screen notification," and "Illumination notification" in the figures correspond to those described in Figures 129 and 130. Figure 132 assumes the following scenarios: when both game ball count reset and setting change/setting confirmation operations are performed and the power is turned on; when both game ball count reset and RWM clear operations are performed and the power is turned on; and when only the game ball count reset operation is performed and the power is turned on (power restoration). The time chart should be interpreted as a comparison between "game ball count reset" and "setting change or setting confirmation," between "game ball count reset" and "power-on (RWM clear)," and between "game ball count reset" and "power restoration."

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and changing or checking the settings)
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed; if the settings are to be changed, the settings change operation is performed; and if the settings are to be confirmed, the settings confirmation operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 110. In the gaming machine 1, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 start up slightly earlier than the main control board 110. That is, the main processing on the frame control board 120 and the main processing on the performance control board 130 start before the main processing on the main control board 110. Therefore, the game ball count clear notification starts at (b), and the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification starts later at (c).

In (c), although a setting change command was received, the game ball count reset notification was executed. As shown in Figure 129, the priority for clearing the game ball count is higher, therefore, the audio and illuminated notifications related to the setting change are not initiated. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the first image display device 70 begins displaying "Settings being changed."

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the audio notification for clearing the game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the audio notification for clearing the game ball count ends, a new audio notification for setting changes, "Settings being changed + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 133, under setting change and setting confirmation (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of both the game ball count being cleared and notification of setting changes in progress. The first image display device 70 displays "Settings being changed" in red on a black background, and an icon image of "H67 Game ball count cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area so as not to overlap with this display. This icon image has "H67" in white on a red background, and "Game ball count cleared" in black on a yellow background (the background color is a two-tone red and yellow).

Although the notification for clearing the game ball count has a higher priority, the "Settings Change in Progress" display is larger than the text size of the game ball count clear icon image, is displayed in red, and is centered in the display area, making it easily noticeable to employees. This ensures that even if the game ball count clear notification takes priority and the audible and illuminated notifications for the settings change cannot be executed, the fact that the settings are being changed can still be clearly understood. Furthermore, even if the game ball count clear and settings change notifications are executed simultaneously, both notifications can be distinguished, preventing situations where employees fail to recognize which event is occurring.

(e) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command (or power-restore command if it is a setting confirmation) transmitted from the main control board 110. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 terminates the audio and screen notifications for the setting change that are currently being performed.

The notification methods for (d) to (e) are as shown in Figure 133, under setting change and setting confirmation (d) to (e). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification of cleared game balls, the first image display device 70 provides both a notification of cleared game balls and a notification indicating that a setting change is in progress, and the audio output device 9 provides a notification indicating that a setting change is in progress. In this way, if the notification period for setting change is still ongoing even after the audio notification for cleared game balls has finished, promptly starting the audio notification for setting change makes it easier to recognize that a setting change is in progress. Although not shown in the illustration, from (e) onward, the first image display device 70 displays the icon image for cleared game balls, the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbol 70a, and the background image.

(g) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and the settings are changed or confirmed, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, which also leads to improved employee work efficiency.

Note that while (d) indicates the start of an audible notification for a setting change, it is not necessary to start the audible notification for a setting change. Also, while the on-screen notification for a setting change is scheduled to start from (c), it may also start from (d). Furthermore, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification for a setting change may be started.

Furthermore, for the sake of explanation, I used setting changes as an example, but if setting verification is performed, you can appropriately substitute the setting changes described above with the setting verification.

(Comparison of clearing the number of game balls and clearing RWM)
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed, and if the RWM is to be cleared, the RWM clearing operation is performed.

(b) is as described above, so the explanation is omitted.
(c) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the RWM clear command transmitted from the main control board 110. Although the RWM clear command has been received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the priority shown in Figure 129 is that clearing the game ball count is higher, so the audio notification and illumination notification related to RWM clearing are not started. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of performance symbols 70a of the initial outcome 123" (including the background image).

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new audio notification for RWM clearing, "Ram has been cleared + Insertion BGM," begins and is output repeatedly.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 133, power-on (RWM clear) (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides both notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 (performance symbols 70a)" (including the background image). In other words, instead of directly displaying that the RWM has been cleared, the display of the "combination of the initial outcome 123 (performance symbols 70a)" (including the background image) indirectly notifies the user that the RWM has been cleared.

(f) is the timing 30 seconds after (d), and the RWM clear audio notification ends at this time. Meanwhile, the display of the "initial outcome 123 combination of symbols 70a" (including the background image) continues until the player starts playing (this may be interrupted by demo sequences, etc.).

The notification methods for (d) to (f) are as shown in Figure 133, Power On (RWM Clear) (d) to (f). The frame lighting device 10 provides a game ball count clear notification, the first image display device 70 provides a game ball count clear notification and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 symbols 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 provides an RWM clear notification. In this way, if the RWM clear notification period continues even after the game ball count clear audio notification has ended, promptly starting the RWM clear audio notification makes it easier to recognize that the RWM has been cleared. Note that (g) is as described above and therefore will not be explained further.

As described above, even if both the game ball count and RWM (Replay Time Machine) are cleared simultaneously, both events can be effectively communicated through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Note that in (d), an audio notification for RWM clearing is newly initiated, but it is not necessary to initiate the audio notification for RWM clearing. Also, while the screen notification for RWM clearing is scheduled to start from (c), it may also start from (d). Furthermore, the illuminated notification for game ball count clearing may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification for RWM clearing may be initiated.

(Comparison of resetting the game ball count and restoring power)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned ON.

(b) is as described above, so the explanation is omitted.
(c) is the same as the RWM clear described above, so the explanation is omitted. However, since this is a power restoration, the command received from the main control board 110 here is a power restoration specification command.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new voice notification of power restoration, "Input BGM," begins.
(f) is the same as the RWM clearing described above, so its explanation is omitted.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 133, power restoration (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides both notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). In other words, instead of directly indicating that power has been restored, the system indirectly notifies the user of power restoration by displaying the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Note that, similar to RWM clear, the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" is displayed upon power restoration, but a different combination of performance symbols 70a may be displayed. For example, the "combination of the initial outcome 357 of the performance symbols 70a" may be displayed upon power restoration.

The notification methods for (d) to (f) are as shown in Figure 133, power restoration (d) to (f). The frame lighting device 10 provides a game ball count clear notification, the first image display device 70 displays both the game ball count clear notification and the "combination of the initial outcome 123 symbols 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 provides a power restoration notification (output of the input BGM). In this way, if the power restoration notification period continues even after the game ball count clear audio notification has ended, promptly starting the power restoration audio notification makes it easier to recognize that power has been restored. Note that (g) is as described above and therefore will not be explained further.

As described above, even if the game ball count is reset and the power is restored simultaneously, both events can be effectively communicated through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, which also contributes to improving employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, although an audible notification of power restoration was started in (d), it is not necessary to start the audible notification of power restoration. Also, although the on-screen notification of power restoration was scheduled to start from (c), it may also be started from (d). Additionally, the illuminated notification of game ball count reset may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification of power restoration may be started.

Figure 134 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the game ball count is cleared and when the power is restored. Figure 134 also compares the notification behavior of each display means when the power is turned on along with the game ball count clearing operation, and when only the power is turned on.

(a) represents the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is being cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed; if the power is being restored, only the power switch 164 is turned ON.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command transmitted from the main control board 110.
When the power is turned on with a reset of the number of game balls, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image).
Even when only the power is turned ON, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). In other words, regardless of whether the game ball count is cleared or not, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which it starts displaying the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image) is also the same.

Furthermore, if the power is turned ON with a reset of the number of game balls, the initial operation of the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is initiated.
Even if only the power is turned ON, the initial operation of the movable performance device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) will begin. In other words, regardless of whether or not the game ball count is reset, the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the initial operation begins is also the same.
This eliminates the need to change the timing of the initial display, the timing of the initial operation, or the content of the initial operation depending on whether or not the game ball count is cleared, thus preventing an increase in the control load.

Furthermore, in all cases, the initial operation proceeds as follows: (c) to (g), the first movable member 77a operates in operation mode 1, then the second movable member 77b operates in operation mode 1, and then the first movable member 77a operates in operation mode 2. In other words, the start timing and initial operation mode are the same in all cases. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare separate initial operation modes depending on whether or not the game ball count is cleared, allowing for standardization and preventing an increase in control load.

Furthermore, in (c), when the power is turned on with a reset of the game ball count, although a power restoration command is received, the game ball count reset notification is executed. As shown in Figure 129, the priority for resetting the game ball count is higher, therefore, the voice and illumination notifications related to power restoration are not initiated.

Furthermore, in (c), if only the power is turned ON, the power restoration audio notification "Power-on BGM" is output, and the power restoration illumination notification "Frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 light up white" begins.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). If the power is turned on with a reset of the game ball count, the voice notification for resetting the game ball count ends at this timing. On the other hand, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification for resetting the game ball count ends, the output of a new voice notification for power restoration, "Input BGM," begins.

(e) is 30 seconds after (c). If only the power is turned ON, the voice notification via the input BGM output ends. Similarly, if the power is turned ON along with the reset of the number of game balls, (f) is 30 seconds after (d), and the voice notification via the input BGM output ends at that time.
Furthermore, in the case where only the power is ON, (f) is the timing 60 seconds after (c), and the illuminated notification ends at that timing.

(g) is the timing at which the initial operation ends in all cases. In other words, in all cases, the initial operation of the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b), which started at (c), ends at (g). This eliminates the need to change the timing of the initial operation's completion depending on whether or not the game ball count is cleared, thus preventing an increase in the control load.

(h) is the moment when, in the case of a power-on operation that clears the number of game balls, the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification of the game ball count clearing will end 30 seconds after the operation.

Although not specifically illustrated, the illumination pattern of the light-emitting means provided on the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) during the initial operation may be the same in all cases. For example, whether the power is turned on with a game ball count reset or only the power is turned on, the light-emitting means provided on the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) may be illuminated in blue during the initial operation. This eliminates the need to change the illumination pattern depending on whether the game ball count reset is performed, thus simplifying the control process.

Furthermore, regarding the initial operation of the movable display device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b), a comparison was made between the case where the power is turned on with a game ball count reset and the case where the power is turned on only. However, the case where the power is turned on only can be interpreted as power being turned on with a setting confirmation operation, power being turned on with a setting change operation, or power being turned on with an RWM clear operation. In other words, in any case, the control load can be simplified by standardizing the start timing, end timing, and operation mode of the initial operation.

Figures 135 and 136 illustrate the relationship between the notification patterns for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). Examples of these events (anomalies) include magnet detection errors and illegal radio wave detection errors. Figure 135 assumes two scenarios: when a magnet is detected after the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and when a radio wave is detected after the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on. The time chart should be interpreted as "game ball count clear" and "magnet detection," and "game ball count clear" and "radio wave detection."

First, I will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "magnetic detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable, and (d) is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable. In other words, it is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable, and the error control processing executed within the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable.

(e) is the timing when magnet detection is performed by the error control process executed within the timer interrupt processing of the main control board, and the performance control board 130 receives the magnet detection specification command. Although the magnet detection specification command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clear has a higher priority, so the audio and illumination notifications related to magnet detection are not started. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "Magnet Detected".

(f) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends, a new voice notification for magnet detection, "Magnet detected + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods (e) to (f) are as shown in Figure 136, under Magnet Detection (e) to (f). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 (including the background image)." Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "Magnet Detection" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clearing icon image described above.

Thus, when magnet detection occurs during power-on while a game ball count reset operation is performed, the higher-priority game ball count reset notification is issued, and the "magnet detection" icon image is displayed on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and magnet detection are performed simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the user is unable to recognize which event is occurring.

(h) represents the timing 180 seconds after (e). At this timing, the audible and on-screen notifications for magnet detection end. However, the on-screen and illuminated notifications for clearing the game ball count continue.

The notification modes (f) to (h) are as shown in Figure 136 for magnet detection (f) to (h). The frame lighting device 10 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared, the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared, and displays the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 provides notification of magnet detection, and the audio output device 9 provides notification of magnet detection. In this way, if the notification period for magnet detection is still ongoing even after the audio notification for game ball count clearing has ended, promptly starting the audio notification for magnet detection makes it easier to recognize that a magnet detection with a high probability of fraud has occurred.

(i) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

As described above, even if both the game ball count reset and magnet detection occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, if magnet detection does not occur at (e) but occurs between (f) and (i), the audible and on-screen notifications for magnet detection will be immediately executed. However, since the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count is already executed, the illuminated notification corresponding to magnet detection will not be executed.

Furthermore, although a new audible notification for magnet detection is started in (f), it is not necessary to start the audible notification for magnet detection. Also, although the on-screen notification for magnet detection is scheduled to start from (e), it may also start from (f). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (f), and the illuminated notification for magnet detection may be started.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "radio wave detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls during the frame control board's main processing, and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illumination notification.

(e) is the timing when an unauthorized radio wave is detected during the error control process performed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, which takes place after the frame control board main processing, and the performance control board 130 receives the unauthorized radio wave detection designation command. Although the unauthorized radio wave detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clear has a higher priority. Therefore, the audio and illumination notifications related to the radio wave detection are not initiated. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected." The display of this "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected" icon image continues until the power supply to the game machine 1 is cut off.

(f) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends, a new voice notification for detecting illegal radio waves, "Radio wave detected + siren," starts and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods (e) to (f) are as shown in Figure 136 under Radio Wave Detection (e) to (f). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 (including the background image) of the performance symbols 70a." Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detection" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clearing icon image described above.

Thus, when radio wave detection occurs during power-on while performing a game ball count reset operation, the system displays a notification for the higher-priority game ball count reset while simultaneously displaying an "unauthorized radio wave detection" icon image on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and radio wave detection occur simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the system fails to recognize which event is occurring.

(g) is the timing 30 seconds after (f). At this timing, the audio notification for the detection of unauthorized radio waves ends. On the other hand, the screen notification and the illuminated notification for clearing the number of game balls continue. (i) is the same as what was described in the section on magnet detection.

The notification methods (f) to (g) are as shown in Figure 136 under Radio Wave Detection (f) to (g). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, the first image display device 70 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, and displays the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbols 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 provides a notification of fraudulent radio wave detection, and the audio output device 9 provides a notification of fraudulent radio wave detection. In this way, if the radio wave detection notification period is still ongoing even after the audio notification of the game ball count being cleared has ended, promptly starting the audio notification of radio wave detection makes it easier to recognize that a radio wave detection with a high probability of fraud has occurred.

As described above, even if both the game ball count reset and radio wave detection occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, if radio wave detection does not occur at (e) but occurs between (f) and (i), the audible and on-screen notifications for radio wave detection will be immediately executed. However, since the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count is already being executed, the illuminated notification corresponding to radio wave detection will not be executed.

Furthermore, although an audible notification for radio wave detection is started in (f), it is not necessary to start the audible notification for radio wave detection. Also, although the screen notification for radio wave detection is scheduled to start from (e), it may also start from (f). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (f), and the illuminated notification for radio wave detection may be started.

Figures 137 and 138 illustrate the relationship between the notification methods for clearing the game ball count and various events (anomalies). Examples of these events (anomalies) include in-game machine communication anomaly errors, communication line anomaly errors, and communication no-response errors. Figure 137 assumes two scenarios: when an in-game machine communication anomaly is detected after the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and when a communication line anomaly or communication no-response is detected after the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on. The time chart should be interpreted as follows: "Game ball count clear" and "In-game machine communication anomaly error," and "Game ball count clear" and "Communication line anomaly error, communication no-response error."

First, we will explain "game ball count reset" and "internal game machine communication error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) is the timing when the main processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable. Note that at this time, the main processing on the main control board 110 has sent a "game machine installation information notification," but communication is not possible due to a partially inserted or broken wire connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, resulting in a situation where the receipt result of the "game machine installation information notification" has not been received.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 determines that 3 minutes have passed since startup without receiving the game machine installation information, and the performance control board 130 receives the game machine communication error start command. Although the game machine communication error start command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clear has a higher priority. Therefore, the audio and illumination notifications related to the game machine communication error are not initiated. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H06 Board connection error. Check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new voice notification of a communication error in the game machine, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods (d) to (e) are as shown in Figure 138 for in-game machine communication error (d) to (e). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H06 Board connection error. Check connection" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clearing icon image described above.

Thus, if a communication error within the gaming machine is detected when the power is turned on while performing a game ball count reset operation, the game ball count reset notification (which has higher priority) is issued, while the icon image "H06 Board Connection Error - Check Connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and the communication error occur simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the system fails to recognize which event is occurring.

(f) is the timing when the partial insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is resolved. This terminates the audio and screen notifications for the in-game communication error.

The notification modes (e) to (f) are as shown in Figure 138 for the in-game machine communication error (e) to (f). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, the first image display device 70 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, and displays the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 provides a notification of the in-game machine communication error, and the audio output device 9 provides a notification of the in-game machine communication error. In this way, if the notification period for the in-game machine communication error is still ongoing even after the audio notification for the game ball count being cleared has ended, the audio notification for the in-game machine communication error is promptly started to prompt confirmation of the connection status between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(g) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

As described above, even if both a game ball count reset and a communication error within the game machine occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively communicated through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, if a communication error within the gaming machine is detected between (e) and (g), an audio and on-screen notification of the communication error will be immediately executed. However, since the illumination notification for clearing the game ball count is already being executed, the illumination notification corresponding to the communication error will not be executed.

Furthermore, although a new voice notification for an in-game machine communication error was initiated in (e), it is not necessary to initiate the voice notification for the in-game machine communication error. Also, while the screen notification for the in-game machine communication error was scheduled to begin in (d), it may also be initiated in (e). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (e), and the illuminated notification for the in-game machine communication error may be initiated.

Next, we will explain "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Communication Line Anomaly Error, No Communication Response Error." Since both are connection errors between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, we will explain them under "Communication Line Anomaly Error," and assume that "No Communication Response Error" can be interpreted as a substitute. In this example, there is a problem with the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, such as a partial insertion or a broken wire.

(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed. (b) is the same as (b) in the above-mentioned in-machine communication error. Also, (c) is the timing related to the in-machine communication error, so the explanation is omitted.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 detects that the VL signal (connection signal) to the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, and the performance control board 130 receives a communication line abnormality designation command. Although a communication line abnormality designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clear has a higher priority. Therefore, the audio and illumination notifications related to the communication line abnormality are not initiated. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new voice notification of a communication line malfunction, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods (d) to (e) are as shown in Figure 138 for communication line abnormality errors (d) to (e). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clearing icon image described above.

Thus, if a communication line abnormality is detected when the power is turned on while performing a game ball count reset operation, the system will notify the higher-priority game ball count reset while simultaneously displaying the "H04 Dedicated Unit Connection Error - Check Connection" icon image on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and communication line abnormality operations are performed simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the system fails to recognize which event is occurring.

(f) is the timing when the partial insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is resolved. This terminates the audio and screen notifications for the communication line abnormality error. (g) is the same as (g) in the above-mentioned in-game machine communication abnormality error.

The notification modes (e) to (f) are as shown in Figure 138 for communication line abnormality errors (e) to (f). The frame lighting device 10 provides a game ball count clear notification, the first image display device 70 provides a game ball count clear notification and displays the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 provides a communication line abnormality error notification, and the audio output device 9 also provides a communication line abnormality error notification. In this way, if the communication line abnormality error notification period continues even after the game ball count clear audio notification has ended, the communication line abnormality error audio notification is promptly started to prompt confirmation of the connection status between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As described above, even if both a game ball count reset and a communication line error or unresponsiveness error occur, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, thus improving employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, if a communication line anomaly is detected between (e) and (g), an audio and on-screen notification of the communication line anomaly error will be immediately executed. However, since the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count is already being executed, the illuminated notification corresponding to the communication line anomaly error will not be executed.

Furthermore, although a new voice notification for a communication line error was initiated in (e), it is not necessary to initiate the voice notification for a communication line error. Also, while the screen notification for a communication line error was scheduled to begin in (d), it may also be initiated in (e). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (e), and the illuminated notification for a communication line error may be initiated.

Figures 139 and 140 illustrate the relationship between the notification patterns for clearing the game ball count and various events (abnormalities). Examples of these events (abnormalities) include glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, and ball removal operation. Figure 139 assumes two scenarios: one where the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open, and another where both the game ball count clear operation and the ball removal operation are performed and the power is turned on. The time chart should be interpreted as follows: "Game ball count clear" versus "Glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error," and "Game ball count clear" versus "Ball removal operation in progress."

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "glass frame opening error/inner frame opening error." Since both errors are door opening system errors detected by the frame control board 120, we will explain using the "glass frame opening error" as an example, and assume that "inner frame opening error" can be interpreted as a substitute.

(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt processing in the frame control board 120 begins. When the frame control board timer interrupt processing begins, the error control processing performed within the frame control board timer interrupt processing enables detection of the opening of the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3.

(e) is the timing when, in the error control process (frame control board minor error notification control process), the opening of the glass frame 4 is detected and the performance control board 130 receives a command to specify the glass frame opening. Although the command to specify the glass frame opening is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clear has a higher priority. Therefore, the audio and illuminated notification related to the glass frame opening error is not initiated. On the other hand, for screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying an icon image such as "H64 Glass Frame Opening Error".

(f) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the audio notification for clearing the game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the audio notification for clearing the game ball count ends, a new audio notification for a glass frame opening error, "Door is open + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods (e) to (f) are as shown in Figure 140 for glass frame (inner frame) opening errors (e) to (f). The audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 (including the background image) of the performance symbols 70a." Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H64 Glass Frame Opening Error" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clearing icon image described above.

In this manner, if the game ball count reset operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open, the game ball count reset notification (which has higher priority) is displayed, while the icon image for "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and the glass frame open error occur simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the user is unaware of which event is occurring.

(g) is the timing 37 seconds after (e). At this timing, the audio notification for the glass frame release error ends. However, the on-screen notification continues. Also, the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification for the game ball count clearing continue.

The notification methods (f) to (g) are as shown in Figure 140 for glass frame (inner frame) opening errors (f) to (g). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, the first image display device 70 provides a notification of the game ball count being cleared, and displays the initial outcome (123) of the performance symbol 70a and the background image, the third image display device 72 provides a notification of the glass frame opening error, and the audio output device 9 also provides a notification of the glass frame opening error. In this way, if the notification period for the glass frame opening error is still ongoing even after the audio notification for the game ball count being cleared has ended, the audio notification for the glass frame opening error is promptly started to alert the player to the opening of the glass frame 4, preventing the game from continuing with the glass frame 4 open.

(h) represents the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, this occurs when an employee closes the glass frame 4. Once the glass frame 4 is closed, the glass frame open error screen notification ends. This prevents confusion for employees caused by the "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" icon image remaining visible even after the glass frame 4 has been closed.

(j) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

As described above, even if both a game ball count reset and a glass frame opening error occur, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, which also leads to improved employee work efficiency.
Furthermore, during the period from (b) to (e), that is, when the notification of a reset of the number of game balls is issued, it is permitted to launch game balls into the game area. However, during the period from (e) to (h), that is, when the notification of a reset of the number of game balls and the notification of a glass frame or inner frame opening error are issued, it is restricted from launching game balls into the game area. This prevents game balls from being launched and flying out of the game machine, which would make it impossible to secure the game balls necessary for playing.

Furthermore, if a glass frame release error is detected between (f) and (j), the audible and on-screen notification for the glass frame release error will be immediately executed. However, since the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count is already being executed, the illuminated notification corresponding to the glass frame release error will not be executed.

Furthermore, although an audio notification for a glass frame opening error was started in (f), it is not necessary to start the audio notification for the glass frame opening error. Also, although the screen notification for the glass frame opening error was set to start from (e), it may also start from (f). Furthermore, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (f), and the illuminated notification for the glass frame opening error may be started.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "ball removal in progress."
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, the game ball count reset operation and the ball removal operation are performed. (b) is the same as in the case of the glass frame opening error described above.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board 120 sets the ball removal operation flag and the performance control board 130 receives the ball removal operation specification command. As described above, in the frame control board's main processing, the game ball count clearing is executed before the ball removal processing, resulting in the timing chart in the order of (b) and (c) above. In (c), although the ball removal operation specification command has been received, the game ball count clearing notification is executed, and as shown in Figure 129, the game ball count clearing has a higher priority, so the audio and illumination notifications related to the ball removal operation do not start. On the other hand, regarding screen notifications, the first image display device 70 starts displaying "Ball Removal Mode in Progress".

(f) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification for clearing the game ball count ends, a new voice notification for ball removal mode, "Ball removal mode is active" (once) is output at the start of (f). At the timing of the end of ball removal mode (i), the voice notification for ball removal mode, "Ball removal mode is over" (once) is output.

The notification methods in (c) to (f) are as shown in (c) to (f) of Figure 140 during the ball removal operation. The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 displays the game ball count cleared notification, the "combination of the initial outcome 123 and the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image), and the message "In ball removal mode" superimposed on the "combination of the initial outcome 123 and the performance symbols 70a".

Furthermore, the "Ball Removal Mode" display may be superimposed so that a portion of the "initial outcome 123 combination of performance symbols 70a" on the back becomes invisible, or it may be superimposed so that a portion of the "initial outcome 123 combination of performance symbols 70a" remains visible (by allowing the back side to show through).

(i) is the timing 60 seconds after (c). At this timing, as described above, the voice notification "Ball removal mode has ended" (once) is output during ball removal mode. Also, the "Ball removal mode in progress" display ends. (j) is the same as (j) for the glass frame release error.

The notification methods (f) to (i) are as shown in Figure 140 during the ball removal operation (f) to (i). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared, while the first image display device 70 displays the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared, the "combination of the initial outcome 123 symbols 70a" (including the background image), and the "ball removal mode in progress" display superimposed on the "combination of the initial outcome 123 symbols 70a." In this way, if the notification period for the ball removal operation continues even after the audio notification for the cleared number of game balls has finished, the audio notification for the ball removal mode can be promptly started to indicate that the ball removal mode is in progress, allowing the ball removal mode to proceed efficiently.

As described above, even if both the game ball count reset and the ball removal operation occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Note that while the audio notification for ball removal mode is started in (f), it is not necessary to start the audio notification for ball removal mode. Also, while the screen notification for ball removal mode is scheduled to start from (c), it may also start from (f). Furthermore, the illuminated notification for clearing the number of game balls may be terminated in (f), and the illuminated notification for ball removal mode may be started.

Figure 141 shows the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball removal operation. The scenario assumes that the power switch 164 is turned ON while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open, accompanied by the ball removal operation. Note that the following explanation uses the example of glass frame 4 being opened and closed, but glass frame 4 can be replaced with inner frame 3.

Figure 141(a) shows the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. This is accompanied by a ball removal operation. Figure 141(b) shows the timing when the ball removal operation process of the frame control board timer interrupt processing is executed. The audio notification outputs the message "Ball removal mode in progress" once over a period of 3 seconds, and the screen notification begins displaying "Ball removal mode in progress." This display continues until (f). Note that there is no defined illumination notification during the ball removal operation (see Figure 130), so it is not executed.

Furthermore, the game ball count indicator 135 (segment corresponding to the last digit) begins displaying "-" (bar symbol), and the frame control indicator 125 (segment corresponding to the last digit) also begins displaying "-" (bar symbol). This display of "-" (bar symbol) indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt processing (the first after power-on) is executed, and (d) is the timing when the glass frame release command is set in the error control processing executed within the frame control board timer interrupt processing, and the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame release command.

When the performance control board 130 receives a command to open the glass frame, it repeatedly outputs the voice message "The door is open" via voice notification, displays the icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" on the third image display device 72 via screen notification, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illumination notification.

Furthermore, since the notification priority for a glass frame opening error is higher than that for a ball removal operation (see Figure 130), in principle, the voice output "Ball removal mode in progress" from (b) would be interrupted and the voice output "Door is open" would begin. However, since the voice output "Ball removal mode in progress" from (b) is output only once for 3 seconds, interrupting it midway would make it difficult to understand what the voice notification is for. Therefore, in this example, exceptionally, even if a notification event with a higher priority than the currently running notification event occurs during the execution of the voice notification, the currently running voice notification "Ball removal mode in progress" is output without interruption (completed). This allows for notifications that are easy for the employee performing the ball removal operation to understand.

On the other hand, following the principle of priority, it is acceptable to interrupt the "Ball removal mode" audio output midway and start the "Door is open" audio output.

Furthermore, in (d), the display on the frame control indicator 125 switches from "-" (bar symbol) to "H64" (segment corresponding to the last 3 to last 1 digits). This allows employees performing ball removal work while looking at the back of the gaming machine to be notified that a glass frame release error has occurred.

On the other hand, the game ball count display 135 maintains the "-" (bar symbol) display instead of switching to the "H64" display (segment corresponding to the last three digits to the last digit). The game ball count display 135 is located in a position visible from the front of the game machine, and since the first image display device 70 also displays "Ball Removal Mode" on the front of the game machine, it is possible to inform employees that a glass frame opening error has occurred without switching the display of the game ball count display 135 to "H64". This has the advantage of reducing the processing load on the display control board 120 (eliminating the effort of switching to H64).

Furthermore, in (d), the display on the game ball count indicator 135 may be switched to "H64". This prevents, for example, the confusion caused to employees by having different information displayed on the frame control indicator 125 and the game ball count indicator 135.

(e) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from the open state to the closed state. For example, it is assumed that the glass frame 4 is closed by an employee. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the audio notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification for the glass frame open error end. Note that at timing (e), the ball removal operation is still in progress.

In (e), the game ball count indicator 135 displays "-" (bar symbol), and the frame control indicator 125 switches from displaying "H64" to "-" (bar symbol). This ensures that the notification of the ball removal operation is issued immediately after the notification of the glass frame opening error ends, making the notification easier for employees to understand.

(f) is the timing 60 seconds after (b). The ball removal operation ends at this timing. The audio notification will output "Ball removal mode ended" once over 5 seconds, and the screen notification will stop displaying "Ball removal mode in progress".

Furthermore, in (f), the game ball count indicator 135 stops displaying "-" (bar symbol) and turns off completely, and the frame control indicator 125 also stops displaying "-" (bar symbol) and turns off completely. This makes it easier to recognize the completion of the ball removal operation by visually confirming that the frame control indicator 125 has turned off completely (in conjunction with the audio notification output in (f)) when the player is intently watching the back of the game machine while removing balls.

Then, when the voice output "Ball removal mode is finished" ends, the ball removal operation ends with (g).
Note that while the light-up indicator for the bulb removal operation is not provided, it may be done in a predetermined light-up pattern. Also, although the "Ball Removal Mode" display is kept on from (d) to (e), it may be hidden from (d) to (e).

Furthermore, while the game ball count indicator 135 is designed to continuously display "-" (bar symbol) between (b) and (f), and the frame control indicator 125 is designed to continuously display "-" (bar symbol) between (b) and (d), and between (e) and (f), it is not limited to this. Alternatively, "-" (bar symbol) may be displayed for a few seconds from the start of the ball removal mode, and then not displayed thereafter.

Figures 142 to 144 illustrate the relationship between clearing the game ball count and the notification patterns for various events (abnormalities, etc.). As an example of an event (abnormality), the activation of the acquisition limit device is used for explanation. Figure 142 assumes the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device has been activated. That is, while an RWM clear operation is necessary to stop the acquisition limit device from operating, the power is turned on along with the game ball count clear operation. Figure 143 assumes the case where an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected and the case where it is not detected after the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Figure 142(a) shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) indicates the start of the main control board 110's operation, and represents the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the "Acquisition Limit Activated" command transmitted by the main processing of the main control board. Although the performance control board 130 receives the "Acquisition Limit Activated" command, it is executing a game ball count clear notification, and as shown in Figure 129, clearing the game ball count has a higher priority. Therefore, the audio and illuminated notifications related to the activation of the acquisition limit device are not initiated. On the other hand, regarding screen notifications, the first image display device 70 starts displaying a message such as "Acquisition Limit Device Activated. Please clear RWM."

In the notification modes (b) to (c), as shown in Figure 144 (game ball count clear & acquisition limit device (b) to (c)), the voice output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide game ball count clear notifications, while the first image display device 70 provides game ball count clear notifications. It is preferable that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time be a color that does not overlap with the display color used for the game ball count clear icon image (a different color). This prevents the game ball count clear notification icon image from becoming difficult to see.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new audio notification for the acquisition limit device, "Acquisition limit device activated," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 144, specifically in the game ball count clearing and acquisition limit device (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide game ball count clearing notifications, while the first image display device 70 provides both game ball count clearing notifications and acquisition limit device activation notifications. Specifically, the message "Acquisition limit device is active. Please clear RWM" is displayed in the center of the display area, and the icon image "H67 Game ball count clear" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. It is preferable that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time is a color that does not overlap (a different color) with the display color used for the game ball count clearing icon image and the display color (text color) used for the acquisition limit device activation notification. This prevents the game ball count clearing icon image and the acquisition limit device activation notification from becoming difficult to see.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds after (c). At this timing, the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification continues. Although the audio notification from the acquisition limit device is terminated after a predetermined time, it may also be terminated by cutting off the power supply.

The notification modes (d) to (e) are as shown in Figure 144, specifically in the game ball count clearing and acquisition limit device (d) to (e). The frame lighting device 10 provides a notification of game ball count clearing, the audio output device 9 provides a notification of acquisition limit device operation, and the first image display device 70 provides both game ball count clearing and acquisition limit device operation notifications. The display modes are the same as those described in (c) to (d) above.

Thus, although the notification for clearing the game ball count has a higher priority, the message "Acquisition limit device activated. Please clear RWM" is displayed in a larger font size than the icon image for clearing the game ball count and is centered within the display area, making it easily noticeable to employees. This ensures that even if the game ball count clear notification takes priority and the audible and illuminated notifications for the acquisition limit device cannot be executed, employees will still be aware that the acquisition limit device is activated and will understand the necessary steps to stop it. Furthermore, even if the game ball count clear and acquisition limit device activation notifications are executed simultaneously, both notifications are distinguishable, preventing situations where employees fail to recognize which event is occurring.

Furthermore, if the power switch sw164 is turned ON (power restored) without operating the RWM clear switch 111a while the acquisition limit device is active, the message "Acquisition limit device is active. Please clear the RWM." will be displayed. However, the initial operation of the movable display device may be performed in the same way as when power is restored while the acquisition limit device is not active. This eliminates the need to change the processing related to the initial operation of the movable display device depending on whether the acquisition limit device is active or not, thus simplifying the control process.

Furthermore, if the power switch sw164 is turned ON (power is restored) without operating the RWM clear switch 111a while the acquisition limit device is operating, the message "Acquisition limit device operating. Please clear RWM" will be displayed. However, an audio notification (output of the input BGM) related to power restoration may also be provided. This eliminates the need to change the audio notification process for power restoration depending on whether the acquisition limit device is operating or not, thus simplifying the control process.

(h) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

Figure 143(a) shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. If there is no RWM abnormality, then (b) the notification of the acquisition limit device operation begins. Specifically, the audio notification repeatedly outputs "Acquisition limit device operating," the screen notification displays "Acquisition limit device operating. Please clear the RWM," and the illuminated notification shows "Frame lighting device 10 flashing red." As shown in Figure 144 (Acquisition limit device operating, no RWM abnormality), the audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, and first image display device 70 will all provide notification of the acquisition limit device operation. In this way, if no RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned ON after the acquisition limit device has operated, the acquisition limit device operation notification will be executed, making it easier to understand the necessary operation to stop the acquisition limit device.

On the other hand, if an RWM anomaly (for example, a checksum anomaly in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device has been activated, the RWM anomaly notification will start instead of the acquisition limit device activation notification in (b). Specifically, the audio notification will repeatedly output "Please change the settings + siren," the screen notification will display "Error: Please change the settings," and the illuminated notification will show "The frame lighting device 10 will flash red." Note that (c) is the timing when the power supply is cut off, and the RWM anomaly notification will continue until the power supply is cut off. In other words, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be executed as long as the RWM anomaly notification is being executed.

For example, if the power is turned OFF in (c) and then ON without any setting change operations, the process that starts from (b) will be an RWM abnormality notification. If the power is turned OFF in (c) and then ON with setting change operations, the RWM clear process is also executed after the setting change process (main RAM 110c is initialized). Since the initialization of the main RAM 110c stops the operation of the acquisition limit device, the acquisition limit device operation notification will not be executed in this case either. In other words, if an RWM abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device has been activated, the acquisition limit device operation notification will not be executed, whether the power is turned ON with or without setting change operations. This encourages the main RAM 110c to be in an appropriate state, while eliminating the need for initialization to stop the acquisition limit device when the power is turned ON with setting change operations. Therefore, by not issuing an acquisition limit device operation notification, work efficiency can be improved.

As shown in Figure 144, where the acquisition limit device is operating and an RWM abnormality is detected, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, and the first image display device 70 will all provide RWM abnormality notification. The first image display device 70 displays the word "Error" in red letters on a black background, with the message "Please change settings" displayed in white letters below it. This prompts the user to quickly change settings and prevents gameplay from continuing while an RWM abnormality is present.

Furthermore, if an RWM (Real-Time Memory) malfunction occurs, prioritizing the activation notification of the acquisition limit device could lead to employees being prompted to perform an RWM clear operation, potentially preventing the RWM malfunction from being resolved. However, prioritizing the RWM malfunction notification eliminates this concern.

Figures 145 and 146 illustrate the relationship between the notification patterns for clearing the game ball count and various events (abnormalities, etc.). As examples of various events (abnormalities), an error in the number of balls entered and an error in the number of balls launched are given and explained. Figure 145 assumes the case where an abnormality in the number of balls entered is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned ON, and the case where an abnormality in the number of balls launched is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned ON. The time chart should be interpreted as "Game ball count clear" and "Abnormal number of balls entered error," and "Game ball count clear" and "Abnormal number of balls launched error."

Furthermore, as indicated by the frame control board's severe error notification control process, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is determined when the difference between the notified number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is 100 or more. Similarly, an abnormality in the number of balls launched is determined when the difference between the number of balls launched and the total number of balls returned is 100 or more. Therefore, it is unlikely that these abnormalities would occur in the period immediately following a power supply. Thus, Figures 145 and 146 assume a situation where the power supply is interrupted while an abnormality in the number of winning balls or the number of balls launched occurs, and the power is turned on without these abnormalities being resolved.

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "winning ball count abnormal error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the game ball count is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed.

(b) is the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives the command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs the message "Number of game balls cleared" via voice notification, displays "H67 Game ball count cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red via illuminated notification.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, and the performance control board 130 receives the command to specify the abnormal number of winning balls. Although the performance control board 130 has received the command to specify the abnormal number of winning balls, it is executing a notification to clear the number of game balls, and as shown in Figure 129, the priority order for clearing the number of game balls is higher, so the audio notification and illuminated notification related to the abnormal number of winning balls error are not started. On the other hand, for screen notification, the third image display device 72 starts displaying "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls".

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the audio notification of the cleared game ball count ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal game ball count error, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 146 for the abnormal number of winning balls error (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays the icon image for "H68 Abnormal Number of Winning Balls".

(e) is the moment when the player operates the counting button 20 and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is counted, or when the launch handle 15 is grasped and a game ball is launched. Once either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count end 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player sits down, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game due to the on-screen notification and illuminated notification of the cleared game ball count continuing indefinitely.

The notification methods (d) to (e) are as shown in Figure 146 for the abnormal number of winning balls error (d) to (e). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the abnormal number of winning balls error, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays the icon image for "H68 Abnormal Number of Winning Balls" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the game ball count clear icon image described above.

In this manner, when a game ball count reset operation is performed and the power is turned on, if an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, the game ball count reset notification (which has higher priority) is issued, while the icon image "H68 Abnormal Number of Winning Balls" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and the abnormal number of winning balls error are executed simultaneously, both notifications can be distinguished, preventing situations where the system fails to recognize which event is occurring.

As described above, even if both a game ball count reset and a winning ball count error occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, although an audio notification for an abnormal number of winning balls error was started in (d), it is not necessary to start the audio notification for an abnormal number of winning balls error. Also, although the screen notification for an abnormal number of winning balls error was set to start from (c), it may also be started from (d). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification for an abnormal number of winning balls error may be started.

Next, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "ball launch count abnormal error".
(a) is the timing when the power switch sw164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clearing operation is performed. (b) is the same as (b) for an abnormal number of winning balls error.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of launched balls is detected, and the performance control board 130 receives the command to specify the abnormality in the number of launched balls. Although the performance control board 130 has received the command to specify the abnormality in the number of launched balls, it is executing a notification to clear the number of game balls, and as shown in Figure 129, the priority order for clearing the number of game balls is higher, so the audio notification and the illuminated notification related to the abnormality in the number of launched balls error are not started. On the other hand, for screen notifications, the third image display device 72 starts displaying "H69 Abnormality in the number of launched balls".

(d) is the timing 5 seconds after (b). At this timing, the voice notification for clearing the number of game balls ends. Meanwhile, the screen notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, once the voice notification for clearing the number of game balls ends, a new voice notification for an abnormal number of launched balls error, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins and is repeatedly output.

The notification methods in (c) to (d) are as shown in Figure 146 for the abnormal number of launched balls error (c) to (d). The audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of the game ball count being cleared, while the first image display device 70 provides notification of the game ball count being cleared and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays the icon image for "H69 Abnormal Number of Launched Balls".

(e) is the same as (e) for the abnormal number of winning balls error.
In the notification methods (d) to (e), as shown in Figure 146 for abnormal number of launched balls error (d) to (e), the sound output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 provide notification of abnormal number of launched balls error, and the first image display device 70 provides notification of cleared game balls and displays the "combination of the initial outcome 123 of the performance symbols 70a" (including the background image). In addition, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H69 Abnormal number of launched balls" (see Figure 131 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for cleared game balls described above.

Thus, when a game ball count reset operation is performed and the power is turned on, if an abnormality in the number of launched balls is detected, the game ball count reset notification (which has higher priority) is issued, while the icon image "H69 Abnormal Number of Launched Balls" is displayed on the third image display device 72. This ensures that even if the game ball count reset and the abnormal number of launched balls error are executed simultaneously, both notifications can be identified, preventing situations where the system fails to recognize which event is occurring.

As described above, even if both a game ball count reset and a ball launch count error occur simultaneously, both events can be effectively notified through voice, screen, and illuminated notifications, leading to improved employee work efficiency.

Furthermore, although an audio notification for an abnormal ball count error was started in (d), it is not necessary to start the audio notification for the abnormal ball count error. Also, although the screen notification for the abnormal ball count error was set to start from (c), it may also be started from (d). Additionally, the illuminated notification for clearing the game ball count may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification for the abnormal ball count error may be started.

Figure 147 shows the information output and notification methods for various events. As examples of each event (abnormality), the game ball count exceeding limit and the activation of the acquisition limit device will be explained.

(a) represents the moment when, as a result of the player's gameplay, the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "40,000" (during a jackpot). Note that, although it is stated here that the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "40,000" as a result of the gameplay, since this is the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135, this "40,000" may include the game value obtained through the lending of game balls.

(a) In this case, the frame control board 120 transmits 1-byte information indicating an over-count of game balls as a game machine error state to the U board 171, and this information is ultimately transmitted to the game machine information center. The frame control display 125 also displays the error code "H23," indicating an over-count of game balls. This allows the game machine to confirm the over-count from the back of the machine. The display of this error code will turn off after a predetermined period of time.

(a) is an example where the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls." Therefore, the audio output device 9 outputs background music during the jackpot, the first image display device 70 displays the jackpot animation, and the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 illuminate during the jackpot. Even if the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "40,000 balls" during a jackpot, these animations do not notify the player of exceeding the game ball count. In other words, from the player's perspective, they are unaware that they have exceeded the game ball count, allowing them to enjoy the jackpot comfortably. On the other hand, as mentioned above, a 1-byte information indicating a game ball count exceeding the game ball count is transmitted as a game machine error state, allowing administrators (game shops, game machine information centers) to obtain the necessary information.

Furthermore, at least one of the following devices may be used to notify the player of exceeding the game ball count: the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 76. Also, as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls," but this is not limited to this example. Winning during a variation display in the low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state, or high probability time-saving game state, or winning during a customer waiting demo performance, are also acceptable.

Furthermore, while it was stated that the "40,000 units" may include the game value obtained through the lending of game balls, in extreme cases, even if all "40,000 units" were game value obtained through lending, it would still be considered an over-count of game balls.

(b) represents the timing when the maximum increase reaches "95,000" (during a jackpot). Note that this "95,000" does not include the game value obtained through the lending of game balls. When the maximum increase reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device activates. The activation timing of the acquisition limit device for each situation (during a jackpot, during variable display, during customer waiting demo) at the time "95,000" is reached is as described above (see the explanation in step S28 of the main processing on the main control board).

When the winning limit device is activated, the audio notification repeatedly outputs the message "Winning limit device activated" from the audio output device 9 for 10 seconds. The screen notification displays "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today" on the first image display device 70 (displayed until power is cut off). The illuminated notification causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash white (flashing white until power is cut off). However, the frame control display 125 does not provide any notification corresponding to the winning limit device activation and remains blank.

To elaborate on the display mode of the first image display device 70, the message "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today" is displayed at the top of the display area, and below that, a message prompting the operation of the counting button 20, such as "Please press the counting button to count," is displayed. This allows the game value displayed on the game ball count display device 135 to be recorded on the inserted member card or visitor card, reducing the chances of players losing money by stopping the game without operating the counting button 20.

Furthermore, below the message "Press the counting button to count," there are two warning images: "Caution: Beware of addiction!" and "Caution: Don't forget your card!". "Caution: Beware of addiction!" is a warning to prevent excessive gambling, while "Caution: Don't forget your card!" is a warning to prevent forgetting inserted membership or visitor cards. The "Caution: Beware of addiction!" image can help calm players who have gained a lot of gambling value and are feeling overconfident. The "Caution: Don't forget your card!" image reduces the chances of players forgetting their cards and incurring losses. This helps prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the message "Press the counting button to count" may remain displayed until the counting button 20 is operated (and then disappear once the counting button 20 is operated). This makes it easier to notice if the counting button 20 has not been operated.
Furthermore, if the counting button 20 is operated and then becomes inactive, and there are still game balls to be counted, the message "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed again. This makes it easier for the player to notice that there are game balls to be counted.
Alternatively, the message "Please press the counting button to count" may be kept displayed until all counting is complete (even if the counting button 20 is operated).

Furthermore, the background color of the first image display device 70 may be, for example, black with various text images displayed in white, or white with various text images in black (the background color and text color should be different colors). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the audio notification ends after 10 seconds, the screen notification is displayed in a relatively small size, and the illuminated notification only shows the frame lighting device 10 flashing white. Since the amount of visual effect is suppressed, it is preferable to use a combination of white and black for both the background color and text color. This suppressed visual effect prevents players who are likely to have acquired a large amount of game value from standing out too much. It also prevents unnecessarily stimulating the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the display order of the various text images can be set to display them all at the same time, or they can be displayed at different times. For example, you could first display "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today" and "Please press the counting button to count," and then display "Caution: Don't get addicted!" and "Don't forget your card!". Setting a display order like this makes each piece of information more easily noticed by the player, making it more effective.

Alternatively, the system could initially display "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is closed for today" and "Please press the counting button to count." Once counting button 20 is pressed, the message "Please press the counting button to count" could be hidden, and "Caution: Don't get addicted!" and "Don't forget your card!" could be displayed instead. This allows for displays tailored to the player's actions, making each piece of information more easily visible and thus more effective.

In addition, (a) may display a message such as "Press the counting button to count," or it may display a warning image such as "Beware of addiction!" and another warning image such as "Beware of forgetting your cards!"
Furthermore, in (b), the message "Press the counting button to count," the warning image "Beware of addiction!", and the warning image "Beware of forgetting your card!" may be omitted. For example, it is conceivable that the players may change just before reaching (b). In such a case, the display of warning images, etc., may be annoying to a player who started playing just before reaching (b). Therefore, a detection means for detecting player changes may be provided, and if a player change is detected, the display of warning images, etc., may be omitted.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the activation notification for the winning limit device displays a message such as "Do not turn off the power" for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) after the notification begins (for example, from timing (b) in Figure 147). After the predetermined time has elapsed, the message "Do not turn off the power" ends and a message "Turn off the power" is displayed. This allows players and employees to be informed that the winning limit device has activated before the predetermined time has elapsed, enabling them to perform necessary operations such as counting. After the predetermined time has elapsed, employees can be prompted to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1, thus providing appropriate notification depending on the situation. The predetermined time is the expected time until the player finishes counting and leaves their seat. Additionally, the messages "Do not turn off the power" and "Turn off the power" may be accompanied by audio. In this case, the audio may be output repeatedly.

Figure 148 shows the information output and notification methods for various events. As examples of each event (abnormality), similar to Figure 147, we will explain the game ball count overrun and the activation of the acquisition limit device. Figure 148 illustrates an exceptional case where the game ball count overrun and the acquisition limit device activation occur at the same time.

(a) The gaming machine 1 is in a playable state (a so-called "empty machine"), and the maximum increase in the number of spins on the gaming machine 1 is "55,000". Then, in (b), a player sits down to play the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, it is assumed that the player immediately wins a jackpot.

Subsequently, in (c), a series of jackpots occur due to the high-probability time-saving game state (probability variation), and in (d), the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 becomes "40,000 balls" (the player has acquired 40,000 balls). In such a case, the game ball count is exceeded, and the maximum increase also reaches "95,000," so the acquisition limit device is activated. Therefore, the frame control board 120 of the game machine 1 transmits 1-byte information indicating a game ball count exceeding as a game machine error state to the U board 171, and 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" is also transmitted. Finally, this information is transmitted to the game machine information center.

Furthermore, while the order in which the 1-byte information indicating an over-count of game balls as a game machine error state and the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1" can be transmitted is not important, it is rare for the over-count of game balls and the activation of the acquisition limit device to occur simultaneously. Generally, the over-count of game balls occurs first, and then the acquisition limit device is activated depending on the subsequent circumstances. Therefore, it is preferable to follow this flow and transmit the 1-byte information indicating an over-count of game balls as a game machine error state first, followed by the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1". This prevents confusion at the game machine information center, for example, from receiving the 1-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1" first.

Note that Figure 148 uses numbers such as "55,000," "40,000," and "95,000" for ease of explanation. However, in actual gameplay, due to differences in the number of prize balls awarded for each winning slot, it is possible that the number of game balls may slightly exceed the above figures, resulting in both the ball count exceeding the limit and the activation of the winning limit device occurring at the same time. Therefore, a small margin of error (a slight exceedance of the above figures) is included in the example in Figure 148.

Figure 149 shows the visual effects when various events occur, and Figure 150 shows the relationship between the value of the increase counter and the pre-announcement type visual effects. As examples of each event (anomaly), similar to Figures 147 and 148, we will explain the game ball count overrun and the activation of the acquisition limit device, and in particular, the relationship with the pre-announcement type visual effects. Note that explanations of parts common to Figures 147 and 148 will be omitted.

First, as described above, the gaming machine 1 is designed to have two scenarios: one immediately before exceeding the "number of game balls" limit, and another immediately before the "maximum payout limit device" activates. The scenario immediately before exceeding the "number of game balls" limit corresponds to the state where the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "39,000," while the scenario immediately before the "maximum payout limit device" activates corresponds to the state where the maximum increase reaches "94,000."

More specifically, if the "number of game balls exceeded" condition occurs, it is conceivable that the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 will be "39,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) will be executed, meaning that the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 will reach "40,000" after the second jackpot game is executed, or that the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 will be "39,990" and a high-probability time-saving game state (or low-probability time-saving game state or low-probability non-time-saving game state) will be initiated (during the variation display or customer waiting demo performance).

Similarly, in the case of a "maximum payout limit device," it is conceivable that the maximum increase value is "94,000" when the second jackpot game (10 rounds) is executed, meaning that the maximum increase value reaches "95,000" when the second jackpot game is executed, or that the maximum increase value is "94,990" when a high-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state, low-probability non-time-saving game state) is started, where game balls are more likely to enter each prize slot (during variation display, during customer waiting demo performance). In the following explanation, we will use the jackpot, where the maximum increase value is most likely to reach the above values, as an example.

(a) shows the moment when a jackpot is won in a high-probability time-saving game state, and during the jackpot, a right-shooting image is displayed prompting the player to shoot the game balls towards the right-side game area. During the jackpot, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000" due to a win in the large prize pocket 50, etc. In other words, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000" when the second jackpot game is executed. Although not specifically shown in the diagram, it is assumed that a random value for jackpot determination, which determines a jackpot, is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve storage area of the main RAM 110c. Note that the high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability time-saving game state. Also, the high-probability time-saving game state may be read as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreting it as a low-probability, non-short-time game state), it is assumed that the random value used for determining a jackpot, which will be determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the first special symbol judgment information reserve storage area of the main RAM 110c.

If the number of game balls exceeds the limit, the consecutive win animation during a jackpot can be executed. Specifically, since the second special symbol judgment information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c stores a random value for jackpot determination that will result in a jackpot, a lottery for executing the consecutive win animation is performed at a predetermined probability, and if it is determined that the animation should be executed, the consecutive win animation is performed. More precisely, as shown in (b), the movable animation device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) is operated in front of the first image display device 70, so that the variable display corresponding to the reserve memory, which is executed after the jackpot game ends, notifies that it is a jackpot before the variable display is executed. Then, in (c), the jackpot game ends, and the execution of the variable display corresponding to the reserve memory notifies that it is a jackpot.

This eliminates the need to restrict the execution of pre-announcement-type animations simply because the game is about to exceed its "number of balls" limit, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game without restricting the freedom of animation.

While the explanation used the execution of the consecutive win animation during a jackpot as an example, the execution of pre-announcement animations when the game is not in a jackpot state is also permissible. For example, when the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 is "39990", the icon change animation may be executed, as may the consecutive予告 animation or lamp change animation. On the other hand, it may be possible to restrict the execution of pre-announcement animations in the situation immediately before the "game ball count exceeds" state.

(d) represents the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving game state, and the maximum increase value is "94,000," triggering the start of the second jackpot game (10 rounds). In other words, the execution of the second jackpot game brings the maximum increase value to "95,000." Although not specifically illustrated, it is assumed that the second special symbol judgment information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c stores a random value for jackpot determination that will result in a jackpot. Note that the high-probability time-saving game state may be interpreted as the low-probability time-saving game state. Also, the high-probability time-saving game state may be interpreted as the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreted as the low-probability non-time-saving game state), it is assumed that the first special symbol judgment information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c stores a random value for jackpot determination that will result in a jackpot.

When the "acquisition limit device is activated," the execution of the reserved consecutive win animation during a jackpot is restricted. That is, although the random value for jackpot determination that determines a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserved storage area of the main RAM 110c, the lottery for execution of the reserved consecutive win animation is not performed, and consequently, the reserved consecutive win animation is not executed. Specifically, as shown between (d) and (e), the movable animation device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) does not operate, and the jackpot game ends. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the acquisition limit device is activated at (f), and the notification described in Figure 147 is executed. Furthermore, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, and the game cannot be continued any further.

In situations where it is impossible to play after (f), if the consecutive win animation is executed simply because a random value for jackpot determination is stored in the reserve memory, the player will be disappointed because they will not be able to play despite having won a jackpot. To address this issue, restricting the execution of the consecutive win animation immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated prevents this disappointment for the player.

While the explanation used the execution of the consecutive win animation during a jackpot as an example, the execution of pre-announcement animations when not playing a jackpot may also be restricted. For example, the icon change animation may be restricted when the maximum increase value is "94990," and the consecutive予告 animation and lamp change animation may also be restricted. On the other hand, the execution of pre-announcement animations may be permitted even in the situation immediately before the "acquisition limit device is activated." This eliminates the need to determine whether the situation is immediately before the "acquisition limit device is activated," thus reducing the control load.

The "restrictions" mentioned above, regarding the restriction on the execution of the consecutive win animation during a big win, include the following:
For example, the continuous win animation during a big win is not executed at all (it is not performed).
For example, the consecutive win animation during a big win becomes less likely to occur (it may still occur at a low probability),
For example, if there are multiple types of consecutive win animations during a jackpot, animation A may not be executed, but animation B may remain executable.
For example, when a jackpot is achieved through the operation of the movable display device 77 and the change of the hold icon, the movable display device 77 may not be operated, but the change of the hold icon may be allowed.

Similarly, the "restrictions" in the context of limiting the execution of pre-announcement-type effects when it is not a jackpot game include the following:
For example, if the icon change animation is,
For example, the icon change animation is not performed at all (it is not executed).
For example, the icon change animation may be less likely to occur (it may still occur with a low probability),
For example, certain icons (red icon, rainbow icon) in an icon change animation may not be displayed (changed), while other designated icons (blue icon, green icon) may be displayed (changed).
The same applies to restrictions on consecutive予告演出 (pre-announcement effects) and lamp change effects. Furthermore, in the case of pre-announcement effects (for example, icon change effects, consecutive予告演出, lamp change effects), a "restriction" may be defined as allowing the icon change effect to not be performed at all, while allowing the consecutive予告演出 and lamp change effects to be performed.

Figure 150 is a time chart showing the relationship between the increase counter value and pre-announcement-type effects, and in particular, it explains the relationship between the increase counter value and the effect customization setting (icon change high-excitement). Note that in the figure, the effect customization setting is always "enabled," and the icon change high-excitement setting indicates whether it has been set to "ON" or "OFF" by the player. Furthermore, the game state is assumed to be a high-probability time-saving game state. The interpretation of the restrictions is the same as described in Figure 149.

(a) indicates a situation where the increment counter value is less than "93000". This means that the pre-announcement type effect is still within the execution period. Furthermore, it indicates that the player has turned "Icon Change Super Hot" to "ON" in the effect customization settings.

(b) indicates that a game ball has entered the second starting slot 47 (starting entry), and that the pre-determination process (for example, the second pre-determination process) has determined that it is a jackpot. At this time, a red icon (shown as a black circle in the figure) is displayed in the area corresponding to Reserve 2 of the second Reserve Icon Display Area 70D (the second area from the left in the second Reserve Icon Display Area 70D). In other words, the pre-determination process due to the starting entry has determined it is a jackpot, and since the icon change "Super Hot" setting is "ON," a red icon (shown as a black circle in the figure) is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the starting entry has a high probability of being a jackpot.

Subsequently, the high-probability time-saving game state continued, and at timing (c), the increase counter value reached "93000". This indicates that the pre-announcement type effects are unavailable during this period. At this timing, "Icon Change Super Hot" remains "ON". Furthermore, timing (d) indicates that "Icon Change Super Hot" was turned OFF, and timing (e) indicates that "Icon Change Super Hot" was turned "ON". Even though the increase counter value reached "93000" and the pre-announcement type effects became unavailable, the "ON" and "OFF" settings in the effects customization settings are still possible.

Then, the "Icon Change Super Hot" setting remains "ON" until timing (f). At (f), a game ball is entered into the second starting slot 47 (start entry), and the pre-determination process (for example, the second pre-determination process) determines that it is a jackpot. At this time, the area corresponding to Reserve 2 in the second Reserve Icon Display Area 70D (the second area from the left in the second Reserve Icon Display Area 70D) shows a normal icon (shown as a white circle in the diagram). As explained in the pre-reading effect processing, if the pre-reading effect cannot be executed, the determination process for the pre-reading effect is not performed, so at (f), the normal icon is uniformly determined and displayed. In other words, when the increase counter value is "93000", there is a restriction on the display of icons other than the normal icon (for example, a red icon).

If the "Icon Change Super Hot" feature is turned "ON," and, for example, a red icon (indicating a high probability of a jackpot) is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot will increase dramatically. However, if the acquisition limit device activates before the corresponding variation animation is executed, the player may feel that they have lost an entire jackpot, potentially reducing their enjoyment of the game. To address this, by restricting the display of icons other than normal icons (e.g., red icons) when the increase counter value reaches "93000," it is possible to prevent the player from experiencing the aforementioned feelings and thus prevent a decrease in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if the increase counter value reaches "93,000," the customization settings for the game's presentation were set to "enabled." This prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game without making players feel that their freedom in choosing presentations has been restricted.

Furthermore, even if the increment counter value reaches "93000," it is now possible to turn "ON" the "Icon Change Super Hot" feature. However, the corresponding effect (the display of icons other than the normal icon through the icon change animation) is restricted. This prevents a decrease in gameplay enjoyment without making players feel that the freedom of animation has been narrowed. Additionally, it eliminates the need to change the processing in the animation customization settings based on the increment counter value, simplifying the control flow and reducing the processing burden.

Even if the increase counter value reaches "93000," the performance customization setting may be "ON," and the corresponding effects (such as the display of icons other than normal icons due to icon change effects) will be restricted. However, this restriction applies only to pre-announcement effects (e.g., icon change super hot), and the aforementioned "gold hot mode" and "wind effect" may be allowed to be reflected in the "ON" setting. In other words, even if the increase counter value reaches "93000," for example, a SU (gold)予告 (pre-announcement) or a wind effect may occur. This prevents situations where performance customization settings are not uniformly reflected even when "ON" is enabled (although some effects may still be reflected), and maintains the enjoyment of the game without narrowing the range of effects.

Figure 151 is a time chart showing the notification method for the increase counter value. It is assumed that the gaming machine is empty (no one is playing) when the increase counter value is "89900". The game state at this time is a low-probability, non-time-saving game state. A new player is assumed to have started playing at timing (a).

When a new player starts playing at timing (a), the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving state, and the value of the increase counter decreases from "89900". It is assumed that a jackpot has been won at timing (b) when the increase counter has decreased to "89000". At this time, the first image display device 70 notifies that a jackpot has been won, while the value of the increase counter is not notified on the third image display device 72.

Then, when a jackpot is hit and the number of winning balls increases, the value of the increase counter increases from "89000" until it reaches "90000" at timing (c). At this time, the value of the increase counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 in the form of "90000/95000". A pre-notification such as "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates" is also displayed. The displayed value of the increase counter and the pre-notification will be updated according to the value of the increase counter thereafter. For example, if the game then transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state and a jackpot is won, "90000" from "90000/95000" will be added and updated (for example, "91500/95000"), and "5000" from "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates" will be subtracted and updated (for example, "3500 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates").

Timing (d) indicates the fifth consecutive jackpot (if (b) is considered the first jackpot) won during the high-probability time-saving game state, which was achieved after the jackpot at timing (b) ended. The increase counter value at timing (d) is "94200". The jackpot won at timing (d) is considered the second jackpot (10 rounds).

Timing (e) is the moment when, during a jackpot game, a game ball enters the large prize slot 50, and the value of the increase counter reaches "95000" in the 6th round of the jackpot game. At this time, the value of the increase counter displayed on the third image display device 72 will be displayed as "MAX/95000" (display in a specific manner), and the prior notification will be hidden. Once the display of the increase counter value becomes "MAX/95000" (display in a specific manner), the display will no longer be updated even if prizes are won, and the display will remain as "MAX/95000" (display in a specific manner). Note that "MAX" is displayed with a rainbow effect, for example.

The reason why the display of the increase counter value changes to "MAX/95000" (a specific display method) when the increase counter value reaches "95000" is because even when the increase counter value reaches "95000", the jackpot game can still be played to the end. In other words, if the increase counter value reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the jackpot game can be played to the end. However, if this is done, the display of the increase counter value (numerator value) will also be updated until the end of the jackpot game. In that case, even though a threshold (95000) has been set for when the acquisition limit device activates, this would appear ambiguous. Therefore, when the increase counter value reaches "95000", the display of the increase counter value changes to "MAX/95000" (a specific display method), and it is not updated thereafter. In other words, if the system is designed to immediately activate the payout limit device when the increase counter reaches "95,000," even during a jackpot, then such considerations become unnecessary.

Meanwhile, the first image display device 70 continues to display information necessary for the game, such as "Right-handed play," "6R" indicating that it is currently the 6th round of a jackpot game, "Game media acquisition display (e.g., 800/1500)" which reports the acquisition status of game media in one jackpot game, and "Cumulative game media acquisition display (e.g., 6800)" which reports the cumulative acquisition status of game media in consecutive jackpot games (the 5th in this example). The "Game media acquisition display" and "Cumulative game media acquisition display" can also be updated in real time according to the number of wins (however, unlike the display of the increase counter value, subtraction is not displayed). For example, if there is one win in the large prize slot 50, "15" is added to these displays. Furthermore, these displays can continue to be updated if there are wins even after the increase counter value reaches "95000". In other words, the displayed increase counter value will not update even if winnings occur after it reaches "95,000," but the "Game currency acquisition display" and "Cumulative game currency acquisition display" will continue to update even after the increase counter value reaches "95,000," whenever winnings occur.

The above configuration produces the following effects.
First, the displayed increase counter will not update once it reaches "95,000," even if winnings occur afterward. However, the "Game currency acquisition display" and "Cumulative game currency acquisition display" will continue to update even after the increase counter reaches "95,000," if winnings occur afterward. Therefore, by checking the "Game currency acquisition display" and "Cumulative game currency acquisition display," players can continue to check their game currency acquisition status, thus providing them with a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, when the increment counter reaches "95000," the display of the increment counter changes to something like "MAX/95000" (a specific display method), and the display is no longer updated even if a prize is won. This prevents situations where the trigger point for the increment counter (95000) appears ambiguous. For example, one player might see a display of "96000/95000" at the end of a jackpot game, while another player might see a display of "95100/95000."

Furthermore, displaying the increase counter value in a specific format, such as "MAX/95000," can give players a sense of accomplishment and enhance their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when displaying the increase counter value as "MAX/95000," it is possible to either first display "95000/95000" and then "MAX/95000," or to update and display up to "94999/95000" and then display "MAX/95000" without displaying "95000/95000." The former makes it easier to recognize that the "MAX" display was issued because the value reached "95000," while the latter allows the player to be notified of the "MAX" display much sooner.

Furthermore, instead of displaying "MAX/95000," simply displaying "95000/95000" is also acceptable. This makes it easier to recognize the threshold (95000) at which the acquisition limit device activates.

Furthermore, while the "Game Machine Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Machine Acquisition Display" were initially set to update even after the increase counter reached "95,000" if a win occurred, these could also be changed to "MAX" once the increase counter reached "95,000". Alternatively, one could be set to "MAX" while the other continues to update. However, when setting the "Game Machine Acquisition Display" or "Cumulative Game Machine Acquisition Display" to "MAX", a certain number of acquisitions must be displayed. For example, if at timing (d) the game machine 1 is available for play (assuming a low probability, non-time-saving game state), and a jackpot is won at timing (e), and during that jackpot the game media acquisition display shows "MAX/1500" or the cumulative game media acquisition display shows "MAX," this would be an exaggerated display for a player who hasn't acquired many game balls, potentially offending them. Therefore, for example, if the cumulative game media acquisition display shows 10,000 balls or more, the "game media acquisition display" and "cumulative game media acquisition display" should be displayed as "MAX," and if it's less than 10,000 balls, neither the "game media acquisition display" nor the "cumulative game media acquisition display" should be displayed as "MAX." This prevents exaggerated displays and avoids offending players.

Furthermore, the "Display of the Increase Counter Value," "Display of Gaming Media Acquisition," and "Display of Cumulative Gaming Media Acquisition" correspond to the display of "predetermined gaming information related to the gaming value acquired by the player."

Returning to the explanation of Figure 151, when the increment counter reaches "95000" at timing (e), a pre-notification message is displayed on the first image display device 70 informing the player that the winning limit device will activate after the jackpot ends. Specifically, a message such as "You are currently in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The winning limit device will activate after the jackpot and the game will end" is displayed. Furthermore, this message is displayed in a rectangular box in front of the background image. The rectangular box is made of light black (a color that allows the background image to be slightly visible), and the message itself is entirely white with a red border around the characters, making the message easily noticeable to the player.

The pre-announcement message may be displayed continuously once it starts, displayed intermittently, or hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) and not redisplayed thereafter. Note that if the increase counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot, there may be a grace period before the jackpot limit device activates (for example, if the increase counter reaches "95000" in the first round). In such cases, continuously displaying the pre-announcement message might be annoying to the player. Therefore, during a jackpot, intermittent display or hiding the message after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) and not redisplaying it thereafter is preferable.

As mentioned above, the display of the rectangular box makes the background image during a jackpot game harder to see (though not completely invisible). However, it is displayed in a way that it does not overlap with "Right-Handed Play," "6R," "Game Token Acquisition Display," or "Cumulative Game Token Acquisition Display," so these images remain easily visible. This prevents the game from being affected by difficulty in seeing whether right-handed play is still required, whether it is the 6th round of a jackpot game, or the status of game token acquisition.

Furthermore, displaying a pre-announcement message makes it easier for players to be aware in advance that the payout limit device will activate, preventing the device from activating unexpectedly and causing disappointment. Additionally, including a message such as "You are currently on a jackpot. Please continue playing." in the pre-announcement message prevents players from stopping shooting balls and losing prize balls, thus preventing them from being disadvantaged.

Timing (f) indicates the 7th round of the jackpot game. The first image display device 70 continues to display the pre-announcement message, and "Right-hand shooting," "6R," "Game media acquisition display," and "Cumulative game media acquisition display" are displayed without overlapping the pre-announcement message (including the rectangular box). The third image display device 72 also continues to display the increase counter value "MAX/95000." When the 10th round (final round) is completed with these displays, the jackpot game ends, and the acquisition limit device then activates.

Furthermore, although the pre-notification message is displayed from the start of display until the end of the final round, it may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) and then terminated (without redisplay), or it may be displayed and hidden repeatedly at predetermined intervals, or it may be displayed on the first image display device 70 for a predetermined time, then the notification image on the first image display device 70 may be hidden and the third image display device 72 or the like may continue to display it, or it may be hidden by the player operating the performance button 17 or the like.
Alternatively, a rectangular box may be superimposed and displayed across the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Furthermore, while the rectangular box is colored to make the background image difficult to see, a color that makes it completely invisible may also be used.

Figure 152 illustrates the visual effects that occur when various events occur, and in particular, it explains the visual effects when the "number of game balls exceeds the limit" during a jackpot, and when the "acquisition limit device is activated" during a jackpot.

(a) shows the moment when a jackpot is won during a high-probability time-saving game state. During the jackpot, the "Right-Handed Shooting" prompt is displayed, encouraging the player to shoot the game balls towards the right-hand game area. This is the moment when the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 reaches "40,000" due to a win in the large prize slot 50 during the jackpot. During the jackpot, the character introduction sequence (normal sequence) displayed during SP Reach and SPSP Reach is executed, and the jackpot game ends at (b). Note that the normal sequence can be executed even in jackpot games other than those resulting in "game ball count overload" or "acquisition limit device activation." For example, it can be executed with the first jackpot won after the arcade opens.

(b) When a jackpot game ends, the jackpot ending sequence is executed. The jackpot ending sequence continues to display the "Right-Handed Play" indicator, the text "Jackpot Ended" indicating the end of the jackpot game, a warning image such as "Beware of Addiction!", and another warning image such as "Don't Forget Your Card!". Thus, these warning images are displayed when a jackpot game ends. However, if jackpots occur consecutively (for example, if the game transitions to a probability-increasing state and jackpots occur consecutively), the display of these warning images may be omitted in the jackpot ending for the second and subsequent jackpots. This helps prevent excessive play and the forgetting of membership cards and visitor cards, while preventing it from becoming excessive and thus preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

(c) represents the moment when a jackpot is won during a high-probability time-saving game state, and the value of the increase counter reaches "94000," triggering the start of the second jackpot game (10 rounds). In other words, the increase counter reaches "95000" upon execution of the second jackpot game. Then, in (d), it is assumed that the increase counter has reached "95000."

In (d), the aforementioned pre-announcement message, "You are currently on a winning streak. Please continue playing. After the win, the winning limit device will activate and the game will end," is displayed.

Furthermore, after timing (d), a warning image such as "The acquisition limit device will activate shortly. Please be careful not to forget your card" may be displayed. This warning image may be displayed continuously until just before timing (h), intermittently until just before timing (h), or hidden after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). Additionally, an audio announcement such as "The acquisition limit device will activate shortly. Please be careful not to forget your card" may be provided, or the system may consist solely of an audio announcement.

Then, when the jackpot game ends in (e), a completion animation is executed. In other words, only when the acquisition limit device is activated, a completion animation is executed that serves both to inform the player that further play is impossible and to congratulate the player who likely acquired a large amount of game value. The completion animation is expected to display special images different from the normal animation described above, or an image granting a special title (e.g., "Master"), and also to display text such as "Game ending soon" at the bottom of the display area.

By executing this completion animation, a sense of satisfaction can be given to the player who activated the winning limit device. Furthermore, displaying text and images such as "The game will soon end" allows the player to prepare themselves compared to the sudden execution of the (g) notification after the jackpot ends, enabling a smoother transition to the end of the game even if the (g) notification is executed afterward.

Furthermore, upon completion of the completion animation (timing (g)), "Completion Animation FIN" is displayed to indicate the end of the animation. A prompt image appears at the bottom of the display area, urging the user to press the counting button 20 to transfer the game value displayed on the game ball count indicator 135 to the dedicated unit 170. This allows for gradual counting to begin before the situation described later (h) where further gameplay is impossible. This enables smoother completion of the count compared to starting counting only after (h) is reached, resulting in a smoother end to the game.

The promotional image is displayed from timing (g), but this is not the only option. For example, it may start displaying from timing (d) when the increase counter reaches "95000," or from the start of a jackpot game (timing (c)) when the increase counter is likely to reach "95000." The promotional image will not be displayed before these times.

Then, at (h), the acquisition limit device is activated, and the notification described in Figure 147 is executed. Furthermore, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, and the game cannot be continued any further. The execution period for the completion sequence, which takes place from (e) to (g), is assumed to be, for example, 3 minutes. Also, upon completion of the sequence at (g), the acquisition limit device is immediately activated, and the game ends promptly.

If the "winning limit device" is activated during a jackpot, the jackpot ending sequence described at timing (b) is not executed at timings (e) to (g). In other words, in cases where the "winning limit device" is not activated during a jackpot, such as at timing (b), the jackpot ending sequence is executed at the end of the jackpot, displaying warning images such as "Beware of excessive gambling!" and "Beware of forgetting your card!". On the other hand, if the "winning limit device" is activated during a jackpot, the warning images "Beware of excessive gambling!" and "Beware of forgetting your card!" are displayed during the winning limit device activation notification at timing (h). Therefore, even if the jackpot ending sequence is omitted at timing (e), it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and the forgetting of membership and visitor cards, while preventing it from becoming excessive and thus preventing causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, at timing (e), the jackpot ending sequence may be executed, and during this sequence, a warning image such as "Caution: Beware of excessive gambling!" and a warning image such as "Caution: Don't forget your card!" may be displayed. Doing so increases the likelihood that the warning images will come into the player's field of vision, more effectively preventing excessive gambling and the forgetting of membership cards or visitor cards.

Furthermore, for example, if a new player starts playing immediately before timing (c) (i.e., this is the player's first win), the jackpot ending sequence may be executed at timing (e). Otherwise (i.e., a certain number of jackpots have occurred consecutively leading up to timing (c)), the jackpot ending sequence may not be executed at timing (e). This allows for the execution of appropriate warning notifications tailored to the game situation.

Furthermore, while the completion animation is designed to be executed after the jackpot game has ended, it may also be executed from the moment the increase counter reaches "95,000". Also, in the aforementioned Type 1 and Type 2 systems, if the increase counter reaches "95,000" due to a specific area entry during the minor jackpot game (round 1), the completion animation may be executed from the start of the subsequent jackpot game (rounds 2 and beyond). However, regardless of the specifications, considering that the execution period of the animation becomes unpredictable depending on the entry status into the large prize slot 50 during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set an execution period after the jackpot game has ended.

Furthermore, while (a) specifies that the normal animation will be performed, a special jackpot animation corresponding to "exceeding the number of game balls" may also be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the game value of "40,000 balls" does not include the game value obtained through the lending of game balls. That is, since the purpose is to celebrate the player's hard work in obtaining game value, it is preferable to exclude the game value obtained through lending, even when executing a special jackpot animation.

Furthermore, multiple completion animations may be provided, and one of them may be selected and executed. Also, in gaming machines with multiple setting levels, the type of completion animation executed may indicate the setting level. Since gameplay cannot be continued after the completion animation is executed, the indication of the setting level does not provide useful information. However, it is meaningful to execute the animation as it allows players to understand what setting level triggered the payout limit device.

Furthermore, as shown in the warning image above, if a change of players is detected immediately before the activation of the winning limit device, the completion animation may be prevented from being executed. This prevents causing discomfort to players who have just started playing (such as confusion about what the animation represents that they have completed).

Furthermore, the prescribed warning notification corresponding to the limitations on executing the prescribed control is not limited to what is shown in Figure 152 (h), but also includes the warning image mentioned above, such as "The acquisition limit device will activate soon. Please be careful not to forget your card."

Furthermore, in addition to the promotional image displaying "Press the counting button to count," as described above, any message that reads "Press the counting button to count if you wish to interrupt or end the game" on a sticker attached to the game board or glass frame 4, ensuring it is always visible to the player, may also be included as a "notification prompting the player to operate the counting unit." Similarly, if the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "Press the counting button to count if you wish to interrupt or end the game," this display may also be included as a "notification prompting the player to operate the counting unit."

Figure 153 is a diagram illustrating the customer waiting process.
In this embodiment, the customer waiting performance includes "customer waiting performance A,""customer waiting performance B,""customer waiting demo performance A," and "customer waiting demo performance B" shown in the figure.

First, if the game stops at timing (a) (special symbols and performance symbols are displayed as stopped), and no subsequent hold data is stored, then the customer waiting animation A begins. In customer waiting animation A, the combination "523" of the performance symbols 70a that stopped at timing (a) is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a predetermined background image (not shown) is displayed on the third image display device 72. The performance symbols 70a are displayed in a form consisting of numbers and characters.

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting-for-player animation A without any winning or other actions, the waiting-for-player animation B will start at timing (b). In the waiting-for-player animation B, the combination "523" of the animation symbols 70a that was confirmed and stopped at timing (a) continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the third image display device 72 displays an image indicating the presence of a winning limit device, "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device," instead of a predetermined background image. At this time, the animation symbols 70a are displayed in a form consisting of numbers, characters, and the names of the characters, and are displayed in a different form than in the waiting-for-player animation A. Furthermore, the image indicating the presence of a winning limit device displayed on the third image display device 72 is an image intended to inform the player in advance that the winning limit device will be activated and it will be difficult to continue playing, and this is made known to the player in advance using the waiting-for-player animation, etc. This prevents the player from being surprised or dissatisfied even if the winning limit device is activated and it becomes difficult to continue playing.

Furthermore, in addition to images suggesting the presence of a payout limit device, stickers affixed to the game board or glass frame 4 stating "This machine is equipped with a payout limit device" may also be included as a way of indicating the presence of a payout limit device. This method is more likely to catch the player's eye than using images, thus increasing its appeal.

Furthermore, while the third image display device 72 is configured to display an image suggesting the installation of the acquisition limit device, the display is not limited to this configuration. It may also be displayed on the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the fourth image display device 74, or the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) elapses without any winning or other actions occurring after the start of the waiting-for-customer-player

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer-waiting demo performance A without any starting wins or other events, customer-waiting demo performance B will start at timing (d). In customer-waiting demo performance A, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 remains a white background, and the word "DEMO" (e.g., in blue text) and a predetermined warning notification (in red text) are displayed on this white background to indicate that a demo performance is in progress. Furthermore, the third image display device 72 also displays the image indicating the presence of a winning limit device, "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device," which was displayed in customer-waiting demo performance B, at this timing.

The prescribed warning and alert displays include, for example, an image that reads "Caution: Beware of Addiction!" to prevent players from becoming excessively engrossed in the game, an image that reads "No Playing for Those Under 18" to prohibit play by those under 18, an image that reads "Beware of Scams Promoting Gaming Strategies!" to prevent players from becoming involved in scams promoting strategies for winning at the game, and an image that reads "No Hitting the Machine" to prohibit hitting the game machine. Displaying these displays during the customer waiting demo sequence B can promote healthy gameplay. Note that the prescribed warning and alert displays do not need to be displayed all at once; they may be displayed individually, one at a time.

Furthermore, the images displayed in customer waiting sequences A and B are not limited to those described above. For example, actual reach animation images, images introducing characters displayed as part of the game machine's animations, or images introducing pre-announcement animations that suggest a jackpot (e.g., three key animations) may also be displayed. Additionally, the "Caution: Addiction!" image displayed in the customer waiting sequence, the jackpot ending, and the announcement of the jackpot limit device activation may all be identical in appearance (same color, shape, and size), or they may be different in appearance.

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without any winning or triggering events occurring from the start of the customer waiting demo sequence B, the system will return to the customer waiting sequence A. If a winning or triggering event occurs, regardless of which sequence is currently running, the sequence will immediately end, and a screen displaying the variation of the sequence symbol 70a will be shown.

The customer waiting animation in this embodiment is configured as described above, but it may also include either customer waiting animation A or B, or either of the customer waiting demo animations. Furthermore, in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state, all of customer waiting animation A, customer waiting animation B, customer waiting demo animation A, and customer waiting demo animation B may be executed, while in a high-probability, time-saving game state, customer waiting animation A and B may be executable, but customer waiting demo animation A and B may not be executable. Additionally, customer waiting animations A and B may be designated as customer waiting animations, or customer waiting demo animations A and B may be designated as customer waiting animations.

Furthermore, while the customer waiting animation A, customer waiting animation B, customer waiting demo animation A, and customer waiting demo animation B can be executed before the payout limit device is activated, their execution is restricted after the payout limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in Figure 152). In other words, this prevents players from being misled into believing they are in a playable state by having the customer waiting animations executed even when game progress control (specific control processing) is not being performed. It also prevents players from feeling dissatisfied if they are prompted to sit down by the customer waiting animations only to find they cannot play. This helps prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, after the acquisition limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in Figure 152), the interpretation that execution is restricted includes not executing at all, reducing the execution frequency, and not executing certain elements among customer waiting animation A, customer waiting animation B, customer waiting demo animation A, and customer waiting demo animation B.

Figures 154 to 156 are time charts showing advance notices for 1/3 to 3/3 of the event.
First, timing (a) is the timing when a starting win occurs and the spin begins in a low probability, non-time-saving game state. At this time, the value of the increase counter is less than "90000".

At the subsequent timing (b), if a jackpot is won and a ball enters the large prize slot 50 during the jackpot game, the value of the increase counter increases, and at timing (c), the value of the increase counter reaches "90000". At this time, the value of the increase counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 in the form of "90000/95000". In addition, a prior notification such as "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" is displayed.

At the subsequent timing (d), when the jackpot game ends, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot game ending image (for example, "Jackpot Ended, 100 Time-Saving Rounds") to announce the end of the jackpot game. The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increase counter and the pre-announcement. At this time, the increase counter value is displayed as "90500/95000," and the pre-announcement is displayed as "4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates."

Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an image indicating the presence of a winning limit device: "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device." In other words, the image indicating the presence of a winning limit device is displayed even when the jackpot game ending image is being shown.

At the subsequent timing (e), the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 begins displaying the fluctuations in the time-saving game state, while the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increase counter and the advance notification. At this time, the increase counter value is displayed as "90500/95000," and the advance notification is displayed as "4500 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates."

At the subsequent timing (f), when the symbols (special symbols, performance symbols, special symbols) stop in a confirmed state, the customer waiting animation A in the time-saving game state begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays "Time-Saving Game in Progress," indicating that the time-saving game state is active, along with the "Right-Handed Play" display and the combination "463" of the performance symbols 70a that stopped in a confirmed state at timing (f). The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increase counter and a pre-announcement. At this time, the increase counter value is displayed as "90490/95000," and the pre-announcement is displayed as "4510 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates."

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without any starting or winning events from the start of the customer waiting animation A, the customer waiting animation B starts at timing (g). At this time, the display mode of the first image display device 70 remains unchanged from that of the customer waiting animation A, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notice. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the advance notice is displayed as "4510 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated".

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without any start-up or winning from the start of the customer waiting animation B, the customer waiting demo animation B starts at timing (h). At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the customer waiting demo animation A described above, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and a pre-announcement. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000", and the pre-announcement is displayed as "4510 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated".

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without any winning or other events occurring after the start of the customer waiting demo performance A, customer waiting demo performance B will start at timing (i). At this time, the first image display device 70 will display the customer waiting demo performance B described above, and the third image display device 72 will continue to display the value of the increase counter and a pre-notification. At this time, the value of the increase counter will be displayed as "90490/95000", and the pre-notification will be displayed as "4510 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated".

In other words, the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are shown during the jackpot game indicated at timing (c), during the execution of the variation display indicated at timing (e), and during the execution of the customer waiting animations indicated at timings (f) to (i). That is, once the display starts at timing (c), it will be visible in any situation, including during the jackpot game, during the execution of the variation display, and during the execution of the customer waiting animations.

Note that while Figures 155 and 156 illustrate the customer waiting animation during a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state) as an example, they can also be interpreted as depicting the customer waiting animation during a normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) or a probability-changing game state (high probability time-saving game state).

The subsequent timing (j) is the end of the time-saving game state. At timing (j), there are no subsequent reserved balls, and the customer waiting animation A has started. At this time, the first image display device 70 does not display "Time-saving" or "Right-hand play," and the appearance of the animation symbols 70a changes from a number-only appearance to a appearance composed of numbers and characters. The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increase counter and the pre-announcement. At this time, the increase counter value is displayed as "90490/95000," and the pre-announcement is displayed as "4510 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates."

Then, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without any starting or winning events from the start of the customer waiting animation A, the customer waiting animation B starts at timing (k). At this time, the first image display device displays an animation pattern 70a consisting of numbers, characters, and character names, while the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting the installation of the acquisition limit device, the value of the increase counter, and a pre-notification. At this time, the value of the increase counter is displayed as "90490/95000," and the pre-notification is displayed as "4510 remaining until acquisition limit device activation."

At the subsequent timing (l), the player played in the normal game state (low probability, non-time-saving game state) and did not win a jackpot. Then, at timing (m), the player waited for the customer animation A started when the increment counter value fell below "90000". At this time, the display of the increment counter value and the pre-announcement are hidden on the third image display device 72. In other words, the display of the increment counter value and the pre-announcement ended when the increment counter value fell below "90000" (for example, to "89000").

As shown in Figures 154 to 156 above, even when the jackpot ending image is displayed, an image indicating the activation of the payout limit device is also displayed. This allows the player to be informed in advance that the payout limit device may activate, making it difficult to continue playing. Even if the payout limit device activates and it becomes difficult to continue playing, this reduces the likelihood of surprising or dissatisfying the player. Such consideration helps prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the increase counter reaches "90000," the display of the increase counter value and a pre-announcement are initiated. The display of the increase counter value and the pre-announcement are shown during the jackpot game (as indicated by timing (c)), during the execution of the variation display (as indicated by timing (e)), and during the customer waiting animations (as indicated by timings (f) to (i)). Therefore, regardless of the game situation, the display of the increase counter value and the pre-announcement are easily visible to the player, reducing the risk of the acquisition limit device activating unexpectedly and surprising or dissatisfying the player. This consideration helps prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in timings (d), (i), and (k), even if the increment counter value and the pre-notification are displayed, the display of the image suggesting the presence of the winning limit device is still possible. Additionally, these images are displayed in a way that prevents them from interfering with each other. Therefore, all information becomes easier to see, allowing players to understand that the gaming machine is equipped with a winning limit device and that the winning limit device is about to activate. This consideration makes various pieces of information easier to recognize, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in timing (h), even when the game-promoting image "Let's start playing!", which is a form of the customer-waiting demo performance A, is displayed to encourage the player to play, it is possible to display the value of the increase counter and the pre-notification. In addition, these images are displayed in a way that they do not interfere with each other. This makes all the information easier to see, allowing players to understand, for example, that the situation is just before the acquisition limit device is activated when they start playing. Such considerations make various information easier to recognize, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in timing (m), the display and prior notification of the increase counter value are terminated when the increase counter value falls below "90000" (for example, when it becomes "89000"). This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the acquisition limit device is about to activate.

The explanation described an example where the image indicating the acquisition limit device, the display of the increase counter value, and the advance notification are displayed on the third image display device 72. However, these may also be displayed on other image display devices. For example, they may be displayed on the first image display device 70. While displaying on the first image display device 70 has the drawback of reducing the visibility of other displayed items, it is more effective than displaying on the third image display device 72 in that it prevents players from overlooking the information, as it is the image display device that players pay the most attention to.

Figure 157 shows an example of when the winning limit device is activated during the customer waiting animation.
First, timing (a) is the timing when the fluctuation display in the time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state) ends (the symbols stop in a confirmed state), and when the customer waiting animation A begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the combination of "Time-saving in progress", "Right-hand play", and the confirmed stopped animation symbols 70a "463". The third image display device 72 displays the value of the increase counter "94999/95000" and the pre-notification "1 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated". In other words, the value of the increase counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999".

Timing (b) is defined as the player shooting the game ball into the game area (right-handed), but it entering the general prize entry point 43 before entering the second start entry point 47. This causes the increase counter value to become "95003," and upon receiving the command to activate the acquisition limit device, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 becomes a dark screen, and the front layer displays "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today," "Press the count button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!". The third image display device 72 hides the increase counter value and the prior notification.

On a portion of the display screen for the customer waiting animation A, the front layer displays the following messages superimposed: "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Beware of addiction!", and "Caution: Do not forget your card!". On the third image display device 72, the display of the increase counter value and the prior notification are hidden.

Thus, even while the customer waiting animation A is running, if the increase counter reaches "95000" and the acquisition limit device is activated, an activation notification for the acquisition limit device is issued, informing the player that they cannot continue playing any further. This allows for prompt restriction of game progress control (specific control processing) even when no fluctuation display is shown, such as during the customer waiting animation, thus ensuring a healthy gaming experience. Furthermore, even during the customer waiting animation, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device makes it clear that continuing to play is difficult. Such considerations help prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

The explanation uses the example of customer waiting animation A, but it may be interpreted as using customer waiting animation B instead. Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 immediately went dark when the acquisition limit device was activated, this is not the only option. The activation notification may be performed while a portion of the background image on the back (the display screen for customer waiting animation A in the example of Figure 157) is still visible. Specifically, a message such as "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today" may be displayed superimposed on a portion of the display screen for customer waiting animation A, allowing the display screen (background image, etc.) of customer waiting animation A to be visible from the unsupervised portion. This reduces the likelihood of startling the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background when the acquisition limit device is activated, and prevents the player from mistakenly believing that a malfunction has occurred.

Next, timing (c) indicates that the customer waiting demo performance A is being executed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays "Shortened Time," "DEMO," "Right-Handed Play," and "Pachinko XX," while the third image display device 72 displays the value of the increase counter, "94999/95000," and the pre-announcement, "1 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates." That is, the value of the increase counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999."

Timing (d) is defined as the player shooting the game ball into the game area (right-handed), but it entering the general prize entry point 43 before entering the second start entry point 47. This causes the increase counter value to become "95003," and upon receiving the command to activate the acquisition limit device, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today," "Press the count button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!". The third image display device 72 hides the increase counter value and the prior notification.

Thus, even while the customer waiting demo sequence A is running, if the increase counter reaches "95000" and the acquisition limit device is activated, an activation notification for the acquisition limit device is issued, informing the player that they cannot continue playing any further. This allows for prompt restriction of game progress control (specific control processing) even when no fluctuation display is shown, such as during the customer waiting sequence, thus ensuring a healthy gaming experience. Furthermore, even during the customer waiting sequence, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device makes it clear that continuing to play is difficult. Such considerations help prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

The explanation uses the example of customer-waiting demo performance A, but it may be interpreted as using customer-waiting demo performance B instead. Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 immediately went dark when the acquisition limit device was activated, this is not the only option. The activation notification may be performed while a portion of the background image on the back (the display screen of customer-waiting demo performance A in the example of Figure 157) is still visible. Specifically, a message such as "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today" may be displayed superimposed on a portion of the display screen of customer-waiting demo performance A, allowing the display screen (background image, etc.) of customer-waiting demo performance A to be visible from the unsupervised portion. This reduces the likelihood of startling the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background when the acquisition limit device is activated, and prevents the player from mistakenly believing that a malfunction has occurred.

Furthermore, while Figure 157 illustrates the customer waiting animation during a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state) as an example, it can also be interpreted as illustrating the customer waiting animation during a normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) or a probability-changing game state (high probability time-saving game state).

Furthermore, in Figure 157, it is assumed that the player launched the game ball into the game area (shot to the right), but it entered the general prize slot 43 before entering the second start slot 47. However, if the ball enters the second start slot 47 and the increase counter value reaches "95000", the system may instead execute the activation notification for the acquisition limit device shown in Figure 157 without displaying the changing symbols (special symbols, performance symbols, special symbols). This allows the process related to the activation of the acquisition limit device to proceed quickly (since the process of stopping the symbols, etc., becomes unnecessary), thus simplifying the control process. It also prevents the player from becoming too preoccupied with the changing symbol display results and missing various information such as "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!".

On the other hand, if a prize is awarded in the second starting gate 47 and the increase counter value reaches "95,000", the symbols (special symbols, performance symbols, special symbols) may be displayed in a variable manner. For example, in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ may be displayed in a variable manner behind the activation notification of the acquisition limit device. This can alleviate the player's boredom until the screen goes dark (until the background turns black).

Figure 158 shows an example of the activation notification mode of the payout limit device for each situation. Figure 152 described the activation notification mode of the payout limit device during a jackpot, and Figure 157 described the activation notification mode of the payout limit device during a customer waiting animation. Therefore, this section will mainly explain the activation notification mode of the payout limit device during non-jackpot situations (during fluctuation display and fluctuation intervals).

The case during a jackpot in the diagram is as described in Figure 152, so the explanation is omitted here. During a non-jackpot state, timing (a) indicates that a variation display is in progress. For example, this is assumed to be during a time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state). At this time, the "Right-Hand Shooting" display, the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, etc., are being displayed.

Timing (b) is the moment when, during the display of the reduced-time game state (low-probability reduced-time game state), a game ball is entered into the second start slot 47 or the general prize slot 43, resulting in the increase counter value reaching "95000". Upon receiving the command to activate the acquisition limit device, the activation notification of the acquisition limit device begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 becomes a dark screen, and the front layer displays the following messages: "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!".

During a jackpot, from (d) onward, the activation notification of the payout limit device will continue as long as the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is not interrupted. Similarly, during a non-jackpot period, from (b) onward, the activation notification of the payout limit device will continue as long as the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is not interrupted. In other words, once the activation notification of the payout limit device begins, the mode of the audio notification, screen notification, and illumination notification will not change unless an error with a higher priority than the activation of the payout limit device occurs. As a result, after the activation notification of the payout limit device begins, the game will not transition to the customer waiting animation or customer waiting demo animation, and the rainbow flashing in customer waiting demo animation B will not be performed.

Furthermore, once the activation notification for the payout limit device is initiated, the mode of the audio notification, screen notification, and illuminated notification will not change unless an error with a higher priority than the activation of the payout limit device occurs. However, it may be configured to change. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is not interrupted for a predetermined period of time after the activation notification for the payout limit device is initiated, a rainbow flashing light may be performed as an illuminated notification to prompt the administrator of the gaming machine 1 to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1.

Thus, if the value of the increase counter reaches "95,000" during a jackpot, a pre-notification message is first displayed stating, "You are currently in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The post-jackpot acquisition limit device will activate and the game will end." After the jackpot ends, a message is displayed stating, "Acquisition limit device activated. The game has ended for today." This allows the pre-notification message to inform players that they can continue playing and that they will not be able to play after the jackpot ends, thus reducing the risk of surprising or dissatisfying players by unexpectedly activating the acquisition limit device. Such considerations help prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the increase counter reaches "95,000" during a non-jackpot period (during fluctuation display or fluctuation interval), the first image display device 70 is promptly darkened to display a notification that the acquisition limit device has been activated. This prevents players from becoming so preoccupied with the changing symbols that they overlook important information such as "Winning limit activated. Gameplay ends for today," "Press the counting button to count your winnings," "Beware of addiction!", and "Don't forget your card!".

Furthermore, it is conceivable that the result of a confirmed stop (symbol stop) may be a combination of symbols that results in a jackpot. In that case, because the jackpot game corresponding to the confirmed stop (symbol stop) cannot be executed due to the activation of the acquisition limit device, there is a risk of disappointing the player. To address this, the first image display device 70 is promptly darkened to notify the activation of the acquisition limit device, thus eliminating the risk of disappointment to the player who would not know what the result of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) was (jackpot or loss).

Regarding Figure 158(b), if, during a non-jackpot period (during fluctuation display or fluctuation interval), multiple game balls are rolling down in the game area 5a, and one of these balls enters the general prize entry point 43, causing the increase counter to reach "95000," then even if a game ball rolling down upstream subsequently enters the general prize entry point 43, no prize balls will be awarded for that entry. On the other hand, during a jackpot, as long as the acquisition limit device has not yet activated, prize balls will be awarded for any entries into each prize entry point.

Furthermore, if the increase counter value reaches "95000" during a non-jackpot period (during variable display or interval between variables), the first image display device 70 is promptly blacked out, and the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is executed. However, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device may be executed after the symbols have been confirmed and stopped.

Furthermore, if the increase counter reaches "95000" while a winning combination of symbols (for example, "555") is in a provisional stop (just before the final stop), the acquisition limit device may be activated immediately, causing the first image display device 70 to darken. Alternatively, the acquisition limit device may be activated after the winning game has been played.

Specifically, if the increase counter reaches "95,000" during a non-jackpot period (during reel spinning or inter-spinning intervals), a message such as "The winning limit device will activate after the symbols stop, ending the game. Please stop shooting." will be displayed. This message is displayed in a rectangular box in front of the reel symbol 70a. The rectangular box is made of light black (a color that allows the reel spinning display of the reel symbol 70a to be slightly visible), and the message itself is entirely white with a red border, making it easily noticeable to the player. This makes the reel spinning display of the reel 70a difficult to see, and directs the player's attention to the message, making it easier to stop shooting the game balls.

Furthermore, on the first image display device 70, the "Right-Handed Shot" indicator is hidden, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ remains visible without being covered by a rectangular box. The hiding of the "Right-Handed Shot" indicator suggests that the situation no longer warrants right-handed shots, and by keeping the special symbol TZ visible, it becomes easier to grasp the timing of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) and the activation of the acquisition limit device. Although not shown in the illustration, the right-handed shot indicator 67 also turns off (ending the right-handed shot notification) at the same time the "Right-Handed Shot" indicator is hidden.

The pre-notification message may be displayed continuously once it starts, displayed intermittently, or hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) and not redisplayed thereafter. While it is preferable for the pre-notification message to be displayed intermittently or hidden after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) when a jackpot is in progress, the window of opportunity before the acquisition limit device activates tends to be shorter when a jackpot is not in progress (during variable display or interval between variations). Therefore, displaying the pre-notification message intermittently or hiding it after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) and not redisplaying it thereafter may hinder the purpose of stopping the launch of game balls. For this reason, when a jackpot is not in progress (during variable display or interval between variations), it is preferable to display the message continuously once it starts.

Then, when the symbols stop in a confirmed position (symbol stop), the following messages are displayed superimposed on the combination of symbols that stopped in the confirmed position (e.g., "463"): "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!". These images are superimposed on the symbols 70a, but not on the special symbols TZ, so the confirmed-stop special symbol TZ "463" remains visible. This makes it easier to recognize the confirmed stop (symbol stop).

This allows for prompt notification via a pre-announcement message that the launch of game balls will stop immediately and that gameplay will be unavailable after the symbols stop. This reduces the risk of surprising or dissatisfying players by unexpectedly activating the payout limit device. Such considerations help prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, this prevents startling players by avoiding the sudden termination of the variable display and the activation of the payout limit device. Additionally, players can prepare to quit playing in advance by operating the counting button 20 at the same time as the confirmed stop (symbol stop) that triggers the payout limit device, leading to a smoother end to the game.

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted during the display of the variable symbols (due to a power outage, disconnection, etc.) and then restored, the main control board 110 sends a power restoration command to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving the power restoration command, the performance control board 130 displays a restoration image on the first image display device 70 that reads "Restoring. Please wait a moment." Then, upon receiving a stop command (symbol confirmation command) as the display of the variable symbols ends, the display of the restoration image is terminated, making the combination of symbols on the performance symbols 70a visible.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated while the fluctuation display is active and power is subsequently restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the recovery image will not be displayed. Instead, an image such as "Acquisition limit device activated. Please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 144 will be displayed.
Thus, even when the same power restoration occurs and a power restoration command is received, the display will differ depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated or not. This allows for accurate notification based on the presence or absence of the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, if special symbol judgment information is stored in reserve and a reserve icon corresponding to the reserved information is displayed, and the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted (due to a power outage, disconnection, etc.), and then the power is restored, the main control board 110 sends a power restoration command to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving the power restoration command, the performance control board 130 displays a restoration image on the first image display device 70 that reads "Restoring. Please wait a moment." On the other hand, while the restoration image is displayed, the reserve icon corresponding to the reserved information (which was displayed before the power outage) is not displayed.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated while special symbol judgment information is being held and stored, and then power is restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the restoration image and the hold icon corresponding to the held storage (which was displayed before the power outage) will not be displayed. Instead, an image such as "Acquisition limit device is operating. Please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 144 will be displayed.
Thus, even when the same power restoration command is received, the display will differ depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated or not. This allows for accurate notification based on the presence or absence of the acquisition limit device. Furthermore, if the "Please wait" message is displayed during the restoration process, but the hold icon is displayed, it may give the user the mistaken impression that they do not need to wait, but this can be prevented. In addition, even when restoring power after the acquisition limit device has been activated, by displaying an image such as "Acquisition limit device is activated. Please clear the RWM," instead of showing the hold icon, the operator can concentrate on performing the RWM clear operation.

Figure 159 shows an example of the activation notification mode of the acquisition limit device for each situation. Figure 159 explains an example where the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increase counter value reaches "95000". Specifically, it explains examples of the activation notification mode for two cases: when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increase counter value reaches "95000" but before the acquisition limit device activates (hereinafter referred to as "A"), and when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increase counter value reaches "95000" but after the acquisition limit device activates (hereinafter referred to as "B").

First, regarding (i), timing (a) is, for example, the timing when the value of the increase counter reaches "95000" during the fourth round of a jackpot game (while a 10-round jackpot game is being played). The first image display device 70 displays the aforementioned pre-notification message superimposed on the animation image of the fourth round of the jackpot game.

Subsequently, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted (power outage, broken wire, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the animation images during the jackpot game become invisible. Then, at the subsequent timing (c), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored (power outage resolved, broken wire repaired, etc.), the first image display device 70 once again displays the aforementioned pre-announcement message superimposed on the animation images of the 4th round of the jackpot game (during the execution of a 10-round jackpot game).

Then, when the 10th round of the jackpot game ends, the completion animation described above is executed. After the completion animation ends, at timing (d), the acquisition limit device activation command is received, and the acquisition limit device activation notification, "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!" are displayed. Thus, in case (i), even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the acquisition limit device activation notification is not immediately displayed. Instead, the acquisition limit device activation notification is displayed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored and the jackpot game and completion animation have all been completed. For example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted during the execution of the completion animation, after restoration, the acquisition limit device activation notification will be displayed only after the completion animation has finished.

Furthermore, at timing (c), the display of the pre-notification message is also restored. This ensures that even if the power supply is interrupted during a jackpot game (while the pre-notification message is displayed), the system will re-recognize the situation as being just before the jackpot limit device was activated after power is restored.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, at timing (c), the display of the increment counter value on the third image display device 72 and the pre-notification message are hidden. This is because the increment counter is cleared when the power is turned OFF → ON (see Figure 31), and when the increment counter is cleared, the display of the increment counter value is also cleared. In other words, if the increment counter value is displayed at timing (c), it will show "0/95000," while the pre-notification message is displayed on the first image display device 70, which could lead the player to perceive a contradiction. Therefore, by hiding the display of the increment counter value on the third image display device 72 and the pre-notification message at timing (c), this risk can be eliminated.

Next, regarding (b), timing (a) is the timing when the activation notification for the winning limit device is executed. Subsequently, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted (power outage, broken wire, intentional power off by an employee, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the activation notifications for the winning limit device, such as "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!", become invisible. Then, at the subsequent timing (c), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored (power outage resolved, broken wire restored, intentional power on by an employee, etc.), the first image display device 70 displays one form of the winning limit device activation notification: "Winning limit device activated. Please clear RWM." In other words, in case (b), unlike case (a), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the winning limit device activation notification is immediately executed.

Thus, the timing of the notification of the activation of the acquisition limit device differs depending on whether the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increase counter value reaches "95,000" but before the acquisition limit device activates (hereinafter referred to as "A") or after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increase counter value reaches "95,000" but the acquisition limit device has activated (hereinafter referred to as "B"). This prevents the immediate notification of the acquisition limit device's activation after power restoration in example (A), thus preventing discomfort to players and preventing a decline in gaming enjoyment. On the other hand, in example (B), immediate notification after power restoration allows for prompt notification of the current situation and necessary actions, enabling employees to take appropriate action.

Furthermore, the activation notification of the winning limit device in (a)(d) allows players to understand that further gameplay is difficult, to operate the counting button 20 to count (a necessary operation), and to receive various warnings. This makes the situation easier to recognize and helps prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, in the immediate notification after recovery in (b)(c), while displaying "Winning limit device activated" similar to (a)(d), it also displays "Please clear RWM," which is not displayed in (a)(d). In other words, the notification method in (a)(d) and the notification method in (b)(c) are different. This allows for accurate notification depending on the situation, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game for players and making it easier for employees to understand the necessary operation (that RWM clearing is required).

Furthermore, in the immediate notification after recovery in (b)(c), the same notification as the activation notification of the winning limit device in (a)(d) may be provided. Specifically, in (b)(c), the following notifications may be made: "Winning limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," "Please press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", "Don't forget your card!". For example, if the power supply to gaming machine 1 is cut off immediately after the screen in (b)(a) is displayed, there is a possibility that a player is still seated in front of the gaming machine. In that case, if the notification in (b)(c) is made, it may confuse the player who is still seated. Therefore, anticipating such a scenario, the immediate notification after recovery in (b)(c) may be made the same as the activation notification of the winning limit device in (a)(d).

Furthermore, if power is restored before a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the screen display in (b)(a), the system may be configured to perform the same notification as the activation of the winning limit device in (a)(d). If power is restored after a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the screen display in (b)(a), the system may perform the immediate post-restoration notification in (b)(c). This would ensure that even if power is restored while a player is potentially seated, the system will provide the same notification as the activation of the winning limit device in (a)(d), allowing the player to understand that continuing to play is difficult without causing confusion. On the other hand, if power is restored after a predetermined time (e.g., one hour), it is highly likely that the player is not seated, allowing employees to take appropriate action (such as clearing the RWM).

(Another example during a jackpot game)
Figures 152, 158, and 159 illustrate the notification method when the increase counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game. However, the notification method is not limited to this and may be configured as follows. For example, in Figure 152(d), when the increase counter reaches "95000", the system enters a waiting state for the acquisition limit device to activate, and displays an image with the shutter closed (an image that obscures the effects during the jackpot game). Then, an image such as "You are currently in a jackpot state. Please continue playing. After the win, the acquisition limit device will activate and the game will end." is displayed on the front side of the shutter image. At this time, the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) displays "Caution: Don't get too engrossed!", "Don't forget to take your card!", and "Press the counting button to count." The display continues until the final round, and when the final round ends, the first to fourth image display devices 70 to 73 are darkened, and the first image display device 70 displays "Acquisition limit device activated. Game ends for today" (standby information). In this case, the completion animation will not be performed, but it may be performed, and the first to fourth image display devices 70 to 73 may be darkened after the completion animation is finished. Also, information related to winning into the big prize slot 50 per round (count information) may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. For example, if it is possible to win 10 balls per round, 10 count images may be displayed, and an animation may be performed in which one count image is erased each time a ball wins into the big prize slot 50. Also, information indicating the game media acquired in a jackpot game, "Acquired XXX/YYY" (acquisition information), as shown in Figure 152, and information indicating the game media acquired in consecutive jackpot games, "ZZZZ" (total acquisition information), may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. Alternatively, only standby information may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image, and the count information, acquisition information, and total acquisition information may be displayed on the third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73. By displaying standby information in this way, indicating that the acquisition limit device is in a waiting state, it becomes easier to recognize that the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, if the system transitions to the acquisition limit device activation standby state while the normal symbol display unit 62 is showing a variable normal symbol, the variable normal symbol display may be continued. Also, if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 after the system has transitioned to the acquisition limit device activation standby state, the variable normal symbol display may be started. This configuration prevents the act of passing a game ball through the normal symbol gate 44 from becoming wasted simply because the system has transitioned to the acquisition limit device activation standby state. Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated while the variable normal symbol display is in progress, the normal symbol display unit 62 will be turned off, even if the display is still in progress.

Figure 160 shows an example of what happens when power is restored while information is being output. Specifically, it is assumed that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted when HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device operation information) is generated in step S450-6-8 of the "acquisition limit device operation determination process" and is being transmitted (output) to the frame control board 120 in step S600-2 of the "HC/fraud monitoring information management process", or when HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device operation information) is being transmitted (output) to the dedicated unit 170 in step W503 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification process". Therefore, the output control of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" in the figure may be read by the main control board 110 or by the frame control board 120. Furthermore, case (a) is the case where, upon power restoration, the "bulb removal operation in progress" flag is not detected in step W151 of the "frame control board bulb removal operation processing" (i.e., the bulb removal operation is not in progress), and case (b) is the case where, upon power restoration, the "bulb removal operation in progress" flag is detected in step W151 of the "frame control board bulb removal operation processing" (i.e., the bulb removal operation is in progress).

First, in case (i), the increment counter value reaches "95000" at timing (a), the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned ON at timing (b), and the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) at timing (c). The output period for the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is assumed to be from timing (c) to timing (e), and if it is up from (c) to (e), it is considered to have been output successfully.

Furthermore, suppose the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted (power outage, disconnection, etc.) at timing (d), which is during the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information." In this case, since the power supply was interrupted before the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" had elapsed, for example, if the main control board 110 was transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, the transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 would not have been completed successfully. Similarly, if the frame control board 120 was transmitting the "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the dedicated unit 170, the transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 would not have been completed successfully. Note that the value of the increment counter falls because it is reset due to the interruption of the power supply to the gaming machine 1.

Then, at timing (f), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored. At this time, if the ball removal is OFF (the ball removal operation flag is not detected as present), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) from this timing. This output continues until timing (g), at which point the transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is successfully completed, or the transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is successfully completed.

Then, at the following timing (h), specific control processes are restricted (steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "Main Control Board Timer Interrupt Processing" are not executed), and at timing (i), the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF by an employee operation. Subsequently, at timing (j), when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned ON with an RWM clear operation, the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned OFF.

Thus, if the ball removal function is OFF (the ball removal operation flag is not detected) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), it is possible to turn ON (output) the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") again from timing (f).

On the other hand, in case (b), if the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation flag is determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), then the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is not turned ON (not output) from that timing onward. In this case, after the processing of steps W152 to W159 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" is completed, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF and then ON again, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") will be turned ON (transmitted) from that timing onward.

Thus, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), if the ball removal function is ON (i.e., the ball removal operation flag is determined to be present), timing (f) restricts the re-turning (output) of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1").

This ensures that even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted while the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is being output, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") will be re-output at a predetermined timing. This prevents the transmission and reception of necessary information and improves the accuracy of information transmission.

Furthermore, the re-output of "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is also differentiated depending on whether the ball removal function is turned ON or OFF when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f). This prevents the misunderstanding that information indicating ball removal is in progress is being output, even though the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is being re-output while the ball removal operation is in progress.

Furthermore, the ball removal operation process and the re-output process of "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information where Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") are not mixed together, preventing the control processing of the frame control board 120 from becoming overly complex.

Furthermore, in case (b), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f), or if the ball removal is turned OFF immediately at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f). This eliminates the need to turn the power of the gaming machine 1 OFF and then ON again after the processing of steps W152 to W159 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" is completed, thereby improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, if the ball removal function is ON when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f) (i.e., the ball removal operation flag is determined to be present), the restriction on turning ON (outputting) the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") again from timing (f) means that it should not be turned ON again at timing (f). On the other hand, if the ball removal function turns OFF immediately after timing (f), as mentioned above, it may be turned ON again (it may be permitted to turn it ON again at timing (f)).

Figure 161 shows an example of information output timing for different situations. Specifically, it shows the information output timing when not in a jackpot state (during fluctuation display, during fluctuation interval) and when in a jackpot state.

First, in the case of a non-jackpot state (during fluctuation display, during fluctuation interval), at timing (a), the value of the increase counter reaches "95000", at timing (b), the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned ON, at timing (c), the "HC fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output), and at timing (d), the output is considered to have been completed normally. Then, at the subsequent timing (e), certain control processes are restricted (the processes in steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" are not executed). In other words, when not in a jackpot state (during fluctuation display or fluctuation interval), the period from when the increase counter reaches "95000" until the "HC fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is shorter than in the case of a jackpot state described later. Furthermore, the period from when the increase counter reaches "95000" until the "HC fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is generally constant. This "generally constant" is because, as mentioned above, when the acquisition limit device is activated after waiting for the symbols to stop in a confirmed position, the timing of the symbols stopping in a confirmed position differs slightly depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) being executed. On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated without waiting for the symbols to be finalized (activating immediately when the increase counter reaches 95,000), then the period from when the increase counter reaches "95,000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is constant.

Next, if a jackpot is in progress, at timing (a), the value of the increment counter reaches "95000", and at timing (b), the operation recognition flag is turned ON (see the acquisition limit device operation determination process in Figure 44). At timing (c), when the jackpot game (including the completion animation in this case) ends, the operation recognition flag is turned OFF, and the acquisition limit device operation flag is turned ON. Then, at timing (d), the "HC fraud monitoring information" (information that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output), and at timing (e), the output is considered to have been completed successfully. Then, at the subsequent timing (f), certain control processes are restricted (the processes in steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" are not executed). Note that timing (a) may be the first round of the jackpot game or the tenth round of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the case of the aforementioned "Type 1 & Type 2" scenario, it is also possible that a "minor win" is occurring. Therefore, the time period from when the increase counter reaches "95000" until the subsequent "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON is variable and undefined. In other words, during a big win, the time period from when the increase counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is longer than in the case of a non-big win scenario, and the time period from when the increase counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is variable and undefined.

In this way, the time between the increment counter reaching "95000" and the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") being turned ON (output) is made different for non-jackpot gameplay and jackpot gameplay. As a result, if non-jackpot gameplay occurs, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is output quickly, allowing the game machine information center, etc., to grasp the state of game machine 1 in real time and improving the management performance of game machine 1. On the other hand, if jackpot gameplay occurs, the output of "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") despite being in jackpot gameplay prevents confusion for administrators.
Furthermore, causing such confusion may necessitate verification of the gaming machine 1, which could cause discomfort to the players. This configuration, however, can prevent such issues. In this way, the accuracy of information transmission can be improved.

Furthermore, during a jackpot, the system may be configured to output "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") when the increase counter reaches "95000".

Figure 162 shows a scenario where an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, it assumes a case where, after the acquisition limit device has been activated, input (magnetic detection) is received from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110.

Timing (a) is when the acquisition limit device activation command is received, and the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is displayed: "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", "Don't forget your card!". The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Acquisition limit device activated," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Subsequently, at timing (b), input (magnetic detection) is assumed to have been received from either the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110. It is assumed that timing (b) occurred 5 seconds after timing (a). In this case, according to the priority order of notification event types described in Figure 129, the notification of fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error, priority 8) is executed instead of the activation of the acquisition limit device (priority 9) (with some exceptions for screen notifications). Specifically, the voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Magnet detected" at maximum volume, along with a siren warning sound. The third image display device 72 (left-side image display device) displays an icon image labeled "Magnet detected," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes red (40% brightness).

At this time, the first image display device 70 continues to display the notification of the operation of the winning limit device, "Winning limit device is operating. Gameplay is over for today" (with the exception of the above), but the messages "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!" are not displayed. Subsequently, when input (magnetic detection) from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b ceases to the main control board 110 at timing (c), the notification of the fraud detection 1 (magnetic detection error, priority 8) described above ends, and the winning limit device operation notification is executed again. However, since more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at timing (c), the winning limit device operation notification by the voice output device 9 has not been executed, and the operation notification by the first image display device 70 and the frame lighting device 10 is being performed.

Thus, even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, if the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b inputs (magnetic detection) to the main control board 110, a notification of fraud detection 1 (magnetic detection error) is executed. This prevents a decrease in security performance after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Furthermore, even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, if input (magnetic detection) is received by the main control board 110 from either the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b, notification is provided according to the priority order of notification event types as described in Figure 129. This prevents the notification priority from changing simply because the acquisition limit device has been activated, ensuring accurate notification.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 maintains the display of "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," but hides "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!". This ensures that while the acquisition limit device is recognized as activated, it prevents employees from overlooking the "Magnet detection" icon displayed on the third image display device 72 due to too much visual information.

Furthermore, in timing (c), when input (magnetic detection) ceases from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110, the system is configured to again notify the system of the acquisition limit device's operation. This allows the system to recognize that the acquisition limit device has continued to operate. This enables the system to take appropriate action (RWM clear operation).

Furthermore, at timing (b), the message "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today" may also be hidden on the first image display device 70. This allows the employee to focus their attention on the "Magnet detection" icon displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may maintain the displays "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Do not get too engrossed!", and "Caution: Do not forget your card!". This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden of display control.

Figure 163 shows a scenario where an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device has been activated. Specifically, it assumes a case where, after the acquisition limit device has been activated, an input (radio wave detection) is received from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120.

Timing (a) is when the acquisition limit device activation command is received, and the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is displayed: "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", "Don't forget your card!". The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Acquisition limit device activated," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Subsequently, at timing (b), input (radio wave detection) is assumed to have occurred from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120. In this case, according to the priority order of notification event types described in Figure 129, the execution of the acquisition limit device operation (priority 9) is maintained, and the notification of the fraudulent radio wave detection error (priority 10) is executed only on the third image display device 72 (left image display device). Specifically, on the first image display device 70, the notification of the acquisition limit device operation, "Acquisition limit device is operating. Game is over for today," continues to be displayed, but "Please press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Caution: Don't forget your card!" are not displayed. On the third image display device 72 (left image display device), an icon image labeled "Fraudulent radio wave detected" is displayed. In addition, the voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice message "Acquisition limit device is operating," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Subsequently, when the radio wave detection sensor 54a stops inputting (detecting radio waves) to the frame control board 120 at timing (c), the "illegal radio wave detection" display on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) ends, and the activation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed again. However, since more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at timing (c), the activation notification of the acquisition limit device by the audio output device 9 has not been executed, and the activation notification is being performed by the first image display device 70 and the frame illumination device 10.

Thus, if the radio wave detection sensor 54a inputs (detects radio waves) to the frame control board 120 even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, a notification of an unauthorized radio wave detection error is issued. This prevents a decrease in security performance after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Furthermore, even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, if the radio wave detection sensor 54a inputs (radio wave detection) to the frame control board 120, notification is provided according to the priority order of notification event types as described in Figure 129. This prevents the notification priority from changing simply because the acquisition limit device has been activated, ensuring accurate notification.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 maintains the display of "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today," but hides "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Don't get addicted!", and "Don't forget your card!". This ensures that employees are aware that the acquisition limit device has been activated, while preventing them from overlooking the "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detected" icon displayed on the third image display device 72 due to too much visual information.

Furthermore, in timing (c), when input (radio wave detection) ceases from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120, the system is configured to again notify the system of the acquisition limit device's operation. This allows the system to recognize that the acquisition limit device has continued to operate. This enables the system to take appropriate action (RWM clear operation).

Furthermore, at timing (b), the display "Acquisition limit device activated. Gameplay ends for today" on the first image display device 70 may also be hidden. This allows employees to focus their attention on the "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detected" icon displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may maintain the displays "Press the counting button to count," "Caution: Do not get too engrossed!", and "Caution: Do not forget your card!". This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden of display control.

Furthermore, while we have used "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," which has a higher priority than "Acquisition Limit Device Activation (Priority 9)" shown in Figure 129, and "Fraudulent Radio Wave Detection Error (Priority 10)," which has a lower priority than "Acquisition Limit Device Activation (Priority 9)," as examples for explanation, the same approach can be applied to other notification events. For example, notification events with a higher priority than "Acquisition Limit Device Activation (Priority 9)" shown in Figure 129 can be configured in the same way as "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" described above, and notification events with a lower priority than "Acquisition Limit Device Activation (Priority 9)" can be configured in the same way as "Fraudulent Radio Wave Detection Error" described above.

(Example of a presentation where the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while the machine is waiting for customers.)
Figure 164 shows an example of a presentation where the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while the machine is in a waiting state.

As shown in Figure 164(a), in the waiting state when no variation effects are being performed, the first image display device 70 displays three effect symbols 70a, and the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the counting button 20 is operated in this state, the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a counting notification animation is executed as shown in Figure 164(b). Specifically, an icon image that reads "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, there is one blue colored gauge) that changes the number and color of the colored gauges according to the counted quantity in units of 1000 are displayed, and the voice message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "8750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Subsequently, when the total number of game balls reaches 1000 (the initial achievement animation value), the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one to two, as shown in Figure 164(c), and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the voice "Yay!" corresponding to the initial achievement animation value is output. At this time, "8000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Then, as the total number of game balls increases by 1000, the number of blue colored gauges on the counting gauge image increases by one. When the total number of game balls reaches 3000, as shown in Figure 164(d), the number of blue colored gauges on the counting gauge image increases by one to four, and the voice message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "6000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Furthermore, when the total number of game balls reaches 5000 (the second achievement animation value), as shown in Figure 164(e), the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one to six, and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the voice "Yay! Yay!" corresponding to the second achievement animation value is output. At this time, "4000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Subsequently, when the total number of game balls reaches 9000 and the player's number of game balls becomes "0," the counting completion animation is executed, as shown in Figure 164(f). Specifically, an icon image saying "Counting process complete" is displayed, and the voice message "Counting process complete" is output. At this time, ten blue colored gauges are displayed as the counting gauge image, and "0" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After 5 seconds, the audio output of "Counting process complete" stops, as shown in Figure 164(g). After another 30 seconds, the "Counting process complete" icon image and the counting gauge image disappear, as shown in Figure 164(h).

(Example of a gameplay sequence where the number of game balls owned by the player is counted during a variation sequence)
Figure 165 shows an example of a game animation where the number of game balls owned by the player is counted during the animation.

As shown in Figure 165(a), in the waiting state when no variation effects are being performed, the first image display device 70 displays three effect symbols 70a, and the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the counting button 20 is operated in this state, the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a counting notification animation is executed as shown in Figure 165(b). Specifically, an icon image that reads "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, one blue colored gauge) are displayed, and the voice message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "8750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 45 and the variation animation begins, as shown in Figure 165(c), the reserve icon briefly displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B shifts and is displayed as that icon in the corresponding icon display area 70C. Also, behind the "Counting in Progress" icon image, the variation display of the animation symbol 70a begins, and the counting gauge image becomes semi-transparent and is displayed behind the animation symbol 70a in a non-priority state.

Then, when the total number of game balls reaches 1000 (the initial achievement value), the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the voice "Yay!" corresponding to the initial achievement value is output. At this time, the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one to two, and "8000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Furthermore, when the left and right display symbols 70a temporarily stop on the same symbol and a normal reach animation begins, the voices "Reach!" and "Counting in progress" are output, as shown in Figure 165(d). At this time, "7250" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After the normal reach animation time has elapsed, the SP reach animation sequence begins, as shown in Figure 165(e). Specifically, the left and right animation symbols 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen, and only numbers remain. The advanced animation image is then displayed behind the "Counting in progress" icon image. The advanced animation sound effect and the "Counting in progress" voice message are also output. At this point, the number of blue colored gauges on the counting gauge image increases by one to three, and "7000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Then, once the development animation time has elapsed, the SP Reach animation begins, as shown in Figure 165(f). Specifically, the first and second reserve icon display areas 70B and 70D become invisible, and the SP Reach animation image is displayed. The SP Reach BGM and the voice message "Counting in progress" are also output. At this time, "6750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Furthermore, once the SP Reach animation time has elapsed, the development animation for the SP Reach animation begins, as shown in Figure 165(g). Specifically, the icon display area 70C (including the icon) becomes invisible, and the three animation symbols 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. The development animation image is then displayed behind the "Counting in progress" icon image. The development animation sound effect and the "Counting in progress" voice message are also output. At this time, "5500" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After the development sequence has finished, the SPSP Reach sequence begins, as shown in Figure 165(h). Specifically, the SPSP Reach sequence image is displayed. The SPSP Reach BGM and the voice message "Counting in progress" are also output. At this time, "5250" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Then, if the SPSP reach animation fails and the animation period expires, the first reserve icon display area 70B, the corresponding icon display area 70C (including the icon), and the second reserve icon display area 70D are redisplayed. After the animation symbol 70a stops (after entering a waiting state), the count gauge image is displayed in front of the animation symbol 70a.

(Example of a presentation when the number of game balls owned by the player is counted after the acquisition limit device has been activated)
Figure 166 shows an example of a presentation where the number of game balls owned by the player is counted after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

When the winning limit device is activated upon the end of a jackpot game, an activation notification animation for the winning limit device is performed, as shown in Figure 166(a). Specifically, the first image display device 70 changes to a black background and the animation symbols 70a are hidden. In addition, the text images "Winning limit device activated. Game over for today" and "Press the counting button to count" are displayed, along with warning images "Caution: Don't get addicted!" and "Don't forget your card!", and the voice message "Winning limit device activated" is output. At this time, "95000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

When the counting button 20 is operated in this state, the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a counting notification animation is executed as shown in Figure 166(b). Specifically, an icon image that reads "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, one blue colored gauge) are displayed, and the voice message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "94750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. Note that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the animation image is not displayed in front of the counting quantity gauge image.

Then, when the total number of game balls reaches 1000 (the initial achievement animation value), as shown in Figure 166(c), the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the voice "Yay!" corresponding to the initial achievement animation value is output. At this time, "94000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Subsequently, as the total number of game balls increases by 1000, the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image increases by one. When the total number of game balls reaches 10000 (the third achievement value), the number of blue colored gauges on the total number gauge image reaches the maximum, as shown in Figure 166(d), and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the sound "Amazing!" corresponding to the third achievement value is output, and an animation is performed in which the colored gauge increases by one rank. At this time, "85000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Then, when the 10,250th game ball is counted, the colored gauge on the count gauge image returns to one and changes to yellow. After that, the number of colored gauges increases with every 1,000 increase in the game ball count, and the achievement animation and the color change of the colored gauge occur repeatedly with every 10,000 increase in the game ball count (reaching the achievement value).

Subsequently, when the total number of game balls reaches 90,000 (the 11th achievement animation value), the purple colored gauge on the total number of balls image reaches its maximum, as shown in Figure 166(e), and the achievement animation is executed. Specifically, the voice "Amazing! Amazing!" corresponding to the 11th achievement animation value is output, and the colored gauge is upgraded by one rank. At this time, "5000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

Subsequently, when the total number of game balls reaches 95,000 and the player's number of game balls becomes "0," the counting completion animation is executed, as shown in Figure 166(f). Specifically, an icon image saying "Counting process complete" is displayed, and the voice message "Counting process complete" is output. At this time, six rainbow-colored gauges are displayed as the counting gauge image, and the text image "Press the counting button to count" disappears. At this time, "0" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After 5 seconds, as shown in Figure 166(g), the voice output of "Counting process complete" stops, a congratulatory "Congratulations!" animation is played to celebrate the counting of 95,000 game balls, which triggers the acquisition limit device, and the error code "CP" indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After that, the display of the number of game balls "0" and the error code "CP" are repeatedly shown every 5 seconds. Then, 30 seconds after the counting process is complete, as shown in Figure 166(h), the "Counting process complete" icon image and the count gauge image disappear, and the counting notification and counting completion animations end.

As shown in Figures 164 to 166, it is possible to execute counting animations (counting notification animations, achievement animations) that indicate the counting process is underway while the player's number of game balls is being counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored while counting their number of game balls and to provide them with a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 164 to 166, it is possible to execute an ending animation (counting completion animation, celebration animation) that indicates the completion of the counting process (counting completion animation, celebration animation) upon completion of the counting process by which the player counts the number of game balls they possess. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the counting process has finished, and to avoid the inconvenience of the player continuing to operate the counting button 20 even after the counting process has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 164 to 166, when a variation effect is executed during the counting notification effect, or when the counting notification effect is executed during a variation effect, the counting gauge image is displayed in a restricted state (semi-transparent, on the layer behind the effect symbol 70a). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the interference of the variation effect by the counting notification effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 164 to 166, when a specific animation (development animation, SP/SPSP reach animation) that suggests a jackpot is about to be executed is performed during a variation animation, it is possible to hide various icons (the current icon, the hold icon) and the icon display area, while continuing to display the "Counting in progress" icon image and the counting gauge image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that counting is being performed even during a specific animation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 164 to 166, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls the player possesses has finished, it is possible to display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 164 to 166, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has finished, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 can alternately display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated and the number of game balls "0". Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the counting has finished.

Furthermore, in the counting notification display, the counting gauge image, which increases in number according to the counted quantity, may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display symbol 70a, rather than overlapping with the display symbol 70a. Alternatively, it may be displayed in a reduced size in a position that does not overlap with the display symbol 70a. Or, it may be displayed overlapping with the display symbol 70a during the waiting state, while being displayed in a reduced size in a position that does not overlap with the display symbol 70a during the execution of the variation display.

Furthermore, in the counting notification display, instead of displaying a counting gauge image whose number increases according to the counted quantity, a gauge image whose length increases according to the counted quantity may be displayed, or a numerical image that increases in accordance with the counted quantity may be displayed, or a meter image whose indicated value increases according to the counted quantity may be displayed.

Furthermore, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has finished, instead of displaying an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated on both the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, the error code may be displayed on either the frame control display 125 or the game ball count display 135, while the other displays the number of game balls owned by the player.

Furthermore, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls the player possesses has finished, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 may be configured to display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated, without displaying the number of game balls the player possesses.

Furthermore, while the effects corresponding to the counted quantity (count notification effects, achievement effects, and celebration effects) cannot be customized even through the game's effect customization settings, it may be possible to allow customization of one or more of these effects.

Next, Figures 167 to 174 will be used to explain the output of specific sounds in the variable sound effects patterns.

(Regarding specific sounds)
First, the specific sounds refer to the "temporary stop sound" output from the sound output device 9 when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and the "pseudo-symbol lead-out sound" output from the sound output device 9 when a pseudo-symbol that suggests the execution of a pseudo-consecutive performance is temporarily stopped as the middle symbol.

(Regarding the temporary stop sound)
The "temporary stop sound" is, for example, in the case of variation performance pattern 1 (normal variation), the sound is output when the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and when the last middle symbol temporarily stops. In the case of variation performance pattern 2 (shortened variation) and variation performance pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation), the sound is output when the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop simultaneously, and when the left, middle, and right symbols temporarily stop simultaneously.

Furthermore, for example, in variation pattern 5 (normal reach variation), the sound is output when the last middle symbol temporarily stops after the effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of left symbol, then right symbol, to form a reach. Similarly, in variation pattern 6 (SP reach variation), the sound is output when the last middle symbol temporarily stops after the effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of left symbol, then right symbol, to form a reach.

The "temporary stop sound" output in this manner serves to indicate that the display symbol 70a is about to stop, allowing the player to recognize the end of the reel spin by hearing the "temporary stop sound."

Furthermore, while it was stated that a temporary stop sound would be output when the last middle symbol temporarily stops during normal, normal reach, and SP reach variations, it is also possible to output a temporary stop sound when the left symbol or the right symbol temporarily stops (outputting the same or different temporary stop sounds for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols). Alternatively, it is also possible to output a temporary stop sound when either the left symbol or the right symbol temporarily stops (outputting the same or different temporary stop sounds for the left or right, and middle symbols).

Furthermore, even when the same variation animation pattern is executed, the "temporary stop sound" may be outputted as the same sound or as a different sound depending on the animation mode (for example, animation modes A to C).

Furthermore, the "temporary stop sound" may be output in all of the performance modes A-C (normal gameplay state) and performance modes D-E (specific gameplay state), or it may be output in one of them but not in the other.

Furthermore, the "temporary stop sound" output may differ between performance modes A-C and performance modes D-E. For example, the temporary stop sound output when the left performance symbol 70a (right performance symbol 70a) temporarily stops in performance mode A may differ from the temporary stop sound output when the left performance symbol 70a (right performance symbol 70a) temporarily stops in performance mode D. Similarly, the temporary stop sound output when the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in performance mode A may differ from the temporary stop sound output when the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in performance mode D. This makes it possible to recognize the game state from the differences in the temporary stop sounds.

Furthermore, the "temporary stop sound" may be output in, for example, performance mode A, but not in performance mode B, even when the same variation performance pattern (variation performance pattern 1) is executed.

Furthermore, even when the same variation animation pattern (variation animation pattern 1) is executed, the "temporary stop sound" may be output only when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops in animation mode A, but in animation mode B, it may be output when the left, right, and middle animation symbols 70a temporarily stop.

Furthermore, when the same variation pattern (variation pattern 1) is executed, the "temporary stop sound" is output when the left, right, and middle effect symbols 70a temporarily stop. However, the temporary stop sound for the middle effect symbol 70a may differ between effect mode A and effect mode B. For example, in effect mode A, the temporary stop sound for the left and right effect symbols 70a may be "bang," and the temporary stop sound for the middle effect symbol 70a may be "smack." In effect mode B, the temporary stop sound for the left and right effect symbols 70a may be "bang," and the temporary stop sound for the middle effect symbol 70a may be "pop." Alternatively, the temporary stop sounds for the left and right effect symbols 70a may differ, while the temporary stop sound for the middle effect symbol 70a is the same.

Furthermore, in the "Pre-read Chance Symbol演出 (Pre-read Chance Symbol演出)," different temporary stop sounds may be output for each sequence with a predetermined regularity. For example, when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed, different temporary stop sounds (same-color temporary stop sounds) may be output depending on whether the combination of symbols consists only of blue performance symbols 70a, only of green performance symbols 70a, or only of red performance symbols 70a. Also, different types of effect images may be displayed depending on the performance mode. For example, in performance mode A, one effect image covering all three performance symbols 70a may be displayed, while in performance mode B, three effect images covering each of the three performance symbols 70a may be displayed.

Furthermore, while it was stated that a temporary stop sound is output when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, configurations that output a stop indicator sound when the performance symbol 70a displays a stop (confirmed stop) without outputting a temporary stop sound, and configurations that output a temporary stop sound when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and also output a stop indicator sound when the performance symbol 70a displays a stop (confirmed stop), are also included in the output of specific sounds as defined in this embodiment.

Furthermore, during temporary stops and stop indications (confirmed stops), the display symbols 70a become easier to recognize than when high-speed fluctuations are being performed; therefore, temporary stops and stop indications (confirmed stops) correspond to "recognizable indications."

(Regarding the sound generated when the pseudo-pattern is derived)
Next, the "pseudo-symbol derivation sound" is a sound output when, in a variation performance pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed, for example, the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of left symbol, then right symbol to form a reach, and then the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops as the middle symbol. This sound is different from the temporary stop sound.

Furthermore, the "pseudo-symbol derivation sound" is not limited to being output when the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops as the middle symbol after a reach has been formed; it can be output according to the type of pseudo-consecutive-reel effect. For example, if the pseudo-symbol is temporarily stopped before a reach is formed to execute the pseudo-consecutive-reel effect, the "pseudo-symbol derivation sound" may be output at the timing of the pseudo-symbol's temporary stop.

Furthermore, in a variation animation pattern such as variation animation pattern 10, where a "pseudo-success" is performed multiple times, the "pseudo-symbol derivation sound" may be output each time a pseudo-consecutive success animation is performed (for example, when the pseudo-symbols temporarily stop), or different "pseudo-symbol derivation sounds" may be output for the first and second pseudo-consecutive success animations (for example, "Jakiin" for the first and "Pakaan" for the second). Also, the "pseudo-symbol derivation sound" may be common to multiple animation modes, or it may be different for each mode.

Furthermore, if the game features multiple types of pseudo-consecutive win animations (e.g., pseudo-consecutive win animation 1, pseudo-consecutive win animation 2), it may be possible to output different "pseudo-symbol input sounds" for pseudo-consecutive win animation 1 and pseudo-consecutive win animation 2. This makes it easier to recognize which pseudo-consecutive win animation is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The following provides a more detailed explanation of the temporary stop sound and the pseudo-symbol input sound.
Figure 167 is a timing chart showing the variable performance pattern 5 (start) in which a normal reach is executed. For example, in performance mode A, when the customer waiting performance A is being executed, a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and the variable performance pattern 5 is executed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, the explanation will be given in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 172. As an example, the explanation will be given in a manner in which a temporary stop sound is output only when the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, but as described above, it may also be interpreted as a manner in which a temporary stop sound is output when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop.

The timing of T1 is when the jackpot determination is made and the start command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Prior to this, the entry command (first special symbol memory designation command, first pre-read designation command) is sent when a game ball enters the first start opening 45.

At timing T1, the special symbol variation display begins. After a predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the winning command, the first reserve count display area 70E is updated to "1," and a reserve icon is added to the first display section (first area) of the first reserve icon display area 70B. Additionally, the normal background image is scrolling horizontally.

Furthermore, at timing T1, the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are stopped, and the sound effects, variable background music, and reach background music are not output.

Next, at timing T2, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the start command, the first hold count display area 70E displays "0," and the hold icon HI, which was displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B, begins to decrease in display (shift display) to the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance symbol 70a begins to float as a pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ begins vertical scrolling (update variation), and the audio output device 9 begins audible output of the variation BGM (Figure 172(b)).

Next, at timing T3, once the shift display of the hold icon HI is completed, it is displayed as the icon TI, and then the scrolling display (update variation) of the performance symbol 70a begins (Figure 172(c)).

Next, at timing T4, the first mode of the left symbol's performance symbol 70a begins a temporary stop (Figures 172(d) to (e)), followed by the first mode of the right symbol's performance symbol 70a beginning a temporary stop. Note that when the left symbol's performance symbol 70a and the right symbol's performance symbol 70a temporarily stop, pre-stop operations are performed.

Then, at timing T5, a reach is formed using the same symbol 70a (Figure 172(e)), and a normal reach (N-reach) is executed until timing T6. During the normal reach execution period, the variable BGM stops (is muted), and the normal reach BGM is output.

Next, at timing T6, the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops as the middle symbol's effect symbol 70a. At this time, the normal reach BGM stops, and the pseudo-symbol derivation sound is output as a sound effect. The pseudo-symbol derivation sound is a single tone, "Jakiin," and the output period is "1 second" (Figure 172(f)). Note that the pseudo-symbol is a symbol that appears only in the variation effect patterns where pseudo-success or pseudo-failure (Figure 112) is executed. Also, when the pseudo-symbol derivation sound is output, the temporary stop sound (e.g., "Pesh") is not output.

Next, at timing T7, the left, middle, and right symbols (70a) begin updating and changing again, initiating the pseudo-double variation of the pseudo-consecutive variation effect. During the pseudo-double variation effect, the previously muted variation BGM is made audible.

In other words, when the pseudo-symbols temporarily stop, the (re)update variation begins, creating the illusion that multiple variation effects are being executed, including the period before the pseudo-symbols stopped. On the other hand, after the pseudo-symbols temporarily stop, the display will never show a stop without the (re)update variation beginning; the (re)update variation will always start. Therefore, the "pseudo-symbol input sound" output along with the temporary stop of the pseudo-symbols serves to indicate the start of the (re)update variation, allowing players to recognize that a pseudo-consecutive variation effect is about to be executed by hearing the "pseudo-symbol input sound."

Furthermore, it was mentioned that when a variation sequence with a start sound notification is performed, the likelihood of a reach sequence being performed and the likelihood of a jackpot being achieved (higher jackpot expectation) are higher than when a variation sequence without a start sound notification is performed. This relationship may also include the pseudo-symbol lead-in sound. For example, in variation sequence pattern 17, since the pseudo-success is performed twice, the pseudo-symbol lead-in sound will be output twice. Additionally, by making the start sound notification more likely to be performed, the variation sequence with the start sound notification may be configured to output the pseudo-symbol lead-in sound more frequently than the variation sequence without the start sound notification. This allows players to predict the execution of a pseudo-consecutive sequence in the subsequent variation sequence when the start sound notification is performed, improving the enjoyment of the game by making the development of the sequence easier to predict.

Furthermore, while it was stated that a variation sequence with a start sound notification is more likely to result in a reach sequence and a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than a variation sequence without a start sound notification, it is also possible to make it less likely for a temporary stop sound to be output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode in a variation sequence with a start sound notification than in a variation sequence without a start sound notification. For example, a variation sequence that executes an SP reach or SPSP reach is more likely to have a start sound notification than a variation sequence that executes a normal reach, and a variation sequence with a start sound notification is less likely to output a temporary stop sound when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode than a variation sequence without a start sound notification. This allows players to predict the subsequent development of the variation sequence (such as developing into an SP reach) when a start sound notification is performed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game by making the development of the sequence easier to predict.

Furthermore, in a variation sequence where no start sound notification is performed, a special game is more likely to be executed when the second variation sequence is performed, compared to when the first variation sequence is performed, in which a temporary stop sound is output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode. Specifically, the second variation sequence, in which the temporary stop sound is not output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, includes a variation sequence pattern (variation sequence pattern 15) where an SP reach is performed and a jackpot is announced, and a variation sequence pattern (variation sequence pattern 16) where an SPSP reach is performed and a jackpot is announced. However, in these variation sequence patterns, the temporary stop sound is not output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode. This prevents the temporary stop sound from being overlaid with other sound effects (success sounds), which could make the sequence difficult to understand.

Figure 168 is a timing chart showing variation animation pattern 5 (end) where a normal reach is executed. For easier understanding of the invention, it will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 173. As an example, the explanation will describe a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output only when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops; however, as described above, it may also be interpreted as a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output when both the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop.

Up until timing T8, the update variation of the performance symbol 70a, which started at timing T7, is executed (Figures 173(g) to (h)). Then, at timing T8, the first mode of the performance symbol 70a of the left symbol begins a temporary stop (Figure 173(h)), followed by the first mode of the performance symbol 70a of the right symbol. When the performance symbol 70a of the left symbol and the performance symbol 70a of the right symbol temporarily stop, pre-stop operations are performed.

Then, at timing T9, a reach is formed using the same symbol 70a (Figure 173(i)), and a normal reach (N-reach) is executed until timing T10. During the normal reach execution period, the variable BGM stops (is muted), and the normal reach BGM is output.

Next, at timing T10, the first mode of the middle reel's special effect symbol 70a temporarily stops. At this time, the normal reach BGM stops, the variation BGM is audibly output, and a temporary stop sound is output as a sound effect. The temporary stop sound in special effect mode A is a single "pesh" sound, and the output period is "0.5 seconds" (Figure 173(j)). In other words, the variation BGM and the temporary stop sound can be output simultaneously. When the middle reel's special effect symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop action is performed.

Next, at timing T11, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the special symbol is displayed as stopped.

Next, at timing T12, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the stop display for the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins. At the same time, the disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C begins. At timing T13, the disappearance display of the icon TI ends, and at timing T14, the stop display time for the special symbol has elapsed, and a waiting period begins (Figure 173(l)).

Figure 169 is a timing chart showing variation pattern 5 (acquisition limit device activation) in which a normal reach is executed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, it will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 174. Furthermore, only the differences from Figure 167 will be explained.

In Figure 169, the value of the increment counter at timing T5 is not yet "95000" (Figure 174(e)). It is assumed that at the subsequent timing T5', for example, the value of the increment counter was updated to "95000" when a game ball entered the general prize slot 43.

In this case, the activation of the winning limit device triggers an activation notification, resulting in the pseudo-symbol output sound that should be output at timing T6 not being output (Figure 174(e)'). The activation notification of the winning limit device continues thereafter until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (Figure 174(f)).

Furthermore, while "no output of the pseudo-symbol derivation sound" means making it difficult to hear by completely stopping the output, it may also include methods such as making it difficult to hear by lowering the output volume of the pseudo-symbol derivation sound.

Furthermore, if the activation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed while the pseudo-symbol output sound is being output (Figures 167(f) to (g)), the output of the pseudo-symbol output sound may be stopped (for example, interrupted midway) or it may be output to the end, even if the output period of the pseudo-symbol output sound has not yet elapsed.

Furthermore, in Figure 169(e)', even if the increment counter value reaches "95000", if the acquisition limit device is to be activated after the symbol determination and stop, the pseudo-symbol derivation sound may be output in Figure 169(f).

Furthermore, even if the acquisition limit device is activated, the pseudo-symbol derivation sound may be output at the original output timing depending on the currently running variation animation pattern. For example, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of variation animation pattern 7, the pseudo-symbol derivation sound may not be output at the original output timing. However, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of variation animation pattern 10, the pseudo-symbol derivation sound may be output at the original output timing. In other words, it may be possible to restrict the output in some cases and not restrict it in other cases (it may be possible to restrict the output).

Figure 170 is a timing chart showing variation pattern 5 (acquisition limit device activation) in which a normal reach is executed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, this will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 174. Furthermore, only the differences from Figure 168 will be explained.

In Figure 170, the value of the increment counter at timing T9 is not yet "95000" (Figure 174(i)). It is assumed that at the subsequent timing T9', for example, the value of the increment counter was updated to "95000" when a game ball entered the general prize slot 43.

In this case, the activation of the winning limit device triggers an activation notification, resulting in the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T10 not being output (Figure 174(i)'). The activation notification of the winning limit device continues thereafter until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (Figure 174(j)).

Furthermore, while "no temporary stop sound output" means that the output is completely stopped to make it difficult to hear, this may also include methods that make it difficult to hear by lowering the output volume of the temporary stop sound (the same applies below).

Furthermore, if the activation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed while the temporary stop sound is being output (Figures 168(j) to (l)), the output of the temporary stop sound may be stopped (for example, interrupted midway) even if the output period of the temporary stop sound has not elapsed, or it may be output to the end.

Furthermore, in Figure 170(i)', even if the increment counter value reaches "95000", if the acquisition limit device is to be activated after the symbols have been confirmed and stopped, a temporary stop sound may be output in Figure 170(j).

Furthermore, even if the payout limit device is activated, depending on the currently running variation animation pattern, a temporary stop sound may be output at the original output timing. For example, if the payout limit device is activated during the execution of variation animation pattern 1, the temporary stop sound will not be output at the original output timing. However, if the payout limit device is activated during the execution of variation animation pattern 6, the temporary stop sound may be output at the original output timing. In other words, it is possible to limit the output in some cases and not limit it in other cases (it is possible to limit the output).

In the examples in Figures 169 and 170, it was stated that if the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is executed while the pseudo-symbol input sound is being output, or if the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is executed while the temporary stop sound is being output, the output may continue until the end. However, for sounds that are output in one shot (e.g., short tones), such as the pseudo-symbol input sound and temporary stop sound, the output should continue until the end (allowing for complete listening) even if the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is executed during output. For sounds that are not output in one shot, such as the variable background music, it is preferable to stop the output if the activation notification for the acquisition limit device is executed during output (making it impossible to listen to the end). By configuring it this way, the effort of performing a process to stop the output midway for short tones can be eliminated, simplifying the control process. Furthermore, by performing a process to stop the output midway for sounds that are not composed of short tones, such as the variable background music, it is possible to prompt the player to stop playing the game promptly.

Figure 171 is a timing chart showing the variable animation pattern 8 (at the end) in which the SPSP reach is executed. The explanation uses an example where the variable animation pattern 8 is executed in animation mode A. As mentioned above, it may also be interpreted that a temporary stop sound is output when the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop.

First, until timing T1, the special symbols are displayed in a variable form. Three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and vary (scrolling and switching) in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode A background image. Furthermore, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in its normal display mode, and the variable background music is audibly output.

Next, at timing T1, when the left and right display symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the same symbol (for example, symbol 5 in the first mode), and the middle display symbol 70a scrolls slowly, a normal reach animation begins. At this point, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted), and the output of the normal reach BGM begins. Note that in Figure 171, the mode of the display symbol 70a (first mode, numbers only) is shown at the bottom of the display symbol item. The normal reach animation is performed during the T1-T4 period using the display symbol 70a of the first mode.

Then, at timing T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect begins, the effect symbol 70a shrinks and is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompt effect prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompt image resembling the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "Press" is output from the sound output device 9.

Subsequently, at timing T3, if the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period expires, a development success animation is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach animation has been successful and the SP reach animation will be performed. Specifically, a development success image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the development sound "You did it!" is output from the sound output device 9.

Next, at timing T4, once the blackout effect has elapsed, the SP reach background image is displayed and the SP reach BGM is output, initiating the SP reach effect. At this time, the effect symbols 70a change to a display mode showing only numbers, and the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen, reduced in size compared to their normal size. When the effect symbols 70a change to a display mode showing only numbers and the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen, reduced in size compared to their normal size, no sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9; instead, the effect symbols 70a are displayed silently with their changed display mode and size.

Then, at timing T5, once the execution period for the SP Reach animation has elapsed, the SP SP Reach background image is displayed and the SP SP Reach BGM is output, and the SP SP Reach animation begins. At this time, the three animation symbols 70a are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a reduced size (numbers only), and the first reserve icon display area 70B, including the reserve icon HI, becomes invisible.

Subsequently, at timing T6, the SPSP Reach BGM output stops during the final stage of the SPSP Reach演出 (SPSP Reach演出), and the decisive animation begins. The decisive animation in the SPSP Reach can either indicate whether a jackpot game will be executed by having the player operate the animation button 17, or it can indicate whether a jackpot game will be executed without requiring the player to operate the animation button 17.

At timing T6, a "decision failure" animation is performed, indicating that a jackpot game will not be executed. Specifically, a decision failure image is displayed on the main display device 70, and a "ching" failure sound is output from the sound output device 9. Furthermore, when the central animation symbol 70a in the upper left corner of the screen temporarily stops at, for example, "6," all three animation symbols 70a temporarily stop at a "reach failure" combination ("565," numbers only). Note that when the central animation symbol 70a temporarily stops, the sound output device 9 does not output a temporary stop sound (for example, "smack"), and the "ching" failure sound serves the role of the temporary stop sound.

At timing T7, once the execution period of the SPSP reach sequence has elapsed, a first stop indication sequence (for example, for 0.5 seconds) is executed, suggesting that the performance symbol 70a will stop. Specifically, an eye-catching image that obscures the background image and the performance symbol 70a is displayed. Then, when the first stop indication sequence ends, at timing T8, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes, and the performance symbol 70a returns to its position before the start of the SP reach sequence and to its first configuration, displaying a temporary stop (temporarily stopped at "565"). Even during this temporary stop display, no temporary stop sound is output from the audio output device 9; the display of the eye-catching image is solely intended to suggest that the performance symbol 70a will stop (that the variation sequence has ended).

Furthermore, at timing T8, the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed along with the hold icon HI. Note that if no hold information for special symbol judgment is stored, only the first hold icon display area 70B is redisplayed.

Subsequently, at timing T9, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol display 60 displays the losing special symbol.

Next, at timing T10, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappearing begins, and the stop display for the performance symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") begins.

Then, at timing T11, once a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends. Then, at timing T12, the special symbol's stop display time has elapsed, and a waiting period begins.

According to Figures 167 to 174, the following points are characteristic features.
(i) The left, center, and right performance symbols 70a can be displayed in a variable manner. In variable performance pattern 5, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a temporary stop sound (T10 to T12 in Figure 168). In variable performance pattern 8, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can choose not to output a temporary stop sound (T6 to T10 in Figure 171). Furthermore, in variable performance pattern 5, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T9' in Figure 170), the audio output device 9 can limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T10 in Figure 170).

(b) The left, center, and right performance symbols 70a can be displayed in a variable manner. When the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a temporary stop sound (T10-T12 in Figure 168). When a pseudo-symbol temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a pseudo-symbol derivation sound (T6-T7 in Figure 167). In a variable performance where a temporary stop sound is output, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T9' in Figure 170), the audio output device 9 can limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T10 in Figure 170).

(c) The left, center, and right performance symbols 70a can be displayed in a variable manner. When the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a temporary stop sound (T10-T12 in Figure 168). When the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a pseudo-symbol derivation sound (T6-T7 in Figure 167). In a variable performance where the pseudo-symbol derivation sound is output, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops (T5' in Figure 169), the audio output device 9 can limit the output of the pseudo-symbol derivation sound (T6 in Figure 169).

These features produce the following effects.
In variation sequences (normal variation, shortened variation, normal reach variation) where a temporary stop sound is output, outputting a temporary stop sound when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops makes it easier to recognize that the variation sequence is ending.

Furthermore, in variation sequences where no temporary stop sound is output (SPSP reach variation), the final sequence outputs a sound corresponding to the judgment result (success sound, failure sound). By not outputting the temporary stop sound, it is possible to prevent the sounds from overlapping and making it difficult to hear the sound corresponding to the judgment result (success sound, failure sound).

Furthermore, in variation sequences that allow the display of an eye-catching image (SP Reach Variation, SPSP Reach Variation), the display of the eye-catching image serves as an indication of the end of the variation sequence. Therefore, the simultaneous output of a temporary stop sound can prevent the end of the variation sequence from becoming difficult to recognize (resulting in a double indication of the end).

Furthermore, even though the activation notification for the payout limit device has been executed, the temporary stop sound may be emitted at the intended temporary stop timing, which can give players a feeling of loss, as if a higher-probability event was being performed, and can also reduce the enjoyment of the game. Additionally, the output of the temporary stop sound can prevent the activation notification for the payout limit device from being disrupted.

Furthermore, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device does not output a temporary stop sound at the intended temporary stop timing, and the temporary stop of the display symbol 70a is also made difficult to see, thus preventing any visual or auditory discomfort.

Furthermore, in the variation animation where the pseudo-consecutive reel spins are performed, outputting a sound indicating the pseudo-symbols are being drawn when they temporarily stop makes it easier for players to recognize that the pseudo-consecutive reel spins are about to be performed, thus allowing them to focus their attention (and concentrate on the game) on the subsequent pseudo-consecutive reel spins.

Furthermore, this prevents the feeling of loss caused by the false symbol output sound, which might lead players to believe that a higher-probability event was being played, even though the acquisition limit device has been activated. It also prevents the false symbol output sound from interfering with the activation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Next, Figures 175 to 181 will be used to explain the output of specific sounds in the variable sound effects patterns.

Figure 175 is a timing chart showing variation animation pattern 1 (end), where the variation is normally performed. For easier understanding of the invention, it will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 176. As an example, the explanation will describe a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output only when the central animation symbol 70a temporarily stops; however, as described above, it may also be interpreted as a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output when both the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop.

In addition, in performance mode A, the variation effect is performed using the first type of variation symbol 70a, and in performance mode B, it is performed using the second type of variation symbol 70a (see Figures 127(a) and (b)). Furthermore, the appearance of the variation symbol 70a (the design of the numbers and characters) differs between performance mode A and performance mode B. Although not shown in the illustration, the ending of variation effect pattern 3 is the same as that shown in Figure 175.

First, from timing T1 to timing T2, the special symbols are displayed in a variable form. Three performance symbols 70a and three special symbols TZ are updated and vary (scrolled display, switching display) in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode A background image. Furthermore, the icon display area 70C displays the icon TI in its normal display form, and the variable background music (variable background music 1 in performance mode A, variable background music 2 in performance mode B) is audibly output.

Next, at timing T2, the left animation symbol 70a, which was scrolling (updating), temporarily stops (Figure 176(b)), and then the right animation symbol 70a, which was scrolling (updating), temporarily stops (Figures 176(b) to (b)'). Note that when the left animation symbol 70a and the right animation symbol 70a temporarily stop, pre-stop operations are performed.

Next, at timing T2', when the scrolling (updated) animation symbols 70a temporarily stop, the audio output device 9 begins outputting a temporary stop sound, the characters of the animation symbols 70a perform pre-stop actions, and all animation symbols 70a enter a temporarily stopped state (Figure 176(b)').

As shown in Figure 176, the temporary stop sound in performance mode A is a "pesh" sound, and as mentioned above, the output period is "0.5 seconds." The temporary stop sound in performance mode B is a "poko" sound, and the output period is also "0.5 seconds." Even when the same variation performance pattern 1 is executed, performance mode A and performance mode B differ not only in the appearance of the performance symbols 70a (the design of the numbers and characters) but also in the output of different temporary stop sounds.

Subsequently, at timing T3, once a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the temporary stop sound output, the output of the temporary stop sound ends. Also at timing T3, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the losing special symbol is displayed.

Then, at timing T4, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappearing begins, and the stop display for the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins.

Subsequently, at timing T5, once a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends. Then, at timing T6, once the special symbol's stop time has elapsed, a waiting period begins.

Furthermore, in Figure 176 (Variation Performance Pattern 1), a temporary stop sound is output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and when the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. Similarly, in Figure 173 (Variation Performance Pattern 5), a temporary stop sound is output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and when the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. In other words, if a temporary stop sound is output when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in both normal variation and normal reach variation, the temporary stop sound may be standardized. For example, a "smack" temporary stop sound may be output when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in normal variation, and the same "smack" temporary stop sound may be output when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in normal reach variation. Additionally, in variation performances where SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, a temporary stop sound may be output when the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (when a normal reach is formed). This prevents a decrease in anticipation of a big win, for example, if a "snap" sound is emitted when the left-hand symbol 70a temporarily stops, it does not negate the possibility of a reach occurring.

Furthermore, in conjunction with this, even when a strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) is executed during an SPSP reach failure (Figure 171) (Scenario 44 in Figure 110), if a normal reach is formed, a temporary stop sound may be output when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops and when the right symbol 70a temporarily stops. In other words, the output of a "snap" temporary stop sound when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops does not negate the execution of a highly anticipated effect, thus preventing a decrease in the expectation of a big win.

Furthermore, in the case of an SPSP reach failure (Figure 171), when a strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) is executed (scenario 44 in Figure 110), the sound effect (a "ching" sound that serves as a temporary stop sound) is more likely to be output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops displaying only numbers, compared to a normal variation (variation pattern 1). This makes it easier to recognize when the variation with the strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) has ended.

Furthermore, the temporary stop sound is more likely to be output when the symbol 70a in the first mode temporarily stops in the variation animation pattern 5 in Figures 167 and 168, which performs a pseudo-success once and results in a loss, than in the case where the strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) of the pre-announcement effect is executed (scenario 44 in Figure 110). In other words, as shown in Figure 110, the strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) of the pre-announcement effect can be executed in the variation animation pattern in which the SPSP reach is executed, and when the symbol 70a in the first mode temporarily stops in the SPSP reach, the temporary stop sound is not output. On the other hand, the variation animation pattern 5 in Figures 167 and 168, which performs a pseudo-success once and results in a loss, is executed only as a normal reach and does not develop into an SP reach or SPSP reach, so when the symbol 70a in the first mode temporarily stops, the temporary stop sound is output. This is why the above-mentioned relationship of "temporary stop sound being more likely to be output" is established. This allows for a more user-friendly gaming experience for players, as the rules governing the temporary stop sound are not disrupted by the executed effects (pseudo-success, pre-announcement effect effects).

Furthermore, in the embodiments shown in Figures 175 and 176, a "pesh" temporary stop sound is output in performance mode A, and a "poko" temporary stop sound is output in performance mode B. However, a "pesh" temporary stop sound may be output in both performance modes. In other words, as shown in Figure 176, although the appearance of the performance symbol 70a (design of numbers and characters) differs between performance mode A and performance mode B, the temporary stop sound may be the same. This makes it possible to visually indicate the currently running performance mode through the appearance of the performance symbol 70a, while making it easier to recognize the end of the variation performance (normal variation) audibly.

Furthermore, in performance modes A to C, when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) rather than the first number (e.g., 0), the variation performance pattern 2 (shortened variation) is more easily executed. Consequently, when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) rather than the first number (e.g., 0), the mode in which the left, middle, and right symbols simultaneously temporarily stop and a temporary stop sound is output is more easily executed. Similarly, in performance modes D to E, when the number of second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) rather than the first number (e.g., 0), the variation performance pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation) is more easily executed. Consequently, when the number of second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) rather than the first number (e.g., 0), the mode in which the left, middle, and right symbols simultaneously temporarily stop and a temporary stop sound is output is more easily executed.

For example, when employing a configuration in which a temporary stop sound is output for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, the output period of the temporary stop sound tends to be shorter when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of first reserved memories is the first number (e.g., 0). Specifically, when the second number is (e.g., 4), shortened variations are more likely to be executed, so when the left, middle, and right symbols temporarily stop simultaneously, the temporary stop sound is output once (0.5 seconds). However, when the first number is (e.g., 0), variations other than shortened variations (e.g., normal variations, normal reach variations) are more likely to be executed, so the temporary stop sound is output once (0.5 seconds) for each of the temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, resulting in a total output period of 0.5 seconds x 3 = 1.5 seconds for the temporary stop sound. Note that the output period of the temporary stop sound can also be interpreted as the pre-stop action of the performance symbol 70a. In other words, when the number of the first reserved memory is the second number (for example, 4), the execution period of the pre-stop action of the display symbol 70a tends to be shorter than when the number of the first reserved memory is the first number (for example, 0). This allows for the execution of effects (temporary stop sound, pre-stop action) corresponding to the variable effects performed according to the number of reserved memories, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game without creating any visual inconsistencies.

Furthermore, when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (for example, 4), the duration of the temporary stop sound output may be longer than or the same as when the number of first reserved memories is the first number (for example, 0). Also, when the number of first reserved memories is the second number (for example, 4), the execution period of the pre-stop action may be longer than or the same as when the number of first reserved memories is the first number (for example, 0).

Furthermore, when the performance mode is D to E, the output period of the temporary stop sound and the execution period of the pre-stop action of the performance symbol 70a may be the same whether the number of second reserved memories is the second number (e.g., 4) or the first number (e.g., 0).

Figure 177 is a timing chart showing variation pattern 1 (acquisition limit device activation), where normal variation is performed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, it will be explained in conjunction with Figure 181. Furthermore, only the differences from Figure 175 will be explained.

In Figure 177, the value of the increment counter at timing T1 is not yet "95000". It is assumed that at the subsequent timing T1', for example, the value of the increment counter was updated to "95000" when a game ball entered the general prize slot 43.

In this case, the activation of the winning limit device triggers an activation notification, resulting in the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T2 not being output (Figure 181(b)). The activation notification of the winning limit device continues thereafter until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Figure 178 is a timing chart showing the variable animation pattern 6 (at the end) when the SP reach is executed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, it will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 179. Although not shown in the illustration, the only difference between variable animation pattern 6 and variable animation pattern 7 is whether or not there is a "pseudo-success" at the beginning; therefore, the end of variable animation pattern 7 is the same as in Figure 178. Furthermore, as described above, it may also be interpreted that a temporary stop sound is output when the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop.

First, until timing T1, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, with three special symbols TZ updating and changing (scrolling display, switching display) in front of the horizontally scrolling Mode A background image. Also, the icon TI in its normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the variable BGM is audibly output. Furthermore, following the temporary stop of the left-hand first-mode performance symbol 70a, the right-hand first-mode performance symbol 70a is about to temporarily stop.

Next, at timing T1, when the left and right display symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same symbol (for example, the number 5), and the middle display symbol 70a scrolls slowly, a normal reach animation begins. At this point, the audible output of the variable BGM is stopped (muted), and the output of the normal reach BGM begins.

Then, at timing T2, when a dark background image is displayed on the main display device 70 and the blackout effect begins, the effect symbol 70a shrinks and is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and a prompt effect prompting the operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompt image resembling the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the normal reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompt sound saying "Press" is output from the sound output device 9.

Subsequently, at timing T3, if the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period expires, a development success animation is executed, indicating that the development to the SP reach animation has been successful and the SP reach animation will be performed. Specifically, a development success image is displayed on the main display device 70, and the development sound "You did it!" is output from the sound output device 9.

Next, at timing T4, once the blackout effect has finished, the SP reach background image is displayed and the SP reach BGM is output, initiating the SP reach effect. At this time, the effect symbols 70a change to a display mode showing only numbers, and the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen in a reduced size (Figure 179(d)). Note that in Figure 179(d), when the left and right effect symbols are displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen in a reduced size, no sound effects are output.

The SP reach in variation pattern 6 is a common SP reach that can be executed in performance modes A through C. Specifically, it is a "cooperative battle reach" performance that announces whether or not a jackpot has been achieved based on the result of multiple allied characters fighting against enemy characters.

Then, at timing T5, the SP reach result notification is executed. Specifically, the left and right performance symbols are displayed in the upper left and right corners of the screen in a reduced size compared to their normal size, while the central performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen in a larger size than its normal size (Figure 179(e)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T5, the audio output device 9 begins outputting a temporary stop sound in conjunction with the temporary stop of the internal display symbol. Here, a "pop" temporary stop sound is output, and the output period is "0.5 seconds". Note that the "pop" temporary stop sound output when the internal display symbol 70a, consisting only of numbers, temporarily stops in an SP reach is different from the temporary stop sound (the "pesh" in display mode A and the "poko" in display mode B) output when the internal display symbol 70a temporarily stops in a normal variation (variation display pattern 1) or a normal reach variation (variation display pattern 5). This difference in temporary stop sounds suggests that a variation display different from that of a normal variation or a normal reach variation has been executed.

Furthermore, at timing T5, no background music is played, and only a "pop" sound indicating a temporary stop can be heard. In other words, the output of only the temporary stop sound suggests the end of the SP reach.

Then, at timing T6, once the execution period of the SP Reach演出 (SP reach effect) has elapsed, a first stop indication effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed, suggesting that the effect symbol 70a will stop. Specifically, an eye-catching image that obscures the background image and the effect symbol 70a is displayed. When the first stop indication effect ends, at timing T7, the horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image resumes, and the effect symbol 70a returns to its position before the start of the SP Reach effect and to its first form, displaying a temporary stop (temporarily stopped at "565") (Figure 179(g)). Note that no temporary stop sound is output when the effect symbol 70a returns to its first form.

Subsequently, at timing T8, once the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the first special symbol display 60 displays the losing special symbol.

Next, at timing T9, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappearing begins, and the stop display for the performance symbol 70a ("565") and the special symbol TZ ("565") begins.

Then, at timing T10, once a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends. Then, at timing T11, the pause display time for the special symbol has elapsed, and a waiting period begins.

As shown in Figure 179, whether the variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode A or in performance mode B, the temporary stop sound output when the performance symbol 70a consisting only of numbers in the SP reach is temporarily stopped is a "pop" sound. In other words, although it has been stated that the temporary stop sound output differs depending on whether the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A or in performance mode B, in the variable performance pattern 6 in which the SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output whether it is executed in performance mode A or performance mode B. On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern 1, a temporary stop sound was output when the performance symbol 70a in the first form temporarily stopped, but in the variable performance pattern 6, a temporary stop sound is output when the performance symbol 70a consisting only of numbers temporarily stops, but no temporary stop sound is output during the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a in the first form (T7 to T9 in Figure 178). In other words, variation pattern 6 prevents the temporary stop sound from being repeatedly output.

In the examples of Figures 178 and 179, it was stated that in the variation animation pattern 6 in which the SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output whether it is executed in animation mode A or animation mode B. However, if there are SP reaches that are executed only in animation mode A (SP reaches exclusive to animation mode A) and SP reaches that are executed only in animation mode B (SP reaches exclusive to animation mode B), it is preferable to output different temporary stop sounds for the SP reaches exclusive to animation mode A and the SP reaches exclusive to animation mode B. This has the advantage of making it easier to understand which animation mode the SP reach corresponds to based on the difference in temporary stop sounds.

Figure 180 is a timing chart showing variation animation pattern 5 (acquisition limit device activation) in which SP Reach is executed. For the sake of easier understanding of the invention, this will be explained in conjunction with the drawing in Figure 181. Furthermore, only the differences from Figure 179 will be explained.

In Figure 180, the value of the increment counter at timing T4 is not yet "95000". It is assumed that at the subsequent timing T4', for example, the value of the increment counter was updated to "95000" when a game ball entered the general prize slot 43.

In this case, the activation of the winning limit device triggers an activation notification, resulting in the temporary stop sound that should be output at timing T5 not being output (Figure 181(e)). The activation notification of the winning limit device continues thereafter until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

According to Figures 175 to 181, the following points are characteristic features.
(ii) The left, center, and right performance symbols 70a can be displayed in a variable manner. In variable performance pattern 1, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a temporary stop sound. When variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "pesh" is output (Figure 176(b)'), and when variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "poko" is output (Figure 176(b)'). In addition, in variable performance pattern 6, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, the audio output device 9 can output a temporary stop sound. When variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "po" is output (Figure 179(e)), and when variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "po" is output (Figure 179(e)). Furthermore, in the variable performance pattern 1, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T1' in Figure 177), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T2 in Figure 177), and in the variable performance pattern 6, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T4' in Figure 180), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T5 in Figure 180).

(e) The left, center, and right performance symbols 70a can be displayed in a variable manner. In the variable performance pattern 5 in performance mode A, when the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound of "pesh" is output (Figure 173(j)), and when a pseudo-symbol temporarily stops, a pseudo-symbol input sound of "jakiin" is output (Figure 172(f)). In addition, in the variable performance pattern 6, when the center performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a temporary stop sound is output from the sound output device 9. When the variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "pop" is output (Figure 179(e)), and when the variable performance pattern 6 is executed in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "pop" is output (Figure 179(e)). Furthermore, in variation performance pattern 5, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T10 in Figure 170). Similarly, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the pseudo-symbol temporarily stops, it is possible to limit the output of the pseudo-symbol derivation sound (T6 in Figure 169). Also, in variation performance pattern 6, if the acquisition limit device is activated before the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops (T4' in Figure 180), it is possible to limit the output of the temporary stop sound (T5 in Figure 180).

These features produce the following effects.
Even with the same normal variation animation pattern, the temporary stop sound output differs depending on whether it is performed in animation mode A or animation mode B. This difference in temporary stop sound allows the player to recognize the currently running animation mode. Furthermore, it prevents the player from becoming bored with the game due to the repeated output of the same temporary stop sound.

Furthermore, in the variation animation pattern 6 in which the SP reach is executed, the same temporary stop sound is output whether the variation animation pattern is executed in animation mode A or animation mode B. This prevents the impression that the expectation level of the SP reach (the expectation level of a big win) differs depending on the animation mode. Additionally, the audio data can be standardized, contributing to data reduction.

Furthermore, this prevents the execution of the acquisition limit device's operation notification from being disrupted by the temporary stop sound being output at the intended temporary stop timing, even though the acquisition limit device's operation notification has been executed.

Furthermore, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device does not output a temporary stop sound at the intended temporary stop timing, and the temporary stop of the display symbol 70a is also made difficult to see, thus preventing any visual or auditory discomfort.

Furthermore, in the variation animation where the pseudo-consecutive reel spins are performed, outputting a sound indicating the pseudo-symbols are being drawn when they temporarily stop makes it easier for players to recognize that the pseudo-consecutive reel spins are about to be performed, thus allowing them to focus their attention (and concentrate on the game) on the subsequent pseudo-consecutive reel spins.

Furthermore, this prevents the feeling of loss that can arise from the pseudo-symbol outputting sound even when the acquisition limit device has been activated, leading players to believe that a higher-probability演出 (performance/event) was actually performed. It also prevents the pseudo-symbol outputting sound from interfering with the execution of the acquisition limit device activation notification.

Next, we will list some examples of applications for specific sound outputs.
For example, when executing the variable performance pattern 1, a temporary stop sound of "pesh" can be output in performance mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "poko" can be output in performance mode B (Figure 176). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the operation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is executed during the execution of the variable performance, the pre-notification can be executed in the same manner in terms of sound, design, and display position in both performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, it is not necessary to store the display data of the pre-notification for each performance mode, and a reduction in display data can be expected. In addition, since the pre-notification can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, a reduction in the control load can be expected.

For example, when executing the variable performance pattern 6, a "pop" temporary stop sound can be output in performance mode A, and the same "pop" temporary stop sound can also be output in performance mode B (Figure 179). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the operation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of the variable performance, the pre-notification can be executed with the same audio, design, and display position in both performance mode A and performance mode B. This eliminates the need to store the display data for the pre-notification for each performance mode, resulting in a reduction in display data. Additionally, since the pre-notification can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, a reduction in control load is expected.

For example, the appearance of the animation symbol 70a when executing a variable animation in animation mode A is different from the appearance of the animation symbol 70a when executing a variable animation in animation mode B (as shown in Figure 176, even the same "1" symbol has a different appearance of the animation symbol 70a). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the operation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is executed during the execution of a variable animation, the same pre-notification with the same audio, design, and display position can be executed in both animation mode A and animation mode B. This eliminates the need to store the pre-notification display data for each animation mode, resulting in a reduction in display data. Additionally, since the pre-notification can be displayed with the same control regardless of the animation mode, a reduction in control load is expected.

For example, the display of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in performance mode A and the display of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in performance mode B are made identical (as shown in Figure 179, during SP reach, regardless of the performance mode, the animation symbol 70a consists only of the numerical portion). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the operation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of a variable animation, the pre-notification can be performed with the same audio, design, and display position in both performance mode A and performance mode B. This eliminates the need to store the pre-notification display data for each performance mode, resulting in a reduction in display data. Additionally, since the pre-notification can be displayed with the same control regardless of the performance mode, a reduction in control load is expected.

For example, the temporary stop sound of the left symbol 70a (the symbol 70a that temporarily stops first) when executing a variable animation in performance mode A is different from the temporary stop sound of the left symbol 70a (the symbol 70a that temporarily stops first) when executing a variable animation in performance mode B, while the temporary stop sound of the middle symbol 70a is common to both. Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of a variable animation that outputs a temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound can be restricted. This prevents the execution of the acquisition limit device activation notification from being impaired.

For example, the temporary stop sound for the right-hand symbol 70a (the second symbol to temporarily stop) when executing a variation effect in performance mode A is different from the temporary stop sound for the right-hand symbol 70a (the second symbol to temporarily stop) when executing a variation effect in performance mode B, while the temporary stop sound for the middle symbol 70a is common. Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of a variation effect that outputs a temporary stop sound, the output of the temporary stop sound can be restricted. This prevents the execution of the acquisition limit device activation notification from being impaired.

Next, we will list examples of applications of specific sound output (particularly those related to acquisition limit devices).
For example, when executing the variable performance pattern 6, a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output in performance mode A, and the same temporary stop sound of "pop" can also be output in performance mode B (Figure 179). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the operation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of the variable performance, the pre-notification can be performed in a different form in terms of sound, design, and display position between performance mode A and performance mode B. As a result, for example, if the performance mode is switched after the pre-notification is performed, the form of the pre-notification (design and display position) may also change, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device is activated without becoming monotonous.

For example, when executing variation animation pattern 1, a temporary stop sound of "pesh" can be output in animation mode A, and a temporary stop sound of "poko" can be output in animation mode B (Figure 176). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the activation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is executed during the execution of the variation animation, different types of pre-notifications are possible for animation mode A and animation mode B, in terms of sound, design, and display position. This means that, for example, if the animation mode switches after the pre-notification is executed, the type of pre-notification (design and display position) may also change. This avoids monotony compared to when the same type of pre-notification is continuously displayed, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device activates.

For example, the appearance of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in animation mode A is different from the appearance of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in animation mode B (as shown in Figure 176, even the same "1" symbol has a different appearance of the animation symbol 70a). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the activation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of a variable animation, it is possible to perform pre-notifications with different audio, design, and display positions in animation mode A and animation mode B. This means that, for example, if the animation mode switches after the pre-notification is performed, the appearance of the pre-notification (design and display position) may also change. This avoids monotony compared to when the same pre-notification is continuously displayed, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device activates.

For example, the display of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in performance mode A and the display of the animation symbol 70a when performing a variable animation in performance mode B are made identical (as shown in Figure 179, during an SP reach, regardless of the performance mode, the animation symbol 70a consists only of the numerical portion). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the activation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of a variable animation, it is possible to perform pre-notifications with different audio, design, and display positions for performance mode A and performance mode B. This means that, for example, if the performance mode switches after the pre-notification is performed, the pre-notification's appearance (design and display position) may also change. This avoids monotony compared to when the same pre-notification is continuously displayed, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device activates.

For example, during the variation animation in performance mode A, variation BGM 1 can be output, and during the variation animation in performance mode B, variation BGM 2 can be output (Figure 176). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the activation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is executed during the execution of the variation animation, the pre-notification can be executed in a different form (audio, design, and display position) for performance mode A and performance mode B. This means that, for example, if the performance mode switches after the pre-notification is executed, the form of the pre-notification (design and display position) may also change. This avoids monotony compared to when the same form of pre-notification is continuously displayed, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device activates.

For example, different background images can be displayed during the variation animation in animation mode A and animation mode B (Figure 176). Furthermore, when a pre-notification regarding the activation of the acquisition limit device (see Figure 151, etc.) is performed during the execution of the variation animation, the pre-notification can be implemented in a different manner, with different audio, design, and display position, for animation mode A and animation mode B. This means that, for example, if the animation mode switches after the pre-notification is performed, the manner of the pre-notification (design and display position) may also change. This avoids monotony compared to when the same pre-notification is continuously displayed, making it easier to be aware of the remaining number of balls until the acquisition limit device activates.

For example, the variation animation includes a first specific variation animation (variation animation pattern 5) in which the first specific animation (normal reach) is performed and the second specific animation (SPSP reach) is not performed, and a second specific variation animation (variation animation pattern 8) in which the second specific animation (SPSP reach) is performed. In the first specific variation animation, when the specific symbol (the animation symbol 70a in the middle) temporarily stops, it is possible to output a temporary stop sound different from the variation BGM (T10 in Figure 168), and in the second specific variation animation, it is possible not to output a temporary stop sound when the specific symbol (the animation symbol 70a in the middle) temporarily stops (T6 to T10 in Figure 171). As a result, in the first specific variation animation, outputting a temporary stop sound makes it easier to recognize that the variation animation is ending. Also, in the second specific variation animation, not outputting a temporary stop sound prevents the sound from overlapping and making it difficult to hear the sound corresponding to the judgment result (success sound, failure sound). Furthermore, this prevents the end of the variation animation from becoming difficult to recognize (resulting in a double suggestion with the display of the eye-catching image).

For example, when the judgment result is a miss, there are two types of variation effects that can be executed: a first variation effect (variation effect pattern 7) that can execute a specific effect (SP reach) that can change the effect symbol 70a from a first form to a form with only numbers, and a second variation effect (variation effect pattern 1) that does not execute the specific effect. Furthermore, when the second variation effect is executed, a temporary stop sound is more likely to be output when the specific symbol in the first form (the effect symbol 70a in the middle) temporarily stops than when the first variation effect is executed. As a result, in the second variation effect, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the variation effect has ended by outputting a temporary stop sound. Also, in the first variation effect, it is possible to prevent the temporary stop sound from being repeatedly output, which would make it difficult to recognize that the variation effect has ended. Furthermore, "a temporary stop sound is likely to be output" can refer to a situation where the sound is never output by variation pattern 7, but always output by variation pattern 1, a so-called "0:100" ratio. It can also include situations where the sound is sometimes output by variation pattern 7, and sometimes not by variation pattern 1, such as a "10:90" ratio.

For example, in a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, a first temporary stop sound can be output when the first row of symbols 70a (for example, the left symbol 70a) temporarily stops, and a second temporary stop sound can be output when the second row of symbols 70a (for example, the middle symbol 70a) temporarily stops. For example, when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode A, a temporary stop sound of "bang" can be output when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a temporary stop sound of "smack" can be output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops. Also, when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed in performance mode B, a temporary stop sound of "bang" can be output when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a temporary stop sound of "pop" can be output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops. This makes it easier to recognize when the symbols 70a in each row have temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the central symbol 70a is the last to temporarily stop, it becomes easier to recognize when all symbols 70a have temporarily stopped, thus making it easier to recognize when the variation effect has ended. Additionally, since the temporary stop sound differs between effect mode A and effect mode B, it becomes possible to recognize the currently running effect mode from the temporary stop sound, allowing for greater diversity in the output of the temporary stop sound.

For example, when employing a configuration that outputs a temporary stop sound for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, the temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols may all be different for each performance mode. Specifically, in performance mode A, when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed, a "bang" temporary stop sound may be output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a "smack" temporary stop sound may be output when the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. In performance mode B, when the variable performance pattern 1 is executed, a "thud" temporary stop sound may be output when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a "pop" temporary stop sound may be output when the middle performance symbol 70a temporarily stops. This makes it easier to recognize that the performance symbols 70a in each column have temporarily stopped, and if the middle performance symbol 70a is the last to temporarily stop, it becomes easier to recognize that all performance symbols 70a have temporarily stopped, making it easier to recognize that the variable performance has ended. Furthermore, since the temporary stop sounds when the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop differ between performance mode A and performance mode B, it becomes possible to recognize the currently running performance mode from the temporary stop sound, allowing for greater diversity in the output of temporary stop sounds.

For example, in a configuration where a temporary stop sound is output for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, the variable animations that can be executed when the judgment result is a miss include a first variable animation (variable animation pattern 6) that can execute a specific animation (SP reach) that can change the animation symbol 70a from the first form to a number-only form, and a second variable animation (variable animation pattern 1) that does not execute the specific animation. When the first variable animation is executed, the temporary stop sound is more likely to be output when the animation symbol 70a in the second column (for example, the left or right animation symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first form (when forming a normal reach) than when the animation symbol 70a in the first column (for example, the middle animation symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first form (T7 to T9 in Figure 178). Furthermore, when the second variation effect is executed, the likelihood of the temporary stop sound being output is the same whether the first column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the middle effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode or whether the second column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the left or right effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first mode. This makes it easier to recognize the end of the variation effect by outputting the temporary stop sound during the second variation effect. Also, in the first variation effect, it prevents the repeated output of the temporary stop sound from making it difficult to recognize the end of the variation effect. Note that "the temporary stop sound is easily output" refers to the aforementioned "0:100" and "10:90" values.

For example, when employing a configuration that outputs a temporary stop sound for all temporary stops on the left, right, and center, in the case where a specific variation effect (variation effect pattern 6) is executed in performance mode A, the temporary stop sound output when the first column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the left effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first configuration and the temporary stop sound output when the second column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the right effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first configuration are made a common temporary stop sound. On the other hand, when a specific variation effect (variation effect pattern 6) is executed in performance mode B, the temporary stop sound output when the first column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the left effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first configuration and the temporary stop sound output when the second column's effect symbol 70a (for example, the right effect symbol 70a) temporarily stops in the first configuration are made a common temporary stop sound, but different from the temporary stop sound output in performance mode A. Furthermore, whether executing a specific variation animation (variation animation pattern 6) in performance mode A or performance mode B, a common temporary stop sound can be output when the third column's animation symbol 70a (for example, the right animation symbol 70a) temporarily stops (T5-T6 in Figure 178) (the "pop" sound in Figure 179(e)). This allows for the output of different temporary stop sounds depending on the performance mode for the first and second columns, suggesting a difference in performance modes, while simultaneously outputting a common temporary stop sound regardless of the performance mode for the third column's temporary stop, preventing the user from mistakenly believing that the expected value of a specific variation animation (the expectation of a jackpot) differs depending on the performance mode. Additionally, this allows for the standardization of audio data, contributing to data reduction.

For example, in a system where a temporary stop sound is output for all temporary stops on the left, right, and center, the left performance symbol 70a (right performance symbol 70a) can output a total of six types of temporary stop sounds in performance modes A to F. On the other hand, in addition to the total of six types of temporary stop sounds in performance modes A to F, the center performance symbol 70a can output a temporary stop sound (Figure 179) that is output when the performance symbol 70a is displayed as a number only in an SP reach, and a failure sound (which serves the role of a temporary stop sound) that is output when the performance symbol 70a is displayed as a number only in an SPSP reach. The number of temporary stop sounds varies between the left performance symbol 70a (right performance symbol 70a) and the center performance symbol 70a, with the center performance symbol 70a having more temporary stop sounds than the left performance symbol 70a (right performance symbol 70a). In other words, the temporary stop sound of the last row of symbols to temporarily stop has the most types of temporary stop sounds. Furthermore, if the last row of symbols to temporarily stop is the left or right performance symbol 70a, then the number of different temporary stop sounds at that point should be maximized. This configuration makes it easier to recognize the end of the variation animation.

For example, when employing a system that outputs a temporary stop sound for all temporary stops of the left, right, and center symbols, the temporary stop sound output when the left and right symbols 70a temporarily stop in the first variation (variation pattern 1) (e.g., "bang"), when the center symbol 70a temporarily stops in the second variation (variation pattern 5) (e.g., "smack"), and when the center symbol 70a (number-only display mode) temporarily stops in the third variation (variation pattern 6) (e.g., "pop") are all different. This allows for a richer variety of temporary stop sounds for each variation pattern, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when employing a configuration that outputs a temporary stop sound for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, the temporary stop sound output when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops will differ depending on whether the variation performance pattern 6 is executed in the first performance mode or the second performance mode (performance mode A is "pesh", performance mode B is "poko"). On the other hand, the temporary stop sound output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops will be the same whether the variation performance pattern 6 is executed in the first performance mode or the second performance mode (both performance modes produce a "po"). In other words, when a specific variation animation (variation animation pattern 6) is executed in both the first and second animation modes, the percentage of times the temporary stop sound output when the left animation symbol 70a temporarily stops is the same is the first percentage (including 0%). However, when a specific variation animation (variation animation pattern 6) is executed in both the first and second animation modes, the percentage of times the temporary stop sound output when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops is the same is the second percentage (including 100%), which is higher than the first percentage. This suggests that the animation modes are different, but by allowing a common temporary stop sound to be output when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops, regardless of the animation mode, it prevents the user from thinking that the expected value of a specific variation animation (the expected value of a jackpot) differs depending on the animation mode. Furthermore, it allows for the standardization of audio data, contributing to data reduction.

For example, when employing a configuration in which a temporary stop sound is output for all temporary stops of the left, right, and middle symbols, the temporary stop sounds output may differ depending on whether a normal variation pattern (variation pattern 1) is executed or a shortened variation pattern (variation pattern 2) is executed within the same performance mode. Specifically, in the variation pattern in which a normal variation is executed, a "bang" temporary stop sound is output when the left symbol 70a temporarily stops, a "bang" temporary stop sound is output when the right symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a "smack" temporary stop sound (first temporary stop sound) is output when the middle symbol 70a temporarily stops. In contrast, in the variation pattern in which a shortened variation is executed, a "pass" temporary stop sound (second temporary stop sound) may be output when the left, middle, and right symbols 70a temporarily stop. This makes it easier to distinguish which variation animation was performed, even though both are losing animations that do not result in a reach, by distinguishing between the temporary stop sounds, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the temporary stop sound tends to differ between the losing spin animation where a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0) and the losing spin animation where a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4). In other words, when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4), a shortened spin is more likely to be executed than a normal spin, and when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0), a normal spin is more likely to be executed than a shortened spin. Therefore, in the losing spin animation where a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a first number (e.g., 0), the first temporary stop sound is more likely to be output, and in the losing spin animation where a reach is not executed when the number of first reserved memories is a second number (e.g., 4), the second temporary stop sound is more likely to be output. This allows the number of reserved memories to be recognized from the output of the temporary stop sound, improving the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when executing a losing spin animation in performance modes A to C where a reach animation is not performed, the second mode, where the left, middle, and right symbols simultaneously stop and a temporary stop sound is output, is more likely to be executed when the number of first reserved memory units is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of first reserved memory units is the first number (e.g., 0), rather than the first mode, where a temporary stop sound is output only when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops (temporary stop sound output corresponding to shortened spins is more likely to be executed). Similarly, when executing a losing spin animation in performance modes D to E where a reach animation is not performed, the second mode, where the left, middle, and right symbols simultaneously stop and a temporary stop sound is output, is more likely to be executed when the number of second reserved memory units is the second number (e.g., 4) than when the number of second reserved memory units is the first number (e.g., 0), rather than the first mode, where a temporary stop sound is output only when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops (temporary stop sound output corresponding to ultra-short spins is more likely to be executed). This enables accurate temporary stop sound output according to the number of reserved memory units.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). When the second effect is executed, a change effect in which predetermined identification information (the icon, the hold icon) changes to a specific display mode (red icon) is more likely to be executed compared to when the first effect is executed (difference in the selection rate of the red icon between normal variation and SPSP reach in Figure 106). As a result, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced by the execution of the change effect.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the expectation of a big win increases as the effect progresses, making it easier to reach specific stages (e.g., SU effect modes "3," "4," and "5") in the step-up effect (step-up予告) compared to when the first effect is executed (differences in SU effect modes between normal variation and SPSP reach in Figure 118). This allows for improved gameplay enjoyment even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed, depending on the progress of the step-up effect.

For example, when the central display symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T7 in Figure 178 in variation effect pattern 6). Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, it is easier to execute a position change effect that alters the display position of the temporarily stopped display symbol 70a compared to when the first effect is executed (in Figures 179(e) and (g), the display positions of the left, center, and right display symbols 70a change, but in Figure 176, they do not change). This allows for improved gameplay enjoyment through position change effects, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in the variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (variation effect pattern 7). When the second effect is executed, it is easier to execute a symbol replacement effect (changing the symbol 70a that forms a reach, or changing the color of the symbol 70a that forms a reach) compared to when the first effect is executed. Therefore, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced by the symbol replacement effect.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects are possible: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). When the second effect is executed, the operation-promoting effect in the decisive effect is more likely to be executed than when the first effect is executed (in the decisive effect pattern determination table in Figure 123, the operation-promoting effect can be executed if it is an SPSP reach, but not in a normal variation). This allows for improved gameplay enjoyment through operation in the decisive effect, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed.

For example, when the internal display symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the first movable member 77b is more likely to perform a strong action than when the first effect is executed (in the development effect pattern determination table in Figure 120, a strong action is possible for SPSP reach, but not for normal variation). As a result, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed, the strong action by the first movable member 77b can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). The temporary stop sound includes a first temporary stop sound (a "pesh" sound in effect mode A) and a second temporary stop sound (a same-color temporary stop sound). The second temporary stop sound (same-color temporary stop sound) is more likely to be output when the first effect is executed compared to when the second effect is executed. This allows the player to focus on whether the first or second temporary stop sound is output during the first effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when the internal display symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). When the first effect is executed, it is easier to execute a predetermined pre-read effect (pre-read effect effect in Figure 108) compared to when the second effect is executed. This improves the enjoyment of the game during the first effect.

For example, in the variation animation pattern where an SPSP reach fails (Figure 171), when the animation progresses to an SP reach and the animation symbol 70a changes to a number-only display mode and is displayed in the left and right corners of the top of the screen (T4 in Figure 171), no sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) are output. However, when the animation symbol 70a in the number-only display mode temporarily stops (T6 in Figure 171), sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) can be output (the failure sound "ching" can be output). In other words, sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound, etc.) are more likely to be output when the animation symbol 70a in the number-only display mode temporarily stops than when it is displayed in the left and right corners of the top of the screen. This allows the output of sound effects (display sound, temporary stop sound) to give the impression that the variation animation has ended, making the game easier to understand even for players unfamiliar with the game.

Next, we will explain the "reach line effect" using Figures 182 and 183. The "reach line effect" is an effect that can be executed in the variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 4-23, 27, 28) where a normal reach is possible in effect modes A-C, and is displayed when a normal reach is formed. Furthermore, in effect modes D-E, it is an effect that can be executed in the variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 32-33, 38-55) where a normal reach is possible, and is displayed when a normal reach is formed.

Specifically, in variable animation patterns where only normal reaches are performed (for example, variable animation pattern 4), the word "REACH" is displayed as the reach line animation. In variable animation patterns where SP reaches or SPSP reaches are performed after a normal reach (for example, variable animation patterns 6 and 8), the word "CHANCE" is displayed as the reach line animation.

Furthermore, the reach line animation executed by the variable animation pattern may not be fixed, but rather determined by a lottery during the jackpot announcement animation determination process. In this case, it is desirable that for variable animation patterns where only normal reaches are executed, "REACH" is more likely to be determined than "CHANCE," and for variable animation patterns where SP reaches or SPSP reaches are executed, "CHANCE" is more likely to be determined than "REACH." Also, it is acceptable not to execute a reach line animation when forming a normal reach. Additionally, it is acceptable to determine a "WIN" reach line animation (a reach line animation that suggests a jackpot is confirmed) only in variable animation patterns where a full rotation reach is executed (for example, variable animation pattern 24).

Furthermore, the reach line effect is not limited to effects containing the words "REACH" or "CHANCE." It may also consist only of line images (linear images displayed from the left edge to the right edge of the display area) without any text. In the case of using only line images, the expectation of a jackpot may differ between blue and red line images. Specifically, red line images may be more likely to be selected in jackpot variation patterns and less likely in losing patterns, while blue line images may be less likely to be selected in jackpot variations and more likely in losing patterns. This would result in a higher expectation of a jackpot when red line images are displayed compared to when blue line images are displayed. Additionally, the expectation of a jackpot may differ not only based on color, but also between thin and thick line images.

Figure 182 shows the execution of the reach line animation for variation animation pattern 5. Note that (a1) to (a4) in Figure 182 show the execution in animation mode A, and (b1) to (b4) in Figure 182 show the execution in animation mode B.

First, (a1) and (b1) represent the timing when the left-hand symbol 70a temporarily stops. At this time, (a1) displays a background image corresponding to performance mode A, and the corresponding background music (BGM) is output. On the other hand, (b1) displays a background image corresponding to performance mode B, and the corresponding background music (BGM) is output. Different background images are displayed for performance mode A and performance mode B, and different background music is output for performance mode A and performance mode B.

Next, (a2) and (b2) represent the moment when the right-hand symbol 70a temporarily stops, and a reach is formed by the left and right symbols 70a (symbol 1). At this time, the output of the variable BGM stops (mutes), and the normal reach BGM is output. The normal reach BGM is the same for both performance mode A and performance mode B.

Although not shown in the diagram, the following effects are performed between (a2)(b2) and (a3)(b3). Specifically, when displaying "REACH" or "CHANCE," the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a reach state (for example, 1↓1), and then the entire display area is whited out. This whiteout makes part or all of the effect symbol 70a difficult to see. Then, while the whiteout fades out, images such as "REACH" or "CHANCE" are faded in. This makes "REACH" or "CHANCE" visible in front of the effect symbol 70a, which is temporarily stopped and in a reach state (for example, (a3)(b3)). In this way, displaying "REACH" or "CHANCE" after a whiteout following a reach state makes it easier to understand that "REACH" or "CHANCE" has been displayed (appeared) compared to not using a whiteout, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. The same applies when displaying line images.

Next, (a3) and (b3) highlight the formation of a winning combination by enlarging the display size of the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) compared to the state in (a2) and (b2). At this time, the enlargement of the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) makes the updating and scrolling display of the central performance symbol 70a more difficult to recognize than in (a2) and (b2). Furthermore, due to the enlargement of the performance symbols 70a, the character portion and the number portion (1) are also displayed larger in (a3) and (b3) than in (a2) and (b2), making it easier to recognize which performance symbol 70a formed the winning combination.

Furthermore, even when the left and right display symbols 70a (symbol 1) enlarge to highlight the formation of a winning combination, the special symbol TZ continues to update and change without changing its display size or other characteristics. Also, no winning line animation is performed for the special symbol TZ.

Furthermore, when the left and right display symbols 70a are enlarged to their maximum position, the background image naturally becomes difficult to see. However, the enlargement is within a range that does not overlap with the special symbol TZ, the corresponding icon display area 70C, the first reserve number display area 70E, or the first reserve icon display area 70B, thus ensuring the visibility of each display area and information. Note that when the background image becomes difficult to see, it means, for example, that even if a rainbow effect image (Figure 212, etc.) is displayed, it may not be recognizable as being displayed.

Then, with the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) enlarged to their maximum position, an image labeled "REACH" is displayed. Since the "REACH" image is displayed on a layer in front of the performance symbols 70a, the display of the "REACH" image makes parts of the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) and parts of the updating fluctuations (scrolling display) of the central performance symbol 70a difficult to see. The "REACH" image is the same image (display size, design, color, and shape) displayed in both performance mode A and performance mode B. Although the display of the "REACH" image makes some parts of the character portion of the performance symbol 70a difficult to see, the "REACH" image is displayed so as not to overlap with the number portion (1) of the performance symbol 70a, thus ensuring that the visibility of which number formed the reach is not reduced.

Then, when the "REACH" image is displayed, the audio output device 9 outputs the normal reach BGM along with the "REACH" sound. The "REACH" sound is the same for both performance mode A and performance mode B.

Furthermore, in (a3) and (b3), the "REACH" image is displayed after the performance symbol 70a is enlarged to its maximum position. However, the "REACH" image may be displayed first, followed by the enlargement of the performance symbol 70a to its maximum position, or the timing of the enlargement of the performance symbol 70a and the display of the "REACH" image may be simultaneous.

Furthermore, while it was stated that the "REACH" sound would be output when the "REACH" image was displayed, the "REACH" image could be displayed first and the "REACH" sound could be played later, or the display and sound could be played simultaneously, or the sound could be played first and the display later.

Furthermore, the system may display different "REACH" images (with different display sizes, designs, colors, and shapes) in performance mode A and performance mode B, or display different notations (for example, katakana and Roman alphabet notation), or output different voices for the "REACH" sound (for example, a male voice and a female voice).

Then, in (a3) and (b3), when the symbol 70a is enlarged to its maximum position, an action is performed by the character image of the symbol 70a (for example, the character image making a peace sign) (illustration omitted). In other words, when a reach is formed, the "reach formation action" is performed by enlarging the symbol 70a and the character image's action.

This "reach formation action" differs in its operation from the pre-reel spin and pre-stop actions performed in each performance mode. Specifically, in performance mode A, the pre-reel spin action is a floating display, and the pre-stop action is a shaking display where the character image of the performance symbol 70a shakes its head at the symbol's stopping position. However, the reach formation action is different from this operation. Similarly, in performance mode B, the pre-reel spin action is a shrinking display, and the pre-stop action is a shrinking display where the performance symbol 70a becomes smaller than its normal size at the symbol's stopping position before returning to its normal size. However, the reach formation action is different from this operation.

Then, when the display of the animation symbol 70a is enlarged to its maximum position for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the "REACH" image disappears, and the display size of the animation symbol 70a returns to the display size at (a2) and (b2). Furthermore, because the display size of the animation symbol 70a returns to its original size, the update fluctuations (scrolling display) of the animation symbol 70a within it become easier to see than at (a3) and (b3).

Figure 183 shows the execution of the reach line animation for variation animation pattern 5 (a1) to (a4), and the execution of the reach line animation for variation animation pattern 6 (b1) to (b4). Note that all parts except (b3) are identical to those in Figure 182, and therefore their explanations are omitted.

In (b3), the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) are enlarged in size from the state in (b2), highlighting that a reach has been formed. At this time, due to the enlargement of the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1), the update fluctuations (scrolling display) of the central performance symbol 70a are more difficult to recognize than in (a2) and (b2).

Furthermore, even when the left and right display symbols 70a (symbol 1) are enlarged to highlight the formation of a winning combination, the special symbol TZ continues to update and change without changing its display size or other characteristics.

Furthermore, while the background image naturally becomes difficult to see when the left and right display symbols 70a are enlarged to their maximum position, the enlargement is performed within a range that does not overlap with the special symbol TZ, the corresponding icon display area 70C, the first reserve number display area 70E, or the first reserve icon display area 70B, thus ensuring the visibility of each display area and information.

Then, when the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) are enlarged to their maximum display size, an image labeled "CHANCE" is displayed. Since the "CHANCE" image is displayed on a layer in front of the performance symbols 70a, the display of the "CHANCE" image makes parts of the left and right performance symbols 70a (symbol 1) and parts of the updating fluctuations (scrolling display) of the central performance symbol 70a difficult to see. The "CHANCE" image is the same for both performance mode A and performance mode B (the same image in terms of display size, design, color, and shape). While the display of the "CHANCE" image makes some parts of the character portion of the performance symbol 70a difficult to see, the "CHANCE" image is displayed so as not to overlap with the number portion (1) of the performance symbol 70a, thus ensuring that the visibility of which numbers formed the winning combination is not reduced.

Then, when the "CHANCE" image is displayed, the audio output device 9 outputs the normal reach BGM along with the "CHANCE" voice message. The "CHANCE" voice message is the same for both performance mode A and performance mode B.

Furthermore, in (b3), although the "CHANCE" image is displayed after the performance symbol 70a is enlarged to its maximum position, the "CHANCE" image may be displayed first, followed by the enlargement of the performance symbol 70a to its maximum position, or the timing of the enlargement of the performance symbol 70a and the display of the "CHANCE" image may be simultaneous.

Furthermore, the "CHANCE" image may be displayed in different modes (A and B) (with different display sizes, designs, colors, and shapes), or the notation may be different (for example, Katakana and Roman letters), or different voices may be output for the "CHANCE" message (for example, a male voice and a female voice).

Then, in (b3), when the performance symbol 70a is enlarged to its maximum position, an action is performed by the character image of the performance symbol 70a (for example, the character image makes a peace sign) (illustration omitted). In other words, when a reach is formed, the "reach formation action" is performed by enlarging the performance symbol 70a and the character image's action.

Furthermore, the "reach formation action" when the "REACH" image is displayed may differ from the "reach formation action" when the "CHANCE" image is displayed. For example, when the "CHANCE" image is displayed, after enlarging the performance symbol 70a to its maximum position, the action of the character image on the performance symbol 70a may be different (for example, the character image may perform an action of making a peace sign with both hands).

Furthermore, while the "reach formation action" is composed of the enlargement of the performance symbol 70a and the movement of the character image, it may also consist of either one or the other, or other elements (e.g., sound, lights) may be added.

Furthermore, while Figures 182 and 183 use performance modes A and B as examples for explanation, one of performance modes A or B may be replaced with performance mode C. Alternatively, both performance modes A and B may be replaced with performance modes D and E.

Furthermore, in Figures 182 (a3) and 183 (a3) and 183 (b3), the magnification method for enlarging the performance symbol 70a to its maximum position is the same for both (a3) and (b3). However, different methods may be used for (a3) and (b3). For example, in performance mode B, only the numerical portion of the performance symbol 70a may be magnified.

Furthermore, depending on the type of symbol 70a, the enlargement method used to expand the symbol 70a to its maximum position in Figures 182 (a3) and 183 (a3) and 183 (b3) may differ. For example, if it is an odd-numbered symbol, it may be enlarged more significantly than if it is an even-numbered symbol. Also, if it is a "7" symbol, a different performance method (e.g., movement of the number portion) may be added compared to other symbols.

Furthermore, when a reach line animation is performed in a variation animation pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive animation is executed, it is assumed that it will be configured as follows. For example, when a pseudo-consecutive animation is performed, it was stated that two normal reaches are formed in Figures 167(e) and 168(i). In this case, if the "REACH" image is displayed when the first normal reach is formed (Figure 167(e)), the "REACH" image will also be displayed when the second normal reach is formed (Figure 168(i)), and it will not be the case that it is displayed only the first time and not the second time. Also, in a variation animation pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed (for example, variation animation pattern 12), the "REACH" image is displayed the first time, or the "CHANCE" image is displayed the first time and only the "CHANCE" image is displayed the second time. In other words, the system does not display a "CHANCE" image the first time and a "REACH" image the second time. This prevents the visual impression that the "CHANCE" image indicates a higher probability of a big win than the "REACH" image, thus preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the reach line image has been downgraded from the first time.

According to Figures 182 and 183, the following points are characteristic features.
(h) Different background images (background for mode A, background for mode B) can be displayed for the variation animation in mode A and the variation animation in mode B, and a reach line animation can be executed when a normal reach is formed (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, a common reach line image ("REACH" in Figure 182) can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in mode A and when a normal reach is formed in mode B, and when the reach line image is displayed, an emphasis display ("reach formation operation") can be executed using the temporarily stopped left and right animation symbols 70a (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)).

(T) Different background images (background for mode A, background for mode B) can be displayed for the variation animation in mode A and mode B, and a reach line animation can be executed when a normal reach is formed (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE" in Figure 183) can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in mode A and mode B, and when a reach line image is displayed, highlighting of the temporarily stopped left and right animation symbols 70a ("reach formation operation") can be executed (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)).

Furthermore, when referring to the ability to display different reach line images depending on the performance mode, "different" means cases such as: in performance mode A, for example, executing variation performance pattern 4 and displaying "REACH" as the reach line effect, and in performance mode B, for example, executing variation performance pattern 6 and displaying "CHANCE" as the reach line effect; or in performance mode A, for example, executing variation performance pattern 6 and displaying "CHANCE" as the reach line effect, and in performance mode B, for example, executing variation performance pattern 4 and displaying "REACH" as the reach line effect.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, "different" also includes displaying different "REACH" images (with different display sizes, designs, colors, and shapes) between performance mode A and performance mode B, displaying different notations (for example, katakana and Roman alphabet), and outputting different voices for the "REACH" sound (for example, male and female voices).

(C) Different background music (BGM1, BGM2) can be output for the variable animation in animation mode A and the variable animation in animation mode B. In either animation mode, a common reach formation sound (reach) can be output when a normal reach is formed (Figure 182(a3)(b3)). Furthermore, when the reach formation sound (reach) is output, the left and right animation symbols 70a, which are temporarily stopped, can be highlighted ("reach formation action") (Figure 182(a3)(b3)).

(R) Different background music (BGM1, BGM2) can be output for the variation animation in performance mode A and the variation animation in performance mode B. Different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) can be output when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 183(a3)(b3)). Furthermore, when the reach formation sound is output, the left and right performance symbols 70a, which are temporarily stopped, can be highlighted ("reach formation action") (Figure 183(a3)(b3)).

Furthermore, when we say that different reach formation sounds can be output depending on the performance mode, "different" refers to cases such as when, for example, in performance mode A, the variable performance pattern 4 is executed and the display "REACH" is shown as the reach line performance, and when, for example, in performance mode B, the variable performance pattern 6 is executed and the display "CHANCE" is shown as the reach line performance; or when, for example, in performance mode A, the variable performance pattern 6 is executed and the display "CHANCE" is shown as the reach line performance, and when, for example, in performance mode B, the variable performance pattern 4 is executed and the display "REACH" is shown as the reach line performance (the sound is different for reach and chance).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, "different" also includes things like outputting different voices (for example, a male voice and a female voice) for "Reach," and outputting different voices (for example, a male voice and a female voice) for "Chance."

These features produce the following effects.
When a normal reach is formed, a reach line animation (display of a reach line image) is executed, and when the reach line image is displayed, the left and right animation symbols 70a that are temporarily stopped are highlighted ("reach formation operation"), making it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the animation symbols 70a.

Furthermore, in the highlighting display ("reach formation action"), the display size of the character and number portions is increased by enlarging the performance symbol 70a. This makes it easier to recognize not only that a reach has been formed, but also which performance symbol 70a formed the reach.

Furthermore, by enabling the output of audible alerts (such as "Reach" or "Chance") along with a highlighting indicator ("Action when Reach is Formed"), it becomes easier to recognize, both visually and audibly, when a reach has been formed.

Furthermore, in the variable animation patterns where the SPSP Reach is executed (for example, variable animation pattern 6), it is possible to output the "Chance" sound, which tends to give the impression of a higher level of expectation than "Reach," thus creating the expectation that a normal reach will develop into an SP Reach or SPSP Reach.

Furthermore, the "reach formation action" is designed to have a different action pattern from the pre-reel spin and pre-stop actions performed in each performance mode. This ensures that the formation of a reach is recognized without causing the player to mistake the "reach formation action" for a pre-reel spin or pre-stop action.

Furthermore, by enabling the display of different reach line images depending on the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the presentation and contribute to improving the enjoyment of the game. Additionally, by enabling the output of different reach formation sounds depending on the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the presentation and contribute to improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even when the presentation symbol 70a is enlarged by the "reach formation action," the appearance of the special symbol TZ remains unchanged. Therefore, even players who find the appearance of the presentation symbol 70a difficult to discern due to the enlargement can still recognize that a variation animation is in progress from the special symbol TZ.

Furthermore, even when the left and right display symbols 70a are enlarged to their maximum size, the enlargement is limited to a range that does not overlap with the special symbol TZ, the corresponding icon display area 70C, the first reserved number display area 70E, or the first reserved icon display area 70B. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to reduced visibility of each display area.

Furthermore, since the reach line image is displayed so as not to overlap with the number portion (1) of the presentation symbol 70a, the visibility of which numbers formed the reach is not reduced, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Next, we will list some examples of applications for the reach line animation.
For example, it is possible to output different background music (variation BGM1, variation BGM2) for the variation effects in performance mode A and the variation effects in performance mode B, and to display different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE") when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, when the reach line image is displayed, it is possible to perform an emphasis display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed by the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the pre-variation actions when executing a variation effect in performance mode A and when executing a variation effect in performance mode B are made different. On the other hand, a common reach line image ("REACH") can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in both performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, when the reach line image is displayed, a highlighting action ("Reach Formation Action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a can be performed (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the pre-variation actions when executing a variation effect in performance mode A and when executing a variation effect in performance mode B are made different. Furthermore, different reach line images ("REACH" and "CHANCE") can be displayed when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 183(a3)(b3)). When the reach line image is displayed, highlighting ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a is made possible (Figure 183(a3)(b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the pre-variation actions when executing a variation effect in performance mode A and when executing a variation effect in performance mode B are made different. However, a common reach formation sound (reach) can be output when a normal reach is formed in both performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, when the reach formation sound (reach) is output, a highlighting display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a can be performed (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the pre-variation actions when executing a variation effect in performance mode A and when executing a variation effect in performance mode B are made different. Furthermore, different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) can be output when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). When the reach formation sound is output, a highlighting display ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a can be performed (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the background image in performance mode A and the background image in performance mode B are made different, while a common reach formation sound (reach) is output when a normal reach is formed in both performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, when the reach line image is displayed, highlighting ("reach formation action") using the temporarily stopped left and right performance symbols 70a is made possible (Figure 182 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, the background image in performance mode A and the background image in performance mode B are made different, and different reach formation sounds (reach and chance) are output when a normal reach is formed in performance mode A and performance mode B (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). Furthermore, when the reach formation sound is output, the left and right performance symbols 70a, which are temporarily stopped, are highlighted ("reach formation action") (Figure 183 (a3) (b3)). This makes it easier to recognize that a reach has been formed due to the large amount of change in the performance symbols 70a.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). When the second effect is executed, the special display image (the "CHANCE" image in Figure 183) is more likely to be displayed as a reach line effect compared to when the first effect is executed (the "REACH" image is displayed in normal variation, and the "CHANCE" image is displayed in SPSP reach variation). This allows for improved gameplay enjoyment through the display of the special display image, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed.

For example, when the internal display symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be executed: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T8 to T10 in Figure 171 in variation effect pattern 8). When the second effect is executed, it is easier to execute a specific action effect (for example, the character image corresponding to the "CHANCE" image making a peace sign with both hands) as a reach formation action compared to when the first effect is executed (in normal variation, no reach formation action is executed, but in SPSP reach variation, the character image corresponding to the "CHANCE" image making a peace sign with both hands is executed). This allows for improved gameplay enjoyment through specific action effects, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects are possible: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 3), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T7 to T9 in Figure 178 in variation effect pattern 7). Furthermore, a specific effect (pseudo-consecutive effect) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot is possible, and a teasing effect (a teasing effect that teases whether the pseudo-consecutive effect will be executed) that builds anticipation for whether the specific effect will be executed. When the second effect and the teasing effect are executed, the specific effect is more likely to be executed than when the first effect and the teasing effect are executed (variation effect pattern 7 results in a pseudo-success and develops into an SP reach, while variation effect pattern 3 results in a pseudo-failure and does not develop into an SP reach). As a result, even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is executed, the teasing effect (success) and the execution of the specific effect can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, a variation animation (variation animation pattern 1) that does not perform animations related to pseudo-consecutive wins (hype animation, pseudo-success, pseudo-failure) (T2' to T3 in Figure 175) is more likely to output a temporary stop sound than a variation animation that results in a pseudo-success and a loss (variation animation pattern 7) (variation animation pattern 7 is the same mode as in Figures 178 and 179). This makes it easier to recognize the end of the variation animation, even in variation animations that do not perform animations related to pseudo-consecutive wins (variation animations with little change in animation).

Next, we will explain the characteristic features of rainbow emission using Figures 184 to 189.

First, "rainbow illumination" refers to the emission of rainbow colors (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet) by adjusting the color combinations, mixing ratios, and brightness of the full-color LEDs (red, green, and blue) that constitute the various light-emitting means. The periods during which "rainbow illumination" is performed can be broadly divided into three: during the customer waiting demo, during the variation performance, and during the jackpot game. The various light-emitting means include the frame performance lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the LED of the performance button 17, the LED of the movable performance device 77, and the first to fourth image display devices 70 to 73 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "image display devices"), as shown in Figure 1. Note that "rainbow illumination" in the image display devices is sometimes referred to as "rainbow display," but the two terms are synonymous.

Furthermore, the displays in the main information display device 59 (special symbol display 60, special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, special symbol hold display 63, special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-hand play display 67, status confirmation display 68) are designed not to emit rainbow light, but to light up or flash in a single color. Similarly, the displays in the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variation display, sub-second variation display, sub-first hold display, sub-second hold display, sub-normal symbol variation display, sub-normal symbol hold display, sub-right-hand play display) are also designed not to emit rainbow light, but to light up or flash in a single color.

The frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17 are both categorized as frame lighting device 10, and the panel LED 5b and the LED of the movable effect device 77 are both categorized as panel lighting device 76. However, even within the same category of frame lighting device 10, it is possible to illuminate the frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17 individually (rainbow emission), or to illuminate them simultaneously (rainbow emission). The same applies to the panel lighting device 76. Furthermore, in the timing charts of Figures 184 to 189, for convenience, "frame lighting device" is used, but strictly speaking, it refers to the frame effect lamp 10c and the LED of the effect button 17, and "panel lighting device" strictly refers to the panel LED 5b and the LED of the movable effect device 77. The lighting means used in each state (customer waiting demo effect, variation effect, jackpot game) will be described later in Figure 208.

The rainbow illumination patterns are defined for each of the following stages: during the customer waiting demo, during the variation animation, and during the jackpot game. Details of these illumination patterns will be described later in Figure 221. Note that even with the same color, the brightness or the color of the emitted light may differ during the customer waiting demo, variation animation, and jackpot game. For example, even when using the same blue, a lighter blue may be used during the customer waiting demo, and a darker blue during the variation animation to create different decorative effects. Alternatively, the system may offer both a seven-color illumination pattern and a six-color illumination pattern to create different decorative effects. Furthermore, in addition to the seven colors mentioned above (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet), the rainbow illumination may also be performed using eight colors, for example, including "white."

The following describes in detail the rainbow emission during each execution period.
Figure 184 shows the execution of the rainbow light effect during the customer waiting animation. Here, we will explain from the timing T4, when the customer waiting animation begins.

First, at timing T4, once the special symbol's stop display time has elapsed and the waiting period begins, the customer waiting animation A (see Figure 153) starts, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 begin illuminating during the customer waiting period. The customer waiting illumination is, for example, a white-based illumination pattern, with the illuminated areas changing over time.

Next, at timing T5, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting animation A without any starting wins or other events, the customer waiting animation B (see Figure 153) will begin. Here, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 will continue to illuminate while waiting for customers. Furthermore, the audible output of the variable BGM will stop (mute) at the end of the customer waiting animation A. Although not shown in Figure 153, in customer waiting animation A and customer waiting animation B, the first reserved number display area 70E, the second reserved number display area 70F (both displaying "0"), and the special symbol TZ (displaying "523") are visibly displayed.

Next, at timing T6, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting animation B without any starting wins, the customer waiting demo animation A (see Figure 153) will start. When the customer waiting demo animation A starts, the horizontal scrolling image of the normal background that was displayed on the first image display device 70 will disappear, and the word "DEMO" (for example, in blue text) and a demo movie image (character movie image) will be displayed. When the horizontal scrolling image of the normal background disappears, the animation symbols 70a become difficult to see in both customer waiting demo animations A and B, but the special symbol TZ, the first reserve number display area 70E, and the second reserve number display area 70F (both displaying "0") remain visible (not shown). Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 start the demo illumination 1. The demo illumination 1 is, for example, a lighting pattern based on white and blue, and the lighting locations and colors change over time. Furthermore, compared to Demo Lighting 3 (described later), Demo Lighting 1 features a greater number of colors, a faster rate of change (movement speed) of the illuminated areas, and a wider range of change directions (movement directions). This lighting pattern is designed to decorate the demo movie image (character movie image) as if it were undergoing a dynamic visual effect.

Next, at timing T7, if a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting demo performance A without any starting prize wins, the display content of the first image display device 70 and the illumination patterns of the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 change. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays "DEMO" (e.g., in blue text) and the name and logo of the gaming machine (both containing text) (see Figure 153). Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 begin demo illumination 2. Here, the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 emit rainbow light at the timing when the gaming machine name and logo are displayed, decorating the gaming machine name and logo in the most spectacular way. Note that the display of the rainbow effect image on the image display device is restricted to prevent the misunderstanding that the gaming machine name and logo include a rainbow design.

The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 emitting rainbow light at the timing when the gaming machine's model name and logo are displayed is precisely as follows: Specifically, first, the gaming machine's model name and logo fade in on the first image display device 70. Then, when the brightness of the gaming machine's model name and logo during the fade-in is about 40%, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 begin emitting rainbow light, and the rainbow light continues even when the fade-in is complete and the brightness of the gaming machine's model name and logo is 100%. In this case, at low brightness levels, the rainbow light should start in a manner that makes it difficult for players to recognize it as rainbow colors (for example, a slow rate of color change, using fewer colors, etc.), and as the brightness increases, the light should be emitted in a manner that makes it easy for players to recognize it as rainbow colors (for example, a fast rate of color change, using all seven colors, etc.). This allows the machine's model name and logo to be gradually recognized, as well as the rainbow illumination, enabling more elaborate and visually appealing displays for the machine's model name and logo, thus creating a more decorative and engaging customer-waiting experience.

Furthermore, while it was stated that the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 emit a rainbow light when the machine model name and logo (both containing text) are displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may also emit a rainbow light when information that does not contain text is displayed, not limited to the machine model name and logo (both containing text). For example, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may emit a rainbow light when a character symbolizing the machine manufacturer (for example, a character that can appear as a jackpot confirmation effect) is displayed.

Furthermore, the rainbow illumination during the customer waiting demo effect A is performed by the frame effect lamp 10c in the frame lighting device 10, but not by the LED of the effect button 17 (see Figure 208). Also, it is performed by the panel surface LED 5b in the panel lighting device 76, but not by the LED of the movable effect device 77 (see Figure 208). Furthermore, it is not performed by the first image display device 70 to the fourth image display device 73 (see Figure 208).

Furthermore, during the rainbow light display while the customer-waiting demo performance A is running, no background music or sound effects are output from the audio output device 9; the system is silent. This prevents the customer-waiting demo performance A from becoming excessive (unnecessarily encouraging players to continue playing).

Next, at timing T8, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the waiting demo performance A without any starting prizes being won, the waiting demo performance B (see Figure 153) will start. When the waiting demo performance B starts, the model name and logo of the gaming machine that were displayed on the first image display device 70 will be hidden, and a predetermined warning notification display (see Figure 153) will start. Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 will start demo illumination 3. Demo illumination 3 is, for example, a white-based illumination pattern, and the illuminated locations and colors will change over time. Also, while demo illumination 3 is running, the execution of demo illumination 2 is restricted, and the predetermined warning notification display will not be elaborately decorated with rainbow illumination. In addition, the image display device (first image display device 70) will not display a rainbow because it is executing the predetermined warning notification display. In other words, while the predetermined warning notification display is running, the execution of rainbow illumination is restricted in the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, and the image display device (first image display device 70). Then, when the execution period of the predetermined warning notification display has elapsed, the predetermined warning notification display is hidden at timing T9. The predetermined warning notification display, as shown in Figure 153, is information including text such as "Caution: Caution!

Furthermore, when displaying each of the designated warning indicators individually, there may be overlaps with the rainbow illumination period depending on the type of warning indicator. For example, the display period for "Caution: Beware of Addiction!" may be a white illumination period, while the display period for "No Tapping the Table" may be a rainbow illumination period. Also, even when displaying the designated warning indicators simultaneously, there may be overlaps with the rainbow illumination period for some periods. In other words, the restriction on the implementation of rainbow illumination means that, in principle, the display periods of the designated warning indicators and the rainbow illumination period do not overlap, but there may be some overlap.

Furthermore, while both customer-waiting demo sequences A and B assume that the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F (both displaying "0") are visible, this is not limited to these scenarios. Alternatively, the special symbol TZ may be difficult to see, while the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F (both displaying "0") are visible; or the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F may be difficult to see, while the special symbol TZ is visible; or all three—the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number display area 70F—may be difficult to see.

Furthermore, during the customer-waiting demo, the "company name" (including text) of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. If the "company name" is displayed, it should be illuminated with a rainbow effect during this period, similar to the display period of the machine's model name and logo. This will effectively promote the "company name."

Furthermore, during the customer waiting demo, one of the following may be displayed: the machine's model name, logo, company name, or a designated warning/promotional display; two of these may be displayed; or all three may be displayed. The combination of displayed information may also vary depending on the game state. In this case, it is preferable that the number of display combinations be greater in the normal game state compared to specific game states (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state). This allows for increased visibility of various information by displaying it in the normal game state, which is more likely to transition to the customer waiting demo compared to specific game states.

Figure 185 shows the execution patterns of rainbow illumination during the variation animation and during jackpot gameplay. Here, we will explain using the variation animation pattern in which the SPSP Reach is executed as an example.

First, timing T1 occurs during the execution of the SPSP Reach. Here, the special symbols are performing a variable display, the SPSP Reach background image is displayed as the background image, and the performance symbols and special symbols are performing update variations. Furthermore, the SPSP Reach BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are performing SPSP Reach illumination. Also, the icon TI in its normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Next, at timing T2, a prompting animation to encourage operation of the performance button 17 and the effective period of the performance button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image resembling the performance button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the SPSP Reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompting sound "Press" is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, at timing T3, when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period expires, a success sound (e.g., "kyuin") corresponding to the judgment result is output, and the performance symbol 70a, which displays only numbers (e.g., "555"), temporarily stops. Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 finish their SPSP reach illumination and begin rainbow illumination. Furthermore, the button drive device 17b is driven to start the vibration of the performance button 17. In other words, during the rainbow illumination of the variation performance, unlike the rainbow illumination of the customer-waiting demo performance A, a sound effect (success sound) is output from the sound output device 9. This enhances the entertainment value of the variation performance and makes it easier to distinguish between the variation performance and the customer-waiting demo performance A.

Next, at timing T4, once the output period for the success sound corresponding to the judgment result has elapsed, the output of the success sound stops. Then, at timing T4, with the numerical display mode of the performance symbol 70a (for example, "555") temporarily stopped, a new temporary stop sound corresponding to a jackpot, "Kakiin," is output until timing T5. After that, at timing T5, once the special symbol's variation time has elapsed, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. Also, the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first special symbol display 60.

Next, at timing T6, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the stop command, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C disappearing begins, and the stop display of the performance symbol 70a (e.g., "555") and the special symbol TZ (e.g., "555") in numerical display mode begins. Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 end their rainbow illumination and begin white illumination. Furthermore, the button drive device 17b stops driving, and the vibration of the performance button 17 ceases.

Then, at timing T7, once a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the disappearance animation of the icon TI, the disappearance animation of the icon TI ends.

Next, between timings T7 and T8, a command to specify the jackpot opening is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. At timing T8, after a predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the jackpot opening command, the jackpot opening background image is displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 begin emitting the jackpot opening light. The jackpot opening light emission is, for example, a white-based emission pattern, with the illuminated areas changing over time. Although not shown in the diagram, the audio output device 9 also begins outputting the jackpot opening background music.

Next, between timings T8 and T9, a round number specification command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. At timing T9, after a predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the round number specification command, the jackpot round background image is displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 begin emitting jackpot round light. The jackpot round light emission is, for example, based on blue and white, and the lit areas change over time. Although not shown in the diagram, the audio output device 9 stops outputting the jackpot opening BGM and starts outputting the jackpot round BGM.

Next, at the timing between T8 and T9, a round interval specification command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130. At the timing of T10, after a predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the round interval specification command, the round interval background (an image with a rainbow effect) is displayed as the background image, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 begin round interval illumination (rainbow illumination).

The light emission patterns shown are merely examples; rainbow emission and rainbow display may be performed during the jackpot opening or during the jackpot rounds. In particular, when an effect is performed during the jackpot rounds to indicate whether or not the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state) after the jackpot game ends, it is preferable to elaborately decorate the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 with rainbow emission to indicate that a favorable game state has been obtained for the player. In this case, rainbow emission for jackpot upgrade effects may also be provided.

Furthermore, during a jackpot round, if an animation is performed to indicate whether or not the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state) after the jackpot game ends, if the animation indicates a transition to the high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state), the rainbow flashing animation used for promotion during the jackpot game should be activated. Conversely, if the animation indicates that the game will not transition to the high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state), the execution of the rainbow flashing animation used for promotion during the jackpot game should be restricted, and the rainbow flashing animation may be restricted until the start of the jackpot ending (until T5 in Figure 186). This prevents the player from being disappointed by the rainbow flashing animation being activated after being notified that the game will not transition to the high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state).

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 185, the performance symbol 70a is configured to remain displayed in its numerical-only display mode. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; it may also be configured to revert from the numerical-only display mode to the first mode of the performance symbol 70a before being displayed. Even in this case, the "ka-ching" sound output in T4-T5 is output only when the performance symbol 70a is in its numerical-only display mode.

Furthermore, while the example in Figure 185 describes a rainbow light emission during a variation animation occurring between timings T3 and T6, in the case of a jackpot, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 may emit rainbow light before timing T3 (the timing for announcing the result). For example, the rainbow light emission may occur before the execution of the reach animation, or during the execution of the reach animation.

Furthermore, the entire or surrounding area of the symbol 70a, which is temporarily stopped to indicate a jackpot, may be displayed in a rainbow pattern. This allows for a more visually appealing decoration of the symbol 70a, providing a greater sense of satisfaction to the player. On the other hand, it is preferable not to display the rainbow pattern on the special symbol TZ, which does not undergo a temporary stop. This avoids the extra effort required to decorate the stopped special symbol TZ with a rainbow pattern for an extended period.

Figure 186 is a timing chart showing the beginning and end of a jackpot. Since Figure 186 is a continuation of Figure 185, the explanation will begin with the timing at T5.

First, the timing of T5 is the time when the final round has ended and a predetermined period has elapsed since the performance control board 130 received the command to specify the jackpot ending. Once the predetermined period has elapsed since receiving the command, the jackpot ending background is displayed as the background image, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 stop emitting light during the round and begin emitting the jackpot ending light (rainbow light). Also, the audio output device 9 stops outputting the jackpot round BGM and starts outputting the jackpot ending BGM. Note that the jackpot ending background does not have a rainbow effect, and the execution of rainbow display on the image display device is restricted.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T5, at timing T6, the display of the jackpot ending background image ends, and the name of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. At this time, the audio output device 9 stops outputting the jackpot ending BGM and outputs a sound effect (output period is 2 seconds). This emphasizes that the gaming machine manufacturer's name has been displayed. Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 end their jackpot ending illumination (rainbow illumination) and begin emitting white light.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing T6, at timing T7, a predetermined warning notification display is started as a background image. Two types of warning notifications are displayed here: "Caution: Don't get too engrossed!" and "Caution: Don't forget your card!". The display period is shorter than that of customer-waiting demo performance B. Regarding the rainbow illumination, as with customer-waiting demo performance B, its execution is restricted in the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, and the image display device (first image display device 70). Then, after the predetermined warning notification display has elapsed, at timing T8, the predetermined warning notification display is hidden.

At timing T7, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 continue to emit white light, and rainbow light emission is restricted. Note that the white light emission during the predetermined warning notification display (T8-T9) in Figure 184 and the white light emission during the predetermined warning notification display (T7-T8) in Figure 186 may be the same or different. For example, they may both be solid white light, one may be solid white light and the other white flashing, or they may both be white flashing but with different flashing cycles or different movement speeds of the illuminated areas. Furthermore, during the predetermined warning notification display, light emission that moves between areas (see Figure 216) is restricted, and light emission including flashes is restricted; instead, a calm light emission mode such as solid white light or white flashing is implemented.

Furthermore, unlike the execution period of the customer waiting demo sequence B, the jackpot ending period has time constraints. Therefore, the jackpot ending BGM, which started outputting at timing T5, may continue outputting during the display period of the gaming machine manufacturer's name and the warning display period. In other words, the display of the gaming machine manufacturer's name and the warning display may be executed while the BGM is being output. Similarly, the rainbow flashing effect, which started at timing T5, may continue outputting during the display period of the gaming machine manufacturer's name and the warning display period. In other words, the display of the gaming machine manufacturer's name and the warning display may be executed while the rainbow flashing effect is active.

Furthermore, during the jackpot ending period, the machine's model name and logo may be displayed. If the machine's model name and logo are displayed, this display period should be a rainbow-colored illumination period. This allows for a more visually appealing display of the machine's model name and logo.

Furthermore, during the jackpot ending period, one of the following may be displayed: the machine's model name, logo, company name, or a designated warning/promotional display. Alternatively, two of these may be displayed, or all three may be displayed. The displayed combinations may also differ depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot determination. For example, if a jackpot is determined in a "low probability, non-time-saving game state," it is preferable to display more combinations than if a jackpot is determined in a "high probability, time-saving game state." This prevents the jackpot ending in a "high probability, time-saving game state" from taking up too much time and hindering the smooth progress of the game.

The above information includes: the "company name" as the "first character information," the "model name" and "model logo" as the "second character information," and the "designated warning notification display" as the "third character information." Furthermore, the "company name," "model name," "model logo," and "designated warning notification display" constitute the "designated information."

Furthermore, the designated warning notification display may be shown only during the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to occur in a "low probability non-time-saving game state," and not during the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to occur in a "low probability time-saving game state" or a "high probability time-saving game state." Also, if the designated warning notification display is not shown during the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to occur in a "low probability time-saving game state" or a "high probability time-saving game state," the duration of the ending light (rainbow) should be made longer compared to when the designated warning notification display is shown. This prevents the repeated display of the designated warning notification display from causing discomfort, and prevents the display from becoming boring by extending the rainbow light duration instead of showing the designated warning notification display.
On the other hand, it is also acceptable to display a predetermined warning notification during the jackpot ending when a jackpot is determined to occur in a "low probability time-saving game state" or a "high probability time-saving game state."

Furthermore, the restriction on rainbow emission during the specified warning notification display in Figures 184 and 186 means that the execution of all rainbow emission modes, such as moving emission 1, moving emission 2, radiant emission, rainbow flash, and high-speed seven-color change, which will be described later, is restricted.

As shown in Figures 185 and 186 above, during the period from the display indicating a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, the rainbow flash is more likely to occur when the predetermined warning notification display is not displayed than when it is displayed (the likelihood of the rainbow flash occurring differs depending on whether the predetermined warning notification display is displayed or not). This allows the display to attract attention when it is displayed, and enhances the entertainment value of the display through the rainbow flash when it is not displayed.

Furthermore, during the period from the display indicating a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, rainbow illumination is enabled when the jackpot symbols are temporarily stopped, and rainbow illumination is restricted when a predetermined warning notification is displayed. This allows the player to focus their attention on the predetermined warning notification when it is displayed, and enhances the visual appeal of the game by using rainbow illumination when the jackpot symbols are temporarily stopped.

Furthermore, during the period from the display indicating a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, rainbow illumination is enabled when the jackpot symbols are temporarily stopped. However, when a jackpot is determined in a "low probability, non-time-saving game state," rainbow illumination is restricted when a predetermined warning notification is displayed during the jackpot ending. This allows the player to focus their attention on the predetermined warning notification when it is displayed, and enhances the visual appeal of the game with rainbow illumination when the jackpot symbols are temporarily stopped.

Figure 187 is a timing chart showing the execution of the customer waiting animation and customer waiting demo animation after power is restored (power on). Here, we mainly compare the power restoration when the increment counter is less than "95000" (Figure 187) and when the increment counter is more than "95000" (Figure 159). Note that Figure 187 is the same as Figure 184 except for whether or not it involves power restoration; therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted.

In the case of Figure 187, since the increment counter does not reach "95000", after power is restored, unless a start-up prize is won, the following sequences will be executed in chronological order: Customer Waiting Animation A, Customer Waiting Animation B, Customer Waiting Demo Animation A, and Customer Waiting Demo Animation B. In other words, during the period when the machine's model name and logo are displayed in Customer Waiting Demo Animation A, it is possible to make the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 emit a rainbow light.

On the other hand, in the case of Figure 159, after power is restored, a notification will be issued stating, "Acquisition limit device is operating. Please clear RWM." This notification will continue until the RWM is cleared. Therefore, customer waiting animation A, customer waiting animation B, customer waiting demo animation A, and customer waiting demo animation B will not be executed, and consequently, the rainbow light effect in customer waiting demo animation A will not be performed.

Figure 188 is a timing chart showing the operation of the acquisition limit device during rainbow illumination (customer waiting demo effect A). Note that the value of the increment counter at timing T4 is "94998".

At timing T5, the machine's model name and logo are displayed in the customer waiting demo sequence A, and the demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination) of the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 begins. Then, at timing T5', before the end of the illumination period for demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination), it is assumed that, for example, a game ball enters the general prize winning slot 43, updating the increase counter value to "95000". In this case, the demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination) of the frame lighting device 10 and the game board lighting device 76 is immediately terminated at timing T5', without continuing to illuminate until timing T6, which is the end of the illumination period. Then, the activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins.

Thus, in the customer waiting demo performance A, the rainbow light emission immediately terminates when the acquisition limit device is activated, even if the rainbow light emission is still active (even if the emission period has not been fulfilled), and an acquisition limit device activation notification is issued. On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated during any other rainbow light emission, the following occurs:

For example, if the value of the increase counter reaches "95000" between T3 and T6 in Figure 185, during the fluctuation animation, the acquisition limit device will activate, and the acquisition limit device activation notification will begin. Therefore, similar to the customer waiting demo animation A, the rainbow light effect will immediately end.

For example, if the value of the increase counter reaches "95000" between T3 and T4 in Figure 186, which is during the jackpot interval, the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot ends, and the rainbow light will continue to illuminate.

For example, if the increase counter value reaches "95000" between T5 and T6 in Figure 186, which is during the jackpot ending, the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot ends, causing the rainbow light to continue.

Furthermore, even if the increase counter reaches "95,000" in the first round of a jackpot game, the rainbow flash during the jackpot interval between the first and second rounds will still occur without restriction. However, the jackpot ending will be replaced with the completion animation shown in Figure 158, meaning the rainbow flash that would have originally occurred during the jackpot ending will not be performed.

Furthermore, in the "Another Example During a Jackpot Game" section above, it was mentioned that when the increase counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot, an image such as "You are currently in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After the win, the acquisition limit device will activate and the game will end." is displayed on the front of the shutter image. However, it is also possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow flashing when this display is shown. In this case, it is preferable to use a white-based flashing pattern (a subdued flashing pattern). For example, if rainbow flashing is performed even though the game will end after a win, it may cause discomfort or unease to the player. However, with a white-based flashing pattern, it is possible to use flashing that is appropriate for indicating the end of the game after a win, and the occurrence of discomfort or unease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, even if the system does not employ a mechanism to display an image such as "You are currently in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After the jackpot, the winning limit device will activate and the game will end." on the front of the shutter image when the increase counter value reaches "95000" during a jackpot, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the rainbow light emission and instead emit light in a white-based emission pattern (a subdued emission pattern) when the increase counter value reaches "95000".

Figure 189 is a timing chart showing the activation of the acquisition limit device during an anomaly notification. Since this example uses a scenario where the anomaly occurs during the execution of customer waiting animation A, the explanation begins with timing T5'. While Figures 162 and 163 describe an example where the anomaly occurs after the acquisition limit device has activated, this example describes a scenario where the acquisition limit device activates after the anomaly has occurred. The priority order is as shown in Figure 129.

At timing T5', a magnet detection error occurs, and "Magnet Detected" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left sub-display device) (Figure 131). The audio output device 9 outputs "Magnet detected + Siren (R)" (Figure 129). Additionally, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red, and the panel lighting device 76 turns off (Figure 129).

Subsequently, at timing T6, a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, and the increase counter value is updated to "95000". In this case, the acquisition limit device activation notification will be executed immediately, but the magnet detection error notification will continue. Also, as shown in Figure 129, the priority relationship is magnet detection error > acquisition limit device activation, so the audio notification and the illuminated notification will continue to correspond to the magnet detection error.

Note that notification events with a lower priority than the activation of the acquisition limit device are omitted from the description, but are basically the same as those in Figure 163. For example, if the anomaly that occurred at T5' in Figure 189 is interpreted as an illegal radio wave detection error, then from the timing of T6, the voice notification and the illuminated notification will be replaced with content corresponding to the activation of the acquisition limit device.

Note that while all events shown in Figures 129 and 130 are interchangeable, interchangeability may vary depending on the notification event. For example, notification events with a higher priority than the activation of the acquisition limit device are shown in Figure 189, but for notification events with a lower priority than the activation of the acquisition limit device, all audio, screen, and illuminated notifications may be terminated at timing T6 in Figure 189. Furthermore, for notification events with priorities 29 to 33 shown in Figure 130, all audio, screen, and illuminated notifications may be terminated at timing T6 in Figure 189.

According to Figures 184 to 189, the following points are characteristic features.
(Nu) The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can emit rainbow light in both the progress control state (during variation effects, during jackpot gameplay) and the non-progress control state (customer waiting demo effect A) where game progress control is not performed. Furthermore, if power is restored while the acquisition limit device is not activated, it is possible to emit rainbow light from the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 afterwards (T5 to T6 in Figure 187). However, if power is restored while the acquisition limit device is activated, it is possible to restrict the subsequent emission of rainbow light from the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 (Figure 159).

(L) When the acquisition limit device is not activated, it is possible to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow light during the execution of predetermined effects (during variation effects, during jackpot gameplay, and during customer waiting demo effects A) (Figures 184 and 185). It is also possible to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, or both) emit predetermined light (abnormal light) when a predetermined abnormality occurs (T5' in Figure 189). After the acquisition limit device is activated, the execution of rainbow light is restricted, but the execution of special light is possible (T6- in Figure 189).

(Wo) When the acquisition limit device is not activated, it is possible to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow light during the execution of predetermined effects (during variation effects, during jackpot gameplay, or during customer waiting demo effects A) (Figures 184 and 185). It is also possible to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 76, or both) emit predetermined light (abnormal light) when a predetermined abnormality occurs (T5' in Figure 189). If the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of rainbow light, it is possible to terminate the execution of rainbow light (T5' in Figure 188). If the acquisition limit device is activated during the execution of special light, it is possible to continue the execution of special light (T6 in Figure 189).

(W) The system is capable of displaying a warning to the player (e.g., a warning against excessive gambling). During the first period when the warning is not displayed (T7-T8 in Figure 184, T3-T6 in Figure 185, T3-T4 and T5-T6 in Figure 186), the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the game board lighting device 76, or both) can emit rainbow-colored light. During the second period when the warning is displayed (the warning display period from T8 in Figure 184, and the warning display period from T7 in Figure 186), the rainbow-colored light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10 or the game board lighting device 76, or both) can be restricted.

(c) It is possible to display a warning indicator (such as a warning against excessive gambling) to alert the player, and to make the light-emitting means (either the frame lighting device 10, the game board lighting device 76, or both) emit rainbow-colored light. The warning indicator can be displayed during the first period (the jackpot ending period in Figure 186) and the second period (the customer waiting demo performance B period in Figure 184). When the warning indicator is displayed during the first period (the warning indicator period from T7 onwards in Figure 186), the rainbow-colored light emission can be restricted.

These features produce the following effects.
In the variable animation, when a jackpot is announced or during a jackpot game, a rainbow light is emitted, further enhancing the excitement of players who have won a jackpot and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during the customer-waiting demo sequence B, the machine's model name and logo are illuminated with a rainbow light, allowing for a more visually appealing display of the machine's name and logo, making them more easily noticeable to players.

Furthermore, since the demo sequence B features rainbow illumination, the dazzling decorations encourage players to play, contributing to improved operation of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, after the payout limit device is activated, even if the power to gaming machine 1 is switched from OFF to ON, the activation notification of the payout limit device will continue, and the customer waiting demo effect B (rainbow light emission), etc., will not be executed. This prevents players from mistakenly believing they can play when it is impossible, thus preventing a decrease in their desire to play. Additionally, it allows the administrator of gaming machine 1 to take appropriate action (RWM clear).

Furthermore, after the payout limit device is activated, while the execution of rainbow illumination is restricted, the execution of predetermined illumination (abnormal illumination) is still possible. This prevents the gaming machine from becoming vulnerable to fraudulent activity simply because the payout limit device has been activated. This helps prevent players from avoiding machines potentially being used for fraudulent activities, thus preventing a decline in overall gaming motivation.

Furthermore, if the payout limit device is activated during the execution of the rainbow light display, the rainbow light display will terminate. Conversely, if the payout limit device is activated during the execution of the predetermined light display (abnormal light display), the predetermined light display (abnormal light display) will continue. This prevents the gaming machine from becoming vulnerable to fraudulent activity simply because the payout limit device has been activated. This helps prevent a decline in gaming motivation due to players avoiding machines that may be subject to fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device activates during the execution of a predetermined light emission (abnormal light emission), for example, if a magnet detection error has a higher priority than the acquisition limit device activation, the notification corresponding to the magnet detection error will be executed preferentially. Similarly, if an unauthorized radio wave detection error has a higher priority than the acquisition limit device activation, the acquisition limit device activation notification will be executed preferentially. This ensures that accurate notifications corresponding to the occurring anomaly are delivered.

Furthermore, during the first period when the warning display is not implemented, the rainbow illumination is enabled, and during the second period when the warning display is implemented, the rainbow illumination is restricted. This enhances the decorative aspect, preventing the warning notification from being less noticeable to players, and for example, encouraging them to play the game appropriately.

Furthermore, by preventing the display from flashing rainbow light while the warning message is active, it becomes possible to avoid situations where, for example, the rainbow light might incite players to refrain from excessive play, thus diminishing the effectiveness of the warning message. Additionally, players can avoid a decrease in their motivation to play by not being unnecessarily encouraged.

Furthermore, the execution of the rainbow flashing effect was restricted when a warning message was displayed during the jackpot ending period. In particular, during jackpot gameplay, the rainbow flashing effect is frequently displayed, such as during interval flashing (T3-T4 in Figure 186) and ending flashing (T5-T6 in Figure 186). Therefore, if the rainbow flashing effect were also displayed during the warning message display period in the jackpot ending period (T7-T8 in Figure 186), there is a risk of misinterpreting it as part of the celebratory effect for winning the jackpot. In contrast, by restricting the execution of the rainbow flashing effect during the warning message display period in the jackpot ending period (T7-T8 in Figure 186), it is possible to encourage players to play appropriately without misinterpreting it as part of the celebratory effect. This also prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, while the rainbow emission was demonstrated in a configuration where it is performed by both the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, it is also possible to enable one of them and disable the other, or to enable both but have a period where only one is performed.

Next, we will list some examples of applications of rainbow luminescence (particularly those related to acquisition limit devices).
For example, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43 or similar during the rainbow light flashing at T4 in Figure 185, and the increase counter reaches "95000", the acquisition condition device will activate immediately, ending the rainbow light flashing. However, if a game ball enters a large prize slot 50 or similar during the rainbow light flashing at T3-T4 in Figure 186, and the increase counter reaches "95000", the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot ends, so the rainbow light flashing will continue until timing T4 without ending. This allows the player to recognize that the game is ending by promptly notifying them of the activation of the acquisition limit device before the jackpot game is executed, and to recognize that the game can continue until the end of the jackpot game if it is in progress.

For example, as shown in T5' of Figure 188, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43, etc., during the rainbow light display in the customer waiting demo performance B, and the increase counter reaches "95,000", the acquisition condition device will activate immediately, and the rainbow light display will end. However, if a game ball enters a large prize slot 50, etc., during the rainbow light display at T3-T4 in Figure 186, and the increase counter reaches "95,000", the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot ends, so the rainbow light display will continue until timing T4 without ending. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the game is ending by notifying them of the activation of the acquisition limit device during the customer waiting demo performance B, and to recognize that the game can continue until the end of the jackpot game during a jackpot game.

For example, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43, etc., during the rainbow light display at T4 in Figure 185, and the increase counter reaches "95,000", the acquisition condition device will activate immediately, and the rainbow light display will end. However, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43, etc., during the rainbow light display at T4 in Figure 185, and the increase counter reaches "90,000", and a pre-notification is performed (Figure 154(c)), the rainbow light display will continue until timing T6 without ending. This allows the game to be recognized as ending when the increase counter reaches "95,000" by promptly notifying the activation of the acquisition limit device, and when the increase counter reaches "90,000", it can be recognized in advance that the activation of the acquisition limit device is approaching.

For example, as shown in T5' of Figure 188, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43, etc., during the rainbow light display in the customer waiting demo performance B, and the increase counter reaches "95000", the acquisition condition device will activate immediately, and the rainbow light display will end. However, if a game ball enters a general prize slot 43, etc., during the rainbow light display in the customer waiting demo performance B, and the increase counter reaches "90000", and a pre-notification is executed (Figure 155(g)), the rainbow light display will continue until timing T6 without ending. This allows the game to be recognized as ending when the increase counter reaches "95000" by promptly notifying the activation of the acquisition limit device, and when the increase counter reaches "90000", it can be recognized in advance that the activation of the acquisition limit device is approaching.

For example, the reach-teasing animation, which builds anticipation for whether or not a reach will occur, has two parts: a first reach-teasing animation that can be executed in the first animation mode (animation modes A-C), and a second reach-teasing animation that can be executed in the second animation mode (animation modes D-E). Furthermore, when a reach occurs after the second reach-teasing animation is executed, the "ka-kiin" sound, which corresponds to a jackpot, is more likely to be output afterward than when a reach occurs after the first reach-teasing animation is executed (animation modes D-E are more likely to select a successful reach-teasing animation when determining the variation animation pattern corresponding to a jackpot). This prevents a decrease in gameplay enjoyment due to the player only experiencing failed reach-teasing animations or only experiencing variation animations that result in a loss, even when the player is in a favorable state (animation modes D-E correspond to specific game states).

For example, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, two effects can be implemented: a first effect that outputs a temporary stop sound (T2' to T3 in Figure 175 in variation effect pattern 1), and a second effect that restricts the output of the temporary stop sound (T3 to T4 in Figure 185 in variation effect pattern 8). When the second effect is implemented, the "ka-kiin" sound, which corresponds to a jackpot, is more likely to be output than when the first effect is implemented (a jackpot does not occur during normal variation, but it can occur during an SPSP reach). This allows for an improvement in gameplay enjoyment, as the temporary stop sound corresponding to a jackpot may still be output even when the second effect, which restricts the output of the temporary stop sound, is implemented.

For example, when employing a configuration that outputs a temporary stop sound for all temporary stops of the left, right, and center reels, in the variation animation pattern where an SPSP reach miss is executed (Figure 171) and the variation animation pattern where an SPSP reach jackpot is executed (Figure 185), when the left and right reel symbols 70a are temporarily stopped to form a normal reach, a common temporary stop sound (e.g., "pesh") is output in both cases. However, it is possible to make the temporary stop sound different when the center reel symbol 70a temporarily stops in a display mode showing only numbers (miss: "ching", jackpot: "kakin"). This allows for a reduction in the number of temporary stop sound data while drawing attention to which temporary stop sound is output at the final temporary stop.

Furthermore, in the variable animation patterns in which SP Reach or SPSP Reach is executed, when the animation symbol 70a is in the first mode, the temporary stop sound is less likely to be output when the middle animation symbol 70a temporarily stops compared to when the left or right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop (the temporary stop sound is not output when the middle animation symbol 70a is in the first mode). This prevents the temporary stop sound from being output immediately following the success or failure sound in SP Reach or SPSP Reach, which could make it difficult to recognize that the variable animation has ended.

Furthermore, when the internal symbol 70a temporarily stops in the first mode, the temporary stop sound is less likely to be output in the SP Reach or SPSP Reach execution patterns than in the normal variation execution patterns (the temporary stop sound is not output when the internal symbol 70a is in the first mode). This prevents the temporary stop sound from being output immediately following the success or failure sound in SP Reach or SPSP Reach, which could make it difficult to recognize the end of the variation execution.

(Example of a presentation mode change after the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device)
Figures 190 to 192 show examples of performance modes when the performance mode changes after the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device is given.

First, as shown in Figure 190(a), when controlled in performance mode A, the first reserve number (U1) is reduced by 1 from "3" and the variation display of the first special symbol begins. This results in the display of two reserve icons, HI and TI, and the variation performance begins. Specifically, the performance symbol 70a begins its floating display as a pre-variation action, and the variation display of the special symbol TZ begins. At this time, the mode A background image is displayed on the image display device, variation BGM 1 is output, and the light-emitting part related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device of the frame lighting device 10 is turned off.

Then, after the three display symbols 70a begin moving along the first variation path, and a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to reach "90003," which is above the specified value (90,000), a pre-operation notification (advance notification) is initiated to inform the player that the acquisition limit device may be activated, as shown in Figure 190(b). Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the foreground of other display images, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 5000" is output only once. The light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the activation notification of the acquisition limit device then changes to the pre-notification mode (yellow flashing).

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90003/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 5000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

The text image that reads "Remaining until acquisition limit device activates: XXXX" changes in increments of 500 depending on the value of the increment counter, from "Remaining 5000" to "Remaining 500". For example, when the increment counter reaches "90000", it will display "Approximately 5000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" while the counter value is between 89900 and 90499. When the increment counter reaches "90500", it will display "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" while the counter value is between 90400 and 90999. When the increment counter reaches "91000", it will display "Approximately 4000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" while the counter value is between 90900 and 91499.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 190(c), the pre-notification image CZ, which was displayed largely on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size. Also, as the left-side performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop operation is performed, and the temporary stop sound "pesh" for performance mode A is output. After another predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 190(d), as the right-side performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, a pre-stop operation is performed, and the temporary stop sound "pesh" for performance mode A is output.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 191(e), the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, performing a pre-stop action, and the temporary stop sound "pesh" for performance mode A is output. Then, when the variation time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is displayed, as shown in Figure 191(f), the three temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a are displayed as stopped, and the corresponding icon TI is erased.

Subsequently, after the stop time has elapsed and the variation display of the first special symbol begins, the conditions for updating the performance mode are met when the variation performance begins, and the system switches to performance mode B. As shown in Figure 191(g), the variation display of the special symbol TZ begins, and the mode switching performance is executed. Specifically, the mode switching image MC is displayed in such a way that it gradually obscures the performance image, including the performance symbol 70a and the background image (making the performance image invisible), and a mode change sound ("Shubat") is output. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the mode switching image MC.

Furthermore, once the mode switching animation time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 191(h), the mode switching image, which had been completely obscuring the animation image, becomes invisible, and the animation symbols 70a and the Mode B background image corresponding to the changed animation mode B are displayed. The animation symbols 70a begin to shrink as a pre-variation action, and the variation BGM 2 is output. Also, the hold icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed in a display mode corresponding to animation mode B. Subsequently, as shown in Figure 192(i), the variation display begins, with the three animation symbols 70a moving along the second variation path.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 192(j), the left-side display symbol 70a temporarily stops, performing a pre-stop action, and the temporary stop sound "Poko♪" for performance mode B is output. After another predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 192(k), the right-side display symbol 70a temporarily stops, performing a pre-stop action, and the temporary stop sound "Poko♪" for performance mode B is output.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 192(k), the central performance symbol 70a temporarily stops, performing a pre-stop action, and the temporary stop sound "Poko♪" for performance mode B is output. Afterward, when the variation time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the losing special symbol is displayed as stopped, the three temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a are displayed as stopped, and the corresponding icon TI is erased.

This section explains the case where the game switches from performance mode A to performance mode B during normal gameplay. However, the same basic mode switching animations are performed when switching from performance mode A to performance mode C, from performance mode B to performance mode A or performance mode C, or from performance mode C to performance mode A or performance mode B. Various animation patterns (such as the animation symbols 70a, background images, types of icons, and the movement path of the animation symbols 70a) are switched to match the new performance mode.

Furthermore, when switching from performance mode D to performance mode E, or from performance mode E to performance mode D, during a bonus round, the mode switching animation is basically the same as when switching from performance mode A to performance mode B during normal gameplay. Various animation patterns (such as the animation symbols 70a, background images, types of icons, and the variation path of the animation symbols 70a) are switched to those corresponding to the new animation mode.

Furthermore, while we have explained the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device when switching from performance mode A to performance mode B during normal gameplay, regardless of whether it is in normal gameplay mode, a specific gameplay mode (probability variation gameplay mode, time reduction gameplay mode), or which performance mode is being used, the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed in the same manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, display content, advance notification sound, illumination manner of the light-emitting part related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device of the frame lighting device 10, etc.).

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, triggering the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device, the same pre-activation notification is also performed when a game ball enters other prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value, triggering the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device.

As shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to perform a pre-operation notification (advance notification) that indicates the possibility of the acquisition limit device activating (that the acquisition limit device is about to activate). Furthermore, the pre-operation notification can be performed in the same manner during the variation animation of the first animation mode (e.g., animation mode A), in which the animation symbol 70a can be displayed along the first variation path, and during the variation animation of the second animation mode (e.g., animation mode B), in which the animation symbol 70a can be displayed along the second variation path. Therefore, even when the pre-operation notification is performed in different animation modes, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-operation notification, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to display a pre-notification image CZ that notifies the player that the acquisition limit device may be activated (that the acquisition limit device is about to be activated). When the performance symbol 70a switches from a first variation path (for example, the first variation path in performance mode A) to a second variation path (for example, the second variation path in performance mode B), it is possible to execute a mode switching effect (display of a mode switching image MC) that restricts the visibility of the performance symbol 70a (the performance symbol 70a becomes invisible). Even when the visibility of the performance symbol 70a is restricted by the execution of the mode switching effect, it is possible to continue displaying the pre-notification image CZ in a visible state. Therefore, even when the variation path of the performance symbol 70a switches, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-notification image, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to perform a pre-operation notification (advance notification) that alerts the player that the acquisition limit device may be activated (that the acquisition limit device is about to be activated). It is possible to output different types of variable background music (BGM) during the variation performance in the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A where variation BGM 1 is output) and during the variation performance in the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B where variation BGM 2 is output). It is also possible to perform the pre-operation notification in the same manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, text placement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation performance in the first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A where variation BGM 1 is output) and during the variation performance in the second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B where variation BGM 2 is output). Therefore, even when the pre-operation notification is performed in different performance modes, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-operation notification, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to perform a pre-operation notification (advance notification) that alerts the player that the acquisition limit device may be activated (that the acquisition limit device is about to be activated). It is possible to display different types of background images during the variation animation in the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A where the mode A background image is displayed) and during the variation animation in the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B where the mode B background image is displayed). It is also possible to perform the pre-operation notification in the same manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, text placement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation animation in both the first and second performance modes. Therefore, even when the pre-operation notification is performed in different performance modes, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pre-operation notification, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to perform a pre-operation notification (advance notification) that notifies that the acquisition limit device may be activated (that the acquisition limit device is about to be activated). It is possible to perform different types of pre-operation actions (performance actions) during the variation performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a floating display is performed as a pre-operation action for the performance symbol 70a) and during the variation performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is performed as a pre-operation action for the performance symbol 70a). It is also possible to perform the pre-operation notification in the same manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, text arrangement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a floating display is performed as a pre-operation action for the performance symbol 70a) and during the variation performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is performed as a pre-operation action for the performance symbol 70a). Therefore, even when pre-activation notifications are issued in different presentation modes, players will be more likely to recognize the notifications, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to perform a pre-operation notification (advance notification) that indicates the possibility of the acquisition limit device being activated (that the acquisition limit device is about to be activated). It is possible to perform different types of pre-stop operations during the variation performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a swaying display is performed as a pre-stop operation for the performance symbol 70a) and during the variation performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is performed as a pre-stop operation for the performance symbol 70a). It is also possible to perform the pre-operation notification in the same manner (design of the advance notification image CZ, text arrangement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation performance of the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A in which a swaying display is performed as a pre-stop operation for the performance symbol 70a) and during the variation performance of the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B in which a reduced display is performed as a pre-stop operation for the performance symbol 70a). Therefore, even when pre-activation notifications are issued in different presentation modes, players will be more likely to recognize the notifications, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190 to 192, it is possible to execute a mode switching effect (a type of specific effect that changes the nature of the effect during the execution of a variable effect) (other specific effects besides the mode switching effect that suggests a change in the effect mode include development effects that suggest development into a reach effect with a high probability of winning (described later), and eye-catching effects that suggest the effect symbol 70a will stop and be displayed). While the visibility of the effect symbol 70a is restricted during the execution of the mode switching effect, the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device remains possible (the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, even during the execution of the mode switching effect (specific effect), useful information can be provided to the player, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while the pre-notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device was previously displayed in large size on the first image display device 70 when the advance notification image CZ was initiated, it may also be displayed in small size on the third image display device 72 instead of in large size on the first image display device 70.

Furthermore, while the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device was previously displayed as a small image on the third image display device 72, it is also possible to use only the first image display device 70 and display the pre-notification image CZ as a small image in the corner of the first image display device 70's screen (a position that does not overlap with the performance symbol 70a displayed at the stop position, for example). In this case, when the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device begins, the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed as a large image, or it may be displayed as a small image without being displayed as a large image.

Furthermore, while the system was designed to award prize balls for winning into the large prize slot 50 during normal gameplay, it may be changed so that winning into the large prize slot 50 during normal gameplay is invalid. Even if a winning ball into the large prize slot 50 occurs during normal gameplay (performance modes A-C) and the increase counter (MY) would normally exceed the specified value (90,000), the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device may not be triggered.

Furthermore, while the same mode switching animation was previously executed when the animation mode switched between animation modes A, B, and C corresponding to the normal gameplay state, it may also be possible to execute different mode switching animations (such as the color and direction of the mode switching image MC) depending on whether the animation mode switches from animation mode A, animation mode B, or animation mode C.

Furthermore, while the same mode switching animation was previously executed when switching between the animation modes D to E corresponding to the probability variation game state, it may also be possible to execute different mode switching animations (such as the color and appearance method of the mode switching image MC) depending on whether the mode switches from animation mode D to animation mode E or from animation mode E to animation mode D.

Furthermore, while the same mode switching animation was previously executed when the animation mode switched within animation modes A-C corresponding to the normal game state and when the animation mode switched within animation modes D-E corresponding to the probability variation game state, it may also be possible to execute different mode switching animations (such as the color and appearance method of the mode switching image MC) depending on whether the animation mode switched within animation modes A-C corresponding to the normal game state or within animation modes D-E corresponding to the probability variation game state.

Furthermore, while the mode switching animation (mode switching image MC) did not have a set probability of triggering a jackpot, it would be possible to set two modes: a first mode switching animation with a low probability of triggering a jackpot, and a second mode switching animation with a higher probability of triggering a jackpot. The type of mode switching animation could then vary depending on the type of variation animation pattern when the mode switching animation is executed (whether or not it's a jackpot, or whether or not an SP/SPSP reach animation is performed).

(Example of a sequence of events when the pre-activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins during a continuous予告演出)
Figure 193 shows an example of a sequence of events when the pre-activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence).

First, as shown in Figure 193(a), when the first special symbol is stopped and the first reserve number (U1) is "1", and the machine is controlled in performance mode B, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45, and the execution of a pre-reading action sequence spanning two fluctuation sequences is determined, resulting in the first reserve number (U1) becoming "2", then one reserve icon HI is added and displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, the fluctuation BGM 2 is output, and the light-emitting part related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device of the frame lighting device 10 is turned off. Also, due to the determination to execute the pre-reading action sequence, a performance mode switching restriction period is in effect, during which switching of performance modes is restricted.

Then, after the stop time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the next variation display of the first special symbol begins, as shown in Figure 193(b), one hold icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, and the variation and pre-read operation effects begin. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a begin their pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ begins its variation display, and then the three effect symbols 70a begin their variation display moving along the second variation path. In addition, as a pre-read operation effect, the first movable member 77a performs an operation effect (first operation effect) in which it descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 by a width smaller than the maximum descent width.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to exceed the specified value (90,000) to reach "90003," a pre-operation notification (advance notification) is initiated to indicate the possibility of the acquisition limit device activating, as shown in Figure 193(c). Specifically, the advance notification image CZ is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the foreground of other display images, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 5000" is output once. The light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the activation notification of the acquisition limit device changes to the advance notification mode (yellow flashing). Note that the advance notification image CZ is partially obscured by the first movable member 77a.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90003/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 5000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

After a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 193(d), the pre-notification image CZ, which was displayed largely on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size. After that, once the fluctuation effect targeted by the pre-read operation effect has finished, the restriction period for switching the effect mode ends, and the effect mode can be switched.

This section explains the case where a pre-announcement action is performed across two fluctuation animations in performance mode B. However, even if the pre-announcement action is performed across one fluctuation animation, or across three or more fluctuation animations, when the performance mode switching restriction period begins and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000), a pre-notification of the acquisition limit device's operation (advance notification) is performed in parallel with the pre-announcement action.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the pre-announcement action is performed in performance mode B, when other consecutive notification effects (pre-announcement effect, pre-announcement chance event, pre-announcement vibration effect, pre-announcement zone effect) are performed, the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device will be performed in parallel with the other consecutive notification effects when the performance mode switching restriction period begins and the increase counter (MY) reaches the specified value (90,000) or higher.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the pre-announcement action is performed in performance mode B, in other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), when other consecutive notification effects (pre-announcement action, pre-announcement effect, pre-announcement chance event, pre-announcement vibration effect, pre-announcement zone effect) are performed, the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device will be performed in parallel with the other consecutive notification effects when the performance mode switching restriction period begins and the increase counter (MY) reaches a predetermined value (90,000) or higher.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, triggering the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device, the same pre-activation notification is also performed when a game ball enters other prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value, triggering the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, even during the period when the performance mode switching restriction is in place, when a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, etc.) is executed, it is possible to switch the background music to the reach BGM corresponding to the reach performance, and also to switch the background image to the reach background image corresponding to the reach performance.

(Example of a sequence of events where a pre-announcement image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence))
Figure 194 shows an example of a presentation where the pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement presentation).

First, as shown in Figure 194(a), when the first special symbol is stopped and the first reserve number (U1) is "1", and the machine is controlled in performance mode B, if a game ball enters the first start port 45, and the execution of a pre-reading action sequence spanning two variation sequences is determined, and the first reserve number (U1) becomes "2", then one reserve icon HI is added and displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variation BGM 2 is output. Also, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90996/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, after the stop time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the next variation display for the first special symbol begins, as shown in Figure 194(b), one hold icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, and the variation and pre-read operation effects begin. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a begin their pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ begins its variation display, and then the three effect symbols 70a begin their variation display moving along the second variation path. In addition, as a pre-read operation effect, the first movable member 77a performs an operation effect (first operation effect) in which it descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 by a width smaller than the maximum descent width.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, and the increase counter (MY) reaches "91001," exceeding the updated value (91000), an emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, as shown in Figure 194(c), and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the foreground of other effect images, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 4000" is output only once. Note that a portion of the pre-notification image CZ is obscured by the first movable member 77a.

Furthermore, in the pre-announcement image CZ, the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in the format "91001/95000," and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" is switched to "Approximately 4000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

After a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 194(d), the pre-notification image CZ, which was displayed largely on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size, thus ending the emphasis effect. After that, once the fluctuation effect targeted by the pre-read operation effect has finished, the restriction period for switching effect modes ends, and the effect mode can be switched again.

This section explains the case where a pre-announcement action is performed across two fluctuation sequences in performance mode B. However, even if the pre-announcement action is performed across one fluctuation sequence, or across three or more fluctuation sequences, when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000), a highlighting effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the pre-announcement action, and the updated display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a pre-announcement action is performed during the variation effect in Performance Mode B, when other consecutive announcement effects (pre-announcement effect, pre-announcement chance eye effect, pre-announcement vibration effect, pre-announcement zone effect) are performed, as well as when the performance mode switching restriction period begins and the increase counter (MY) reaches the update value (91000) or higher, an emphasis effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is performed in parallel with the other consecutive announcement effects, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also performed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the pre-announcement action is performed in performance mode B, in the case where the continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) (pre-announcement action, pre-announcement effect, pre-announcement chance event, pre-announcement vibration effect, pre-announcement zone effect) is performed in the other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), when the performance mode switching restriction period is reached and the increase counter (MY) reaches the update value (91000) or higher, the emphasis effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is performed in parallel with the other continuous予告演出, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also performed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to exceed the update value (91000), triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying an updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when a game ball enters another prize area (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000). In this case, the emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are also displayed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying the updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when the update value reaches other values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500). The emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are displayed in the same manner.

As shown in Figures 193 to 194, during the execution of a series of pre-announcement sequences (pre-announcement sequences such as pre-reading action sequences) spanning multiple variation sequences, switching the variation path of the animation symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from animation mode A, which is the first variation path, to animation mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, it is still possible to perform pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device. Therefore, the execution of pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the series of pre-announcement sequences, allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, in the variation animation, the movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) can perform a first action animation (a downward movement smaller than the maximum downward movement range, such as during pre-reading animations, pseudo-consecutive animations, and development animations) and a second action animation (a downward movement at the maximum downward movement range, such as during a successful outcome animation). While the first action animation of the movable members is being performed, switching the variation path of the animation symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from animation mode A, which is the first variation path, to animation mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted, but it is possible to perform pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device. Therefore, the first action animation of the movable members (pre-reading animation) does not hinder the execution of pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device, allowing useful information to be provided to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, when the increase counter (MY) increases to a value equal to or greater than the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), an emphasis effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for players to understand that the acquisition limit device is about to activate, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, while switching the variation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first variation path, to effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted during the execution of a pre-announcement effect (pre-announcement) across multiple variation effects, it is possible to execute an emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification (pre-announcement) of the acquisition limit device. Therefore, the emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device can be provided to the player without being hindered by the continuous announcement effect, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, during the execution of a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) spanning multiple fluctuation effects (pre-announcement effects such as pre-reading action effects), switching the fluctuation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first fluctuation path to the second fluctuation path (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first fluctuation path, to effect mode B, which is the second fluctuation path) is restricted. However, it is possible to switch the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ) from the first display mode (a mode including "approximately 4500 remaining") to the second display mode (a mode including "4000 remaining"). Therefore, the continuous予告演出 does not hinder the switching (update display) of the display mode of the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ), allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, in the variation performance, it is possible to perform a first action performance of the movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) (a downward movement with a width smaller than the maximum downward movement width, such as during the pre-reading action performance, pseudo-consecutive performance, and development performance) and a second action performance of the movable members (a downward movement with the maximum downward movement width, such as during the successful determination performance). While the first action performance of the movable members is being performed, it is restricted from switching the variation path of the performance symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from performance mode A, which is the first variation path, to performance mode B, which is the second variation path). However, it is possible to switch the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ) from the first mode display (a mode including "remaining approximately 4500") to the second mode display (a mode including "remaining 4000"). Therefore, the first movement of the movable member does not hinder the switching (update display) of the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, thereby providing players with useful information and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 193 to 194, when the variation path of the performance symbol 70a switches from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from performance mode A, which is the first variation path, to performance mode B, which is the second variation path), a mode switching performance (a specific performance indicating that the performance mode is switching) that changes the manner of the performance is executed. However, during the execution of the first operation performance of the movable member, if the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ) switches from the first manner display (a manner including "remaining approximately 4500") to the second manner display (a manner including "remaining 4000"), the mode switching performance (a specific performance indicating that the performance mode is switching) that changes the manner of the performance is not executed (it is restricted) (the pre-notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, useful information can be provided to the player, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, while the pre-notification image CZ displayed largely on the first image display device 70 was partially obscured by the first movable member 77a, it may be displayed in a way that prevents partial obscuration by the first movable member 77a. In this case, at the start of the pre-notification (pre-notification) before the acquisition limit device is activated, the pre-notification image CZ may not be displayed largely on the first image display device 70 but instead displayed in a smaller size on the third image display device 72, or the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed only on the first image display device 70, and displayed in a smaller size in a corner of the screen that is not obscured by the first movable member 77a (a position that does not overlap with the performance symbol 70a displayed at the stop position).

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value exceeding the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the system previously displayed an updated image without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ. However, it is now permissible to display the updated image while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value equal to or greater than the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the system was supposed to display the pre-notification image CZ in large size on the first image display device 70 as an emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device. However, it is also possible to keep it displayed in small size on the third image display device 72 and only output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX," or to not output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" and only display the pre-notification image CZ in large size on the first image display device 70, or to perform only the update display of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device without executing the emphasis effect for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, while there is a restriction period for switching between performance modes during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement) sequence, if the game transitions to a pre-announcement performance mode (a performance mode where a pre-announcement mode background image and pre-announcement mode image are displayed) that suggests a jackpot will be executed as a pre-announcement type performance, then it may be possible to transition to the pre-announcement performance mode even during the performance mode switching restriction period.

(Example of a presentation when the pre-activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins during the effective period of the dialogue preview presentation)
Figure 195 shows an example of a presentation when the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device begins during the effective period of the dialogue announcement presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 195(a), assume that the first special symbol with a first reserve number (U1) of "1" is being displayed in a variation animation, and that the variation animation is in animation mode B. At this time, one reserve icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variation BGM 2 is being output.

In this state, when the validity period for operating the performance button 17 related to the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue announcement performance) begins, the operation prompt performance starts. Specifically, the dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation prompt image SG is displayed within the dialogue window SW, consisting of an image of the performance button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period. Also, the performance button 17 lights up white in its normal state. Furthermore, from the time a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variation performance, a performance mode switching restriction period is established, during which switching of performance modes is restricted.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to reach "90003" (90,000 or more), a pre-activation notification (advance notification) is initiated to indicate the possibility of the acquisition limit device activating, as shown in Figure 195(b). Specifically, the advance notification image CZ is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the foreground of other performance images, and the voice message "Approximately 5000 remaining" is output once. The light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the acquisition limit device activation notification then changes to the advance notification mode (yellow flashing).

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90003/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 5000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, if the performance button 17 is operated during the operation validity period (display of the operation prompt image SG) and while the pre-notification image CZ is displayed in large size, the operation validity period ends and the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) is executed, as shown in Figure 195(c). Specifically, the dialogue window SW displayed on the first image display device 70 displays the text image of the hot dialogue "What is this!? It's hot!!", and the performance button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for one second. Meanwhile, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display of the pre-notification image CZ, it moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size.

After a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the dialogue preview sequence ends and the dialogue window SW disappears, as shown in Figure 195(d), but the pre-announcement image CZ continues to be displayed.

This section explains the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the operation validity period of the dialogue notification effect in the variation effect of Performance Mode B. However, in the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the operation validity period of the dialogue notification effect in the variation effect of the other performance modes (Performance Modes A, C, D-F), the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the operation validity period of the dialogue notification effect and the dialogue notification effect itself.

Furthermore, while we explained what happens when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the validity period of the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) while the dialogue予告演出 is running, the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device will also be executed in parallel with the dialogue予告演出.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a dialogue notification with an operation validity period is executed before a reach animation in the variation animation of animation mode B, in the case where other notification animations with operation validity periods (such as pseudo-consecutive animations) are executed, when the increase counter (MY) reaches a predetermined value (90,000) or more, a pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device will be executed in parallel with the other notification animations with operation validity periods.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, triggering the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device, the same pre-activation notification is also performed when a game ball enters other prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value, triggering the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device.

As shown in Figure 195, it is possible to perform pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device while the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) is being performed in response to the operation of the effect button 17, or while the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification effect is occurring. Therefore, the execution of the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the dialogue notification effect or the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification effect, allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 195, even if the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device begins during the operation validity period related to the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) can still be executed if the performance button 17 is operated during the operation validity period. Therefore, the execution of the dialogue予告演出 is not hindered by the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, at the start of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device, the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed in a smaller size on the third image display device 72 instead of being displayed in a large size on the first image display device 70, or the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed only on the first image display device 70, and the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed in a smaller size in a corner of the screen that is not obstructed by the first movable member 77a (a position that does not overlap with the performance symbol 70a displayed at the stop position).

(Example of a presentation where a pre-announcement image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the dialogue preview presentation.)
Figure 196 shows an example of a presentation where the pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the dialogue announcement presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 196(a), assume that the first special symbol is being displayed with a first reserve number (U1) of "1," and that the variation performance is in the B performance mode. At this time, one reserve icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, the B mode background image is displayed on the image display device, and the variation BGM 2 is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90996/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

In this state, when the validity period for operating the performance button 17 related to the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue announcement performance) begins, the operation prompt performance starts. Specifically, the dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation prompt image SG is displayed within the dialogue window SW, consisting of an image of the performance button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period. Also, the performance button 17 lights up white in its normal state. Furthermore, from the time a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variation performance, a performance mode switching restriction period is established, during which switching of performance modes is restricted.

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated, as shown in Figure 196(b), the operation validity period ends and the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue announcement action announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - performance announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - performance announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - performance announcement -

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, and the increase counter (MY) reaches "91001," exceeding the updated value (91000), as shown in Figure 196(c), the dialogue予告演出 (pre-announcement) effect continues, and an emphasis effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-announcement) of the acquisition limit device is executed, while the pre-announcement image CZ is updated and displayed. Specifically, the pre-announcement image CZ is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the foreground of other effect images, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 4000" is output only once.

Furthermore, in the pre-announcement image CZ, the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in the format "91001/95000," and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" is switched to "Approximately 4000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

After a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the dialogue preview effect ends and the dialogue window SW disappears. Then, after another predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 196(d), the pre-notification image CZ, which was displayed largely on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size.

This section explains the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the execution of the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) in the variation演出 of Performance Mode B. However, in the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the execution of the dialogue予告演出 in the variation演出 of other performance modes (Performance Modes A, C, D-F), the emphasis演出 for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the dialogue予告演出, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) after the operation validity period of the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出) has ended, even if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the operation validity period of the dialogue予告演出, the emphasis effect for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device will be executed in parallel with the operation validity period of the dialogue予告演出 and the dialogue予告演出, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ will also be executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a dialogue notification with an operation validity period is executed before a reach animation in the variation animation of animation mode B, in the case where other notification animations with operation validity periods (such as pseudo-consecutive animations) are executed, when the animation mode switching restriction period is reached and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000), an emphasis animation for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the other notification animations with operation validity periods, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to exceed the update value (91000), triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying an updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when a game ball enters another prize area (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000). In this case, the emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are also displayed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying the updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when the update value reaches other values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500). The emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are displayed in the same manner.

Furthermore, while we explained what happens when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91,000) during the execution of the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the execution of the dialogue予告演出 or during the operation validity period of the dialogue予告演出, the pre-activation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device will begin in parallel with the operation validity period and the dialogue予告演出.

As shown in Figure 196, while the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 is in progress, and while the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification effect is in effect, switching the variation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first variation path, to effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification (prior notification) of the acquisition limit device is still possible. Therefore, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the dialogue notification effect or the operation validity period of the dialogue notification effect, allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196, while the dialogue notification effect (operation effect) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 is in progress, and while the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification effect is occurring, switching the variation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first variation path (for example, the variation path of effect mode A) to the second variation path (for example, the variation path of effect mode B) (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first variation path, to effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, it is possible to switch the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the first display mode (a mode including "remaining approximately 4500") to the second display mode (a mode including "remaining 4000"). Therefore, the switching (update display) of the display mode of the notification image (pre-notification image CZ) related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the dialogue notification effect or the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification effect, making it possible to provide useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196, when the variation path of the performance symbol 70a switches from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from performance mode A, which is the first variation path, to performance mode B, which is the second variation path), a mode switching performance (a specific performance that suggests a change in performance mode) that changes the manner of the performance is executed. However, during the execution of a dialogue notification performance (operation performance) or during the operation validity period related to the dialogue notification performance, if the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ) switches from the first manner display (a manner including "remaining approximately 4500") to the second manner display (a manner including "remaining 4000"), the mode switching performance (a specific performance that suggests a change in performance mode) that changes the manner of the performance is not executed (it is restricted) (the pre-notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196, even if the emphasized notification of the pre-activation alert for the acquisition limit device begins during the operation validity period of the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), the dialogue予告演出 can still be executed if the performance button 17 is operated during the operation validity period. Therefore, the execution of the dialogue予告演出 is not hindered by the emphasized notification of the pre-activation alert for the acquisition limit device, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196, even if the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ) switches from the first display mode (the mode including "Remaining approximately 4500") to the second display mode (the mode including "Remaining 4000") during the operation validity period of the dialogue notification effect, the dialogue notification effect can still be executed if the effect button 17 is operated during the operation validity period. Therefore, the execution of the dialogue notification effect is not hindered by the switching of the display mode of the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value exceeding the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the numerical value was updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ. However, it may also be possible to update the numerical value while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value equal to or greater than the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the system was supposed to display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70 as an enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device. However, it is also possible to keep it displayed in a small size on the third image display device 72 and only output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX," or to not output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" and only display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70, or to perform only the update of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device without performing the enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

(Example of a sequence where the pre-announcement image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the development sequence of the SP Reach variation sequence)
Figures 197 to 199 show examples of animations where the pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the development animation of the SP Reach variation animation.

First, as shown in Figure 197(a), during the variation display of the first special symbol with the first reserved number (U1) set to "1," and during the variation performance in performance mode B, following the temporary stop of the left performance symbol 70a, the right performance symbol 70a also temporarily stops, performing a pre-stop action, and the temporary stop sound "Poko♪" for performance mode B is output. At this time, one reserved icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variation BGM2 is output. Furthermore, pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed in small size on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90996/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates." Furthermore, when the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is a period of restricted performance mode switching, where switching between performance modes is limited.

Then, once the pre-stop action of the right-hand symbol 70a is complete, the normal reach animation begins, as shown in Figure 197(b). Specifically, the reach line RL is displayed spanning the left and right symbol 70a, which are temporarily stopped in a reach state, and the sound effect "Reach!" is output. The left and right symbol 70a are then highlighted and enlarged, moving towards the center of the screen. Additionally, the normal reach BGM is switched from the variable BGM 2 to the normal reach BGM.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the central display symbol 70a began to fluctuate slowly, a development sequence leading to the SP reach sequence is executed, as shown in Figure 197(c). Specifically, the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the display of the icon TI continues. A development sequence image is then displayed that restricts the visibility of the display images, such as the display symbol 70a and the background image, and a development sound effect common to each sequence mode (sequence modes A to F) is output. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the development sequence image.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, and the increase counter (MY) reaches "91001," exceeding the update value (91000), as shown in Figure 197(d), the development sequence continues, and an emphasis sequence for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, while the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed largely on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the other sequence images, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 4000" is output only once.

Furthermore, in the pre-announcement image CZ, the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in the format "91001/95000," and the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates" is switched to "Approximately 4000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, after the pre-announcement image CZ, which was displayed in large size on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in smaller size, and after the execution time of the development sequence (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the SP Reach sequence begins, as shown in Figure 198(e). Specifically, the SP Reach background image is displayed, the left and right sequence symbols 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen as only numbers, the SP Reach sequence image is displayed, and the SP Reach BGM is output. However, no sound effects are output when the left and right sequence symbols 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 198(f), the operation validity period for the cut-in effect begins, and the operation prompt effect starts. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation prompt image SG consisting of an effect button image resembling the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period, and an image of the text "Press!". At the same time, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and lights up in red.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the operation validity period expires, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in Figure 198(g). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for 3 seconds. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

Furthermore, once the cut-in animation period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 198(h), the central animation symbol 70a is larger than the left and right animation symbols 70a and temporarily stops at a different number than the left and right animation symbols 70a. However, without performing any pre-stop actions, the central animation symbol 70a emits a temporary stop sound "Popp♪" which is specific to losing.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 199(i), the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in their normal size and temporarily stopped at their designated stopping positions. After a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), an eye-catching animation is executed, as shown in Figure 199(j), indicating that the performance symbols 70a will stop. Specifically, an eye-catching image that restricts the visibility of the performance symbols 70a and the background image is displayed, gradually covering the entire screen, and an eye-catching sound effect common to each performance mode (performance modes A to F) is output. At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the eye-catching image.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 199(k), the eye-catching image is erased and the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the display mode corresponding to the character-based performance mode B, and a sound effect (shwan♪) for the temporary stop and re-display is output. Also, the hold icon HI is re-displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. After that, when the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, as shown in Figure 199(l), the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and their icons are erased.

This section explains the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the execution of the SP Reach animation in the variation animation of animation mode B. However, in other animation modes (for example, animation modes A, C, D-F), when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the execution of the SP Reach animation in the variation animation, the emphasis animation for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the development animation, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the execution of a development sequence that does not have an operation validity period, even when a development sequence that does have an operation validity period is being executed, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000) during the operation validity period, the operation validity period of the development sequence and the emphasis sequence for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device are executed in parallel with the development sequence, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to exceed the update value (91000), triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying an updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when a game ball enters another prize area (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (91000). In this case, the emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are also displayed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (91000) or more, triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying the updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when the update value reaches other values (90500, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500). The emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are displayed in the same manner.

Furthermore, while we have explained what happens when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the updated value (91,000) during the execution of the development sequence, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the specified value (90,000) during the execution of the development sequence or during the operation validity period of the development sequence, the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device will start in parallel with the operation validity period and the development sequence. The pre-notification image CZ will be displayed in large size on the first image display device 70, superimposed on the development sequence image, and the voice message "Remaining approximately 5,000" will be output only once. The light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device will then switch to the pre-notification mode (yellow flashing).

As shown in Figures 197 to 199, while switching the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variation path of the performance symbols 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of icons) from the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted during the execution of the development performance or during the effective period of operation of the development performance, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is possible. Therefore, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the development performance, allowing useful information to be provided to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 197 to 199, while switching the performance mode (mode-corresponding performance elements such as the variation path of the performance symbols 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display pattern of icons) from the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted during the execution of the development performance or during the effective period of operation of the development performance, it is possible to switch (update) the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the first display pattern (for example, "Remaining approximately 4500") to the second display pattern (for example, "Remaining approximately 4000"). Therefore, useful information can be provided to the player without the development performance hindering the updating of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 197 to 199, when the performance mode (mode-dependent performance elements such as the variation path of the performance symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of icons) switches from the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B, which is the second variation path), a switching performance (mode switching performance) is executed that restricts the visibility of the performance image (performance symbol 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the performance mode. However, if the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device switches from the first mode (for example, approximately 4500 remaining) to the second mode (for example, approximately 4000 remaining) during the execution of the development performance or during the effective period of operation of the development performance, the switching performance (display mode switching performance) that restricts the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not executed (it is restricted) (the pre-notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 197 to 199, it is possible to execute a development sequence, a type of specific sequence that changes the nature of the sequence during the execution of a variation sequence (other than development sequences that suggest development into a reach sequence with a high probability of winning, there are mode switching sequences that suggest a switch in the sequence mode, and eye-catching sequences that suggest the sequence symbol 70a will stop and be displayed). While the visibility of the sequence symbol 70a is restricted during the execution of a development sequence, the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is possible (the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, even during the execution of a development sequence, useful information can be provided to the player, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 197 to 199, it is possible to execute an eye-catching animation (an eye-catching animation that changes the animation pattern during the execution of a variable animation; other specific animations besides the eye-catching animation that suggests the animation symbol 70a will stop displaying include the mode switching animation that suggests a change in the animation mode, and the development animation that suggests development into a reach animation with a high probability of winning) during the execution of the eye-catching animation. While the visibility of the animation symbol 70a is restricted during the execution of the eye-catching animation, the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is possible (the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not restricted). Therefore, even during the execution of the eye-catching animation, useful information can be provided to the player, making it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value exceeding the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the numerical value was updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ. However, it may also be possible to update the numerical value while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value equal to or greater than the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the system was supposed to display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70 as an enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device. However, it is also possible to keep it displayed in a small size on the third image display device 72 and only output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX," or to not output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" and only display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70, or to perform only the update of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device without performing the enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

(Example of a presentation when the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the validity period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation)
Figures 200 to 201 show examples of animations when the pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the effective period of operation for the cut-in animation of the SP Reach variation animation.

First, as shown in Figure 200(a), during the variation display of the first special symbol with the first reserved number (U1) set to "1," and during the variation performance in performance mode B, the SP reach performance is executed. At this time, the reserved icon HI is hidden and the corresponding icon TI is displayed, the SP reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP reach BGM is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed in small size on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "91996/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 3500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates." Furthermore, when the SP Reach animation is being performed, there is a period of restricted animation mode switching, where switching between animation modes is limited.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 200(b), the operation validity period for the cut-in effect begins, and the operation prompt effect starts. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation prompt image SG consisting of an effect button image resembling the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period, and an image of the text "Press!". At the same time, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and lights up in red.

Then, during the effective period of the cut-in animation, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to reach "92001" (which is equal to or greater than the updated value of 92000), as shown in Figure 200(c), the operation promotion animation continues, and an emphasis animation for the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, while the pre-notification image CZ is updated and displayed. Specifically, the pre-notification image CZ is displayed on the first image display device 70 in a large size, superimposed on other animation images (such as the operation promotion image SG), and the voice message "Approximately 3000 remaining" is output only once.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "92001/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 3000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, after the pre-notification image CZ, which was displayed largely on the first image display device 70, moves to the third image display device 72 and is displayed in a smaller size, if the effect button 17 is operated or the operation valid period expires, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in Figure 200(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across both the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for 3 seconds. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

Furthermore, once the cut-in animation period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 201(e), the central animation symbol 70a is larger than the left and right animation symbols 70a and temporarily stops at the same size as the left and right animation symbols 70a, indicating a jackpot. However, without performing any pre-stop actions, a jackpot-specific temporary stop sound "Doon♪" common to each animation mode (animation modes A to F) is output.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 201(f), the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in their normal size and temporarily stopped at their respective positions, and the performance button 17 vibrates strongly and emits a rainbow light for 4 seconds. After a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), as shown in Figure 201(g), an eye-catching image that restricts the visibility of the performance symbols 70a and the background image is displayed, gradually covering the entire screen, and an eye-catching sound effect common to each performance mode (performance modes A to F) is output. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the eye-catching image.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 201(h), the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the display mode corresponding to the character-based performance mode B, and a sound effect (shwan♪) for the temporary stop and redisplay is output. Also, the performance button 17 vibrates strongly for one second and emits a rainbow light. Then, the hold icon HI is redisplayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. After that, when the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the three performance symbols 70a and the three special symbols TZ are displayed in a stopped state, and the corresponding icons are erased.

This section explains the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (92000) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation of animation mode B. However, in other animation modes (for example, animation modes A, C, D-F), when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (92000) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation, the emphasis animation for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed in parallel with the operation promotion animation, and the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is also executed.

Furthermore, while we explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (92000) during the effective period of the cut-in animation, even if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (92000) while the cut-in animation is running, the emphasis animation for the pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device will be executed in parallel with the cut-in animation, and the updated display of the pre-notification image CZ will also be executed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, causing the increase counter (MY) to exceed the update value (92000), triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying an updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when a game ball enters another prize area (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the update value (92000). In this case, the emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are also displayed.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) reaches an update value of 1 (92000) or more, triggering the emphasized pre-activation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device and displaying the updated pre-notification image CZ, the same applies when the update value reaches other values (90500, 91000, 91500, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500). The emphasized pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the updated pre-notification image CZ are displayed in the same manner.

As shown in Figures 200 to 201, during the operation validity period (operation promotion effect) of a cut-in effect, which is a type of operation effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17, or during the execution of the cut-in effect, switching the effect mode (mode-corresponding effect elements such as the variation path of the effect symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of the icons) from the first effect mode (for example, effect mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second effect mode (for example, effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is still possible. Therefore, the emphasized notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the operation validity period (operation promotion effect) of the cut-in effect, making it possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 200 to 201, during the operation validity period (operation-promoting effect) of a cut-in effect, which is one type of operation effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17, or during the execution of the cut-in effect, switching the effect mode (mode-corresponding effect elements such as the variation path of the effect symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of the icons) from the first effect mode (for example, effect mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second effect mode (for example, effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, switching (updating) the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the first display mode (for example, "Remaining approximately 3500") to the second display mode (for example, "Remaining approximately 3000") is possible. Therefore, the operation validity period (operation-promoting effect) of the cut-in effect does not hinder the updating of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, making it possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 200 to 201, when the performance mode (mode-dependent performance elements such as the variation path of the performance symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of icons) switches from the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B, which is the second variation path), a switching performance (mode switching performance) is executed that restricts the visibility of the performance image (performance symbol 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the performance mode. However, if the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device switches from the first display mode (for example, approximately 3500 remaining) to the second display mode (for example, approximately 3000 remaining) during the effective period of the cut-in performance operation, the switching performance (display mode switching performance) that restricts the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not executed (it is restricted) (the pre-notification image CZ is visible). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value exceeding the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the numerical value was updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ. However, it may also be possible to update the numerical value while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) increases to a value equal to or greater than the update value (90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500), the system was supposed to display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70 as an enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device. However, it is also possible to keep it displayed in a small size on the third image display device 72 and only output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX," or to not output the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" and only display the pre-notification image CZ in a large size on the first image display device 70, or to perform only the update of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device without performing the enhanced notification of the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, when the three performance symbols 70a are displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a display mode corresponding to the character-based performance mode B after the eye-catching image is cleared, the sound effect (shwan♪) for the temporary stop re-display may be omitted. Alternatively, when a losing performance symbol 70a is displayed after the eye-catching image is cleared, the sound effect (shwan♪) for the temporary stop re-display may be omitted, while when a winning performance symbol 70a is displayed after the eye-catching image is cleared, the sound effect (shwan♪) for the temporary stop re-display may be omitted, or vice versa.

(Example of a presentation when the pre-notification image related to the activation of the acquisition limit device is updated during the validity period of the cut-in presentation for the SP Reach variation presentation)
Figure 202 shows an example of a performance when the pre-notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is updated (regressed) during the effective period of operation for the cut-in performance of the SP Reach variation performance.

First, as shown in Figure 202(a), the SP Reach animation is being executed during the variation display of the first special symbol with the first reserved number (U1) set to "1," and during the variation animation of animation mode B. At this time, the reserved icon HI is hidden and the corresponding icon TI is displayed, the SP Reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP Reach BGM is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed in small size on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "91000/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 4000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates." Furthermore, when the SP Reach animation is running, there is a period of restricted animation mode switching, where switching between animation modes is limited.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 202(b), the operation validity period for the cut-in effect begins, and the operation prompt effect starts. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation prompt image SG consisting of an image of an effect button 17, a gauge image showing the remaining validity period, and an image of the text "Press!". At the same time, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and lights up in red.

Furthermore, when 100 game balls are launched into the game area 5a from the start of the SP Reach animation and the increase counter (MY) reaches "90900", the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90900/95000", along with the text image "Approximately 4000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates".

Then, when another game ball is launched and the increase counter (MY) reaches "90899" and falls below the reset value (90900), the pre-notification image CZ displayed on the third image display device 72 is updated, as shown in Figure 202(c). Specifically, the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device are displayed in the form of "90899/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 4500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the operation validity period expires, the cut-in effect is executed as shown in Figure 202(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for 3 seconds. At this time, the pre-notification image CZ remains visible without being obscured by the cut-in image.

This section explains the case where the increment counter (MY) falls below the regression update value (90900) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation of performance mode B. However, in other performance modes (for example, performance modes A, C, D-F), if the increment counter (MY) falls below the regression update value (90900) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation, the update display of the pre-notification image CZ is executed in parallel with the operation prompt animation.

Furthermore, while we explained the case where the increase counter (MY) falls below the update value for regression (90900) during the effective period of the cut-in animation, even if the increase counter (MY) falls below the update value for regression (90900) while the cut-in animation is running, the pre-announcement image CZ update display will be executed in parallel with the cut-in animation.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the cut-in animation is currently active or not, if the increment counter (MY) falls below the update value for regression (90900), the pre-announcement image CZ update display will be executed in parallel with the ongoing animation.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the update display of the pre-warning image CZ is executed when the increment counter (MY) falls below the update value for regression (90900), the same update display of the pre-warning image CZ is executed when it falls below other update values for regression (90400, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500).

As shown in Figure 202, during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation (operation-promoting animation), switching the animation mode (mode-corresponding animation elements such as the variation path of the animation symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display pattern of icons) from the first animation mode (for example, animation mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second animation mode (for example, animation mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, switching (updating) the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the second display pattern (for example, "Remaining approximately 4000") to the first display pattern (for example, "Remaining 4500") is possible. Therefore, the operation validity period of the cut-in animation (operation-promoting animation) does not hinder the updating of the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to Figure 202, when the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device is switched (updated) from the first display mode (e.g., "4500 remaining") to the second display mode (e.g., "approximately 4000 remaining"), the value of the increment counter (MY) (updated values: 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) and the acquisition The value of the increment counter (MY) when switching (updating) the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the second display mode (e.g., "Remaining approximately 4000") to the first display mode (e.g., "Remaining 4500") is set to a different value from the update value for regression (90400, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500). Therefore, immediately after the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device switches from the first display mode (e.g., "Remaining approximately 4500") to the second display mode (e.g., "Remaining approximately 4000"), it becomes less likely for the pre-notification image CZ to switch back from the second display mode (e.g., "Remaining approximately 4000") to the first display mode (e.g., "Remaining 4500"), making the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device easier to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 202, when the performance mode (mode-dependent performance elements such as the variation path of the performance symbol 70a, the type of background image, the type of variation BGM, and the display mode of icons) switches from the first performance mode (for example, performance mode A, which is the first variation path) to the second performance mode (for example, performance mode B, which is the second variation path), a switching performance (mode switching performance) is executed that restricts the visibility of the performance image (performance symbol 70a, background image, etc.) corresponding to the performance mode. However, if the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device switches from the second display mode (for example, "Remaining approximately 4000") to the first display mode (for example, "Remaining 4500") during the effective period of the cut-in performance operation, the switching performance (display mode switching performance) that restricts the visibility of the pre-notification image CZ is not executed (it is restricted) (the pre-notification image CZ can be viewed). Therefore, it is possible to provide useful information to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) decreases and falls below the update values for regression (90400, 90900, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500), the numerical value is updated without changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ. However, it may also be changed to update the numerical value while changing the design (shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the pre-announcement image CZ.

Furthermore, when the increment counter (MY) decreases and falls below the update values for regression (90400, 90900, 91400, 91900, 92400, 92900, 93400, 93900, 94400, 94500), although previously no emphasis notification was given when updating the pre-notification image CZ related to the operation of the acquisition limit device, emphasis notification may be given. In this case, the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed in large size on the first image display device 70 and the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" may be output, or the pre-notification image CZ may simply be displayed in large size on the first image display device 70, or the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX" may simply be output.

(Example of a sequence when the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device ends during the valid period of operation for the cut-in sequence of the SP Reach variation sequence)
Figure 203 shows an example of a performance when the pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device ends during the operation validity period of the cut-in performance of the SP Reach variation performance.

First, as shown in Figure 203(a), the SP Reach animation is being executed during the variation display of the first special symbol with the first reserved number (U1) set to "1," and during the variation animation of animation mode B. At this time, the reserved icon HI is hidden and the corresponding icon TI is displayed, the SP Reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP Reach BGM is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed in small size on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "90000/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 5000 remaining until acquisition limit device activates." Furthermore, when the SP Reach animation is being performed, there is a period of restricted animation mode switching, where switching between animation modes is limited.

Subsequently, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 203(b), the operation validity period for the cut-in effect begins, and the operation prompt effect starts. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation prompt image SG consisting of an effect button image resembling the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period, and an image of the text "Press!". At the same time, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state and illuminates in red.

Furthermore, when 100 game balls are launched into the game area 5a from the start of the SP Reach animation and the increase counter (MY) reaches "89900", the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "89900/95000", along with the text image "Approximately 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates".

Then, when one more game ball is launched and the increase counter (MY) reaches "89899" and falls below the end value (89900), the pre-notification image CZ displayed on the third image display device 72 is erased, as shown in Figure 203(c), and the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device ends.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the operation validity period expires, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in Figure 203(d). Specifically, a cut-in image is displayed across the first image display device 70 and the third image display device 72, a cut-in sound effect is output, and the effect button 17 turns off and vibrates weakly for 3 seconds.

This section explains the case where the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation of performance mode B. However, in other performance modes (for example, performance modes A, C, D-F), if the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the operation validity period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation, the pre-notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the operation promotion animation, and the pre-notification (pre-notification) before the operation of the acquisition limit device ends.

Furthermore, while we explained the case where the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during the effective period of the cut-in animation, even if the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) while the cut-in animation is running, the pre-notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the cut-in animation, and the pre-notification before the acquisition limit device is activated (pre-notification) ends.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the cut-in animation is active or currently in progress, if the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900) during a predetermined animation (including not only variable animations in which the cut-in animation is performed, but also animations such as jackpot animations and customer waiting demo animations in which the cut-in animation is not performed), the pre-notification image CZ is erased in parallel with the ongoing animation, and the pre-notification (pre-notification) before the acquisition limit device is activated ends.

As shown in Figure 203, when the increase counter (MY) falls below the end value (89900), the pre-announcement image CZ is erased in parallel with the ongoing animation (waiting animation, variation animation, jackpot animation), and the pre-announcement of the acquisition limit device (pre-announcement) ends. Therefore, the termination of the pre-announcement of the acquisition limit device is not hindered by the ongoing animation, allowing for the provision of useful information to the player and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 203, the value of the increment counter (MY) when starting the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device (default value: 90000) and the value of the increment counter (MY) when ending the pre-operation notification (end value: 89900) are set to different values. Therefore, it becomes less likely for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device to end immediately after it starts, making it easier to recognize the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device.

Furthermore, while previously no emphasis notification was given when the increment counter (MY) falls below the termination value (89900) and the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device ends, this may be changed. In this case, the pre-notification image CZ may be displayed in large size on the first image display device 70 and then erased, or an audio message such as "Pre-operation notification has ended" may be output.

(Example of a sequence of events when the payout limit device is activated during a continuous予告演出)
Figure 204 shows an example of a sequence of events when the acquisition limit device is activated during a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement sequence).

First, as shown in Figure 204(a), when the first special symbol is displayed with the first reserve number (U1) at "1" and the machine is controlled in performance mode B, if a game ball enters the first start port 45 and the execution of a pre-reading action sequence spanning two variation sequences is determined, and the first reserve number (U1) becomes "2", then one reserve icon HI is added and displayed in the first reserve icon display area 70B. At this time, the mode B background image is displayed on the image display device, and variation BGM 2 is output. Also, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "94998/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

Then, after the stop time for the first special symbol has elapsed and the next variation display of the first special symbol begins, as shown in Figure 204(b), one hold icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, and the variation and pre-read operation effects begin. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a begin their pre-variation operation, the special symbol TZ begins its variation display, and then the three effect symbols 70a begin their variation display moving along the second variation path. In addition, as a pre-read operation effect, the first movable member 77a performs an operation effect (first operation effect) in which it descends toward the center of the screen of the first image display device 70 by a width smaller than the maximum descent width.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, the increase counter (MY) reaches "95003," exceeding the activation value (95000). As shown in Figure 204(c), the acquisition limit device activates, stopping the game's progress control. The main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-hand play display 67, status confirmation display 68, and game status display) then turns off, displaying a non-display state (the special symbol display displays a different display mode than those indicating losing special symbols or jackpot special symbols).

Furthermore, game effects including pre-announcement animations (variation animations, animation illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, illumination of the sub-information display device 80, etc.) are forcibly terminated, the first movable member 77a begins its return to its initial position, and an announcement indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated is initiated. Specifically, an activation announcement image (activation announcement screen) is displayed with a black background image and two areas of white text that read "Acquisition limit device activated. Game over for today." The audio "Acquisition limit device activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the acquisition limit device activation announcement flashes white.

Furthermore, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information), and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: activation of the winning limit device → cessation of game progress control → non-display of the main information display device 59 → end of game presentation + notification of winning limit device activation → output of a winning limit device activation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 → return of the first movable member 77a to its initial position; or activation of the winning limit device → cessation of game progress control → non-display of the main information display device 59 → output of a winning limit device activation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 → end of game presentation + notification of winning limit device activation → return of the first movable member 77a to its initial position. The former is more likely to occur.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 204(d), the first movable member 77a returns to its initial position, and the notification that the winning limit device is operating continues until the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF.

This section describes the case where a pre-read operation is performed over two fluctuation animations in performance mode B. However, even if the pre-read operation is performed over one fluctuation animation, or over three or more fluctuation animations, when the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95000) and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and the game animations including the pre-read operation (fluctuation animations, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is started.

Furthermore, while the case where the pre-read action is executed in performance mode B has been explained, in the case where other consecutive notification effects (pre-read effect effects, pre-read chance eye effects, pre-read vibration effects, pre-read zone effects) are executed, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95000) and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and game effects including the pre-read action (variation effects, effect illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is started.

Furthermore, while the case where the pre-read action animation is executed in performance mode B has been explained, in other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), when other consecutive notification animations (pre-read action animation, pre-read effect animation, pre-read chance eye animation, pre-read vibration animation, pre-read zone animation) are executed, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95000) and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and game animations including the pre-read action animation (variation animation, animation illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is started.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, the acquisition limit device also activates when a game ball enters other prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000). This stops the game's progress control, turns off the main information display device 59, and forcibly terminates game effects (including pre-reading effects, frame lighting devices 10 and panel lighting devices 76), and initiates an announcement that the acquisition limit device is activated.

(Example of a scene when the acquisition limit device is activated during a dialogue preview)
Figure 205 shows an example of a presentation when the acquisition limit device is activated during a dialogue announcement presentation.

First, as shown in Figure 205(a), the first special symbol is being displayed with a first reserve number (U1) of "1," and the variation performance is in the B performance mode. At this time, one reserve icon HI and the corresponding icon TI are displayed, the B mode background image is displayed on the image display device, and the variation BGM 2 is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (pre-notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and the pre-notification image CZ is displayed on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-notification image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "94998/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates."

In this state, when the validity period for operating the performance button 17 related to the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue announcement performance) begins, the operation prompt performance starts. Specifically, the dialogue window SW is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an operation prompt image SG is displayed within the dialogue window SW, consisting of an image of the performance button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period. Also, the performance button 17 lights up white in its normal state. Furthermore, from the time a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variation performance, a performance mode switching restriction period is established, during which switching of performance modes is restricted.

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated, as shown in Figure 205(b), the operation validity period ends and the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告演出 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue予告 - dialogue announcement action announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - action announcement - dialogue announcement - action announcement - action announcement - action announcement

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, the increase counter (MY) reaches "95003," exceeding the activation value (95000). As shown in Figure 205(c), the acquisition limit device activates, stopping the game's progress control. The main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-hand play display 67, status confirmation display 68, and game status display) then turns off, displaying a non-display state (the special symbol display displays a different display mode than those indicating losing special symbols or jackpot special symbols).

Furthermore, game effects including dialogue announcements (such as fluctuation effects and the illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76) are forcibly terminated, and a notification indicating that the payout limit device has been activated is initiated. Specifically, an activation notification image (activation notification screen) is displayed with a black background image and a white text area that reads "Payout limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today." The audio "Payout limit device has been activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the payout limit device activation notification flashes white.

Furthermore, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information), and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: activation of the payout limit device → cessation of game progress control → main information display device 59 goes blank → end of game presentation + notification of payout limit device activation → output of payout limit device activation signal from frame control board 120 to dedicated unit 170; or activation of the payout limit device → cessation of game progress control → main information display device 59 goes blank → output of payout limit device activation signal from frame control board 120 to dedicated unit 170 → end of game presentation + notification of payout limit device activation. The former is more likely to occur.

After that, the notification indicating that the winning limit device is activated will continue until the power to gaming machine 1 is turned OFF.

This section describes the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) during the execution of the dialogue notification sequence in the variation sequence of the performance mode B, thereby activating the acquisition limit device. However, in the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) during the execution of the dialogue notification sequence in the variation sequence of the other performance modes (performance modes A, C, D-F), the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and the game performance (variation sequence, illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.), including the dialogue notification sequence (operation valid period), is forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification begins.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) after the validity period for the dialogue notification effect has ended, and the acquisition limit device is activated, in the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) and the acquisition limit device is activated during the validity period for the dialogue notification effect, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and the game effects including the dialogue notification effect (variation effects, effect illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the notification that the acquisition limit device is activated is started.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a dialogue notification effect with an operation validity period is executed before a reach effect in a variation effect, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95000) during the execution of other notification effects with an operation validity period (such as pseudo-consecutive effect), and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and game effects including other notification effects (variation effect, effect illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is started.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general prize entry point 43, the acquisition limit device also activates when a game ball enters other prize entry areas (first start entry point 45, second start entry point 47, large prize entry point 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000). This stops the game progress control, turns off the main information display device 59, forcibly terminates game effects including dialogue announcements (variation effects, frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 effects, etc.), and initiates an announcement that the acquisition limit device is activated.

(Example of an animation when the acquisition limit device is activated during the validity period of the cut-in animation)
Figure 206 shows an example of a cut-in animation when the acquisition limit device is activated during the effective period of the cut-in animation.

First, as shown in Figure 206(a), the SP Reach animation is being executed during the variation display of the first special symbol with the first reserved number (U1) set to "1," and during the variation animation of animation mode B. At this time, the reserved icon HI is hidden and the corresponding icon TI is displayed, the SP Reach background image is displayed on the image display device, and the SP Reach BGM is output. Furthermore, the pre-operation notification (advance notification) of the acquisition limit device is being executed, and the advance notification image CZ is displayed in small size on the third image display device 72.

At this time, the pre-announcement image CZ displays the current increase counter value and the activation value of the acquisition limit device in the format "94998/95000," along with the text image "Approximately 500 remaining until acquisition limit device activates." Furthermore, when the SP Reach animation is being performed, there is a period of restricted animation mode switching, where switching between animation modes is limited.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 206(b), the operation validity period for the cut-in effect begins, and the operation prompt effect starts. Specifically, the first image display device 70 displays an operation prompt image SG consisting of an effect button image resembling the effect button 17, a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period, and an image of the text "Press!". The effect button 17 also illuminates in white, remaining in its normal state.

Subsequently, when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, the increase counter (MY) reaches "95003," exceeding the activation value (95000). As shown in Figure 206(c), the acquisition limit device activates, stopping the game's progress control. The main information display device 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, second special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-hand play display 67, status confirmation display 68, and game status display) then turns off and becomes invisible (the special symbol display displays a different mode than those indicating losing special symbols or jackpot special symbols).

Furthermore, the game's effects (including the cut-in effect (operation validity period), such as the variation effect and the illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76), are forcibly terminated, and a notification indicating that the payout limit device has been activated is initiated. Specifically, an activation notification image (activation notification screen) is displayed with a black background image and a white text area that reads "Payout limit device activated. Gameplay is over for today." The audio "Payout limit device activated" is repeatedly output, and the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the payout limit device activation notification flashes white.

Furthermore, the main control board 110 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information), and the frame control board 120 outputs a signal indicating that the winning limit device is operating (hall control/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 170.

The sequence of events at this time can be either: activation of the payout limit device → cessation of game progress control → main information display device 59 goes blank → end of game presentation + notification of payout limit device activation → output of payout limit device activation signal from frame control board 120 to dedicated unit 170; or activation of the payout limit device → cessation of game progress control → main information display device 59 goes blank → output of payout limit device activation signal from frame control board 120 to dedicated unit 170 → end of game presentation + notification of payout limit device activation. The former is more likely to occur.

After that, the notification indicating that the winning limit device is activated will continue until the power to gaming machine 1 is turned OFF.

This section describes the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) during the operation valid period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation of animation mode B, and the acquisition limit device is activated. However, in the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) during the operation valid period of the cut-in animation in the variation animation of other animation modes (animation modes A, C, D-F), and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and the game animations (variation animations, animation illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.), including the cut-in animation (operation valid period), are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is started.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) during the effective period of the cut-in animation, causing the acquisition limit device to activate, we also explain the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) after the effective period of the cut-in animation has ended, causing the acquisition limit device to activate. In this case, game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and game animations including the cut-in animation (variation animations, animation illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.) are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification begins.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where a cut-in animation with an operation validity period is executed during a reach animation in a variation animation, if the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95000) during the execution of other pre-announcement animations (such as decisive animations) with operation validity periods, and the acquisition limit device is activated, the game progress control is stopped, the main information display device 59 becomes invisible, and other game animations, including pre-announcement animations (variation animations, animation illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76, etc.), are forcibly terminated, and the acquisition limit device activation notification is initiated.

Furthermore, while we have explained the case where the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000) when a game ball enters the general prize slot 43, the acquisition limit device also activates when a game ball enters other prize slots (first start slot 45, second start slot 47, large prize slot 50) and the increase counter (MY) exceeds the activation value (95,000). This stops the game's progress control, turns off the main information display device 59, and forcibly terminates game effects, including cut-in effects (variation effects, frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 effects, etc.), and initiates an announcement that the acquisition limit device is activated.

As shown in Figures 204 to 206, during the execution of a continuous pre-announcement sequence (such as a pre-read animation sequence) spanning multiple fluctuation sequences, switching the fluctuation path of the animation symbol 70a from the first fluctuation path to the second fluctuation path (for example, switching from animation mode A, which is the first fluctuation path, to animation mode B, which is the second fluctuation path) is restricted. However, it is possible to execute a notification (specific notification) indicating that the acquisition limit device is activated when the acquisition limit device is activated. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition limit device has been activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, during the execution of a continuous予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) spanning multiple fluctuation effects (pre-announcement effects such as pre-reading action effects), switching the fluctuation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first fluctuation path to the second fluctuation path (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first fluctuation path, to effect mode B, which is the second fluctuation path) is restricted. However, it is possible to switch the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device from the first mode display (pre-announcement image CZ) to the second mode display (acquisition limit device operation notification image). Therefore, the continuous予告演出 does not hinder the switching of the display mode of the notification image related to the operation of the acquisition limit device (switching from pre-announcement image CZ to operation notification image), thereby providing useful information to the player and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, during the variation animation, the movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) can perform a first motion animation (a downward movement smaller than the maximum downward movement range, such as during pre-read animation, pseudo-consecutive animation, and development animation) and a second motion animation (a downward movement at the maximum downward movement range, such as during a successful outcome animation). While the first motion animation of the movable members is being performed, switching the variation path of the animation symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from animation mode A, which is the first variation path, to animation mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted, but it is possible to perform notification that the acquisition limit device is operating. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition limit device has been activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, if the winning limit device is activated during the execution of a series of consecutive pre-announcement sequences (pre-read sequences) spanning multiple fluctuation sequences, the execution of the series of pre-announcement sequences (pre-read sequences) is restricted (sequential pre-announcement sequences other than pre-read sequence sequences end immediately, but in the case of pre-read sequence sequences, the return operation of the first movable member 77a is performed to terminate the sequence). Therefore, it becomes easier for players to recognize when the winning limit device has been activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, while operation-based effects (such as dialogue予告 effects, pseudo-consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, and decisive effects) are being executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17, or during the effective period of operation related to the operation-based effects, switching the variation path of the effect symbol 70a from the first variation path to the second variation path (for example, switching from effect mode A, which is the first variation path, to effect mode B, which is the second variation path) is restricted. However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, it is possible to execute an activation notification (specific notification) for the acquisition limit device. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the acquisition limit device has been activated, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, when the winning limit device is activated, the game progress control stops, the main information display device 59 becomes blank, and then the game effects (variation effects, jackpot game effects, etc.) end, followed by the activation of the winning limit device notification (specific notification). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the game effects have ended because the game progress control has stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, when the winning limit device is activated, the game progress control stops and the main information display device 59 becomes blank. After this, the frame control board 120 can output a signal indicating that the winning limit device is activated to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it becomes possible to detect the activation of the winning limit device from outside the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 204 to 206, when the winning limit device is activated, after the game animation (variation animation, jackpot animation, etc.) ends and the winning limit device activation notification (specific notification) begins, it is possible to output a winning limit device activation signal from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170. Therefore, it becomes possible to detect the activation of the winning limit device from outside the game machine 1.

Furthermore, when the payout limit device is activated, various game effects (variation effects, continuous予告 effects, dialogue予告 effects, cut-in effects, etc.) are terminated and the various effect images are hidden, and a notification (specific notification) indicating that the payout limit device is activated is executed. However, for example, a semi-transparent image that allows the various effect images to be seen through is displayed in front of the various effect images, and in that state, a white text area saying "Payout limit device activated. Game over for today" is displayed. Specifically, if the payout limit device is activated during a variation effect, the stopped effect symbol 70a is displayed behind the semi-transparent image, and if the payout limit device is activated during a jackpot game effect, the stationary jackpot effect image is displayed behind the semi-transparent image, thus halting the progress of the game effects.

Furthermore, while the system was previously configured to terminate the illumination of the sub-information display devices 80 (sub-first variable indicator, sub-second variable indicator, sub-first hold indicator, sub-second hold indicator, sub-normal diagram variable indicator, sub-normal diagram hold indicator, sub-right-hand hit indicator) and execute an alert indicating that the acquisition limit device was operational when the acquisition limit device was activated, it may also be configured to continue the illumination of the sub-information display devices 80, or, if the LEDs were blinking, to be switched on or off while executing the alert indicating that the acquisition limit device was operational.

In this embodiment, the notification pattern for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ, the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX", and the light emission pattern of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) was the same regardless of the type of performance mode. However, the notification pattern (for example, the shape, color, pattern, etc. of the pre-notification image CZ) for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device (pre-notification image CZ, the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX", and the light emission pattern of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) may be made different depending on the type of performance mode. In this case, the notification pattern for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device may be made different for performance modes A to C, which correspond to the normal game state, and for performance modes D to F, which correspond to specific game states.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the notification manner for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device (design and display position of the pre-notification image CZ, the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX", and the illumination manner of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) was kept the same regardless of the execution state of the game performance (customer waiting demo performance, variation performance, jackpot game performance, etc.). However, the notification manner for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device (design and display position of the pre-notification image CZ, the voice message "Remaining approximately XXXX", and the illumination manner of the light-emitting part of the frame lighting device 10 related to the operation notification of the acquisition limit device) may be changed depending on the execution state of the game performance. In this case, the notification manner for the pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device may be different before and during the reach performance, or during the variation performance and during the jackpot game performance.

(The length of various periods for each performance mode)
Figure 207 is a diagram showing the lengths of various periods for the variable effects for each performance mode.
The various periods of the variation effect include a pre-variation operation period before the variation symbol 70a is displayed, a high-speed variation period in which the variation symbol 70a is displayed in a way that makes it difficult to identify the type of symbol, a low-speed variation period in which the variation symbol 70a is displayed in a way that makes it possible to identify the type of symbol, a temporary stop period in which the variation symbol 70a is shaken and varied in a way that makes it possible to identify the type of symbol, and a stop period in which the variation symbol 70a is displayed in a stationary state.

During the pre-variation operation period, the display symbol 70a becomes opaque, making the background image difficult to see. During the high-speed variation period, the display symbol 70a becomes transparent, allowing the background image to be seen. During the low-speed variation period, the display symbol 70a becomes opaque, making the background image difficult to see. During the temporary stop period, the display symbol 70a becomes opaque, making the background image difficult to see. During the stop period, the display symbol 70a becomes opaque, making the background image difficult to see.

As shown in Figure 207(a), when the variation animation pattern 1 (normal variation) is executed in animation mode A, at timing T0, the floating display of the three animation symbols 70a as a pre-variation action begins; at timing T1, the left animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling); at timing T2, the center animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling); and at timing T3, the right animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling).

Then, at timing T4, the left-side symbol 70a begins slow-speed fluctuation a; at timing T5, the left-side symbol 70a begins temporary stop a; at timing T6, the right-side symbol 70a begins slow-speed fluctuation b; at timing T7, the right-side symbol 70a begins temporary stop b; at timing T8, the center symbol 70a begins slow-speed fluctuation c; at timing T9, the center symbol 70a begins temporary stop c; at timing T10, the three symbols 70a begin to display a stop; and at timing T11, the stop display of the three symbols 70a ends.

Furthermore, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed scrolling begins at timing T0, a stop display begins at timing T10, and the stop display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period for the three display symbols 70a is slow-speed fluctuation a < slow-speed fluctuation c < slow-speed fluctuation b, the length of the temporary stop period for the three display symbols 70a is temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the length of the stop period for all three display symbols 70a is the same.

As shown in Figure 207(b), when the variation animation pattern 1 (normal variation) is executed in animation mode B, at timing T0, the three animation symbols 70a begin to be reduced in size as a pre-variation action. At timing T1, the three animation symbols 70a begin to change rapidly (scrolling). At timing T2, the leftmost animation symbol 70a begins to change rapidly (a).

Then, at timing T3, the left-side symbol 70a begins its temporary stop a, and the right-side symbol 70a begins its slow fluctuation b. At timing T4, the central symbol 70a begins its temporary stop b, and the central symbol 70a begins its slow fluctuation c. At timing T5, the central symbol 70a begins its temporary stop c. At timing T6, the three symbols 70a begin their stop display, and at timing T7, the three symbols 70a end their stop display.

Furthermore, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed scrolling begins at timing T0, a stop display begins at timing T6, and the stop display ends at timing T7.

In this case, the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period for the three display symbols 70a is slow-speed fluctuation a < slow-speed fluctuation c < slow-speed fluctuation b, the length of the temporary stop period for the three display symbols 70a is temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the length of the stop period for all three display symbols 70a is the same.

As shown in Figure 207(c), when the variation animation pattern 1 (normal variation) is executed in animation mode B, at timing T0, the enlarged display of the three animation symbols 70a as a pre-variation action begins. At timing T1, the high-speed variation (scrolling) of the right animation symbol 70a begins. At timing T2, the high-speed variation (scrolling) of the center animation symbol 70a begins. At timing T3, the high-speed variation (scrolling) of the left animation symbol 70a begins.

Then, at timing T4, the slow fluctuation a of the left-side symbol 70a begins; at timing T5, the slow fluctuation b of the right-side symbol 70a begins; at timing T6, the temporary stop a of the left-side symbol 70a begins; at timing T7, the slow fluctuation c of the central symbol 70a begins; at timing T8, the temporary stop b of the right-side symbol 70a begins; at timing T9, the temporary stop c of the central symbol 70a begins; at timing T10, the stop display of the three symbol 70a begins; and at timing T11, the stop display of the three symbol 70a ends.

Furthermore, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed scrolling begins at timing T0, a stop display begins at timing T10, and the stop display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period for the three display symbols 70a is slow-speed fluctuation b < slow-speed fluctuation c < slow-speed fluctuation a, the length of the temporary stop period for the three display symbols 70a is temporary stop c < temporary stop b < temporary stop a, and the length of the stop period for all three display symbols 70a is the same.

As shown in Figure 207(d), when the variation animation pattern 2 (shortened variation) is executed in animation modes A to C, at timing T0, the high-speed variation of the three animation symbols 70a begins without any pre-variation actions. At timing T1, the low-speed variation d to f of the three animation symbols 70a begins. At timing T2, the temporary stop d to f of the three animation symbols 70a begins. At timing T3, the stop display of the three animation symbols 70a begins. At timing T4, the stop display of the three animation symbols 70a ends.

Furthermore, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed scrolling begins at timing T0, stopping at timing T3, and stopping at timing T4.

In this case, the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period for all three effect symbols 70a is the same (slow-speed fluctuation d = slow-speed fluctuation e = slow-speed fluctuation f), and in fluctuation effect pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), slow-speed fluctuation a > slow-speed fluctuation d. The length of the temporary stop period for all three effect symbols 70a is also the same (temporary stop d < temporary stop e < temporary stop f), and the length of the stop period for all three effect symbols 70a is also the same.

Furthermore, instead of making the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period and the length of the temporary stop period for all three performance symbols 70a the same, the lengths of the slow-speed fluctuation period and/or the temporary stop period for all three performance symbols 70a may be slightly different (approximately the same), or the slow-speed fluctuation period may not be provided for the three performance symbols 70a at all.

As shown in Figure 207(e), when the variation animation pattern 3 (pseudo-failure variation) or variation animation pattern 4 (normal reach variation) of the animation mode A is executed, at timing T0, the three animation symbols 70a begin to float up as a pre-variation action; at timing T1, the left animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling); at timing T2, the center animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling); and at timing T3, the right animation symbol 70a begins high-speed variation (scrolling).

Then, at timing T4, the left-side symbol 70a begins slow fluctuation g; at timing T5, the left-side symbol 70a begins temporary stop g; at timing T6, the right-side symbol 70a begins slow fluctuation h; at timing T7, the right-side symbol 70a begins temporary stop h; at timing T8, the center symbol 70a begins slow fluctuation i; at timing T9, the center symbol 70a begins temporary stop i; at timing T10, the three symbols 70a begin stop display; and at timing T11, the stop display of the three symbols 70a ends.

Furthermore, for the three special symbols TZ, high-speed scrolling begins at timing T0, a stop display begins at timing T10, and the stop display ends at timing T11.

In this case, the length of the slow-speed fluctuation period for the three performance symbols 70a is slow-speed fluctuation g < slow-speed fluctuation h < slow-speed fluctuation i, and in fluctuation performance pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), slow-speed fluctuation c < slow-speed fluctuation i. The length of the temporary stop period for the three performance symbols 70a is temporary stop g < temporary stop h < temporary stop i, and the length of the stop period for all three performance symbols 70a is the same.

Furthermore, when the variation animation pattern 3 (failed pseudo-consecutive wins) or variation animation pattern 4 (normal reach variation) of the animation mode B is executed, the timing is the same as in Figure 207(b) up to T4. The difference lies in the fact that the slow variation period is as follows: slow variation of the left animation symbol 70a < slow variation of the right animation symbol 70a < slow variation period of the central animation symbol 70a.

Furthermore, when the variation animation pattern 3 (failed pseudo-consecutive wins) or variation animation pattern 4 (normal reach variation) of the animation mode C is executed, the timing is the same as in Figure 207(c) up to T8. The difference lies in the slow variation period: the slow variation of the right-hand animation symbol 70a < the slow variation of the left-hand animation symbol 70a < the slow variation period of the central animation symbol 70a.

As shown in Figure 207, the display of the recurring symbol 70a in the recurring animation consists of a high-speed recurring period, a low-speed recurring period following the high-speed recurring period, and a symbol extraction period (temporary stop period, or temporary stop period + stop period) following the low-speed recurring period. In predetermined recurring animation patterns (recurring animation pattern 1, recurring animation pattern 3, recurring animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the low-speed recurring period of the recurring symbol 70a in the first display area (left area), which is the first symbol extraction period (temporary stop period), different from the length of the low-speed recurring period of the recurring symbol 70a in the second display area (right area), which is the second symbol extraction period (temporary stop period). Therefore, the difference between the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area) enhances the effect of the recurring animation and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in predetermined variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area), which is the first symbol extraction period (temporary stop period), different from the length of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area), which is the last symbol extraction period (temporary stop period). Therefore, by creating a difference between the first display area (left area) and the third display area (center area), the effect of the variation animation can be enhanced, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in predetermined variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right-side area), which is the second animation sequence (temporary stop period), different from the length of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area), which is the last animation sequence (temporary stop period). Therefore, the difference between the second display area (right-side area) and the third display area (center area) enhances the effect of the variation animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) different from the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area). In the second variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 2, etc.), which have a shorter animation period than the first variation animation pattern, it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) and the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) the same or approximately the same. Therefore, by changing the slow-speed variation period in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area) depending on the type of variation animation pattern, the effect of the variation animation can be enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation pattern (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) different from the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area). In the second variation animation pattern (variation animation pattern 2, etc.), which has a shorter animation period than the first variation animation pattern, it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) and the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area) the same or approximately the same. Therefore, by changing the slow-speed variation period in the first display area (left area) and the third display area (center area) depending on the type of variation animation pattern, the effect of the variation animation can be enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.), it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) different from the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area). In the second variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 2, etc.), which have a shorter animation period than the first variation animation pattern, it is possible to make the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) and the length of the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area) the same or approximately the same. Therefore, by varying the slow-speed variation period in the second display area (left area) and the third display area (center area) depending on the type of variation animation pattern, the effect of the variation animation can be enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode A, the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) does not overlap with the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area), and the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) does not overlap with the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, the start of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in each display area can be visually confirmed by the player, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode B, the end timing of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) coincides with the start timing of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area), and the end timing of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) coincides with the start timing of the slow variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, the slow variations of the animation symbol 70a in each display area can be made to appear as a continuous sequence, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 207, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode C, the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the first display area (left area) overlaps with the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area), and the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the second display area (right area) overlaps with the slow-speed variation period of the animation symbol 70a in the third display area (center area). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the slow-speed variation period in the variation animation and lengthen the other animation periods, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode A, the slow-speed variation periods of the three animation symbols 70a do not overlap. However, it is also possible to allow the slow-speed variation periods of the animation symbols 70a in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area), or the slow-speed variation periods of the animation symbols 70a in the second display area (right area) and the third display area (center area) to overlap.

Furthermore, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode B, the end timing of the slow variation period for the three animation symbols 70a coincides with the start timing of the slow variation period. However, the end timing of the slow variation period in the first display area (left area) and the start timing of the slow variation period in the second display area (right area), or the end timing of the slow variation period in the second display area (right area) and the start timing of the slow variation period in the third display area (center area) may not coincide (each slow variation period may overlap or not overlap).

Furthermore, in the first variation animation patterns (variation animation pattern 1, variation animation pattern 3, variation animation pattern 4, etc.) in animation mode C, the slow-speed variation periods of the three animation symbols 70a overlap. However, the slow-speed variation periods of the animation symbols 70a in the first display area (left area) and the second display area (right area), or the slow-speed variation periods of the animation symbols 70a in the second display area (right area) and the third display area (center area), may be made so as not to overlap.

Furthermore, the slow-speed movement pattern of the central symbol 70a (movement speed of the symbol 70a, ease of visibility of the symbol 70a, etc.) when variation pattern 1 (normal variation) is executed may be made different from that of variation pattern 2 (shortened variation), variation pattern 3 (pseudo-failure variation), variation pattern 4 (normal reach variation).

Furthermore, the slow-speed fluctuation period of the central symbol 70a may be more likely to occur when a fluctuation animation that triggers an SP reach animation is performed in performance modes A to C, compared to when a fluctuation animation that triggers an SP reach animation is performed in performance modes D to F (in performance modes D to F, the slow-speed fluctuation period may not occur, or may occur at a low rate), or the slow-speed fluctuation period of the central symbol 70a may be more likely to occur (the time until the development animation is performed may be longer).

Furthermore, in performance modes A through F, when SP reach performances or SPSP reach performances are executed, during the slow-speed fluctuation period of the central performance symbol 70a up to the normal reach performance, the central performance symbol 70a may be vertically scrolled. During the slow-speed fluctuation period after the development performance, the central performance symbol 70a may be horizontally scrolled or diagonally instead of vertically scrolled.

Furthermore, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay), the slow-speed fluctuation period of at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a may be shorter when the second fluctuation performance (a no-reach miss) is executed first fluctuation

Furthermore, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay), the slow-speed fluctuation period of at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a may be shorter when the second fluctuation performance (a no-reach miss) is executed

Furthermore, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), the time from the slow-speed fluctuation period to the stop period of at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a is more likely to be shorter when the second fluctuation performance, which results in a no-reach miss, is executed For example, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay), when the first reserve number (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") and the first spin animation resulting in a no-reach miss is executed, the time from the slow spin period to the stop period is approximately 0.5 seconds. In contrast, in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay), when the second reserve number (U2) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") and the second spin animation resulting in a no-reach miss is executed, the time from the slow spin period to the stop period may be approximately 0.2 seconds.

Furthermore, in performance modes A to C (normal gameplay state), when the variation animation pattern 2 (shortened variation) is executed, and/or in performance modes D to F (specific gameplay state), when the variation animation pattern 35 (ultra-shortened variation) is executed, the system may be configured to proceed to a temporary stop period without a slow variation period following the high-speed variation period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while dialogue and step-up予告演出 (pre-reach notification effects) were performed as pre-reach notification effects, it may also be possible to perform a start sound notification effect (which starts and ends before the dialogue and step-up notification effects) that outputs a different start sound (e.g., "Kyupiiin♪") at the start of the variation effect, determined by a separate lottery. This effect would make it easier to perform a reach effect and also easier to win a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) when a variation effect with a start sound notification is performed compared to when a variation effect without a start sound notification is performed. This would increase the player's anticipation at the start of the variation effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in conjunction with this, when a strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) is executed during an SPSP reach failure (Figure 171) (Scenario 44 in Figure 110), the start sound announcement effect may be made more likely to be executed compared to the normal spinning animation (spinning animation pattern 1). This allows for a significant increase in the player's anticipation at the start of the spin through the execution of both the strong pre-announcement effect (red effect) and the start sound announcement effect.

Furthermore, if the aforementioned start sound notification effect is implemented as a pre-reach notification effect, the start sound notification effect may be less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first spin effect resulting in a loss (display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific game state (probability-increasing game state, time-saving game state) than when the first spin effect resulting in a loss is executed during normal game state. This would enhance the effect of the notification effect during normal game state, which tends to be spent longer than in specific game states, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the aforementioned start sound notification effect is implemented as a pre-reach notification effect, the start sound notification effect may be less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when the first variation effect (display of the first special symbol) results in a loss during a specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) than when the second variation effect (display of the second special symbol) results in a loss during a specific game state. This would enhance the effect of the second variation effect, which is more likely to be executed than the first variation effect in specific game states, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, vibration effects (pre-announcement vibration effects, dialogue予告 effects, step-up予告 effects, pseudo-consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decisive effects, etc.) that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot being achieved can be executed by vibrating the performance button 17. However, it may be possible to make it easier to achieve a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) when an operation-prompting effect (dialogue予告 effects, pseudo-consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, etc.) is performed before the start of a specific effect (initial temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, pseudo-consecutive effects, normal reach effects, development effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects), and when a variable effect is performed after the start of a specific effect, rather than when an operation-prompting effect is performed before the start of a specific effect and an operation-prompting effect is performed after the start of a specific effect. This can increase the player's interest in the operation-prompting effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, after the start of a specific animation (the initial temporary stop of the animation symbol 70a, the pseudo-consecutive animation, the normal reach animation, the development animation, the SP reach animation, the SPSP reach animation), it may be possible to make it easier to win a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) when a predetermined operation-promoting animation (development animation, cut-in animation, decisive animation, etc.) is executed without the vibration animation of the animation button 17, or when a predetermined operation-promoting animation (development animation, cut-in animation, decisive animation, etc.) is executed that causes the vibration animation of the animation button 17. This can increase the player's interest in whether or not the vibration animation is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to achieve a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation and more likely for the performance button 17 to light up in rainbow colors) when a variation performance is executed with a vibration effect without an operation prompt effect (pre-read vibration effect, step 5 of the step-up予告 effect, etc.) before the start of a specific performance (initial temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, pseudo-consecutive effect, normal reach effect, development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) and before the result notification effect (symbol alignment, C symbol alignment) is executed. This would increase the player's interest in the presence or absence of vibration effects and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, sound effects were not output when displaying operation-prompt images (button images, etc.) in the operation-prompt effects. However, sound effects may be output when displaying operation-prompt images. In this case, a first sound effect and a second sound effect may be prepared, and the likelihood of a jackpot occurring (higher jackpot expectation, easier vibration of the effect button 17, and easier rainbow illumination of the effect button 17) may be increased when a predetermined operation-prompt effect (any of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, compared to when a predetermined operation-prompt effect (any of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, in which the first sound effect is output. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the game may be designed so that a jackpot is more likely to occur (the jackpot expectation is higher, the performance button 17 is more likely to vibrate, and the performance button 17 is more likely to light up in rainbow colors) when a predetermined operation-promoting effect (one of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, rather than when a predetermined operation-promoting effect (one of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, such as when the performance button 17 lights up in white and a first sound effect is output. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the game may be designed so that a jackpot is more likely to occur (the jackpot expectation is higher, the game button 17 is more likely to vibrate, and the game button 17 is more likely to light up in rainbow colors) when a predetermined operation-promoting effect (one of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, accompanied by a vibration effect on the game button 17 (one of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect), rather than when a predetermined operation-promoting effect (one of the following: dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive演出, development演出, cut-in演出, or decisive effect) is performed, accompanied by a second sound effect. This would enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to achieve a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation and more likely for the performance button 17 to light up in rainbow colors) when a variation performance is executed where the performance button 17 vibrates before the start of a specific performance (either the initial temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, the pseudo-consecutive performance, the normal reach performance, the development performance, the SP reach performance, or the SPSP reach performance) without any movement of the movable parts, rather than when a variation performance is executed where the movement of the movable parts does not occur after the start of a specific performance (the dialogue予告 performance, pseudo-consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, or decisive performance). Doing so can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it may be possible to make it easier to achieve a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation and more likely for the performance button 17 to light up in rainbow colors) when a variation is performed that includes a vibration effect on the performance button 17 (pre-read vibration effect, step 5 of the step-up notification effect, symbol alignment, C symbol alignment) without any operation-promoting effects, compared to when a variation is performed that includes a first effect (dialogue予告 effect, pseudo-consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect) without any operation-promoting effects. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a predetermined operation animation (such as a dialogue予告 animation, a pseudo-consecutive animation, a development animation, a cut-in animation, or a decisive animation) is performed, the vibration animation of the animation button 17 is more likely to be performed when a variation animation with the second type of operation promotion animation (protruding state, red light emission) is performed, compared with a variation animation with the first type of operation promotion animation (normal state, white light emission). It may also be possible to make the time from the start of the second type of operation promotion animation (when the predetermined condition is met, the animation button 17 is operated) to the start of the vibration animation of the animation button 17 different from the time from the start of the second type of operation promotion animation (when the predetermined condition is not met, the animation button 17 is not operated). Doing so can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a predetermined operation animation (such as a dialogue予告 animation, a pseudo-consecutive animation, a development animation, a cut-in animation, or a decisive animation) is performed, the system may be configured to either start the vibration animation of the animation button 17 immediately after the animation button 17 is operated, or to start the vibration animation of the animation button 17 6 seconds after the animation button 17 is operated. Additionally, in a jackpot variation animation, a revival animation may be made possible, which displays the jackpot result after displaying the losing result. If the revival animation is not performed in the decisive animation, the vibration animation of the animation button 17 may be performed immediately after the animation button 17 is operated. If the revival animation is performed in the decisive animation, the vibration animation of the animation button 17 may be performed 6 seconds after the animation button 17 is operated (simultaneously with the start of the revival animation). This configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the final animation, the time from the start of the action prompt animation to the start of the vibration animation of the action button 17 when the action button 17 is not operated during the operation valid period (5 seconds) may be made longer than the time from the start of the action prompt animation to the start of the vibration animation of the action button 17 when the action button 17 is operated during the action prompt animation and the revival animation is performed (6 seconds). Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the type of sound effect output (type of operation sound effect, sound effect of the performance executed according to the operation or the passage of the validity period) may be different depending on whether the performance button 17 is operated during the operation prompting animation (dialogue予告 animation, pseudo-consecutive animation, development animation, SP-reach animation, SPSP-reach animation) before the start of a specific performance (initial temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, pseudo-consecutive animation, normal reach animation, development animation, cut-in animation, etc.) or not. Conversely, the type of sound effect output (type of operation sound effect, sound effect of the performance executed according to the operation or the passage of the validity period) may be the same depending on whether the performance button 17 is operated during the operation prompting animation (pseudo-consecutive animation, development animation, cut-in animation, decisive animation, etc.) after the start of a specific performance, or not. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a losing spin animation is performed, rather than when a big win spin animation is performed, the sound effects output (type of operation sound effect, sound effects for animations performed according to the operation or elapsed validity period) may be more likely to differ depending on whether the animation button 17 is operated during the operation prompt animation (dialogue announcement animation, pseudo-consecutive spin animation, normal reach animation, development animation, SP reach animation, SPSP reach animation, etc.) before the start of a specific animation (initial temporary stop of animation symbol 70a, pseudo-consecutive spin animation, normal reach animation, development animation, cut-in animation, etc.). This would enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the type of sound effect output may be the same depending on whether the performance button 17 is operated during the decisive performance in a losing spin animation or not, depending on the type of performance being executed. Similarly, the type of sound effect output may be the same depending on whether the performance button 17 is operated during the decisive performance in a winning spin animation or not. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the sound effects output during a jackpot spin sequence, which involves predetermined operation sequences (dialogue announcement sequences, pseudo-consecutive spin sequences, development sequences, cut-in sequences, etc.), may be made more likely to be the same depending on whether the operation button 17 is operated or not, compared to the losing spin sequence, which involves predetermined operation sequences (dialogue announcement sequences, pseudo-consecutive spin sequences, development sequences, cut-in sequences, etc.). Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the system may enable the output of sound effects when the action-prompt animation begins (the action-prompt image is displayed), while restricting the output of sound effects when the action-prompt animation ends (the action-prompt image disappears). In this case, if the animation button 17 is operated during the action-prompt animation, the sound effect may be output when the animation ends, and if the animation button 17 is not operated, the sound effect may not be output when the animation ends. This can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a development animation is executed (the development animation image is displayed), a common development sound effect is output for each animation mode (animation modes A to F). However, it is also possible to output different development sound effects depending on the animation mode. In this case, different development sound effects may be output for all animation modes A to F, or the development sound effects may differ between animation modes A to C during normal gameplay and animation modes D to F during a specific gameplay state, or different development sound effects may be output only for animation modes A to C during normal gameplay, or different development sound effects may be output only for animation modes D to F during a specific gameplay state. Doing so makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an eye-catching animation is executed (an eye-catching image is displayed) during the SP Reach Variation animation or SPSP Reach Variation animation, a common eye-catching sound effect is output for each animation mode (animation modes A to F). However, it is also possible to output different eye-catching sound effects depending on the animation mode. In this case, different eye-catching sound effects may be output for all animation modes A to F, or the eye-catching sound effects may differ between animation modes A to C during normal gameplay and animation modes D to F during a specific gameplay state, or different eye-catching sound effects may be output only for animation modes A to C during normal gameplay, or different eye-catching sound effects may be output only for animation modes D to F during a specific gameplay state. Doing so makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a common eye-catching image is displayed for each performance mode (performance modes A to F) in the SP Reach Variation and SPSP Reach Variation performances. However, different eye-catching images may be displayed depending on the performance mode. In this case, different eye-catching images may be displayed for all performance modes A to F, different eye-catching images may be displayed for performance modes A to C during normal gameplay and for performance modes D to F during a specific gameplay state, different eye-catching images may be displayed only for performance modes A to C during normal gameplay, or different eye-catching images may be displayed only for performance modes D to F during a specific gameplay state. Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the temporary stopping manner (shake, shake speed, etc.) of the left and right symbols 70a during a normal reach animation was the same as the temporary stopping manner of the left and right symbols 70a during an SP reach animation or SPSP reach animation. However, the temporary stopping manner (shake, shake speed, etc.) of the left and right symbols 70a during a normal reach animation may be made different from the temporary stopping manner (shake, shake speed, etc.) of the left and right symbols 70a during an SP reach animation or SPSP reach animation. Doing so can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the number of reserved symbols or the type of variation animation pattern, the execution time of the pre-stop action when the animation symbols 70a temporarily stop was the same. However, the execution time of the pre-stop action when at least one or more of the left, center, and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stop may be made different depending on whether the first variation animation for a no-reach miss is executed when the first reserved symbol (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in a normal game state (e.g., a normal variation), or when the first variation animation for a miss that doesn't reach is executed when the first reserved symbol (U1) is a specific number greater than the predetermined number (e.g., "4") in a normal game state (e.g., a shortened variation). This would improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the temporary stop sound when the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop was the same regardless of the number of reserved symbols or the type of variation performance pattern. However, the temporary stop sound when at least one or more of the left, center, and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop may be made different depending on whether the first variation performance for a no-reach miss is executed when the first reserved symbol (U1) is a predetermined number (e.g., "1") in a normal game state (e.g., a normal variation), or when the first variation performance for a reach miss is executed when the first reserved symbol (U1) is a specific number greater than the predetermined number (e.g., "4") in a normal game state (e.g., a shortened variation). Doing so can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the roulette animation using the central animation symbol 70a was not executed after the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stopped. However, after the left and right animation symbols 70a temporarily stopped and the central animation symbol 70a entered a slow-speed fluctuation period, a roulette animation using the central animation symbol 70a (high-speed fluctuation period → slow-speed fluctuation period → temporary stop period) may be executed in conjunction with a special animation. In this case, the central animation symbol 70a may be a special symbol different from the normal animation symbols (numbers 1 to 9) (such as a losing symbol that results in a loss, a pseudo-consecutive animation that will be executed, an SP development suggestion symbol that indicates development into an SP reach animation, an SP SP development suggestion symbol that indicates development into an SP SP reach animation, or a winning symbol that indicates a jackpot), which is displayed as a roulette-like rotating fluctuation in the left and right directions, and the special symbol may be temporarily stopped according to the subsequent development.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an eye-catching animation was executed in the second variation animation, which is performed by referring to the variation animation pattern determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game states). However, the eye-catching animation may be omitted in the second variation animation, which is performed by referring to the variation animation pattern determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game states). In this case, the animation after the eye-catching animation, as described in the animation configuration column of the variation animation pattern determination table for performance modes D to F (specific game states), may be omitted.

Next, using Figures 208 to 213, we will explain other examples of iridescent emission described in Figures 184 to 189.

First, Figure 208 shows the device for executing rainbow illumination. As mentioned in the explanations of Figures 184 to 189, the pachinko game machine 1 uses different devices for each state (customer waiting demo, variation performance, and jackpot game). For example, in the customer waiting demo performance, the frame display lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are used to execute rainbow illumination, while the image display devices (first image display devices 70 to fourth image display devices 73, hereinafter simply referred to as "image display devices"), the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, and the LEDs of the performance buttons 17 are not used (they are restricted). On the other hand, in the variation performance and jackpot game, rainbow illumination is possible using the frame display lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the image display devices, the LEDs of the movable performance device 77, and the LEDs of the performance buttons 17. Furthermore, regarding the performance buttons 17, in addition to rainbow illumination by the LEDs of the performance buttons, vibration effects of the performance buttons 17 are also possible (vibration effects during non-rainbow illumination are also possible, of course).

Furthermore, during the variable animation and jackpot gameplay, the frame animation lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the image display device, the LED of the movable animation device 77, and the LED of the animation button 17 are used. Each device may have periods of overlapping execution and periods of independent execution. Also, during the variable animation, the number of devices used may be greater or less from the period between the start of the variable animation and the final animation to the confirmed stop than from the period between the final animation and the final animation. Similarly, the number of devices used may be greater or less from the period between the start of the variable animation and the reach animation to the confirmed stop than from the period between the start of the variable animation and the reach animation. However, since the period between the final animation and the confirmed stop, and the period between the reach animation and the confirmed stop are closer to the start of the jackpot game, it is preferable to use more devices during these periods to enhance the player's excitement.

Furthermore, the devices used in each state are merely examples, and the contents of Figure 208 may be modified as appropriate. For example, in the customer waiting demo, the LEDs of the movable display device 77 may be made to emit rainbow light, or the image display device may be made to display rainbow light. During a jackpot game, the LEDs of the movable display device 77 may not emit rainbow light. Also, the execution device is merely an example, and further execution devices may be included. For example, the LEDs provided on the launch handle 15 may be included. Furthermore, if a light guide plate (a means of making characters etc. visible by irradiating them with LED light from the left and right) is provided in front of the first image display device 70, the light guide plate may also be included.

Furthermore, the term "variable animation" includes both (A) the period from the decisive animation to the confirmed stop, and (B) the period from the start of the variable animation to the decisive animation. The execution devices for (A) and (B) may differ. For example, (A) may have more or fewer execution devices than (B).

Furthermore, while the explanation for Figure 184 states that the display of the rainbow effect image on the first image display device 70 is restricted when the gaming machine model name or logo is displayed during the customer waiting demo performance, the rainbow effect image may be displayed during the display period of either the gaming machine model name or the logo. Also, during one of the predetermined number of customer waiting demo performances (e.g., five times), the rainbow effect image may be displayed in conjunction with the display period of the gaming machine model name and logo. In any case, the rainbow illumination during the customer waiting demo performance is longer when the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are used to perform the rainbow illumination than when the first image display device 70 is used.

Furthermore, the rainbow display (including the display of rainbow effect images) on the first image display device 70 should have a greater variety of display types during variable spin sequences and jackpot games than during customer waiting demo sequences. For example, during customer waiting demo sequences, only "0" or "1" (displayed during the display period of the game machine's model name and logo) should be displayed. However, during variable spin sequences and jackpot games, it would be desirable to display even more rainbow displays. This would enhance the entertainment value of the game during variable spin sequences and jackpot games, which are actually played by the player, and prevent excessive waiting during customer waiting demo sequences.

Furthermore, during the variation animation, the devices used may differ depending on the variation animation pattern being executed. For example, variation animation pattern 13 and variation animation pattern 14 have different animation configurations, and since an SP reach is executed in variation animation pattern 14 (see Figure 112), variation animation pattern 14 may use more light-emitting devices than variation animation pattern 13.

Furthermore, the type of light-emitting device used may vary depending on the type of special symbol determined. For example, more light-emitting devices may be used when special symbol 02 (a jackpot with a chance of winning) is determined than when special symbol 01 (a regular jackpot) is determined.

Next, we will explain the comparison of rainbow emission using Figures 209 to 210.
Figure 209(a) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 80 seconds) has elapsed from timing T4, the rainbow light emission starts from timing T7. In other words, the condition for the start of the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo performance is that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting performance A at timing T4.

Furthermore, in Figures 209 to 213, for the purpose of providing a more detailed explanation, unlike Figure 184, the frame lighting device 10 is described as a frame effect lamp 10c and an effect button LED, and the panel lighting device 76 is described as a panel surface LED 5b and a movable effect device LED.

Figure 209(b) is a timing chart showing the demo sequence while waiting for a customer, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 209(a), it assumes that the player operated the performance button 17 at timing T6', which is after timing T6 but before timing T7. In this case, the first image display device 70 hides the currently running demo sequence (character movie) and displays the menu screen described above. Furthermore, the frame performance lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b terminate their demo illumination 1 (blue-white) and begin menu screen illumination (white).

In other words, operating the performance button 17 at timing T6' will initiate the menu screen illumination (white), but not the rainbow illumination. Furthermore, since operating the performance button 17 at timing T6' displays the menu screen and triggers the menu screen illumination (white), the demo illumination 2 (rainbow), which was originally scheduled to start at timing T7 without any operation, will not begin. Note that closing the menu screen initiates the customer waiting animation A, so even if the menu screen is closed before timing T7, the demo illumination 2 (rainbow) will not begin at timing T7.

In other words, in the customer-waiting demo, restricting the start of the rainbow light emission by the player's operation of the effect button 17 has two meanings: simply operating the effect button 17 will not start the rainbow light emission, and the planned rainbow light emission will not start if the menu screen is brought up.

Furthermore, while it was explained that if the performance button 17 is operated at timing T6', the menu screen will be displayed, and the demo light 2 (rainbow), which was originally scheduled to start at timing T7 if no operation was performed, will not start, if the joystick 19 (a different control method than the performance button 17) is operated at timing T6', the demo performance (character movie) and demo light 1 (blue and white) will continue to be displayed, and when timing T7 is reached, the machine model name and logo will be displayed, and demo light 2 (rainbow light) will be executed. For example, even if the joystick 19 is operated to adjust the volume, the demo performance (character movie) and demo light 1 (blue and white) will continue to be displayed, and when timing T7 is reached, the machine model name and logo will be displayed, and demo light 2 (rainbow light) will be executed.

Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated at timing T6', an acquisition limit device activation notification (see Figure 129, etc.) will be executed, ending demo light emission 1 (blue and white), and demo light emission 2 (rainbow), which was scheduled to start at timing T7, will not begin. In other words, the activation of the acquisition limit device is one of the conditions that prevents the scheduled rainbow light emission from starting.

On the other hand, if a pre-notification (see Figure 154, etc.) is performed by the first image display device 70 at timing T6', the demo light emission 1 (blue and white) will not end, and if it continues until timing T7, it is possible to start demo light emission 2 (rainbow). In other words, the pre-notification of the activation of the acquisition limit device does not affect the start of the rainbow light emission. Thus, with the activation of the acquisition limit device, prioritizing the activation notification of the acquisition condition device and preventing the start of the rainbow light emission makes it clear that continuing the game is difficult. On the other hand, with the pre-notification of the activation of the acquisition limit device, by enabling the start of the rainbow light emission, it is possible to inform the player of the necessary information (pre-notification) without drastically reducing the decorative appeal of the game machine 1.

Figure 209(c) is a timing chart showing the variation effects, and is a partial excerpt from Figure 185. First, at timing T2, a prompting effect to encourage operation of the effect button 17 and the effective period of the effect button 17 begin. Specifically, an operation prompting image resembling the effect button 17 is displayed on the main display device 70, the audible output of the SPSP Reach BGM is stopped (muted), and a prompting sound "Press" is output from the sound output device 9.

Next, at timing T3, when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period expires (here, we assume the performance button 17 is operated), a success sound (e.g., "kyuin") corresponding to the judgment result is output, and the performance symbol 70a, which displays only numbers (e.g., "555"), temporarily stops. Also, the frame performance lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b stop their SPSP reach illumination and begin rainbow illumination. Furthermore, the button drive device 17b is activated, causing the performance button 17 to vibrate.

In other words, during the variable animation sequence, the player's operation of the animation button 17 can initiate the rainbow illumination of the frame animation lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b. Therefore, the player's operation of the animation button 17 during the decisive animation sequence, which is executed at timing T3, can be considered a condition for initiating the rainbow illumination in the variable animation sequence.

Furthermore, the duration of the rainbow illumination varies depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated at a first timing (e.g., timing T2 in Figure 185), at a second timing (after the first timing), or if the effect button 17 is not operated. For example, the rainbow illumination duration is longest when the effect button 17 is operated at the first timing, and shortest when the effect button 17 is not operated. This allows the player who presses the effect button 17 to feel satisfied with a longer rainbow illumination.

Next, at timing T4, once the output period for the success sound corresponding to the judgment result has elapsed, the output of the success sound stops. Then, at timing T4, with the display pattern 70a (for example, "555") showing only numbers temporarily stopped, a new temporary stop sound corresponding to a jackpot, "Kakiin," is output until timing T5.

Even if the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T5a, when the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are performing a rainbow illumination, the menu screen will not be displayed, and the rainbow illumination will not end. In other words, while it is possible for the player to start the rainbow illumination by operating the effect button 17 at timing T3, it is restricted from being terminated by the player operating the effect button 17.

Furthermore, even if a starting win occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15 at the timing T5b when the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are performing rainbow illumination, the rainbow illumination will not end. In other words, while it is possible to start the rainbow illumination at the timing T3 by operating the effect button 17, it is restricted from ending it with a starting win based on the operation of the launch handle 15 by the player.

On the other hand, if the joystick 19 is operated by the player at the timing T5' when the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are performing rainbow illumination, volume and brightness adjustments are possible. In other words, even if the effect button 17 is operated at the timing T5', the rainbow illumination does not end, but the brightness of the rainbow illumination can be adjusted by adjusting the brightness. Therefore, even if a player does not like the rainbow illumination, lowering the brightness can provide a certain level of satisfaction (preventing discomfort). Furthermore, if a player does like the rainbow illumination, increasing the brightness can provide even greater satisfaction.

In the example shown in Figure 209(c), it was stated that operating the performance button 17 during a decisive performance scene can initiate rainbow illumination. However, the situations in which rainbow illumination can be initiated by operating the performance button 17 are not limited to this. For example, in an icon change performance (see Figure 105, etc.), if an image resembling the performance button 17 is displayed instead of a hold icon, and the performance button 17 is operated to display a color icon (rainbow icon), then it can be said that the rainbow display can be initiated by the player operating the performance button 17. Also, as one of the SP reach performances, if the LED of the movable performance device 77 changes color by specific operations (repeated pressing, long-pressing) of the performance button 17 to indicate the probability of a big win (blue < green < red < rainbow), then it can be said that the rainbow illumination can be initiated by the player operating the performance button 17. Furthermore, when transitioning from a normal reach to an SP reach, operating the performance button 17 can cause the frame performance lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b to change color, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot (blue < green < red < rainbow). In this case, the player can initiate the rainbow illumination by operating the performance button 17. By enabling the player to initiate the rainbow illumination in multiple situations, players can experience the feeling that they have won the jackpot through their own actions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the cases where the acquisition limit device is activated or where prior notification of the acquisition limit device activation is performed at T5a or T5b in Figure 209(c), the same procedures as described in Figure 209(b) apply.

Furthermore, in Figure 209(c), T3 is triggered by the operation of the performance button 17 or by the expiration of the operation validity period for the performance button 17. However, it is also possible to make the rainbow illumination triggered by the operation of the performance button 17, and not triggered by the expiration of the operation validity period. In other words, the rainbow illumination may be performed as a reward for operating the performance button 17. This can enhance the significance of operating the performance button 17 and encourage active participation from the player.

Figure 210(a) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo sequence, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. As described above, from timing T7 to timing T8, the first image display device 70 displays the name and logo of the gaming machine, and the frame effect lamps 10c and the panel LEDs 5b perform demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination). Then, from timing T8 to timing T9, a predetermined warning notification is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the frame effect lamps 10c and the panel LEDs 5b perform demo illumination 3 (white illumination).

Figure 210(b) is a timing chart showing the demo sequence while waiting for a customer, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 210(a), it assumes that the player operated the performance button 17 at timing T7', which is after timing T7 but before timing T8. In this case, the first image display device 70 hides the machine model name and logo, and displays the menu screen described above. Also, the frame performance lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b terminate the demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination) and begin menu screen illumination (white).

In other words, operating the effect button 17 at timing T7' will initiate white illumination on the menu screen and terminate the rainbow illumination. In this case, the rainbow illumination will end without executing at the originally scheduled timing of T8.

Then, when the menu screen is closed at timing T8', the customer waiting animation A is executed, and the animation corresponding to customer waiting animation A is performed. Note that even if the menu screen is closed after timing T7' but before timing T8, customer waiting animation A is executed after the menu screen closes. Therefore, the rainbow light will not be performed until timing T8, nor will the demo light 3 (white) be performed from timing T8 as shown in Figure 210(a).

Furthermore, the situation when the acquisition limit device is activated at T7' in Figure 210(b), or when prior notification of the acquisition limit device activation is performed, is the same as described in Figure 209(b).

Figure 210(c) is a timing chart showing the customer waiting demo performance, and is an excerpt from Figure 184. Unlike Figure 210(a), at timing T7a, which is after timing T7 and before timing T8, the launch handle 15 is operated by the player (the game ball is launched into the game area 5a). This operation does not end the customer waiting demo performance, and the rainbow illumination continues. Then, at timing T7b, after the launch handle 15 is operated, a start-up win (for example, the game ball entering the first start-up opening 45) occurs. In this case, the first image display device 70 hides the game machine model name and logo, and displays the changing display of the performance symbols 70a, the normal background scrolling image, etc. Also, the frame performance lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b end the demo illumination 2 (rainbow illumination) and start the variation illumination (blue and white).

In other words, the operation of the launch handle 15 at timing T7a, and the occurrence of a starting prize at timing T7b, trigger the in-between illumination (blue and white) and terminate the rainbow illumination. In this case, the rainbow illumination will end without continuing until the originally scheduled timing of T8.

Furthermore, in the cases where the acquisition limit device is activated or where prior notification of the acquisition limit device activation is performed at T7a and T7b in Figure 210(c), the same procedures as those described in Figure 209(b) apply.

To summarize Figures 209 and 210 above, the rainbow light emission in the customer waiting demo is restricted from being initiated by the player's operation of the performance button 17, but can be terminated by the occurrence of a starting win based on the player's operation of the performance button 17 and the launch handle 15. On the other hand, the rainbow light emission in the variation performance can be initiated by the player's operation of the performance button 17, but can not be terminated by the occurrence of a starting win based on the player's operation of the performance button 17 and the launch handle 15.

Note that while the description of the jackpot gameplay is omitted, it is basically the same as the variable animation, so you can simply substitute "variable animation" for "jackpot gameplay." For example, when executing the upgrade animation during a jackpot, it is assumed that the player will be notified whether or not an upgrade will occur by operating the animation button 17. If an upgrade occurs, it is assumed that after operating the animation button 17, the frame animation lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b will emit a rainbow light. In other words, even during a jackpot game, the player can start the rainbow light emission by operating the animation button 17, but since the menu screen is not displayed by operating the animation button 17, the player is restricted from ending the rainbow light emission by operating the animation button 17. Also, even during a jackpot game, a starting entry based on the operation of the launch handle 15 may occur, but in the event of this occurrence, the player is restricted from ending the rainbow light emission.

In the example described above, the rainbow light effect was not initiated by the player's operation of the performance button 17 during the customer waiting demo. However, it is possible to initiate the rainbow light effect. For example, if the RWM clear process has been executed, the customer waiting demo could be configured to trigger the rainbow light effect with a predetermined probability when the player operates the performance button 17. If the RWM clear process has not been performed, the demo could not be executed, thereby indicating whether the RWM clear process has been performed or not.

Furthermore, when employing a so-called "hidden probability variation" feature, the waiting demo sequence may be designed to indicate the presence of a hidden probability variation state by causing a rainbow light to flash at a predetermined probability when the player operates the performance button 17.

Furthermore, during the customer waiting demo sequence while in a bonus round state, the player's operation of the performance button 17 may cause a rainbow light to illuminate, further enhancing the visual appeal of the bonus round state.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the rainbow light emission was not terminated by the player's operation of the effect button 17 during the variation effect. However, it is possible to terminate it. For example, the rainbow light emission may be terminated by the player's operation of the effect button 17, and then an effect indicating the likelihood of a promotion may be executed using the LED of the effect button 17, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, etc.

According to Figures 208 to 210, the following points are characteristic features.
(Yo) In the customer waiting performance, the rainbow light emission is restricted to being initiated based on the operation of the control means (pressing the performance button 17 during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance A will not cause the rainbow light emission), while in the variation performance, the rainbow light emission can be initiated based on the operation of the control means (pressing the performance button 17 during the successful determination performance of the variation performance will cause the rainbow light emission, pressing the performance button 17 during the hold button performance will display a rainbow icon, pressing the performance button 17 when developing to an SP reach will cause the rainbow light emission, and holding down the hidden button during an SP reach will cause the rainbow light emission).

(T) In the customer waiting animation, the rainbow light can be terminated by fulfilling the starting condition based on the operation of the second operating means (the rainbow light terminates when a starting win occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), while in the variation animation, the rainbow light cannot be terminated based on the operation of the first operating means (the rainbow light in the variation animation does not terminate by pressing the animation button 17).

(R) In the customer waiting sequence, the rainbow light emission is restricted from being initiated based on the operation of the first operating means (pressing the performance button 17 during the execution of the customer waiting demo sequence A will not cause the rainbow light emission), but it can be terminated by the fulfillment of the starting conditions based on the operation of the second operating means (the rainbow light emission ends when a starting win occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15). In the variable sequence, the rainbow light emission can be initiated based on the operation of the first operating means (pressing the performance button 17 during the successful outcome sequence of the variable sequence will cause the rainbow light emission, pressing the performance button 17 during the hold button sequence will display a rainbow icon, pressing the performance button 17 during development to an SP reach will cause the rainbow light emission, and holding down the hidden button during an SP reach will cause the rainbow light emission), but it is restricted from being terminated based on the operation of the first operating means (the rainbow light emission in the variable sequence does not end by pressing the performance button 17).

(S) The rainbow light emission has a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the variation effect) that can be started based on the operation of the control means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A) that has different starting conditions from the first rainbow light emission. The first rainbow light emission has more light emission means capable of performing the rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (the rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, or the LEDs of the effect button 17, but the rainbow light emission during the variation effect uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, the LEDs of the effect button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15).

(T) The rainbow light emission has two types: a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the variation effect) in which a specific effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is performed using the operating means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A) in which the specific effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is not performed using the operating means. The first rainbow light emission has more light emission means capable of performing the rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (the rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, or the LEDs of the effect button 17, but the rainbow light emission during the variation effect uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, the LEDs of the effect button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15).

These features produce the following effects.
During the reel spinning animation or jackpot gameplay, more devices emit rainbow lights than during the waiting demo animation. This allows for a greater celebration of the jackpot-winning player with numerous devices, providing a more satisfying experience. Conversely, by limiting the number of devices emitting rainbow lights during the waiting demo animation, a moderate level of waiting demo animation is possible, preventing players from being encouraged to play more than necessary.

Furthermore, since the device that emits the rainbow light differs between the customer waiting demo, the variation animation, and the jackpot game, it becomes easier to distinguish whether or not a customer waiting demo is in progress compared to when the same device is used. This prevents misunderstandings that might lead to players avoiding the game due to misinterpretations of the animation or jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the customer-waiting demo, the rainbow light effect does not start even when the effect button 17 is pressed, preventing players from mistakenly believing they are in a favorable state. Also, when the effect button 17 is pressed during the customer-waiting demo, the menu screen is displayed. While the menu screen is displayed, the rainbow light effect does not start even if it is the appropriate time to activate it. This prevents players from being confused by the sudden activation of the rainbow light effect while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the variable animation sequence, the rainbow light emission can be initiated when the animation button 17 is operated during a decisive animation, allowing the player to feel as if they have achieved the jackpot through their own actions, thus providing even greater satisfaction. Additionally, even if the animation button 17 is operated during the rainbow light emission, this operation does not terminate the rainbow light emission. This prevents the rainbow light emission from ending accidentally, thus preventing the excitement of a player who has achieved a jackpot from being dampened. Furthermore, even if a starting ball entry occurs during the rainbow light emission, this entry does not terminate the rainbow light emission, thus preventing the excitement of a player who has achieved a jackpot from being dampened.

Furthermore, during the rainbow light display in the customer-waiting demo, when the performance button 17 is operated, the rainbow light display ends and the menu screen corresponding to the menu screen begins to light up (operating the performance button 17 ends the rainbow light display). This makes it easier to recognize that the menu screen has been launched by operating the performance button 17. Also, during the rainbow light display in the customer-waiting demo, when a starting win occurs, the rainbow light display ends and the reel spinning animation corresponding to the reel spinning animation begins to light up. This prevents the execution of the reel spinning animation and the rainbow light display during the customer-waiting demo from overlapping, thus preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the started reel spinning animation is a jackpot. In addition, since the rainbow light display during the customer-waiting demo does not end with operation of the launch handle 15 alone, the rainbow light display can entertain the player until a starting win occurs, thus alleviating the feeling of boredom during that time.

Next, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during the variation effect using Figure 211.
Figure 211 shows another example of the presentation pattern from timing T3 to T6 in Figure 185. Note that T3, T5, and T6 in Figure 211 correspond to Figure 185.

First, at timing T3, when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period expires, a success sound (e.g., "kyuin") corresponding to the judgment result is output, and the performance symbol 70a, which displays only numbers (e.g., "555"), temporarily stops. Also, the frame performance lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the LED of the movable performance device 77 finish their SPSP reach illumination and begin rainbow illumination. Furthermore, the button drive device 17b is activated, causing the performance button 17 to vibrate.

More specifically, in the first image display device 70, a rainbow effect is displayed around the "555" pattern combination (for example, from one end to the other of the first image display device 70), the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the LEDs of the movable effect device 77 emit rainbow light, and the effect button 17 vibrates while its LED emits rainbow light. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

Next, at timing T3', the rainbow illumination and vibration of the effect button 17 end. In other words, at timing T3, the effects of the first image display device 70, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the LED of the movable effect device 77, and the effect button 17 all began, but first, the effect of the effect button 17 (rainbow illumination and vibration) ends. Note that the LED of the effect button changes to white illumination after the rainbow illumination ends.

Next, at timing T5, the rainbow effect display on the first image display device 70 ends. In other words, the effect of the effect button 17 (rainbow light emission and vibration) ends first, followed by the end of the rainbow effect display on the first image display device 70.

Then, at timing T6, the rainbow illumination of the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b ends, similar to Figure 185. The LED of the movable effect device 77 also stops its rainbow illumination at the same time. Finally, at timing T6, the "555" symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state.

Thus, when an announcement of a jackpot is made, the first image display device 70, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the LED of the movable effect device 77, and the effect button 17 each execute a jackpot announcement effect from the timing of T6, however, the timing of the end of the effect differs depending on the device.

Note that the sequence of events shown in Figure 211 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the event triggered by the event button 17 may end last, or the event triggered by the event button 17 and the event triggered by the first image display device 70 may end simultaneously.

Furthermore, the end timing may differ between the LED 5b on the display panel and the LED on the movable display device 77. Also, even within the LED 5b on the display panel, the end timing may differ depending on the region (for example, the left side of the display panel and the right side).

Furthermore, the frame effect lamp 10c may have different termination timings depending on the region (for example, the region on the left side of the frame and the region on the right side of the frame). Also, while the effect button 17 is described as performing a vibration effect along with rainbow illumination, other effects (for example, a protruding effect or movement effect of the effect button 17) may be applied instead.

Furthermore, the performance modes shown in Figure 185 and Figure 211 may be linked to each variation performance pattern. For example, if variation performance pattern 13 is selected, the performance mode shown in Figure 185 may be executed, and if variation performance pattern 14 is selected, the performance mode shown in Figure 211 may be executed.

Furthermore, while the case where a numerically-only display symbol 70a (for example, "555") temporarily stops at timing T3 was explained, it is also conceivable that, for example, the left and right display symbols 70a are displayed in a smaller size during an SPSP reach, and at timing T3, the center display symbol 70a, which is larger than the left and right symbols 70a, is temporarily stopped. In such cases, when the left, center, and right display symbols 70a are temporarily stopped with different display sizes, the rainbow display by the first image display device 70 should be restricted. Subsequently, when the left, center, and right display symbols 70a are temporarily stopped with the same display size, the rainbow display by the first image display device 70 should be enabled. This allows the rainbow display to be shown with the left, center, and right display symbols 70a all at the same size, improving the visual appeal and enhancing the entertainment value of the display.

Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated between T3 and T3' in Figure 211, the rainbow illumination of the first image display device 70, frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, movable effect device 77 LED, and effect button 17 LED will end at the same or approximately the same timing. On the other hand, if a prior notification of the acquisition limit device activation is executed between T3 and T3', the rainbow illumination of each device will not end as a result of this execution. The same applies to the subsequent periods T3' to T5 and T5 to T6.

Next, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game using Figure 212.
Figure 212 shows the start of a jackpot game and is an excerpt from Figure 185.

First, the jackpot opening sequence begins at timing T8. During the jackpot opening, the first image display device 70 displays, for example, "〇△Bonus" indicating the type of jackpot game, along with a small right-hand shooting image 70rs prompting the player to shoot to the right. Additionally, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b begin illuminating with the opening sequence (white).

Then, once the jackpot opening sequence is complete, the first round of the jackpot game begins at timing T9. At the start of the first round, a large right-hand shooting image 70rb prompting the player to shoot to the right is displayed on the first image display device 70. The small right-hand shooting image 70rs continues to be displayed on the first image display device 70, and among other images, an image displaying "1R" to indicate that it is the first round is shown. The large right-hand shooting image 70rb is displayed for, for example, 3 seconds before being hidden at timing T9'.

Furthermore, at the start of the first round, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b cease their opening illumination (white) and begin their round illumination (blue-white). Note that from timing T9 to timing T10, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 are restricted from performing rainbow illumination.

The large right-hand shot image 70rb is larger in display size than the small right-hand shot image 70rs and is displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 70, making it more easily noticeable to the player than the small right-hand shot image 70rs. This makes it easier for players unfamiliar with the game to understand when they should be shooting to the right.

Furthermore, if the first image display device 70 performs a pre-notification of the acquisition limit device operation between T9 and T9', the pre-notification will be displayed on a higher layer (front side) than the large right-handed image 70rb. As a result, as shown in the figure, a portion of the large right-handed image 70rb becomes difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification. However, since the pre-notification is displayed so as not to overlap with the small right-handed image 70rs, the visibility of the small right-handed image 70rs is not reduced, and notification of the necessary operation (right-handed shooting) can be ensured even if the pre-notification is performed.

Next, at timing T10, when the first round of the jackpot game ends, an interval (between rounds 1 and 2) is executed. During the interval, the right-hand play mini-image 70rs is displayed on the first image display device 70, followed by a rainbow effect. The rainbow effect is not displayed overlapping with the right-hand play mini-image 70rs, so as not to reduce the visibility of the right-hand play mini-image 70rs. In addition, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b emit rainbow light.

In other words, in situations where the large right-hand image 70rb is displayed, informing the player that they should be shooting to the right, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 all restrict the execution of rainbow illumination to prevent players from being distracted by the rainbow illumination and overlooking the display of the large right-hand image 70rb. On the other hand, in situations where the large right-hand image 70rb is not displayed, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 are all enabled to execute rainbow illumination to further enhance the excitement of players who are already thrilled by a jackpot.

Furthermore, the large right-hand image 70rb may be displayed during the jackpot opening sequence. In this case, it is advisable to restrict the execution of rainbow illumination for the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70.

Furthermore, while the execution of rainbow illumination is restricted for the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 when the large right-hand image 70rb is displayed, it is also possible to restrict rainbow illumination for the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b while allowing it for the first image display device 70, or to allow rainbow illumination for the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b while restricting it for the first image display device 70.

Furthermore, while Figure 212 uses the large right-hand image 70rb as an example, it can also be interpreted as "Aim for the V," which encourages players to pass the game ball through a specific area ("V" winning area) located inside the large prize winning slot. In other words, when "Aim for the V" is being executed, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 all restrict the execution of rainbow illumination.

Furthermore, during a jackpot game, if the player shoots to the left and, for example, enters the first starting gate 45, a prompt image saying "Aim to the right" will be displayed. In this case, the frame display lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device 70 may all be configured to restrict the execution of the rainbow light display. This makes it easier to recognize when an inoptimal gameplay is taking place. On the other hand, if the prompt image "Aim to the right" is displayed during a situation where the rainbow light display is to be executed, such as during an interval, the rainbow light display may still be executed. This eliminates the need for complicated processing such as interrupting the rainbow light display with left-handed shooting, thereby simplifying the control process.

According to Figures 211 to 212, the following points are characteristic features.
(N) It is possible to notify the result of the judgment at a predetermined timing in the variation performance (for example, the decisive performance), and when notifying that a special game will be executed at the predetermined timing, it is possible to perform a first rainbow light emission (rainbow effect display) in which the first light-emitting means (image display devices 70 to 73) emit a rainbow light (rainbow light emission), and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission in each lighting device) in which a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means (frame performance lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17) emits a rainbow light (rainbow light emission), and the timing at which the first rainbow light emission ends and the timing at which the second rainbow light emission ends are different.

(N) During the execution of the special game, it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit rainbow light (rainbow emission). During the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a first instruction sequence that instructs the operation of the control means (where both images 70rs and 70rb prompting right-hand shooting are displayed), and a second instruction sequence that instructs the operation of the control means in a manner different from the first instruction sequence (where only image 70rs prompting right-hand shooting is displayed, without displaying image 70rb). The rainbow emission in the predetermined light-emitting means (first image display device 70) is more likely to occur when the second instruction sequence is executed than when the first instruction sequence is executed.

These features produce the following effects.
By making the rainbow light and vibration of the effect button 17 end first, the player's gaze can be directed as much as possible towards the first image display device 70, allowing them to see the jackpot notification effect being performed on the first image display device 70.

Furthermore, for example, in the first image display device 70, after notifying the execution of a special game at a predetermined timing, an animation is performed to complete the SPSP reach (e.g., a story reach). By ending the rainbow effect at timing T5, it is possible to prevent the animation completing the SPSP reach (e.g., a story reach) from becoming difficult to see due to the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, the frame display lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the movable display device LEDs are designed to continue their rainbow illumination until the T6 timing (the timing when the stop display begins). This allows for a transition to the jackpot game without diminishing the overall decorative appeal of the gaming machine, thus preventing a decrease in player satisfaction.

Furthermore, when the large right-hand image 70rb and the small right-hand image 70rs are displayed, the display of the rainbow effect on the first image display device 70 is restricted, preventing players from being distracted by the rainbow effect and overlooking necessary operations, thus preventing disadvantages. On the other hand, when the large right-hand image 70rb is not displayed and only the small right-hand image 70rs is displayed, the display of the rainbow effect on the first image display device 70 is enabled, preventing a decrease in the decorative appeal during jackpot gameplay.

Next, we will explain the details of the rainbow light emission during a jackpot game using Figure 213. Figure 213 shows the jackpot opening and is an alternative example of Figure 185.

First, Figure 213(a) shows the jackpot opening corresponding to the special symbol 03. In the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol 03, the first image display device 70 displays "〇△Bonus" and the right-hand small image 70rs. Also, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b begin to emit opening light (white).

Figure 213(b) shows the jackpot opening corresponding to the special symbol 02. In the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol 02, the first image display device 70 displays "Super ○△ Bonus" and the right-hand small image 70rs. Furthermore, the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b begin to emit a special opening light (rainbow), which corresponds to the "Super ○△ Bonus."

Furthermore, "Super ○△ Bonus" will also be displayed in rainbow colors. This rainbow color display could take several forms: the entire character might be rainbow-colored, part of the character might be rainbow-colored, the area around the character might be rainbow-colored, or the outer edge of the display area when the character is shown might be rainbow-colored.

Thus, in the jackpot opening corresponding to special symbol 03, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device are all restricted from performing rainbow illumination. However, in the jackpot opening corresponding to special symbol 02, the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, and the first image display device are all enabled to perform rainbow illumination, making it easier for the player to recognize that a more advantageous jackpot is about to begin.

As shown in Figure 213(b), at timing T8', if the increase counter reaches "90000/95000" due to, for example, a game ball entering the general prize slot 43, a pre-notification image such as "90000/95000, 5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates" is displayed. However, the "Super ○△ Bonus" display does not end with the display of the pre-notification image, but rather ends when the jackpot opening time has elapsed. Similarly, the rainbow illumination of the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b also does not end with the display of the pre-notification image, but rather when the jackpot opening time has elapsed. While the "Super ○△ Bonus" display may become partially difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification image (visibility is reduced), the visibility of the rainbow illumination of the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b is not reduced, thus preventing a decrease in the decorative effect celebrating the acquisition of the "Super ○△ Bonus."

Note that while Figure 213(b) describes an example where the increment counter reaches "90000/95000" at timing T8', triggering a pre-notification, the pre-notification can be interpreted as the activation of the acquisition limit device. In this case, the "Super ○△ Bonus" display may be immediately terminated, and the system may enter the acquisition limit device activation standby state described above, or the system may enter the acquisition limit device activation standby state after the opening time has elapsed without terminating the "Super ○△ Bonus" display.

Furthermore, the "〇△Bonus" in Figure 213(a) may also be displayed in rainbow colors in the same manner as the "Super 〇△Bonus" in Figure 213(b). For example, if a jackpot is won when a jackpot corresponding to special symbol 03 is achieved after a predetermined number of consecutive wins (e.g., 10 times), the "〇△Bonus" display may be shown in rainbow colors. This can indicate that a so-called winning streak has occurred for a predetermined number of times or more.

Furthermore, the "Super ○△ Bonus" in Figure 213(b) may not be displayed in rainbow colors. For example, if the increase counter reaches "95000" during the display period of the special winning symbol, the "Super ○△ Bonus" will not be displayed in rainbow colors, even if the winning jackpot corresponds to special symbol 02. In this case, for example, a black-based display could be used to suggest that the acquisition limit device will activate after the jackpot game ends.

Next, using Figure 214, we will explain an example of information related to the game medium displayed on the first image display device 70, including examples of information that is displayed in a rainbow pattern and examples of information that is not displayed in a rainbow pattern.

First, Figure 214(a) shows an example of a rainbow display, corresponding to another example in Figure 213(b). Specifically, as a jackpot opening, in addition to the notation "Super ○△ Bonus," the notation "1500pt" corresponding to the expected value of the game currency to be won in that jackpot game is also displayed. In this case, as explained in Figure 213(b), the rainbow display occurs when the entire text is rainbow-colored, when part of the text is rainbow-colored, when the area around the text is rainbow-colored, or when the outer edge of the display area when the text is displayed is rainbow-colored.

Next, Figure 214(b) shows an example where the rainbow display is not shown, and (b-1) represents the number of wins in a unit jackpot game. The number of wins in a unit jackpot game is calculated as the number of game media that can be won (expected to be won) in one jackpot game (denominator), and a number that is updated each time a win (winning) occurs, indicating the win status (numerator). In the example of (b-1), it shows that up to "600" (numerator) of the number of game media that can be won in one jackpot game (1500) has been won.

The number of winnings in these unit jackpot games is displayed each time a jackpot is hit, but the display is primarily black, and the use of rainbow colors is restricted. This is because it only reports the estimated and actual number of winnings.

(b-2) represents the total number of winnings (cumulative winnings) when jackpots occur consecutively. Consecutive jackpots refer to situations such as: jackpot → probability-increasing game state → jackpot → probability-increasing game state. In such cases, the number of game tokens acquired is displayed on the first image display device 70 during the probability-increasing game state. In the example of (b-2), "3500pt" is displayed, corresponding to the number of game tokens obtained from multiple jackpots.

When such big wins occur consecutively, the total number of wins (cumulative wins) is displayed during the bonus round. However, the display is primarily black, and the use of rainbow colors is restricted. This is because it is merely indicating the total number of wins.

(b-3) represents the milestone acquisition number. The milestone acquisition number refers to the image displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the cumulative acquisition number, as described in (b-2), reaches milestone numbers such as "10,000," "20,000," "30,000," etc. For example, when the cumulative acquisition number reaches "10,000," an image such as "10,000pt OVER!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the first image display device 70, as shown in (b-3).

These milestone acquisition counts (cumulative acquisition counts) are displayed when the milestone number is reached, but the display is primarily black, and the use of rainbow colors is restricted. This is because it merely indicates the acquisition count (cumulative acquisition count) at the milestone.

(b-4) shows the total number of points acquired on the RUSH end screen (results). In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, when the special symbol 04 is won in the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state ends after the jackpot game ends, the RUSH end screen (results) is displayed. Here, the number of game media acquired from the jackpot that triggered the transition to the probability variation game state until the end of the time-saving game state (in a series of RUSHs) is displayed as the result. In the example of (b-4), "Total points acquired: 12000pt" is displayed, indicating that the number of game media acquired in a series of RUSHs is "12000".

The total number of points won displayed in these results is shown when the time-saving game mode ends, but the display is primarily black, and the use of rainbow colors is limited. This is because it merely indicates milestone winnings (cumulative winnings).

Broadly speaking, as shown in Figure 214(a), the display shows a rainbow indicator for game tokens that are yet to be given (game tokens that are generally certain to be given), while as shown in Figure 214(b), it displays past results and does not show a rainbow indicator for game tokens that are not yet to be given (game tokens that are generally certain to be given).

The above explains examples of information related to gaming media that may and may not be displayed with a rainbow pattern, but these can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image "10000pt OVER!" in (b-3) may be displayed with a rainbow pattern. As mentioned above, this image is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and since the display time is shorter than that of (b-1) and (b-2), it may be displayed with a rainbow pattern to prevent it from being overlooked.

Furthermore, in the RUSH ending screen (results) of (b-4), "Total points earned: 12,000 pts" may be displayed in a rainbow pattern. For example, even if the RUSH (probability-increasing game state) is continuing, if it appears visually as if the RUSH (probability-increasing game state) has ended, displaying "Total points earned: 12,000 pts" in a rainbow pattern can suggest that the RUSH (probability-increasing game state) has not ended. This prevents players from assuming that the RUSH ending screen (results) necessarily means the RUSH has ended, and by drawing attention to "Total points earned," the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In other words, the difference in the likelihood of the rainbow display occurring between the first information shown in Figure 214(a) and the second information shown in Figure 214(b) means that the first information shown in Figure 214(a) will always be displayed as a rainbow, while the second information shown in Figure 214(b) will not, a so-called "0:100" relationship. Alternatively, the second information shown in Figure 214(b) may also be displayed as a rainbow, but less frequently than the first information shown in Figure 214(a), for example, a "30:70" relationship. For example, when displaying the milestone acquisition count shown in (b-3) as a rainbow, it is highly likely that multiple jackpot games and multiple "Super ○△ Bonus" events have been played before reaching "10000pt". Therefore, in terms of likelihood of execution, (a) is more likely to be executed than (b-3).

As shown in (b-2), the number of wins (cumulative wins) when jackpots occur consecutively can be displayed up to the upper limit of "99999". In other words, even if further wins occur when the upper limit of "99999" is displayed, the number of wins (cumulative wins) will not be updated beyond that. Note that the rainbow display may not appear when the upper limit of "99999" is reached, or it may appear when the upper limit of "99999" is reached. In the former case, there is a risk of misunderstanding that some further bonus will be awarded when the upper limit of "99999" is reached, but this can be prevented. On the other hand, in the latter case, the fact that the upper limit has been reached can be emphasized, giving players a greater sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, the rainbow display of information related to the game medium is not limited to the examples mentioned above. For instance, when consecutive jackpot games occur (i.e., when a jackpot game is currently in progress and the stored judgment information also corresponds to a jackpot), the number of wins per jackpot game may be displayed in a rainbow pattern. Similarly, when the number of wins is displayed during the jackpot ending, that number display may also be shown in a rainbow pattern.

Furthermore, when used in slot machines, if a certain number of games are awarded that grant the player a favorable state (AT, ART), and this number exceeds a certain threshold (for example, "+300"), the "+300" may be displayed in a rainbow pattern.

According to Figures 213 to 214, the following points are characteristic features.
(a) The display means (image display devices 70-73) can display first information relating to the granting of game value (the number of game values expected to be granted in a special game) and second information different from the first information relating to the granting of game value (the number of game values granted during a special game, the cumulative number of game values granted when special games occur consecutively, the cumulative number of game values granted when the cumulative number of granted game values reaches a predetermined number, and the cumulative number of game values displayed in the results), and the ease with which the rainbow display is executed differs between the first information and the second information.

(M) The system is equipped with a progress stopping means (main control board 110) that can stop the game progress control (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) granted to the player after the predetermined conditions are met (MY = 0). It is also capable of executing a pre-notification (pre-activation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. The system can display first information related to the first special game ("〇△Bonus" display) and second information related to the second special game ("Super 〇△Bonus" display) on the display means. The first information can be limited to rainbow color display, but the second information can be displayed in rainbow color. If a pre-notification is executed while the second information is being displayed in rainbow color, the rainbow color display of the second information will not end due to the execution of the pre-notification.

These features produce the following effects.
When a second special game, which is advantageous to the player, is awarded, the "Super ○△ Bonus" is displayed and a rainbow effect is shown. On the other hand, when a first special game, which is less advantageous to the player than the second special game, is awarded, the "○△ Bonus" is displayed and the rainbow effect is not shown. This makes it possible to recognize the degree of advantage based on the presence or absence of the rainbow effect, thus providing a gaming machine that is easy for players unfamiliar with the game to understand.

Furthermore, information related to game media, such as "Super ○△ Bonus 1500pt" shown in Figure 214(a), is displayed using a rainbow effect, while information related to game media shown in Figure 214(b) is not displayed using a rainbow effect. This makes the boundary between information indicating upcoming game media allocation and information indicating past allocation clearer, providing a game machine that is easier for players unfamiliar with the game to understand.

Furthermore, even if a pre-notification is issued while the "Super ○△ Bonus" display (rainbow display) is active, the display will not terminate as a result of the pre-notification. This allows users to recognize that the acquisition limit device is approaching activation without significantly diminishing the decorative appeal of the "Super ○△ Bonus" display (rainbow display).

Next, using Figure 215, we will explain an example of a display when a pre-notification (Figure 154) is given during the rainbow display. In this example, we will explain the case where the pre-notification is displayed on the first image display device 70.

First, let's explain the period during a jackpot game, when the pre-announcement is most likely to be displayed.
For example, in Figure 215(a), during a jackpot game (interval), a rainbow effect is displayed from the left edge to the right edge of the lower part of the display area, decorating it to indicate that a jackpot game is in progress. When the value of the increase counter reaches "90000," mainly due to balls entering the large prize slot 50, a pre-notification (pre-activation notification) of the activation of the acquisition condition device is displayed. Specifically, images such as "90000/95000" and "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" are displayed in the lower left of the display area. At this time, part of the rainbow effect becomes difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification (for example, the pre-notification is displayed on a higher layer than the rainbow effect). Thus, even if the rainbow display is shown during a jackpot game, if a pre-notification with a higher display priority is displayed, it will be displayed on a higher layer with priority over the rainbow effect.

Next, Figure 215(b-1) shows Example 1, in which a pre-announcement was displayed during the fluctuation animation.
For example, in Figure 215(b-1), a jackpot is announced and a rainbow effect is displayed. At that time, when a ball enters the general prize slot 43, the value of the increase counter becomes "90000", and a pre-notification (pre-activation notification) of the acquisition condition device activation is displayed. Specifically, images such as "90000/95000" and "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device is activated" are displayed in the lower left of the display area. At this time, part of the rainbow effect becomes difficult to see due to the display of the pre-notification (for example, the pre-notification is displayed on a higher layer than the rainbow effect). Thus, even if a rainbow is displayed when a jackpot is announced, if a pre-notification with a higher display priority is displayed, it will be displayed on a higher layer with priority over the rainbow effect.

On the other hand, Figure 215(b-2) shows an example 2 where a pre-notification is displayed during a variation animation. This example demonstrates a rainbow display that remains visible even when the pre-notification is displayed. Specifically, the rainbow icon in the icon display area 70c is shown, indicating that the currently running variation animation is a jackpot. At that moment, when a ball enters the general prize slot 43, the increase counter value reaches "90000," and a pre-notification (pre-activation notification) for the activation of the acquisition condition device is displayed. Specifically, images such as "90000/95000" and "5000 remaining until the acquisition limit device activates" are displayed in the lower left of the display area. At this time, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 70c is not partially or completely covered by the pre-notification display, maintaining its visibility before the pre-notification display.

Furthermore, the pre-announcement display is shown so as not to overlap with the variation display area of the performance symbol 70a, the first reserve number display area 70E, the second reserve number display area 70F, the first reserve icon display area 70B, the second reserve icon display area 70D, and the variation display area of the special symbol TZ. This prevents various important information for the player from becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, the pre-notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display area of the performance symbol 70a, but in that case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the variable display area of the special symbol TZ. Also, the pre-notification display may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display area of the special symbol TZ, but in that case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the variable display area of the performance symbol 70a. This ensures that even if the visibility of one symbol is reduced, the visibility of the other symbol is maintained, allowing the result of the variable performance to be recognized.

Similarly, the advance notification display may overlap the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, but in that case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the first hold count display area 70E and the second hold count display area 70F. Furthermore, the advance notification display may overlap the first hold count display area 70E and the second hold count display area 70F, but in that case, it is preferable that it is displayed so as not to overlap the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D. This ensures that even if the visibility of one hold count information is reduced, the visibility of the other hold count information is maintained, allowing the current hold count to be recognized.

Thus, there are two types of rainbow displays: those affected by pre-announcement displays (e.g., rainbow effects) and those not affected by pre-announcement displays (e.g., rainbow icons). In particular, rainbow icons displayed in the icon display area 70c are valuable (rarely displayed) rainbow displays for the player, and by not being affected by pre-announcement displays, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment value of the display. On the other hand, rainbow effects are not as valuable as rainbow icons, so prioritizing pre-announcement allows for appropriate displays depending on the situation.

Note that while Figure 215 uses a rainbow effect as an example of a rainbow display affected by the pre-announcement display, it is not limited to this. For example, when a cut-in (rainbow) is performed as a cut-in effect, it is acceptable for a portion of the cut-in (rainbow) to be difficult to see due to the pre-announcement.

Furthermore, while Figure 215 uses a rainbow icon as an example to illustrate a rainbow display that is not affected by the pre-announcement display, it is not limited to this. For example, when executing the confirmed dialogue (rainbow) in Figure 117, it may be displayed in a way that does not overlap with the pre-announcement (to maintain visibility) so that it is not affected by the pre-announcement display.

Furthermore, the rainbow illumination from the frame effect lamp 10c, the panel LED 5b, the movable effect device 77 LED, and the effect button 17 LED is, of course, unaffected by the pre-announcement display, and its visibility is not reduced by the pre-announcement display. For example, in the scenes shown in Figure 215(a) and Figure 215(b-1), the frame effect lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b are also emitting rainbow light. Therefore, even if the rainbow effect on the first image display device 70 is affected by the pre-announcement display, the overall decorative effect is unlikely to be significantly reduced. This allows important information for players, such as pre-announcements, to be recognized without significantly compromising the decorative effect.

Furthermore, if the acquisition limit device is activated while the rainbow effect, cut-in (rainbow), confirmed dialogue (rainbow), or rainbow icon is displayed, the display will end and an acquisition limit device activation notification will be issued. In other words, while these rainbow displays can continue to be shown if a prior notification is issued, it becomes difficult to continue displaying them if the acquisition limit device is activated.

Next, the light-emitting regions and light-emitting patterns of each light-emitting means of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using the simplified diagram in Figure 216 and Figure 217. Note that in Figure 216, multiple LEDs are provided in each region.

As shown in Figure 216, the glass frame 4 (left and right) is provided with areas 1 to 7 for the frame-effect lamps 10c. The game board 5 (left and right) is provided with areas 1 to 4 for the board surface LEDs 5b. Furthermore, areas 1 to 4 for the first image display device 70 are provided in the center of the game board 5, and areas 1 to 3 for the movable effect device 77 are provided above the first image display device 70. The glass frame 4 also provides area 1 for the effect button 17. Although not shown, other areas may also be included, such as the light-emitting area of the light guide plate and the light-emitting area of the launch handle 15.

Then, these light-emitting regions are configured to emit light in the manner shown in Figure 217. First, (a) the frame effect lamp 10c emits light so that, during a predetermined illumination time (T1), region 1 is visible as "purple", region 2 as "blue", region 3 as "indigo", region 4 as "green", region 5 as "yellow", region 6 as "orange", and region 7 as "red". After the predetermined illumination time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined illumination time (T2), region 1 emits light so that, as seen in the diagram, region 2 as "purple", region 3 as "blue", region 4 as "indigo", region 5 as "green", region 6 as "yellow", and region 7 as "orange". Subsequently, from T3 to T7, each region changes color, and after T7 has elapsed, each region emits light again in the color shown in T1. In this way, the color of each region changes at predetermined emission times, and at each emission time, regions 1 to 7 emit light in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet) that are visible as a whole.

Similarly, (b) the panel LED 5b emits light so that, during a predetermined illumination time (T1), area 1 is visible as "purple," area 2 as "blue," area 3 as "indigo," and area 4 as "green." Then, after the predetermined illumination time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined illumination time (T2), area 1 emits light so that, during the next predetermined illumination time (T2), area 1 emits light so that, during the next predetermined illumination time, area 2 emits light so that, during the next predetermined illumination time, area 3 as "blue," and area 4 as "indigo." From T3 to T7, each area changes color, and after T7, each area emits light again in the color shown at T1. In this way, the color of each area changes at predetermined illumination times, and during each illumination time, areas 1 to 4 as a whole emit light so that four of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) are visible.

Similarly, (c) the first image display device 70 emits light so that, during a predetermined emission time (T1), region 1 is visible as "purple," region 2 as "blue," region 3 as "indigo," and region 4 as "green." Then, after the predetermined emission time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined emission time (T2), region 1 emits light so that, during the next predetermined emission time (T2), region 1 is visible as "red," region 2 as "purple," region 3 as "blue," and region 4 as "indigo." From T3 to T7, each region changes color, and after T7 has elapsed, each region emits light again in the color shown in T1. In this way, the color of each region changes at predetermined emission times, and during each emission time, regions 1 to 4 as a whole emit light so that four of the seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple) are visible.

Similarly, (d) the LEDs of the movable display device 77 emit light so that regions 1 to 3 are visible in "yellow" during a predetermined illumination time (T1). After the predetermined illumination time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined illumination time (T2), regions 1 to 3 emit light so that they are visible in "green." From T3 to T7, each region changes color, and after T7 has elapsed, each region emits light again in the color shown in T1. The movable display device 77 is composed of three movable parts, each of which has an illumination area. During each illumination time, the illumination area of each movable part emits light in the same color. Thus, from T1 to T7, seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet) are visible.

Similarly, (e) the LED of the performance button 17 emits light so that region 1 is visible in "green" during a predetermined illumination time (T1). After the predetermined illumination time (T1) has elapsed, during the next predetermined illumination time (T2), regions 1 to 3 emit light so that they are visible in "indigo." From T3 to T7, each region changes color, and after T7 has elapsed, each region emits light again in the color shown in T1. The LED of the performance button 17 emits light in the same color during each illumination time. In total, from T1 to T7, seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet) are visible.

Regarding the predetermined illumination time, as will be described later in Figure 221, it may consist of equal durations for T1 to T7, or all different durations, or T1, T3, T5, and T7 may be equal durations (A), and T2, T4, and T6 may be equal durations (B), with different durations for time (A) and time (B). Furthermore, each device may have its own defined time (for example, the T1 of the frame effect lamp 10c and the T1 of the panel LED 5b may be different), or multiple devices may share a common time (for example, the T1 of the frame effect lamp 10c and the T1 of the panel LED 5b may be the same).

Furthermore, the regions shown are merely examples; for instance, the device may have more regions than indicated, or fewer regions. For example, each device may have at least seven regions, and the entire spectrum of regions 1 through 7 may emit light in seven colors (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet) to be visible.

Next, an example of a light emission pattern will be explained using Figures 218 to 220.
First, Figure 218 is a simplified diagram of Figure 216, showing only the panel LED 5b, and is an illumination mode (moving illumination 1) in which each illumination color moves (appears to rotate) in the direction of the arrow, as shown in Figure 217.

In Figure 218(a), the left region 1 is "red," the left region 2 is "orange," the left region 3 is "yellow," the left region 4 is "green," the right region 4 is "blue," the right region 3 is "indigo," the right region 2 is "purple," and the right region 1 is "red." After a predetermined luminescence time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 218(b), the left region 1 becomes "red," the left region 2 becomes "red," the left region 3 becomes "orange," the left region 4 becomes "yellow," the right region 4 becomes "green," the right region 3 becomes "blue," the right region 2 becomes "indigo," and the right region 1 becomes "purple." In other words, each color in each region moves clockwise. For example, the "yellow" in the left region 3 of Figure 218(a) is emitting light in the left region 4 in Figure 218(b). Then, in Figures 218(c) and 218(d), each color in each region moves clockwise. By repeating this process, it is possible to make the visible rainbow-colored emission patterns appear to move and rotate clockwise.

In Figure 218, the panel LED 5b was used as an example for explanation, but the method is not limited to this; similar illumination patterns may be achieved with other light-emitting means. For example, the same illumination pattern may be achieved with the frame effect lamp 10c. Furthermore, the moving illumination 1 may be performed using the panel LED 5b + movable effect device 77LED. The rotation direction may also be counterclockwise.

Next, Figure 219 is a simplified diagram showing only the frame-effect lamp 10c extracted from Figure 216. It depicts the light emission pattern (moving light emission 2) shown in Figure 217, where each light emission color moves (appears to rise) in the direction of the arrow.

In Figure 219(a), region 1 is "red," region 2 is "orange," region 3 is "yellow," region 4 is "green," region 5 is "blue," region 6 is "indigo," and region 7 is "purple." After a predetermined luminescence time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 219(b), region 1 becomes "purple," region 2 becomes "red," region 3 becomes "orange," region 4 becomes "yellow," region 5 becomes "green," region 6 becomes "blue," and region 7 becomes "indigo." In other words, each color in each region moves upward (downward from region 7 to region 1). For example, the "yellow" in region 3 in Figure 219(a) is emitting light in region 4 in Figure 219(b). Subsequently, in Figures 219(c) and 219(d), each color in each region moves upward (downward from region 7 to region 1). By repeating this process, it is possible to make the iridescent luminescence appear to move upwards.

In Figure 219, the frame effect lamp 10c was used as an example for explanation, but the explanation is not limited to this; similar illumination patterns may be achieved with other light-emitting means. For example, the same illumination pattern may be achieved with the panel LED 5b. Furthermore, the frame effect lamp 10c + effect button 17 LED may be used to perform the movement illumination 2. The movement direction may also be downward.

Next, Figure 220 shows an example of radiant emission that performs rainbow emission using multiple light-emitting means.
Specifically, area 1 of the first image display device 70 is displayed in "yellow," area 2 in "green," area 3 in "orange," and area 4 in "red," while area 2 of the movable display device 77 is illuminated in "blue" and area 3 in "purple." Then, each color moves radially from the center of the game board 5 to the glass frame 4. For example, "yellow" is displayed in area 1 of the first image display device 70, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left area 3 of the board surface LED 5b is illuminated in "yellow" (at this time, area 1 of the first image display device 70 is also "yellow"), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left area 5 of the frame display lamp 10c is illuminated in "yellow" (at this time, area 1 of the first image display device 70 and the left area 3 of the board surface LED 5b are also "yellow"). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a different color (for example, green) is displayed in area 1 of the first image display device 70, and the area 3 to the left of the panel LED 5b and the area 5 to the left of the frame effect lamp 10c also sequentially light up in green.

Note that in Figure 220, the movable display device 77 is positioned in its original location to clarify the light emission pattern of the first image display device 70. However, when the emission begins, it is positioned in front of the first image display device 77. In other words, in the winning animation, the movable display device 77 is positioned in front of the first image display device 77 to indicate a jackpot, and the emission begins from this position.

Furthermore, at the same timing as the "yellow" change described above, the area 2 of the first image display device 70, the area 3 to the right of the panel LED 5b, and the area 5 to the right of the frame effect lamp 10c sequentially illuminate in "green," the area 3 of the first image display device 70, the area 2 to the left of the panel LED 5b, and the area 1 to the left of the frame effect lamp 10c sequentially illuminate in "orange," and the area 4 of the first image display device 70, the area 2 to the right of the panel LED 5b, and the area 1 to the right of the frame effect lamp 10c sequentially illuminate in "red." After a predetermined time has elapsed, each area changes to the next illuminated color.

Furthermore, at the same timing as the aforementioned "yellow" color change, the area 2 of the movable display device 77, the left area 4 of the panel LED 5b, and the left area 6 of the frame display lamp 10c sequentially emit "blue" light, and the area 3 of the movable display device 77, the right area 4 of the panel LED 5b, and the right area 6 of the frame display lamp 10c sequentially emit "purple" light. After a predetermined time has elapsed, each area changes to the next emitted color. By repeating this emission, it is possible to create the appearance of a rainbow-colored emission pattern spreading outward from the first image display device 70 and the movable display device 77. Note that the emitted light is not limited to from the inside to the outside; it can also be from the outside to the inside.

Furthermore, the LEDs may have light emission patterns other than those shown in Figures 218 to 220. For example, in each of the regions (region 1) shown in Figure 216, there may be a rainbow light emission pattern (high-speed seven-color change) that changes rapidly through seven colors. For example, in region 1 of the panel LED 5b, the LEDs may emit light in the order of "red" (0.1 seconds) → "orange" (0.1 seconds) → "yellow" (0.1 seconds) → "green" (0.1 seconds) → "blue" (0.1 seconds) → "indigo" (0.1 seconds) → "violet" (0.1 seconds), and at the same time, in region 2, the LEDs may emit light in the order of "orange" (0.1 seconds) → "yellow" (0.1 seconds) → "green" (0.1 seconds) → "blue" (0.1 seconds) → "indigo" (0.1 seconds) → "violet" (0.1 seconds) → "red" (0.1 seconds), and at the same time, regions 3 and 4 may also emit light in the order of seven colors, starting from different colors than regions 1 and 2, at high speed. Furthermore, this type of light emission is preferable to be performed during a variation animation or a jackpot game rather than during a demo animation while waiting for customers. For example, in a decisive animation during a variation animation, the light emission could be designed to gradually transition from a flashy pattern to a more subdued one, such as: decisive animation → success → rapid seven-color change → radial light emission (0.2 seconds) → moving light emission 1 (0.2 seconds) → moving light emission 2 (0.5 seconds) → confirmed stop.

Furthermore, in high-speed seven-color changes, the emission period is not limited to the aforementioned 0.1 seconds; for example, there may also be emission periods of 0.5 seconds. By varying the emission period in this way, it is possible to provide emission patterns that are easily visible as rainbow colors and emission patterns that are difficult to see as rainbow colors.

Furthermore, there may be a rainbow light emission pattern that moves from the left region to the right region (or from the right region to the left region). For example, the left frame effect lamp 10c may first emit red light, then the left frame effect lamp 10c may emit orange light, and the left panel LED 5b may emit red light, then the left frame effect lamp 10c may emit yellow light, and the left panel LED 5b may emit orange light, and the first image display device 70 may emit red light, thus executing a rainbow light emission pattern that moves from the left region to the right region (or from the right region to the left region).

Furthermore, in addition to the seven colors mentioned above (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet), if a rainbow emission is performed using eight colors, such as "white," the rainbow emission pattern (rainbow flash) may be configured such that a white flash is inserted between each of the seven colors, like this: red → white (flash) → orange → white (flash) → yellow → white (flash) → green → white (flash) → blue → white (flash) → indigo → white (flash) → violet → white (flash) → red.

Furthermore, when performing the moving light emission 1, it may be performed in the area between the panel LED 5b and the movable display device 77 LED, or in the area between the frame display lamp 10c and the display button 17 LED. Similarly, when performing the moving light emission 2, it may be performed in the area between the panel LED 5b and the movable display device 77 LED, or in the area between the frame display lamp 10c and the display button 17 LED. This allows for a unified decoration and enhances the decorative appeal.

Next, Figure 221 is a summary diagram showing the conditions for each of the following: moving light emission 1 (Figure 218), moving light emission 2 (Figure 219), and radiant light emission (Figure 220).
First, Figure 221(a) shows the rainbow illumination patterns for each situation, illustrating the illumination patterns (Figures 218 to 220) during the customer waiting demo, the variation performance, and the jackpot game. "0.2 seconds" refers to the illumination time for each of T1, T2, T3, etc. in Figure 217, and the same applies to "0.5 seconds". For example, with "0.2 seconds", area 1 will illuminate in "red" for "0.2 seconds", then area 1 will illuminate in "orange" for "0.2 seconds", then area 1 will illuminate in "yellow" for "0.2 seconds", and so on. In other words, it is possible to illuminate each area with two patterns of illumination time: a short illumination time of "0.2 seconds" and a longer illumination time of "0.5 seconds".

During the customer-waiting demo, the execution of the moving light emission 1 (Figure 218) in the "0.2-second" pattern is restricted. However, execution in the "0.5-second" pattern is permitted. Similarly, the execution of the moving light emission 2 (Figure 219) in the "0.2-second" pattern is restricted, but execution in the "0.5-second" pattern is permitted. Furthermore, the execution of the radiant light emission (Figure 220) in both the "0.2-second" and "0.5-second" patterns is restricted.

During the customer waiting demo, for example, the panel LED 5b and the movable effect device 77 LED (panel area) execute movement illumination 1, and the frame effect lamp 10c and the effect button 17 LED (frame area) execute movement illumination 2. When customer waiting demo A starts, the first image display device 70 begins displaying a character movie. At this time, the panel area is unlit, and the frame area is lit in white. As the character movie progresses, movement illumination 1 is executed in white and blue in the panel area, and movement illumination 2 is executed in white and blue in the frame area.

During the variation effect, both the "0.2-second" and "0.5-second" execution patterns are possible for the moving light emission 1 (Figure 218), both the "0.2-second" and "0.5-second" execution patterns are possible for the moving light emission 2 (Figure 219), and both the "0.2-second" and "0.5-second" execution patterns are possible for the radiant light emission (Figure 220).

During a jackpot game, both the 0.2-second and 0.5-second execution patterns are possible for the moving light 1 (Figure 218), and both the 0.2-second and 0.5-second execution patterns are possible for the moving light 2 (Figure 219). However, the radiant light (Figure 220) is restricted to the 0.5-second execution pattern, and only the 0.5-second execution pattern is possible. However, the radiant light during a jackpot game can only be executed upon successful completion of a jackpot upgrade animation (for example, when a transition to a probability variation game state is announced).

Furthermore, during the variation animation, the execution of Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), and Radiant Light (Figure 220) may differ depending on the variation animation pattern. For example, there may be variation animation patterns that execute all three (Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), and Radiant Light (Figure 220)), patterns that execute two of them, and patterns that execute one of them. Also, while there is no variation animation pattern for a jackpot that executes none of the three (Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), or Radiant Light (Figure 220)), such a variation animation pattern may exist.

Furthermore, the execution of moving light emission 1 (Figure 218), moving light emission 2 (Figure 219), and radiant light emission (Figure 220) may differ depending on the type of symbol 70a that signals a jackpot. For example, when the "777" symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, all light emission modes may be executed; when the "555" symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, any two light emission modes may be executed; and when the "222" symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, any one of the light emission modes may be executed. This makes it possible to recognize whether a symbol is advantageous or not based on the degree of light emission, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined, during the transition between the start of the variation animation and the final animation, for example, a rainbow icon or a confirmation line (rainbow) may be displayed. However, just because a variation animation pattern indicates a jackpot, such as Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), or Radiant Light (Figure 220), does not mean that one of these will necessarily be executed. Therefore, in terms of the likelihood of execution when a jackpot is determined, the order is: Rainbow icon/Confirmation line (rainbow) < Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), Radiant Light (Figure 220).

Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined, the sequence from the final animation to the confirmed stop may be executed using a pattern that runs for "0.2 seconds," followed by a pattern that runs for "0.5 seconds," gradually slowing down the rate of color change between regions until the confirmed stop is reached. Conversely, the sequence may be executed using a pattern that runs for "0.5 seconds," followed by a pattern that runs for "0.2 seconds," gradually increasing the rate of color change between regions until the confirmed stop is reached.

Furthermore, when incorporating the aforementioned revival animation pattern, a dedicated rainbow illumination pattern for the revival animation may be provided. For example, the rainbow illumination pattern of the frame animation lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b during the animation may differ depending on whether the revival animation pattern 13 is executed or the revival animation pattern is executed. Similarly, the rainbow illumination pattern of the frame animation lamp 10c and the panel LED 5b during the jackpot game may differ depending on whether the revival animation pattern 13 is executed and the game transitions to a jackpot, or whether the revival animation pattern is executed and the game transitions to a jackpot. This makes it easier to recognize whether a jackpot was achieved through the revival animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, during a jackpot game, the execution of Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), and Radiant Light (Figure 220) may differ between the "〇△Bonus" and the "Super 〇△Bonus" shown in Figure 213. For example, in the "Super 〇△Bonus," all of Moving Light 1 (Figure 218), Moving Light 2 (Figure 219), and Radiant Light (Figure 220) may be executed, while in the "〇△Bonus," only Moving Light 1 (Figure 218) and Moving Light 2 (Figure 219) may be executed, and Radiant Light (Figure 220) may not be executed.

A key feature of Figure 221(a) is that during the customer waiting demo, the radiant light emission (Figure 220) is not performed. Both moving light emission 1 (Figure 218) and moving light emission 2 (Figure 219) are only allowed to be performed in a "0.5-second" pattern. This reduces the intensity of the rainbow light emission (movement speed, area used, etc.), preventing the customer waiting demo from becoming overly flashy and encouraging excessive gameplay.

Furthermore, during jackpot gameplay, the execution of the radiant light emission pattern (Figure 220) at a "0.2-second" interval is restricted. This maintains an appropriate level of intensity for the rainbow light emission effect (movement speed, area used, etc.) while preventing the jackpot gameplay from becoming too flashy and causing players to neglect necessary actions (right-hand shooting).

On the other hand, during the variation animation, there are no particular restrictions, allowing for the execution of rainbow illumination in all patterns. This allows us to celebrate players who have worked hard to win the jackpot, and to uplift their spirits.

Note that Figure 221(a) is merely an example; the illumination time may be set to a further duration in seconds, and the "Limited" and "Executable" sections may be adjusted as appropriate. Furthermore, in addition to the illumination modes shown in Figures 218 to 220, further illumination modes may be provided.

Furthermore, regarding the execution of Moving Light 1, Moving Light 2, Radiant Light, and the aforementioned High-Speed Seven-Color Change and Rainbow Flash during the variation effects, the breakdown of execution into (A) between the decisive effect and the confirmed stop, and (B) between the start of the variation effect and the decisive effect, can be arbitrary. This includes execution only in (A), execution only in (B), and execution in both (A) and (B).

Next, Figure 221(b) shows the rainbow illumination patterns for each variation animation pattern, illustrating the cases where variation animation patterns 13-25 and 44-56 are executed. Specifically, it shows the rainbow illumination patterns during variation animations and jackpot gameplay in the following cases: when a jackpot is won by entering the first start slot 45 in normal gameplay mode, and one of variation animation patterns 13-25 is executed; and when a jackpot is won by entering the second start slot 47 in time-saving gameplay mode or probability-changing gameplay mode, and variation animation patterns 44-56 are executed.

In this case, although the "0.2 seconds" of the radiant light emission during the jackpot game (Figure 220) is restricted, everything else remains possible. This increases the flexibility of the rainbow light emission between the variation animation and the subsequent jackpot game, allowing for more decorative effects.

In the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(b), rainbow light emission is possible in both (A) between the decisive animation and the confirmed stop, and (B) between the start of the variation animation and the decisive animation. However, it is rarely performed in (B). For example, it is assumed that moving light emission 2 will be performed when the rainbow icon is displayed, or that moving light emission 1 or moving light emission 2 will be performed during the execution of a full rotation reach. Radiant light emission is not performed (it is an animation reserved for successful decisive animations and upgrade animations).

(A) An example of the rainbow light emission pattern performed between the decision animation and the final stop is as follows: The animation button 17 is pressed during the decision animation to execute the radial light emission; when the movable animation device 77 returns to its original position, the moving light emission 2 is executed; when the combination of symbols for the animation symbols 70a is derived (temporarily stopped), the moving light emission 1 is executed; and then the final stop occurs, ending the rainbow light emission pattern. The execution order and combinations of whether or not the rainbow light emission patterns are executed can be arbitrary.

On the other hand, Figure 221(c) shows the cases where the variable animation pattern 28 and variable animation pattern 33 are executed. Specifically, it shows the rainbow illumination patterns during the variable animation and jackpot game in the following cases: when a jackpot is won by entering the second start slot 47 during normal gameplay, and variable animation pattern 28 is executed; and when a jackpot is won by entering the first start slot 45 during time-saving gameplay or probability-changing gameplay, and variable animation pattern 33 is executed.

In this case, only the "0.5 seconds" of the moving light emission 2 (Figure 219) is possible, and execution in other light emission modes is restricted. In other words, if a jackpot is won as a result of playing in a way that is not optimal for the player—such as entering the second start port 47 during normal gameplay, or entering the first start port 45 during time-saving gameplay or probability-changing gameplay—the degree of freedom of the rainbow light emission during the variation animation and the subsequent jackpot gameplay is reduced, resulting in a less decorative animation.

For example, comparing the case where a jackpot is won by entering the first start slot 45 in normal gameplay and one of the variation animation patterns 13 to 25 is executed (Situation 1) with the case where a jackpot is won by entering the first start slot 45 in time-saving gameplay or probability-changing gameplay and variation animation pattern 33 is executed (Situation 2), Situation 1 involves the "0.2 seconds" and "0.5 seconds" of the moving light 1 (Figure 218) and the moving light 2 (Figure 219) While both "0.2 seconds" and "0.5 seconds" for the radiant light emission (Figure 220) are possible, in Situation 2, only "0.5 seconds" for the moving light emission 2 (Figure 219) is possible. Therefore, it can be said that the number of light emission patterns in the rainbow emission is greater when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state than when it is executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state).

Furthermore, while Situation 1 allows for movement in multiple directions, including moving light 1 (clockwise movement), moving light 2 (upward movement), and radial light (diagonal movement), Situation 2 only allows for moving light 2 (upward movement). Therefore, it can be said that the number of different movement directions for the colors constituting the rainbow light is greater when the first game animation is performed in the normal game state than when it is performed in a specific game state (short-time game state, probability-changing game state).

Furthermore, when the variable animation pattern 28 or the variable animation pattern 33 is executed, the rainbow light emission may be omitted. The statements "a large number of light emission patterns" and "a large number of color movement directions constituting the rainbow light emission" may be compared to "0".

Furthermore, since the rainbow light effect is executed in the variation animation patterns corresponding to a big win, for example, the rainbow light effect will not be executed in variation animation patterns 26 and 27, which are possible when a game ball enters the second start slot 47 in normal gameplay and the result is a loss. Similarly, the rainbow light effect will not be executed in variation animation patterns 31 and 32, which are possible when a game ball enters the first start slot 45 in specific gameplay states (short-time gameplay state, probability-changing gameplay state) and the result is a loss.

Furthermore, in the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(c), the "moving light emission 2" can emit light for "0.5 seconds" between (A) the decisive animation and the confirmed stop, while the rainbow light emission between (B) the start of the variation animation and the decisive animation is restricted. In particular, the rainbow light emission between (B) the start of the variation animation and the decisive animation is less likely to occur than in the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(b).

Furthermore, the rainbow light emission between the start of the variation animation and the final animation may also be performed in the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(c). However, it is preferable to make it more difficult to perform than in the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(b). On the other hand, the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(c) may be made easier to perform than the variation animation pattern shown in Figure 221(b).

In other words, the second sequence (from the final sequence to the confirmed stop) can be executed after the first sequence (from the start of the variation sequence to the final sequence), and the likelihood of the rainbow flash occurring in the first sequence differs when the first sequence is executed in a normal game state compared to when it is executed in a specific game state (short-time game state, probability-changing game state).

Furthermore, while Figure 221(c) shows only mobile light emission 2 as executable, it is also possible to make only mobile light emission 1 executable, or only radiant light emission executable, or, if the number of executable types is fewer than in Figure 221(b), then two of mobile light emission 1, mobile light emission 2, and radiant light emission may be executable.

According to Figure 221, the following points are characteristic features.
(n) The game performance consists of a first game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) that corresponds to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) that corresponds to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The light-emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light depending on whether the first game performance is performed in a normal game state or in a specific game state. The number of types of light emission patterns in the rainbow light emission is greater when the first game performance (for example, variation performance patterns 13 to 25) is performed in a normal game state than when the first game performance (for example, variation performance pattern 33) is performed.

(e) The game performance consists of a first game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the result of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the result of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The light-emitting means can emit rainbow light depending on whether the first game performance is executed in a normal game state or in a specific game state. The number of different movement directions of the colors constituting the rainbow light is greater when the first game performance (for example, variation performance patterns 13-25) is executed in a normal game state than when the first game performance (for example, variation performance pattern 33) is executed in a specific game state (all three are possible: moving light 1, moving light 2, and radiant light; only moving light 2 is possible in variation performance pattern 33).

(c) The game performance consists of a first game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The second performance (between the determination performance and the confirmed stop) can be executed after the first performance (between the start of the variation performance and the determination performance). The luminescence means can be made to emit a rainbow light depending on whether the first game performance (e.g., variation performance patterns 13-25) is executed in a normal game state or in a specific game state. The ease with which the rainbow light emission occurs in the first performance differs when the first game performance is executed in a normal game state compared to when the first game performance is executed in a specific game state (the rainbow light emission between the start of the variation performance and the determination performance is restricted in variation performance pattern 33, whereas there is no such restriction in variation performance patterns 13-25).

These features produce the following effects.
When the first game animation (for example, variation animation pattern 33) is executed in a specific game state, the number of types of light emission patterns in the rainbow illumination is greater when the first game animation (for example, variation animation patterns 13 to 25) is executed in a normal game state than when the first game animation (for example, variation animation pattern 33) is executed. Therefore, when the first game animation (for example, variation animation pattern 33) is executed in a specific game state, the light emission patterns during the variation animation and during the jackpot game can suggest that the player is playing a game that is not optimal for them, such as getting the game ball into the first start opening 45 in a specific game state, and encourage the player to play the game that is optimal for them (getting the game ball into the second start opening 47 in a specific game state).

Furthermore, the light-emitting means can emit rainbow light depending on whether the first game animation is executed in a specific game state or not. The number of different color movement directions constituting the rainbow light is greater when the first game animation (e.g., variable animation patterns 13-25) is executed in a normal game state than when the first game animation (e.g., variable animation pattern 33) is executed in a specific game state. Therefore, the light emission patterns during the variable animation and during jackpot gameplay can suggest that the player is engaging in an unoptimal gameplay action, such as entering the game ball into the first starting port 45 in a specific game state. This encourages the player to engage in the optimal gameplay action (entering the game ball into the second starting port 47 in a specific game state).

Furthermore, the likelihood of the rainbow flashing occurring in the first game animation differs when it is performed in a normal game state compared to when it is performed in a specific game state (in variation animation pattern 33, the rainbow flashing is restricted between the start of the variation animation and the decisive animation, whereas in variation animation patterns 13 to 25, there is no such restriction). Therefore, the flashing patterns during the variation animation and during the jackpot game can suggest that the player is performing an unoptimal game, such as entering the game ball into the first starting opening 45 in a specific game state, and encourage the player to perform the optimal game (entering the game ball into the second starting opening 47 in a specific game state).

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 1)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means that notifies the player of the occurrence of a predetermined event when that event occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-16405). However, in gaming machines like the one described in the above patent document, there was room for improvement in how to effectively notify the player of the occurrence of the predetermined event.

(A) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player comprises: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the first control means has a predetermined area (for example, main RAM 11 The control means can perform a control (RWM clearing process) to clear predetermined information stored in (0c, frame control RAM 120c), the second control means can perform a control (game ball count clearing) to clear the game value, and the notification means can perform a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, characterized in that the notification priority differs between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably performed.

(B) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes: a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the machine to its state before the power supply was interrupted when the power supply is restored after it has been interrupted; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The second control means is capable of clearing the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of providing a first notification (power restoration notification) in response to the restoration and a second notification (clearing the number of game balls) in response to the clearing of the game value, characterized in that the priority of the first and second notifications differs. Therefore, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be appropriately notified.

(C) A third configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the first control means is capable of performing control related to settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in accordance with the control related to settings and a second notification (clearing the number of gaming balls) in accordance with the clearing of the gaming value, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(D) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value; a detection means (first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b) for detecting magnetism; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of providing a first notification (magnet detection error notification) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (clearing the number of gaming balls) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(E) A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value; a detection means (radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting radio waves; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of providing a first notification (illegal radio wave detection error notification) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (clearing the number of gaming balls) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(F) A sixth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a detection means (general prize slot sw43a, first start slot sw45a, second start slot sw47a, big prize slot sw50a, out slot sw39) for detecting the game medium corresponding to the game value. a) The system comprises a control means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 76). The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of an abnormal number of winning balls error) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of clearing the number of game balls) in response to the clearing of the game value. The first and second notifications have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably performed.

(G) A seventh configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; a detection means (deducting outlet sw91c) for detecting the game medium that is emitted into the game area in the game medium corresponding to the game value; and a notification means (sound The system comprises a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel lighting device 76. The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of an abnormal number of launched balls error) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of clearing the number of game balls) in response to the clearing of the game value. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively performed.

(H) An eighth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the game value; an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4); a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) for detecting the state of the door body; and a notification means (sound The system comprises a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel lighting device 76. The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively performed.

(I) A ninth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) that can communicate with the first control means, stores the game value owned by the player, and controls the updating of the game value; and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects when the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate. The system includes notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 76). The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of an internal game machine communication error) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of clearing the number of game balls) in response to the clearing of the game value. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively performed.

(J) A tenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value; a detection means (frame control board 120) that detects when communication between the gaming machine and the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) is impossible; and a notification means (voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of providing a first notification (communication line abnormality error notification) in response to the detection by the detection means and a second notification (clearing the number of gaming balls) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first notification and the second notification.Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably provided.

(K) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player comprises: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine, and control for clearing the gaming value (game ball count clearing), wherein the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification during ball removal operation) in accordance with the discharge control and a second notification (game ball count clearing notification) in accordance with the clearing of the gaming value, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first notification and the second notification. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(L) As a twelfth configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, the machine includes: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; a detection means (main control board 110) for detecting specific information (for example, the maximum increase) that is counted when the counting conditions are met; and a notification means (voice output device The system comprises a 9-inch panel, image display devices 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel lighting device 76. The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing a first notification (notification of activation of the acquisition limit device) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (notification of game ball count clearing) in response to the clearing of the game value. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively performed.

(M) A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the game value; an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4); a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) for detecting the state of the door body; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image The system comprises display devices 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel lighting device 76. The second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging game media corresponding to the game value outside the game machine. The notification means is capable of providing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (during ball removal operation) in response to the discharge control. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(S) A 14th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player. This configuration includes: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of said game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). Based on the performance of a specific operation (RWM clear operation), the system is capable of clearing predetermined information stored in the first control means and predetermined information stored in the second control means. The notification means is capable of providing notification in accordance with the specific operation without distinguishing between the clearing of predetermined information stored in the first control means and the clearing of predetermined information stored in the second control means. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably provided.

(a) A 15th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value; an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4); a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body; and a notification means (voice output device) that can perform notification (glass frame open error, inner frame open error) in response to the detection by the detection means. The system comprises a control unit (9), image display devices (70-73), a frame lighting device (10), and a panel lighting device (76). The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the game machine. The notification means is capable of providing notification in response to detection by the detection means, whether the detection occurs when the discharge control is being performed or when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(b) A 16th configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine in which a player can play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) that can communicate with the first control means, stores the game value owned by the player, and controls the updating of the game value; a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) for detecting when the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate; and in response to the detection by the detection means The system includes notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) capable of providing notification (internal communication error notification for the gaming machine). The first control means is capable of performing control related to settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing). The notification means does not provide notification in response to detection by the detection means when the setting control is being performed, and provides notification in response to the detection once the setting control is completed. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively provided.

(h) A 17th configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own. This configuration includes: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The notification means is capable of providing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event where game progress control is impossible, and a second notification (e.g., game ball count clear notification, RWM clear notification) in response to a second event where game progress control is possible. The notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, the occurrence of predetermined events can be appropriately notified.

(i) As a 18th configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player comprises: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The notification means is capable of providing a first notification (e.g., setting change notification, setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., acquisition limit device activation notification, ball removal operation notification) in response to a second event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, characterized in that the priority of the notification differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably provided.

(j) A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of said game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The notification means is capable of providing a first notification (e.g., game ball count clear notification) corresponding to a first event that allows for game progress control, and a second notification (e.g., RWM clear notification, power restoration notification) corresponding to a second event that allows for game progress control, characterized in that the notification priority differs between the first and second notifications. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be suitably provided.

(k) A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the notification means provides a first notification corresponding to a first event (for example, an error indicating an abnormal number of winning balls). It is possible to perform a first notification (e.g., a notification of an abnormal number of launched balls error) and a second notification corresponding to a second event different from the first event (e.g., a notification of clearing the number of game balls, a notification of setting change, a notification of setting confirmation). The first notification can be deactivated if the power supply is interrupted while the first event is occurring and then restored. The second notification can be deactivated if the power supply is interrupted while the second event is occurring and then restored. Therefore, notifications of predetermined events can be effectively provided.

(l) A 21st configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the notification means provides a first notification corresponding to a first event ( For example, it is possible to perform a notification of clearing the number of game balls, and a second notification corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification). The first notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being interrupted while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being interrupted while the second event is occurring. Therefore, notifications of predetermined events can be suitably provided.

(m) A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the notification means provides a first notification corresponding to a first event (for example, a winning ball). It is possible to provide a first notification (a number anomaly error notification) and a second notification corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, a number of fired balls anomaly error notification, an RWM anomaly error notification). The first notification can be deactivated if the power supply is interrupted while the first event is occurring and then restored. Similarly, the second notification can be deactivated if the power supply is interrupted while the second event is occurring and then restored. Therefore, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be appropriately notified.

(n) A 23rd configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value; and a display means (frame control display 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal number of winning balls error, error code "H69" indicating an abnormal number of balls launched error) The system can display a second piece of information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating a clearing of the number of game balls, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame opening error, and error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error). The display of the first information can be suspended if the power supply is interrupted and then restored while the first information is being displayed. The display of the second information can be suspended if the power supply is interrupted and then restored while the second information is being displayed. Therefore, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be effectively notified.

(o) A 24th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a display means (frame control display 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second event different from the first event. The system can display a second piece of information corresponding to the event (for example, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame opening error, or error code "H65" indicating an inner frame opening error). The display of the first piece of information can be resumed after a power supply interruption and subsequent restoration of power. Similarly, the display of the second piece of information can be resumed after a power supply interruption and subsequent restoration of power. Therefore, the system can effectively notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(p) A 25th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value; and a display means (frame control display 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, an error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error) and a second event different from the first event. The system can display a second piece of information corresponding to the first piece of information (for example, error code "H68" indicating an error in the number of winning balls, or error code "H69" indicating an error in the number of balls launched). The display of the first piece of information can be suspended if the power supply is interrupted while it is being displayed and then restored. Similarly, the display of the second piece of information can be suspended if the power supply is interrupted while it is being displayed and then restored. Therefore, the system can effectively notify the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 2)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that use the game value owned by the player to play the game. Some of these gaming machines perform a game ball count clearing process that clears the game value when power is supplied to the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-104306). However, if the game ball count clearing process is performed when power is supplied, the control processing of the control means may become complicated.

(N) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine is provided which has a movable performance means (movable performance device 77) that can operate in a predetermined manner and which allows the player to play using the game value owned by the player, and which includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after the power supply has been stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and performs update control of the game value, a third control means (performance control board 130) that performs initial operation control of the movable performance means, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device The system comprises (70-73, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 76), and the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of performing different notifications (different notifications for sound, screen, and illumination) for the restoration (power restoration notification) and the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls notification). The third control means is capable of initially operating the movable performance means in the same manner whether the restoration is performed or the game value is cleared. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control processing of the control means in a game machine where the game ball count clearing process is performed.

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 5)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball ejection switch to eject game balls circulating inside the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-39943). However, there was room for improvement in effectively notifying the player that game balls were being ejected.

(O) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player comprises a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value, and a specific display (game ball count display 135) capable of displaying the value amount of the game value. The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and is capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the specific display when the discharge control is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player that game balls are being discharged.

(P) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value, a first display unit (frame control display 125) capable of displaying the value amount of the game value, and a second display unit (game ball count display 135) capable of displaying the value amount of the game value. The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and is capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the first and second displays when the discharge control is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player that game balls are being discharged.

(Q) A third configuration to solve the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that performs game progress control; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and performs update control of the game value; and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the first control means has a predetermined area (for example, main RAM 110c, frame control RAM 12 The second control means is capable of executing control (RWM clear processing) to clear predetermined information stored in 0c), and is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the game machine. The notification means is capable of executing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (ball removal operation notification) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify that a game ball is being discharged.

(R) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the machine to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after it has been stopped; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and performs update control of the game value; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (power restoration notification) in response to the restoration and a second notification (ball removal operation notification) in response to the discharge control, and the execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify the player that a game ball is being dispensed.

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 3)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that use the gaming value owned by the player to play the game. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the machine to the outside (see, for example, Figures 4 to 9 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-104306). However, the amount of information transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside was large, which led to a control load on the control means.

(T) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player comprises a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the updating of the gaming value, wherein the first control means is capable of performing predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on the fact that a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) has been performed, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value outside the gaming machine based on the fact that a second operation (ball removal operation) has been performed, wherein when the discharge control is performed, no information is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the predetermined processing is performed, information (information relating to Bit0 to Bit2 of the fraud detection state 1 in HC fraud monitoring information) can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(U) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value. The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation) for discharging the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine, and control for clearing the game value (game ball count clearing). When the discharge control is performed, information is not transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), but when the game value is cleared, information can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, the control load on the control means can be reduced.

(q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, wherein when a first event occurs, the control means can transmit information corresponding to the first event (for example, in the cases of "setting change", "setting confirmation", "power on (RWM clear)" and "acquisition limit device operation", information that the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when a second event different from the first event occurs, it is possible not to transmit information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the cases of "ball removal operation", "ball removal lever operation error", "communication line abnormality error" and "communication no response error", the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" is not "1" and the information is not transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(r) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own. This configuration includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value. The control means is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, in the case of "ball removal operation" or "ball removal lever operation error," the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" does not become "1," and therefore no information is transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170) when a first event occurs. Furthermore, when a second event different from the first event occurs, the control means is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of "communication line abnormality error" or "communication no response error," the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 2 (frame control)" in "HC fraud monitoring information" does not become "1," and therefore no information is transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine. Therefore, the control load on the control means can be reduced.

(s) A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own. This configuration includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value. The control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to a first event (for example, in the case of "setting change" or "setting confirmation," information indicating that the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to an external device (dedicated unit 170) when a first event occurs. Furthermore, when a second event different from the first event occurs, the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of "power on (RWM clear)" or "acquisition limit device activation," information indicating that the corresponding Bit of "fraud detection state 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1") to an external device. Therefore, the control load on the control means can be reduced.

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 4)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball ejection switch to eject game balls circulating inside the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-39943). However, no consideration was given to the execution of other control processes while game balls were being ejected, and there was a risk that the ejection of game balls would become stagnant.

(V) As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player comprises: a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game; and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value. The first control means is capable of performing predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on the performance of a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation). The second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine based on the performance of a second operation (ball removal operation). The first control means is capable of not performing the predetermined processing when the discharge control is being performed, and performing the predetermined processing when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(W) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value. The first control means is capable of clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined area (RWM clearing process), and the second control means is capable of discharging game media corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine (frame control board ball removal operation process). The first control means is capable of not clearing the predetermined information when the discharging control is being performed, and clearing the predetermined information when the discharging control is not being performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(X) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player. This configuration includes: a first control means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the machine to its state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after being stopped; and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and performs update control of the game value. The second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine. The first control means does not restore the machine to its state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is being performed, and can restore the machine to its state before the power supply was stopped when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls without delay.

(Y) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game when the machine is in a playable state (for example, when all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing of the main control board); and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value. The second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine. The first control means is capable of not entering the playable state when the discharge control is being performed, and entering the playable state when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(Z) A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This configuration includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value, and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) capable of notifying the occurrence of predetermined events (e.g., magnet detection error, illegal radio wave detection error). The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge the game medium corresponding to the game value outside the gaming machine. The notification means does not notify the occurrence of the predetermined event when the discharge control is being performed, but can notify the occurrence of the predetermined event when the discharge control is not being performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to discharge the game balls without delay.

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 5)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these machines use game balls (sealed game balls) that circulate within the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-39943). However, no consideration was given to maintaining the game balls circulating within the machine, and there was a risk that the enjoyment of the game would decrease due to a shortage of game balls.

(c) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value; an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4); a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body; and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means controls the ejection of a gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value into the gaming area (gaming area 5a) (touch sensor 1 5a. The system can perform the following actions: (when there is input to the launch volume 15b, it drives the launch solenoid 92b to operate the launch hammer); and (when there is input to the launch volume 15b, it can perform the following actions:) and (when there is input to clear the game value, it can perform the following actions:) it can perform the following actions: launch solenoid 92b to operate the launch hammer when there is input to the launch volume 15b; it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number of game balls); it can perform the following actions: it can perform the game value clear (process to clear the number

(Content of the invention as described in this embodiment 6)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these machines are equipped with a forced termination mechanism that forcibly ends the game when the difference between the number of balls held, as indicated by the ball information, and the number of balls equivalent to the total amount borrowed reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6318340). However, while forcibly ending the game can ensure a healthy gaming experience, it does not take the player's feelings into consideration and may diminish the enjoyment of the game.

(d) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value, and a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein when the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (40,000), the control means sends first game information (H) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170). C. In the game machine error state of the fraud monitoring information, it is possible to transmit "H23 Game Ball Count Overload". When the value of specific information counted due to the fulfillment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (95,000), it is possible to transmit second game information (information that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 in HC. fraud monitoring information is "1") to the outside of the game machine. The notification means is characterized in that, if the first value is met, it does not issue a predetermined warning notification (warning of excessive gambling, warning of forgetting to take card), and if the second value is met, it can issue the predetermined warning notification. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(e) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the updating of the gaming value; a notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76); and a counting operation unit (counting button 20) for counting the gaming value owned by the player, wherein the notification means is the The system is characterized by the ability to, when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count indicator 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), not issue a notification prompting the player to operate the counting operation unit (please press the counting button to count). However, when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), not issue a notification prompting the player to operate the counting operation unit. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(f) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (random value for jackpot determination) when acquisition conditions are met (winning in the first start port 45 and the second start port 47), and performs control to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information; and a second control means (performance control board 130) that performs performance control in accordance with commands transmitted from the first control means, wherein the first control means performs control to perform a pre-determination (for example, a first pre-determination process) prior to the determination of whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. The second control means is capable of executing a pre-animation (e.g., a hold-and-continue animation) in response to a command based on the pre-determination (e.g., a first pre-read specification command). The pre-animation can be executed before the value of the game value owned by the player (e.g., the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count indicator 135) reaches a first value (e.g., 40,000). However, before the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of the counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (e.g., 95,000), the execution of the pre-animation can be restricted when a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-animation is met (e.g., the value of the maximum increase becomes "94,000"). Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(g) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the updating of the game value; and a performance execution means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting) that can perform game performances related to the special game. The system includes a lighting device (76), and the performance execution means is characterized in that, when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), it does not perform a specific game performance (for example, a completion performance) as a game performance related to the special game, and when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), it is possible to perform the specific game performance. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(Contents of the invention relating to the acquisition limit device described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these machines are equipped with a forced termination mechanism that forcibly ends the game when the difference between the number of balls held, as indicated by the ball information, and the number of balls equivalent to the total amount borrowed reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 6318340). However, while forcibly ending the game can ensure a healthy gaming experience, it does not take into consideration the player's feelings and may diminish the enjoyment of the game.

(AA) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player includes a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that performs predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) that performs controls in accordance with commands transmitted from the first control means, wherein when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the first control means performs a predetermined timing (for example, to each prize pocket) The execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at the timing when a prize is won and a predetermined value is met, or when a special game ends. The second control means can execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting standby performance, customer waiting demo performance) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no changes occur for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting designation command is received). The notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) can notify the remaining number until the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5000 remaining). The notification of the remaining number can be performed during the execution of the customer waiting performance. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AB) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that performs predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media); and a second control means (performance control board 130) that performs controls in accordance with commands transmitted from the first control means, wherein the first control means, when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) In this case, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at predetermined timings (for example, when a prize is awarded in each prize slot and a predetermined value is met, or when a special game ends). The second control means can execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting standby performance, customer waiting demo performance) when predetermined conditions are met (for example, when no changes occur for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting designation command is received). When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) can notify information related to the restriction (for example, "Acquisition limit device is operating. Game ends for today"). If the execution of the predetermined control is restricted while the customer waiting performance is being executed, the information related to the restriction can be notified. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AC) As a third configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine capable of performing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is entered into each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when the advantageous game ends) when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) is a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the notification means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is entered into each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when the advantageous game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined controls is restricted the notification means will provide information related to the restriction (for example, a pre-notification message, for example, the acquisition limit device is operating). The system is capable of notifying that the game has ended for today. When the advantageous game is not being played, if the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is restricted (for example, when a prize is hit in the second starting port 47, etc., during the execution of the time-saving game state, and the predetermined value is met, causing the acquisition limit device to activate), the information relating to the restriction can be notified in a first notification manner (for example, the acquisition limit device will activate after the symbols stop and the game will end. Please stop shooting → Acquisition limit device is activated. The game has ended for today). The system is capable of notifying that the game has ended for today. When the advantageous game is being played, if the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is subsequently restricted (for example, when a prize is hit in the big prize port 50, etc., during the execution of the jackpot game, and the predetermined value is met, causing the acquisition limit device to activate after the jackpot ends), the information relating to the restriction can be notified in a second notification manner different from the first notification manner (for example, you are in the middle of a jackpot. Please continue playing. The acquisition limit device will activate after the win and the game will end. → Acquisition limit device is activated. The game has ended for today). Therefore, it can prevent a decline in the enjoyment of gaming.

(AD) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own, comprising: control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, general symbol general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium); and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the notification means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined controls is restricted, the notification means will provide information related to the restriction (for example, when the acquisition limit device is operating). The system can notify players that the game has ended for the day. If the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, and then power is restored, the information related to the restriction can be notified at a first timing (for example, immediately after power is restored). If power is restored after the value of the specific information meets the predetermined value but before the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the information related to the restriction can be notified at a second timing after the first timing (for example, at the end of a jackpot game). Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AE) A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own, comprising: control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium); and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and when the execution of the predetermined controls is restricted, the notification means will notify the information related to the restriction in a first notification manner (for example, when the acquisition limit device is operating). The system notifies the player that gameplay has ended for the day. If power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the first notification mode, the information related to the restriction is then notified in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, "Acquisition limit device is operating; please clear RWM"). Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AF) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they own, comprising: control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium); and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the notification means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined controls is restricted, the notification means will notify the information related to the restriction in a predetermined manner (for example, when the acquisition limit device is operating). The system notifies the user that the game has ended for the day, and even if power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the predetermined notification manner, the information related to the restriction will continue to be notified in the predetermined notification manner. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AJ) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value they own, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that performs predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium); and a second control means (performance control board 130) that performs controls in accordance with commands transmitted from the first control means, wherein the first control means, when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) satisfies a predetermined value (for example, 95,000) In this case, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won in each prize slot and a predetermined value is met, or when the special game ends). The second control means can execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting standby performance, customer waiting demo performance) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no change occurs for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting designation command is received). Before the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the customer waiting performance can be executed, but after the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the execution of the customer waiting performance can be restricted. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AK) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value owned by the player, comprising: control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium); notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, display unit 174); and a counting operation unit (counting) for counting the game value owned by the player. The control means is equipped with a counting button (20) and is capable of restricting the execution of a predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or when the special game ends) when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). The notification means is capable of issuing a notification prompting the user to operate the counting operation unit (for example, "Please press the counting button to count"). Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AL) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the game value they possess. This machine includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the launch of the game medium), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). The notification means can execute predetermined warning notifications (e.g., warning against excessive gambling, warning against forgetting to retrieve cards) in accordance with the restriction on executing the predetermined controls. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AN) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value owned by the player, comprising control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the notification means can notify that the machine has a function to restrict the execution of the predetermined controls (for example, this machine may stop the game when a predetermined number is acquired, this machine is equipped with an acquisition limit device). Therefore, it can prevent a decline in the enjoyment of gaming.

(AO) As an eleventh configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value owned by the player comprises control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and notification means (sound output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), wherein the control means determines the value of specific information that has been counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase), When a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) is met, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is awarded in each winning slot and the predetermined value is met, or when the special game ends). The notification means can notify predetermined game information related to the game value acquired by the player (e.g., information such as "XX balls acquired," or information indicating the value of specific information). When the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value, the predetermined game information can be notified in a specific manner (e.g., "MAX acquired"). Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(AP) As a twelfth configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine that can execute a game using the game value owned by the player and can perform a pre-determination (for example, a first pre-determination process) prior to determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, comprises a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, normal feature normal power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes controls in accordance with commands transmitted from the first control means, The first control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or when the special game ends) when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of the counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). The second control means can execute a pre-show (predictive show) based on the pre-determination, and if a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-show is met before the value of the specific information reaches the predetermined value, the execution of the pre-show can be restricted. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be prevented.

(Contents of the invention relating to the gaming machine information of the acquisition limit device described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the machine to the outside (see, for example, Figures 4 to 9 in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-104306). However, there was still room for improvement in the transmission of information.

(AG) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game using the game value owned by the player includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and game information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits game information (for example, HC/fraud monitoring information) to an external device (dedicated unit 170), wherein the control means controls the value of specific information that has been counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the maximum increase When the numerical value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when the predetermined value is reached by entering each prize slot, or when the special game ends). When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") to the outside of the game machine (dedicated unit 170). If power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information, the predetermined game information can be transmitted again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of information transmission from the game machine.

(AH) As a second configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine capable of performing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, control related to the firing of the game medium), and game information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits game information (for example, HC/fraud monitoring information) to an external device (dedicated unit 170), wherein the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when a prize is entered into each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or the timing when a special game ends) when the value of specific information counted by fulfilling a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) is a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), and the game information transmission means When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, predetermined game information (information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170). The system is characterized by the ability to differentiate the period between when the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted when the advantageous game is not being played (for example, when a ball enters the first starting slot 45, etc., during normal gameplay, meeting the predetermined value and activating the acquisition limit device), and when the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value while the advantageous game is being played, and then the execution of the predetermined control is restricted (for example, when a ball enters the big prize slot 50, etc., during jackpot gameplay, meeting the predetermined value, and activating the acquisition limit device after the jackpot ends). Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of information transmission from the gaming machine.

(AI) As a third configuration to solve the above problem, a game machine that can execute a game using the game value owned by the player and can execute control of an ejection mode for ejecting the game medium used in the game to the outside of the game machine, comprises control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that execute predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the ejection of the game medium), and game information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits game information (for example, HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the game machine (dedicated unit 170), wherein the control means, when the value of specific information counted by the fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), at a predetermined timing The execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at certain times (for example, when a prize is awarded in each winning slot and a predetermined value is met, or when a special game ends). When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1") to the outside of the game machine (dedicated unit 170). If power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information, and the payout mode control is not being executed at that time, the predetermined game information can be transmitted again. If power is restored during the transmission of the predetermined game information, and the payout mode control is being executed at that time, the transmission of the predetermined game information again can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of information transmission from the game machine.

(Contents of the invention relating to the acquisition limit device (security) described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that allow players to play using the game value they possess. Some of these machines have a forced termination mechanism that forcibly ends the game when the difference between the number of balls held, as indicated by the ball information, and the number of balls equivalent to the total amount borrowed reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 6318340). However, while forced termination of the game can ensure a healthy gaming experience, it does not take security into consideration and needs improvement.

(AM) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that allows a player to play using the gaming value owned by the player, the machine includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that perform predetermined controls (for example, input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, control related to the firing of gaming media), detection means (for example, first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detect predetermined abnormalities, and notification means (sound output device 9, image display device 70 The system comprises (73, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 76), and the control means can restrict the execution of a predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won in each prize slot and the predetermined value is met, or when the special game ends) when the value of specific information counted upon fulfillment of a counting condition (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). The detection means can detect the predetermined abnormality even after the execution of the predetermined control has been restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in security performance.

(The content of the invention relating to the processing order of various control contents and the implementation area)
In conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that use gaming media to conduct games. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a first control means for controlling the progress of the game and a second control means for controlling the assignment of game value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-083516). However, in gaming machines like those described in the above patent document, there was room for improvement in the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a game machine is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) having a first control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first control (game progress control), a second control area (out-area ROM) which is a different area from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second control (supplementary game control), a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-area RWM) which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control, wherein the control means is configured to fulfill the conditions for granting (game balls into various prize pockets) The system can execute the following processes: a value assignment process (payout control process, game ball count update process) that assigns game value (prize balls) based on the winnings; a first information update process (increase counter update process, maximum increase update process) that updates the first game information (increase counter, maximum increase) using the assigned game value information; a control stop process (acquisition limit device operation determination process) that stops the first control based on the first game information; a second information update process (display performance information calculation process, game machine performance information calculation process) that updates the second game information (display performance information, game machine performance information) using the assigned game value information; and an information output process (display control process, game machine information notification process) that outputs the second game information to the output target (frame control display 125, dedicated unit 170). The first and second information update processes are executed using the second control program (out-of-domain program). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the game machine.

A second configuration to solve the above problem is one in which a player can play the game using the game value (number of game balls) they own, and which includes: a first control area (ROM area within the area) that stores a first control program (program within the area) for performing first controls related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.); a second control area (ROM area outside the area) which is a different area from the first control area and stores a second control program (program outside the area) for performing second controls different from the first control (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.); a first RWM area (RWM area within the area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control; and a second RWM area (RWM area outside the area) which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. The system comprises: a first control means (main control board 110) having ) and a second control means (frame control board 120) having a third control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (game ball count update processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.) related to updating the game value owned by the player; a fourth control area (out-area ROM area) which is a different area from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (out-area program) for performing a fourth control (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, game machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) different from the third control; a third RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control; and a fourth RWM area (out-area RWM area) which is a different area from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control system used to operate the gaming machines.

A third configuration to solve the above problems is a launching means (launching device 92) for launching game media (game balls) using the game value (number of game balls) owned by the player, which allows the player to play the game, a first control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing a first control (start and stop output of launch permission signal) related to the launching of the game media, a second control area (out-area ROM area) which is a different area from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing a second control (increment counter update processing, maximum increment update processing, error control processing, etc.) different from the first control, a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second area which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control A first control means (main control board 110) having two RWM areas (outside the area RWM area), a third control area (inside the area ROM area) that stores a third control program (inside the area program) for performing third controls (game ball count update processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.) related to updating the game value owned by the player, and a fourth control area different from the third control area for performing fourth controls (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, game machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) different from the third control. The system includes a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (out-of-area ROM area) for storing a program (out-of-area program), a third RWM area (in-area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (out-of-area RWM area) that is different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

A fourth configuration to solve the above problems is a first control means (main control board 110) having a first control area (in-area ROM area) that can play games and stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first controls (input control processing, special feature special power control processing, normal feature normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.) related to the progress of the game; a second control area (out-area ROM area) which is a different area from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second controls (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.) different from the first control; a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control; and a second RWM area (out-area RWM area) which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control; and predetermined information (game machine settings A third control area (ROM area within the area) stores a third control program (program within the area) for performing third controls (game machine information notification processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.) for outputting location information, game machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, lending receipt result response, etc. to the outside of the game machine, and a fourth control program (program within the area) which is different from the third control area and performs fourth controls (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, game machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) different from the third controls. The system includes a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (out-of-area ROM area) for storing a program (out-of-area program), a third RWM area (in-area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (out-of-area RWM area) that is different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

A fifth configuration to solve the above problems is a first control area (ROM area within the area) that allows a player to play the game using the game value (number of game balls) they own, and which stores a first control program (program within the area) for performing first controls related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special feature special power control processing, normal feature normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (ROM area outside the area) that is different from the first control area and stores a second control program (program outside the area) for performing second controls different from the first control (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (RWM area within the area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (RWM area outside the area) that is different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. The control means (main control board 110), a third control area (area ROM area) that stores a third control program (area program) for performing a third control (display control processing) to notify the player of the game value owned by the player (display on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135), and a fourth control program in an area different from the third control area that performs a fourth control (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, game machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) different from the third control. The system includes a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (out-of-area ROM area) for storing RAM (out-of-area program), a third RWM area (in-area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (out-of-area RWM area) that is different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

A sixth configuration to solve the above problems is a system in which a player can play the game using the game value (number of game balls) they own, and which includes a first control area (ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first controls related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, general symbol general power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.), and an area different from the first control area that stores second controls different from the first control (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.). A first control means (main control board 110) having a second control area (out-of-area ROM area) for storing a second control program (out-of-area program) for performing the action, a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-of-area RWM area) which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control, and owned by the player A third control area (internal ROM area) that stores a third control program (internal program) for performing a third control (game ball count update processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.) related to updating the game value; a fourth control area (external ROM area) which is a different area from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (external program) for performing a fourth control different from the third control; and a third RWM that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control. In a gaming machine comprising a second control means (frame control board 120) having a region (an in-region RWM region) and a fourth RWM region (an out-region RWM region) that is different from the third RWM region and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control, communication between the first control means and the second control means is performed using a program stored in the first control region (in-region program) or a program stored in the third control region (in-region program). Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A seventh configuration to solve the above problems is a first control means (main control board 11) that allows a player to play the game using the game value (number of game balls) they own, and which stores a first control program (in-area ROM area) for performing first control (input control processing, special feature special power control processing, normal feature normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.) related to the progress of the game, a second control area (out-area ROM area) which is a different area from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second control (increase counter update processing, maximum increase update processing, error control processing, etc.) different from the first control, a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-area RWM area) which is a different area from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. 0) a third control area (ROM area within the area) that stores a third control program (program within the area) for performing a third control (game machine information notification processing) to output specific information (game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the game machine, and a fourth control area (outside the area) that is different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (program outside the area) for performing a fourth control (game machine installation information reception processing, game machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) to generate the specific information In a gaming machine comprising a second control means (frame control board 120) having a ROM area, a third RWM area (intra-area RWM area) for storing variable data updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (extra-area RWM area) different from the third RWM area for storing variable data updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control, the specific information is a predetermined calculation result related to the game value. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

An eighth configuration to solve the above problems includes a gaming machine capable of playing games, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that performs control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.); and a second control means (frame control board 120) that performs control related to the assignment of game value (game ball count update processing, etc.), wherein the first control means includes a first control (hall computer/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.); and a first control for transmitting the first information to the second control means. The second control means executes a second control (hall computer/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.), and the second control means executes a third control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.) for generating second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, lending receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine information reception processing, etc.) for receiving the first information, and a fifth control (gaming machine information notification processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information and the second information to an external device (dedicated unit 170, etc.) of the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control for operating the gaming machine.

A ninth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of playing games, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that performs control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.); and a second control means (frame control board 120) that performs control related to the assignment of game value (game ball count update processing, etc.). The first control means executes a first control (hall computer/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall computer/fraud monitoring information, etc.), and a second control (hall computer/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information to the second control means. The second control means then executes the second information The system executes a third control (receiving gaming machine installation information, calculating gaming machine performance information, counting notifications, lending result responses, etc.) for generating (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notifications, lending result responses, etc.), a fourth control (receiving gaming machine installation information, receiving gaming machine information, etc.) for receiving the first information, a fifth control (notifying gaming machine information, etc.) for transmitting the first and second information to an external device (dedicated unit 170, etc.) outside the gaming machine, and a sixth control (counting notifications, lending result responses, etc.) for transmitting third information (counting notifications, lending result responses, etc.) generated by the second control means that is different from the second information to an external device. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of the control required to operate the gaming machine.

A tenth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of playing a game by launching a game medium (game ball) into a game area. This configuration includes: a launching means (launching device 92) for launching the game medium into the game area; a first control means (main control board 110) for performing control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special feature special power control processing, general feature general power control processing, acquisition limit device operation determination processing, etc.); and a second control means (frame control board 120) for performing control related to the granting of game value (prize balls) (game ball count update processing, etc.). The first and second control means are capable of permitting the launching of the game medium (outputting a launch permission signal), and the launching means can launch the game medium when permission is granted by the first and second control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

(The invention relates to an example of a presentation when the number of game balls owned by the player is counted.)
In conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that use a gaming medium to play games. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a first control means capable of updating and storing the game value owned by the player and performing a counting process to move the game value outside the gaming machine, and a second control means that performs game-related performance control (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-083516). However, in gaming machines like the one described in the above patent document, there was room for improvement in the performance when counting the game value.

To solve the above problem, a first configuration is provided for a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value (number of game balls) owned by the player. This configuration includes: a first control means (frame control board 120) capable of updating and storing the game value owned by the player and performing a counting process (game ball counting process) to move the game value outside the gaming machine; a second control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the game's effects; and an operation unit (counting button 20) for instructing the first control means to perform the counting process. The performance control means can execute predetermined effects (counting notification effect, achievement effect) during the execution of the counting process. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction through the effects used when counting the game value.

(Contents of the invention relating to the relationship between the activation notification of the acquisition limit device and the specific sound output)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that can assign game value to the player depending on the outcome of the game. Some of these gaming machines can stop the game's progress control according to the amount of game value assigned to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2023-256671). However, gaming machines like those described in the above patent document have the problem that the enjoyment of the game decreases due to the stopping of the game's progress control.

(i) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the machine includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The system comprises a control board (130) and a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound. The performance control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the performance symbol becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area) during the first variation performance (variation performance pattern 5), and is capable of not outputting the specific sound when the performance symbol becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in the predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area) during the second variation performance (variation performance pattern 8). Furthermore, if the game progress control stops during the execution of the first variation performance, the output of the specific sound can be restricted. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(b) As a second configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, the configuration includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound. The performance control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area) during the variation performance. The performance symbols include normal performance symbols (symbols showing the numbers "1" through "9") and specific performance symbols (pseudo-symbols) that differ from the normal performance symbols and can suggest the execution of a specific performance. The specific sound includes a first specific sound output when the normal performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) and a second specific sound output when the specific performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped). The output of the first specific sound can be restricted if the game progress control stops during the execution of the variation performance. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(h) As a third configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, the configuration includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound. The performance control means is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area) during the variation performance. The performance symbols include normal performance symbols (symbols showing the numbers "1" through "9") and specific performance symbols (pseudo-symbols) that differ from the normal performance symbols and can suggest the execution of a specific performance. The specific sound includes a first specific sound output when the normal performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) and a second specific sound output when the specific performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped). The output of the second specific sound can be restricted if the game progress control stops during the execution of the variation performance. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(ii) A fourth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound, wherein the performance control means comprises a first performance mode (performance mode A) and the first performance mode The system is capable of controlling a second performance mode (performance mode B) different from the first mode, and in the variation performance, it can output a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the performance symbol becomes recognizable (temporarily stopped) in a predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area). It can output different specific sounds when the first variation performance (variation performance pattern 1) is executed in the first performance mode and when the first variation performance (variation performance pattern 1) is executed in the second performance mode, and can output the same specific sound when the second variation performance (variation performance pattern 6) is executed in the first performance mode and when the second variation performance (variation performance pattern 6) is executed in the second performance mode. Furthermore, it can limit the output of the specific sound if the game progress control stops during the execution of a variation performance that outputs the specific sound. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(e) A fifth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that causes a plurality of performance symbols to be displayed in a display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound, wherein the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance mode A) and a second performance mode (performance mode B) different from the first performance mode, and the variation performance Furthermore, the system is capable of outputting a specific sound (temporary stop sound) when the performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) within a predetermined display area (the performance symbol 70a display area). The performance symbols include normal performance symbols (symbols showing the numbers "1" through "9") and specific performance symbols (pseudo-symbols) that differ from the normal performance symbols and can suggest the execution of a specific performance. The system is capable of outputting different specific sounds depending on whether the normal performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) during the first variation performance or whether the specific performance symbols become recognizable (temporarily stopped) during the first variation performance. The system is capable of outputting the same specific sound depending on whether the second variation performance (variation performance pattern 6) is executed in the first performance mode or in the second variation performance (variation performance pattern 6) mode. The system is also capable of limiting the output of the specific sound if the game's progress control stops during the execution of a variation performance that outputs the specific sound. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(Content of the invention related to the reach line effect)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that can execute a reach animation during a variation animation depending on the result of a determination of whether or not to execute a special game. Among such gaming machines, there were some that could execute a reach line display animation when a reach was formed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-83746). However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent document, further improvements are desired in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(h) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means can control a first performance mode (performance mode A) and a second performance mode (performance mode B) that is different from the first performance mode, and can display different background images (performance mode A background image, performance mode B background image) in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. The system is capable of, in the aforementioned variation effect, making the effect symbols recognizable (temporarily stopped) in multiple display areas (left effect symbol 70a display area, right effect symbol 70a display area), thereby enabling the execution of a reach effect that anticipates the execution of the special game. In the reach effect, a specific image (reach line image) can be displayed across the recognizable effect symbols. A common specific image ("REACH" image) can be displayed whether the reach effect is executed during the execution of the first effect mode or the second effect mode. When the specific image is displayed, an emphasis effect (reach formation operation) using the recognizable effect symbols can be executed. This enhances the enjoyment of the game.

(t) As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that varies the display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance mode A) and a second performance mode (performance mode B) different from the first performance mode, and is capable of displaying different background images (performance mode A background image, performance mode B background image) in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. In the aforementioned variation effect, the performance symbols can be displayed in a recognizable state (temporarily stopped) across multiple display areas (left performance symbol 70a display area, right performance symbol 70a display area), thereby enabling a reach effect that anticipates the execution of the special game. In the reach effect, a specific image (reach line image) can be displayed across the recognizable performance symbols. Different specific images ("REACH" image, "CHANCE" image) can be displayed depending on whether the reach effect is executed during the execution of the first effect mode or the second effect mode. When the specific image is displayed, an emphasis effect (reach formation operation) using the recognizable performance symbols can be executed. This enhances the enjoyment of the game.

(h) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that causes multiple effect symbols to be displayed in a display area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound, wherein the effect control means is capable of controlling a first effect mode (effect mode A) and a second effect mode (effect mode B) that is different from the first effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are different The system is capable of outputting variable background music (variable BGM 1, variable BGM 2), and in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a reach performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of the special game by making the performance symbols recognizable (temporarily stopped) in multiple display areas (left performance symbol 70a display area, right performance symbol 70a display area). When the reach performance is executed, it is possible to output a specific sound ("Reach" sound) that is different from the variable BGM, and it is possible to output the same specific sound when the reach performance is executed in the first performance mode and when the reach performance is executed in the second performance mode. When the specific sound is output, it is possible to perform an emphasis performance (reach formation operation) using the performance symbols that are recognizable. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(i) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that causes multiple effect symbols to be displayed in a variation area of a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means; and a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting sound, wherein the effect control means is capable of controlling a first effect mode (effect mode A) and a second effect mode (effect mode B) different from the first effect mode, and different variation BGM (variation BG The system is capable of outputting M1 and variable BGM2, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a reach performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of the special game by making the performance symbols recognizable (temporarily stopped) in multiple display areas (left performance symbol 70a display area, right performance symbol 70a display area). When the reach performance is executed, it is possible to output a specific sound ("Reach" sound) different from the variable BGM, and different specific sounds ("Reach" sound, "Chance" sound) can be output depending on whether the reach performance is executed in the first performance mode or the second performance mode. When the specific sound is output, it is possible to execute an emphasis performance (reach formation operation) using the recognizable performance symbols. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Content of the invention relating to the relationship between the activation notification of the acquisition limit device and specific light emission)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that can assign game value to the player depending on the outcome of the game. Some of these gaming machines can stop the game's progress control according to the amount of game value assigned to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2023-256671). However, gaming machines like those described in the above patent document have the problem that the desire to play decreases due to the stopping of the game's progress control.

(Nu) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the machine includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) capable of executing a variable effect that displays multiple effect symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The system comprises a performance control means (performance control board 130) and light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light) during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period). If power is restored while the game progress control is not stopped, the light-emitting means can then emit specific light (rainbow-colored light). However, if power is restored while the game progress control is stopped, the ability to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light) is restricted. This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

(L) As a second configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the configuration includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) that displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The system comprises a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing variable performance effects, and light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light) during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period). When a predetermined abnormality occurs, the light-emitting means can emit a predetermined light (abnormality notification light). When the game progress control stops, the specific light emission is restricted (T5' in Figure 188), but the predetermined light emission remains possible (T6 in Figure 189). This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

(o) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance control board 13) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The system comprises (0) and light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), and the performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light) during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period), and when a predetermined abnormality occurs, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit a predetermined light (abnormality notification light). If the game progress control stops while the specific light emission is being performed, it is possible to terminate the execution of the specific light emission (T5' in Figure 188), and if the game progress control stops while the predetermined light emission is being performed, it is possible to continue the execution of the predetermined light emission (T6 in Figure 189). This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

(Content of the invention relating to the relationship between warning indicators and specific light emission)
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that have a display mechanism capable of issuing warnings to prompt players to pay attention to certain things. Some of these gaming machines are capable of issuing warnings during the ending sequence of a jackpot game and during a second standby state when no game is being played (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-189663). However, gaming machines like those described in the above patent document had the problem that the execution of warnings reduced the players' motivation to play.

(W) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the configuration includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, The system includes light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76), and the performance control means is capable of displaying a warning message (addiction to excessive play) to alert the player during a predetermined period (jackpot ending period, customer waiting demo performance period). When the warning message is not displayed during the predetermined period (T5-T6 in Figure 186, T7-T8 in Figure 184), the light-emitting means can be made to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light). When the warning message is displayed during the predetermined period (T7- in Figure 186, T8- in Figure 184), the ability to emit specific light (rainbow-colored light) from the light-emitting means can be restricted. This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

(c) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) that displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The system comprises a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing variable performance effects, and light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76). The performance control means is capable of executing a warning alert (addiction to excessive play) to prompt the player to pay attention to a predetermined issue. This warning alert can be executed during a first period (jackpot ending period) and a second period (customer waiting demo performance period) distinct from the first period. When the warning alert is executed during the first period (T7 onwards in Figure 186), the light-emitting means can be restricted from emitting specific light (rainbow-colored light). This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

(Contents of the invention related to rainbow emission)
In this context, some conventional gaming machines are capable of more effectively performing the so-called rainbow effect (rainbow light emission) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2022-075900). However, in gaming machines like those described in the above patent document, there was room for further improvement in effectively performing the rainbow light emission.

(n) As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the configuration includes: an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the first start opening) or a second acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the second start opening); a judgment means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game to a specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; an effect control means (effect control board 130) that can execute a game effect that causes the effect symbols to change and be displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means; and a light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 7 6) The system comprises the following: The performance control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow emission) during the execution of the game performance (during the variation performance). The game performance includes a first game performance (variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The light-emitting means is capable of emitting rainbow light in both the case where the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and the case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state. The number of types of emission patterns in the rainbow emission is greater when the first game performance is executed in the normal game state than when the first game performance is executed in the specific game state. This allows for the effective execution of rainbow emission.

(e) As a second configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the configuration includes: an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the first start opening) or a second acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the second start opening); a judgment means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game to a specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; an effect control means (effect control board 130) that can execute a game effect that causes the effect symbols to change and be displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means; and a light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76 The system comprises a performance control means capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow emission) during the execution of the game performance (during the variation performance). The game performance includes a first game performance (variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The light-emitting means can emit rainbow light in both the case where the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and the case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state. The number of types of color movement directions constituting the rainbow emission is greater when the first game performance is executed in the normal game state than when the first game performance is executed in the specific game state. This allows for the effective execution of rainbow emission.

(Yo) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that causes the effect symbols to change according to the determination result of the determination means; a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17) capable of emitting light; and an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player, wherein the effect control means performs a waiting effect (waiting demo effect) in a waiting state where the variation display is not executed. The system is capable of executing (A), and the light-emitting means can emit rainbow light (rainbow emission) during the execution of the variable animation and the customer waiting animation. The rainbow emission in the customer waiting animation is restricted from being initiated based on the operation of the control means (pressing the animation button 17 during the customer waiting demo animation A will not cause rainbow emission), while the rainbow emission in the variable animation can be initiated based on the operation of the control means (pressing the animation button 17 during the successful outcome animation of the variable animation will cause rainbow emission; pressing the animation button 17 during the hold button animation will display a rainbow icon; pressing the animation button 17 during the development to an SP reach will cause rainbow emission; and long-pressing the hidden button during an SP reach will cause rainbow emission). This allows for the effective execution of rainbow emission.

(T) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that changes the display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means; a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17) capable of emitting light; and an operation means (effect button 17) capable of being operated by the player, wherein the operation means comprises a first operation means and the first operation means (effect button 17 The system includes a second operating means (launch handle 15) distinct from the first operating means, and the performance control means is capable of executing a customer-waiting performance (customer-waiting demo performance A) in a customer-waiting state where the variable display is not executed. It is also capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow emission) during the execution of the variable performance and the customer-waiting performance. The rainbow emission in the customer-waiting performance can be terminated by fulfilling a start condition based on the operation of the second operating means (the rainbow emission ends when a start-up occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15), while the rainbow emission in the variable performance is restricted from being terminated based on the operation of the first operating means (the rainbow emission in the variable performance does not end by pressing the performance button 17). This allows for the effective execution of rainbow emission.

(R) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that causes the performance symbols to change according to the determination result of the determination means; light-emitting means (frame performance lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable performance device 77, LED of performance button 17) that can emit light; and operation means (performance button 17) that can be operated by the player, wherein the operation means comprises a first operation means and a second operation means (launch handle) different from the first operation means (performance button 17), and the performance control means is capable of executing a waiting performance (waiting demo performance A) in a waiting state where the variation display is not executed, and during the execution of the variation performance and during the execution of the waiting performance In this configuration, the light-emitting means is capable of producing a rainbow emission (rainbow emission). The rainbow emission in the customer waiting performance is restricted from being initiated based on the operation of the first operation means (pressing the performance button 17 during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance A will not produce a rainbow emission), but it can be terminated by the fulfillment of the starting conditions based on the operation of the second operation means (the rainbow emission ends when a starting win occurs based on the operation of the launch handle 15). The rainbow emission in the variation performance is also characterized by being able to be initiated based on the operation of the first operation means (pressing the performance button 17 during the success performance of the variation performance will produce a rainbow emission; pressing the performance button 17 during the hold button performance will display a rainbow icon; pressing the performance button 17 during development to an SP reach will produce a rainbow emission; and long-pressing the hidden button during an SP reach will produce a rainbow emission), but it cannot be terminated based on the operation of the first operation means (the rainbow emission in the variation performance does not end by pressing the performance button 17). This allows for the suitable execution of rainbow emission.

(S) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that changes the display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means; a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17) capable of emitting light; and an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player, wherein the effect control means emits rainbow-colored light from the light-emitting means. The device is capable of emitting light (rainbow emission), and this rainbow emission includes a first rainbow emission (rainbow emission during the variation effect) that can be started based on the operation of the operating means, and a second rainbow emission (rainbow emission during the customer waiting demo effect A) that has different starting conditions from the first rainbow emission. The first rainbow emission uses more light-emitting means than the second rainbow emission (the rainbow emission during the customer waiting demo effect A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, or the LEDs of the effect button 17, but the rainbow emission during the variation effect uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, the LEDs of the effect button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15). This allows for the effective execution of rainbow emission.

(c) A seventh configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the first start opening) or a second acquisition condition (entry of a ball into the second start opening); and a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information. The system comprises a main control board 110, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game to a specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing game effects that vary the display of effect symbols on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and a light-emitting means (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) capable of emitting light, wherein the effect control means executes the game effects During the game (during the variation animation), the light-emitting means can be made to emit rainbow light. The game animation consists of a first game animation (a variation animation corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game animation (a variation animation corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition. The second animation (between the decision animation and the final stop) can be executed after the first animation (between the start of the variation animation and the final animation). The light-emitting means can emit rainbow light depending on whether the first game animation is executed in the normal game state or in the specific game state. The ease with which the rainbow light is executed in the first animation differs between the normal game state and the specific game state. This allows for the optimal execution of the rainbow light.

(T) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that changes the display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means; a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17); and an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player, wherein the effect control means is capable of causing the light-emitting means to emit rainbow light (rainbow emission). The rainbow light emission comprises a first rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the variation effect) in which a specific effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is performed using the operating means, and a second rainbow light emission (rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A) in which the specific effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is not performed using the operating means. The first rainbow light emission has a greater number of light-emitting means capable of performing the rainbow light emission than the second rainbow light emission (the rainbow light emission during the customer waiting demo effect A does not use the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, or the LEDs of the effect button 17, but the rainbow light emission during the variation effect uses the image display devices 70-73, the LEDs of the movable effect device 77, the LEDs of the effect button 17, and the LEDs of the launch handle 15). This allows for the effective execution of the rainbow light emission.

(N) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that changes the display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means; and a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17), wherein the effect control means controls the variation effect at a predetermined timing ( For example, in a decisive performance, it is possible to notify the result of the judgment, and when notifying that the special game will be executed at a predetermined timing, it is possible to perform a first rainbow illumination (rainbow effect display) by causing the first light-emitting means (image display devices 70-73) to emit rainbow light, and a second rainbow illumination (rainbow illumination in each lighting device) by causing the second light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17), which are different from the first light-emitting means, to emit rainbow light, characterized in that the timing of the end of the first rainbow illumination and the timing of the end of the second rainbow illumination are different. This allows for the effective execution of rainbow illumination.

(N) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of executing a variation effect that changes the display of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means; and a light-emitting means (frame effect lamp 10c, panel LED 5b, image display devices 70-73, LED of movable effect device 77, LED of effect button 17), wherein the effect control means, during the execution of the special game, The aforementioned light-emitting means is capable of producing rainbow-colored light (rainbow emission), and during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a first instruction sequence (displaying both an image 70rs prompting right-hand shooting and an image 70rb prompting right-hand shooting) and a second instruction sequence (displaying only the image 70rs prompting right-hand shooting, without displaying the image 70rb prompting right-hand shooting) that instructs the operation of the operation means in a manner different from the first instruction sequence. Furthermore, the rainbow emission in the predetermined light-emitting means (first image display device 70) is more easily executed when the second instruction sequence is executed than when the first instruction sequence is executed. This allows for the suitable execution of rainbow emission.

(a) As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, the machine comprises: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance that causes the performance symbols to change according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is a display means (image display device 70-73) The system can display two pieces of information: first information relating to the granting of game value (the expected number of game values to be granted in a special game), and second information different from the first information relating to the granting of game value (the number of game values granted during a special game, the cumulative number of game values granted when special games occur consecutively, the cumulative number of game values granted when a predetermined number is reached, and the cumulative number of game values displayed in the results). The ease with which rainbow color display is performed differs between the first and second pieces of information. This allows for the effective execution of rainbow illumination.

(M) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stopping means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the special game is a first special game (a 4-round jackpot corresponding to the special symbol 03), and There is a second special game (a 10-round jackpot corresponding to special symbol 02) which is different from the first special game. The performance control means is capable of performing a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means. The display means is capable of displaying first information related to the first special game ("〇△Bonus" display) and second information related to the second special game ("Super 〇△Bonus" display). The first information can be limited to rainbow color display, but the second information can be displayed in rainbow colors. If the pre-notification is performed while the second information is being displayed in rainbow colors, the rainbow color display of the second information will not end due to the execution of the pre-notification. This allows for the suitable execution of rainbow light emission.

(Contents of the invention that performs notification related to the operation of the acquisition limit device)
Some conventional gaming machines were capable of assigning game value to players based on the outcome of the game. Some of these gaming machines were capable of stopping the game's progress control according to the amount of game value assigned to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2023-256671). However, gaming machines like those described in the above patent document had the problem that the enjoyment of the game decreased due to the stopping of the game's progress control.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game includes: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is The system can be controlled between two performance modes: a first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A) and a second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B). It can perform a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. It can display the performance symbols in a first variation path during the variation performance in the first performance mode, and display the performance symbols in a second variation path during the variation performance in the second performance mode. The pre-notification can be performed in the same manner (design, text layout, display position, sound, etc.) during both the variation performance in the first and second performance modes. This enhances the enjoyment of the game.

◆A second configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means comprises a first performance mode (for example, performance mode A) and a second performance mode (for example, performance Mode B) is controllable, and the display means can display a pre-notification image (pre-notification image CZ for pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that notifies that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. The game can display the performance symbols in a first variation path during the variation performance in the first performance mode, and the game can display the performance symbols in a second variation path during the variation performance in the second performance mode. When the performance symbols switch from the first variation path to the second variation path, a switching performance (mode switching performance) that restricts the visibility of the performance symbols can be executed. Even when the restriction of the performance symbols is imposed by the execution of the switching performance, the visible display of the pre-notification image can continue. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A third configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is the first performance The system can be controlled between a first mode (e.g., performance mode A) and a second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B). It can output a variable background music (BGM) during the execution of the variable performance. It can perform a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. It can output different types of the variable BGM during the variable performance in the first performance mode and during the variable performance in the second performance mode. It can perform the pre-notification in the same manner (design of the pre-notification image CZ, text placement, display position, sound, etc.) during the variable performance in the first and second performance modes. This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fourth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stopping means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means The stage can be controlled between a first performance mode (e.g., performance mode A) and a second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B). It can display a background image during the execution of the variation performance. It can perform a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. It is possible to display different types of background images during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode. It is possible to perform the pre-notification in the same manner (design, text layout, display position, sound, etc.) during the variation performance in the first and second performance modes. This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A fifth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means includes a first performance mode (for example, performance The system can be controlled between a first mode (A) and a second performance mode (e.g., performance mode B). In the variation performance, it is possible to have the performance symbols perform a performance action (pre-variation action) before displaying the variation symbols. It is possible to perform a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. It is possible to perform different types of performance actions during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode. It is possible to perform the pre-notification in the same manner (design, text placement, display position, etc.) during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode. This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A sixth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means has a first performance mode (for example, performance mode A) and It is possible to control the game through a second performance mode (for example, performance mode B), and in the variation performance, it is possible to make the performance symbols perform performance actions (pre-stop actions, same-color chance effect) before stopping the performance symbols, and it is possible to perform a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means, and it is possible to perform different types of performance actions during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode, and it is possible to perform the pre-notification in the same manner (design, text arrangement, display position, etc.) during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode. This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A seventh configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) that displays multiple performance symbols according to the determination result of the determination means. The system includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that displays a variable pattern. The performance control means can execute specific performances (mode switching performance, development performance, eye-catching performance, etc.) that change the performance pattern during the execution of the variable performance. The display means can display a pre-notification image (pre-notification image CZ for the activation of the acquisition limit device) that notifies the system that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. While the visibility of the performance pattern is restricted during the execution of the specific performance, the pre-notification image remains visible. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game.

◆An eighth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: an operating means (performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player; a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a pre-determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means; a progress stop means (main control board 110) that can stop the progress control of the game (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means that can execute a variable performance by displaying multiple performance symbols in a variable manner on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The system includes a stage (performance control board 130), and the performance control means is capable of executing one or more pre-announcement performances (continuous announcement performances, icon change performances, etc.) across the variation performances according to the judgment result of the pre-determination means, and is capable of executing pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the progress control of the game may be stopped by the progress stop means, and is capable of switching the variation path of the performance symbols between a first variation path (e.g., variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., variation path of performance mode B) without operation of the operation means, and while switching the variation path of the performance symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted during the execution of the pre-announcement performances across multiple variation performances, it is possible to execute the pre-notification. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A ninth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: an operating means (performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player; a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a pre-determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means; and the assignment of the above to the player from the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (MY=0). The system includes a progress stop means (main control board 110) that can stop the progress control of the game (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the value amount of the game value (MY = 95000), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that can execute a variation effect that causes a display means (image display device) to display multiple effect symbols in a variable manner according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the effect control means can execute a pre-announcement effect (continuous予告 effect, icon change effect, etc.) spanning one or more of the variation effects according to the judgment result of the pre-determination means. Furthermore, the display means can display notification images related to the cessation of the game's progress control by the progress stopping means (pre-notification image CZ, acquisition limit device operation notification image), the variation path of the performance symbols can be switched between a first variation path (for example, the variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (for example, the variation path of performance mode B) without operation of the operation means, and the notification image can be switched from the first mode display to the second mode display (for example, from the pre-notification image CZ "remaining approximately 5000" to "remaining approximately 4500"). It is possible to switch between modes (e.g., switching from a pre-announcement image CZ to an operation announcement image), and while switching the variation path of the effect symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted during the execution of the pre-announcement effect across multiple variation effects, it is possible to switch the announcement image from the first mode display to the second mode display (e.g., switching from the pre-announcement image CZ "approximately 5000 remaining" to "approximately 4500 remaining", switching from the pre-announcement image CZ to an operation announcement image). This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A tenth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: an operating means (performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player; a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a pre-determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means; a progress stop means (main control board 110) that can stop the progress control of the game (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance that can execute a variable performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The system includes a control means (performance control board 130), which, according to the determination result of the pre-determination means, can execute pre-announcement performances (continuous announcement performances, icon change performances, etc.) across one or more of the variation performances; can execute a specific notification (notification of operation of the acquisition limit device) that notifies that the progress control of the game has been stopped by the progress stop means; can switch the variation path of the performance symbols between a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode B) without operation of the operation means; and while switching the variation path of the performance symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted during the execution of the pre-announcement performances across multiple variation performances, it is possible to execute the specific notification. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration to solve the above problem, a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game comprises: movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) that can operate in a predetermined manner; determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stopping means (main control board 110) that can stop the progress control of the game (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) that can execute a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means. The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a first action performance of the movable member (such as a pre-announcement action performance) and a second action performance of the movable member (such as an action performance during a pseudo-consecutive win, an action performance during a development performance, or an action performance upon a successful win) in the variation performance. It is also capable of providing advance notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. Furthermore, it is possible to switch the variation path of the performance symbols between a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode B). While the execution of the first action performance is restricted from switching the variation path of the performance symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path, it is possible to perform the advance notification. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game.

◆A twelfth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) that can operate in a predetermined manner; determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; and a game progression control based on the value amount (MY = 95000) of the gaming value assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0) The system includes a progress stopping means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the game (activating the acquisition limit device), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner according to the judgment result of the judgment means, wherein the performance control means can execute a first action performance of the movable member (pre-reading action performance, etc.) and a second action performance of the movable member (action performance during pseudo-consecutive wins, action performance during development performances, action performance when a win is successful, etc.). The display means is capable of displaying notification images related to the cessation of the game's progress control by the progress stopping means (pre-notification image CZ, acquisition limit device operation notification image), the variation path of the performance symbols is switchable between a first variation path (for example, the variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (for example, the variation path of performance mode B), and the notification image is switchable from a first mode display to a second mode display different from the first mode display (for example, from pre-notification image CZ "Remaining approximately 5000" to "Remaining It is possible to switch to "approximately 4500 remaining," switch from the pre-notification image CZ to the operation notification image, etc. While switching the variation path of the performance symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path is restricted during the execution of the first operation performance, it is possible to switch the notification image from the first mode display to the second mode display (for example, switching from the pre-notification image CZ "approximately 5000 remaining" to "approximately 4500 remaining," switching from the pre-notification image CZ to the operation notification image, etc.). This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: movable members (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b, etc.) that can operate in a predetermined manner; determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; progress stopping means (main control board 110) that can stop the progress control of the game (activate the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and performance control means (performance control board 130) that can execute a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, The aforementioned performance control means is capable of executing a first action performance of the movable member (such as a pre-reading action performance) and a second action performance of the movable member (such as an action performance during a pseudo-consecutive win, an action performance during a development performance, or an action performance upon a successful win). It is also capable of executing a specific notification (an operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that indicates the game's progress control has been stopped by the progress stopping means. Furthermore, it is possible to switch the variation path of the performance symbols between a first variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode A) and a second variation path (e.g., the variation path of performance mode B). While the execution of the first action performance is restricted from switching the variation path of the performance symbols from the first variation path to the second variation path, it is possible to execute the specific notification. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game.

◆A 14th configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning gaming value (gaming medium, gaming medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: an operating member that the player can operate (performance button 17, etc.); a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of gaming value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The system includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that displays multiple performance symbols in a variable manner. The performance control means is capable of executing operation performances (dialogue announcement performance, pseudo-consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.) that perform predetermined performances in response to operations on the operation means during the operation validity period of the variable performance. It is also capable of executing a pre-notification (pre-operation notification of the acquisition limit device) that notifies the system that the game's progress control may be stopped by the progress stopping means. This pre-notification can be executed during the operation validity period related to the operation performance. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game.

◆A 15th configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the result of the game, comprising: an operating member (performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player; a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variation performance in which a display means (image display device) displays multiple performance symbols in a variation manner according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is capable of executing an operation performance (dialogue announcement performance, pseudo-consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.) that performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operating member during the operation valid period that occurs in the variation performance, and the display means The system can display notification images related to the cessation of the game's progress control by the progress stopping means (pre-notification image CZ, acquisition limit device operation notification image), and can switch the notification images from a first mode display to a second mode display different from the first mode display (for example, switching from the pre-notification image CZ "remaining approximately 5000" to "remaining approximately 4500", switching from the pre-notification image CZ to the operation notification image, etc.), and can display the operation effects (dialogue notification effect, pseudo-consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect). During the effective period of the operation related to the aforementioned (decisive animation, etc.), switching the variation path of the animation symbols from the first variation path (e.g., variation path of animation mode A) to the second variation path (e.g., variation path of animation mode B) is restricted. However, it is possible to switch the notification image from the first mode display to the second mode display (e.g., switching from the pre-notification image CZ "Remaining approximately 5000" to "Remaining approximately 4500", switching from the pre-notification image CZ to the operation notification image, etc.). This makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

◆A 16th configuration to solve the above problems is a gaming machine capable of assigning game value (game medium, game medium data) to a player according to the results of the game, comprising: an operating member that the player can operate (performance button 17, etc.); a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a progress stop means (main control board 110) capable of stopping the progress control of the game (activating the acquisition limit device) according to the amount of game value (MY = 95000) assigned to the player from the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY = 0); and a display means (image) according to the determination result of the determination means. The system includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance by displaying multiple performance symbols in a variable manner on a display device. The performance control means is capable of executing operation performances (dialogue予告演出, pseudo-consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.) that are performed in response to operations on the operation means during the operation validity period of the variable performance. It is also capable of executing a specific notification (notification of operation of the acquisition limit device) that indicates the game's progress control has been stopped by the progress stop means. This specific notification can be executed during the operation validity period related to the operation performance. This configuration enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the game machine 1 does not execute the display of the first special symbol variation and the display of the second special symbol variation simultaneously (in parallel), with the display of the second special symbol variation taking priority. However, the game machine may also be designed so that the display of the first special symbol variation and the display of the second special symbol variation are executed simultaneously (in parallel), or the display of the first special symbol variation and the display of the second special symbol variation may be executed in the order in which the game balls enter the first start port 45 and the second start port 47.

Furthermore, while the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to remain in a time-saving game state or a probability-changing game state until the special symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the second and third jackpot games), it may also be controlled to remain in a time-saving game state or a probability-changing game state until the normal symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the second and third jackpot games).

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines (managed gaming machines) that circulate and reuse gaming balls, but can also be used in pachinko gaming machines that do not circulate and reuse gaming balls (general pachinko machines). It can also be used in reel-type gaming machines (general slot machines) that award a predetermined amount of medals to the player when a winning symbol stops and is displayed on an active line during gameplay using medals. It can also be used in reel-type gaming machines (managed gaming machines) that award a predetermined amount of game value (virtual medals) to the player when a winning symbol stops and is displayed on an active line during gameplay using game value (virtual medals) (the awarding condition is met). Moreover, it can be used in Jankyu gaming machines and Arrange Ball gaming machines.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered in all respects to be illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than by the foregoing description, and all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims are intended to be included.

1. Gaming machine 5. Game board 17. Performance buttons 20. Counting buttons 43. General prize slots 44. General gate 45. First start slot 47. Second start slot 50. Big prize slot 70. First image display device 71. Second image display device 72. Third image display device 73. Fourth image display device 110. Main control board 110a. Main CPU.
120 Frame control board 120a Frame control CPU
121 Game ball count clear switch 122 Ball removal switch 123 Error clear switch 125 Frame control display 130 Performance control board 130a SubCPU
135 Game ball count display unit 170 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can assign game value to the player according to the outcome of the game,
A determination means capable of determining the determination information obtained based on the fulfillment of the acquisition conditions ,
A storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as reserved storage,
A means for stopping the game that updates specific information according to the value of the game value assigned to the player , and stops the game's progress control when the specific information reaches a specific value ,
The system includes a performance control means capable of executing a variable performance by displaying a plurality of performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means,
The aforementioned performance control means is
It can be controlled between a first performance mode and a second performance mode.
A background image can be displayed during the execution of the aforementioned variation effect.
In the aforementioned variation effect, a specific sound effect can be executed that outputs a specific sound during a stop indication period that suggests the effect symbols will stop being displayed.
It is possible to perform advance notification to inform that the game's progress control may be stopped by the aforementioned progress stopping means.
It is possible to display different types of background images during the variation animation in the first animation mode and during the variation animation in the second animation mode.
It is possible to perform the pre-notification in the same manner during the variation performance in the first performance mode and during the variation performance in the second performance mode.
The aforementioned display symbols include a first symbol and a second symbol that is different from the first symbol.
It is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the first symbol will be displayed in the first performance mode different from the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in the second performance mode.
In the first performance mode, it is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period different for the losing variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the losing variation performance in which the reach performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to make the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in the first performance mode and the specific sound output during the stop indication period that suggests the second symbol will be displayed in the second performance mode common to both .